Gildersleeve's Latin grammar *// This is from http://www.archive.org/. *// Text is corrected as much as possible for my purpose.

*// Numbers in [ ] are book pages. *// Latin phrases and words which are printed bold in the book are not bold here . *// So,those which I found are placed here at left side with one tab space. *// Japanese characters written by me are sometimes intermingled.

GILDERSLEEVE'S LATIN GRAMMAR THIRD EDITION,REVISED AND ENLARGED BY B.L.GILDERSLEEVE PROFESSOR OF GREEK IN THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY AND GONZALEZ LODGE ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF LATIN IN BRYN MAWR COLLEGE MACMILLAN AND C O.,LIMITED 1903 PREFACE. THE first edition of this LATIN GRAMMAR appeared in 1867,the second in 1872;the third edition,carefully revised and very much enlarged,is herewith presented to the public. In the preparation of this third edition the office of the senior co llaborator has been chiefly advisory,except in the Syntax.In the syntax nearly e verything that pertains to the history of usage has been brought together by Pro fessor LODGE;but for all deviations from the theory of former editions we bear a joint responsibility. A manual that has held its place,however modest,for more than a quarter of a cen tury,hardly needs an elaborate exposition of the methods followed;but as the new grammar embraces a multitude of details that were not taken up in the old gramm ar,it has been thought fit that Professor LODGE should indicate the sources of t he notes with which he has enriched the original work. B.L.GlLDERSLEEVE. GONZALEZ LODGE. August 1,1895. THE following supplementary note may serve to embody a partial bibliography of t he more important works used in this revision,and some necessary explanations of the method : Fairly complete bibliographies of works on Latin Etymology and Syntax may be fou nd in REISIG'S Vorlesungen uber lateinische Sprachwissenschaft(new edition,by HA GEN,SCHMALZ,and LANDGRAF,1881-1888),and in the Lateinische Grammatik of STOLZ an d SCHMALZ (in MULLER'S Handbuch der klassischen Altertumswissenschaft; 3d editio n,1890).Important also are the Grammars of KUHNER(1877,1878) * and ROBY(1881,188 2);though many statements in both,but especially in the former,must be corrected in the light of more recent study.Some indications of more modern theories may

be found in -------------------------------------------------------------------* A new Historical Grammar,by STOLZ,SCHMALZ,LANDGRAF,and WAQENEK,was announced by TKUBNEK in 1891 iv PREFACE. the Erlaeuterungen zur lateinischen Grammatik of DEECKE(1893). Many matters of i mportance both in Etymology and Syntax are treated in the Archiv fur lateinische Lexicographie,and the constructions with individual words are often well discus sed in KREBS'Antibarbarus der lateinischen Sprache(6th edition,by SCHMALZ,1886). For the accentuation and pronunciation of Latin we have also CORSSEN'S Aussprach e,Vocalismus und Betonung der lateinischen Sprache(1868,1870),and SEELMANN'S Die Aussprache des Latein(1885). For the Etymology we must refer to BUCHELER'S Grundriss der lateinischen Declina tion(3d edition,by WINDEKILDE,1879) and to SCHWEIZER-SIDLER'S Lateinische Gramma tik(1888);also to many articles in various journals,most of which are given by S TOLZ.Indispensable is NEUE'S Formenlehre der lateinischen Sprache,of which the s econd volume of the third edition has already appeared(1892) and the first parts of the third volume(1894),under the careful revision of WAGENEE; also GEOEGES'L exikon der lateinischen Wortformen(1890). For the Formation of Words and the relation of Latin forms to those of the relat ed languages we have HENRY'S Precis de Grammaire Comparee and BRUGMANN'S Grundri ss der vergleichenden Grammatik,both now accessible in translations.On these,in connection with SCHWEIZERSIDLEE,the chapter on the Formation of Words has been b ased. In the historical treatment of the Syntax we must still rely in large measure on DRAEGER'S Historische Syntax der lateinischen Sprache (2d edition,1878,1881),fa ulty and inaccurate though it often is : many of the false statements have been corrected on the basis of more recent individual studies by SCHMALZ;but even SCH MALZ is not always correct,and many statements of his treatise have been silentl y emended in the present book.For the theoretical study of some problems of Lati n Syntax HAASE'S Vorlesungen uber lateinische Sprachwissenschaft (1880) should n ot be overlooked.Since the appearance of the second edition of SCHMALZ,in 1890,c onsiderable progress has been made in the various journals and other publication s,as may be seen from DEECKE'S summary in BURSIAN'S Jahresbericht for 1893.Every effort has been made to incorporate in this grammar the main results of these s tudies as far as practicable.We may also draw attention to the following importa nt articles,among others,some of which are mentioned in the books above referred to : WOLFFLIN'S numerous articles in the Archiv;THIELMANN'S articles in the Archiv on habere with Perfect Participle Passive,and on the Reciprocal Relation;LANDGRAF' S articles on the Figura Etymologica,in the second volume of the Acta Seminarii Erlangensis,and on the Future Participle and the Final Dative,in the Archiv; BAL E'S treatise on The Cum Constructions,attacking the theories of HOFFMANN(Lateini sche Zeitpartikeln,1874) and LUBBERT(Die Syntax von Quom,1869), PREFACE.v HOFFMANN'S reply to HALE(1891),and WETZEL'S Der Streit zwischen HOFFMANN und HAL E(1892);DAHL'S Die lateinische Partikel ut(1882),with GUTJAHR-PROBST'S Der Gebra uch von ut bei Terenz(1888);ZIMMERMANN'S article on quod und quia im alteren Lat ein(1880);SCHERER'S article on quando,in Studemund's Studien;MORRIS'S articles o n the Sentence Question in Plautus and Terence in the A.J.P.(vols.x.and xi.);HAL E'S articles on the Sequence of Tenses in the A.J.P.(vols.viii. and ix.),contain ing a discussion of the earlier Literature;ELMER'S articles on the Latin Prohibi

tive in A.J.P.(vol.xv.) A bibliography of the treatises on Prosody and Versification may be found in GLE DITSCH'S treatise in the second volume of MULLER'S Handbuch;this,with PLESSIS'Me trique Grecque et Latine(1889),has been made the basis of the chapter on Prosody ;but in the treatment of early metres,regard has been had to KLOTZ(Altromische M etrik,1890),and to LINDSAY'S recent papers on the Saturnian in the A.J.P.(vol.xi v.).In the matter of the order of words we have followed WEIL'S treatise on the Order of Words,translated by SUPER(1887). The question of the correct measurement of hidden quantities is still an unsettl ed one in Latin;for the sake of consistency the usage of MARX,Huelfsbuchlein fur die Aussprache der lateinischen Vokale in positionslangen Silben(2d edition,188 9) has been followed. The quotations have been made throughout from the Teubner Text editions except a s follows : Plautus is cited from the Triumvirate edition of RITSCHL;Vergil from the Editio Maior of RIBBECK;Ovid and Terence from the Tauchnitz Texts;Horace fr om the Editio Minor of KELLER and HOLDER;Lucretius from the edition of MUNRO; En nius and Lucilius from the editions of L.MULLER;fragmentary Scenic Poets from th e edition of RIBBECK.Special care has been taken to make the quotations exact bo th in spelling and wording;and any variation in the spelling of individual words is therefore due to the texts from which the examples are drawn. Where it has been necessary to modify the quotations in order to make them suita ble for citation,we have enclosed within square brackets words occurring in diff erent form in the text,and in parentheses words that have been inserted;where th e passage would not yield to such treatment,Cf.has been inserted before the refe rence. We have not thought it necessary to add the references in the Prosody exc ept in the case of some of the citations from early Latin. In the spelling of Latin words used out of quotation,as a rule u and v have been followed by o rather than by u;but here the requirements of clearness and the p eriod of the language have often been allowed to weigh.Otherwise we have followe d in the main BRAMBACH'S Huelfsbuchlein fur lateinische Rechtschreibung(translat ion by MCCABE,1877). G.L. CONTENTS ETYMOLOGY. SECTION Letters and Syllables...................................... Alphabet,1; Vowels,2,3; Diphthongs,4; Consonants,6,7;Phonetic Variations,8,9;Syllables,10, 11;Quantity,12-14;Accentuation,15. Parts of Speech............................................ Inflection of the Substantive........................ Definitions,18;Gender,19-21;Number,22; Cases,23-25;Declensions,26;Endings,27;First Declension,29,30;Second Declension,31-34;Third Declension,35-60;Fourth Declension,61,62;Fifth Declension,63,64;Greek Substantives,65,66;Ir16 17-71 1-15

regular Substantives,67-71. Inflection of the Adjective........................ Definition,72;First and Second Declension,7376; Pronominal Adjectives,76; Third Declension, 77-83;Irregular Adjectives,84,85;Comparison of Adjectives,86-90. Adverbs ........................................... Formation of Adverbs,91,92;Comparison,93. Numerals............................................ 94-98 91-93 72-90

Cardinals,94;Ordinals,94;Distributives,97; Adverbs,98. Pronouns ............................................ 99-111 Personal,100-102;Determinative,103;Demonstrative,104;Relative,105;Interrogative,106;Indefinites,107; Adjectives,108; Correlative,109-111. Inflection of the Verb ................................112-175 Definitions,112,113; Endings,114,115; Inflection of ease,116,117; of prodesse,118; of posse,119.Regular Verbs,120-167; Division,120; Rules for forming Tenses,121.First Conjugation,122; Second Conjugation,123,124; Third Conjugation,125,126; Fourth viii CONTENTS. SECTION Conjugation,127;Deponents,128;Periphrastic, 129; Notes,130,131.Formation of the Stems,132135; Change in Conjugation,136; List of Verbs, 137-167.Irregular Verbs,168-174; ire,169,2; quire, nequire,170; ferre,171; edere,172; fieri,173; velle, nolle,malle,174; Defective Verbs,175. Formation of Words ......................................176-200 Simple Words,179-192; Substantives,180,181; Adjectives,182; Substantives without Suffixes,183; Suffixes,184-189; Verbs,190-192;Compound Words, 193-200; Substantives,194-198; Verbs,199,200. SYNTAX. Simple Sentence ...........................................202-471 Subject,203,204; Predicate,205-209; Concord, 210,211; Voices,212-221.Tenses,222-252; Present, 227-230; Imperfect,231-234; Perfect,235-240; Pluperfect,241; Future,242,243; Future Perfect,244, 245; Periphrastic,246-251; Tenses in Letters,252. Moods,253-283; Indicative,254; Subjunctive,255-

265;Imperative,266-275;Tenses in Moods and Verbal Substantives,276-283. Simple Sentence Expanded....................................284-471 Multiplication of the Subject ......285-287 Qualification of the Subject ......288-325 Adjectives,289-303; Numerals,292-295; Comparatives and Superlatives,296-303: Pronouns,304-319; Personal.304; Demonstrative,305-307; Determinative and Reflexive,308-311;Possessive,312;Indefinite,313-319; Apposition,320-325; Predicative Attribution and Apposition,325. Multiplication of Predicate 326 Qualification of Predicate 327-449 The Cases 328-418 Accusative,328-343; Dative,344-359; Genitive, 360-383; Ablative,384-410; Locative,411; Prepositions,412-418; with Accusative,416; with Ablative, 417; with Accusative and Ablative,418. Infinitive 419-424 Subject,422; Object,423; Predicate,424. CONTENTS.ix SECTION Gerund and Gerundive 425-433 Genitive,428; Dative,429; Accusative,430; Ablative,431;with Prepositions,432,433. Supine 434-436 Accusative,435; Ablative,430. Participles 437,438 Adverbs 439-449 Negatives,441-449. Incomplete(Interrogative) Sentence 450-471 Direct Simple Questions,453-457; Direct Disjunctive Questions,458,459;Indirect Questions,460; Moods in Direct,402-466; Moods in Indirect,467. Compound Sentence ............................................472-670 Coordinate Sentence 473-503

Copulative,474-482; Adversative,483-491;Disjunctive,492-497; Causal and Illative,498-503. Subordinate Sentences .......504-670 Moods in,508; Sequence of Tenses,509-519; Reflexive in,520-522. Object Sentences 523-537 Introduced by quod,524,525;in Accusative and Infinitive,526,527,532-535; in Nominative and Infinitive,528; in Participle,536,537. Causal Sentences ........538-542 Introduced by quod,quia,etc.,539-541;by quod, with verbs of Emotion,542. Sentences of Design and Tendency ....543-558 Final,544-550; Pure Final,545; Complementary Final,546-549; After verbs of Fear,550. Consecutive,551; Pure Consecutive,552; Complementary Consecutive,553-557; Exclamatory Questions,558. Temporal Sentences 559-588 Antecedent Action,561-567; Iterative Action,566, 567; Contemporaneous Action,568-573; Subsequent Action,574-577;Sentences with cum,578-588. Conditional Sentences 589-602 Logical,595; Ideal,596; Unreal,597; Incomplete, 598-601;Of Comparison,602. Concessive Sentences ....603-609 x CONTENTS. SECTION Relative Sentences ..610-637 Concord,614-621;Tenses,622,623;Moods,624637. Comparative Sentences 638-644 Correlative,642;with atque or ac,643;with quam, 644. The Abridged Sentence 645-663 Historical Infinitive,647;Oratio Obliqua,648; Moods in,650-652; Tenses in,653-655; Conditional Sentences in,656-659 : Pronouns,660;Partial Obliquity,662,663.

Participial Sentences 664-670 Arrangement of Words and Clauses ...............................671-687 Figures of Syntax and Rhetoric .................................688-700 Principal Rules of Syntax ...Pp.437-444 PROSODY. Quantity ............................................702-717 General Rules,702-706 : of Final Syllables,707713; of Stem Syllables,714;of Compounds,715;inEarly Latin,716,717. Figures of Prosody ...................................718-728 Versification ........................................729-827 Definition,729-754;Versus Italicus,755;Saturnian Verse,756; Iambic Rhythms,757-767; Trochaic Rhythms,768-776;Anapaestic Rhythms,777-782; Dactylic Rhythms,783-789;Logacedic Rhythms, 790-805;Cretic and Bacchic Rhythms,806-814; Ionic Rhythms,815-819;Compound Verses,820823;Cantica,824,825;Metres of HORACE,826,827. PAGES Appendix ............................................491-493 Roman Calendar,Roman Weights and Measures, Roman Money,Roman Names. Index of Verbs....................................... 494-502 General Index ........................................503-546 LATIN GRAMMAR. ETYMOLOG Y. Alphabet . 1.THE Latin alphabet has twenty-three letters : A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T V X Y Z REMARKS.1.The sounds represented by C and K were originally distinct,C having th e sound of G,but they gradually approximated each other,until C supplanted K exc ept in a few words,such as Kalendae,Kaeso,which were usually abbreviated,Kal.,K. The original force of C is retained only in C.(for Gaius) and Cn.(for Gnaeus). 2.J,the consonantal form of I,dates from the middle ages.V represented also the vowel u in the Latin alphabet;and its resolution into two letters V for the cons onant,and U for the vowel also dates from the middle ages.For convenience,V and U are still distinguished in this grammar.

NOTE.The Latin names for the letters were : a,be,ce,de,e,ef,ge,ha,i,ka,el,em,en, o,pe,q (= c ),er,es,te, ,ex(ix),to be prono nced according to the r les given in 3,7.For Y the so nd was sed,for Z the Greek name( eta). Vowels. 2.The vowels are a,e,i,o, ,(y);and are divided : 1.According to their q ality(i.e.,the position of the organs sed in pron nciati on),into g tt ral(or back),a,o, ;palatal(or front),e,i,(y). 2.According to their q antity or prolongation(i.e.,the time req ired for pron nc iation),into long ( -- );short (v) [2 VOWELS--DIPHTHONGS--CONSONANTS.] REMARK.Vowels whose q antity shifts in poetry are called common(see 13),and are disting ished th s : by preference short; 3.

by preference long. So nds of the Vowels. o = o in bone. = oo in moon. y = in s r(French),German e.

REMARK.The short so nds are only less prolonged in pron nciation than the long s o nds,and have no exact English eq ivalents. Diphthongs. 4.There are b t few diphthongs or do ble so nds in Latin.The theory of the dipht hong req ires that both elements be heard in a sl r. The tendency in Latin was t o red ce diphthongs to simple so nds; for example,in the last cent ry of the rep blic ae was gliding into e,which took its place completely in the third cent ry A.D.Hnce arose freq ent variations in spelling : as glaeba and gleba,sod; so ob oedire and obedire,obey;faen m(foem n) and fen m,hay.

ae = aye(ah-eh).ei = ei in feint(drawled). oe = oy in boy. e = e in Spanish deda(eh-oo). a = o in o r. ( i = we,almost). NOTE.Before the time of the Gracchi we find ai and oi instead of ae and oe. 5.The sign (Diaeresis Greek =separation) over the second vowel shows that each s o nd is to be prono nced separately;aer,air; Oenoma s,aloe.

Consonants. 6.Consonants are divided :

a = a in father. e = e in prey. i = i in caprice.

3.Y and Z were introduced in the time of Cicero to transliterate Greek and .In ea rly Latin was represented by (occasionally by i or oi),and by ss or s.Z had occ rred in the earliest times,b t had been lost,and its place in the alphabet taken by G,which was introd ced after C acq ired the so nd of K.

1.According to the principal organs by which they are prono nced,into Labials(lip-so nds) : b,p,(ph),f,v,m. Dentals(tooth-so nds): d,t,(tb.),1,n,r, s. G tt rals(throat-so nds) : g,c,k,q ,(ch),h,n(see 7).

2.According to their prolongation,into A.Semi-vowels : of which l,m,n,r,are liq ids(m and n being nasals). h is a breathing. s is a sibilant. [CONSONANTS-PHONETIC-VARIATIONS.3] B.M tes : to which belong

Those on the same line are said to be of the same organ.. M tes are f rt her divided into Ten es(thin,smooth) : p,t,k,c,q , hard(s rd). Mediae(middle) : b,d,g, soft(sonant). [Aspiratae(aspirate,ro gh): ph,th,ch,] aspirate. Those on the same line are said to be of the same order. The aspirates w ere introd ced in the latter part of the second cent ry B.C.in the transliterati on of Greek words,and thence extended to some p re Latin words;as,p lcher,Gracch s.

So nds of the Consonants. 7.The consonants are so nded as in English,with the following exceptions : C is hard thro gho t = k. Ch is not a gen ine Latin combination(6,2).In Latin words it is a k;in G reek words a kh,commonly prono nced as ch in German. G is hard thro gho t,as in get,give. H at the beginning of a word is b t slightly prono nced;in the middle of a word it is almost imperceptible. I consonant(J) has the so nd of a broad y;nearly like y in y le. N has a g tt ral nasal so nd before c,g,q,as in anchor,ang ish. Q = kw(nearly);before o,q = c.In early Latin q was not followed by . Later,when o was weakened to ,q was replaced by c; th s q om became c m.Still later q replaced c,yielding q m. R is trilled. S and X are always hard,as in hiss,axe. T is hard thro gho t;never like t in nation. U consonant(V) is prono nced like the vowel,b t with a sl r.In the third cent ry A.D.it had nearly the so nd of o r w.In Greek it was freq ently transli terated by O ;so O alerios = Valeri s. Phonetic Variations in Vowels and Consonants.

3.Do ble consonants are : = d in ad e;x=cs(ks),gs;i and are do ble so nds,half vowel,half consonant.

between two vowels

P-m tes,p, T-m tes,t, K-m tes,k,

c,

q ,

b,(ph),f, d,(th), g,(ch),

labials. dentals. g tt rals.

NOTE.Instead of dental and g tt ral,the terms ling al and palatal are often .

sed

8.Vowels. 1.Weakening.In the formation of words from roots or stems short vowels show a te ndency to weaken;that is,a tends to become e [4 PHONETIC VARIATIONS.] and then i,or o and then ,while o tends towards e or i,and towards i This occ rs most freq ently in compo nd words,to a less degree in words formed by s ffix es.Diphthongs are less freq ently weakened and long vowels very rarely.The princ ipal r les for these changes are as follows,b t it m st be remembered that to al l there are more or less freq ent exceptions : A.--1.In the second part of compo nd words,and in red plicated words,the root-vo wel a is weakened to e,which s ally passes over into i in open syllables(11,R.) ,and often to before l and labial m tes : conscendo(scando);concido(cado);des lto(salto);fefelli(fallo). 2.As final vowel of the stem a is weakened in the fir st part of a compo nd word, s ally to i,rarely to o or : aq ilifer(aq ila-);ca sidic s (ca sa-).3.In or before s ffixes,a becomes i: domit s(doma-). NOTE.A freq ently resists change,especially in verbs of the First and Second Con j gations : as,separare(parare);circ miacere(iacere);so satisfacere (facere) and others. E.--1.In the second part of compo nd words,root vowel e is s ally retained in a close(11,R.) syllable,and weakened to i in an open syllable;b t it is invariabl y retained before r : inflecto(flecto);obtineo(teneo);adverto(verto).2.In or bef ore s ffixes,and in the final syllable of a word,it also becomes i : genitor(gen e-); ndecim(decem). I--.At the end of a word i is changed to e : mare(mari). O.--1.In composition final stemvowel o is s ally weakened to i; before labials sometimes to : agricola(agro-);a r fex( s ally a rifex).2.In s ffixes,and in f inal syllables,it is weakened to i : amicitia (amico-);gracilis(also gracil -s). U.--In composition final stemvowel is s ally weakened to i; the same weakenin g occ rs sometimes within a word or before a s ffix : manifest s(also man -fest s);lacrima(early lacr ma). AE,AU.--In the second part of a compo nd word root-diphthong ae is s ally weake ned to i,b t often there is no change;a is occasionally changed to : exq iro( q aero);concl do(cla do). 2.Omission.--Vowels are freq ently omitted both in simple and compo nd words,eit her within the word(syncope) or at the end(apocope) : dextera and dextra;princep s(for primceps,from primiceps);pergo (for perrego); t( ti);ne (neve). 3.Epenthesis.--Vowels are sometimes inserted to ease the pron nciation,b t s al ly before liq ids or in foreign words : ager(agro-) see 31;Daphine(= Daphne);dra ch ma(= drachma). 4.Assimilation.--Two vowels in adjoining syllables tend to become like each othe r; this assimilation is s ally regressive(i.e.,of the first to the second),espe cially when l separates them;it is rarely progressive.Compare facilis with fac l ,familia with fam l s,bene with bon s. [PHONETIC VARIATIONS.5]

compare temp s with temporis;peperi(from pario),etc. 9.Consonants. 1.Assimilation.--When two consonants come together in Latin,they tend to assimil ate one to the other.This assimilation is s ally regressive;sometimes it is pro gressive.It is either complete,that is,the two consonants become the same;or par tial,that is,the one is made of the same order or same organ as the other.These changes occ r both in inflection and in composition,b t they are especially note worthy in the last consonant of prepositions in composition. Script m for scrib-t m(regressive partial);accedere for ad-cedere (regressive co mplete);c rs m for c r-t m(progressive partial);celerrim s for celersim s(progre ssive complete). 2.Partial Assimilation.(a) The sonants g and b,before the s rd t,or the sibilant s,often become s rds(c,p );the s rds p,c,t before liq ids sometimes become sona nts(b,g,d);the labials p,b before n become m; the labial m before the g tt rals c,q,g,h,i(j),the dentals t,d,s,and the labials f,v,becomes n;the dental n before labials p,b,m,becomes m;rect m(for reg-t m);scripsi(for scrib-si);segment m (fo r sec-ment m);somn s(for sop-n s);princeps(for prim-ceps). NOTE.Similar is the change of q(q ) to c before t or s : coct m(for coq -t m). (b) After l and r,t of the s ffixes tor,t s,t m,becomes s by progressive assimil ation : c rs m(for c r-t m). 3.Complete Assimilation.There are many varieties,b t the most important principl e is that a m te or a liq id tends to assimilate to a liq id and to a sibilant : p ella(p er);c rrere(for c r-sere);cessi (for ced-si);corolla(corona),etc. 4.Prepositions.-Ab takes the form a before m or v,and in af i; appears as a in a fero,a f gio;as abs before c,t;as as before p. Ad is assimilated before c,g,l,p,r,s,t,with more or less reg larity; before gn,sp,sc,st,st often appears as a. Ante appears rarely as anti. C m appears as com before b,m,p; con before c,d,f,g,i,q,s,v;co before gn,n; assimilated sometimes before l and r. Ex becomes e before b,d,g,i(j),l,m,n,r,v;ef or ec,before f. In s ally becomes im before b,m,p;before l,r it is occasionally assimilated; the same holds good of the negative prefix in.

5.A vowel before a liq id tends to become ad lescens and adolescens; v lg s and volg s; dec m s(decem);

,less often o or e :

Ob is s ally assimilated before c,f,g,p;appears as o in omitto,operio, obs in obsolesco,and os in ostendo. S b is assimilated before c,f,g,p,r;appears as s s in a few words,as s scipio;occasionally s before s,as s spicio. Trans sometimes becomes tra before d,i(j),n; tran before s. Amb-(inseparable) loses b before a consonant,and am is sometimes assimilated. Circ m sometimes drops m before i. Dis becomes dif before f; dir before a vowel; [6 PHONETIC VARIATIONS--SYLLABLES.]

The d of red and sed is s ally dropped before consonants. NOTE.In early Latin assimilation is m ch less common than in the classical perio d. 5.Dissimilation.To avoid the harshness of so nd when two syllables begin with the same letter,the initial letter of the one is often changed;this is tr e especia lly of liq ids,b t occasionally of other letters : sing laris(for sing -la-lis); meridie(for medi-die). NOTE.This principle often reg lates the se of -br m or -b l m,and of -cr m or c l m in word formation(181,6) : compare peric l m with sim lacr m. 6.Omission.--(a) When a word closes with a do bled consonant or a gro p of conso nants,the final consonant is reg larly dropped in Latin;sometimes after the prec eding consonant has been assimilated to it.In the middle of a word,after a long syllable,ss and ll are simplified;ll is sometimes simplified after a short vowel ,which is then lengthened if the syllable is accented(compensatory lengthening); b t if the syllable is naccented,s ch lengthening need not take place.In this c ase other do bled consonants may also be simplified. fel(for fell); lac(for lact); vigil(for vigils); lapis(for lapids,lapiss); misi(for missi); villa and

di before consonants,except c,p,q,t,s,followed by a vowel,when it is ally nchanged.

vilic s; b t and c rr s c r lis. NOTE.X is retained,even after l and r,as in calx,arx;also ps,bs, as in stirps, rbs;ms is fo nd in hiems only. (b) In the tendency to easier pron nciation consonants are often dropped both at the beginning and in the middle of a word : stim l s(for stigm l s);pastor(for pasctor);aio(for ahio);nat s(for gnat s,retained in early Latin,rarely later);la t s(for tlat s),etc. 7.Epenthesis.--Between m and l,m and s,m and t,a p is generated : exempl m(eximo );compsi(como);empt s(emo). 8.Metathesis or transposition of consonants occ rs sometimes in Latin,especially in Perfect and S pine forms : cerno;Pf .crevi,etc.

Syllables. 10.The syllable is the nit of pron nciation;it consists of a vowel,or a vowel a nd one or more consonants. A word has as many syllables as it contains separate vowels and diphthon gs. In dividing a word into syllables,a consonant,between two vowels,belongs to the second : amo,I love; lixa,a s tler,. [SYLLABLES QUANTITY.7] Any combination of consonants that can begin a word (incl ding mn, nder Greek infl ence) belongs to the following vowel;in other combinations the first consonant belongs to the preceding vowel : asper,ro gh; fa st s,l cky; libri,books; amnis,river. REMARKS.1.The combinations incapable of beginning a word are (a) do bled consonants :

sicc s,dry; (b) a liq id and a consonant : alm s,fostering; ambo,both; ang is,snake; arbor,tree. 2.Compo nds are treated by the best grammarians as if their parts were separate words :

abigo,I drive off; resp blica,commonwealth.

ltima,last);

the next to the last the pen lt( paene,almost,

ante,before, and paen ltima). REMARK.A .syllable is said to be open when it ends with a vowel; close,when it e nds with a consonant. Q antity. 12.1.A syllable is said to be long by nat re,when it contains a long vowel or di phthong : mos,c stom; cael m,heaven. REMARKS.1.A vowel before nf,ns,gm,gn,is long by nat re : Infelix, nl cky; mensa,table; agmen,train; agn s,lamb. In many cases,however,the n has disappeared from the written word;so in some s b stantival terminations : os(Acc.Pl.,2d decl.), s(Acc.Pl.,4th decl.);in adjective s in os s( formos s,shapely, for formons s);in the n merical termination esim s(= ensim s).See 95,N.5. 2.Before i consonant(j) a vowel is long by nat re : Pompei s,Pompey; except in compo nds of i g m,yoke(bi-i g s,two-horse), and in a few other words.

2.A syllable is said to be long by position,when a short vowel is followed by tw

NOTE.--From abo by ei.From the thened i.From S were indicated

t 134 to abo t 74 B.C.a,e, ,were often represented by as,ee ;i time of A g st s to the second cent ry i was indicated by a leng lla's time ntil the third cent ry long vowels(rarely,however,i) by an Apex(').

and

ltima);the one before the pen lt,the antepen lt (

11.The last syllable of a word is called the

ltimate (

o or more consonants,or a do ble consonant : ars,art; coll m,neck; abr mpo,I break off; per mare,thro gh the sea; nex,m rder. [8 ACCENTUATION.] 3.A syllable is said to be short when it contains a short vowel,which is not fol lowed by two or more consonants : loc s,place; tab la,pict re. REMARK.--A vowel is short by nat re when followed by another vowel,or by nt,nd: de s,God; innocentia,innocence; amand s,to be loved. 13.A syllable ending in a short vowel,followed by a m te with l or r,is said to be common( anceps,do btf l) : tenebrae,darkness. REMARK.--In prose s ch syllables are always short.In poetry they were short in e arly times,common in the A g stan period. 14.Every diphthong,and every vowel derived from a diphthong,or contracted from o ther vowels,is long: saev s,cr el; concl de,I sh t p(from cla do,I sh t); cogo(from co-ago),I drive together. Accent ation. 15.1.Dissyllabic words have the accent or stress on the pen lt : eq os( = eq s),horse. 2.Polysyllabic words have the accent on the pen lt,when the pen lt is long;on th e antepen lt,when the pen lt is short or common : mandare,to commit; mandere,to chew; integr m,entire; circ mdare,to s rro nd; s perstites,s rvivors. REMARKS.1.The little appendages(enclitics), q e,ve,ne, add an accent to the ltimate of words accented on the antepen lt : l minaq e,"and lights"; fl minave,"or rivers";

vomerene ? from a plo ghshare ? Dissyllables and words accented on the pen lt are said to shift their accent to the final syllable before an enclitic : egomet,I indeed; amareve,or to love,; b t it is more likely that the ordinary r le of accent ation was followed. 2.Compo nds(not prepositional) of facere and dare retain the accent on the verba l form : calefacit, ven mdare.sell 3.Vocatives and genitives of s bstantives in i s of the second declension,as wel l as genitives of s bstantives in i m,retain the accent on the same syllable as the nominative : Vergili. NOTE.Other exceptions will be noted as they occ r.In the older lang age the acce nt was not bo nded by the antepen lt : accipio (accipio) , conc tio(conc tio). [PARTS OF SPEECH INFLECTION.9] Parts of Speech. 16.The Parts of Speech are the No n(S bstantive and Adjective),the Prono n,the V erb,and the Particles(Adverb,Preposition,and Conj nction),defined as follows : 1 .The S bstantive gives a name : vir,a man; Cocles,Cocles; don m,a gift. 2.The Adjective adds a q ality to the S bstantive : bon s vir,a good man. 3.The Prono n points o t witho t describing : hic,this; ille,that; ego,I. 4.The Verb expresses a complete tho ght,whether assertion,wish,or command; amat,he loves; amet,may he love; ama,love tho ! 5.The Adverb shows circ mstances. 6.The Preposition shows local relation. 7.The Conj nction shows connection. REMARKS.1.S bstantive is short for no n-s bstantive,and adjective for no n-adjec tive.S bstantives are often loosely called no ns. 2.The Interjection is either a mere cry of feeling : ah! ah ! and does not belon g to lang age,or falls nder one of the above-mentioned classes. 3.The Particles are mainly m tilated forms of the no n and prono n.

NOTES.1.The difference between s bstantive and adjective is largely a difference of mobility;that is,the s bstantive is fixed in its application and the adjecti ve is general. 2.No n and prono n have essentially the same inflection;b t they are commonly se parated,partly on acco nt of the difference in signification,partly on acco nt o f certain pec liarities of the pronominal forme. Inflection. 17.Inflection(Inflexio,bending) is that change in the form of a word(chiefly in the end) which shows a change in the relations of that word.The no n,prono n,and verb are inflected;the particles are not capable of f rther inflection. The inflection of no ns and prono ns is called declension,and no ns and prono ns are said to be declined. The inflection of verbs is called conj gation,and verbs are said to be conj gate d. [10 THE SUBSTANTIVE GENDER.] The S bstantive. 18.A S bstantive is either concrete or abstract;concrete when it gives the name of a person or thing;abstract when it gives the name of a q ality;as amicitia,friendship. Concrete s bstantives are either proper or common : Proper when they are proper, or pec liar,to certain persons,places,or things: Horati s,Horace; Neapolis,Naples; Pad s,Po. Common when they are common to a whole class : domin s,a lord; rbs,a city; amnis,a river.

Gender of S bstantives. 19.For the names of animate beings,the gender is determined by the signification ;for things and q alities,by the termination. Names of males are masc line;names of females,feminine. Masc line : Rom l s; I ppiter; vir,man; eq s,horse. Feminine : Cornelia; I no; femina,woman; eq a,mare.

20.Some classes of words,witho t nat ral gender,have their gender determined by the signification : 1.All names of months and winds,most names of rivers,and many names of mo ntains are masc line;as : Aprilis,April,the opening month; Aq ilo,the north wind; Albis,the River Elbe; Athos,Mo nt Athos.

mensis,month; vent s,wind; fl vi s,amnis,river). 2.Of the rivers, Allia, Lethe, Matrona, Sagra, Styx are feminine; Alb la, Acheron, Gar mna vary,being sometimes masc line,sometimes feminine. 3.Of the mo ntains, Alpes,the Alps, is feminine;so,too,s ndry (Greek) names in a(G.ae),e(G.es) : Aetna( s ally), Calpe, Cyllene, Hybla, Ida, Ossa( s ally), Oeta( s ally), Rhodope, Pholoe, Pyrene, and Carambis, Peloris. Pelion and Soracte( s ally),and names of mo ntains in a(G.or m),as Maenala(G.Maenalor m),are ne ter. II.Names of co ntries(terrae,fem.),islands(ins lae,fem.),cities( rbes,fem.),plan ts(plantae,fem.),and trees [GENDER NUMBER,11] (arbores,fem.),are feminine: Aegypt s,Egypt;Rhod s,Rhodes;pir s,a pear-tree;abie s,a fir-tree.

REMARKS.1.Names of months,winds,and rivers were looked eement with masc line s bstantives nderstood(

pon as adjectives in agr

REMARKS.1.Names of co ntries and islands in s(os)(Gr.i) are masc line,except Ae gypt s,Chi s,Chersones s,Cypr s,Delos,Epir s,Lemnos,Lesbos,Peloponnes s,Rhod s,S amos,Bospor s(the co ntry). 2.Many Greek names of cities follow the termination.Towards the end of the rep b lic many feminine names change the ending - s to - m and become ne ter : Abyd s and Abyd m, Sag nt s and Sag nt m. 3.Most names of trees with stems in -tro(N.-ter) are masc line : oleaster,wild olive; pinaster,wild pine. So also most shr bs : d m s,bramble-b sh; rh s,s mach. Ne ter are acer,maple; laser,a plant; papaver,poppy(also masc.in early Latin); rob r,oak; siler,willow; siser,skirret(occasionally masc.) s ber,cork-tree; t ber,m shroom.

III.All indeclinable s bstantives,and all words and phrases treated as indeclina ble s bstantives,are ne ter : fas,right; a long m,a long; scire t m,thy knowing; triste vale,a sad "farewell." 21.1.S bstantives which have b t one form for masc line and feminine are said to be of common gender : civis,citi en(male or female); comes,companion; i dex,j dge. 2.S bstantiva mobilia are words of the same origin,whose different terminations designate difference of gender : magister,master,teacher; magistra,mistress; serv s,serva,slave(masc.and fem.); victor,victrix,conq eror(masc.and fem.). 3.If the male and female of animals have b t one designation, mas,male, and femina,female, are added,when it is necessary to be exact : pavo mas(masc l s),peacock; pavo femina,peahen. These s bstantives are called epicene (epikoina, triq e generi comm nia,common t o each gender). N mber.

22.In Latin there are two n mbers : the Sing lar,denoting one;the Pl ral,denotin g more than one. REMARK.The D al,denoting two,occ rs in Latin only in two words(d o,two; ambo,bot h),in the nominative and vocative of the masc line and ne ter. [12 CASES.] Cases. 23.In Latin there are six cases : 1.Nominative(Case of the S bject). Answers : who ? what ? 2.Genitive(Case of the Complement). Answers : whose ? whereof ? 3.Dative(Case of Indirect Object or Personal Interest). Answers : to whom ? for whom ? 4.Acc sative(Case of Direct Object). Answers : whom ? what ? 5.Vocative(Case of Direct Address). 6.Ablative(Case of Adverbial Relation). Answers : where ? whence ? wherewith ? NOTE.These six cases are the remains of a larger n mber.The Locative(answers : w here ?),is akin to the Dative,and coincident with it in the 1st and 3d Declensio ns; in the 2d Declension it is lost in the Genitive;it is often blended with the Ablative in form,reg larly in syntax.The Instr mental(answers: wherewith?),whic h is fo nd in other members of the family,is likewise merged in the Ablative. 24.1.According to their form,the cases are divided into strong and weak : The st rong cases are Nominative,Acc sative,and Vocative.The weak cases are Genitive,Da tive,and Ablative. 2.According to their syntactical se,the cases are divided into Cas s Recti,or I ndependent Cases,and Cas s Obliq i,or Dependent Cases.Nominative and Vocative ar e Cas s Recti,the rest Cas s Obliq i. 25.The case-forms arise from the combination of the caseendings with the stem. 1.The stem is that which is common to a class of formations. NOTES.1.The stem is often so m ch altered by contact with the case-ending,and th e case-ending so m ch altered by the wearing away of vowels and consonants,that they can be determined only by scientific analysis.So in the paradigm mensa,the stem is not mens,b t mensa,the final a having been absorbed by the ending in the Dative and Ablative Pl ral mensis.So -d,the ending of the Ablative Sing lar,has nearly disappeared,and the locative ending has ndergone many changes(e,ei,i,e) .The "cr de form" it is often impossible to ascertain. belongs to com [DECLENSIONS.13] parative etymology.The stem may be of any length,the root was probably a monosyl lable. In penna the stem is penna-;

2.The root is an

ltimate stem,and the determination of the root

in penn la,penn la-; in pennat l s,pennat lo-; the root is PET(petna,pesna,penna),and is fo nd in

Greek,petmai,petron;English,feather. 2.The case-endings are as follows,early forms being printed in parenthes is : SG.N.V.Wanting or in.f.-s;n.-m.PL.N.V.-es(eis,is); -i; n.-a. G.-is(-os,- s,-es);-i. G.- m(om); -r m(som). D.-i(-e,-ei). D.-b s;-is. Ac.-m,-em. Ac.-s(for -ns);n .-a. Ab.Wanting(or -d);-e. Ab.-b s;-is. Declensions. 26.There are five declensions in Latin,which are characterised by the final lett er of their respective stems(stemcharacteristic). For practical p rposes and reg larly in lexicons they are also improperly distin g ished by the ending of the Genitive Sing lar. STEM CHARACTERISTIC.GENITIVE SINGULAR. I. a(). II. o. III.i, ,a consonant. IV. . V. e. ae. i. is. s. ei

REMARK.The First,Second,and Fifth Declensions are called Vowel Declensions;the T hird and Fo rth,which really form b t one,the Consonant Declension,i and being semi-consonants. 27.The case-endings in combination with the stem-characteristics give rise to th e following systems of terminations : SINGULAR. I. III. II. s(os);wanting; m(om).

i(ei). o(oi). m(om). e;wanting; m(om). o(od).

N. a. s;wanting. G. ae(as,,ai). is( s,es). D. ae(ai). i(ei,i). Ac. am. em,im. V. a. s. Ab. a(ad). e,i(ed,id).

petere,to fall

pon,to fly at;

[14 FIRST DECLENSION.] IV. V. os. s( os, is). i, ( ei). m; . . ei e(es). ei,e. em. e. PLURAL. I. III. N.V. ae. os(eis,is);a,ia. G. ar m. m,i m. D.A.is(eis);ab s. ib s. Ac. as. is,es;a,ia. V. es. G. er m. eb s. es. Ac. n m. b s,ib s. i(oe,e,ei);a. m(om),or m. II.

is(eis),ib s.

os; a. IV.

NOTE.Final -s and -m are freq ently omitted in early inscriptions. 28.General R les of Declension. I.For the strong cases : Ne ter s bstantives have the Nominative and the Vocative like the Acc sative;in the Pl ral the strong cases always end in a. In the Third,Fo rth,and Fifth Declensions the strong cases are alike in the Pl r al. The Vocative is like the Nominative,except in the Sing lar of the Second Declens ion when the Nominative ends in - s. II.For the weak cases : The Dative and the Ablative Pl ral have a common form.

FIRST DECLENSION. 29.The stem ends in a,which is weakened from an original a.The Nominative has no ending. SG.N. G. D. mensa(f .),the table, mensae, of the table, mensae, to,for the table, a table. of a table. to,for a table.

D.A.

s;

N.V.

s( es, s); a.

a.

N.V. G. D. Ac. Ab.

s; .

Ac. V. Ab.

mensam, the table, a table. mensa, O table ! table ! mensa, from,with,by,the table, from,with,by,a table.

[SECOND DECLENSION.15] PL.N. mensae, the tables, G. mensar m, of the tables, s. D. mensis, to,for the tables, ables. Ac. mensas, the tables, tables. V. mensae, O tables! tables! Ab. mensis, from,with,by,the tables, les. tables. of table to,for t

REMARKS.1.The early ending of the Gen.,as,fo nd in a few cases in early poets,is retained in the classical period(b t not in CAESAR or LIVY) only in the form familias,of a family, in combination with pater,father, mater,mother, fili s,son, filia,da ghter, vi .: paterfamilias, materfamilias, fili s familias, filia familias. 2.The Loc.Sing,is like the Genitive: Romae,at Rome; militiae,abroad. 3.The Gen.Pl.sometimes takes the form - m instead of -ar m; this occ rs chiefly in the Greek words amphora(amphora,meas re of tonnage), and drachma,franc--(Greek coin). The poets make freq ent se of this form in Greek patronymics in -da,-das,and co mpo nds of -cola(from colo,I inhabit) and -gena(from root gen,beget). 4.The ending -ab s is fo nd(along with the reg lar ending) in the Dat.and Abl.Pl .of dea,goddess,and filia,da ghter.In late Latin the se of this termination bec omes more extended. NOTES.--1.A very few masc.s bstantives show Nom.Sing,in as in early Latin. 2.A form of the Gen.Sing,in ai,s bseq ent to that in as,is fo nd in early inscri ptions,and not nfreq ently in early poets,b t only here and there in classical poetry(VERG.,A.,3,354,etc.) and never in classical prose. 3.The early ending of the Dat.ai(sometimes contracted into a),is fo nd occasiona lly in inscriptions thro gho t the whole period of the lang age. 4.The older ending of the Abl.,ad,belongs excl sively to early Latin.Inscription s show eis for is in Dat.and Abl.PL,and once as in the Dat.Pl ral.

from,with,by,tab

30.R le of Gender.S bstantives of the First Declension are feminine,except when males are meant. Hadria,the Adriatic,is masc line. N. 31.The stem ends in o,which in the classical period is weakened to ,except afte r (vowel or consonant),where o is retained ntil the first cent ry A.D.In combi nation with the case-endings it merges into o or disappears altogether. In the V ocative(except in ne ters) it is weakened to e. The Nominative ends in s(m.and f.) and m(n.).B t many masc line stems in which t he final vowel,o,is preceded by r,drop the(os) s and e of the Nominative and Vo cative,and insert e before the r if it was preceded by a consonant. [16 SECOND DECLENSION.]

NOTE.Socer s is fo nd in early Latin.Pla t s ses ter m(n.) once. 2.In the following words the stem ends in -ero and the e is therefore retained t hro gho t :

ad lter,ad lterer; gener,son-in-law; Liber,god of wine; p er,boy; socer,father-in-law; vesper,evening; and in words ending in -fer and -ger,from fero,I bear,and gero,I carry,as, signifer,standard-bearer, armiger,armor-bearer . Also Iber and Celtiber(names of nations) have in the Pl ral Iberi and Celtiberi, 33.Hort s(m.),garden; p er(m.),boy;ager(m.),field;bell m(n.),war;are th s declin ed :

belli, D. bello, horto,

p ero,

G.

horti,

p eri,

SG. bell m,

N.

hort s,

p er,

ager, agri, agro,

32.1.Stems in -ro.The following stems in -ro do not drop the(os) Nom.and Voc.: er s,master; hesper s,evening star; icter s,ja ndice: i niper s,j niper; mor s,m lberry; n mer s,n mber; ta r s,b ll; vir s,venom; mer s,sho lder; ter s,womb.

s and e of the

SECOND DECLENSIO

bell m, bell m, bello. PL. bella, bellor m, bellis, Ac. bella, V. bella, Ab. bellis. N. G.

REMARKS.1.Stems in -io have Gen.Sing,for the most part in i ntil the first cent ry A.D.,witho t change of accent : ingeni(N.ingeni m),of geni s,Vergili,of Verg il.See 15,R.3. 2.Proper names in -i s(stems in -io) have Voc.in i,witho t change of accent : Antoni, T lli, Gai, Vergili. Fili s,son,

and

geni s,geni s, form their Voc.in like manner : fili,geni. In solemn disco rse - s of the Nom.is employed also for the Vocative.(See Liv.1. 24,7.) So reg larly de s,God ! 3.The Loc.Sing,ends in i(apparent Genitive),as Rhodi,at Rhodes, Tarenti,at Tarent m. 4.In the Gen.Pl.- m instead of -or m is fo nd in words denoting coins and meas r es;as,

meas res;

Likewise in some names of persons : de m(also orom);

n mm m,of moneys(also denari m(occasionally talent m(occasionally tetrachm m; medi m(also -or m),of i ger m; medimn m; stadi m(also -or m).

-or m) = sesterti m,of sesterces; -or m); -or m);

hortis.

p eris.

horti,

p eri,

hortos,

p eros,

D.

hortis,

p eris,

agris, agros, agri, agris.

hortor m,

horti,

p eri,

Ab.

horto.

p ero,

V.

horte,

p er,

ager, agro. agri, p eror m, agror m,

Ac.

hort m,

p er m,

agr m,

[THIRD DECLENSION.17] fabr m(in technical expressions;as praefect s fabr m,otherwise -or m); liber m(also -or m); vir m(poetical,except in technical expressions,as tri mvir m); soci m(also -or m). Some other examples are poetical,rare or late. 5.The Loc.PL is identical with the Dative : Delphis,at Delphi. 6. De s,God, is irreg lar.In addition to the forms already mentioned,it has in Nom.PL

dei,dii,di; in Dat.and Abl.PL deis,diis,dis. NOTES.1.The ending -ei for -i in the Gen.Sing,is fo nd only in inscriptions s bs eq ent to the third P nic War. 2. P er,boy,forms Voc.p ere in early Latin. 3.The original Abl.ending -d belongs to early inscriptions. 4.In early inscriptions the Nom.PL ends occasionally in es,eis,is : magistres (for magistri) vireis(for viri). The rare endings oe and e (ploir me for pl rimi) and the not ncommon ending ei belong to the same period. 5.Inscriptions often show eis for is in Dat.and Abl.Pl ral. 34.R le of Gender.S bstantives in - s are masc line; in - m ne ter. EXCEPTIONS.Feminine are : 1st.Cities and islands,as, Corinth s, Sam s. 2d.Most trees,as, fag s,beech; pir s,pear-tree. 3d.Many Greek no ns,as, atom s,atom; dialect s,dialect; method s,method; paragraph s,paragraph; period s,period.

4th. alv s,belly(m.in PLAUT.); col s(61,N.5),distaff(also m.); h m s,gro nd; vann s,wheat-fan. Ne ters are : pelag s,sea; vir s,venom; v lg s,the rabble(sometimes masc line).

35.1.The stem ends in a consonant,or in the close vowels i and . 2.The stems are divided according to their last letter,called the stem-characte ristic,following the s bdivisions of the letters of the alphabet : I.Consonant Stems. II.Vowel Stems.

36.1.The Nominative Sing lar,masc line and feminine,ends in s,which,however,is d ropped after l,n,r,s,and combines with a K-m te to form x.The final vowel of the stem ndergoes vario s changes. [18 THIRD DECLENSION.] The Vocative is like the Nominative. In the other cases,the endings are added to the nchanged stem. 2.Ne ters always form : The Nominative witho t the case-ending s. The Acc sative and Vocative cases in both n mbers like the Nominative. The Nominative Pl ral in a. Notes on the Cases. 37.Sing lar. 1.GENITIVE.In old Latin we find on inscriptions the endings - s(Gr. -o) and -es. 2.DATIVE.The early endings of the Dat.are -ei and -e.These were s c ceeded by I after the second cent ry B.C.,8 being retained in form las like i re dic ndo (Liv.,42,28,6),in addition to the s al form. 3.ACCUSATIVE.The original termination -im,in stems of the vowel declension,loses gro nd,and stems of this class form their Acc.more and more in -em,after the an alogy of consonant stems.For the classical sage see 57,R.i. 4.ABLATIVE.In inscriptions of the second and first cent ries B.C.we find -ei,-i. and -e.B t -ei soon disappears,leaving e and I.In general e is the ending for th e consonant stems and I for the vowel.B t as in the Acc.,so in the Abl.,the e ma kes inroads on the i,tho gh never to the same extent.(See 57,R.2.) On the other hand,some apparently consonant stems ass me the ending i.Th s some in -as,-atis: hereditati(200 B.C.),aetati(rare); liti(rare),s pellectill(classical; early e); also the liq id stems which syncopate in the(Jen.,as imber.The ending -d is rare and confined to early inscriptions. 5.LOCATIVE.Originally coincident in form with the Dat,the Loc.of the Third Decle

{1.Ending in a P-m te,b,p. C.M te stems,{2.Ending in a K-m te,g,c. {3.Ending in a T-m te,d,t.

(Compare the Fo rth Declension.)

A.Liq id stems,ending in l,m,n,r. B.Sibilant stems,ending in s.

THIRD DECLENSION.

1.Ending in i. 2.Ending in ,

nsion was finally blended with Abl.,both in form and in syntax.In the following proper names the old form is freq ently retained : Karthagini,at Carthage,S lmon i,at S lmo,Lacedaemoni,at Lacedaemon,Sicyoni,Troe eni,Anx ri,Tib ri.Also Acher n ti.In the case of all except Anx r,Tib r,Acher ns,the reg lar form is more commo n. The following Loc.forms of common no ns are fo nd : heri,loci,noct (principally in early Latin),orbi(Cic.),peregri(early Latin),praefiscini(early Latin),r ri,te mperi(the s al form in early Latin),vesperi.In all cases the Abl.form in e is a lso fo nd. 38.Pl ral. 1.NOMINATIVE.Early Latin shows -eis,-is in the masc.and feminine.The latter was s ally confined to vowel stems,b t also occ rs occasionally in consonant stems (io dicis).Later the ending was -es for all kinds of stems.

2.GENITIVE.The ending - m, niting with the vowel in vowel stems,gives -i m.B t m any apparently consonant stems show their original vowel form by taking -i m :(1 ) Many fem,stems in -tat-(N.tas) with -i m as well as - m.(2) Monosyllabic and p olysyllabic stems in -t,-c,with preceding consonant.(3) Monosyllables in -p and -b,sometimes with,sometimes witho t,a preceding consonant.(4) Stems in -ss-;see 48,R. 3.ACCUSATIVE.Old Latin shows also -eis.The classical form is -es for consonant a nd -is for vowel stems.B t -es begins to drive o t -is in some vowel stems and w holly s pplants it in the early Empire.On the other hand,some apparently origina l consonant stems show -is in early Latin,b t the cases are not always certain. [CONSONANT STEMS.19] I.-CONSONANT STEMS. A.Liq id Stems. 1.LIQUID STEMS IN l. 39.Form the Nominative witho t s and fall into two divisions* : A.Those in which the stem characteristic is preceded by a vowel : 1.-al,-alis : sal(with compensatory lengthening),salt;P nic proper names like Adherbal,Hannibal. 2.-il,-ilis : m gil(m gilis is late),m llet; p gil(p gilis in VARRO),boxer; vigil,watchman. -il,-ilis : sil,ochre; Tanaq il(with shortened vowel),a proper name. 3 -ol,-olis : sol,s n. 4.- l,- lis : cons l,cons l; exs l,exile; praes l,dancer. B.Two ne ter s bstantives with stems in -ll,one of which is lost in the Nominati ve : mel,mellis,honey; fel,fellis,gall.

R les of Gender.-i.Stems in -l are masc line. EXCEPTIONS : Sil,ochre, and sal,salt(occasionally,b t principally in the Sing.),are ne ter. 2.Stems in -ll are ne ter.

2.LIQUID STEMS IN m. 40.Nominative with s.One example only : hiems,hiemps,winter(f.);Gen v hiemis,Dat.,hiemi,etc. 3.LIQUID STEMS IN n. 41.Most masc line and feminine stems form the Nominative Sing lar by dropping th e stem-characteristic and changing a preceding vowel to o.

[20 THIED DECLENSION.] Some masc line and most ne ter stems retain the stemcharacteristic in the Nomina tive and change a preceding i to e. The following varieties appear : 1.-en,-enis : the masc line s bstantives lien,splen,spleen; renes (pl.),kidneys. 2.-o -inis : homo,man; nemo,no one; t rbo,whirlwind; Apollo,Apollo. Also s bstantives in -do(except praedo,G.-onis,robber);and in -go(except harpago,Gr.-onis,grappling-hook; ligo,G.-onis,mattock ); as, grando,hail; virgo,virgin. -en,inis : the masc.s bstantives

* In the following en merations of stem-varieties,Greek s bstantives are as a r le omitted.

SG.N.cons l,cons l(in.). G.cons lts, D.cons li, Ac.cons lem, V.cons l, Ab.cons le.

PL.N.cons lts,the cons ls. G.cons l m, D.cons lib s, Ac.cons les, V.cons les, Ab.cons lib s.

flamen,priest; oscen(also f.),divining bird; pecten,comb; m sical performers, cornicen, fidicen, liticen, tibicen, t bicen. Also many ne ters : as nomen,name. 3.-o(in early Latin o,in classical period weakened),-onis : leo,lion; and abo t seventy others. -o,-onis : Saxo,Saxon(late). 4.Irreg lar formations : caro,G.carnis,flesh; Anio,G.Anienis,a river; Nerio,G.Nerienis,a proper name. Sang is,blood,and pollis,flo r, drop the stem characteristic and add s to form nominative;G. sang inis,pollinis. 42. MASCULINE. SG.N. leo,lion(m.). G. leonis, D. leoni, Ac.leonem, V. leo, Ab.leone, PL.N. leones, G. leon m, D. leonibos, Ac.leones, V. leones, Ab.leonib s. FEMININE. imago,likeness(f.) nomen,name(n.) imaginis, imagini, imaginem, imago, nomen, imagine, imagines, nomina, imagin m, imaginib s, nominib imagines, imagines, imaginib s. nominib NEUTER. nominis, nomini, nomen, nomine, nomin m, s, nomina, nomina, s.

NOTE.Early Latin shows homonem,etc.,occasionally. 43.R les of Gender.1.S bstantives in -C are masc line,except caro,flesh, and those in -do,-go,and -io. EXCEPTIONS.-Masc line are cardo,hinge; ordo,rank; harpago,grapplinghook; ligo,mattock; margo,border(occasionally fem,in late Latin);and concrete no ns like p gio,dagger, titio,firebrand, vespertilio,bat. 2.S bstantives in -en(-men) are ne ter.See exceptions,41,i,2.

[CONSONANT STEMS.21] 4.LIQUID STEMS IN r. 44.Form Nominative witho t s. Stems fall into the following classes : 1.-ar,-aris: salar,tro t; proper names like Caesar, Hamilcar; the ne ters baccar,a plant; i bar,radiance; nectar,nectar. -ar,aris: Lar,a deity. -ar,aris : Nar(ENN.,VERG.),a river. -ar,arris : far(n.) spelt. 2.-er,-eris : acipenser,a fish; agger,mo nd; anser,goose; asser,pole; aster,a plant; cancer,the disease; carcer,prison; later,brick; m lier(f .),woman; passer,sparrow; t ber(m.and f.),apple; vesper,evening(68,10); vomer,plowshare(47 ,2). The ne ters acer,maple; cadaver,dead body; cicer,pea; laser,a plant; laver,a plant; papaver,poppy; piper,pepper; siler,willow; siser,skirret; s ber,cork; t ber,t mor; ber,teat; [verber],thong. -er,-ris : fo r words, accipiter,hawk; frater,brother; mater,mother;

pater,father. Also some proper names,as Diespiter, Falacer, and the names of the months, September, October, November, December. Also, imber,shower, linter,skiff, ter,bag, venter,belly, which were probably vowel stems originally(see 45,R.i). -er,-eris : aer,air; aether,ether. -er,-eris : ver,spring. 3.-or,-oris : arbor(f.),tree(stem originally in -os); some Greek words in -tor,as rhetor,rhetorician; slave names in -por,as Marcipor; the ne ters : ador,spelt; aeq or,sea; marmor,marble. -or,-oris : very many abstract words,as amor,love; color,colo r; clamor,o tcry; soror,sister; xor,wife; these may come from stems in os(see 47,4); also verbals in -tor,as victor. 4.- r,- ris : a g r,a g r; f rf r,bran; t rt r,dove; v lt r,v lt re; lem res(pl.),ghosts, and a few proper names; also the ne ters f lg r,lightning; g tt r,throat; m rm r,m rm r; s lf r,s lph r. - r,- ris; f r,thief. 5.Fo r ne ters, eb r,ivory;

fem r,thigh; iec r,liver; rob r,oak, show Gen.in -oris; two of these,fem r,iec r,have also the irreg lar forms feminis and iecineris,iecinoris,iocinoris. Iter,way, has G.itineris; and s pellex,f rnit re, has G.s pellectilis. 45. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N.labor,toil(m.) patres, G.laboris, patr m, D.labori, patrib s, Ac.laborem, patres, V.labor, patres, Ab.labore, patrib s. [22 THIRD DECLENSION.] REMARKS.1. imber,shower, linter,skiff(), ter,bag, venter,belly,

PLURAL. labores, labor m, laborib s, labores, labores, laborib s. patre.

show the vowel nat re of their stems by having Gen.Pl.in -i m. imber has also so metimes Abl.Sing,in i.(See 37,4.) 2. Rob r,strength, also forms a Nom.rob s(47,4),and vomer,plo ghshare,vomis(47,2). NOTE. Arbor, and many stems in -or,were originally stems in -s;the s became r (47) between tw o vowels in the obliq e cases,and then reacted pon the Nominative. B t many Nom inatives in -os are still fo nd in early Latin;and some are still retained in th e classical times :

SINGULAR. pater,father(m.), patris, patri, patrem, pater,

arbos(reg larly in VERG.,freq ently in LUCR.,HOR.,Ov.), honos(reg larly in VERG.,commonly in Cic.,LIVY), and others. 46.R les of Gender.1.S bstantives in -er and -or are masc line.2.S bstantives in -ar and - r are ne ter. EXCEPTIONS.Masc line are salar,tro t, and proper names in -ar; a g r,a g r; f rf r,bran; names of animals in - r and a few proper names in - r. Feminine are arbor,tree; m lier,woman; soror,sister; xor,wife.

Ne ter are

acer,maple; ador,spelt; aeq or,sea; cadaver,dead body; cicer,pea; iter,way; laser,a plant ; laver,a plant; marmor,marble; papaver,poppy; piper,pepper; siler,willow; siser,skirret; s ber,cork; t ber,t mor; fiber,teat; ver,spring; [verber],thong().

B.-Sibilant Stems. 47.The Nominative has no additional s,and changes in masc lines e to i,and in ne ters e or o to before s. In the obliq e cases,the s of the stem s ally passes over,between two vowels,in to r(rhotacism). There are the following varieties of stems : 1.-as,-aris : mas,male. -as,-dsis :

vas(n.),vessel. -as,-assis : as(m.),a copper(vowel long in Nom.by compensatory lengthening),and some of its compo nds(with change of vowel),as bes,semis. 2.-es,-erist Ceres,Ceres. -is,-eris : cinis,ashes; c c mis,c c mber(see 57,R.i), p lvis(occasionally p lvis),d st; vomis,plo ghshare(see 45,R.2). - s,-eris : Ven s,and occasionally pign s,pledge(see 4). 3.-is,-iris : glis,dormo se(./0). 4.-os,-osis : old Latin ianitos,(ianitor),doorman labos,(labor) clamos(clamor,see 45,N.). -os,-ossis : os(n.),bone. -os,-or is : flos,flower; glos,sister-in-law; lepos,charm; mos(m.),c stom; -os(n.),mo th; ros,dew. - s,-oris :

corp s,body; dec s,grace; pign s,pledge, and twelve others;on rob s (see 45,R.2). 5.- s,- ris:

Lig s,Lig rian.

- s,- ris:

the ne ters:

cr s,leg; i s,right; p s,p s(); r s,co ntry; t s,incense. 6.aes,aeris,brass. [CONSONANT STEMS.23] 48.SINGULAR. PLURAL. G. , PLURAL. SINGULAR. corpora, corporis

generib s.

REMARK.As,a copper,and os,bone,form the Gen.PL in -i m,after the sage of vowel stems(see 38,2).So also m s,mo se. 49.R le of Gender.Masc line are s bstantives in -is (-eris),and -os,-oris: excep t os,mo th(G.oris), which is ne ter. Ne ter are s bstantives in - s(G.-eris,-oris),and in - s (G.- ris);except tell s,earth(G.tell ris),which is feminine; and the masc lines, lep s,hare(G.leporis); m s,mo se(G.m ris).

C.M te Stems. 50.All masc lines and feminines of m te stems have s in the Nominative.Before s a P-m te is retained,a K-m te combines with it to form x,a T-m te is dropped. Most polysyllabic m te stems change their final vowel i into e in the Nominative . The stems show variations as follows : X

D. corporib s, Ab. genere. corporib s.

N.A.V.

gen s,kind(n.), genera, corp s,body(n.), generis, gener m, corpor m, generi, generib s, corpori, corpore.

tell s(f.),earth; m s(m.),mo se;

51.Stems in a P-m te. 1.-abs,-abis : trabs,beam; Arabs. -aps,-apis : [daps],feast. 2.-ebs,ebis : plebs,commons. 3.-eps,-ipis : princeps,chief,and fo rteen others. -ips,-ipis : stips,dole. 4.-ops,-opis : [ops],power. 5.-eps, pis :

a ceps,fowler(),and the old Latin manceps,contractor. 6.-rbs,-rbis : rbs,city.

7.-rps,-rpis : stirps,stock. SG.

52.Stems in a K-m te. 1.-ax,-acis: fax,torch,and many Greek words in -ax, Atax,proper name, -ax,-acis : fornax,f rnace; limax,snail; pax,peace; and Greek cordax,trochaic meter

N. G. D. Ac. V. Ab.

princeps,chief(m.), principis, principl, principem, princeps, principe.

PL.

principes, princip m, principib s. principes, principes, principib s.

thorax.breast plate [24 THIED DECLENSION.] 2.-ex,-ecis : faenisex,mower; nex,m rder; [prex],prayer; [resex],st mp. -ex,-ecis : allex(also allec),brine(); vervex,wether(). -ex,-egis : grex,herd; aq ilex,water-inspector. -ex,-egis : interrex; lex,law; rex,king. 3.-ex,-icis : a spex,soothsayer,and abo t forty others. -ex,-igis : remex,rower. -ix,icis : cervix,neck,and abo t thirty others; verbals in -ix,as victrix. -ix,-icis : appendix,appendix,and ten others. -ix,-igis : strix,screech-owl;also many foreign proper names,as D mnorix,which may,h owever,be forms in -ix,-igis. 4.-ox,-ocis : celox,c tter; vox,voice. -ox,-ocis : Cappadox,Cappadocian.

-ox,-ogis : Allobrox,Allobrogian. 5.- x,- cis:

- x,- cis:

l x,light; ball x,gold-d st; Poll x. - x,- gis :

coni x(- nx),spo se. - x,- gis :

fr x,fr it. 6.-rx,-rcis : arx,citadel; merx,wares(). -lx,-lcis : falx,sickle; calx,heel,lime. -nx,-ncis : lanx,dish; compo nds of - nx,as q inc nx,and a few names of animals; phalanx has G.phalangis. 7.Unclassified : nix(G.nivis),snow; bos(G.bovis;see 71),ox; [fa x] (G.fa cis),throat; faex(G.faecis),dregs. SG.

regib s.

53.Stems in a T-m te

N. G. D. Ac. V. Ab.

rex,king(m.). regis, regi, regem, rex, rege,

cr x,cross; d x,leader; n x,n t.

PL.

reges, reg m, regib s, reges, reges,

1.-as,-atis : many feminine abstracts,as aetas,age; some proper names,as Maecenas.-as,-atis : anas,d ck. -as,-adis : vas,bail;<=> lampas,torch. 2.-es,-etis: indiges,patron deity(); interpres,interpreter; praepes,bird; seges,crop; teges,mat. -es,-etis : abies,fir; aries,ram; paries,wall. -es,-etis : q ies,q iet; req ies,rest. -es,-edis : pes,foot,and its compo nds. -es,-edis : heres,heir; merces,hire. 3.-es,-itis : antistes,overseer; caespes,sod(),and some fifteen others, -es,-idis : obses,hostage; praeses,protector. -is,-itis : lis,s it. -is,-idis : capis,bowl; cassis,helmet,net

and nearly forty others,mostly Greek. 4.-os,-otis : cos,whetstone; dos,dowry; nepos,grandson; sacerdos,priest. -os,-odis : c stos,g ard. 5.- s,- tis : gl s,gl e, and some abstracts : i vent s,yo th; sal s,safety; senect s,old age; servit s,servit de; virt s,manliness. - s,- dis :

pec s,sheep. - s,- dis :

inc s,anvil; pal s,marsh; s bsc s,tenon(CD). [CONSONANT STEMS.25] 6.-aes,-aedis : praes,s rety(). -a s,-a dis :

la s,praise; fra s,fra d. 7.-is,-itis : p ls,porridge. -ns,-ntis : infans,infant; dens,tooth; fons,fo ntain; mens,mo ntain; frons,brow; pons,bridge; gens,tribe; lens,lentil; mens,mind;

r dens,rope; torrens,torrent. -s,-ntis : latinised Greek words like gigas,giant. -rs,-rtis : ars,art; cohors,cohort, fors,chance; Mars; mors,death; sors,lot. 8.Unclassified : cor(G.cordis),heart; nox(G.noctis),night; cap t (G.capitis),head; lac(G.lactis),milk. SG.N.aetas,age,(f.). PL. pedes, G. aetatis, ped m, D. aetati, Ac. aetatem, pedes, V. aetas, pedes, Ab. aetate,

pedem, pes,

aetates, aetatib s. pede,

pedib s.

54.Many s bstantives of this class were originally vowel stems (see 56),and show their origin by having the termination -i m in the Gen.Pl.and -i in the Abl.Sin g lar.Some not originally vowel stems do the same.(See 38,2.) Monosyllabic m te stems,with the characteristic preceded by a consonant,have the Gen.PL in -i m : rbi m,of cities; arci m,of citadels; monti m,of mo ntains; parti m,of parts; nocti m,of the nights.

B t - m is also fo nd in gent m(ATTIUS), part m(ENNIUS); so always op m. Monosyllabic m te stems,with characteristic preceded by a long vowel or diphthon g,vary : dot-i m,lit-i m,fa c-i ni,fra d- m(-i m),la d- m(-i m).B t praed- m,voc m. Monosyllabic m te stems with characteristic preceded by a short vowel have - m;b t fac-i m,n c- m(-i m),niv-i m(- m).

aetatib s, pedi, aetates,

aetates, aetat m,

SG.

pes,foot(m.). pedis,

PL.

pedib s,

The polysyllabic stems in -nt and -rt have more freq ently -i m,as clienti m(- m),of clients; cohorti m(- m),of companies. So

Of other polysyllabic stems feminine stems in -at have freq ently both - m and i m,as aetat m and aetati m,civitat m and civitati m,etc.; the rest have s ally - m : b t artifex,(h)ar spex,extispex,i dex,s pplex,coni x,remex,and s ally fo rnax have -i m.Forceps,manceps,m niceps,princeps have - m.Pal s has s ally pal di m. NOTES.1.The acc sative lentim from [lens] is occasionally fo nd,and partim from pars,as an adverb. 2.Sporadic ablatives in -i occ r as follows : animanti(Cic.), bidenti(L cr.), tr identi(SIL.,VERG.),capiti,consonanti(gram.),heredi(inscr.),legi(inscr.),lenti(TI TIN.,COL.),l ci(early),menti(COL.),occipiti(PERS.,A s.),pad (VARRO),parti,r dent i(VITR.).sorti,torrenti(SEN.). [26 THIED DECLENSION.] 55.R le of Gender.M te stems,with Nominative in s,are feminine. 1.Exceptions in a k-m te., Masc lines are s bstantives in -ex,-ex,-ix,and - nx;except cortex,bark, forfex,shears, fr tex,shr b, imbrex,tile, latex,fl id, obex,bolt, silex,flint, varix,varicose vein(), which are sometimes masc line,sometimes feminine;and faex,dregs, forpex,tongs, lex,law, nex,sla ghter, vibex,weal,and forms of [prex],prayer,which are feminine. calx,heel,and calx,chalk, are sometimes masc line,sometimes feminine. 2.Exceptions in a t-m te. Masc line are s bstantives in -es,-itis,except merges(f.),sheaf(); also pes,foot,and its compo nds;

ad lescenti m(- m),amanti m(- m),Infanti m(- m),parent m(-i m),serpenti m(- m),torrenti m(- m);r dent m(-i m);b t only q adrant m.

paries,wall; lapis,stone. Masc lines in -ns are :

also some s bstantivised adjectives and participles. Ne ters are only :

cor,heart, lac,milk,and cap t,head.

56.Masc lines and feminines form their Nominative in s. Some feminines change,in the Nominative,the stemvowel i into e. Ne ters change,in the Nominative,the stem-vowel i into e.This e is generally dro pped by polysyllabic ne ters after l and r. Stems in i have Genitive Pl ral in -i m. Ne ter stems in i have the Ablative Sing lar in i,and Nominative Pl ral in -ia. The varieties of stems are : 1.-is,-is : nearly one h ndred s bstantives,like civis,citi en. 2.-es,-is : thirty-five,like v lpes,fox. Some of these have also variant nominatives in -is in good sage. 3.-e,-is : some twenty ne ters,as mare,sea. 4.,-is : twenty-fo r ne ters,which form Nominative by dropping the stem characte ristic and shortening the preceding vowel : animal,-alis,animal; calcar(G-.calcaris),sp r. 5.For s bstantives in -er,-ris,see 44,2.Irreg lar is senex,(G.senis;see 57,R.3),old man.

dens,tooth,and its compo nds; fons,spring; mons,mo ntain; pons,bridge,; r dens,rope; torrens,torrent;

II.-VOWEL STEMS. 1 .Vowel Stems in i.

[VOWEL STEMS.27]

57.REMARKS.1.The proper ending of the Acc.Sing,-im,is retained always in am ssis,, b ris,plo ghtail c c mis,c c mber(see 47,2), f tis,a watervessel mephitis,malaria ravis,MN r mis,throat sitis,thirst t ssis,co gh vis;power and in names of towns and rivers in -is,as Neapolis, Tiberis; s ally in febris,fever p ppis, pelvis, restis,rope sec ris, t rris;tower occasionally in bipennis,two-edged clavis, cratis,XYM c tis,skin lens(lentis),Z /(see 54,N.1), messis,harvest navis,ship neptis,grandda ghter praesaepis,enclos re sementis,seed strigilis.] 2.The Abl.in -i is fo nd in s bstantives that reg larly have -im in Acc.(except perhaps restis) : also not nfreq ently in amnis, avis, bipennis, canalis,

PL N.colles, G.colli m, D.collib s, Ac.collis(es), V.colles, Ab.collib s.

t t t t t t

rres, rri- m, rri-b s, rris(es), rres, rri-b s.

v v v v v v

SG.N.collis,hill, G.collis, D.colll, Ac.collem, V.collis, Ab.colle,

t rris,tower.v lpes,fox. t rris, v lpis, t rri, v lpi, t rrim(em), v lpem, t rris, v lpes, t rri(e), v lpe, lpes, lpi m, lpib s, lpis(es), lpes, lpib s.

mare,sea.animal,living being. maris, animalis, mari, animali, mare, animal, mare, animal, mari, animali, maria, animalia, mar m, animali m, marib s, animalib s, maria, animalia, maria, animalia, marib s. animalib s.

civis, classis, finis(in form las), f stis, ignis(in phrases), orbis, sementis, strigilis, ng is; occasionally in ang is,]_ bilis, clavis, collis, convallis,a corbis,: messis, neptis; reg larly in ne ters in e,al,and ar,except in rete,and in the towns Caere, Praeneste. NOTE.So also the adjectives of this class,when sed as s bstantives by ellipsis : annalis(sc.liber,book),chronicle; natalis(sc.dies,day),birthday; Aprilis(sc. mensis,month), and all the other months of the Third Declension : Abl., annali, natali, Aprili, Septembri,etc. B t i venis,yo ng man; and aedilis,aedile, have Abl., i vene, aedile; adjectives sed as proper no ns have generally Abl.in e,as, I venalis,I venale. 3.In the Gen.PL,instead of the ending -i m,- m is fo nd always in canis,dog, i venis,yo ng man, panis,bread, senex,old, str es,heap, vol cris,bird; s ally in apis,bee, sedes,seat, vates,bard; freq ently in mensis,month. On imber,etc.,see 45,R.i.Post-classical and rare are ambag m, caed m, clad m,

vepr m, and a few others; mar m(the only form fo nd) occ rs once. 4.In the Nom.PL -eis and -is are fo nd in early Latin.So occasionally in consona nt stems(see 38,i),b t in classical times s ch sage is do btf l. 5.The proper ending of the Acc.PL,-is(archaic,-eis),is fo nd freq ently in the c lassical period along with the later termination -es,which s pplants -is wholly in the early empire.On the other hand,-is for -68 in consonant stems is confined to a few do btf l cases in early Latin. [28 THIRD DECLENSION.] 58.R le of Gender.1.Vowel stems,with Nominative in -es are feminine;those with N ominative in -is are partly masc line,partly feminine. Masc line are: amnis,river(f.,early); antes(pl.) rows; axis,axle; b ris,plo ghtail; casses(pl.),toils; ca lis,stalk; collis,hill; crinis,hair; ensis,glaive; fascis,fagot; follis,bellows;da f nis,rope(f .,LUCR.); f stis,c dgel; ignis,fire; manes(pl.),Manes; mensis,month; m gil(is),m llet; orbis,circle; panis,bread; postis,door-post; torris,.firebrand;h ng is,nail; vectis,lever; vermis,worm. Common are : callis,footpath , canalis,canal; cl nis,ha nch; corbis,basket; finis,end; retis,net(also rete,n.); sentis( s ally pl.),bramble;a scrobis,ditch; torq is(es),necklace; toles(pl.),goitre; vepres(pi-),bramble. REMARK.Of the names of animals in -is,some are masc line;

tigris,tiger(fem,in poetry); canis,dog(also fem.); piscis,fish;others feminine : apis,tee; avis,bird; ovis,sheep; felis,cat( s ally feles). 2.Vowel stems,with Nominative in -e,-al,-ar,are ne ter.

59.Of stems in ,the monosyllabic stems,two in n mber,belong to the Third Declen sion. SG.N. gr s,crane(f.)PL. gr es G. gr is gr m D. gr i gr ib s Ac. gr em gr es V. gr s gr es Ab. gr e gr ib s.

S s,swine(commonly f.), s ally s b s,in Dat.and Abl.Pl ral. TABLE OF NOMINATIVE AND GENITIVE ENDINGS op THE THIRD DECLENSION. The * before the ending denotes that it occ rs only in the one word cited. 60. NOM. GEN. -al -ali-s animal, -al-is Hannibal, -al *-al-is sal, -el -ell-is mel, -il -il-is p gil, -il-is Tanaq il, -ol *-ol-is sol, - l - l-is cons l, -en -en-is renes(pl.) -en in-is nomen, -ar -ari-s calcar, -ari-s nectar, animal. proper name. salt. honey. boxer. proper name. the s n. cons l. kidneys. name. sp r. nectar. -ar *-arr-is far, -er -er-is anser, -r-is *-iner-is iter, -er *-er-is ver, -or -or-is color, -or-is aeq or, *-ord-is cor, - r - r-is f lg r, -or-is - r - r-is f r, A.NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A LIQUID. NOM. GEN. spelt. goose. pater, father. jo rney. spring. colo r. expanse. heart. lightning. rob r, oak. thief.

[VOWEL STEMS.29] B.NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH s,OR x(cs,gs). NOM.GEN. NOM.GEN. -as *-as-is vas, dish. -is *-lt-is p ls, . *-ar-is mas, male.m(p)s *-m-is winter. *ass-is as, a copper. -ns -nd-is leafy branch.

2.Vowel Stems in

porridge hiems, frons,

-at-is aetas. age. -nt-is frons, forehead.-as *-ad-is v as, s rety. -rs -rd-is co cors, concordant. *-at-is anas. d ck. -rt-is pars, part. -aes*-aed-is praes, s rety. -bs -b-is rbs, city. *aer-is aes, brass. -ps -p-is stirps, stalk. a s -a d-is fra s, cheatery. -eps -ip-is princeps,chief. -es -is n bes, clo d. *- p-is a ceps, fowler. -ed-is pes, foot. -ax -ac-is pax, peace. *-er-is Ceres, Ceres. -ax *-ac-is fax, torch. -et-is abies, fir. -aex -aec-is faex, dregs. -et-is q ies, rest. -a x -a c-is [fa x,] throat. -es -et-is seges, crop. -ex -ec-is nex, death. -id-is obses, hostage. -ic-is i dex, j dge. -it-is miles, soldier. -eg-is grex, flock. -is -is amnis, river. *-ig-is remex, rower. -id-is lapis, stone. -ex *-ec-is allex, pickle. -in-is sang is,blood. *-ic-is vibex(ix ),weal -er-is cinis, ashes. -eg-is rex, king. -is *-it-is lis, s it at law. -ix -ic-is cervix, neck. *-ir-is glis, dormo se. -ix -ic-is calix, c p. -os *-od-is c stos, keeper. *-ig-is strix, screechowl. or-is flos, flower. *-iv-is nix, snow. -ot-is cos, whetstone. -ox -oc-is vox, voice. *-ov-is bos, ox. -ox *-oc-is praecox, early-ripe. -os *oss-is os, bone. *-og-is Allobrox , Allobrogian. - s *- d-is pec s, cattle,sheep. *-oct-is nox, night. *- r-is Lig s, a Lig rian. - x -c-is cr x, cross. -or-is. corp s, body. - g-is coni x, spo se. -er-is scel s, crime. - x - c-is l x, light. - s - -is s s, swine* - g-is [fr x,] fr it. - d-is inc s, anvil. -ix -ic-is falx, sickle. - r-is i s, right. -nx -nc-is lanx, dish.. - t-is sal s, weal. -rx -rc-is arx, citadel. C.NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A MUTE. -ac *-act-is lac,milk. - t *-it-is cap t,head. -ec *-ec-is allec,pickle(68,12). D.NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A VOWEL. -e -o -i-s -on-is mare,sea. Saxo,Saxon.

-o

-on-is pavo,peacock. -in-is homo,man. *-n-is caro,flesh.

[30 FOURTH DECLENSION.] FOURTH DECLENSION. 61.The Fo rth Declension embraces only dissyllabic and polysyllabic stems in . The endings are those of the Third Declension. In the Genitive and Ablative Sing lar,and in the Nominative,Acc sative,and Vocat ive Pl ral(sometimes,too,in the Dative Sing lar),the of the stem absorbs the v owel of the ending,and becomes long.In the Dative and Ablative Pl ral it is weak ened to i before the ending -b s. The Acc sative Sing lar,as always in vowel stems,has the ending -m,witho t a con necting vowel(compare the Acc sative in -i-m of the stems in i),hence - -m. MASCULINE. SG.N.fr ct s,fr it. PL. corn a, G. fr ct s, corn m, D. fr ct i(fr ct ), cornib s, Ac. fr ct m, corn a, V. fr ct s, corn a, Ab. fr ct . cornib s. REMARKS.1.Dat.Abl. The original form - b s is retained always in ac s,needle arc s,bow q erc s,oak tree trib s,tribe and in classical times in part s.birth B t art s,limb gen ,knee lac s,pool port s,harbor spec s,cave tonitr ,th nder ver ,spit have both forms. 2.Dom s,ho se,is declined : G.dom -os(archaic),dom -is and domi (early),dom - s(late),dom s. D.domo(early),dom i Ac.dom m. PL. NEUTER.

fr ctib s.

corn .

fr ct s,

corn ,

fr ct s,

fr ctib s,

corn , corn ,

fr ct

m,

fr ct s,

SG.

corn ,horn. corn s,

V.dom s. Ab.dom- (sporadic),domo. Loc.domi. Pl.N.dom s. G.domor m(LUCR.always,VERG.,FLOR.),dom m(late). D.Ab.domib s. Ac.domos,dom s. Classical forms are those in black-faced type.A classical variant for domi(Loc.) is dom i.

senati(Cic.,SALL.,LIVY), t m lti(SALL.).

senat , fr ct , which became the only form for ne ters.In classical times - in masc.and fem,is poetical only(CAESAR ses,however, cas , exercit , magistrat , senat , q aest ,profit ),b t extends to prose in the A g stan age and later. 3.Pl ral : Nom.,Acc.,Voc.In imperial inscriptions - s occ rs. 4.Genitive.The poets freq ently contract - m into - m for metrical reasons,and this sage was sometimes extended to prose(not by CICERO) in common words;as pas s m for pass m.

5.Col s,distafflm,belongs properly to the Second Declension,b t has variants : Q. COl ,Ab.col ,PL,N.,Ac.,col s,from the Fo rth. [FIFTH DECLENSION.31] 62.R le of Gender.S bstantives in - s are masc line; those in - are ne ter. EXCEPTIONS.Feminines are ac s,needle( s ally), dom s,ho se, Id s(pl.),the Ides, man s,hand, pen s,vict als(also m.),

2.Dative.In the early time - ei is fo nd very rarely for - i.Also

,as

NOTES.1.Sing lar: Genitive.In early inscriptions we find the ending -os,as os;and in early a thors not nfreq ently -is,along with the contraction s),which becomes the reg lar form in classical times.In inscriptions nder mpire - s is occasionally fo nd,as exercit s.The termination -i,after the gy of the Second Declension,is common in early Latin,and is still retained me words even into the classical period;as

senat s ( i the e analo in so

portic s,pia a(), q inq atr s(pl.),festival of Minerva, trib s,tribe. Early and late Latin show some f rther variations. FIFTH DECLENSION.31 63.The stem ends in -e;Nominative in s. In the Genitive and Dative Sing lar -e has been shortened after a consonant. In the Acc sative Sing lar we find always e. The ending in the Genitive Sing lar is that of the Second Declension,-i;the othe r endings are those of the Third. MASCULINE. . SG.N.dies,day. , G.diei, D.diei, Ac.diem, res, V.dies, res, Ab.die. reb s. PL.dies, dier m, dieb s, dies, dies, dieb s. rei, rei, rem, res, re. SG.res,thing. PL.res rer m, reb s,

REMARKS.1.Pl ral: Gen.,Dat.,All.Common in b t two s bstantives,dies,res.Late Lat in shows also specieb s,and very rarely speb s and acieb s. 2.Many words of the Fifth Declension have a parallel form,which follows the Fir st Declension,as mollitigs,softness,and mollitia.Where this is the case,forms o f the Fifth Declension are s ally fo nd only in the Nom.,Acc.,and Abl.Sing lar . NOTES.1.Sing lar : Genitive.The older ending -g-s is fo nd sporadically in earl y Latin,b t s ally the ending -g-i,which became later -8-1 after consonants,tho gh early poets show n mero s examples of rgl,spgi,fidel.gl was occasionally sc anned as one syllable,whence arose the contraction g,which is retained not nfre q ently in the classical period;so acig(CAES.,SALL.),die(Pi-,CAES.,SALL.,LIVY,la ter),fidg(PL.,HOR.,Ov.,late Prose),and other less certain cases; Jocc rsvery rar ely,principally in early Latin(b t dil,VERG.,pernicil,Cic.).Plebes,in combinatio n with trib n s,aedilis,scit m,often shows a Gen.plebl(plebei). 2.Dative.The contraction -g is fo nd,b t less often than in the Gen.; awe (SALL. );die,facig(early Latin);fidg(early Latin,CAES.,SAXL.,LIVY),pernicig (LIVY),and a few other forms.The Dat.in -i is fo nd very rarely in early Latin. 64.R le of Gender.-- S bstantives of the Fifth Declension are feminine except d ies(which in the Sing,is common,and in the Pl.masc line),and meridies(m.),midday . [32 DECLENSION OF GREEK SUBSTANTIVES.] Declension of Greek S bstantives.

FEMININE

65.Greek s bstantives,especially proper names,are commonly Latinised,and decline d reg larly according to their stem-characteristic.Many s bstantives,however,eit her retain their Greek form excl sively,or have the Greek and Latin forms side b y side.These variations occ r principally in the Sing lar,in the Pl ral the decl ension is s ally reg lar. Sing lar Forms of Greek S bstantives. N. G. D. Ac. V. Ab. N. G. D. Ac. V. Ab. Penelope, Penelopes, Penelopae, Penelopen, Penelope, Penelopa. First Declension. Leonidas, Anchises, Leonidae, Anchisae, Leonidae, Anchlsae, Leonidam,an, Anchisen,am, Leonida, Anchlse,a,a, Leonida. Anchisa.

Third Declension. N. Solon,Solo, aer,air. Xenophon, Atlas, G. Solonis, aeris, Xenophontis, Atlantis, D. Soloni, aeri, Xenophonti, Atlanti, Ac. Solona,em, aera,em, Xenophonta,em, Atlanta, V. Solon, aer, Xenophon, Atla, Ab. Solone. aere. Xenophonte. Atlante. N. G. D. Ac. V. Ab. Thales, Thal-etis,-is, Thal-eti,-i, Thal-eta,-en,-em, Thale, Thale. Paris, Paridis,os, Parid,i, Par-ida,-im,-in, Pari,Paris, Paride. heros,hero, herois, heroi, heroa,em, heros, heroe.

[IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES.33] ii. iii. N. Achilles,ens, G. Achillis,ei,i,eos, D. Achilli, Dido,oni, Ac. Achillem,ea,en, V. Achilles,e,e ,e, Ab. Achille,e,i. ii. iii. iii. iv. Dido, Did s,onis,

Socraten,em, Socrate,es, Socrate.

Dido,onem, Dido, Dido,one

Socrates, Socratis,i, Socrati,

ii.iii. N. Orphe s, G. Orphei,ei, D. Orpheo, Ac.Orphe m,ea, V. Orphe , Ab.Orpheo.

Mixed Declensions. ii.iii. ii.iii. Athos, Oedip s, Atho,onis, Oedip-odis,-i, Atho, Oedipodi, Atho,on,onem, Oedip- m,-oda Athos, Oedipe, Athone. Oedip-ode,-o.

Delos, s, Deli, Delo, Delon, m, Dele, Delo.

Second Declension. Ilion, m, Ilii, Ilio, Ilion, m, Ilion, m, Ilio.

Panth s, Panthi, Pantho, Panth n,

Androgeos, s, Androgei, Androgeo, Androgeon,o,ona Panth , Androgeos, Paatho. Androgeo.

. REMARKS.1.In the Gen.PL -en and -eon are fo nd in the titles of books;as,Georgi con,Metamorphoseon. 2.Many Greek names,of the Third Declension in Latin,pass over into the First De clension in the Pl ral;as,Th cydidas,Hyperidae,and many names in -crates;as SSc rates;Pl.,Socratae(also SOcrates). 3.In transferring Greek words into Latin,the Acc sative Sing lar was sometimes taken as the stem :

3.Accusative.-a.is the m st c mm n terminati n in the Third Declensi n,and is f und regularly in s me w rds therwise Latinised;as aera,aethera.Stems in us ually have - ,very rarely - n. 4.Plural.In the Sec nd Declensi n e is f und ccasi nally in the N m.,in early Latin;as,adelph e.The Third Declensi n sh ws frequently es in the N m.and as i n the Accusative;als ccasi nally e in the N m.and Acc. f neuters,and -si(but nly in the p ets) in the Dative. 5.F r ther peculiarities,n t bservable in the paradigms,the dicti naries sh ul d be c nsulted.S metimes the f rms are merely transliterati ns f Greek cases. IRREGULAR SUBSTANTI ES. 1.Redundant Substantives.(Abundantia.) 67.A.Heter gene us Substantives, r th se wh se gender varies : 1.The variati n ccurs in several cases in either number r in b th. clipeus,-um,shield, c llum,-us,neck, c stum,-us,a plant(rare) f rum,-us,market, gladius,-um,sw rd, intibus,-um,succ ry(rare), iugulum,-us,c llar-b ne, nardum,-us,nard(rare), nasus,-um,n se,

[34 IRREGULAR SUBSTANTI ES.]

palatum,-us,palate, pileus,-um,cap, sagum,-us,cl ak, tergum,-us,back,

thesaurus,-um,treasure, uterus,-um,w mb, vallus,-um,palisade, and many thers.

 

abr t num,-us,a plant(rare), aev m(urn),-us,age, baculum,-us,staff, , balteus,-um,girdle, buxus,-um,b x-w d(rare), [calamister],-um,curling-ir n(rare), caseus,-um,cheese, cav m(um),-us,cavity, cingulum,-us,belt,

 

2.Dative.The ending -i is very rare;and rarer still is the Dat.in nes in - ,and Dat.in -y fr m N minatives in -ys.

fr m femini

66.NOTE .1. gu r: Ge t ve.The Greek term t o oeo(o o) ppe r r re y e r y L t ,but u(ou) more freque t,e pec y geogr ph c me ,etc. The term t o -o () is rare except in feminine patr nymics in -is,-as,(G.-id s,-ad s).

  

So ,Acc.,(punch) bowl. c ,c is(m sc.), nd c (c ,,Acc., m . m , m , d m , e.

) c

(f m.).

 

  

 

 

 

 



            

  

  

2.The gender varies in Singular and Plural. a.The Plural has -a s metimes,while the Singular ends in -us( r -er) : clivus,hi ll,i cus,jest,l cus(l ca,l calities;l ci,usually passages in b ks,t pics),and many thers,especially names f places. b.The Plural has -i,while the Singular ends in -um : filum,thread,frenum,bit,ras trum,h e,and many thers. 68.B.Heter clites, r substantives which sh w different stems with the same N min ative;Metaplasts, r th se which have certain f rms fr m an ther than the N minat ive stem.

2.1st,5th.

duritia,-es,hardness, thers.See 63,R.2. mendum,-a,fault,

3.2d,1st.

balneum,bath, delicium,pleasure, epulum,banquet, fulmentum,pr p.

5.2d,4th.Many names f trees f the Sec nd Declensi n have certain cases acc rd ing t the F urth;never,h wever,the Gen.and Dat.Pl.,and very rarely the Dat.Sin g.; as c rnus,cupressus,fagus,ficus,laurus,myrtus,pinus,and a few thers.

arcus has G.arci; c natus(-um),iussus(-tun),vultus have N m.Pl.in a; senatus has Gen.Sing,senati.See 61,RR,NN. Finally,s me substantives f the Sec nd Declensi n f rm individual cases acc rdi ng t the F urth : fasti(Ac.pl.fastus),fretum(N.fretus,Ab.fretu),lectus(G.lectus),tributum( N.tributus),and thers.

palumbes,pige n,and palumbus;

7.3d.2d.

as,vessel,and vasum;



6.2d,5th.

diluvium,-es,fl

d.

and a large number f substantives f the F urth Declensi n which have cases f the Sec nd;s

 

 

Als

angip rtus,alley, c lus,distaff, d mus,h use, ne r tw

4.2d,3d.

sequester,trustee,

Mulciber, ulcan.

 

The f ll wing f rm their Plural acc rding t

and many

1.1st,2d.

esseda,-um,chari t, strea,-um, yster,

margarita,-um,pearl, materia,-es,matter,

sertum,-a,wreath. the First Declensi n nly :

 

 

 

  

[iuger],acre,and iugerum; all Greek n uns in -a(G.atis),as p ema,p em(G.p ematis),but PL Gen.p emat rum,Da t.Abl.p ematis. 8.3d,5th.Fames,hunger, tabes,c rrupti n, have Abl.fame,tabe; requies,quiet(G.-etis) has Acc.requiem,Abl.requie; satias(G.atis) is early and late f r satietas,sufficiency, and a f rm saties is cited fr m late auth rs; plebs(G.plebis),c mm ns,and plebes(G.plebei). 9.4th,3d. Specus,cave, has ccasi nally f rms f the Third Declensi n. 10.2d,3d,1st. esper,evening, has Acc.vesperum;Dat.Abl.vesper ;Pl.N m.vespera f the Sec nd Declensi n;Acc.ves peram;Abl.vespera f the First; Gen.vesperis; Abl.vespere;L c.vespere,vesperi f the Third.

F rms f the Sec nd Declensi n are rare; f the Third early and late. 12. ariati ns in the same Declensi n : femur(G.fem ris,feminis,etc.); iecur (G.iec ris.iecin ris,etc.); pecus,early,als pecu(G.pe ris,pecudis,etc.). Als allec and allex,baccar and baccaris,cassis and cassida,lac and lacte (early ),panis and pane(early),rete and retis,satias and satietas. [IRREGULAR SUBSTANTI ES.35]

II.Defective Substantives. I.SUBSTANTI ES DEFECTI E IN NUMBER. 69.A.Substantives used in Singular nly:Singularia tantum. M st abstract substantives,and names f materials;such as

B.Substantives used in Plural nly : Pluralia tantum.

iustitia,

justice,





11.4th,2d,3d.

Penus,f

d,(G.us).

aurum,g ld.

 

 

 

 

straits. d r-p sts. r ws( f vines), arms.

neck(sing,early,late, and p et.).

parietinae, ruins. cibaria, victuals. penates, the Penates. claustrum, l ck(sing.late). phalerae, trapping s(). clitellae, pack-saddle. praec rdia, rum,diaphragm. c dicilli, a sh rt n te. praestrigiae, jugglers'tricks. c mpedes, fetters. preces,-um, prayer. crepundia, rum, rattle. primitiae, first-fruits. cunae, cradle. quisquiliae, rubbish. divitiae, riches. reliquiae, remains. dumeta, rum, th rn-bush. renes, kidneys. epulae(epulum), banquet. salinae, salt-pits. excubiae, watching. scalae, stairway. exsequiae, funeral pr cessi n, sent s, brambles(). exta, rum, the internal rgans, sp lia, rum, sp ils(sing,late ,and exuviae, equipments. p et.). facetiae, witticism(sing,earsp nsalia,ium, betr thal. ly and late). suppetiae, succ r(early and late) fasti(fastus), calendar. talaria,ium, winged sandals. fauces, gullet. tenebrae, darkness . feriae, h lidays. thermae, warm bat hs. flabra, breezes. t nsillae, t nsils. f res, d r(sing,early, t rmina, c lic. late and p et.). tricae, tricks. fraga, rum, strawberries. utensilia,ium, necessaries. grates, thanks. valvae, f ldingd rs. hiberna, winter quarters. verbera,um,

 

 



cancelli, wedding. casses, sing.late). caulae, d cervices, relati ns.

manubiae, sp ils. dessert. minae, threats. tw -h rse,f ur-h rse m enia,ium, t wn-wall. chari t(sing.late), nundinae(-num), market. lattice. nuptiae, t ils(snare). pening. palpebrae, parentalia,

festival f r dea

liberi, manes,

children. shades f the de

eyelids(

 

 



altaria,ium, e. ambages, es(). angustiae, i ns. antae, arries(). antes, arma, rum, ad. armamenta, rum, tackle. bellaria, rum, bigae,quadrigae,

altar(sing.late). r und ab ut.

insidiae, lactes, lamenta, laut miae,

ambuscad intestin lamentat st ne-qu



   

sc urging(sing.p et and late). Idus,Kalendae, Ides,Calends, N nae, N nes. vindiciae, a legal claim. incunabula, swaddling-cl thes, virgulta, rum, shrubbery. indutiae, truce. viscera, entrails(sing,p et inferiae, sacrifices f r the dead. and late). [36 IRREGULAR SUBSTANTI ES.] NOTES.1.F ur f these have the Abl.Sing,in -e: ambage,c mpede,fauce,prece.

Iuppiter; R ma; capillus,hair; r pluralia tantum,as mai res,ancest rs; Quirites; liberi,children; pulm nes,lungs. Many f these are n t included in the ab ve list,which is meant t c ntain nly the principal f rms. Akin t pluralia tantum are : C.Substantives used in Plural with a special sense : Heter l ga. aedes,is, temple(better aedis), aedes, h use,pa lace. aqua, water, aquae, mineral springs. auxilium, help, auxilia,auxiliaries,reinf rcements. carcer, pris n, carceres,barriers. castrum, f rt, castra,camp. cera, wax, cerae,waxen tablets. c mitium, place f assemblage, c mitia,assemblage f r v ting. c pia, abundance, c piae,f rces,tr ps. delicium, pleasure, deliciae,pet. facultas, capability. facultates,g ds. finis, end,limit, fines,territ ry,b rders. f rtuna, f rtune, f rtunae,p ssessi ns. habena, strap, habenae,reins. impedimentum,hindrance, impedimenta,baggage. littera, letter( f the alphabet), litterae,epistle,literature. ludus, game,sch l, ludi,public games. pera, w rk, perae,w rkmen. pars, part, partes,als r le. r strum, beak, r stra,the tribunal at R me. s rs, l t, s rtes,als racle. tabula, b ard,tablet, tabulae,als acc unts. vigilia, a night-watch, vigiliae,pickets. 2.SUBSTANTI ES DEFECTI E IN CASE.

 

 





      

2.Names f pers ns a tantum,as

r t wns,and c llectives and the like,may be either singulari



 

     

 

70.A.Substantives ccurring in nly ne case : Gen.dicis,f rm , Acc.Infitias (ire),(t ) lie; pessum(ire),(t ) perish; Abl.p nd ,in weight; sp nte, f free will; tab ,c rrupti n(Gen.late);and many verbals in u,as accitu,adm nitu,arcessitu,c actu,c mpressu,c ncessu,d mitu,inductu, interp situ,invitatu,iussu ( ther f rms late),iniussu,mandatu,missu, natu,permissu,pr mptu,r gatu.

B.Substantives with nly tw cases : fas,nefas,Sing.N.Ac.; Instar,Sing.N.Ac.; interneci ,Sing.Ac.Ab.; naucum,Sing.G.Ac.; secus,Sing.N.Ac.; spinter,Sing. N.Ac.; suppetiae,Plur.N.Ac.,and a few thers. S me verbals in -us have in Plural nly N m.and Acc.,as impetus,m nitus.

C.Substantives with three cases : faex,Sing.N.,D.,Plur.Ab.; virus,slime;Sing. N.,G.,Ab. D.Defective substantives with m re than three cases are numer us,but in the clas sical peri d the m st imp rtant are: calx(lime),c s,[daps],dica,[dici ],flamen(blast), f rum,[frux],[indag ],later,lux,[ ps], s(m uth), pax,remex,vis(p wer),[vix],

[ADJECTI ES.37] 71.

as,assis(m.), a c pper. iter,itineris(n.), e. auceps,aucupis, f wler. iecur,iec ris(n.), liver. b s(f r b vs),b vis(c.), x,c w. iecin ris,iecineris,i cineris. G.Pl.b um. Iuppiter, I vis.

 

  

   

E.

Nem ,n b dy,substitutes f r Gen.and Abl. nullius h minis,and null h mine. In the Dat.and Acc.it is n rmal; nemini,neminem.

III.Peculiarities. way,r ut

 

and m st substantives f the Fifth Declensi n.The N minatives in brackets d ccur,but nly blique cases.

 

Greek neuters in - s have

nly N m.and Acc.Singular.

A few thers ccur

ccasi nally in ante-classical and p st-classical Latin.

 

 

 

  

   

  

  

    

 

n t

sn w. b ne(48 R.). m uth. fl ur. W d. ld man.

ADJECTI ES. 72.The adjective adds a quality t the substantive.Adjectives have the same decl ensi n as substantives,and acc rding t the stem-characteristic are f the First and Sec nd, r Third Declensi n. Adjectives f the First and Sec nd Declensi n. 73.Stems in - f r masculine and neuter,-a f r feminine; n minative in -us,-a,-u m;(er),-a,-um.The same variati ns in terminati n ccur as in the substantives;ex cept that adjectives in -ius f rm Singular Genitive and cative regularly.See 3 3,R.1 and 2. M. B nus,b na,b num,g d. F. N.

M.

Miser,misera,miserum,wretched. SG.N.miser, misera, miserum. PL. miseri, miserae, misera. G. miseri, miserae, miseri. miser rum,miserarum,mise r rum, D. miser , miserae, miser . miseris, miseris, miseris. Ac. miserum, miseram, miserum. miser s, miseras, misera. . miser, misera, miserum. miseri, miserae, misera. Ab. miser , misera, miser . miseris, miseris, miseris. [38 ADJECTI ES.]

Piger,pigra,pigrum,sl w.

pigrae, pigr , pigram, pigrum. pigra, pigrum.

pigris, pigr s, pigri,

SG.N.piger, G. pigri, pigr rum. D. pigr , Ac. pigrum, . piger,

pigra, pigrum. PL. pigrae, pigri.

pigri, pigr rum,

pigrae, pigris, pigras, pigrae,

pigra. pigrarum, pigris. pigra. pigra.

   

   

    

     

   

     

b b b b

n , num, ne, n ,

b b b b

nae, nam, na, na,

b b b b

n . num. num. n .

b b b b

nis, n s, ni, nis,

b b b b

nis, nas, nae, nis,

b b b b

  

 

 

F. N. SG.N. b nus, G. b n rum. D. Ac. . Ab.

b na, b ni,

b num. PL. b nae, b ni.

b ni,

b nae, b na. b n rum,

b narum, nis. na. na. nis.





 

far,farris(n.) spelt. fel,fellis(n.), gall(). femur,fem ris(n.), thigh. feminis.

supellex,supellectilis(f.),furniture. enus, eneris, enus.

 

 

D.Ab.bubus,b bus. mel,mellis(n.), caput,capitis(n.), head. nix,nivis(f .), anceps,ancipitis, tw -headed. s, ssis(n.), praeceps,-cipitis,headl ng. s, ris(n.), car ,carnis(f.), flesh. p llis,p llinis(m.), PL G.carnium. sanguis,sanguinis(m.), Ceres,Cereris, Ceres. senex,senis,

h ney.

    

 

 

 

  

  

REMARK.F r irregularities in the declensi n f amb ,b th, du ,tw , see 95;f r meus,my, see 100,R.1. 74.Stems in -r f ll w the same principle in the f rmati n f the N minative mas culine as the substantives,except that -us is retained in ferus,wild, pr perus,quick, praepr perus,praep sterus,absurd, inferus,l wer(infer is early), superus,upper(super is early), and a few thers in late Latin; als when -r is preceded by a l ng v wel;as, austerus,harsh, maturus,early, pr cerus,tall, purus,pure, severus,seri us, sincerus,sincere, serus,late, verus,true. REMARKS.1.Dextera,dexterum,etc.,right,are f und side by side with dextra,dextrum ,etc.,thr ugh ut the language(see 8,2).CAESAR uses nly the sh rter f rm.

75.NOTES ON THE CASES. 1.The Gen.Sing,in -i fr m adjectives in -ius ccurs ccasi nally in inscripti ns and in late auth rs.The Gen.Sing.fem,in early Latin had s metimes ai,and in ins cripti ns ccasi nally -aes and -as.

5.In p etry,but at all peri ds,we find -um al ngside f - rum and -arum in the G en.Plural. 6.In the Dat.and Abl.PL -iis fr m adjectives in -ius is ften c ntracted t is; usually in names f m nths and in adjectives f rmed fr m pr per names.In early i nscripti ns -abus is f und ccasi nally f r -is in the Dat.and Abl.PL feminine.

4. ery rarely in early inscripti ns d es the N m.PL masc.end in -eis,and in case the N m.Pl.fem f a perfect participle ends in -ai.

3.In early inscripti ns the -d f the Abl.is

ccasi nally retained. ne

2.The Dat.Sing.fem,in early Latin scripti ns in -a.

ccasi nally ended in -ai,and in the ldest in

2.A few adjectives f this class lack the N m.Sing,wh lly r in part;s n ceterus r p sterus in the classical peri d.

 

 

    

 

  

 

   

Ab.

pigr , pigra, pigr .

pigris,

pigris,

pigris.

  

there is

76.The s -called pr n minal adjectives

and their c mp unds,sh w the f ll wing variati ns in declensi n [ADJECTI ES.39] 1.They usually make the Gen.Sing,in -ius f r all genders.(alterius,alterutrius, alius,neutrius,nullius,s lius,t tius,ullius,unius,utrius) REMARKS.1.The Gen.alius is very rare,and as a p ssessive its place is usually ta ken by alienus. 2.The i f the ending -ius(except in alius) c uld be sh rtened in p e try.This was usually the case with alter,

uter;as,utriusque.

2.They usually make the Dat.Sing,in -i. (alteri,alterutri,alii,neutri,nulli,s li, t ti,ulli,uni,utri)

alterae, null , t t , and perhaps t tae. al is fo nd in early Latin for alii. 3.In the compo nd alter ter we find s ally both parts declined; sometimes the second only.

NOTE.Regular f rms are s metimes f und,but in classical pr se

nly

NOTE.The regular f rms are early and rare;in classical pr se c.Cam.16,48) and ccasi nally aliae.

and regularly in the c mp unds

nly nulli(Cic. R s

alter, ne f the tw ; alteruter(a c mbinati n f alter and uter),either alius, ther; neuter,neither; nullus,n ne; s lus, s le; t tus,wh le; ullus,any; unus, ne; uter,which f the tw ,

 

  

 

    

 

  

  

 

 

 

f the tw ;

4.Ali s makes Nom.and Acc.Sing,ne ter irreg larly : ali d. NOTE.Alis and alid,for ali s and ali d,are early and rare;the latter,however, oc c rs several times in LUCR,and once in CATULLUS.

Adjectives of the Third Declension. 77.The declension of the adjectives of the Third Declension follows the r les gi ven for the s bstantives. Most adjectives of the Third Declension are vowel stems in -i,with two(rarely th ree) endings in the Nominative. The remaining adjectives of the Third Declension are consonant stems and have on e ending only in the Nominative. ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 78.1.These have(except stems in -ri) one ending in the Nominative for masc line and feminine,one for ne ter. Most stems in -i form the masc line and feminine alike, with Nominative in s;b t the Nominative ne ter weakens the characteristic i into e.(Compare mare,sea.) 2.Several stems in -i,preceded by r(cr,tr,br),form the Nominative masc line,not by affixing s,b t by dropping the i and inserting short e before the r,as,stem acri,sharp, Nom.,acer(m.),acris(f.),acre(n.). These adjectives are acer, alacer, campester, celeber, celer, eq ester, pal ster, pedester, p ter, sal ber, Silvester, terrester, vol cer, and the last fo r months;and are sometimes called adjectives of three endings. The e belongs to the stem in celer,celeris,celere,swift, and therefore appears in all cases. [40 ADJECTIVES.] M.and F. N. F. N. SG.N.facilis, facile, easy. acer,sharp, G. facilis, facilis, M. acris, acris, acre, acris,

acres(is), acres, acrib s.

acres(is), acres, acrib s.

REMARK.Stems in -ali and -ari differ from the s bstantival declension in not s f fering apocope in the Nom.Sing,ne ter,except occasionally capital.See 56. 79.REMARKS.1.Many adjectives of two endings(except stems in -ri) have also -e in the Ablative.This is fo nd chiefly in the poets,very rarely,if ever,in classica l prose,occasionally in early and preA g stan prose,and more often in inscriptio ns.When,however,these adjectives become proper names,-e is the r le.See 57,R.2,N . 2.The Gen.PL in - m is fo nd occasionally in inscriptions,freq ently in the poet s.In classical prose are fo nd only Titiens m and familiar m.

2.In the Acc.PL,masc.and fem.,of adjectives,the ending -is(eis) is fo nd alongsi de of -es in every period of the lang age,tho gh in decreasing proportion,and af ter the A g stan period principally in omnis. ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. 80.Adjective stems of one ending(consonant stems) close with l,r,s, a p m te, a k m te,or a t m te. Examples are :

a dax,bold,

felix,l cky,

d plex,do ble, ferox,fierce,

particeps,sharing, inops,poor, participis. inopis.

caelebs, nmarried, caelibis. tr x,savage,

vigil,alert,memor,mindf l, vigilis. memoris. veteris.

pa per,poor,cic r,tame, p bes,ad lt,vet s,old, pa peris. cic ris. p beris,

NOTES.1.The Nom.Pl.has in early Latin not

nfreq ently -is.

acrib s,

acrib s,

acris, D. facili, facili, acri, Ac. facilem, facile, acre, V. facilis, facile, acre, Ab. facili. facili. acri. PL.N.faciles, facilia, acria, G. facili m, facili m, acri m, D. facilib s, facilib s, acrib s, Ac. faciles(is),facilia, acria, V. faciles, facilia, acria, Ab. facilib s. facilib s. acrib s.

acri, acrem, acer, acri. acres, acri m, acres,

acri, acrem, acris, acri.

acri m,

[ADJECTIVES.41] Present active participles are also consonant stems and follow the same declensi on. 81.The stem varieties are : 1.Liq id stems in (a) -l: vigil(G.vigilis),alert, pervigil; (b) -r: par(G. paris),eq al, impar(these two lengthen the vowel in the Nom.), compar ,and three others; pa per(G.pa peris),poor, ber; memor(G.memoris),mindf l, immemor; concolor(G.-oris), and three other compo nds of color; degener(G.-eris),from gen s(G.generis). 2.Sibilant stems in (a) -s : exos(G.exossis),boneless(LUCR.); (b) -r : gnar s (G.gnar ris;PLAUT.),} Lig s, vet s; p bes(G.p beris), imp bes.a 3.M te stems in (a) a K-m te : a dax(G.a dacis),bold,and fo r others; felix (G.felicis), pernix, atrox(G.atrocis), ferox, velox; exlex(G.-legis); tr x (G.tr cis), red x; the m ltiplicatives in -plex(G.-plicis),as simplex,etc. (b) A P-m te : inops(G.inopis); caelebs(G.caelibis);

dives,rich, deses,slothf l, compos,possesed of, pr dens,wise, concors, harmonio s, divitis. desidis.ycompotis. pr dentis. concordis.

a dacis. tr cis.

felicis.

d plicis.

ferocis.

compo nds of -ceps(G.-cipis, from capere),as particeps, and of -ceps(G.-cipitis,from cap t),as anceps, praeceps(PLAUT.sometimes ses,in the Nom.,ancipes,praecipes,etc.). (c) A T-m te : hebes(G.hebetis) and three others; loc ples(G.-pletis) and three others; dives (G.divitis),for which in poetry dis(G.ditis), sospes; compos(G.compotis), impos; s perstes(G.-stitis), ales; exheres(G.edis); deses(G.desidis), reses; compo nds from s bstantives : consors(G.-sortis), exsors; concors, discors, misericors, socors, vecors; expers(G.-ertis), iners, sollers; amens(G. ament-is), demens; interc s(G.c t-is); pernox(G.-noct-is); topes(G.-ped-is), q adr pes, alipes; adjectives and participles in -ans,-ens(G.-ant-is,-ent-is) and proper names in as(G.at-is),-is(G.-it-is),-ns(G.-nt-is),-rs(G.-rt-is), Arpinas, Samnis, Veiens, Camers. 82.The consonant stems have the same forms in all the genders,except that in the Acc sative Sing lar,and in the Nominative,Acc sative,and Vocative Pl ral,the ne ter is disting ished from the masc line and feminine. In the obliq e cases they follow in part the declension of vowel stems;th s,

The participles,as s ch,have e;b t sed as s bstantives or adjectives,either e o r i,with tendency to . 2.In the ne ter Pl ral they have ia;except vet s,old, which has vetera.Many have no ne ter. 3.In the Genitive Pl ral they have : i m,when the stem-characteristic is precede

1.In the Ablative Sing lar they have I and e when when sed as s bstantives commonly e.

sed as adjectives commonly I;

d by a long vowel or a consonant; m,when the characteristic is preceded by a sh ort vowel. The participles have i m. [42 ADJECTIVES.] M.and P. N. M.and F. N. M.and F. N.

pr denti(e) pr denti(e)

vetere(i) veteres, veter m,

vete vete vete

M.and F . N.

N.

M.and F.

SG.N. amans,loving, amans, PL.amantes, amantia, G. amantis, amantis, amanti m, amanti m, D. amanti, amanti, amantib s, amantib s, Ac. amantem, amans, amantes(is), amantia, V. amans, amans, amantes, amantia, Ab. amante(i). amante(i). amantib s. amantib s. 83.REMARK.In early and late Latin,and at all periods in the poets,-e is often fo nd for -i in the Abl.Sing lar.In classical prose we find reg larly compote, deside, imp bere, participe, pa pere, p bere, s perstite, vetere, and freq ently divite(b t always diti), q adr pede, sapiente.

felicib s.

pr dentib s, pr dentib s.

felicia,

pr dentes,

pr dentia,

felicia,

pr dentes,

pr dentia,

veteres, veteres,

veterib s, vete

felicib s,

pr dentib s, pr dentib s,

veterib s, vete vete

felici m,

pr denti m, pr denti m,

PL.N. felices, ra, G. felici m, r m, D. felicib s, rib s, Ac. felices, ra, V. felices, vetera, Ab. felicib s, rib s.

felicia,

pr dentes,

pr dentia,

pr dens,

pr dens,

vet s,

vet

pr dentem,

pr dens,

pr denti,

pr denti,

pr dentis,

pr dentis,

veteris, veteri, veterem,

vete vete vet

SG N. felix,l cky,felix, s, G. felicis, felicis, ris, D. felici, felici, ri, Ac.felicem, felix, s, V. felix, felix, s, Ab.felici(e) felici(e) re(i)

pr dens,wise,pr dens,

vet s,old, vet

antecedens, candens, consentiens, despicicns, effl ens, hians, imminens, infl ens, profl ens, conseq ens(b t seq ens not before LIVY), tit bans, vertens. NOTES.1.In the Nom.and Acc.PL -is for es belongs to early Latin and the poets, b t a few cases of the Acc.are still fo nd in CICERO.In the case of participles is is very common,and is the r le in VERGIL and HORACE.In the ne ter,-a for -ia is fo nd only in bera,vetera;ditia is always sed for the nsyncopated form div itia. 2.Compo nd adjectives,whose primitives() had - m in Gen.PL,have s ally - m instead of -i m; q adr pes,q adr ped m, and other compo nds of pes; inops,inop m; s pplex,s pplic m. Also, cic r,cic r m; vet s,veter m; dives, divit m; loc ples,loc plet m(rare, s ally -i m). In the poets and in later writers,- m is not nfreq ently fo nd where classical prose ses -i m. Irreg lar Adjectives. 84.A.ABUNDANTIA. 1.Some adjectives which end in - s,-a,- m,in the classical times, show occasiona lly in early Latin,in the poets,and in later Latin,forms in -is,-e, e.g. imbecill s and imbecillis; Infren s and Infrenis; bii g s and bii gis; violent s and violens; indecor s and indecoris;so also perpet s and perpes. In a n mber of other adjectives the variant forms are very rare or disp ted. [ADJECTIVES.43]

With participles,-i is se shows -e also in

s al when they are

sed as adjectives, b t classical pro

2.Many adjectives which end in -is,-e,in the classical times,show parallel forms in - s,-a,- m,in early Latin,and more rarely in late Latin.Adjectives in - s,-a ,- m,in early Latin,seem to have had a tendency to go over into forms in -is,-e. Th s, hilar s is the reg lar form in early Latin;in CICERO it is sed side by side with hilaris,

inermis and inerm s; imberbis and imberb s; alaris and alari s; a xiliaris and a xiliari s; intercalaris and intercalari s; talaris and talari s. 85.B.DEFECTIVE. 1.Several adjectives lack a Nom.Sing lar,wholly or in part : as, cetera(f.),ceter m, perper m(n.), n per m(n.), primoris(G.), bimaris (G.), bimatris(G.), tricorporis(G.),and a few others. 2.Some adjectives are defective in other cases : th s, exspes and perdi s,-a are fo nd only in the Nom.;

exlex only in the Nom.and Acc.(exlegem); pernox only in Nom.,Abl.(pernocte),and Nom.Pl.(pernoctes, rare); centiman s has only the Acc.Sing.(Hor.,Ov.);also niman s (Liv.),

and a few others. C.INDECLINABLES. Neq am; potis,and pote(early); fr gi; macte(mact s,- m,very rare);

and later hilaris is

niversal.Other examples in the classical period are

necesse,necess m,and necess s(early and poetical); vol p and vol pe(early);and the j dicial damnas. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 86.The Degrees of Comparison are : Positive,Comparative,and S perlative. The Comparative is formed by adding to the consonant stems the endings -ior for the masc line and feminine,and -i s for the ne ter. The S perlative is formed by adding to the consonant stems the endings -issim s, -a,- m(earlier -iss m s). Vowel stems,before forming the Comparative and S perlative,drop their characteri stic vowel. POSITIVE. SUPERLATIVE. N.

COMPARATIVE. M.and F.

NOTE.In early Latin we find very rarely -ios for ior;also -ior sed for the ne t er ae well. [44 ADJECTIVES.] Pec liarities. 87.1.Adjectives in -er add the S perlative ending(-r m s) -rim s (for -sim s by assimilation;see 9,i) directly to the Nominative masc line.The Comparative follo ws the r le. POSITIVE. SUPERLATIVE. miser,a, m, miserrim s. celer,is,e, celerrim a. acer,acris,acre, s. wretched, swift, sharp, acrior, miserior, celerior, acri s, COMPABATIVE. miseri s, celeri s,

REMARKS.1.Dexter,right,and sinister,left,have always dexterior and sinisterior i n the Comparative.Deterior,worse,deterrim s,lacks a Positive. 2. Vet s,old,has Comp.veterior(archaic) or vet stior;S p., veterrim s. Mat r s,ripe,has occasionally S p.mat rrim s in addition to the normal m at rissim s.

acerrim

wise,

pr dentior,

pr denti s,

pr dentissim s.

bold,

a dacior,

a daci s,

sef l,

tilior,

tili s, a daciss

alt s,a, m, fortis,e, fortissim s. tilis,e, tilissim s. a dax, im s. pr dens,

high,

altior,higher, alti s, brave, fortior,

altissim s,a, m,highest. forti s,

NOTE.In early Latin and in Inscriptions this r le is occasionally violated.Th s celerissim s in ENNIUS;integrissim s,miserissim s,in inscriptions. 2.Some Comparatives in -erior,whose Positive is lacking or rare,form the S perla tive either in -rem s by metathesis();or in -im s or - m s;or in both.These are: citerior,on this side,citim s(rare); exterior,o ter,extrem s,extim s(latter not in Cic.); dexterior(87, i,R.i;once in Cic.),dextim s(rare;not in Cic.); inferior,lower,infim s,im s; interior,inner,intim s; posterior,hinder,postrem s,post m s; s perior, pper,s prem s,s mm s. 3.Six adjectives in -ilis add -lim s to the stem,after dropping -i,to form the S perlative;perhaps by assimilation : facilis,easy; difficilis, hard; similis,like; dissimilis, nlike; gracilis,slender,and h milis,low. facilis,Comp.facilior,S p.facillim s. 4.Adjectives in -dic s,-fic s,-vol s,borrow the Comparative and S perlative from the participial forms in -dicens,-ficens,and -volens. benevol s,benevolent,Comp.benevolentior,S p.benevolentissim s. maledic s,sc rrilo s.maledicentior,maledicentissim s. magnific s,disting ished.magnificentior,magnificentissim s. NOTE.Benevolens,malevolens,maledicens,still occ r in early Latin. 5.In like manner egen s and provid s form their Comparative and S perlative. egen s,needy,egentior,egentissim s. provid s,far-sighted,providentior,providentissim s. [ADJECTIVES.45] 6.Adjectives in - s(os),preceded by a vowel(except those in -q os), form the Com parative and S perlative by means of magis and maxime, more and most.

REMARK.--B t pi s,pio s, which lacks the Comparative,forms the S perlative reg larly, piissim s(in inscriptions also pientissim s);likewise in late Latin, impi s.

Comp.antiq ior,

S p.antiq issim s.

idone s,fit, B t antiq os,old,

Comp.magis idone s,

S p.maxime idone s.

NOTES.--1.A few words,chiefly in early Latin,show the normal comparison.In Cic.o nly,assid issime(adv.) and alsi s. 2.Comparison by means of pl s and pl rim m is late. 7.Some Comparatives and S perlatives are in se,whilst the corresponding Positiv e is either lacking or rare. So deterior(87,1.R,1); ocior,swift,ocissim s; potior,better,potissim s; exterior,o ter(87,2),from exter s,on the o tside,and prep,extra,witho t; s perior, pper(87,2),from s per s,on the top,and prep,s pra,above; inferior, lower(87,2),from infer s,below,and prep,infra,below; posterior,hinder(87,2), from poster s,coming after,and prep,post,after; citerior,on this side(87,2), from citer,and prep,citra,on this side. 8.The Positive stem of existing Comparatives is sometimes met with only in a pre position or an adverb;as, ante,before;anterior,that is before; prope,near;propior,proxim s; lterior,f rther, ltim s,from ltra,beyond; interior,inner,intim s,from intra,within; prior,former, prim s,first,from pro,before; seq ior(late),worse,from sec s.

9.Many adjectives lack one or both of the degrees of comparison; especially thos e denoting material,relationship,time,etc. Nov s,new, fals s, ntr e, merit s,deserved, have no Comparative. Longinq os,afar, propinq os,near, sal taris,healthf l, i venis,yo ng(Comparative i nior),and senex,old(Comparative senior), have no S perlative."Yo ngest" and "oldest" are expressed by minim s,maxim s(nat ). NOTE.The Pla tine and late medioxim s,middlemost,lacks Positive and Comparative. 10.Dives,rich,shows in Cic.only divitior and divitissim s; otherwise the Comparative and S perlative are fo nd principally in poetry and la ter prose,the more s al forms being the syncopated ditior,ditissim s. 88.Participles sed as adjectives are s bject also to the same laws of compariso n : as,

[46 ADJECTIVES.] 89.The S perlative follows the declension of adjectives of Three Endings of the First and Second Declensions.The Comparative is declined according to the Third Declension, th s :

alti s. alti s.

altiores, altiores, altiora. altiorib s.

REMARKS.1.In classical prose the Abl.Sing,ends n -e.In the poets and in early an d late prose often in -i. 2.Extremely rare is the ending -is for -es in the Nom.Pl ral. In the Acc.Pl.this ending -is(-eis) is more common b t still not freq ent,and co nfined mainly to pl ris,minoris,maioris,melioris. The ne ter in -ia is fo nd rarely in compl ria,and perhaps once in pl ria. 3.The Gen.PL in -i m is fo nd in pl ri m and compl ri m only. 90.Irreg lar Comparison.

ADVERBS. 91.Most adverbs are either obliq e cases or m tilated forms of obliq e cases of nominal or pronominal stems.

neq am, worthless, neq ior, gi(indecl.),fr gal, fr galior, sim s.

neq i s,

neq issim s. fr fr galis

m lt s,

m ch, S.---

pl s(no Dat.nor Abl.), pl rim s. Pl.pl res, pl ra. compl res, compl ra and -ia.

parv s,

small, minor,

min s,

minim s,

great, maior,

mai s,

maxim s.

bad,

peior,

pei s,

bon s, optim s. mal s, . magn s,

good,

melior,

meli s, pessim s

Ab.

altiore and -i, altiore and -i. altiorib s,

altiori.

altiorib s,

G. altioris, altior m. D. altiori, altiorib s. Ac. altiorem, altiora. V. altior,

M. and SG.N.altior,

F. alti s.

N. M.and F. PL. altiores, altioris. altior m,

amans,loving, apert s,open,

amantior, apertior,

amantissim s; apertissim s.

N. altiora.

The cases from which they are derived are principally the Acc sative and the Abl ative. 1.(a) From the Acc sative are S bstantival Adverbs in -tim.This was a favorite f ormation,and is sed very often in all periods.In the classical times the adverb s of this form are : Acervatim,artic latim,cent riatim,certatim,generatim,gradatim, gregatim,membratim,pa latim,privatim,separatim,sing latim,statim, s mmatim,viritim,trib tim,strictim,pedetemptim,raptim,f rtim,partim, praesertim,confestim,and a few others;disg ised forms of -tim are : caesim,incisim,sensim,c rsim,passim,vicissim,for caed-tim(9,i-3),etc.; also interim. [ADVEERB.47] (b) A few very common adverbs are,perhaps,from Acc sative Sing lar feminine of a djectives and pronominal stems.Chiefly clam, secretly, coram, in one's presence, palam, openly, perperam, wrongly, tam, so, q am, as, aliq am, some, iam, already; and forms in -fariam,as bifariam,m ltifariam,etc.

M lt m,m ch; pa l m,a little; nimi m,too m ch; ceter m,for the rest; prim m,first; postrem m,finally; potissim m,chiefly; facile, easily; d lce,sweetly; triste,sadly; imp ne,scot-free(); aliq ant m, somewhat, and others. To the Comparatives belong magis,more; nimis,too; satis,eno gh. (d) The Acc sative Pl ral feminine is fo nd in alias,at other times, perhaps in

(c) The Acc sative Sing lar ne ter of many adjectival and pronominal stems is ed as an adverb.This is tr e of all Comparatives.

foras,o t-of-doors. The Acc sative Pl ral ne ter is fo nd in alia,cetera,omnia, and occasionally in reliq a and a few others. 2.(a) From the Ablative are some s bstantival adverbs;the principal ones in clas sical Latin being domo,at home; impendio,greatly; initio,at the o tset; modo,only; oppido,very; principio,in the beginning; privato,privately; v lgo,commonly; forte,by chance; magnopere, greatly,and other compo nds of -opere; gratiis,for nothing, and ingratiis,and a few others. (b) Ablatives are also adverbs in e from adjectives in - s and -er : alt s,lofty,alte; p lcher,bea tif l,p lchre; miser,wretched,misere. Also fere and ferme(S p.),almost. (c) The Ablative of some adjectives and prono ns serves as an adverb : t to,safely; falso,falsely; perpet o,ceaselessly; contin o,forthwith; improviso, nexpectedly; primo,at first; hoc,here; isto,there,etc. (d) In a few cases the adverbial form is the Abl.Sing,feminine : alia,otherwise; aliq a,somehow; dextera and dextra,to the right; sinistra and laeva,to the left hand; q a,on which side; recta, straightway, and some others.

(e) A large n mber of these adjectives show adverbs in two endings,sometimes wit h a difference in meaning : cons lte and cons lto,p rposely; certe,at least,and certo,certainly (certe scio,I certainly know;certo scio,I know for certa in); rare,thinly, and raro,seldom; vere,in tr th,and vero,tr e b t; recto,correctly,and recta,straightway; dextera or dextra,to the right;and dextero,skilf lly. (I) Ablatives are also q i,how(archaic),neq iq am,to no p rpose; alioq i,otherwi se; perhaps also di ,by day,and its compo nds. [48 ADVERBS.] 3.Locative in origin are the following,in addition to those mentioned nder 37,5 : die(in combination with n meral adjectives in early Latin,as die septimi ) and its compo nds cottidie,daily, hodie,today, pridie,the day before, postridie,the day after; q otannis,yearly; foris,o tside. Also many forms from the pronominal stems,as hic,illic,istic(isti belongs to ear ly Latin and VERG.); sic,so, t( ti, tei),as; ibi,there, and its compo nds alibi, ibidem; bi(c bi),where,and its compo nds. 4.A n mber of adverbs cannot be referred to.a definite case,as : adverbs of sepa ration:

hinc,hence, illinc(illim),istinc(istim),thence; temporal adverbs :

and its compo nds; also,

t c q q

nc,then, m,when, ondam,once, ando,when ?

ante,before; post(poste),after; paene,almost; prope,propter,near; saepe,often; circiter,aro nd; praeter,past; ergo, therefore; cras,tomorrow; ha d(ha ,ha t),not; item,likewise; s sq e deq e, p and down; vix,scarcely. 92.1 Adjectives and participles of the Third Declension form their adverbs by ad ding -ter(-iter) to the stem;stems in -nt dropping the t, and stems in a k-m te inserting the connecting vowel i before the ending;also a few adjectives of the Second Declension : fortis,brave,fortiter; ferox,wild,ferociter; pr dens,foreseeing,pr denter. Exceptions : a dax,bold,a dacter(seldom a daciter); difficilis,hard to do,diffic lter,difficiliter (b t generally,non facile,vix,aegre),and others. 2.A large n mber of adjectives of the Second Declension in - s,-a,- m,and -er,-e ra,-er m,form in early and late Latin their adverbs by dropping the stem vowel a nd adding -iter(those in -t s added -er only).Many of these occ r in classical w riters alongside of the normal form in -e : h maniter and h mane,h manely; largiter and large, lavishly; t rb lenter and t rb lente,rioto sly. 3.Some adverbs of origin are formed from s bstantival or adjectival stems by the ending -t s.In classical Latin mainly antiq it s,from early time; divinit s,from the gods; f ndit s,from the fo ndation; penit s,from the depths; radicit s,from the,roots; also int s,from within. 4.The termination -vers s,-vors m,is sed to show direction whither; b t in clas sical Latin it is fo nd principally in the adverbs : intrors s (introvors s),inwards; prors s(- m),onwards; r rs s(- m,r s m), back; s rs m(s s m), p; vors m,towards. 5.A very large n mber of adverbs are formed by adding vario s other terminations ;as,

-de : inde,thence, nde,whence; -dem : -do : q ando,when,etc.; -dam : -d m : -per: q ondam,once; d d m,a while ago; vixd m,hardly yet,etc.; n per,lately, par mper,a little, semper,always,etc.; -q am: -sec s: -ten s: [NUMERALS.49] 6.Syntactical and miscellaneo s : admod m,very(to a degree), den o, anew, imprimis;s per,above, and its compo nds,des per,ins per; extemplo,at once; sq e,to, and its compo nds; invicem,in t rn; adeo, so ; antea,before; interea,meanwhile; postea,after; praeterea,besides; propterea,on that acco nt, and a few others. mq am,ever, n mq am,never,etc.; extrinsec s, o tside,etc.; q aten s,how far ? etc.

POSITIVE. alte,loftily, p lchre,bea tif lly, misere,poorly, fortiter,bravely, a dacter,boldly. t to,safely, facile,easily,

alti s, p lchri s, miseri s, forti s, a daci s, t ti s, facili s,

COMPARATIVE. altissime. p lcherrime. miserrime. fortissime. a dacissime. t tissime. facillime.

SUPERLATIVE.

93.The Comparative of the adverb is the Acc sative ne ter of the Comparative of the adjective.The S perlative ends in -is-sime,-er-rime,etc.,according to the S perlative of the adjective.

pridem,long ago, itidem,likewise,etc.;

COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.

sati s,better,

NUMERALS. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 94.The Cardinal n merals answer the q estion q ot, how many? and are the n mbers sed in co nting.The Ordinal n merals are derived from these and answer the q e stion q ot s,which one in the series ? They are as follows :

[50 NUMERALS.]

1.CABDINAL NUMBERS. 8 VIII octo 9 IX novem 10 X decem 11 XI nidecim 12 XII d odecim 13 XIII tredecim 14 XIV q att ordecim 15 XV q indecim 16 XVI sedecim 17 XVII septendecim 18 XVIII d odeviginti 19 XIX ndeviginti 20 XX viginti 21 XXI viginti n s 22 XXII viginti d o 23 XXIII viginti tres 24 XXIV viginti q att or 25 XXV viginti q inq e 26 XXVI viginti sex 27 XXVII viginti septem 28 XXVIII d odetrinta 29 XXIX ndetriginta 30 XXX triginta 40 XL q adraginta 50 L q inq aginta 60 LX sexaginta 70 LXX sept aginta 80 LXXX octoginta

2.ORDINAL NUMBERS. octav s non s decim s ndecim s d odecim s terti s decim s q art s decim s q int s decim s sext s decim s septim s decim s d odevicesim s ndevicesim s vicesiimis vicesim s prim s vicesim s sec nd s vicesim s terti s vicesim s q art s vicesim s q int s vicesim s se t s vicesim s septim s d odetricesim s ndetricesim s tricesim s q adragesim s q inq agesim s sexagesim s sept agesim s octogesim s

1.CARDINAL,NUMBERS. 1 I n s, na, n m 2 II d o,d ae,d o 3 III tres,tria 4 IV q att or 5 V q inq e 6 VI sex 7 VII septem

2.ORDINAL NUMBERS. prim s,-a,- m(prior) sec nd s(alter) terti s q art s q int s sert s septim s

bene,well. male,ill, [parv s],small. [magn s],great, m lt m,m ch, cito,q ickly, di ,long, saepe,often, n per,recently, satis,eno gh,

meli s, pei s, min s,less, magis,more, pl s,more, citi s, di ti s, saepi s,

optime. pessime. minime,least. maxime,most. pl rim m. citissime. di tissime. saepissime. n perrime.

[NUMERALS.51] 1.CARDINAL NUMBERS. L NUMBERS. 1001 MI mille et n s 1101 MCI mille cent m n s 1120 MCXX mille cent m viginti 1121 MCXXI miUe cent m viginti n s s 1200 MCC mille d centi 2000 MM d o milia(millia) bina milia 2222 d o milia d centi viginti d o 5000 I q inq e milia q ina milia 10,000 CCI decem milia dena milia 21,000 n m et viginti milia 100,000 cent m milia centena milia [milia 1,000,000 decies centena(cent m) 2.ORDINA

millesim s d centesim s bis millesim s bis millesim s d centesim s vicesim s sec nd s q inq ies millesim s decies millesim s semel et vicies millesim s centies millesim s decies centies millesim s

95.The Cardinal n merals are indeclinable,except : n s,one, d o,two, tres,three, the h ndreds beginning with d centi,two h ndred, and the pl ral milia,tho sands, which forms mili m and milib s.

M and F.

tria. trib s.

N. N.d o,two, G.d or m, D.d ob s, A.d os,d o, Ab.d ob s,

d d d d as, d d ab s, d

d ae,

o, tres,three, ar m, d or m, tri m, ab s, d ob s, trib s, o, tres,tris, ob s, trib s,

tria. tri m. trib s.

millesim millesim millesim millesim

s s s s

prim s centesim s prim s centesim s vicesim s centesim s vicesim s prim

90 xc nonaginta 100 C cent m 101 CI cent m et n s 115 CXV cent m et q indecim 120 CXX cent m et viginti 121 CXXI cent m viginti n s 200 CC d centi,-ae,-a 300 CCC trecenti 400 CCCC q adringenti 500 D(I) q ingenti 600 DC sescenti 700 DCC septingenti 800 DCCC octingenti 900 DCCCC nongenti 1000 M(CI) mille

nonagesim s centesim s centesim s prim s centesim s(et) q int s decim s centesim s vicesim s centesim s vicesim s prim s d centesim s trecentesim s q adringentesim s q ingentesim s sescentesim s septingentesim s octingentesim s nongentesim s millesim s

Like d o is declined

REMARKS.1.For the declension of n s see 76.It occ rs also in pl ral forms in co nnection with pl ralia tant m,as nis litteris(Cic. Att,v.9,2),

or with another n meral in the sense only;in the latter sense also with s bstant ives. 2.The Gen.of the h ndreds, d centi,etc,.,ends in - m and not -or m. This m st be disting ished from the se of the ne ter sing lar in - m as a collective,as argenti sescent m(L c.),a six h ndred of silver. 3.The Pl.milia,mili m,milib s,are treated almost always as s bstantives,the adje ctival form being the Sing lar.

2.For d ae late Latin shows occasionally d o,and in inscriptions d a,for ne ter [52 NUMERALS.] d o,is sometimes fo nd.The Gen. d m(old d om) for d or m is not nfreq ent.In the Dat.and Abl., d o is fo nd in inscriptions,and for ambob s occasionally ambis. In the Acc.Pl.masc., d o and ambo for d os and ambos are q ite common in early Latin,and also in classical times,b t the better forms are d os,ambos. 3.Q attor is fo nd for q att or occasionally in inscriptions,and in early poetry q att or was sometimes scanned as a dissyllable. 4.In inscriptions the forms meilia and millia are also fo nd. 5.In regard to spelling of the Ordinals we find in early Latin

NOTES.1.The form oinos for (CAT.,37,17).

n s is fo nd in early Latin.A Voc. ne is occasional

ambo,-ae,-o,both.

q inct s as well as q int s; sept m s and dec m s reg larly,and often the endings -ensim s and -ens m s in Ordinals from vicesim s on.

1.From 10 to 20,as in the tables,or separately : decem et tr5a. 2.The n mbers 18,19,28,29,etc.,are commonly expressed by s btraction;occasionall y,as in English,b t never in CICERO,and very rarely in other classical a thors.d odecent m is not fo nd,and ndecent m b t once(PLIN.MAI.).

3.From 20 to 100,the compo nd n merals stand in the same order as the English : twenty-one,viginti n s;or,one and twenty, n s et (atq e) viginti;as,twenty-one years old : annos n m et viginti(viginti n m), n m et viginti annos nat s.B t compo nds like sept aginta et tres are not ncommon,tho gh avoided by good write rs. 4.From 100 on,et may be inserted after the first n meral,if there be b t two n m bers;as,cent m q att or,or cent m et q att or.If the smaller n mber precedes,the et sho ld be inserted;likewise in all cases where a word is inserted within the compo nd n meral,as d centi anni et viginti.If there be three n merals,the et i s reg larly omitted;exceptions are very rare. 5.In compo nd ordinals alter is preferred to sec nd s. 6.Centena milia is often omitted after the n meral adverb decies = 1,000,000;esp ecially in stating s ms of money. 7.Fractions are expressed by pars(omitted or expressed) in combination with dimi dia(1/2),tertia(1/3),q arta(1/4),etc.A Pl ral n merator is expressed by a Cardin al;as,d ae q intae(2/3).The fraction is often broken p;as,pars dimidia et terti a(5/6=1/2+1/3).The even denominators co ld be divided;as,dimidia tertia(1/2 x 1/ 3 = 1/6).Instead of dimidia witho t pars,dimidi m is sed. 2.N meral Signs. D is short for 10,M for CI.Adding on the right of 1 m ltiplies by 1; 100 = 5000;1000 = 50,000.P tting C before as often as stands after m ltiplies the right-hand n mber by 2;CI = 1000;CCI = 10,000;CCCI = 100,000.A line above m ltiplies by 1000;V = 50 00.A line above and at each side m ltiplies by 100,000: |XIIII| =1,400,000.These signs may be combined : th s,|XIII| XXX VII D or |XIII| XXXVII MD = 1,337,500.P LIN.,N.H.iv.,12,24.Other signs are , (inscr.) for 50,S ,(inscr.) for 1000,and for 100,000(inscr.),and q for 500,000(inscr). [NUMERALS.53]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

sing li,-ae,-a,one each. bini,-ae,-a,two each. terni(trim) q aterni q ini seni septeni octoni

97.

3.Distrib tive N merals. 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 triceni q adrageni q inq aggni sexagem sept ageni octogeni nonageni centeni

96.

1.Compo nd N merals.

9 noveni 102 centeni bini 10 deni 125 centeni viceni q ini 11 ndgni 200 d ceni 12 d odeni 300 treceni 13 terni deni 400 q adringeni 14 q aterni deni 500 q ingeni 15 q ini deni 600 sexceni (sesceni) 16 seni deni 700 septingeni 17 septeni deni 800 octingeni 18 octoni deni,d odeviceni 900 nongeni 19 noveni deni, ndeviceni 1000 sing la milia 20 viceni 2000 bina milia 21 viceni sing li 3000 trina milia 22 viceni bini,bini et viceni 10,000 dena milia 28 d odetriceni 100,000 centena milia 29 iindetriceni These answer the q estion q oteni,how many each ? REMARKS.1.The Gen.Pl.masc.and ne ter ends s ally in - m, except that sing l s h as always sing lor m,and CICERO ses binor m. 2.The Distrib tives are sed with an exactness which is foreign to o r idiom,whe never repetition is involved,as in the m ltiplication table.B t when sing li is expressed,the Cardinal may be sed. 3.The Distrib tives are sed with pl ralia tant m : binae litterae, two epistles .B t with these ni is sed for one,trini for three : nae litterae,trinae litte rae. 4.The same r les as to the insertion or omission of et apply to the Distrib tive s as to the Ordinals(96,1.3,4). NOTES.1.The poets and later prose writers occasionally se the Distrib tives for Cardinals,with words other than pl ralia tant m(R.3);also some forms of the Sin g lar.Especially noteworthy is the combination trin m n ndin m,which is technica l,and therefore fo nd also in model prose. 2.Parallel forms not fo nd in classical times are q adrini(early,late),and the l ate d (o)centni,trecenteni,q adringenteni,q ingenteni,ses(x)centeni, milleni,etc . [54 NUMERALS.] 4.M ltiplicative N merals. Only the following forms occ r : do ble, triple, q adr ple.

These answer the q estion,how many fold ?

5.Proportional N merals. Only the following forms occ r :

1 simpl s,-a,- m,

single, 4 q adr pl s

1 2 3 4

simplex, d plex, triplex, q adr plex,

single,

5 q inc plex 7 septemplex 10 decemplex 100 cent ples

These answer the q estion,how many times as great ? 98.NUMERAL ADVERBS. 1 semel,once, et bis, 2 bis,twice. 3 ter 4 q ater 5 q inq ies(-ens) 6 sexies(-ens) 7 septies(-ens) 8 octies(-ens) 9 novies(-ens) 10 decies(-ens) 11 ndecies(-ens) 12 d odecies,etc. 13 ter decies,tredecies 14 q ater decies,q att ordecies 15 q inq ies decies,q indecies 16 sexies decies,sedecies 17 septies decies 18 d odevicies,octies decies 19 devicies,novies decies 20 vicies millies 21 semel et vicies,vicies et semel, vicies semel * 22 bis et vicies,vicies vicies bis * 30 tricies 40 q adragies 50 q inq agies 60 sexagies 70 sept agies 80 octogies 90 nonagies 100 centies 200 d centies 400 q adringentios 500 q ingenties 600 sexcenties(sescentieo) 700 septingenties 800 octingenties 900 nongenties 1,000 millies 2,000 bis millies 100,000 centies 1,000,000 millies millies,decies centies millies

These answer the q estion q otiens(es);how often ? -------------------------------------------------------------------------------* Not semel Vicies,bis vicies,etc.,beca se that wo ld be,once twenty times = 20 t imes;twice twenty times = 40 times;this,however,does not hold for n merals betwe en 10 and 20. [PRONOUNS.55] REMARKS.1.These adverbs,from q inq ies on,have an older form in -ens; q inq iens. In and q otiens,how often,t his remained the more s al form in classical times. 2.The combination of an adverb with a distrib tive adjective was m ch liked by t he Romans : as bis bina for q aterna,etc. B t the normal forms are not nfreq ent. NOTE.For the adverbs from ndecies on,examples are very rare,and some are cited only from the grammarians.So,when two forms are given,one is often d e to the gr ammarians;th s totiens,so often,

2 d pl s, 3 tripl s

do ble. 7 sept pl s 8 oct pl s

q inq ies decies, sexies decies, are cited only from PRISCIAM .The order,too,of compo nd adverbs varies.

99.Prono ns point o t witho t describing. NOTE.The prono n is not a word sed instead of a no n.The no n says too m ch,for all no ns(proper as well as common) are originally descriptive;the prono n simp ly points o t.The no n says too little,beca se it cannot express person,as ego, I,t ,tho ;it cannot express local app rtenance,as hic,this(here),ille,that(there ). A.PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 100.I.Personal Prono ns of the First Person. SUBSTANTIVE.

POSSESSIVE.

to,for me, me, from,with,by me. we.

REMARKS.I.The Voc.Sing.masc.of me s is mi,

me s ocell s(PLAUT.; possibly,however,appositional),b t mi anime. 2.Nostr m in the Gen.Pl.is the form for the Partitive Genitive. NOTES.1.Early Latin shows the following : SG.,N.ego;G.mis;D.mi,mihei (inscr.);mi he(inscr.);Ac.med,meme;Ab.med(meme is do btf l);Pl.,N.Ac. enos(in Carmen Arvale only);G.nostror m,nostrar m(for nostr m);D.Ab. nobeis(inscr.). 2.In late Latin mi also serves for the Voc.Sing.fem,and Voc.Pl.masc. Me m,nostr m,in the Gen.Pl.of the Possessives,are not nfreq ent in earl y Latin.

3.The forms of me s,of t i and t os,of s i and s os,very freq ently s ffer Syni esis(727) in early Latin.

except when me s is e Voc.; th s,

sed with a s bstantive which does not change its form in th

s, from,with,by

s.

PL.- N.nos, G.nostri. nostr m, D.nobis, Ac.nos, Ab.nobis,

s. noster,nostra,nostr m,o r or o rs. to,for s.

of

SG.-N.ego, G. mei, D. mihi, Ac.me, Ab.me,

I, of me,

me s,-a,- m,mine or my.

PRONOUNS.

4.On the combination of these prono ns with -met and -pte see 103,N.2,3. [56 PRONOUNS] 101.II.Personal Prono ns of the Second Person. SUBSTANTIVE.

vester(archaic voster),vestra,vestr m, to,for yo , yo r or yo rs. yo , from,with,by yo .

NOTES.1.Early forms are : G.tis;D.tibei(inscr.),tibe(inscr.);Ac.Ab.ted, tete;PL.G.vostri,vostror m,-ar m. 2.Vestr m is for the Partitive Genitive. 3.T om and vostrom in the Gen.PL of the Possessives are rare and confined to early Latin. 4.On Syni esis see 100,N.3.On combination with -met or -pte see 102,N.2,3. III.Personal Prono ns of the Third Person. 102.The original personal prono n of the third person, together with its possess ive,is sed only as a reflexive in Latin,and therefore lacks a Nominative.Its pl ace is taken in the obliq e cases by the Determinative is(103). DETERMINATIVE.

of them, eor m,ear m,eor m,their or theirs,

REFLEXIVE. SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.

SG.-N.-G. s i, of him,her,it(self), s s(s os),-a,- m(s om),his, D. sibi, to,for,him(self),her(self), her(s),its(own). Ac.se,sese, him(self),her(self), Ab.se,sese, from,with,by him(self). PL.N. G. s i,of them(selves), s s(s os),-a,- m(s om),their D. sibi,to,for them(selves), (own),theirs. Ac.se,sese,them(selves), Ab.se,sese,from,with,by them(selves).

SUBSTANTIVE. SG.N.[is,ea,id], G. ei s, etc. PL.N.[ei,ii,i;eae,ea], they, G. eor m,ear m,eor m, etc.

he,she,it, of him,

POSSESSIVE. s pplied by the Genitive. ei s,his,hers,its.

PL.N.vos, G.vestri, vestmm, D.vobis, Ac.vos, Ab.vobis,

ye or yo , of yo ,

SG.N.V. t , G. D. tibi, Ac. te, Ab. te,

tho , t i, of thee, to,for thee, t s(t os),-a,- m(t om),thy or thine. thee, from,with,by thee.

POSSESSIVE.

[PRONOUNS.57] NOTES.1.Inscriptions show sibei.The se of sese in classical prose is reg lated mainly by artistic reasons.S om in Gen.Pl.from s s is rare and early. 2.The enclitic -met may be added to all the forms of ego(except nostr m),to all the forms of t (except t and vestr m),to sibi,se,and some forms of s s; egomet,I myself. Instead of t met, t te is fo nd;from which early poets formed occasionally

t temet,t timet. Met is also occasionally appended to forms of me s (early) and t s(late). 8.The enclitic -pte is joined very rarely to forms of the Personal Prono n(mepte , PL.,Men.1059);more often to the Abl.Sing,of the Possessives;it is especially c ommon with s o; s opte ingenio,by his own geni s. 4.From noster and vester and also from c i s,whose ? are formed the Gentile adje ctives of one ending : nostras,of o r co ntry; vestras,of yo r co ntry; c ias, of whose co ntry ? G.nostratis,vestratis,c iatis. 103. B.DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. PLURAL. ii,ei,i, eae, ea, eor m, ear m, eor m, iis,eis,is, eos, eas, ea, iis,eis,is.

1.is,he,that. SINGULAR.

NOTE. The following variations in the forms are fo nd : N.it for id(post-cl.); G.eii s(inscr.),ei s(early poetry); D.eiei(inscr.),ei,ei(early poetry),eae (f .); Ac.em,im(early),for e m; PL N.eis,eeis,ieis,iei(early and rare),for ei; the s al classical form is ii; G.e m(inscr.) for eor m; D.eieis,eeis,ieis(inscr.),ib s(early poetry and rare);the s al classical form i s iis. The early forms s m, sam,sos,sas,for e m,eam,eos,eas,are cited by FESTUS.

N.is, G.ei s, D.ei, Ac.e m, Ab.eo,

ea, id, ei s, ei s, ei, ei, eam, id, ea, eo.

Acc.and Abl.Sing,and Gen.PL often s ffer Syni esis in early poetry. 2.Idem(is + dem),the same. SINGULAR. PLURAL.

NOTE.Variations in form : N.eidem,isdem(inscr.,early) for idem;D.idem (inscr.) f or eidem; PL N.idem(more s al in poetry),eisdem,isdem(inscr.); D.Ab.iisdem(rare ),eisdem( ncommon in classical prose).Syni esis is common. 3.ipse(perhaps is + pse),he,self. SINGULAR. PLURAL.

[58 PRONOUNS.] NOTES.1.In the earlier time the first part of ipse was also declined,th s : N. e apse;Ac.e mpse,eampse;Ab.eopse,eapse. Other forms are do btf l. 2.For ipse the form ips s was very commonly employed in early Latin,b t fades o t with TERENCE,and later i s only sporadic. 3.Inflectional variations are : D.ipso,ipsae(late);PL N.ipsei(inscr.).The few ot her forms are ncertain.Ipsi s is dissyllabic twice in TERENCE. 4.PLAUTUS shows ipsissim s(comp.Gr.a totatos),and in late Latin ipsim s and ipsi ma are fo nd.A post-Ciceronian colloq ialism was isse,issa. 5.Ipse combines with -met : ipsemet and ipsimet(N.PL),both rare. 104. C.DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

I.Demonstrative Prono n for the First Person.

hic,this.

NOTES.1.The f ll forms of hic in -ce are still fo nd in limited n mbers in early

SG.N. G. D. Ac. Abl.

hic, haec, hoc, PL.hi, h i s, h i s, h i s, hor m, h ic, h ic, h ic, his, h nc, hanc, hoc, hos, hoc, hac, hoc. his,

hae, haec,these, har m hor m, his, his, has, haec, his, his.

N. ipse, G. ipsi s, D. ipsi, Ac.ips m, Ab.ipso,

ipsa, ipsi s, ipsi, ipsam, ipsa.

ips m, ipsi s, ipsi, ips m, ipso.

ipsi, ipsor m, ipsis, ipsos, ipsis,

ipsae, ipsa, ipsar m, ipsor m. ipsis, ipsis, ipsas, ipsa, ipsis, ipsis.

N.idem, G.ei sdem, D.eidem, Ac.e ndem, Abl.eodem,

eadem, idem, ei sdem,ei sdem, eidem, eidem, eandem, idem, eadem, eodem,

idem,eidem,iidem, eaedem, eadem, eor ndem, ear ndem, eor ndem, isdem,eisdem,iisdem, eosdem, easdem, eadem, isdem,eisdem,iisdem.

Latin; G. hoi sce(in the phrase h i sce modi,the form is common in the cl assical period and later); D. hoice(inscr.); PL N. heisce,hisce(not ncommon); G. hor nce(rare); D.,Ab.hisce(in PLAUT.and TER. s ally before vowels); Ac. hosce,hasce(not ncommon;occasionally in Cic.). 2.Other variations in form are : G. h i s and hs(in early poetry for metrical reasons); D. hae(rare and early); Ac. honc; PL N. hei,heis for hi, haec for hae(hi PLAUT.and TER.reg larly before vowels or h,occasionally before consonants;occasionally also in classical times and later); G.hor nc,har nc(early). PL N.hic for hi and D.Ab.hib s for his are do btf l. 3.Hic combines with -ne.Us ally -ne was appended to hice,etc.,and the e weakened to i. Sometimes -ne is added directly to the reg lar forms.The examples are freq ent i n early Latin,b t occ r also in Cic.and later writers : hicine,haecine,hocine,h icine,h ncine,hancine,hocine,hacine,haecine(N.PL fem.), haecine(N.PL ne t.),hiscine,hoscine,hascine; also hicne,haecne,hocne,h i sne,h ncne,hancne,hocne,hacne,haecne,hosne,hasne. II.Demonstrative Prono n for the Second Person.

iste,that.

isti, isti, isti, ist m, istam, ist d, isto, ista, isto.

istis, istis, istis, istos, istas, ista, istis, istis, istis.

NOTES.1.The Dat.Sing,shows isto in late and istae in early Latin. 2.iste combines with -ce. In a very few cases(three times in early,once in late Latin) this -ce is retain ed nchanged,b t s ally it is shortened to -c. The following forms occ r,all except "ist c"(more common than ist d in classical Latin) and "istaec"(ne ter,occasionally in Cic.,Ep.and later),being wholly confined to early and late Latin. [PRONOUNS.59]

N. D.

istic, istaec, ist c(istoc,once); istic, istic, istic;

SG,.N. iste, G. istor m, D. Ac. Abl.

ista, ist d, PL. isti, isti s, isti s, isti s,

istae, ista, istor m,

istar m,

PL.N.istaec(f.),istaec(n.). 3.In a few cases in PLAUT.and TER. -ne is appended to istice,etc., the preceding e being weakened to i : ist cine, istocine, istacine, istoscin'.

III.Demonstrative Prono n for the Third Person.

NOTES.1.The older forms from stem olloocc r on early inscriptions,in laws,and in the poets(except PLAUT.and TER.),even to a very late period,as follows :

olli, olla; ollom, ollar m(early); olleis, ollis; ollos(early).

2.Inscriptions show ill t occasionally for ill d.Other rare forms are : G.illi ( do btf l); D.illae;Pl.N.illei.illi s is often dissyllabic in early Latin. 3.ille often combines with -ce,which is,however, s ally shortened to -c : illi s ce,illace,illoce,illosce,illasce,illisce,all in early Latin;shortened forms : N. illic, illaec, ill c; D. illic; Ac. ill nc, illanc; Ab. illoc, illac; Pl. N. illaec(f.), illaec(n.), all with rare exceptions confined to PLAUTUS and TERENCE. 4.A few cases of combination with -ne : illicine,illancine occ r in PLAUTUS and TERENCE. 105. D. RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

q i(S bstantive and Adjective),who.

SG.N. G. D. Ac. Ab.

q c c q q

i, q ae, q od, i s, c i s, c i s, i, c i, c i, em, q am, q od, o, q a, q o.

PL.q q q q q

i, q ae, or m, q ar m, ib s, q ib s, os, q as, ib s, q ib s,

q q q q q

ae, or m, ib s, ae, ib s.

N. D. Pl. N. G. D. Ac.

oll s,-e(early); olli;

SG.

N. ille, illa, ill d, G. illi s,illi s,illi s, D. illi, illi, illi, Ac.ill m, illam, ill d, Ab.illo, illa, illo.

Ac. Ab.

ist nc, istanc ist c; istoc, istac istoc.

PL.illi, illor m illis, illos, illis,

illae, illa, illar m,illor m, illis, illis, illas, illa, illis, illis.

General Relatives are :

NOTES.1.Archaic and legal are q is and q id as relatives. 2.The prevalent form of Gen.on inscriptions of the Rep blican period and in earl y Latin is q oi s; q i s, c ii s, and other variations are also fo nd. Other archaic forms are : D., q oi. D.Pl,q eis. D.Pl.q is(q s) is common in the poets at all periods;and also in prose wr iters;b t not cited from CAESAR,and only from the letters of CICERO. 3.The Abl.Sing, q for all genders is the prevalent form in early times,and in combination with c m is preferred to q o,q a by CICERO.

is occasionally sed as an adjective,b t not in classical Latin.Occasionally,also ,b t rarely in CICERO,it is sed for q isq e, q idq e. The Nom.Sing. of the adjective q iq i,etc., probably does not occ r.In the other cases the forms are [60 PRONOUNS.] the same as those of q isq is and can be disting ished only by the sage.In combination with modi we find c ic i in Gen.sometimes in CICERO.

4.

Q isq is

S bstantive, Adjective.

q isq is,whoever, q idq id,q icq id, (q iq i,q aeq ae,q odq od), q ic nq e,q aec nq e,q odc nq e,

whatever. whosoever. whichever.

In the Pl ral the only form fo nd is q ib sq ib s.(Liv.XLI.,8,10.) 5.In q ic mq e the -c mq e is often separated by tmesis.The only variations in f orm are q eiq omq e,q esc mq e in early Latin,and occasionally q isc mq e for q ib sc mq e(several times in CICERO). 106.E.INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

The pl ral of the s bstantive interrogative prono n and both n mbers of the adje ctive interrogative prono n coincide with the forms of the relative q i,q ae,q od,who,which.

Strengthened Interrogatives.

REMARK.In the poets q i is sometimes fo nd as a s bstantive for q is in independ ent sentences.In dependent sentences the se always fl ct ates.A difference in m eaning can hardly be made other than that q i is generally sed in m ch the same sense as q alis.On the other hand,q is is often sed as an adjective for q i; s ally,however,the s bstantive which follows is best looked pon as in apposition .In the classical period q i is the normal form for the adjective in dependent q estions. NOTES.1.Inscriptions show here and there q it and q ot for q id and q od.

q id nomen tibi est and only in early Latin.Sometimes q ae seems to be sed as a s bstantive,b t ano ther explanation is always possible. 2.In the obliq e cases the same variations occ r as in the obliq e cases of the relative.The Abl. q i means how ? 3.For the declension of ter see 76.

Q id is sometimes sed for q od,b t

s ally in the phrase

Adjective, q inam ? q aenam ? ecq i? ecq a?(ecq ae)?

q odnam ? which,pray ? ecq od?

S bstantive,q isnam ? ecq is ?

who,pray ? is there any one who ?

q idnam ? what,pray ? ecq id ?

SG.N. G. D. Ac. Ab.

q c c q q

is ? q id ? i s ? i ? em ? q id ? o ? q o ?

who ? what ? POSSESSIVE. c i s ? whose? c i s,c ia,c i m,whose ? c i? to,for whom ? whom ? what ? from,with,by whom or what ?

ter ?

tra ?

S bstantive. Adjective. which ? S bst.and Adj. who,which of two ?

q is ? who ? q i ?

q id ? q ae ?

what? q od ? tr m ?

4.The possessive c i s(q oi s),-a,- m was sed both as relative and as interrogative.It is freq ent in PLAUT.and TER., b t rare in other a thors. [PRONOUNS.61] Besides the Nom. the only forms fo nd are Ac.q oi m, q oiam; Ab.q oia; Pl.N.q oiae,and, perhaps,G.Pl.q oi m. 5.Q isnam is sometimes sed as an adjective for q inam and q inam occasionally f or q isnam as a s bstantive.The -nam may be separated by tmesis. Ecq is and ecq i are not common,and are s bject to the same fl ct ations as q is and q i. Ecq is combines with -nam to form ecq isnam and a few other occasional f orms, as : ecq aenam,ecq idnam,ecq odnam,ecq onam,ecq osnam. 107.F.INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 1.S bstantive,aliq is,aliq a(rare),aliq id,| somebody,some one q is,q a,q id, | or other. Adjective.aliq i,aliq a,aliq od, | | some,any. q i,q ae,q a,q od, | REMARK.The common r le is that q is and q i occ r properly only after si,nisi,ne,n m,or after a relativ e; otherwise aliq is,aliq i. NOTES.1.Aliq is and q is are not nfreq ently need as adjectives instead of aliq i,q i,b t rarely in early Latin.Occasionally(not in early Latin) aliq i is sed as a s bstantive.Q i is also so sed,b t only after si,sin,sive,ne.

The se of q id and aliq id for q od and aliq od,and of aliq od for aliq id, is very rare and late. 2.Besides the variations in form mentioned nder the relative and inter rogative,the indefinitive q is shows q es as an early form for q i(N.PL),and in PL Nom.Acc. ne t.

q ae and q a in eq ally good sage. Aliq is shows in Abl.Sing, aliq i(rare and early), in the PL Nom.Acc.ne t.always aliq a, and not nfreq ently in postclassical Latin aliq is for aliq ib s. 2.a certain,certain one.

REMARK.q idam,q aedam occ r both as s bstantives and adjectives,b t q iddam is always s bstantive, q oddam always adjective. The Pl ral is rare in early Latin(never in PLAUTUS).

NOTES.1.Q ispiam,q aepiam are rare as adjectives.In the ne ter, q ippiam and q oppiam occ r rarely.The comic poets do not se the Pl ral,and it is rare elsewhere.

scriptor q isq am,any writer(at all), Gall s q isq am ,any Ga l(at all). The corresponding adjective is ll s.

The se of q isq am as a feminine is only in early Latin. Q idq am is a poor spelling for q icq am. In Abl.Sing,q iq am occ rs occasionally.In Sing.Gen.Dat.Acc.freq ently,and in Pl ral always,forms of ll s were sed. [62 CORRELATIVES.]

NOTE.--Q ivis,q aevis,q ilibet(archaic -l bet),q aelibet may be sed either as s bstantives or adjectives,b t q idvis,q idlibet are s bstantives only,

4 q ivis, q aevis, q idvis(and q odvis) | any one yo q ilibet,q aelibet,q idlibet(and q odlibet),| yo like,

please

2.Q isq am is seldom

sed as an adjective,except with designations of persons;

3.

q ispiam,q aepiam,q idpiam(and q odpiam),some one,some. q isq am, ,q icq am ,any one(at all).No pl ral.

q idam,q aedam,q iddam(and q oddam), q idam, q c i sdam q or ndam,q c idam q q endam,q andam,q iddam(and q oddam), q osdam, q q odam, q adam, q odam q

aedam, q aedem ar ndam,q or ndam ib sdam asdam, q aedam ib dam

q odvis,q odlibet are adjectives only. Pec liar forms of q ivis are G.,q oivis in q oivismodi(PLAUT.); D.,q ovis(late); Ab.,q ivis(PLAUT.,TER.), and the compo nds c i svisc mq e(LUCR.iii.,388) and q ovisc mq e(MART,xiv.,2,1). Q ilibet may be separated by tmesis into q i and libet(SALL..,Cat.5,4).

n sq isq e, naq aeq e, n mq idq e and n mq odq e,each one severally.

NOTE.Q isq e occ rs occasionally in early Latin as a feminine,and with its forms is not nfreq ently fo nd in early and late Latin for q isq is,or q ic mq e.Q i dq e is s bstantive,q odq e adjective.In the Abl.Sing,q iq e occ rs occasionally . The Pl ral is reg lar,b t rare ntil post-classical times.In Nom.Pl.q aeq e is either fem,or ne ter. 108.The declension of the pronominal adjectives has been given in 76.They are : ll s,-a,- m,any; n ll s,-a,- m,no one,not one.

The corresponding s bstantives are nemo(76) and nihil,the latter of which forms only nihili(Gen.) and nihilo(Abl.),and those only in certain combinations. nonn ll s,-a,- m,some,many a,declined like n ll s. ali s,-a,- d,another; the Possessive of ali s is alien s. alter,-era,-er m,the other,one(of two). ne ter,ne tra,ne tr m,neither of two. alter ter,alter tra,alter tr m,the one or the other of the two. terq e, traq e. tr mq e,each of two,either, ambo,-ae,-o,both. tervis, travis, tr mvis. } whichever yo please of the two. terlibet, tralibet, tr mlibet,} CORRELATIVES. 109.I.CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. INTERROGATIVES. DEMONSTRATIVES. RELATIVES. q i, q alis, as(of wh q ant s,

q is ? who ? is, that, who. q alis ? of what kind ? talis, s ch(of that kind) ich kind). q ant s ? how m ch ? tant s, so m ch, as m ch. q ot ? how many ? tot, so many, as many.

q ot,

5.

q isq e,q c c q emq e,q q oq e ,q

aeq e,q idq e and q odq e,each one. i sq e iq e amq e,q idq e and q odq e aq e ,q oq e

[CORRELATIVE.63] 110.II.CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADVERBS. 1.Pronominal adverbs of place. bi ? where ? bi, where. q a ? where, e,which which way ? nde ? whence ? nce. ibi, hic,hae, istic,istac, illic,illac, inde, hinc, istinc, illinc, q o? whither ? q o,whither. eo, there.

way.

hence. thence. thence,from yonder. thither.

h c,(hoc,) hither. ist c,(istoc,) thither. ill c,(illoc,) thither,yonder.

2.Pronominal adverbs of time.

3.Pronominal adverbs of manner.

111.

III.COMPOUNDS OF THE RELATIVE FORMS.

1.The relative prono ns become indefinite by prefixing ali-:

2.The simple relatives become niversal by do bling themselves,or by s ffixing -c nq e(-c mq e),sometimes -q e :

q ant sc nq e, q alisc nq e, q otq ot, bic nq e, q andoc nq e,q q otiesc nq e, t t, tc nqoe,

however great; of whatever kind; however many; wheresoever; andoq e,whenever; however often; in whatever way; howsoever;

aliq aliq alic alic aliq

ant s,somewhat great; ot,several,some; bi,somewhere; nde,from somewhere; ando,at some time.

how m ch ?

tam,

so m ch.

q omodo ? q i ? how ? s. q am ? q am,as.

ita,sic,

so,th s.

q ando ?

t m, then. t nc,at that time, n nc, q otiens ? how often ? totiens, so often.

when ?

q ando, when. q om,c m. now. q otiens,as often as.

there,that way. there,yonder way. thence.

here,this way.

q a,wher

nde,whe

t, ti,a

3.Many of the relatives are f rther compo nded with -vis or -libet :

[64 THE VERB.] THE VERB. 112.The inflection given to the verbal stem is called Conj gation,and expresses : 1.Person and N mber; 2.Voice Active or Passive. The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds from the s bject : amo,I love. The Passive Voice denotes that the s bject receives the action of the Verb : amor,I am loved. 3.Tense Present,Imperfect,F t re,Perfect,Pl perfect,F t re Perfect. The Present, amo,I love; F t re, amabo,I shall love; P re Perfect, amavi,I have loved; F t re Perfect, amavero, I shall have loved, are called Principal Tenses. The Imperfect, amabam,I was loving; Historical Perfect, amavi,I loved; Pl perfect, amaveram,I had loved, are called Historical Tenses. REMARK.The P re and Historical Perfects are identical in form. 4.Mood Indicative,S bj nctive,Imperative. The Indicative Mood is the mood of the fact : amo,I love. The S bj nctive Mood is the mood of the idea : amem, may I love,I may love; amet, may he love,he may love ; si amet,if he sho ld love. The Imperative Mood is the mood of command : ama,love tho ! For f rther distinctions see Syntax. 5.These forms belong to the Finite Verb.O tside of the Finite Verb,and akin to the no n,are the verbal forms called Infinitive,S pine,Participle,Ger nd. The Infinitive active and the S pine are related to the no n,the former being or iginally a Dative or Locative and the S pine showing two cases,Acc sative and Ab lative. No adeq ate niform translation can be given,b t for the general meaning see pa radigms. 113.A large n mber of Verbs have the passive form b t are active in meaning :

q ant slibet, q ant svis, bivis, q amvis,

as great as yo please; where yo will; as yo please,tho gh.

q amq am,

however,altho gh.

[THE VERB.65] hortor,I exhort. These are called deponent(from deponere,to lay aside). 114.The Inflection of the Finite Verb is effected by the addition of personal e ndings to the verb stems. 1.The personal endings are mostly pronominal forms,which serve to indicate not o nly person,b t also n mber and voice.They are : ACTIVE.PASSIVE. SG. 1.-m(or a vowel,coalescing with -r. the characteristic ending);Pf .i, 2.-s; Pf.-s-ti; Impv.-to(d) or want -ris or -re; Impv.-re or -tor. ing, 3.-t;Impv.to(d), -t r;Impv.-tor.

2.The personal endings are added directly to the stem in the Present Indicative and Imperative only,except in the third conj gation,in some forms of the F t re Indicative.In the other tenses certain modifications occ r in the stem,or tens e signs are employed : (a) In the Present S bj nctive final a of .the stem is changed to (e); final e to ea(ea);final i to ia(ia);final e to (a).In the F t re Indicative final e is chan ged to a or (e);final i to ia(i,ie). (b) The tense signs are : for the Imperfect Indicative,b(ba);for the Imperfect S bj nctive,r(re);for the F t re Indicative in a and e verbs bi(b,b );for the Perfe ct Indicative,(i);for the Perfect S bj nctive,-eri;for the Pl perfect Indicative, er(era);for the Pl perfect S bj nctive,iss(isse);for the F t re Perfect Indicative ,eri(er). 3.The stem itself is vario sly modified;either by change of vowel or by addition of s ffixes,and appears in the following forms : (a) The Present stem;being the stem of the Present,Imperfect,and F t re tenses.T hese forms are called the Present System. (b) The Perfect stem;being the stem of the Perfect,Pl perfect,and F t re Perfect tenses.These forms are called the Perfect System. (c) The S pine* stem;being the stem of the F t re Active and Perfect Passive Par ticiples and of the S pine.These forms are called the S pine System, NOTE.For details as to the formation of these stems,see 132 ff. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------* This designation is retained beca se it is an established termin s technic s;a s a matter of fact the S pine stem is not the stem of the Participles.

PL. 1.-m s, 2.-tis;Pf .-s-tis-;Impv.-te or -tote, 3.-nt;Pf .er nt or ere;Impv.-nto(d),

-m r. -mini. -nt r;Impv.-ntor.

[66 THE VERB.] 115.1.The Perfect,Pl perfect,and F t re Perfect tenses in the Passive are formed by the combination of the Perfect Passive Participle with forms of the verb s m ,I am. 2.The F t re Passive Infinitive is formed by the combination of the S pine with the Present Passive Infinitive of eo,I go. 3.The infinite parts of the verb are formed by the addition of the following end ings to the stems : ACTIVE. PASSIVE. ri,i -t m(-tam,-t m),esse -t m iri. -t s(-ta,-t m). SUPINE. -t m;-t

PRESENT.

IMPERFECT.

FUTURE, SG.1.ero, I shall be, 2.eris, tho wilt be, 3.erit, he will be. PL.1.erim s, we shall be, 2.eritis, yo will be, 3.er nt, they mil be. [THE VERB.67] PERFECT.

SG.1.eram, 2.eras, 3.erat, PL.1.eram s, 2.eratis, 3.erant,

I was, tho wast, he was. we were, yo were, they were,

essem, I were (forem) esses, tho wert (fores) esset, he were (foret) essem s,we were, essetis,yo were, essent, they were (forent)

INDICATIVE. SG.1.s m, I am, 2.es, tho art, 3.est, he,she,it is. PL.1.s m s, we are, 2.estis, yo are, 3.s nt, they are.

sim, sis, sit, sim s, sitis, sint,

116.

THE VERB s m,I am. (Pres.stem es-,Perf.stem f -) SUBJUNCTIVE. I be, tho be, he,she,it be. we be, yo be, they be.

GERUND. -ndi(-do,-d m,-do).

GERUNDIVE. -nd s(-a,- m).

PARTICIPLES.Pr.-ns (G.-ntis), Pf.F t.-t r s(-a,- m).

INFINITIVE. Pr.-re, Pf.-isse, F t.-t r m(-a,-am),esse,

IMPERATIVE. PRESENT. SG. 1. 2.es,be tho , 3, PL. 1., 2.este,be ye, 3-, [68 THE VERB.] NOTES.1.Early forms are : FUTURE.

PRES.esse,to be, PERF.f isse,to have been, esto,tho shalt be, FUT.f t r m(-am,- m) esse esto,he shall be. (fore),to be abo t to be. PARTICIPLE. estote,yo shall be, s nto,they shall be. FUT.f t r s,-a,- m,abo t to be.

(a) In the Pres.Ind.es for es;reg larly in PLAUTUS and TERENCE,b t the q antity of the vowel is disp ted. (b) In the Pres.S bjv. siem,sies,siet,sient; reg lar in inscriptions ntil the first cent ry B.C.and common in early poets ch iefly for metrical reasons;side by side with this occ r f am,f as,f at,f ant (also LUCR,iv.,637,VERG.x.,108,LIV. xxv.,12,6),which are taken p again by very late poete.

SG. 1.f 2.f 3.f PL. 1.f 2.f 3.f

FUTURE PERFECT. ero, I shall have been, eris, tho wilt have been, erit, he will have been. erim s, we shall have been, eritis, yo will have been, erint, they will have been. INFINITIVE.

SG. 1.f 2.f 3.f PL. 1.f 2.f 3.f

PLUPERFECT. eram, I had been, f issem, eras, tho hadst been, f isses, erat, he had been. f isset, eram s,we had been, f issem s, eratis,yo had been, f issetis, erant, they had been. f issent,

3.f

f erint,they have,may have, been. I had,might have,been, tho hadst,mightst have, he had,might have,been. we had,might have,been, yo had,might have,been, they had,might have,been.

2.f

f eritis,yo

PL.1.f

f erim s,we have,may have,been, have,may have, been,

3.f

2.f

f eris,tho have,mayest have, been, f erit,he have,may have,been.

SG.1.f i,

I have been,I was, isti, tho hast been, tho wast, it, he has been,he was. im s, we have been,we were, istis, yo have been, yo were, er nt,f ere,they have been,they were.

f erim,I have,may have,been,

Sit is also common. (c) In the Impf .S bjv.the forms forem,fores,foret,forent were probably in very early times eq ivalent to f t r s essem,etc.; and occasion ally this force seems to be still present in the later period,especially in SALL UST; s ally,however,they are eq ivalent to essem,esses,esset,essent; in the Inf. fore always remained the eq ivalent of fat r m esse. (d) In all the Perfect forms the original length was f -,which is still fo nd oc casionally in early Latin. (e) Early and principally legal are the rare forms escit,escet,esit,for erit; -essint for er nt. 2.The Pres.Part,ie fo nd only in the compo nds; ab-sens,absent,and praesens,present.

s pers m ,I am,or remain,over. These are all inflected like s m;b t pros m and poss m req ire special treatment by reason of their composition. Pros m,I profit. 118.In the forms of pros m,prod is sed before vowels.

IMPERFECT. prodessem, FUTURE. PERFECT.

prodero, prof i,

PRESENT.

INDICATIVE. pros m,prodes,prodest, pros m s,prodestis,pros nt, proderam,

SUBJUNCTIVE. prosim,

ins m, inters m, er.No Pf .

I am in. I am between.

pros m, I am for,I profit. s bs m, I am nd

abs m, I am away,absent. Pf. (abf i) af i. ads m, I am present.Pf. aff i. des m, I am wanting.

117.

COMPOUNDS OF s m,I am. obs m, I am against,I h rt.Pf . obf i or off i, poss m, I am able. praes m,I am over,I s perintend.

prof ero,

INFINITIVE.PRES,prodesse;FUT.prof t r m esse(fore);PERF.prof isse. Poss m,I am able,I can. 119.Poss m is compo nded of pot(potis,pote) and s m; t becomes s before s;in the perfect forms,f(potf i) is lost. [THE VERB.69] INDICATIVE. PRESENT. SG. 1.poss m,I am able,can, 2.potes, 3.potest. PL. 1.poss m s, 2.potestis, 3.poss nt. possim,I be able. possis, possit. possim s, possitis, possint. IMPERFECT. SG.1.poteram,I was able,co ld, 2.poteras, 3.poterat. PL.1.poteram s, 2.poteratis, 3.poterant. possem,I were,might be,able. posses, posset. possem s, possetis, possent. FUTURE. SG. 1.potero,I shall be able. 2.poteris, 3.poterit. PL. 1.poterim s, 2.poteritis, 3.poter nt. SUBJUNCTIVE.

PERFECT.

PLUPERFECT .

SG. 1.pot eram,I had been able. 2.pot eras,

pot issem, I had,might have,been able. pot isses,

PL. 1.pot im s, 2.pot istis, 3.pot er nt.

pot erim s, pot eritis, pot erint.

SG.1.pot i,I have been able, 2.pot isti, 3.pot it.

pot erim,I have,may have,been able. pot eris, pot erit.

prof erim, PLUPERFECT. em. F t.PERF.

prof eram,

prof iss

[70 REGULAR VERBS.] FUTURE PERFECT.

INFINITIVE.PRES.,posse,to be able.PERF.,pot isse,to have been able. NOTES.1.In the early Latin the f sion of the two parts of the compo nd has not f lly taken place;we accordingly find not nfreq ently : potis s m, potis es, potis est, potis s nt; potis siem, potis sis, potis sit, potis sint; potis erat; pote f isset; and sometimes(even in classical and A g stan poete) potis and pote alone, the cop la being omitted.Partial f sion is seen in Inf. potesse,potisse;S bjv. potisit(inscr.),potisset. 2.Occasional passive forms(followed by a passive infinitive) are fo nd in early Latin(not in PLAUT.or TER.) and LUCRETIUS : potest r, posset r, possit r, poterat r. Poterint for poter nt is do btf l.

REGULAR VERBS. SYSTEMS OF CONJUGATION.

120.1.There are two Systems of Conj gation,the Thematic and the Nonthematic(132) . The Nonthematic is confined to a small class.The Thematic System comprises fo r Conj gations,disting ished by the vowel characteristics of the present stem,a,e, e,i,which may be fo nd by dropping re from the Present Infinitive Active.The con sonant preceding the short vowel stem-characteristic is called the consonant ste m-characteristic.

SG.1.pot ero,I shall have been 2.pot eris, [able, 3.pot erit.

PL.1.pot erim s, 2.pot eritis, 3.pot erint.

PL. 1.pot eram s, 2.pot eratis, 3.pot erant.

pot issem s, pot issetis, pot issent.

3.pot erat.

pot isset.

2.From the Present stem,as seen in the Present Indicative and Present Infinitive active;from the Perfect stem, as seen in the Perfect Indicative active;and from the S pine stem,can be derived all the forms of the verb. These tenses are acco rdingly called the Principal Parts; and in the reg lar verbs appear in the fo r conj gations as follows : PRES.IND.PRES.INF. PERF.IND. SUPINE.

[REGULAR VERBS.71] R les for forming the Tenses. 121.1 The Present System. From the Present stem as obtained by dropping re of th e Pres.Inf.Active,form a.Pres.S bjv.by changing final a to e,e to ea,e to a(or ia),i to ia, and adding m for active,r for passive;Pres.Impv.Passive by adding re; F t.Impv.by adding to for Active and tor for the Passive;Pres. Part,by adding ns and lengthening prec eding vowel;Ger nd by adding ndi after shortening a and e,changing i to ie,and i n a few verbs e to ie.Pres.Impv.Active is the same as the stem;Pres.Indic.Passiv e may be formed from Pres.Indic.Act.by adding r(after shortening o). b.Impf.Indic.by adding -bam for active and -bar for passive to the stem in the f irst and second conj gations;to the lengthened stem in the third and fo rth(e to e or ie,i to ie);Impf.S bjv.by adding the endings rem and rer,or by adding m an d r respectively to the Pres. Inf.Active. c.F t re,by adding -bo and -bor to the stem in the first and second conj gations ;-m and -r in the third and in the fo rth(e being changed to a(ia);i,to ia). 2.The Perfect System.From the Perfect stem as obtained by dropping final i of th e Perfect,form a.Perf.S bjv.Active by adding -erim;Perf.Inf.Active by adding -isse. b.Pl pf.Indic.Active by adding -eram;Pl p.S bjv.Active by adding -issem. c.F t.Perf.Active by adding -ero, 3.The S pine System.From the S pine stem as obtained by drop ping final -m of th e S pine,form a.Perf.Part.Passive by adding -s. b.F t.Part.Active by adding -r s(preceding being lengthened to ). c.The Compo nd Tenses in the Passive and the Periphrastic forms by combining th ese Participles with forms of esse,to be. REMARK.--E phonic changes in the consonant stem-characteristic. Characteristic b before s and t becomes p;g and q before t become c;c,g,q ,with s,become x;t an d d before s are assimilated,and then sometimes dropped.See f rther,9.

I. amo, amare, amavi, II. deleo, delere, delevi, moneo, monere, mon i, III.emo, emere, emi, stat o, stat ere, stat i, scribo, scribere, scripsi, capio. capere, cepi, IV. a dio, a dire, a divi,

amat m, delet m, monit m, em(p)t m, stat t m, script m, capt m, a dit m,

to to to to to to to to

love. blot o t. remind. b y. settle. write. take. hear.

scribo,scripsi,script m; lego,lect m; coq o,coct m; dico,dixi (dicsi); i ngo,i nxi(i ngsi); coq o,coxi(coq si); edo,es m(ed s m); cedo,cessi(cedsi); mitto,misi(mitsi),miss m(mits m). [72.REGULAR VERBS]

CONJUGATION OF amare,to love. PRIN.PARTS : amo,amare,amavi,amat m. ACTIVE. INDICATIVE. Am loving,do love,love. SG. 1.amo, 2.amas, 3.amat, PRESENT. Be loving,may love. amem, ames. amet. amem s, ametis, ament. IMPERFECT. Was loving,loved. SG. 1.amabam, 2.amabas, 3.amabat, 1.amabam s, 2.amabatis, 3.amabant, Were loving,might love. amarem, amares, amaret. amarem s, amaretis, amarent. FUTURE. Shall be loving,shall love. SG.1.amabo, 2.amabis, 3.amabit, PL.1.amabim s, 2.amabitis, 3.amab nt. SUBJUNCTIVE.

PERFECT. Have loved,did love. SG. 1.amavi, Have,may have,loved, amaverim,

PL.

PL.

1.amam s, 2.amatis, 3.amant,

122

First Conj gation.

2.amavisti, 3.amavit,

amaveris, amaverit. amaverim s, amaveritis, amaverint.

[REGULAR VERBS.73] First Conj gation. ACTIVE. INDICATIVE. IVE. Had loved. SG.1.amaveram, 2.amaveras, 3.amaverat, PL.1.amaveram s, 2.amaveratis, 3.amaverant, PLUPERFECT. Had,might have,loved. amavissem, amavisses, amavisset. amavissem s, amavissetis, amavissent. FUTURE PERFECT. Shall have loved. SG.1.amavero, 2.amaveris, 3.amaverit. PL.1.amaverim s, 2.amaveritis, 3.amaverint.

PRESENT.

IMPERATIVE. FUTURE.

PL.1., 2.amate,love ye, 3.,

amatote, ye shall love. amanto, they shall love. INFNITIVE.

PRES.amare,to love. PERF.amavisse,to have loved. FUT.amat r m,am, m esse,to be abo t to love. GERUND. N.[amare],loving. G.amandi,of loving. SUPINE.

SG.1.,, 2,ama, 3..

love tho , amato, tho shalt love, amato, he shall love.

PL.

1.amavim s, 2.amavistis, 3.amaver nt(amere),

SUBJUNCT

D.amando,to loving. Ac.[amare], Ac.amat m,to love. (ad) amand m, loving,to love. Ab.amando, by loving. Ab.amat ,to love,in the loving. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT.N.amans(G.amantis),loving. FUTURE.amat r s,a, m,being abo t to love. [74 REGULAR VERBS.] First Conj gation. PASSIVE. INDICATIVE. IVE. Am loved. SG.1.amor 2.amaris(amare) 3.amat r PL.I.amam r 2.amamini 3.amant r IMPERFECT. Was loved. ved. SG.1.amabar 2.amabaris(amabare) 3.amabat r PL.1.amabam r 2.amabamini 3.amabant r PRESENT. Be,may be,loved. amer ameris(amere) amet r. amem r amemini ament r. SUBJUNCT

amarer amareris(amarere) amaret r. amarem r amaremini amarent r FUTURE.

Shall be loved. SG.1.amabor 2.amaberis(amabare) 3.amabit r. PL.1.amabim r 2.amabimini 3.amab nt r.

PERFECT. Have been loved,was loved.Have,may have,been loved.

PL.1.amati,ae,a s m s

amati,ae,a sim s

SG.1.amat s,a, m s m 2. es 3 est

amat s,a, m sim sis sit

Were,might be,lo

[REGULAR VERBS.75] First Conj gation. PASSIVE. INDICATIVE. Had been loved. SUBJUNCTIVE. PLUPERFECT. Had,might have,been loved. amat s,a,am essem esses esset amati,ae,a essemas essetis esseiit. FUTURE PERFECT. Shall have been loved. SG.1.amat s,a, m ero 2. eris 3. erit. PL.1.amati,ae,a erimas 2. eritis 3. erant. IMPERATIVE. PRESENT. FUTURE. amator,tho shall be loved, amator,he shall be loved.

PL.1.amati,ae,a eram s 2. eratis 3. erant.

PL.1.,, 2.amamini,be ye loved., 3..

amantor,they shall be loved. INFINITIVE.

PRES.amari,to be loved. PERF.amat m,am,am esse,to have been loved. FUT.amat m iri,to be abo t to be loved. FUT.PF.amat m,am,am fore. PARTICIPLE.

GERUNDIVE. amand s,a,am,(one) to be loved.

[76 REGULAR VERBS.]

123.

Second Conj gation.

PERF,amat s,a,am,loved.

Sg.1.,, 2.amare,be tho loved. 3.,

SG.

1.amat s,a,am eram 2. eras 3. erat

2. 3.

estis s nt

sitis sint.

CONJUGATION OF delere,to destroy(blot o t). PRIN.PARTS : deleo,delere,delevi,delet m. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV INDIC. PRSENT. SG.deleo, delear, deles, delet, PL,delem s, deletis, delent. deleam,

deleor, delearis(deleare), deleat r, deleam r, deleamini, deleant r.

IMPERFECT. SG. delebam, delerer, delebas, re), delebat, delerem, deleres, deleret, delerem s, deleretis, delerent. delebar, delebaris(delebare), delebat r, delebam r, delebamini, delebant r, delereris(delere deleret r, delerem r, deleremini, delerent r.

FUTURE. SG. delebo, delebis, delebit, PL. delebim s, delebitis, deleb nt. delebor, deleberis(delebere), delebit r, delebim r, delebimini, deleb nt r. PERFECT.

[REGULAR VERBS.77] Second Conj gation. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. PLUPERFECT. SUBJV.

es, est, s m s, estis, s nt,

sis sit. PL. deleti sim s, sitis, sint.

SG.delevi, deleverim, s sim, delevisti, deleveris, delevit, deleverit, delevim s, deleverim s, deleti delevistis, deleveritis, delever nt(delevere) deleverint

delet s s m,

PL.

delebam s, delebatis, delebant.

deleam s, deleatis, deleant.

delem r, delemini, delent r.

deleas, deleat,

deleris(delere), delet r,

SUBJV.

delet

FUTURE PERFECT.

PRESENT. SG. dele, PL. delete, deleto, deleto,

IMPERATIVE. FUTURE. delere,

deletote, delento.

delemini, delentor. INFINITIVE. PRES. deleri. PERF. delet m,am, m esse. FUT. delet m iri. FUT.PF. delet m,am, m fore.

Ac.delet m.

[78 REGULAR VERBS.] 124.Like delere,to destroy, are conj gated only, nere,to spin, flere,to weep, and the compo nds of -plere,fill, and -olere grow (the latter with S pine in it m); also ciere,to stir p.See 13 7(b). All other verbs of the Second Conj gation retain the characteristic e in the Pre sent System,b t drop it in the Perfect System, changing vi to i,and weaken it t o i in the S pine System. Second Conj gation.

Ab.delet .

delend s,a, m.

GERUND. N.[delere], G.delendi. D.delendo. Ac.[delere] (ad) delend m. Ab.delendo.

SUPINE.

PARTICIPLES. PRES.N.delens;G.delentis. FUT. delet r s,a, m. PERF. delet s,a, m. GERUNDIVE,

PRES.delere. PERF.delevisse. FUT. delet r m,am, m esse.

PL.deleverim s, deleveritis, deleverint,

deleti erim s, eritis, er nt. PRESENT. deletor. FUTURE. deletor,

SG.delevero, deleveris, deleverit,

delet s eris, erit.

PL.deleveram s, delevissem s, deleveratis, delevissetis, deleverant, delevissent.

deleti eram s, deleti essem s, eratis, essetis, erant, essent.

SG.deleveram, deleveras, deleverat,

delevissem, delevisses, delevisset.

delet s eram, eras, erat,

delet s essem, esses, esset.

ero,

CONJUGATION OF monere,to remind. PRIN.PARTS : moneo,monere,mon i,monit m. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV. PRESENT. SG. ), moneo, mones, monet, moneam, moneas, moneat, moneam s, moneatis, moneant. IMPERFECT. SG .monebam, monebas, monebat, PL.monebam s, monebatis, monebant. monerem, moneres, moneret, monerem s, moneretis, monerent. FUTURE. SG.monebo, monebis, monebit, PL monebim s, monebitis, moneb nt. monebor, moneberis(monebere), monebit r, monebim r, monebimini, monob nt r. PERFECT. mon erim, monit s s m, monit s sim, mon eris, es, sis, mon erit, est, sit, monebar, monerer, monebaris(monebare), monereris(monerere), monebat r, moneret r, moneor, moneris(monere), monet r, monear, monearis(moneare moneat r, moneam r, moneamini, moneant r.

[REGULAR VERBS.79] Second Conj gation. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. PLUPERFECT. SUBJV.

Sg.mon mon mon PL.mon

eram, eras, erat, eram s,

mon mon mon mon

issem, isses, isset. issem s,

monit s eram. monit s eras, erat, moniti eram s, moniti

essem, esses, esset, : essem s,

PL.mon im s, mon istis, mon er nt(mon erere).

mon erim s, mon eritis, mon erint.

moniti s m s, moniti sim s estis, sitis, s nt. sint.

SG.mon i, mon isti, mon it,

monebam r, monebamini, monebant r.

monerem r, moneremini, monerent r.

PL.

monem s, monetis, monent.

monem r, monemini, monent r.

mon eratis, mon issetis, mon erant. mon issent.

eratis, erant.

essetis, essent. FUTURE PERFECT. monit s ero,

eris, erit, moniti erim s, eritis, er nt. IMPERATIVE.

PRESENT. FUTURE. SG. mone, PL. moneto, monete,

FUTURE.

moneto,

monere,

monetete, monento. INFINITIVE.

monemini, monentor.

monend s,a, m,

[80 REGULAR VERBS.]

CONJUGATION OF emere,to b y. PRIN.PARTS : emo,emere,emi,em(p)t m. ACTIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. PASSIVE. INDIC. PRESENT. SG emo, emis, emit, emam, emas, emat, emor, emar, emeris(emere), emaris(emare), emit r, emat r, SUBJV.

125.

Third Conj gation.

GERUND. SUPINE. N.[monere]. G.monendi. D.monendo. Ac.[monere] Ac.monit m. (ad) monend m. E, Ab.monendo. Ab.monit .

PRES. FUT. PERF.

PARTICIPLES. N.monens; G.monentis. monit r s,a, m. monit s,a, m. GERUNDIV

PRES.monere. PERF.mon isse. FUT.monit r m,am, m esse.

PRES.moneri PERF.monit m,am, m esse. FUT. monit m iri. FUT.PF.monit m,am, m fore.

SG. mon mon mon PL. mon mon mon

ero, eris, erit, erim s, eritis, erint.

PRESENT.

monetor, monetor,

emeris, emerit, emerim s, emeritis, emerint.

[REGULAR VERBS.81] Third Conj gation. ACTIVE. INDIC. SUBJV.

PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. PLUPERFECT.

PL.emerim s, emeritis, emerint.

empti erim s, eritis, erint.

SG.emero, emeris, emerit,

FUTURE PERFECT. empt s ero, eris, erit,

PL.emeram s, emeratis, emerant.

emissem s, emissetis. emissent.

empti eram s, eratis, erant.

empti essem s, essetis. essent.

SG.emeram, emeras, emerat,

emissem, emisses, emisset,

empt s eram, eras, erat,

empt s essem, esses, esset,

PL.emim s, emistis, emer nt(emere)

empti s m s. estis. sont.

empti sim s, sitis. sint.

SG.emi, emisti, emit,

emerim,

PL.emem s, emetis, ement

emem r, ememini, ement r. PERFECT. empt s s m. es, est, empt s sim, sis, sit,

SG.emam, emes, emet,

FUTURE. emar, emeris(emere)(e=), emet r,

PL.emebam s, emebatis, emebant.

emerem s, emeretis, emerent.

emebam r, emebamini, emebant r.

emerem r, emeremini, emerent r,

SG.emebam, emebas, emebat,

emerem. emeres, emeret,

IMPERFECT. emebar, emerer, emebaris(emebare), emereris(emerere), emebat r, emeret r.

PL.emim s, emitis, em nt.

emam s, ematis, emant.

emim r, emimini. em nt r.

emam r, emamini, emant r.

IMPERATIVE. PRESENT. SG. eme, PL emite emito, emito, emitote, eminto INFINITIVE. emere emimini. em ntor. emitor, emitor FUTURE. PRESENT. FUTURE.

Ac.empt m.

[82 REGULAR VERBS.] 126.Many verbs of the third conj gation with stem in ie(Pres Indic.in io) weaken this ie to e before re, and to i before m,s and t in all tenses of the Present System except the F t r. Otherwise they follow the inflection of emere. These verbs are capio,c pio,facio,fodio,f gio,iacio,pario,q atio,rapio,sapio, and their compo nds;also compo nds of -licio, -spicio, and the deponents gradior and its compo nd; morior and its compo nds, patior and its compo nds. SYNOPSIS OF PRESENT SYSTEM OF capere,to take. PRIN.PARTS : capio,capere,cepi,capt m. ACTIVE. INDIC. SG. capio, capis, SUBJV. capiam, capiat, INDIC. PRESENT. capior, capiar, caperis(capere), capiaris(capiare),

Ab.empt .

GERUNDIVE. emend s,a, m.

PASSIVE. SUBJV.

GERUND. N.[emere]. G emendi. D.emendo. Ac.[emere] (ad)emend m, Ab.emendo.

SUPINE.

PRES.emere. PERF.emisse. FUT. empt r m,am, m esse.

PRES.emi PERF.empt m,am, m esse. FUT.empt m iri FUT.PF.empt m,am, m fore . PARTICIPLES PRES. N.emens;G.ementis FUT. empt r s,a, m. . PERF. empt s,a, m..

IMPERATIVE. SG.cape capite. capito, capito, capitote, capi nto.

INFINITIVE PRES.capere. capi. PARTICIPLE. PRES.capiens. [REGULAR VERBS.83] GERUND. G.capiendi. GERUNDIVE. capiend s,a,t n.

CONJUGATION OF a dire,to hear. PRIN.PARTS : a dio,a dire,a divi,a dit m. ACTIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. a diam, a dias, a diat, a diam s, a diatis, INDIC. PRESENT. a dior, a diris(a dire), a dit r, a dim r, a dimini,

PL.

a dim s, a ditis,

a diam r, a diamini,

SG.

a dio, a dis, a dit,

127.

Fo rth Conj gation.

PASSIVE. SUBJV. a diar, a diaris(a diare), a diat r,

PRES.

F t.

PRES. capere, capimini.

PL.capiem s, capietis, capient.

capiem r capiemini, capient r. FUT. capitor, capitor, capi ntor.

SG.capiam, capies, capiet,

FUTURE. capiar, capiaris(capiare), capiet r

PL.capiebam s, capiebatis, capiebant.

caperem s, caperetis, caperent.

capiebam r, capiebamini, capiebant r.

caperem r, caperemini, caperent r,

SG.capiebam, capiebas, ), capiebat,

IMPERFECT. caperem, capiebar, caperer, caperes, capiebaris(capiebare),capereris(caperere caperet, capiebat r, caperet r.

PL. capim s, capitis, capi nt.

capiam s, capiatis, capiant.

capim r, capimini, capi nt r.

capiam r, capiamini, capiant r.

capit,

capias,

capit r,

capiat r,

FUTURE.

[84 REGULAR VERBS.] Fo rth Conj gation. ACTIVE.PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. a divissem, a divisses, a divisset, a divissem s, a divissetis, a divissent, FUTURE PERPECT. INDIC. PLUPERFECT. a dit s eram, a dit s essem, eras, esses, erat, esset, a diti eram s,a diti essem s eratis, essetis, erant, essent. SUBJV.

PRESENT.

FUTURE.

IMPERATIVE. PRESENT.

PL.

a diverim s, a diveritis, a diverint.

a diti erim s, eritis, er nt. FUTURE.

SG.

a divero, a diveris, a diverit,

a dit s ero, eris, erit,

PL.

a diveram s, a diveratis, a diverant,

SG.

a diveram, a diveras, a diverat,

PL.

a divim s, a diverim s, a diti s m s, a divistis, a diveritis, estis, a diver nt(a divere),a diverint. s nt.

a diti sim s; sitis, sint.

SG.

a divi, a divisti, a divit,

a diverim, a diveris, a diverit,

PERFECT. a dit s s m, a dit s sim, es, sis, est, sit,

PL.

a diem s, a dietis, a dient.

a diem r, a diemini, a dient r.

SG.

a diam, a dies, a diet,

a diar, a dieris(a diere), a diet r,

PL.

a diebam s, a direm s, a diebam r, a diebatis, a diretis, a diobamini, a diebant. a dirent. a diebant r.

a direm r, a diremini, a dirent r.

SG.

a diebam, a diebas, a diebat,

a direm, a dires, a diret,

IMPERFECT. a diebar, a direr, a diebaris(a diebare), a direris(a direre), a diebat r, a diret r,

a di nt.

a diant.

a di nt r.

a diant r.

SG. PL. a dite.;

Ac.a dit m. Ab.a dit .

GERUNDIVE, a diend s,a, m.

[DEPONENT VERBS.85] DEPONENT VERBS. 128.Deponent verbs have the passive form,b t are active in meaning.They have als o the Present and F t re Active Participles,and the F t re Active Infinitive.Th s a deponent verb alone can have a Present,F t re,and Perfect Participle,all wit h active meaning.The Ger ndive,how ever,is passive in meaning as well as in form . The conj gation differs in no partic lar from that of the reg lar conj gation. 1.First Conj gation.

CONJUGATION OF hortari,to exhort. PRIN.PARTS: hortor,hortari,hortat s s m. INDICATIVE. IVE. PRESENT. Exhort, SG. hortor, hortaris(hortare), hortat r, hortam r, hortamini, hortant r. Be exhorting,may exhort. horter, horteris(hortere), hortet r, hortem r,

SUBJUNCT

Was exhorting. SG. hortabar, hortabaris(hortabare), hortabat r, PL. hortabam r, hortabamini, hortabant r.

IMPERFECT. Were exhorting,might exhort. hortarer, hortareris(hortarere), hortaret r, hortarem r, hortaremini, hortarent r.

PL.

hortemini, hortent r.

PERF.

GERUND. N.[a dire]. G.a diendi. D.a diendo. Ac.[a dire] (ad) a diend m. Ab.a diendo.

SUPINE.

PARTICIPLES. PRES. N.a diens,G.a dientis FUT. a dit r s,a, m. a dit s,a, m.

PRES.a dire. PERF.a divisse. F t.a dit r m,am, m esse

INFINITIVE. PRES.a diri. PERF.a dit m,am, m esse. FUT.a dit m iri. FUT.PF.a dit m,am, m fore.

a ditote, a di nto,

a dimini. a di ntor.

a di,

a dito, a dito,

a dire,

a ditor, a ditor,

FUTURE. Shall exhort. SG. PL. hortabor, hortaberis(hortabere), hortabit r, hortabim r, hortabimini, hortab nt r.

[86 DEPONENT VERBS.] PERFECT.

es, est, estis, s nt.

PLUPERFECT. Had exhorted.Had, eras, erat, might have,exhorted. hortat s,a, m essem,

eratis, erant.

essetis, essen FUTURE PERFECT. Shall have exhorted. SG.hortat s,a, m ero, eris, erit, PL.hortati,ae,a erim s, eritis, er nt. PRESENT. FUTURE. SG. l exhort. PL. hortamini,exhort ye. hortantor,they s hall exhort. INFINITIVE. PRES.hortari,to exhort. FUT.hortat r m,am, m esse, PARTICIPLES. PRES.hortans,exhorting. FUT.hortat r s,a, m,abo t t.

IMPERATIVE.

hortare,exhort tho .

hortator,tho

shall exhort. hortator,he shal

PL.hortati,ae,a eram s,

hortati,ae,a essem s,

SG.hortat s,a, m eram,

PL.hortati,ae,a s m s,

hortati,ae,a

Have exhorted,exhorted. SG.hortat s,a, m s m,

Have,may have,exhorted. hortat s,a, m sim, sis, sit, sim s, sitis, sint.

esses, esset,

GERUNDIVE. hortand s,a, m,[one] to

G.hortandi,of exhorting.

[DEPONENT VERBS.87] 2.Second,Third,Fo rth Conj gations. SYNOPSIS OF vereri,to fear; loq i,to speak; mentiri,to lie. PRIN.PARTS : vereor,vereri,verit s s m; loq or,loq i,loc t s s m; mentior,mentiri,mentit s s m. ii. iv. INDICATIVE. iii. loq or, vereris(verere), ), veret r verem r veremini mentimini verent r menti nt r IMPERF. r, FUT. PERF. PLUPF. FUT.PP. mentior, loq eris(loq ere), mentiris(mentire

loq imini loq int r

SUBJUNCTIVE.

etc. loq erer, mentirer mentit s sim, mentit s essem.

IMPERATIVE.

PRES.

verere,

loq ere,

loc t s sim, loc t s essem.

IMPERF.vererer, , PERF. verit s sim, PLUPF. verit s essem.

PRES. verear, verearis(vereare), re) etc. etc.

loq ar, loq aris(loq are)

mentiar, mentiaris(mentia

loc t s s m, loc t s eram, loc t s ero.

verebor, verit s s m, verit s eram, verit s ero,

verebar,

loq obar, loq ar. mentit s s m, mentit s eram, mentit s ero,

mentieba mentiar,

mentire,

loq it r loq im r

PRES.

vereor,

to be abo t to exhort. to exhort. PERF.hortat m,am, m esse,to have exhorted. exhorted. F.P.hortat m,am, m fore. SUPINE. be Ac.hortat m,to exhort,for ex. horting. Ab.hortat ,to exhort,in the exhorting.

PERF.hortat s,a, m,having

exhorted GERUND.

mentit r mentim r

PARTICIPLES.

[88 PEEIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION]. Periphrastic Conj gation. 129.The Periphrastic Conj gation arises from the com bination of the F t re Part iciple active and the Ger ndive with forms of the verb s m. ACTIVE. INDICATIVE. PRES.amat r s(a, m) s m, Am abo t to love. IMPF.amat r s eram, Was abo t to love. FUT.amat r s ero, Shall be abo t to love. PERF.amat r s f i, Have been,was,abo t to love. PLUPF.amat r s f eram, Had been abo t to love. FUT.PERF.amat r s f ero, Shall have been abo t to love. SUBJUNCTIVE. amat r s(a, m) sim, Be abo t to love. amat r s essem, Were abo t to love. amat r s f erim, Have,may have,been abo t to love. amat r s f issem, Had,might have,been abo t to love.

INFINITIVE.PRES.amat r m(am, m) esse,To be abo t to love. PERF.amat r m f isse,To have been abo t to love.

PASSIVE.

amand s essem,forem, Had to be loved. amand s f erim, Have had to be loved.

PRES.amand s(a, m) s m, Have to be loved. . IMPF.amand s eram, Had to be loved. FUT.amand s ero,Shall have to be loved. PERF.amand s f i, Have had to be loved.

amand s(a, m) sim, Have to be loved

GERUND. verendi,etc., GERUNDIVE,verend s, SUPINE. verit m, verit .

loq endi, loq end s, loc t m, loc t .

mentiendi, mentiend s, mentit m, mentit .

verit r s, verit s.

PRES. FUT. PERF

verens,

loq ens, loc t r s, loc t s.

PRES. FUT. PERF. FUT.PP.

vereri, verit r m esse, verit m esse, verit m fore.

loq loc loc loc

i, t r m esse, t m esse, t m fore.

FUT.

veretor.

loq itor. INFINITIVE.

mentitor.

mentiri, mentit r m esse, mentit m esse, mentit m fore.

mentiens, mentit r s, mentit s.

loved. INFINITIVE.PRES.amand m(am, m) esse, PERF,amand m f isse, [NOTES ON THE CONJUGATIONS.89] Notes on the Fo r Conj gations. 130.The Present System. 1.PRESENT INDICATIVE.(a) In the third person Sing lar active,early Latin,and occ asionally later poets,often retain the original length of vowel in the endings -t ,-t, and -t of the first,second,and fo rth conj gations.Final -t in the third conj gation is rare,and d e,perhaps,to analogy or to metrical necessity.In the first person Pl ral the ending -ms is fo nd a few times in poetry.In third person Pl ra l an earlier ending,-onti,is fo nd only in a Carmen Saliare,and is disp ted. The ending -ont is freq ent in early Latin for - nt. (b) In the second Sing lar,passive,in all tenses of the Present stem,the ending -re is m ch more common in early Latin than -ris,and is reg lar in Cic.except in the Pr. Indic.,where he prefers -ris on acco nt of conf sion with Pr.Inf.,admit ting -re only in deponents,and then b t rarely.In general,in the Pr.Indic.-re is rare in the first and second conj gations,more rare in the third,and never fo n d in the fo rth,in prose a thors.Post-Ciceronian prose writers,e.g.,LIVY,TACITUS ,prefer -ris,even in the other tenses of the Present stem.The poets se -ris or -re to s it the metre. 2.IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. In the fo rth conj gation,instead of ie,we find in early times i.This is common in early Latin(especially scibam),in the poets to s it t he metre,and occasionally in later prose.In the verb eo,and its compo nds(b t ambire varies),this form was reg lar always. 3.FUTURE INDICATIVE. PLAUTUS shows sporadic cases of -it,as erit,venibit (veneo). In the fo rth conj gation -ibo for -iam is very common in early Latin (especiall y scibo),and forms in -ibo of the third conj gation are occasional. 4.PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. Final -at of the third person Sing lar active is occasion al in early Latin and also in later poets. In early Latin the active endings -im,-is,-it,-int are fo nd in dare(and some compo nds), which forms very often d im,d is,d it,d int.(Ter.,And.666,Ph.519 perd int TER.,Ph.123) On similar forms from esse,see 116;from edere,see 172. 5.IMPERATIVE. (a) Fo r verbs, To have to be loved. To have had to be loved.

PLUPF.amand s f eram, Had had to be loved.

amand s f issem, Sho ld have had to be

dicere,d cere,facere,ferre(171), form the Pr. Impv.active dic,d c,fac,fer. B t in early Latin

dice,d ce,face

facio. Scire,to know, lacks the Pr.Impv.sci. (b) The original ending of the F t.Impv.active -tod is fo nd in early inscriptio ns, b t very rarely. (c) The Pr.Impv.passive(second and third Sing lar) ends occasionally in early La tin in -mino. 6.PRESENT INFINITIVE PASSIVE. The early ending -rier(-ier) is very common in early Latin and occasionally in poetry at all periods.PLAUTUS shows abo t 140 s ch formations.In literary prose it does not appear till very l ate. 7.The PRESENT PARTICIPLE occ rs sporadically in early Latin with the ending -as,-es, the n having been omitted owing to its weak so nd;see 12,R.1. 8.The older ending of the GERUND and GERUNDIVE in the third and fo rth conj gati ons was - nd s;and -end s was fo nd only after .In classical times - nd s is fr eq ent,especially in verbs of third and fo rth conj gations.Later,-end s is the reg lar form. 131.The Perfect System. 1.SYNCOPATED FORMS.The Perfects in -avi,-evi,-ivi,often drop the v before s or r ,and contract the vowels thro gho t,except those in ivi,which admit the contract ion only before s. The syncopated forms are fo nd in all periods,and in the poets are sed to s it the metre. [90 NOTES ON THE CONJUGATIONS.] PERFECT. SING. 1. PLUR.1. 2.amavisti, 3. amasti. delevisti, delesti. a divisti, a disti.

are not ncommon. The compo nds follow the repositional compo nds of

sage of the simple verbs,except nonp

stis. er nt.

PLUPERFECT.

etc. amavero, amaro, a diero, amaveris, eris amaverit. erit amaverim s, amaveritis, amaverint. etc. CT.

etc. delevero,

etc. FUTURE PERFECT. delero, a divero, a diveris, a di a diverit, a di

amarim s amaritis amarint etc.

etc. INFINITIVE PERFE

2.In the first and third persons Sing,and in the first person PL of the Perfect, syncope occ rs reg larly only in Perfects in ivi,and no contraction ens es.It is most common in the Perfects of ire (169) and petere. In other verbs this syncopation is post-Ciceronian, except in a few forms.So CIC ERO ses

dormiit, er diit, expediit, molliit, c piit(also PLAUTUS); CAESAR, comm niit, resciit, q aesiit. Desinere forms desii and desiit, once each in early Latin(CICERO ses destiti and destitit

e,

amavisse, a disse.

amasse.

delevisse,

delesse.

a diviss

amarit deleverit, delerit

amaris deleveris, deleris

SUBJV. amavissem, issem,

INDIC. amaveram, amaveras, amaverat,

amaram, deleveram, deleram, a diveram, a dieram, amaras, deleveras, deleras, a diveras, a dieras, amarat, deleverat, delerat, a diverat, a dierat, etc. etc. etc. amassem, delevissem, delessem, a divissem, a d

SUBJY. amaverim, amarim, deleverim, delerim, amaveris, amaris, deleveris, deleris, amaverit, amarit, deleverit, delerit, etc. etc.

a diverim, a dierim, a diveris, a dieris, a diverit, a dierit, etc .

3.amaver nt,

amar nt.

delever nt, deler nt.

a diver nt, a di

2.amavistis,

amastis.

delevistis, delestis.

a divistis, a di

instead),and then in post-A g stan Latin; desiim s is cited once from CICERO.The nsyncopated forms are always common except those of ire(169),which are very rare in classical prose,b t occ r more often in the p oets for metrical reasons. NOTE.The forms nom s(ENN.= novim s), enarram s(TER.,Ad.,365), flem s, m tam s, and narram s(PROP.), s em s(LUCR.), in the Perfect,are sporadic and sometimes do btf l. 3. novi,I know, and movi,I have moved, are also contracted,in their compo nds especially. SING.-2.nosti.PLUR.-2.nostis.3.nor nt.SUBJV.norim,etc. PLUPF.noram,etc.SUBJV.nossem,etc.INF.nosse. B t the F t.Perf .noro is fo nd only in compo nds. Similar contractions are seen in movi, b t not so often; i vi shows also a few cases of syncope in poetry. 4.(a) In the early Latin poets freq ently and occasionally in later,syncope take s place in Perfects in -si.These drop the s and contract.A few cases are fo nd i n CICERO,especially in the letters.Examples arc dixti (fo nd also in Cic.and probably an earlier formation,and not by sy ncope for dixisti ); d xti ,principally in compo nds; intellexti (once in Cic.TER.,And,509,et 3 times); scripsti ; misti (misisti) and several others;also scripstis. (b) Akin to these are a n mber of forms in -so for F t.Perfect;-sim for Pf. S bj v.and more rarely -sem for Pl pf .S bjv.These forms are most s al in the third conj gation,b t are also not nfreq ent in the other three;th s, [THE STEM.91] 1.F t re Perfect : faxo(facere); capso(capere) and compo nds; i sso(i bere; VERG.); amasso(amare); servasso(servare) and compo nds,together with some others.

2.Perfect S bj nctive : faxim and compo nds; d xim; a sim(a dere,also sed by Cic.); i ssim; empsim (emere); locassim(locare); negassim(negare). In the second and third persons Sing.,where the F t.Pf .Indic.and the Pf.S bjv.a re identical,the forms are m ch more common.The pl ral forms are m ch less freq ent. 3.Pl perfect S bj nctive : faxem; promissem; intellexes; recesset and a few other forms; erepsem s(HOR.,S.,1.5,79). These forms are rare. 4.Infinitive : dixe; despexe; add xe,etc.; intellexe; detraxe,etc.; advexe; admisse,and a few others. Also the F t re forms aver ncassere, reconciliassere, impetrassere, opp gassere. The exact origin of these forms is still a matter of disp te,b t the common view is that they are aoristic formations. 5.From the earliest times the third Pl ral of the Pf .Indic.active shows two end ings,-eront(later r nt) and -ere.The form in -er nt was always preferred,and in c lassical prose is the normal form.The form in -ere seems to have been the pop la r form,and is m ch liked by LIVY and later writers.TACITUS seems to have preferr ed -er nt for the P re Perfect,and -ere for the Historical Perfect.The poets sca n(M),according to the exigencies of the metre,at all periods also er nt. 6.In regard to the other endings,we have to notice in early Latin -is occasional ly in the Pf .S bjv.and F t.Pf.Indic.active;Perfects in -ii are always written w ith -iei- on inscriptions;in other Perfects the third person Sing lar in -eit(ol der -t),or -t; as dedet; occasionally the first person ends in ei and the second in istei.Pec liar forms are dedrot(dedro),(for deder nt),feced(for fecit),and a few others. THE STEM. 132.With the exception of the verbs s m,I am, edo,I eat,

eo,I go, fero,I bear, volo,I wish (perhaps do,I give),and their compo nds,most of whose forms come directl y from the root, all verbs in Latin form their stems from the root by the addition of a vowel or of a combination of a vowel with a consonant.This vowel is called the thematic v owel;see 190. In the first,second,and fo rth conj gations,and in some verbs of the third conj gation,the stem th s formed is fo nd thro gho t the whole conj gation;in other v erbs the present stem shows different forms from the other stems. 1.THE PRESENT STEM. 133.I.The,Stem or Thematic class : To this class belong those verbs whose stems are formed by the addition of a thematic vowel( s ally i, sometimes ) to the ro ot,as in the third conj gation,or to a stem formed by the addition of a,e,or i t o the root,as in the first,second,and fo rth conj gations.The stem th s formed i s seen(with lengthened vowel sometimes) in all forms of the verb.To this class b elong verbs of the first,second,and fo rth conj gations,and in the third [92 THE STEM.] (a) verbs formed from a strong root,i.e.,verbs with ,,,,, ae,a ;and with e in the ste m;as dico(= deico), d co(= do co), rado, cedo, rodo, caedo, pla do; veho, vergo, pendo,etc.; (b) verbs formed from a weak root,i.e.,those with vowel i, ,o,and probably those with a: as divido, f ro, olo(olere), ago. II.The Red plicated class : The Present stem is formed by red plication,with i i n the red plicated syllable : gen-,gigno(for GIGENO),gignere,to beget; sta-,sisto,sistere,to set,stand. Compare stare,to stand. Other forms,as sido(for SIS(E)DO), sero(for SISO), and perhaps bibo,have the Red plication concealed.

III.The T class : The root,which s ally ends in a g tt ral,is strengthened by t o,te : flecto(FLEC),flectere,to bend. IV.The Nasal class: In this class the root is strengthened by no,ne,the nasal be ing inserted A.In vowelstems : sino(SI-),sinere,to let; lino(LI-),linere,to besmear. B.After the characteristic liq id : cerno(CER),cernere,to sift, separate; temno(TEM),temnere,to scorn. NOTES.1.After l assimilation takes place : pello(for pelno),pellere,to drive. 2.In a few verbs the strengthened forms(-no after a vowel,-ino after a liq id) a re confined mainly to the third person Pl ral active of the Present,and are fo n d not later than the close of the sixth cent ry of the city : dan nt(= dant), explen nt (= explent), neq inont(= neq e nt),and a few others. C.Before the characteristic m te : vinco(vie),vincere,to conq er; frango(FRAG),frangere,to break; f ndo(FUD),f ndere,to po r. Before a p-m te n becomes m: r mpo(RUP),r mpere,to rend; combo(CUB),c mbere,to lie down. D.Here belong also those verbs in which the root is strengthened by -n o,n e;as stern o(STER),stern ere,to snee e(). NOTE.In verbs like ting o,I soak, the consonantal disappears before a consonant in the Pf .and S pine : tinxi,tinct m. V.The Inchoative class : The Present stem has the s ffix -sco,-sce. irascor,I am in a rage; cresco,I grow; obdormisco,I fall asleep; apiscor,I reach; proficiscor,I set o t; nanciscor(NAC-),I get; nosco (= gnosco),I become acq ainted; posco(= porcsco),I demand; misceo (= micsceo),I mix; disco(= didcsco),I learn. A n mber of Inchoatives are derivative formations from s bstantives;as, lapidesco(from lapis),I become stone.

VI.The I class : Instead of the simple thematic vowel i the root is increased by the form ie.In some forms of the Present stem,i.e.,the Pr.Inf.,Impf.S bjv.,seco nd Sing.,Pr.Impv.,this appears in the form e;in some other forms it appears as i : capio(CAP),capere,to take. [THE STEM.93] NOTE.Verbs of the fo rth conj gation also belong to the i class;b t for con veni ence the i class is here restricted as above. VII.The Mixed class : Some verbs that originally belong to the i-class have gone over in the Present stem to the forms of the stem class : as venio(VEN-),venire,to come; video(VID-),videre,to see; sono (SON-),sonare,to so nd.

II.THE PERFECT STEM. 134.I.Perfect in -vi(or - i) : These are formed by the addition (a) Of -vi to the stem as it appears in the Present Inf.in combination with the thematic vowel.To this class belong the Perfects of the first and fo rth conj ga tions,and the few verbs of the second conj gation mentioned in 124; amare,amavi; a dire,a divi; delere,delevi. (b) Of - i to the Present stem after its characteristic vowel is dropped.Here be long the majority of the verbs of the second conj gation; monere,mon i. II.Perfect in -si: These are formed by the addition of -si to the root;which is, as a r le,long either by nat re or position.This class comprises a large n mber of verbs in the third conj gation in which the stem-characteristic consonant is a m te;three in which it is -m ( premere,to press; s mere,to take; contem(n)ere,to scorn );and a few in which it is -s,as ro,I b rn, ssi; haereo,I stick,liaesi(= haessi). Examples are repo,I creep,repsi; scribo,I write,scripsi; dico,I say, dixi(= dicsi); carpo,I pl ck,carpsi; rado,I scrape,asi(= radsi). NOTE.B t verbs in -ndo,take i in the Perfect : defendo,I strike(ward)off,defendi; perhaps beca se they formed originally a red plicated perfect;as,

mando,I chew,man(di)di; so (fe)fendi,I have str ck. III.Red plicated Perfects : These are formed by prefixing to the nstrengthened root its first consonant(or consonantal combination) together with the following vowel,a and ae being weakened to e,or,if the root began with a vowel,by prefixi ng e,and adding the termination i.In Latin b t few of these forms remain,and the y have been vario sly modified : disco,I learn,didici; spondeo,I pledge,spo(s)pondi; tango,I to ch,tetigi; t ndo,I strike,t t di; ago,I act,egi (= eagi); emo,I b y,emi(= eemi). In composition the red plication is in many cases dropped;so always in compo nds of cadere,to fall; caedere,to fell; canere,to sing; fallere,to deceive; pangere,to fix; parcere,to spare; parere. to bear; pendere,to hang; p ngere,to prick; tangere,to to ch; tendere,to stretch(occasionally retained in late Latin); tondere,to shear(b t occasionally retained in late Latin); t ndere,to strike. Discere,to learn,always retains it,and so poscere,to demand, and admordere,to bite. Of compo nds of c rrere,to r n, s cc rrere always [94 THE STEM.] drops the red plication, praec rrere always retains it : the others vary. Of compo nds of dare, abscondere s ally drops it,b t all trisyllabic compo nds that change th e a,and all q adrisyllable compo nds,retain it. Compo nds of sistere,to set,and stare,to stand,retain it. IV.Perfect in . Verbs of the third conj gation,with a short stem syllable,take in the Perfect,after lengthening the stemsyllable and changing a into e.In many ca ses these Perfects are the remains of red plicated forms : lego,I read,legi; video,I see,vidi;

fodio,I stab,fodi; f gio,I flee,f gi; frango,I break,fregi. V.Denominative verbs in - o,like ac o,I sharpen; met o,I fear; also stern o,I snee e, form the Perfect in i after the analogy of primary verbs,and the formation in i grad ally extended in Latin.

III.THE SUPINE STEM. 135.1 S pine in t m,Perfect Passive Participle in t s: The stems are formed by t he addition of t or to (a) To the stem as it appears in the Present Infinitive active.Here belong most verbs of the first and fo rth conj gations,and those verbs of the second conj ga tion that are mentioned in 124 : amat m, delet m, a dit m. Those verbs of the second conj gation which form Perfect in i,form the S pine s tem by weakening the thematic vowel e to i,and adding t ,to,except censere,to deem, docere,to teach, miscere,to mix, tenere,to hold, torrere,to scorch, which omit the thematic vowel,and form cens m, doct m, mixt m, (tent m), tost m. (b) To the nstrengthened stem.Here belong most verbs of the third conj gation a nd the five verbs of the second j st given,with sporadic forms in the other conj gations :

In combinations of t-with a dental,assimilation took place,giving s ally "ss" a fter a short vowel and s after a long vowel : sciss m(scindo,I cleave), caes m(caedo,I fell). On the analogy of this and nder the infl ence often of Perfect in si,we find -s - also in some other stems :

capt rept dict fact

m(capio,I take), m(repo,I creep), m(dico,I say), m(facio,I do).

1.In stems with a g tt ral characteristic;as, fix m(figo,I fix); often with a preceding liq id : mers m(mergo,I dip;Pf .mersi); ters m(tergeo,I wipe; Pf .tersi); pars m (parco,I spare;Pf.parsi,old); spars m(spargo,I sprinkle; Pf.sparsi); m ls m(m lgeo,1 milk;Pf.m lsi); b t

fart m(farcio,I st ff; Pf .farsi); tort m(torq eo,I twist;Pf .torsi); ind lt m(rare and postclassical,from ind lgeo I ind lge; Pf.ind lsi). 2.In one with a labial characteristic : laps m(labor,I slip). 3.In some stems with characteristic s;as, cens m(censeo,I deem;see I.a.); haes m(haereo,I stick); pins m(pinso,I po nd). 4.In some stems with a nasal characteristic : press m(premo,I press;Pf .pressi ); mans m (maneo,I remain;Pf.mansi). 5.In stems where ll,rr has arisen by assimilation :

[CHANGE OF CONJUGATION.95] II.FUTURE ACTIVE PARTICIPLE IN -t r s.The same changes occ r in the stem as are fo nd in the case of the S pine. 1.In some stems ending in - a thematic vowel i is inserted;as arg it r s(arg ere,to prove); l it r s(l ere,to loose); abn it r s (abn ere,to deny); r it r s(r ere,to r sh); er it r s(er ere,to root o t); fr it ras(fr i,to enjoy). 2.Some F t re Participles are fo nd witho t corresponding Perfect : calit r s(calere,to be warm); carit r s(carere,to lack); dolit r s (dolere,to grieve);

p ls fals v ls c rs vers

m(pello,I drive); m(fallo,I falsify); m (vello,I pl ck); m(c rro,I r n); m (verro,I sweep).

iacit r s(iacere,to lie); parit r s(parere,to obey); valit r s(valere,to be well). 3.Irreg lar are :

agnot r s,agnit r s(agnoscere,to know well); discit r s(discere,to learn); ha s r s,ha st r s(ha rire,to drain); nis r s(niti,to lean); morit r s(mori,to die); noscit r s(noscere,to know); orit r s(oriri,to arise); parit r s(parere,to bear).

136.A change of Conj gation occ rs in verbs which show a long thematic vowel in the Present stem,b t not in the Perfect stem,or the reverse. 1.Verbs with Perfect and S pine formed reg larly,according to the third conj gat ion,have the Present stem formed according to one of the other three :

2.Verbs with Perfect and S pine formed according to the first,second,or fo rth c onj gations,have the Present stem formed according to the third,in conseq ence o f strengthening :

3.Verbs with the Present formed reg larly according to the third conj gation, ha ve the Perfect and S pine formed according to(a) the second,or(b) the fo rth con j gation : (a) acc mbere,to recline, fremere,to rage, gemere,to groan, gignere,to beget, molere,to grind, strepere,to reso nd, vomere,to vomit, form Perfect in i,S pine in it m. alere,to no rish, colere,to c ltivate, cons lere,to cons lt,

lino,

linere,

levi(livi),

lit m,

crescere,

crevi,

cret m,

sterno, to strew. cresco,

sternere,

stravi,

strat m, to grow. to smear.

vinxi,

venire, videre, vincire,

veni, vidi,

vent m, vis m,

to come. to see. vinct m,

saepio, to hedge abo t. venio, video, vincio, to bind.

saepire,

saepsi,

saept m,

sensi,

a geo, sentio,

a gere, sentire,

a xi,

a ct m, sens m,

to increase. to feel.

Change of Conj gation.

frendere,to show the teeth, occ lere,to conceal, rapere,to snatch, and its compo nds form Perfect in - i,S pine in -t m(-s m),For alit s,see 142,3 . [96 LIST OF VERBS] compescere,to check, concinere,to sing together, and other compo nds of canere,to sing, excellere,to excel, stertere,to snore, tremere,to tremble, form Perfect in i,b t no S pine. (b) arcessere,to s mmon, incessere,to enter, c pere,to desire, petere,to seek, q aerere,to search, and its compo nds, r dere,to roar, sapere,to savor, form Perfect in ivi,S pine in it m. 4.Stems vary among the first,second,and fo rth conj gations. (a) Verbs with the Present formed according to the first,and Perfect and S pine according to the second conj gation crepare,to crackle, c bare,to lie, domare,to conq er, micare,to flash, plicare,to fold, sonare,to so nd, tonare,to th nder, vetare,to forbid, with Perfect in i,S pine in it m : fricare,to r b, necare,to kill, secare,to c t, with Perfect in i,S pine in t m(b t participles in at s are occasional,principa lly in later Latin). (b) Verbs with Present formed according to fo rth,and Perfect and S pine accordi ng to the second :

amicire,to wrap, aperire,to open, operire,to cover, salire,to leap, and compo nds. (c) Of the second and fo rth conj gations is

5.dare,to give,and stare,to stand,pass over to the third conj gation in the Perf ect,in conseq ence of red plication. LIST OF VERBS ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM. PERFECT : vi;SUPINE : t m. 137.Stem class : (a) Verbs of first and fo rth conj gations,except those mentioned in 136,4.Irreg lar in S pine is

(b) In the second conj gation : deleo, delere, delevi, delet m, to destr oy. fleo, flere, flevi, flet m, to weep. neo, nere, nevi, net m, to spin. oleo(ab,in), olere, olevi, to grow. These compo nds form S pine in it m;abolit m,inolit s. -pleo, -plere, -plevi, -plet m, to fill. So the compo nds with com,in,ex,re,s p. vieo, viere, viet s, to plait. Irreg lar is cieo(cio), ciere(cire),civi, cit m(cit m),to stir p. In the compo nds we find the Participles concit s or concit s,percit s,excit s or excit s,b t accit s. [ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.97] (c) In the third conj gation :

In early Latin we often find accerso,the relation of which to arcesso is vario s ly explained.The forms arcessiri and later arcessiret r,from the fo rth conj gat ion,also occ r. incesso, incessere, So facesso,I ca se,make off. incessivi(cessi), to attack.

arcesso, arcessere, arcessivi, So,too,lacesso,I tease,capesso,I lay hold of.

arcessit m,

to send for.

sepelio,

sepelire,

sepelivi,

sep lt m,

to b ry.

poto,potare,to drink,forms S p.pot m or potat m,and F t.Part,pot r s or potat r s.

cieo(cio), ciere(cire), civi, and its compo nds;while

cit m(cit m),

to stir p,

to r b.

138.Red plicated class :

139.Nasal class: A.lino, linere, levi, lit m, to besmear. So compo nds of lino.Pf livi is rare. sino, sinere, sivi, sit m, to let. So desino,I leave off,and in early Latin,pono(= posino),I p t.

140.Inchoative class : inveterasco,inveterascere,inveteravi,inveterat m,to grow old. pasco, pascere, pavi, past m, to gra e(trans.) . vesperasco,vesperascere, vesperavi, to become evenin g. So advesperasco. cresco, crescere, crevi, cret m, to grow. So the compo nds. conc pisco, c piscere, c pivi, c pit m, to long for. obdormisco, dormiscere, dormivi, dormit m, to fall asleep. So condormisco,edormisco. exolesco, olescere, olevi, olet m, to get one's gro wth. So obsolesco,I grow old.B t abolesco,I disappear,has abolit m;coalesco, I grow together,coalit m; adolesco,I grow p,ad lt m in the S p.; and inolesco lacks the S pine. q iesco, q iescere, q ievi, q iet m, to rest. scisco, sciscere, scivi, scit m, to decree, So adscisco,I take on. [98 LIST OF VERBS] s esco, s escere, s evi, s et m, to acc stom one' s self, So compo nds as,con,de,man. (g)nosco, noscere, novi, (not m), to know. So ignosco,I pardon;b t cognosco,I recognise,and other compo nds of nosco, have S p.in it m. resipisco, sipiscere, to one's senses. sipivi,

sprevi, stravi,

spret m, strat m,

B.cerno, cernere, So decerno,I decide. sperno, spernere, sterno, sternere,

crevi,

(cret m),

sero, serere, sevi, So consero,b t with S p.consit m.

set m,

to sow.

to separate. to despise. to strew.

conq isivi, conq isit m, aero). r divi, r dit m, trivi, trit m, d APULEIUS has similar forms.

to h nt

q aesivi,

peto, petere, fly at). q aero, q aerere, to seek. conq iro, conq irere, So other compo nds of q iro(q r do, r dere, tero, terere, TIB.,1.4,48,has atter isse,.a

petivi,

petit m,

to seek( q aesit m, p.

to roar.

to come

141.1-class:

PERFECT : i;SUPINE :(i)t m. 142.Stem class : 1.The majority of the verbs of the second conj gation; see 134,1,b, and 135,a.B t

Pf .sorpsi occ rs in VAL.MAX.and LUCAN. 2.Of the first conj gation : crepo, crepare, crep i, crepit m, to rattle. So the compo nds,b t in early and late Latin the reg lar fornig of discreparo and increpare are occasional. c bare, c b i, c bit m, to lie. Occasional reg lar forms in postCiceronian Latin. domo, domare, dom i, domit m, to tame. frico, fricare, fric i, frict m(at m), to r b. Occasionally in early and more often in postclassical Latin,the reg lar forms are fo nd in the compo nds;so always fricat r s. mico, micare, mic i, to q ive r,flash, B t dimicare,to fight(o t),is reg lar,except occasionally in OVID. neco, necare, necavi(nec i rare),necat m, to kill. The compo nd enecare,to kill off,has enecavi in early Latin,otherwise en ec i (rare);and enect s(b t PLIN.MAI.,enecat s). plico, plicare, (plicavi), plicit m, to fold. The simple forms of plicare are rare.The compo nds ap,com,ex,im,vary between avi and i in the Pf.,and at m and it m in the S p.; b t CICERO ses always applicavi,application; complicavi,complicatom; and s ally expli cavi,always explicat m; always implicat m;circiimplicare is always reg lar; forms of replicare are rare.

B t attonit s a d intonat s(Hor.,Epod.2,51). [ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.99]

veto,

vetare, vet i, B t PERSIUS(5,90) ses vetavi.

vetit m,

to forbid.

tono, er.

sono,

seco,

secare, sec i, sect m, to c t. Reg lar forms are early,late,and rare. sonare, son i, sonit m, to so nd. B t reg larly sonat r s. Reg lar forms are late.In early Latin the forms sonere, sonit,son nt,resonit,reson nt,show that the simple verb was sonere. tonare, ton i, to th nd

c bo,

sorbeo, p.

sorbere,

sorb i,

c pio, sapio, a flavor.

c pere, sapere,

c pivi, sapivi( i)

c pit m,

to desire. to have

to s p

3.Of the third conj gation : fremo, fremere, frem i, to roar,rage. gemo, gemere, gem i, to groan . vomo, vomere, vom i, vomit m, to vomit . alo, alere, al i, alt m, to no ri sh. Participle alit s occ rs from LIVY on. colo, colere, col i, c lt m, to c ltivate. concino, cinere, cin i, to sing together. So occinere,praecinere. cons io, cons lere, cons i i, cons it m, to cons lt. depso, depsere, deps i, depst s, to knead. molo, molere, mol i, molit m, to grind . occ lo, occ lere, occ l i, occ lt m, to conceal. pinso, pinsere, pins i, pinsit m, to po nd . S p.also pins m,pist m.Collateral forms of piso,pisere,are early and rar e; so also is pinsibant. sero, serere, (sert m), to strin g(o t). Common in compo nds : as,desero,deserere,deser i,desert m,to desert. The same forms are fo nd occasionally in compo nds of serere,to sow(138) ,b t not in classical Latin. sterto, stertere, stert i, to snore. strepo, strepere, strep i, (strepit m), to make a din. texo, texere, tex i, text m, to weave.

4.In the fo rth conj gation :

The reg lar Perfects salivi,salii,are fo nd in compo nds,b t s ally in post classical writers,and often syncopated.

sal i,

salt m,

oper i,

opert m,

aper i,

apert m, to cover to leap.

amicio, amicire, to clothe, aperio, aperire, to open, operio, operire, p. salio, salire,

amic i(amixi),

Irreg lar are meto, metere, mess i, volo, velle, vol i, to wish. So no1o,malo;see 174.

mess m,

to mow.

amict m,

143.Red plicated class : gigno(GEN), gignere, gen i, genit m, to beget. Early Latin has the Present forms genit,gen nt,genat,genit r,gen nt r, genendi,geni. [100 LIST OF VERBS] 144.Nasal class : frendo, frendere, fres m, fress m, to gnash. Also in the form frendeo,frendere. acc mbo, c mbere, c b i, c bit m, to lie down. So also the compo nds con,dis,in;b t rec mbo lacks the S pine. excello, cellere, (cell i), (cels s) to s rpass. B t percellere,to beat down,has Pf .perc li,S p.perc ls m.Excell er nt is fo nd in GELL.xiv.3,7,and in AUGUSTINE;otherwise forms of Pf.and S p. do not occ r. 145.The Inchoative class :

A large n mber of verbs are formed from verbs of the second con j gation,or from s bstantives or adjectives,and take Pf.in i; as,

van i,

incal i.

146.The I-class : rapio, rapere, rap i, rapt m, to snatc h, corripio, ripere, rip i, rept m, to sei e . So other compo nds.In early Latin,s rripere syncopates some of its forms ,as s rp it,s rpere;s rp erat occ rs in HOR.; aoristic forms,as rapsit,s rrepsit , belong also to the early period.131,4,b.2. PERFECT: si; SUPINE: t m,s m. 147.Stem class : 1.In the second conj gation :

ridere,

risi,

ris m,

ardeo, fire, rideo, (at),

On sorbeo see 142,1. ardere,

arsi,

ars m,

i beo, .

i bere,

i ssi,

i ss m,

to order to be on to la gh

val i, gem i, not i,

valit m,

to get well, to sigh . to become known, to get warm.

coalesco, alescere, together. See 140. evanesco, vanescere, pear, convalesco, valescere, ingemisco, gemiscere, notesco, notescere, incalesco, incalescere,

al i,

alit m,

dispesco, dispescere, oose. So compescere,to check.

dispesc i,

to let l

to grow to disap

[ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.101] l geo, l gere, l xi, to be in mo rning. algeo, algere, alsi, to free e. f lgeo, f lgere, f lsi, to glow. In early Latin,forms of the third conj gation occ r : f lgit,f lgere,eff lgere (VERG.,A,viii.677). ind lgeo, ind lgere, ind lsi, (ind lt m), to give way. m lceo, m lcere, m lsi, m ls m to strok e. Rarely m lct s in compo nds. m lgeo, m lgere, m lsi, m ls m(ct m) to milk tergeo, tergere, tersi, ters m, to wipe. Forms of the third conj gation : tergit,tergit r,terg nt r,are occasionally fo nd;and so too in some late compo nds.VARRO has tert s. torq eo, torq ere, torsi, tort m, to twist t rgeo, t rgere, t rsi, to swell, rgeo, rgere, rsi, to press, coniveo(gnigv),nivere, nixi(ivi), to close the eyes.

2.In the third conj gation : carpo, carpere, carpsi, carpt m, to pl ck, decerpo,decerpere, decerpsi, decerpt m, to pl ck off. clepo, clepere, clepsi(clepi),clept m, to filch. Rare and anteclassic. n bo, n bere, n psi, n pt m, to p t on a veil (as a bride). repo, repere, repsi, rept m, to creep. scalpo, scalpere, scalpsi, scalpt m, to scrap e. scribo, scribere, scripsi, script m, to write . sc lpo, sc lpere, sc lpsi, sc lpt m, to chise l. serpo, serpere, serpsi, serpt m, to creep. premo(primo),premere, pressi, press m, to press. Some compo nds of emo,I take,b y,have Pf.in si,S p.in t m,

frigere, l cere,

(frixi), l xi,

to be chilled, to give light.

a geo, to wax frigeo, l ceo.

With dental dropped before ending of Pf .and S pine. a gere, a xi, a ct m,

to ca se

s adere,

s asi,

s as m,

manere,

mansi,

mans m,

haereo, (to), maneo, n, s adeo, sel.

haerere,

haesi,

(haes m ) ,

to stick to remai to co n

before which a e phonic p developes :

s mere, s mpsi, s mpt m, to take. On contemno see 149,c. dico dicere dixi (dicsi),dict m, to say. Impv.dic,see 130,5.Occasionally in old Latin dicebo for F t re. d co, d cere, d xi, d ct m, to lead Imperative d c,see 130,5. figo, figere, fixi, fix m, to faste n Part.fict s for fix s is occasional in early Latin. -fligo(con,af,in),-fligere,-flixi, -flict m, to strik e Simple verb is fo nd occasionally in early Latin. frigo, frigere, frixi, flict m, to parch [102 LIST OF VERBS] s go, s gere, s xi, s ct m, to s ck. F t.exs gebo is fo nd in PLAUT.,Ep.188. mergo, mergere, mersi, mers m, to pl ng e. spargo, spargere, sparsi, spars m, to strew , conspergo,conspergere,conspersi,conspers m,to besprinkle. coq o, coq ere, coxi, coct m, to cook. [-ligo (leg),-ligere, -lexi, -lect m.] diligo, diligere, dilexi, dilect m, to love. intelligo,or intellego,intellegere,intellexi, intellect m,to nderstand. negligo,or neglego, neglegere, neglexi, neglect m, to neglect. Other compo nds have legi.SALL.,J.40,1,has neglegisset.

sh t

strik

hoot

rego, regere, rexi, rect m, to keep right, dirigo, dirigere, direxi, direct m, to , pergo, pergere, perrexi, perrect m, to go on. s rgo, s rgere, s rrexi, s rrect m, to rise p. B t expergo formed expergit s in eary and late Latin. tego, tegere, texi, tect m, to cover. cla do, cla dere, cla si, cla s m, to sh t. con,excl do,excl dere, excl si, excl s m, to p,o t. Early Latin shows also cl do,cl dere. laedo, laedere, laesi, laes m, to harm. collido, collidere, collisi, collls m, to e together, l do, l dere, l si, l s m, to play. pla do( appla do),pla dere, pla si, pla s m, to clap, explodo, explodere, explosi, explos m, to off.

g ide

promere,

prompsi,

prompt m,

demere,

dempsi,

dempt m,

como, , demo, away, promo, o t. s mo,

comere,

compsi,

compt m,

to adorn to take to take

b ild, to drag.

[ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.103] 148.The T-class:

149.The Nasal class : (a) S pine witho t N :

(b) S pine with N : ango, angere, to throttle,vex. cingo, cingere, em ngo, em ngere, the nose. i ngo, i ngere, join. lingo, lingere, ningo, ningere, to snow. pango, pangere, in. Perfect also pegi,and S pine

anxi,

pact m.Compare 155 and paciscor,165.

panxi,

panct m,

linxi, ninxi,

linct m,

i nxi,

i nct m,

cinxi, em nxi,

cinet m, em nct m,

stringere,

strinxi,

strict m,

pingere,

pinxi,

pict m,

to paint to draw

to gird. to wipe to yoke, to lick. to drive

fingo, mingo, te. pingo, . stringo, tight.

fingere, mingere,

finxi, minxi,

fict m, mict m,

flecto, necto,

flectere, flexi, flex m, nectere, nexi(nex i),nex m, The Pf .forms : innex i(VERG.,A.v.,435). pecto, pectere, pexi, pex m, plecto, plectere, (plexi), plex m, .

rado, radere, rasi, ras m, ch. rodo, rodere, rosi, ros m, tr do, tr dere, tr si, tr s m, to p sh. vado(in,e), vadere, vasi, vas m, to cedo, cedere, cessi, cess m, way, q atio, q atere, (q assi), q ass m . conc tio(per,ex),conc tere, conc ssi, conc ss m, to mitto, mittere, misi, miss m, to divido, dividere, divisi, divis m, ro, rere, ssi, st m, to comb ro, comb rere, comb ssi, comb st m, to gero, gerere, gessi, gest m, to carry, fl o(fl gv), fl ere, fl xi, (fl x s), to flow, str o(str gv), str ere, str xi, str ct m, to traho(tragh), trahere, traxi, tract m, veho(vegh), vehere, vexi, vect m, to carry. vivo(vigv), vivere, vixi, vict m, to live,

to scrat to gnaw. go. to give to shake shatter. send. to part. b rn. b rn p.

to bend. to knot. to comb. to plait

to form. to rina

plango, plangere, planxi, planet m, to smite . -sting o, -sting ere, -stinxi, -stinct m, to p t o t. So the compo nds ex,dis,re;the simple verb is anteclassic. tingo(ting o),ting( )ere,tinxi, tinct m, to wet,dye. ngo( ng o), ng( )ere, nxi, nct m, to anoint. (c) temno(rare) and its compo nds form the Pf.with a e phonic p:

150.The I-class : 1.In the third conj gation : [-licio(LAC), -licere, -lexi, -lect m], to l re. pellicio, pellicere, pellexi, pellect m, to all re. So allicere,illicere,which,however,have early Pf.in i,as does pellicere also. B t elicere has - i reg larly in classical times,and elexi only later.

perspect m,

[104 LIST OF VERBS] 2.In the fo rth conj gation : saepio, saepire, saepsi, saept m, to hedge in. sancio, sancire, sanxi, sanct m. to hallo w. The S p.sancit m is rare. vincio, vincire, vinxi, vinct m, to bind. farcio(fercio) farcire, farsi, fart m, to st ff. f lcio, f lcire, f lsi, f lt m, to prop. sarcio, sarcire, sarsi, sart m, to patch . sentio, sentire, sensi. sens m, to feel. ha rio, ha rire, ha si, ha st m, to drain . VERG.,A.iv.,383,has ha s r s.Early Latin shows ha ribant(L cr.) and ha rierint;ha rit r s is very late.

PERFECT : i WITH REDUPLICATION;SUPINE : s m,t m. 151,In the first conj gation : 1.do, dare, dedi, dat m, p t,do. Everywhere a,except in das,tho givest,and da,give tho .

ra cio, ra cire, arse. This verb is very rare.

ra si,

ra s m

[-spicio(SPEC),-spicere, -spexi, to peer. perspicio, perspicere, perspexi, hro gh. So the compo nds with ad-,con-,de-,in-

-spect m], to see t

contemno, se.

temnere,

tempsi,

tempt m,

to despi

to be ho

to give,

1.Like do,are conj gated the compo nds with dissyllabic words,s ch as : circ mdo,I s rro nd; satisdo,I give bail; pess mdo,I r in; ven mdo,I sell; th s : 2.The compo nds of dare with monosyllabic words pass over wholly into the Third Conj gation. abdo, abdere, abdidi, abdit m, to p t a way. addo, addere, addidi, addit m, to p t t o. condo, condere, condidi, condit m, to p t p(fo nd). abscondo, abscondere, abscondi, abscondit m, to p t far away. Pf.abscondidi is fo nd in PL.,Mer.360,then not ntil late Latin. credo, credere, credidi, credit m, to p t faith. dedo, dedere, dedidi, dedit m, to give p. edo, edere, edidi, edit m, to p t o t. indo, indere, indidi, indit m, to p t i n. perdo, perdere, perdidi, perdit m, to fordo(r in). prodo, prodere, prodidi, prodit m, to betray. reddo, reddere, reddidi, reddit m, to give back. trado, tradere, tradidi, tradit m, to give over. vendo, vendere, vendidi, vendit m, to p t p to sale. NOTE.In early Latin dare formed the Pr.S bjv.,also d im.So in some of ita compo nds,as perd im.See 130,4. circ mdo,circ mdare,circ mdedi,circ mdat m,to s rro nd.

adstiti, constiti,

[ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.105] insto, instare, to stand pon. obsto, obstare, to stand o t against. persto, perstare, to stand finn. praesto, praestare, to stand ahead. institi, obstiti,

perstiti, praestiti,

2.sto, stare, So the compo nds : adsto, adstare, to stand by. consto, constare, to stand fast.

steti,

(stat r s),

to stand.

resto, restare, to stand over. disto, distare, to stand apart. exsto, exstare, to stand o t.

restiti,

All compo nds of stare with dissyllabic prepositions have,however,steti in the Perfect,as : antesto,I am s perior;intersto,I am between;s persto,I stand pon;th s : circ msto,circ mstare,circ msteti, to stand ro nd. NOTE.Compare sisto and its compo nds;154,1.

152.In the second conj gation : mordeo, mordere, momordi, mors m, to bite. pendeo, pendere, pependi, to hang(intr.). spondeo, spondere, spopondi, spons m, to pledg e oneself '. Compo nds omit the red plication,b t PLAUT.shows also despopondisse and despoponderas. tondeo, tondere, totondi, tons m, to shear . 153.In the third conj gation : (a) Stem class. Red plication lost in the compo nds : cado, cadere, cecidi, cas m, to fall. occido, occidere, occidi, occas m, to perish. recidere sometimes forms reccidi,as well as recidi,in the Perfect. caedo, caedere, cecidi, caes m, to fell. occido, occidere, occidi, occis m, to kill. cano, canere, cecini, (cant m), to sing. Compo nds form the Pf .in i.For(cant m),cantat m was sed. parco, parcere, peperci(parsi),(pars r s), to spare . comparco(perco),comparcere,comparsi,compars m,to save. parsi is common in early Latin,and is the only form sed by PLAUTUS.Early Latin shows rarely parc i.TER. ses compersit. 154.(b) Red plicated class : 1.sisto(=sisto),as a simple verb,has the transitive meaning, I(ca se to) stand,b t in its compo nds,the intransitive meaning,I stand.Compare sto,I stand,and its compo nds(151) :

stand. So the compo nds :

consisto,

consistere,

constiti,

constit m,

to come

sisto, to)

sistere,

(stiti),

stat m,

to(ca se

[106 LIST OF VERBS]

No S pine.The Pf.Part,is late. 155.(c) Nasal class: fallo, fallere, fefelli, fals m, to cheat . The compo nd refello has the Perfect refelli,and lacks S pine. pello, pellere, pep li, p ls m, to p sh, drive back. repello loses the red plicating vowel in Pf .repp ll. tollo, tollere, to lift p. Pf.and S p.are formed s st li(from red plicated Pf.tet li,171,N.1) and s b lat m(for t'lat m);a recent view makes s st li from(s)tolle. (pango), (pangere), pepigi, pact m, to drive a bargain. The Pr.forms are s pplied by paciscor,165.The Pf .pegi,rare in the simple form,is reg lar in the compo nds com,im,op.See 149,b. tango(TAG), tangere, tetigi, tact m, to to ch . attingo, attingere, attigi, attact m, to borde r pon. So with other compo nds. pendo, pendere, pependi, pens m, to hang( trans.). tendo, tendere, tetendi, tens m and t m,to stretc h. extendo, extendere, extendi, extens m and t m,to stre tch o t. ostendo, ostendere, ostendi, ostens m(t s), to stret ch at,show. The compo nds prefer the S p.in t m; so always attent s,content s, s ally distent s and intent s.

t ndo,

t ndere,

to place points between. t t di, t ns m,t s m, to th mp.

p ngo, p ngere, p p gi, (). interp ngo,interp ngere,interp nxi,interp nct m,

p nct m,

to prick

2.bibo, .

bibere,

bibi,

ro nd. (bibit s),

resisto, resistere, restiti, tand. adsisto, adsistere, adstiti, to stand near. insisto, insistere, institi, to stand pon. circ msisto,circ msistere,circ msteti,

against. restit m,

obsistere,

obstiti,

obstit m,

exsisto, p. obsisto, a stand

exsistere,

exstiti,

to a stand, desisto(ab),desistere, destiti,

destit m,

to stand off.

exstit m,

to stand to take to withs

to take a stand to drink

Simple form has s ally t ns s in the Participle;in the compo nds more often t s s. The red plicating vowel is lost in rett di. c rro, c rrere, c c rri, c rs m, to r n. The compo nds vary in their se of the red plication;praec rrere always has the red plication,s cc rrere always omits it;other compo nds vary.See 134,iii. 156.(d)Inchoative class : disco(= did(e)csco),discere, didici, to learn. A late form is F t.Part,discitttr s.Compo nds retain red plication.See 134,in. posco(= porcsco), poscere, poposci to claim . Compo nds retain the red plication.See 134,iii. 157.(e) The I-class:

The compo nds drop the red plication and form the Inf.in ire.B t reperire, to find,forms its Pf.,repperi,with omission of the vowel of red plication. [ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.107] PERFECT: i; SUPINE: t m,s m. 158.In the first conj gation :

The Present forms of lavere belong principally to early Latin,with occasional forms in A g stan poets and late writers;la t m and lot m are both sed in class ical times;b t la t m belongs rather to early,lot m to postclassical Latin.The form lavat m is early and poetical. 159.In the second conj gation :

fervere(ere),fervi(ferb i),

The Pr.forms of the third conj gation belong to early Latin and the poets.The Pf .in i is post-Ciceronian.

mot m,

sess m,

foveo, fovere, fovi, warm. moveo, movere, movi, paveo, pavere, pavi, to q ake(with fear). prandeo, prandere, to breakfast. sedeo, sedere, sedi,

fot m,

favere,

favi,

fa t m,

caveo, heed. faveo, lldisposed, ferveo(o), e.

cavere,

cavi,

ca t m,

prandi, prans m, to sit.

lavo,

lavare,

(lavavi),lavat m,

lavi,

la t m(lot m),

i vo, i vare, adi vo, i vare, d. (lavo),(lavere),

i vi, i t m(i vat r s), i vi,i t m(i t r s),

pario, parere,

peperi,

part m(parit r s),

to bring forth,

to help. to standby as ai to wash. to wash.

to take to be we to seeth

to keep to move.

strideo(de), stridgre(ere), stridi, to whistle, screech. voveo, vovere, vovi, vot m, to vow. The Present forms of the third conj gation belong almost entirely to A g stan poets and later writers.

160.In the third conj gation : With long vowel in the Perfect. 1.The Stem,class: ago, agere, agi, act m, to do,drive. cogo, cogere, coegi, coact m, to compel. dego, degere, to pass(time). redigo, redigere, redigi, redact m, to bring back. emo, emere, emi, empt m, to take,to b y. interimo, imere, emi, -empt m, to make away wit h. coemo,I b y p,is conj gated like emo.B t the compo nds with ad-,ex-, inter-,red-,take -imo.So,too,dirimo,I sever().

NOTE.In agere,edere,emere,the red plication has coalesced with the root;as, egi = eagi.

[108 LIST OF VERBS]

ico(defective), icere, ici, ict m, to strike. Present stem rare : icit,icit r,icim r. sido, sidere, sidi, to sit down. The Pf.was originally red plicated as the Present;see 133,ii.In composit

ion the Pf.is sedi,sess m,from sedeo,th s : consido,considere,consedi,consess m,to settle down. scabo, scabere, scabi, to scrat ch. solvo, solvere, solvi, sol t m, to loose,pay. verto, vertere, verti, vers m, to t rn. revertor,reverti,reverti(active),revers m,to t rn back. verro, verrere, verri(rare), vers m, to sweep. viso, visere, visi, to visit. volvo,volvere,volvo,vol t m,to roll. On percello,perc li,see 144.On tollo,s st li,see 155. 2.The Nasal class :

lego,

legere, legi, lectr n, to pick p,read. colligo,colligere,collegi,collect m.to gather. So the other compo nds,except diligo,intellego,neglego,see 147,2.

c do,

c dere, (c di), (c s m), The Pf.and S p.occ r in compo nds only.

edo,

edere,

edi,

es m,

to eat.

to hammer.

video, videre, vidi,

vis m,

to see.

psallo, psallere, psalli, to play on the c ithern. sallo, sallere, (salli), sals m, to salt. Very rare except in the past participle sals s. to pl ck. vello, vellere, velli(v lsi), v ls m, The Pf .v lsi is postA g stan.

f ndo(FUD),f ndere, f di, f s m, to po r. mando, mandere, mandi, mans m, to chew. pando, pandere, pandi, pass m, to spread o t. pans m in S pine is late. prehendo, prehendere, prehendi, prehens m, to sei e. Often shortened to prendo,prendere,prendi,prens m. scando, scandere, scandi, scans m, to climb, a(d),descendo,descendere,descendi.descens m,to climb p,down. frango, frangere, fregi, fract m, to break, perfringo,perfringere,perfregi,perfract m, to shiver. linq o, linq ere, liq i, to leave, relinq o,relinq ere,reliq i, relict m, to leave behind. (pango), (pangere), (pegi) (pact m), to drive in. compingo,compingere,compegi.compact m,to drive tight. See 149,b,155.

[ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.109] 3.The I-class. (a) With long vowel in the Perfect. capio(cap), capere, cepi, capt m, to accipio, accipere, accepi, accept m, to receive. facio, facere, feci, fact m, to calefacio(calf.),calefacere,calefeci,calefact m,to make warm. perficio, perficere,' perfeci,perfect m, to ve. The Pf.was originally red plicated;on Impv.fac,see 130,5. fodio, fodere, fodi, foss m, to f gio, f gere, f gi, (f git r s), to flee. iacio, iacere, ieci, iact m, to conicio, conicere, conieci, coniect m, to r. (b) With short vowel in the Pf.d e to the loss of the red plication : take. make. achie dig. cast. gathe

The red plicated form scicidi is fo nd in early Latin.

scindere,

scidi, sciss m,

findo, e. scindo, .

findere,

fidi,

fiss m,

vinco(vic),

vincere,

vici,

vict m,

to conq er.

to cleav to split

lambo, r mpo, accendo, defendo, d,

lambere, r mpere, accendere, defendere,

lambi, r pi, accendi, defendi,

r pt m, accens m, defens m,

to lick. to break. to kindle. to strike away,defen

161.In the fo rth conj gation :

come. advenat,evena

162.A n mber of verbs of the third conj gation have a characteristic - ;these fo rm the perfect in -i.

[110 DEPONENTS.] DEPONENTS. 163.The majority of the deponent verbs belong to the first conj gation.In many instances they have parallel active forms in early or in late Latin.The princip al verbs are as follows : In the first conj gation :

Occasionally active in anteclassical Latin(LUCR.v.,1070) and more often in later Latin. altercor, altercari, altercat s s m, to wrangle. In early Latin altercasti(TER.,And.653),altercas.Active forms more commo n in late Latin. arbitror, arbitrari, arbitrat s s m, to think. PLAUT. ses this verb also as an active,b t later this sage is rare.

a c por,

a c pari, a c pat s s m, Active forms are common in early Latin.

to try to catch.

ad lor,

ad lari,

acl lat s s m,

to fawn pon.

abl o, abl ere, abn o, abn ere, ac o, ac ere, adn o(ann o),adn ere, arg o, arg ere, bat o, bat ere, congr o, congr ere, delib o, delib ere, ex o, ex ere, imb o, imb ere, ind o, ind ere, l o, l ere, met o, met ere, min o, min ere, pl o, pl ere, r o, r ere, sp o, sp ere, stat o, stat ere, stern o, stern ere, s o, s ere, trib o, trib ere,

abl i, abn i, (abn it ac i, adn i, arg i, bat i, congr i, delib i, ex i, imb i, ind i, l i, met i, min i, pl it,pl vit, r i, sp i, stat i, stern i, s i, trib i,

abl t m, r s), ac t m,

to to to to arg t m, to to to delibiit m, to ex t m, to imb t m, to ind t m, to l it r s, to to min t m, to to r t m(r it r s),to sp t m, to stat t m, to to s t m, to trib t m, to

wash off. dissent. sharpen. nod assent. acc se. beat. agree. anoint. p t off,doff. dip,dye. p t on,don. atone for. fear. lessen. rain. r sh down. spew. settle. snee e. sew. allot.

amicio forms rarely in comperio, reperio, See the simple venio, In early Latin t.

late Latin amici;see 142,4. comperire, comperi,compert m, to reperlre, repperi,repert m, to verb parere,157. venire, veni, venit m, to sporadic tenses from a form venere occ r,as

find o t. find.

Active forms are early,legal,and late.Use as a passive is occasional in the clas sical period.

Active forms are early and late.Cic.and LIVY se the verb as a passive in a few instances. comitor, comitari, comitat s s m, to accompany. Poets(Ov.,PROP.,etc.) se the active forms freq ently.The Perfect Part,c omita t s is common as a passive,also in classical Latin. commentor, commentari, commentat s s m, to disc ss. Cic. ses commentat s as a passive in Br.88,301,Fam.xvi.,26,1. conflictor, conflictari. conflictat s s m, to str ggle. Occasionally fo nd for conflictare.See TER.,And.,93. conspicor, conspicari, conspicat s s m, to descry. So despicor,s spicor.B t a few forms are occasionally( s ally in early L atin) sed as passives,especially despicat s(PLAUT.,TER.),compared despicatissi m s by Cic.(Sest.16,36,Verr.iii.,41,98).PLAUT.,Cas.394,s spices.

criminor, criminari, criminat s s m, PLAUT. ses criminaret,ENNIUS criminat.

[DEPONENTS.111] fabricor, fabricari, fabricat s s m, to forge, The active forms belong to poetry a d to postA g stan prose. faeneror, faenerari, faenerat s s m, to lend on interest. Active forms occasional in early Latin and more freq ent in late Latin. fl ct or, fl ct ari, fl ct at s s m, to nd late. Active forms are rare in PLAUT.and in Cic.,b t not ncommon later.The de ponent forms are post-Ciceronian.

fr stror, fr strari, fr strat s s m, Active forms rare,b t at all periods.

(for),

fari, See 175,3.

fat s s m,

to speak. to deceive.

dignor,

dignari, dignat s s m, to deem worthy. This verb is predominantly postclassical and poetical.The active forms a re early and rare;perhaps once in CICERO.

c nctor,

c nctari, c nctat s s m, to delay. Active forms are occasional in early and late Latin.

cop lor,

cop lari, cop let s s m, to join. So PLAUT.,Aid.116.Otherwise everywhere cop lare. to charge.

contemplor, contemplari, The active forms are .

contemplat s s m, to s rvey. sed freq ently in early Latin(reg larly by PLAUT.)

a spicor,

a spicari,

a spicat s s m,

to take the a spices.

a g ror,

a g rari,

a g rat s s m,

to take the a g ries.

illacrimor, illacrimari, illacrimat s s m, In Cic.and HOR.; otherwise active.

to weep over.

interpretor, interpretari, interpretat s s m, to interpret. Cic. ses interpretat s occasionally as a passive;likewise LIVY and other s.

l dificor, l dificari, l dificat s s m, to make sport. Active freq ent in PLAUT.,and occasionally later. medicor, medicari, medicat s s m, to heal. The active is once in PLAUT.,and freq ent in poets and postA g stan pros e.

CERO. palpor, pop lor, ssic

palpari, palpat s s m, to stroke. is occasional(principally in early Latin) for palpare. pop lari, pop lat s s m, to ravage. Active forms in simple verb and compo nds are early,poetical,and postcla

stab lor, stab lari, stab lat s s m, Active forms begin with VERGIL.

to stable.

[112 DEPONENTS.]

t m lt or, t m lt ari, t m lt at s s m, B t PLAUTITS ses active forms;and passive

t tor,

t tari, t tat s s m, to protect. Active forms and passive sages are early and rare.

to raise a riot. ses are occasional later.

sector,

sectari, sectat s s m, Active forms and passive sages are early.

to p rs e.

scr tor,

scr tari, scr tat s s m, to search. PLAUT.,A l.657,perscr tavl.The se as a passive occ rs first in SENECA

sciscitor, sciscitari, sciscitat s s m, PLAUT.,Merc.389,sciscitaro(active).

opinor,

opinari, opinat s s m, to think. opino is freq ent in early Latin,and opinat s as passive is common in CI

odoror,

odorari, odorat s s m, Active forms occasional at all periods.

to smell.

to inq ire.

n tricor, n tricari, n tricat s s m, Active forms in early Latin.

m neror,

m nerari, m nerat s s m, to bestow. Active forms in early Latin and occasionally in Cic.and later. to s ckle.

meditor,

meditari, meditat s s m, to think over The form meditatUS is very commonly fo nd as a passive.

l ctor,

l ctari, l ctat s s m, to wrestle. PLAUT.,TER.,ENNIUS,VARHO show sporadic forms of the active.

ses.

164.In the second conj gation :

ater. liceor, mereor, liceri,

licit s s m,

mergri, merit s s m, to deserve. Especially in the phrases mereri bene de aliq o,to deserve well of any o ne. Otherwise the active is s al.

misereor, misereri, miserit s s m, to pity. In early Latin the active forms are fo nd occasionally,e.g.,LUCR,iii.,88 1. polliceor, polliceri, pollicit s s m, to promise. Occasionally sed as a passive in postclassical Latin.

In early Latin and occasionally later,a parallel form,t or,t i,t it s s m, occ r s.For toit s s ally t tat s.

165 In the third conj gation : apiscor, apisci, apt s s m, to get. Simple verb is freq ent in early and late Latin.Of the compo nds,adipisc or, adipisci,adept s s m,is s ally deponent in classical times,b t occ rs occas ionally as a passive in SALL.and later writers.The compo nds ind-,red-,are rare . amplector, amplecti, amplex s s m, to twine ro nd,embrace. So the compo nds complector,circ mplector.In early Latin active forms ar e occasionally fo nd;e.g.,amplectitote,circ mplecte(PLAUT.).

expergiscor,(reg) expergisci,experrect s s m,to(right one's self tip) awake. f ngi, f nct s s m, to discharge. This verb is sed passively very rarely :TER.,Ad.508.LUCR,iii.,968.Cic., Sest. 4,10.

f ngor,

comminiscor, comminisci, comment s s m, to think OVID and later writers se comment s as a passive.

p,devise.

vereor,

vereri,

verit s s m,

to fear.

t eor,

t eri,

t it s(t t s s m),to protect.

reor,

reri, rat s s m, Pr.Part.Active is wanting.

fateor,

fateri, fass s s m, to confess. confiteor,confiteri, confess s s m, to confess. Both fateor and confiteor are sed occasionally as passives by Cic.and l to bid(at a salt).

veneror,

venerari, venerat s s m, to reverence. B t PLAUT. ses venero,venerem;VERG.,HOR.,and later writers show passive

vagor,

vagari, vagat s s m, Active forms belong to early Latin.

to wander.

to think.

fr or(fr gv), fr i, fr ct s(fr it s) s m,to enjoy. The form fr it s is rare and late. [DEPONENTS.113] gradior, gradi, gress s s m, to step, aggredior,aggredi, aggress s s m, to attack. Occasionally active forms of the fo rth conj gation are fo nd in early Latin.

morior, mori, mort s s m, to die. Early Latin shows parallel forms of the fo rth conj gation,as moriri,emoriri.F t.Part,morit r s;see 135,ii.3.

nis r s, oblit s s m,

paciscor, pacisci, pact s s m(pepigi), to drive(a bargain). Occasionally active forms are fo nd in early Latin;in Cic.pact s is freq ently sed as a passive.See pango.

lciscor, lcisci, lt s s m, to avenge. Active forms are rare;so once in ENNIUS.B t SALL.,LIVY,and later writers se t he verb as a passive sometimes.

vescor, 166.

vesci, In the fo rth conj gation :

assentior, assentiri, assens s s m, to assent. Active forms are not ncommon in early Latin.Cic. ses the Pf .active forms fre

vehor,

vehi,

vect s s m,

to(wagon) ride. to feed.

tor, ti, s s s m, PLAUT.shows the compo nd ab sa as a passive(Asin.196).

to se.

seq or,

seq i,

sec t s s m,

q eror,

q eri,

q est s s m,

to complain. to follow.

pati, pass s s m, perpetior,perpeti, perpess s s m, e to the end. proficiscor,proficisci,profect s s m,to(get forward) set o t. B t PLAUT.,MG.1329,proficisco.

patior,

to s ffer. to end r

obliviscor,

oblivisci,

nitor(gnict- }niti, . from gen ) },'

nascor(gna), nasci, rm. F t.Part,nascit r s.

nat s s m,

nis s(nix s) s m,}.to stay one's self on } to forget.

nanciscor,

nancisci,

nact s(nanct s) s m,

loq or,

loq i,

loc t s s m,

labor,

labi,

laps s s m,

to glide. to speak.

to get. to be bo

q ently;likewise later writers. comperior, comperiri, to find o t. Occasionally fo nd(b t rarely in classical Latin;as,SALL.,J.,45,1;108,3) for c omperio,comperire.B t experior,experiri,expert s s m,to try,is reg larly deponen t;tho gh Cic.and others se often the Pf.active forms.

mentior, mentiri, mentit s s m, to lie. The poets and later prose writers se this as a passive also. metior, metiri, mens s s m, to meas re. Passive sage is common,especially in the compo nds : demens s,dimens s, emens s,permens s,remens s. [114 SEMIDEPONENTS.]

oriri, ort s s m, to arise. The Pr.Indic.is s ally formal according to the third conj gation;the Im pf. S bjv.always orerer;b t the F t.Part,is orit r s.The compo nds follow the s ame sage except adoriri,to rise p at,attack,which follows the fo rth conj gati on.

potiri, potit s s m, to get possession of '. The Pr.Indic.,Impf.S bjv.,and occasionally other forms,are also fo nd in early Latin and the poets,inflected according to the third conj gation;so reg larly after PLAUT.potit r,freq ently poteret r,poterem r.

ticiple. SEMIDEPONENTS.

167.1.A few verbs form the Perfect forms only as deponents :

2.The reverse sage is fo nd in :

revertor,

reverti,

reverti,

soleo,

solere, solit s s m, to be wont. The Pf.active is fo nd in early Latin;b t rarely.

ga deo, ga dere,

gavis s s m,

to rejoice.

fido,

fidere, fis s s m,

a deo,

a dere, a s s s m, to dare. On the aorist forms a sim,etc.,see 131,4,b. to tr st.

sortior,

sortiri, sortit s s m, to cast lots. Active occasionally in early Latin,and passive ses later of the Pf .Par

to t rn back.

p nior,

p niri, p nit s s m, to p nish. Occasionally in Cic.and late writers for p nire.

potior,

partior,

partiri, partit s s m, to share. Active forms and passive ses are fo nd in early Latin,and sporadically in Cic. and later.

orior,

ordior,

ordiri, ors s s m, to begin. ors s,and more commonly exors s,are also fo nd as passives.

largior,

largiri,

largit s s m,

to bestow.

So also dgverti,b t witho t Pf.Part.Revers s is also sed actively,b t r ever s s s m for reverti is postclassic. See also assentior,etc.,166. NOTES.1.Some active verbs have a Perfect Participle passive with active meaning,as : cenat s,one who has dined,from cenare,to dine; prans s,having break fasted,from prandeo,I breakfast; pot s,dr nken,from poto,I drink; i rat s, having taken the oath,sworn.,from i ro,I swear; coni rat s,a conspirator,from coni ro,I conspire.

considerat s,circ mspect (a),from considero; ca t s,wary (a),from caveo,I beware. 2.The Perfect Participle of many deponent Verbs has both active and pass ive meaning : adept s(adipiscor) having acq ired,or being acq ired; comitat s(comitor, I accompany); effat s(effor,I speak o t); expert s(experior,I try); exsecrat s (exsecror,I c rse); imitat s(imitor,I copy); merit s(mereor,I deserve); opinat s,necopinat s(opinor,I think); pact s (paciscor,I contract); partit s (partior,I distrib te); sortit s(sortior,I cast lots); t eor,I protect; t t s,safe. For others,see the list of deponents. [IRREGULAR VERBS.115] IRREGULAR VERBS. 168.Irreg lar in the formation of the tensestems : 1.Nine verbs of the third conj gation,which have,in spite of the short stemsylla ble,the Pf.in si,vi .: clepo, rego, tego, coq o, and the compo nds of lego, lacio, specio, divido, q atio, From lego,however,only diligo, I love;

I I I I I I I I I

filch; keep right; cover in; bake; pick p; l re; spy(-ligo,-licio,-spicio); part; shake.See 147,2.

Many s ch are

sed p rely as Adjectives:

are irreg lar.The other compo nds are reg lar.See 147,2. 2.Five verbs of the third conj gation,which,in spite of long stem syllable,have the Pf .in i,vi .: lambo c do, sido, strideo, verto,

3.Assimilation between bs and ms occ rs in the Pf.and S p.of i beo, premo(primo), I order.See 147,1. I press.See 147,2.

4.Special irreg larities occ r in : bibo, maneo, metior, meto, morior, ra cio, reor,

5.Formed from different tensestems,are the tenses of fero, tollo, I bear.171. I lift.155.

169.Irreg lar in the conj gation of the Present-stem i 1 .orior,oriri,ort s s m,to arise. See 166. 2.ire,to go. The stem is i,which,before a,o, ,becomes e, PRIN.PARTS : eo,ire,ivi(ii),it m. INDICATIVE. I go. SUBJUNCTIVE. I be going. PRES. SG.eam PL.eam s eas eatis eat eant

[116 IRREGULAR VERBS.] IMPF.ibam I went. ibas ibat ibam s ibatis ibant FUT. ibo,I shall go. irem I were going. ires iret irem s iretis irent.

SG.1.eo 2.is 3.it

PL.im s itis e nt.

I I I I I I I

drink.154,2. remain.147,1. meas re.166. mow.142,3. die.165. am hoarse.150,2. think.164.

I I I I I

lick; hammer; sit(160,1); whistle(159); t rn(160,1).

intellego, neglego,

I nderstand;and I neglect,

ibis ibit ibim s ibitis ib nt. PERF.ivi(ii),I have gone. iverim(ierim). isti ieris iit ierit iim s ieritis ier nt(iere). ierint PLUPF.iveram(ieram),I had gone. ivissem(iissem,issem). ieras isses ierat isset ieram s issem s ieratis issetis ierant. issent. FUT.PF. ivero(iero),I shall have gone. ieris ierit ierim s ieritis ierint. IMPERATIVE.

INFINITIVE.

PARTICIPLES.

PRES.ire. PRES.iens(G.e ntis). FUT.it r m esse. FUT.it r s. PERF.ivisse(isse sse).

REMARKS.1.Like the simple verb are inflected most of the compo nds,except in the Perfect system,where syncope() reg larly takes place(see 131,2). Veneo,I am for sale, and pereo,I perish, serve as passives to vendo,I sell, and perdo,I destroy, whose reg lar passives occ r only in the forms vendit s,vendend s,and perdit s(b t see Hor., Sat.,ii.6,59).Ambio,I solicit,follows the fo rth conj gation thro g h o t,b t in postCiceronian writers(Livy,TAC.,PLIN.Miii.) shows occasional forms like those of eo.Some compo nds show occasionally F t.in eam after the time of SENECA.

GERUND. e ndi,etc.

SUPINE. it m,to go.

SG. 2.i,go tho . 3. PL. 2.ite,go ye.

ito,tho shall go. ito,he shall go. itote,ye shall go. 3. e nto,they shall go.

2.The passive of the simple verb is fo nd only in the impersonal forms it r,ibat r,it m est,iri(in combination with the S pine). B t compo nds with transitive force are conj gated reg larly;so, praetereo forms praetereor, iris,it r,im r,imini,e nt r,ibar,etc., it s s m,eram,ero,e ntor,itor,iri,e nd s. 3.q ire,to be able;neq ire,to be nable. 170.(a) q eo,I am able,is fo nd in the following forms,of which those in parenth esis are nclassical,occ rring in early and late Latin and the poets;CAESAR ses no form of q eo. PR.INDIC.q eo,(q is),(q it),q im s,(q itis),q e nt. PR.SUBJV.q eam, q eas,q eat,q eam s,q eatis,q eant. IMPF.(q ibam),(q irem). FUT.(q ibo). PF.q ivi,etc.; q iverim,etc. PLUPF.q iveram,etc.; q ivissem, etc.: FUT.PF.q ivero,etc. PR.INF.q ire.PF.q ivisse. PART,q iens. (b) neq eo,I am nable,has the same forms,all of which seem to be classic except ing the F t re Indicative,which is not cited. [IRREGULAR VERBS.117] 4.ferre,to bear. 171.The endings beginning with t,s,and r are added directly to the root(132).Some parts are s pplied by t l (tol,tla). PRIN.PARTS : fero,ferre,t li,lat m. ACTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRES.I bear. SG. 1.fero, PL. 2.fers, 3.fert, I be bearing. PL. feram s, feratis, ferant.

bear ye.

SG.2.fer, 3 PL.2.ferte, 3

bear tho .

IMPF.ferebam, I was bearing. FUT. feram, I shall bear. PERF.t li, I have borne. PLUPF.t leram. FUT.PF.t lero.

ferrem,I were bearing. t lerim. t lissem.

IMPERATIVE. ferto, ferto, fertote, fer nto, tho shalt bear, he shall bear, ye shall bear, they shall bear.

ferim s, fertis, fer nt.

SG. feram, feras, ferat,

PASSIVE. INDICATIVE. I am borne. SUBJUNCTIVE. I be borne. PRES. SG.1.feror, 2.ferris, 3.fert r, IMPF. FUT. PERF. PLUPF. FUT.PF.

ferebar. ferar. lat s s m. lat s eram. lat s ero.

ferrer. lat s sim. lat s essem.

[118 IRREGULAR VERBS.]

PL.

fer ntor,

INFINITIVE. PRES.ferri,to be borne. F t.lat m iri. PERF.lat m esse,to have been borne.

PERF.lat s,a, m,borne. GERUNDIVE. ferend s. COMPOUNDS. allat m, to ablat m, to collat m, to dilat m, to elat m, to oblat m, to bear to. bear away. collect. p t off. carry o t. offer.

NOTES.1.The Pf.t li was originally red plicated tet li.See 134,iii.,155. Traces of this are seen in rett li. 2.S ffero,I ndergo,has the Pf.s stin i(s st li,s blat m,being appropriated to t ollo).(155.) 5.edere,to eat. 172.In certain forms the endings beginning with s,t,and r are added directly to the root(132);d before s(r) is dropped or assimilated(as ss),and before t become s s. PRIN.PARTS : edo,edere(esse),edi,es m. ACTIVE.

affero, afferre, a fero, a ferre, confero,conferre, differo,differre, effero, efferre, offero, offerre,

att li, abst li, cont li. dist li, ext li, obt li,

SG.

2.ferre,be tho borne. 3. 2.ferimini,be ye borne. 3.

IMPERATIVE. fertor, tho shalt be borne fertor, he shall be borne. they shall be borne PARTICIPLE.

PL.

ferim r, ferimini, fer nt r.

SG.ferar, feraris, ferat r,

GERUND, ferendi,etc.

SUPINE, lat m(t(o)lat m).

INFINITIVE. PRES.ferre. FUT.lat r m esse. PERF.t lisse.

PRES.ferens, FUT.lat r s.

PARTICIPLES. bearing.

PL.feram r, feramini, ferant r.

INDICATIVE. PRESENT. I eat.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

I be eating.

IMPP.edebam, FUT.edam. PBRF.edi. PLUFF.ederam. FUT.PF.edero.

I ate.

ederem,essem,I were eating ederim. edissem.

[IRREGULAR VERRS.119] IMPERATIVE.

INFINITIVE.

PASSIVE. In the passive voice the only pec liarities are as follows: Pr.Indic. Sing.Third, edit r and est r. Impf.S bjv.Sing.Third, ederet r and esset r. The Pf.Part,is es s and the Ger ndive edend s. NOTE.In the Pr.S bjv.Active,early Latin shows edim,edis,edit,edim s, editis,edint. Also ess m and ess in the S p., ess r s in the F t.Part. Comedere also shows comest s for comes s. 6.fieri,to become. 173.Fio is conj gated in the Present,Imperfect,and F t re, according to the fo r

GERUND. edendi,etc.

PRES.edere,esse,to eat. FUT.es r m esse. PERF.edisse.

PRES.(edens). FUT. es r s. SUPINE. es m,es .

SG.2.ede,es, eat tho . 3 PL.2.edite,este, eat ye. 3

edito,esto, edito,esto, editote,estote, ed nto,

tho shalt eat. he shall eat. ye shall eat. they shall eat PARTICIPLE.

SG.1.edo, PL. 2.edis,es, 3.edit,est,

edim s, editis,estis, ed nt.

SG.

edam, edas, edat,

PL.

edam s, edatis, edant.

th conj gation,b t in the S bj nctive Imperfect and in the Infinitive the stem i s increased by e; th s, fierem,I were becoming; fieri,to become. In these forms the i is short,b t else where it is long even before another vowe l. The Infinitive ends in ri,and the whole Verb in the Presentstem is treated as th e Passive to facio,I make.The rest of the Passive is formed reg larly from facio . PRIN.PARTS : fio,fieri,fact s s m. ACTIVE. PRES. IMPF. FUT. PERF. PLUPF. FUT.PF. facio, faciebam, faciam, feci. feceram. fecero. etc. INFINITIVE. IMPERATIVE. (fi),(fito). (fite). PRES. PERF. FUT. FUT.Pr. fieri. fact m esse,to have become, f t r m esse or fore. fact m fore. I make. INDIC.fio,I am made,I become. fis,fit(fim s,fitis),fi nt. I made. fiebam,I was made,I became. I shall make. fiam, I shall be made(become). fact s s m. fact s eram. fact s ero, SUBJV.fiam,fias,fiat,etc. fierem,fieres,etc.

[120 IRREGULAR VERBS.] NOTES.1.Occasionally in early Latin the form fiere is fo nd for the Infinitive, which indicates that the verb was ori ginally active.The forms fieri and fierem are very common in early Latin,along with the normal fo rms.Of the forms in parenthesis fim s and fitis do not certainly occ r,and the Imperative forms are earl y.Passive forms of fio are very rare;never in PLAUTUS or TERENCE. 2.The compo nds of facio with Prepositions change the a of the stem into i,and f orm the Passive in classical Latin reg larly from the same stem : perficio,I achieve Pass,perficior; interficio,Pass,interficior,I am destroyed.B t interfieri,confierent,confieri, and several other forms are fo nd in early Latin,and occasionally in classical t imes.When compo nded with words other than prepositions,facio retains its a,and ses fio as its Passive : patefacio,I lay open,Pass.patefio; calefacio,I warm, Pass,calefio. For the accent,see 15,2,R.2. 174. 7.velle,to be willing.

PASSIVE.

nolle,to be nwilling; malle,to be willing rather. PRIN.PARTS : volo,velle,vol i;nolo,nolle,nol i;malo,malle,mal i. INDICATIVE. PRES. volo, nolo, malo, vis, non vis, mavis, v lt, non v lt, mav lt, vol m s, nol m s, mal m s, v ltis, non v ltis, mav ltis, vol nt. nol nt. mal nt. IMPF.volebam, FUT.volam, voles,etc. PERF. vol i, PLUPF.vol eram, FUT.PF.vol ero, PRES.velim, velis, velit, velim s, velitis, velint. IMPF.vellem, PERF.vol erim, PLUPF.vol issem, [DEFECTIVE VERBS.121] IMPV. INF.PR. velle, PF. vol isse, PART, volens, SG.noli,nolito. PL.nolite,nolitote,nol nto. nolle, nol isse, nolens. nolebam, nolam, noles,etc. nol i, nol eram, nol ero, nolim, noils, nolit, nolim s, nolitis, nolint. malebam. malam, males,etc. mal i,etc. mal eram,etc, mal ero,etc.

SUBJUNCTIVE. malim, malis, malit, malim s, malitis, malint. mallem. mal erim,etc. mal issem,etc.

NOTES.1.To the time of CICERO,and occasionally later, volt,voltis,are employed for v lt,v ltis. In familiar lang age si vis,si v ltis,were contracted to sis, s ltis; vis was f rther combined with -ne into vin. 2. Nolo is a contraction of nevolo(= non volo),and in early Latin we find,a long with the forms given above,also nevis,nevolt;also occasionally we find non velis, non velit,non velint,non vellem,for nolis,etc.; b t the feeling is slightly different.

nollem, nol erim, nol issem,

malle. mal isse.

3. Malo = ma volo,from mag(mage,magis)-volo.Freq ently in PLAUT.,b t rarel y in TER.,we find mavolo,mavol nt,mavolet,mavelim,-is,-it,mavellem, instead of malo,malim,malis,etc. 175. DEFECTIVE VERBS. I .aio,I say aye.

SUBJV.PRES.SG.

2.aias,

3.aiat, IMPV.ai.

3.aiant.

PART, aiens(as adj.),affirmative.

NOTE.In early Latin ain(= aisne ?) was scanned often as a monosyllable;and in th e Impf., aibam,aibas,aibat,aibant were freq ently employed along with the normal forms.The Impv.is rare,and fo nd only in early Latin.Pr.S bjv.aiam is emended into PL.,Ep.,281. 2.inq am,I say,q oth I.

1.inq ii,

IMPV.inq e,inq ito.

3.fari,to speak. INDIC. PRES.fat r. FUT.fabor,fabit r. PERF.fat s s m,etc. IMPV.far e. PART. PRES.fans,fantis,fanti,fantem. GER.fandi,fando. SUP.fat .

fat m,fate; effat s,designated. [122 DEFECTIVE VERBS.] 4.havere(avere),salvere. IMPV.have, salve,salvebis, hail tho ! haveto, salveto.

NOTE.In addition to these,compo nds show also PRES.: -faris,-fam t r;IMPF.: -fabar,-fabant r;FUT.: -fabere,-fabim r;PART.: -fante e forma,as well as the ncompo nded forms,tho gh occasionally fo pec liar to the poets ntil post-A g stan times.The Pf .Part,is passively;so especially

r,-famini, -fan and others.Thes nd in prose,are sometimes sed

FUT. PERF.

2.inq ies, 2.inq isti,

IMPF. SG. SG.

SG.

3.inq iebat. 3.inq iet. 3.inq it.

INDIC. PRES,

SG. PL.

1.inq am, 1.inq im s,

2.inq is, 2.inq itis,

3.inq it. 3.inq i nt.

INDIC. PRES.SG. 1.aio, 2.ais, IMPF. aiebam,etc. PERF. 3 ait

3.ait,

PL.3.ai nt.

havete, salvete, INF.havere, salvere.

hail ye !

Corresponding to these are the forms of valere,vi .: vale,valete,valere,farewell. 5.coepi,memini,odi,novi. In se only in the Perfect-stem are

coepi,I have beg n, which serves as a Perfect to incipio,and memini,I remember, odi,I hate, novi(from nosco,see 131,3,140),I know,am aware, cons evi(from cons esco),I am wont, which have the force of Presents.

eg n. NOTE.Early Latin shows coepio,coepias,coepiat,coepiam,coepere,coeperet. F t re P articiple coept r s is Post-A g stan.incepi is anteclassical. Passive forms coept s s m,etc.,occ r with the same meaning in combination with a Passive Infinitive.See 423,N.3. b.INDIC.memini, I remember. memineram. meminero. IMPV.SG.memento. c.INDIC. oderam. odero. FUT.PART. odi,I hate, odissem. os r s. SUBJV. meminerim. meminissem. INF. meminisse,to remember. PL. mementote. SUBJV. oderim. INF. odisse,to hate.

NOTE.Occasionally in early Latin,the poets,and later prose,deponent forms of the Perfect are fo nd,os s s m,etc.For the Passive the phrase odio esse is sed. d.INDIC. novi. noveram(noram). novero(noro). 6.cedo,q aeso. Other defective forms are : SG. cedo,give !(old Impv.) INDIC.PRES. q aeso,please(i.e.,I seek,beg), SUBJV. noverim(norim). novissem(nossem). INF. novisse(nosse) to know.

PL.cette. q aes m s.

NOTE.Other forms of q aeso are fo nd occasionally in early Latin,and sporadicall y in Cic.,SALL.,and later;the Pf.forms have been attached to q aerere,137,c. [FORMATION OF WORDS.123]

a.INDIC.

coepi,I have beg n. coeperam. coepero.

SUBJV.coeperim. coepissem. INF. coepisse,to have b

FORMATION OF WORDS. 176.By the formation of words is meant the way in which stems are made of roots, new stems of old,and in which words are compo nded. 177.All roots of the Latin lang age are probably monosyllabic.* They can be asce rtained only by scientific analysis. The difference between Root and Stem has been set forth in 25,NN. Sometimes the Stem is the same as the Root;especially in the Root Verbs(132).B t it is s ally different. 178.Words are either simple or compo nd. A simple word is one that is formed from a single root : sol,s n; stare,stand,stay. A compo nd word is one that is made p of two or more roots : solstiti m,s nstaying,solstice().

A.Simple Words. 179.Simple words are partly primitive,partly derivative or secondary. 1.Primitive words come from the root(),and as this s ally appears in the simplest form of the verb-stem,primitive words are called verbals.Examples are the rootverbal forms(134,ii.,132,135,i.), some s bstantives of the third declension,as d x(d cs),leader,root d c(see 183,i), many s bstantives of the first,second,and fo rth declensions,as : scriba(scribo,I write),scribe(). 2.Derivative words are formed from a no n-stem;hence called denominatives : vet stas,age,from vetes(N.vet s),old. NOTE.Denominative verbs incl de many verbs which cannot definitely be referred t o any s bstantive;s ch as many freq entatives and intensives.In its narrower sig nification the term refers to the special class of verbs made from s bstantives in se. 180.S bstantives are generally formed by means of a s ffix. A s ffix is an addit ion to a stem,and serves to define its meaning or show its relations.So from the verbal stem scrib (scribo,I write) comes scriptor,writer; scriptio(n),writing. -------------------------------------------------------------------------* The theory of monosyllabic roots is adopted here as being somewhat more con ve nient than the theory of polysyllabic roots,now held by some important scholars. Of co rse it will be nderstood that the act al existence of mere roots can be ass med only for a very early period in the development of lang age,long before the indepen dent existence of Latin.

[124 FORMATION OF WORDS.] S ffixes are either primary or secondary.A primary s ffix is one added to a root (or verb stem) to form primitive words.A secondary s ffix is one sed in the for mation of derivative words.Th s, -tor in scriptor is a primary s ffix; -tas in vet stas is secondary. NOTES.1.By the fading o t of the difference between primary and secondary s ffix es,primary s ffixes come to be sed sometimes to form secondary derivatives.

scribtor becomes scriptor; regs becomes rex. Stems are sometimes extended by a vowel, s ally i,less often ,to facilitate pro n nciation : valid s,strong; doc ment m,proof; sometimes they change the stem vowel : teg,cover; toga,toga; t g ri m,h t. 3.Vowel stems lengthen the final vowel : ac -,sharpen; ac men,sharp part,point.() The final vowel often disappears before the s ffix : opta-,choose; optio,choice. 181. FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES.

The s ffixes,as applied to vario s roots,have often special f nctions,and form w ords of definite meaning.The most important are as follows : 1.Agency is indicated by -tor,-tric(N.tor(m.),trix(f.)): amator,lover; victrix,conq eress; occasionally -ter(N.ter,G.tri) :

-on(N.o,G.onis) :

arbiter(= ad + ba,step),

mpire;

2.Consonant stems before consonant s ffixes

ndergo the s al changes(9).So

combibo(fellow-drinker),boon companion; occasionally -o,-a(N. s,a) : servos,slave; scriba,scribe; -ono -ona(N.on s,ona) : colon s,settler(); -(i)t(N.es,G.itis) : miles,soldier,and a few others. 2.Action,Activity,and Event are indicated by a. -t (N.t s,s s,G. s) : advent s,arrival; -trina(N. trina) : doctrina,instr ction; -ina(N.ina) : rapina,rapine(); -men (N.men,G.minis) : agmen,train(); -mento(N.ment m) : torment m, tort re(); -ela(ella) : loq ela,speech; q erela,complaint; -cinio (N. m) : latrocini m,highway robbery; -monio,-monia(N.monia,moni m) : q erimonia,complaint; testimoni m,testimony. b.Abstracts. Masc line : -os(N.or,G.oris) : angor,ang ish.

Feminine : -on(N.de,go,G.inis) : imago,image; c pido,desire; -ia : a dacia,boldness; -ion(N.io) : legio,legion(); -tin : avaritia, avarice; collateral are some with Nom.in -ties,as d rities,hardness; -tion(N.tio,sio) : ambitio,ambition; conf sio,conf sion; -tat (N.tas) : aeq alitas,eq ality; -t ra :

pict ra,painting; -t t(N.t s, s s): i vent s,yo th; -t (s )(N.t s,s s), sens s,perception(); -t don(N.t do,G.inis): aegrit do,sickness of heart. Ne ter: -tio (N.ti m) : serviti m,bondage(). 3.An Artisan or Tradesman is indicated by -ario(N.ari s) : argentari s,money changer().

[FORMATION OF WORDS.125] 4.The Trade is indicated by -aria : argentaria,silver mine,bank(). 5.The Locality of the work(or trade) is indicated by -ario(N.ari m) : seminari m,seed-plot;() -onio(N.oni m) : f lloni m,f ller's shop;(a) -ina : officina,workshop(); -cro,-c lo(N.cr m, c l m) : lavacr m,bath; -trino,-trina(N.trina,trin m) : s trina,shoemaker's shop; pistrin m,mill. 6.Instr ment and Means are indicated by -bro,bra,(N.bra,br m) : libra,balance,; cribr m,sieve; -cro,-c lo(N.cr m,c l m) : bac l m,walking stick; -lo,-la(N.la, l m) : pila,pillar; tel m,weapon; - lo,- la(N. l s, la, l m) : cap l s,handle; reg la,r le; cing l m,girdle; -mento(N. ment m) : aliment m,no rishment; -fro,-tra(N.tra,tr m) : fenestra,window; aratr m,plo gh.

7.Relationship is indicated by -ter(N.ter,G.tris) : pater,father; mater,mother. 8.Condition or Relation by -ina : disciplina,discipline; medicina,medicine. g.F nction is indicated by -t ra(s ra) :

10.Office is indicated by -at (N.at s,G.at s) : cons lat s,cons lship; -t ra(s ra) :

dictat ra,dictatorship. 11.Dense Growths are indicated by -eto(N.gt m) : m rtet m,myrtle grove; -to(N.t m) :

virg lt m,br shwood. 12.Dimin tives are indicated by -lo,-la(N.l s,etc.),before which a liq id is assimilated(9,3) : (ager),agell s,little field; (tab la),tabella,tablet; (corona),corolla,chaplet; Cat ll s(= Catonl s); hom ll s(= homonl s),manikin; -olo,- lo : olo after e,i,v,otherwise - lo(N.ol s,ola, l s, la) : (alve s),alveol s,little hollow; (filia),filiola,little da ghter; (valva),valvolae,pod(little flaps); (circ s),circ l s,little ring, -c lo,-c la (N.c l s,etc.),after e,i, ,and consonant stems :

c lt ra,c ltivation.

(spes),spec la,slight hope; (amnis),amnic l s,streamlet; (vers s),versic l s,versicle; (homo,homin-),hom nc l s,manikin; (flos),flosc l s,floweret; (cor, cord-),corc l m,dear heart. NOTE.Dimin tives have,as a r le,the gender of their primitives.Exceptions are so metimes d e to difference in signification. [126 FORMATION OF WORDS.] 182. FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES.

The significance of the most important adjective s ffixes,which are often identi cal with the s bstantive s ffixes,are as follows : 1.Action is indicated by -b ndo,-b nda : c nctab nd s,lingering. Repeated action by - lo,- la : cred l s,q ick to believe; q er l s,complaining. Passive action is indicated by bili; amabilis,lovable; vendibilis,to be sold. 2.Capacity and Inclination are indicated by -c ndo,-c nda : fac nd s,of ready speech; verec nd s,modest. Passive Capacity by -ili : agilis,readily moved,q ick; docilis,teachable. The Capacity and Res lting Condition by tili : d ctilis,d ctile; fictilis,capable of being mo lded,of clay. 3.Tendency is indicated by -aci(N.ax) : a dax,bold; rapax,greedy. 4.Likeness and Composition or Material are indicated by

-aceo,-acea : ar ndinace s,reedy; cretace s,chalky; -icio : laterici s,made of brick; -no,-na : acern s,of maple; -neo,-nea : aene s,bra en. 5.Belonging to is indicated by -io,-ia : imperatori s,belonging to a general; -icio,-icia : aedilici s,belonging to an aedile; -ano,-ana : h man s,h man; rban s, rbane,city.

6.App rtenance and Medi m are indicated by -tico, -tica : aq atic s,aq atic; -tili: aq atilis,aq atic; pl matilis,(embroidered) like feathers. 7.Origin is indicated by -io,-ia : Cornelia(lex),Corinthi s; -ano,-ana,-ino,-ina : Romanns.Latin s. 8.Time is indicated by -tino,-tina : crastin s,of tomorrow; -terno,-terna :

hestern s,of yesterday; - rno,- rna :

noct rn s,by night; -tino,-tina : mat tin s,of early morning. 9.Locality,where,whence,is indicated by -ia : Gallia,Ga l; -tino : intestin s,inner,intestine; -ensi : circensis,from the circ s; Siciliensis,Sicilian; -ati(N.as) : c ias,of what co ntry ? [FORMATION OF WORDS.127] 10.F lness is indicated by -oso,-osa : animos s,f ll of spirit; verbos s,wordy; -lento,lenta : sang inolent s,bloody; op lent s,with ab ndant means. 11.Descent and Relationship are indicated in Latin mainly by Greek adjectives,ma de by the addition of Greek s ffixes to proper names. These s ffixes are M.-ides(G.idae),F.-is(G.idis),from Nominatives in s,or,os, and s preceded by a consonant;M.-ides(G.Idae),F.-eis(G.eidis), from Nominatives in -e s;M.-ades(G.ad ae),F.-eis(G.Sidis),from Nominatives in -as(G.ae) and -es(G.ae);M.-iades(G.iadae ),F. -ias(G.iadis).from Nominatives in i s,es,on,o;F.-ine,from Nominatives in s and -e s;F.-ione,from Nominatives in i s : (Tantal s) Tantalides,son of Tantal s; Tantalis,da ghter of Tantal s; (Pelops) Pelopides; (These s) Thesides,Theseis; (Aeneas) Aeneades(Aeneadae also); (Laertes) Laertiades; (Nept n s) Nept nine; (Acrisi s) Acrisione,etc.

12.Dimin tive adjectives are formed by the same s ffixes as dimin tive s bstanti ves(181,12) : alb s,white, alb l s,whitish; miser,wretched, misell s,poor(little); acer,sharp, acric l s,somewhat sharp. 183.

SUBSTANTIVES WITHOUT SUFFIXES. (Root S bstantives.)

A few s bstantives are formed from roots witho t a s ffix : 1.With weak root : d cs(d x),leader,from root d c,lead; necs (nex),killing,from root nec,kill. 2.With strong root : l cs(l x),light,from root l c,light; regs (rex),king,from root reg,r le. 3.With red plication : carcer,jail; marmor,marble; m rm r, m rm r.

THE SUFFIXES IN DETAIL. 184 Vowels. -o,-a(N. s,a, m).Primary and secondary adjectives,and primary s bstantives.The p rimary adjectives resemble somewhat active participles in meaning; fer s,wild; vag s,wandering. Secondary are especially adjectives in -or s,as decor s,gracef l from decor,grace, and many others.Masc line s bstantives in s are often no ns of agency,sometimes nomina actionis and concretes therefrom : coq os,cook; rog s,pyre. Those in a(a) are reg larly nomina agentis,especially in composition; scriba,scribe; agricola,h sbandman (land-tiller). Feminines are in -o(which are principally names of trees :

pir s,pear tree ) and in -a : l pa,she-wolf, as well as l p s. Ne ters are those in m,especially names of fr its : pir m,pear. [128 FORMATION OF WORDS.] -i(N.is,e).S bstantives : M . orbis,circle; piscis,fish,etc.; F.avis,bird; navis,ship; N.mare,sea; conclave,room. Adjectives : d lcis,sweet; t rpis, gly. NOTE.In adjectives especially,i is often weakened from o,as inermis and iner m s ,etc.Sometimes in s bstantives the Nom,shows es instead of is,as caedes and caed is,etc. -io,-ia(X.i s,ia,i m).--1.This is the principal secondary s ffix,and is fo nd in many combinations;b t it is also fo nd as primary in s bstantives : M.geni s,geni s; gladi s,sword; F.pl via,rain; tibia,fife; N.foli m,leaf; odi m,hate; and in adjectives eximi s,preeminent(taken o t); sa ci s,wo nded, pl vi s,rainy. 2.The s ffix occ rs as secondary in the forms -eio(aeo) -io,eo,io,in a large n m ber of Gentile names : Flavei s,Flavi s; L cei s,L ci s,L ci s; similar to these are those in edi s,idi s,idi s,-eli s,ili s,as L cidi s, Corneli s, L cili s. Also in some adjectives of material in e s,as

a re s,golden; ferre s,iron. It occ rs,moreover, in many compo nd adjective and s bstantive endings,to be dis c ssed later,and in many abstract s bstantives in antia,entia,as ab ndantia,ab ndance; scientia,knowledge,etc. NOTE.Instead of ia,we find ea in a few words : cavea,cage; cochlea,snail. - (N. s, ). M.arc s,bow; c rr s,chariot; F.ac s,needle; man s,hand; N.gel ,frost; gen ,knee. Secondary is socr s,mother-in-law. This s ffix is fo nd occasionally in adjectives compo nded with man s,as centiman s,h ndred-handed; also in the form - i in a few adjectives,as ten is,thin. NOTE.The s ffix -o often alternates with - . - o, a(N. os, a, om).Primary and secondary s bstantives and adjectives.Primary : M.eq os,horse; F.alvos,belly; N.arvom,field; parvos,small. Secondary : M.patr s, ncle; cervos, stag; F.ian a,gate; cern os,stooping; aestivos,of the s mmer. NOTE.IvoS is fo nd in vocivos(vac os),redivivos,etc.-vo is weakened to -vi in pelvis,basin. 185.S ffixes with G tt rals.

1.-co,-ca(N.c s,ca,c m).This forms both adjectives and s bstantives,b t is

s al

ly secondary.As primary it is fo nd in : ioc s,jest; loc s,place; as secondary in : medic s,physician; pedica,fetter. Adjectives are primary : casc s,very old; or secondary : civic s,civic. 2.-aco,-aca(N.ac s,aca,ac m).Primary in cloaca,sewer;() secondary in verbenaca,vervain,() and in adjectives,as merac s,p re. [FORMATION OF WORDS.129] 3.-ico,-ica(N.ic s,ica,ic m).In s bstantives,s ch as : M. mbilic s,navel; F.lectica,litter; rtica,nettle.

In adjectives,as : amic s,friendly,etc. 4.- co,- ca(N. c s, ca, c m).Primary in the adjectives : cad c s,tottering; mand c s,voracio s; secondary in alb c s,asphodel; and in s bstantives 'n- ca,as er ca,caterpillar; verr ca,wart. NOTE.Similar is the secondary s ffix -inq o in longinq os,distant; propinq os,near.

5.-de(N.ax) forms s bstantives and adjectives;the latter expressing inclination. Primary : a dax,bold; f gax,fleeing. Secondary : F.fornax,f rnace; limax,snail; verax,tr thf l. 6.-ec(N.ex) is fo nd in vervex,wether. 7.-ic(N.ex) forms a n mber of s bstantives that are mainly masc line,except name s of plants and trees.Primary : M.apex,point; cortex,bark; F.ilex,holm-oak. Secondary : F.imbrex,g tter-tile. 8.-ic(N.ix) forms s bstantives and adjectives.Primary : F.radix,root; felix,happy. Secondary : cornix,crow,and feminines in -trix. 9.-oc (N.ox) is fo nd in the s bstantive celox,yacht, and in a n mber of adjectives : atrox,ferocio s. 10.-aceo,-acea(N.ace s,acea,ace m),forms adjectives of material or likeness : cretace s,chalk-like. NOTE.Notice also the s ffix -acio,especially in proper names : Voracia. 11.-iceo,-icio(N.ice s,etc.,ici s,etc.),form adjectives in dicating material,the latter s ffix also some indicating relation : palmice s,of palms; trib nici s,proceeding from a trib ne. 12.-icio(N.ici s,etc.) is fo nd in novici s,new,

and in words of participial meaning coming from forms in -to,as adventici s, stranger. 13.- ceo,- cio,occ rs in pann ce s or pann ci s.() 14.-cino and cin'io occ r(perhaps) in vaticin s,prophetic, and in some secondary ne ter s bstantives,which denote action or event,as latrocini m,robbery. 15.-cro,-cri,-clo,-c lo(N.cer,sris,cl m,c l m) are fo nd in some adjectives with participial force,and in a few ne ter s bstantives indicating,instr ment or loc ality;as alacer,q ick; mediocris,mediocre; pericl m(c l m),danger; bac l m,stick(also m.); sep lcr m,grave. Also the primary ridic l s,la ghable, and the secondary annic l s,aged. [130 FORMATION OF WORDS.] 186.S ffixes with a Dental. 1.-d(N.(d)s).S bstantives only : fra s,cheatery;() merces,pay; c stos,g ard.

frigid s,cold; viridis,blooming. 3.-to(-so)(N.t s,ta,t m).This forms s bstantives and adjectives,and is both prim ary and secondary.Primary : M.c bit s,elbow; digit s,finger; also s bstantives in ta after Greek analogy :

poeta,poet;

2.-do,-di(N.d s,etc.,dis).A secondary s ffix f adjectives :

sed especially for the formation o

F.hasta,spear; amita,a nt; N.l t m,m d; tect m,roof; apt s,fit; beat s,blessed. Secondary : M.na ta,sailor; F.i venta,yo th; N.dense growths in et m : fr ticet m,copse;() i st s j st, and passive adjectives like barbat s,bearded. 4.-ti(si) [N.tis(sis)] forms primary and secondary s bstantives and adjectives.P rimary : M.f stis,cl b; cassis,h ntingnet; F.c tis,skin; sitis,thirst; fortis,brave; mitis,mild. Secondary : (1) in adjectives and s bstantives indicating home,origin, s ally pr eceded by a,i,more rarely e : Camers(Camertis),from Camerin m; Arpinas(Arpinatis),of Arpin m; nostras,from o r co ntry; (2) in the form ensi(for entti) in adjectives of origin and locality : Siciliensis,from Sicily; castrensis,belonging to a camp. 5.-t(N.(t)s) forms primary and secondary s bstantives and adjectives.Primary : M.comes,companion; dens,tooth; F.q ies,rest; ars,art; loc ples,wealthy; with preceding e : dives,rich. Note also the Participles in ns.Secondary : M.ales,bird; eq es,horseman.

6.-ento(N.-ent s,etc.) forms s bstantives and adjectives;the latter are particip ial in nat re. M.vent s,wind; F.polenta,cl ster; N. ng ent m,salve; cr ent s,bloody. Secondary adjectives : gracilent s,slender; and by false analogy corp lent s,corp lent,and the like. 7.-tat,-t t(M.tas,t s),forms secondary feminine abstracts and collectives : civitas,citi enship; libertas,freedom; i vent s,yo th; virt s,manliness. 8.-tio,-tia,-tie(N.ti m,tia,ties),likewise form abstracts and collectives,some n e ter,most masc line : serviti m,slavery; mollitia and mollities,gentleness,etc. NOTES.1.In initi m,beginning,and spati m,room, the s ffix is primary. 2.Many roots form vario s derivatives of similar meaning,th s : d ritia, d rities, d ritas,hardness,etc. 9.-tico(N.tic s,etc.) forms secondary adjectives signifying pertaining to; domestic s,domestic; aq atic s,aq atic. [FORMATION OF WORDS.131] NOTE.In s ch s bstantives as cantic m,tritic m,the ending co has been ad ded to a participial form in to(canto,trito). 10.-ter forms primary s bstantives of kinship; as, pater,etc. Different in formation is soror,

which,like xor,has no feminine ending.

11.-tor(-sor),F.tric(N.tor,trix),form s bstantives of agency,those in trix being all secondary : a ditor,hearer; venatrix,h ntress; -tor is secondary in gladiator,etc. 12.-t ro -t ra,(N.t r s,etc.),forms participles in t r s,as amat r s,and feminin e s bstantives denoting activity or office : c lt ra,c ltivation; cens ra,censorship, 13.-torio(sorio)(N.tori s,etc.),form ne ter s bstantives of place and instr ment ,and adjectives denoting that which pertains to the actor : a ditori m,lect re hall; aleatori s,pertaining to a dice player. 14.-tro,-tra(N.tra,tr m),forms s bstantives,mostly ne ter,of means: aratr m,plo gh; fenestra(f.),window. From words like monstr m,monster, come by false analogy those in ster,as pinaster,wild pine. 15.-tero,-tera(N.ter,tra,tr m) forms comparatives: alter,other; dexter,right; noster,o r; perhaps also adjectives of relation,app rtenance,or locality in -ster(Gr.stris), s ch as : pal ster(= pal dter),swampy; eq ester,eq estrian; campester,champaign;() terrester,of the earth,terrestrial. 16.-trino,-trina(N.trina,trin m),forms s bstantives of activity(f.),or of locali ty(f.,n.) : doctrina,instr ction; pistrina,bakery; pistrin m,(po nding) mill.

17.-till(-sili)(N.tilis,tile) forms primary adjectives of capacity and adaptatio n,and with preceding a secondary adjectives of relation or belonging : d ctilis,d ctile;() missilis,missile; aq atilis,belonging to the water. 18.-terno(N.tern s,etc.) forms adjectives indicating time : hestern s,of yesterday. 19.-t rno(N.t rn s,etc.) forms s bstantives and adjectives indicating contin anc e,from which come proper names : Sat rn s,Volt rn s, tacit rn s,silent. 20.-tino,-tino(N.tin s,tin s,etc.),forms adjectives of time,the latter also of p lace : crastin s,of tomorrow; intestin s,inner,intestine; mat tin s,of early morning. 21.-t (-s )(N.t s,s s) forms s bstantives of action and its res lt : advent s,arrival; c rs s,co rse; ort s,rising. 22.-at (N.at s) forms secondary s bstantives of office : cons lat s,cons lship senat s,senate. [132 FORMATION OF WORDS.]

1.-bo,-ba(N.b s,etc.),forms s bstantives and adjectives : M.morb s,disease; F.barba,beard; N.verb m,word; prob s, pright. 2.-bro,bra(N.bra,br m),forms s bstantives indicating means or instr ment.Primary : F.dolabra,celt;() libra,balance;() terebra,borer;() N.cribr m,sieve. Secondary : candelabr m,candlestick. NOTE.Very rare are masc lines;as,faber,wright;M lciber,V lcan.

187.

S ffixes with a Labial.

()

3.-b lo,-b la(N.b la,b l m),form s bstantives : F.fab la,tale; fib la(fig),brooch;( ) N.pab l m,fodder;() stab l m,stall.() 4.-bill(N.bilis) forms adjectives,mostly of passive meaning in classical prose : amabilis,lovable; nobilis,noble; flebilis,weeping. 188.S ffixes with an original S. 1.-is(N.is,G.eris) forms a few s bstantives: vomis(also vomer),plo ghshare; () cinis,ashes; p lvis,d st; c c mis,c c mber. 2.- s(N. s,G.eris,oris) forms primary and secondary ne ter s bstantives.Primary : foed s,bond;(y) gen s,race; temp s,time. Secondary : pect s,breast; f n s,f neral. NOTE.Some s ch words have become monosyllabic,as aes, i s, r s. 3.-os(or)(N.os,or,G.oris) forms many primary and a few secondary masc line abstr acts.Primary : flos,flower; amor,love. Secondary : aegror,sickness. NOTE.Noteworthy are M.lepUS,hare; F.arbos,tree(45 N.); Ven s(G.Yeneris), and the adjective vet s(G.veteris),old.

4.-es(N.es,es,G.is,ei) forms a few s bstantives of the third and fifth declensio n : vates,bard; fames,h nger; plebes,people. 5.-oro(N.or s,etc.) forms secondary adjectives,as : canor s,so nding; honor s,hono rable; and a few s bstantives,as : a rora, morning; Flora,etc. 189.S ffixes with a Liq id. 1.-lo,-la(N.l s,etc.),forms many feminine and ne ter,and a few masc line s bstan tives : M.mal s,mast; F.pila,pillar; N.cael m(= caedl m),chisel; fil m,thread. 2.-ilO,-ila(N.il s,etc.),forms primary and secondary s bstantives [FORMATION OF WORDS.133] and adjectives. M.sibil s,hissing; N.cael m(= cavil m,hollow),heaven; n bil s,clo dy. 3.(-olo),- lo,- la(N. l s,etc.),form primary and secondary s bstantives,most of which indicate instr ment,and primary adjectives indicating repeated action or t endency: M.ang l s,corner; oc l s,eye; F.reg la,r le; teg la,tile; N.iac l m,javelin; spec l m,mirror; bib l s,bib lo s;() cred l s,q ick to believe; q er l s,complaining; caer l s,bl e(secondary),and caer le s. Also fam l s,servant, and the extension familia,family.

4.-li(N.lis,le) occ rs in the s bstantive : M.ca lis,stalk; and in adjectives : s btilis,fine; incilis,c t in. Secondary in fidelis,faithf l. 5.-ili(N.ilis,ile) forms a few s bstantives and many adjectives indicating passi ve capacity : F.strigilis,scraper; N.tegile,roof. Also vigil,watchman; agilis,readily moved; docilis,teachable. Secondary in h milis,low, and in the terminations -tilis,-silis. 6.-olO, -ola(after e,i,v),- lo,- la(N.ol s, l s,etc.),form dimin tives : alveol s,little belly; filiol s,little son; riv l s,brooklet; reg l s,chief; voc la,voice; gran l m,grain; alb l s,whitish; parvol s,small. 7.-ello,-ella(N.ell s,etc.),forms dimin tives after l and by assimilation after n,r : popell s,tribelet; tabella,tablet; p ella,girl; bell s(bon s),good; misell s(miser),wretched. Do bly dimin tive are catell s,p ppy; cistella,basket; capitell m,head. 8.-illo,-illa(N.ill s,etc.),forms dimin tives,and is formed like ello,b t s all y after a preceding i :

p lvill s,small c shion; pistrilla,small mill; sigill m,small image; bovill s,bovine. Also codicilli,billets; pa xill s,slight; p sill s,tiny. 9.-olla,is fo nd in corolla,wreath; olla,jar(a la). 10.- llo,- lla,occ rs in ll s,any. S lla( = S r la),Cat ll s(Catonl s), hom ll s(= homonl s,).

11.(-colo),-c lo(N.c l s,etc.),forms dimin tives,especially after consonantal an d e,i, stems : M.flosc l s,floweret; hom nc l s, manikin(irreg lar); av nc l s, ncle(mother's brother,irreg lar); F.spec la,little hope; a ric la,ear; arb sc la,little tree(irreg lar); dom nc la,little ho se(irreg lar); N.corc l m,(dear) heart; m n sc l m,little gift. Adjectives are d lcic l s,sweetish, and especially dimin tives from comparative stems, meli sc l s.(a) 12.-cello(-cillo)(N.cell s,etc.) stands to c lo as ello to lo: M. penicill s,-m,painter's br sh; oscill m,little mo th; mollicell s, softish.(a) [134 FORMATION OF WORDS.] 13.- leo(N. le s) forms s bstantives that were originally adjectival : ac le s,sting. 14.-ali,-ari(N.alis,aris,etc.),form secondary adjectives,some of which are s bst antivised in the ne ter,and a few s bstantives : venalis,venal;() mortalis,mortal;

sing laris, niq e; v lgaris,common; canalis,canal; animal,living being; calcar,sp r. 15.-ela(-ella) forms primary and secondary s bstantives,most of which indicate a ction: loq ela(loq ella),talking; candela,candle; c stodela,watching. 16.-eli(N.elis,etc.) forms secondary s bstantives and adjectives: card elis,linnet;( cr delis,cr el. )

REMARK.A f rther development of -eli is -elio,-elia : A reli s, cont melia,cont mely.() 17.-ili(N.ilis,ile) forms secondary s bstantives and adjectives : M.aedilis,aedile; N.c bile,co ch; sedile,seat; civilis,civic; erilis, master's. 18.-mo,-ma(N.m s,etc.),forms primary s bstantives and primary and secondary adje ctives.The feminine s bstantives express s ally the res lt of an action: M.anim s,spirit; calm s,calam s, stalk; F.fama,fame; flamma,flame; N.arma,arms; pom m,fr it. Adjectives,primary: alm s,fostering; firm s,strong. Secondary: opim s,fat; patrim s,matrim s,with father,mother,living. 19.-men,(N.men,G.minis) forms primary,ne ter s bstantives,mostly indicating acti vity or res lts of activity : agmen,train; fl men,river; b t M.flamen,priest. 20.-mento(N.ment m) forms s bstantives(mostly primary) indicating instr ment :

aliment m,no rishment; torment m,tort re.

2.Rare and archaic are feminines in -menta : armenta = arment m.() 3.menti occ rs in sementis(f ),seed = semen(n.). 21.-met(N.mes,G.mitis) forms a few masc line s bstantives : trames,path; fomes,f el; limes,crosspath. 22.-mino,-mina,-mno,-mna(N.min s,etc.),form s bstantives : M.termin s,bo ndary; P.al mna,fosterda ghter; femina,woman; N.damn m,loss. 23.-mon(N.mo,G.monis) forms primary and secondary masc line s bstantives : p lmo,l ng; sermo,disco rse; temo,pole(of a chariot). 24.-monio,-monia(N.monia,moni m),forms primary and [FORMATION OF WORDS.135] secondary s bstantives.Primary : F.alimonia,no rishment; q erimonia,complaint; N.alimoni m,no rishment. Secondary : P.acrimonia,tartness; N.matrimoni m,marriage. 25.-mor forms primary masc line s bstantives : cremor,broth; r mor,r mo r. 26.-mic(N.mex,G.micis) forms a few s bstantives : cimex,b g; p mex,p mice. 27.a.-no,-na(N.n s,etc.),forms primary and secondary adjectives;the primary are

NOTES.1.men and ment m are often formed from the same radical.In that case ment m is the more common : teg men,teg ment m,covering.

participial in meaning;the secondary indicate material or relation,and occasiona lly locality;when added to local comparatives and adverbs,distrib tive n merals are also formed with this s ffix.Primary : dign s,worthy; plen s,f ll. Secondary : di rn s,daily; fratern s,brotherly; acern s,maple; extern s,o ter; bini,two each. NOTE.Adjectives denoting material have also neo(= n'eo),as aene s, bra en;Iligne s,q erne s.

b.-no,-na(N.n s,etc.),forms primary and a few secondary s bstantives.Primary: M.f rn s,oven; p gn s,fist; F.cena,meal; lana,wool. N.don m,gift; regn m,kingdom. Secondary : M.trib n s,trib ne; F.fort na,fort ne; alb rn m,sapwood. NOTE.This s ffix is extended in pec nia,money. 28.-b ndo,-c ndo(N.b nd s,etc.,c nd s,etc.),form adjectives of activity : c nctab nd s,delaying; fac nd s,eloq ent. 29.-ni(N.nis) forms primary s bstantives and adjectives : amnis, stream; penis,tail; panis.bread; immanis,wild; segnis,la y. 30.-ino,-ina(N.in s,etc.),forms primary and secondary s bstantives and adjective s.Primary : M.domin s,lord; F.pagina, page; licin s,c rled pwards. Secondary : M.pedicin s,foot;

F.fiscina,basket; N.s cin m,amber; faecin s,making dregs. NOTE.The s ffix is extended in the proper name Licini S. 31.-ano,-ana(N.an s,etc.),forms secondary adjectives,some of which are s bstanti vised.They indicate origin or app rtenance; dec man s,belonging to the tenth; h man s,h man; altan s,seawind. Primary in Volcan s,Diana. 32.-aneo(N.ane s,etc.) forms primary and secondary adjectives.Primary : consentane s,harmonio s. Secondary : s bitane s,s dden. This s ffix becomes anio(= an'io) in proper names :

Afrani s, F ndani s. 33.-eno,-ena(N.en s,etc.),forms secondary s bstantives and [136 FORMATION OF WORDS.] adjectives : M.Vibidien s; F.catena,chain; habena,rein; N.venen m,poison; egen s,needy; alien s,strange. NOTE.This is extended to enon in tolleno,(well) sweep.() 34.-ino,-ina(N.in s,etc.),forms primary and secondary s bstantives and adjective s.Primary : M.catin s,-m,dish; F.rapina, rapine; r ina,r in; necopin s, nexpected. Secondary: M.p lvin s,c shion; salin m,saltcellar, and many feminines,especially those denoting shops and factories;

regina,q een; c lina,kitchen; officina,workshop; agnin s,belonging to a lamb; divin s,divine. NOTE.An extension of this s ffix is fo nd in ricini m,veil. 35.-en(N.en,G.inis) forms a few s bstantives : M.pecten,comb; N.gl ten,gl e. 36.-on(N.o,G.inis) forms a few s bstantives : M.cardo,hinge; margo,rim; ordo,row; F.aspergo,sprinkling; virgo,maid; caro, flesh. NOTES.1.Noteworthy is homo,hominis,man, 2.This s ffix occ rs very commonly in compo nds forming feminine abstracts : -edon(N.edo), d lcedo,sweetness; -idon(N.ido), c pido,desire; formido,fear; - don(N. do)

test do,tortoise; -t don(N.t do), aegrit do, sickness; -agon(N.ago), imago,image; - gon(N. go),

aer go,r st; -igon(N.igo), callgo,thick darkness; origo,origin,etc.

37.-on(N.o,G.onis) forms primary and secondary s bstantives. The primary are no ns of agency :

combibo,fellowdrinker; praeco, herald; tiro,recr it. The secondary indicate often the possession of some bodily or mental pec liariti es; aleo,diceplayer; cent rio, cent rion. 38.-ion(N.io) forms a few masc line and many feminine primary and secondary s bs tantives.Primary : M.p gio,dagger; F.opinio, opinion; regio,region. Secondary : M.pellio,f rrier(); vespertilio, bat; F.comm nio,comm nion. NOTE.Especially freq ent are feminine abstracts in tio(sio) : ambitio,ambi tion; opp gnatio,siege. Noteworthy are the secondary dimin tives, hom ncio, senecio. 39.-ono, -ona (N.on s,ona),forms few primary and many secondary s bstantives;the masc lines indicate agents,especially person employed : M. colon s,settler; F. matrona,matron; Bellona. 40.-onio,-onia(N.oni s,etc.),forms s bstantives and adjectives : M. Favoni s, ephyr; Pomponi s,etc.; ca poni s,belonging to a host. Ne ters indicate the trade or shop : f lloni m,f ller's shop. 41.-ro,-ra(N.(e)r,ra,r m),forms primary s bstantives and adjectives : M. ager,field; caper,goat; m r s,ivall; F. la r s,la rel; [FORMATION OF WORDS.137]

serra,saw; N. flagr m,whip; labr m,lip; clar s,bright; p r s, clean. Often a short vowel precedes : M.n mer s,n mber;F.camera, va lt;N.i ger m,meas r e of land.So hilar s,joyo s;Uber, free;cam r s,va lted;sat r,f ll. NOTES.1.Extensions are Merc ri s,t g ri m,h t. 2.In a n mber of primary s bstantives and adjectives simple r is preceded by a s hort vowel : M. later,tile; anser,goose; F. m lier,woman; N. acer,maple; ver(= veser),spring; cic r,tame. 42.ri(N.(e)r,ris,G.ris) forms s bstantives and adjectives : M. imber,rainstorm; acer,sharp; f nebris,f neral; perhaps celeber,thronged. 43.-aro forms adjectives,as : avar s,greedy; amar s,bitter. 44.-ari -ali(N.aris,alis,etc.),forms secondary s bstantives and adjectives; -ari when the stem has l, -ali when it has an r : p gillares, tablets; primipilaris,one who has been primipil s; some ne ters in ar (from -are) : calcar,sp r; exemplar,pattern; p lvinar,(sacred) co ch; a xiliaris,a xiliary; militaris,military; cons laris,cons lar. 45.-ario,-aria(N.ari s,etc.),forms s bstantives and adjectives.There are sometim es collateral forms in -aris.The s bstantives, when masc line,indicate artisans; when feminine,b siness or profession;when ne ter,the place where the work is ca rried on.M. argentari s,moneychanger; ferrari s,iron-worker; F. N. apiari m,beehive; argentaria, silver mine,bank or banking;

pomari m,apple orchard. 46.-ero(N.er s,etc.) forms sever s,earnest, and the s bstantive galer s,-m,bonnet. 47.-ari forms the s bstantive sec ris,axe, and by extension pen ria,want. 48.The letter r appears often in combination with other s ffixes,as : -erco in l perc s,Pan; noverca,stepmother; -erto in lacert s,arm; lacert s,a li ard; -erbo in acerb s,so r; s perb s,pro d; -ervo in acervos,heap; caterva,crowd; -erna in caverna,hollow; l cerna, lamp; -terna in lanterna,lantern; - rno in alb rn s,white fish; lab rn m,lab rn m(). 190. FORMATION OF VERBS.

1.Primitives are confined to the Third Conj gation,to some forms of the Irreg la r verbs,and to some Inchoatives.The vario s stem formations are shown in 133. 2.Derivatives comprise the verbs of the First,Second,and Fo rth [138 FORMATION OF WORDS.] Conj gations,and some verbs of the Third Conj gation.They are all (except the In choatives and the Meditatives) formed with the s ffix io, ie(yo,ye),which is add ed either to simple verbal stems,or to no n (16) stems already existing or pres pposed.The i in io,ie,contracts with the preceding vowels a,e,i, ,leaving the or dinary forms of the reg lar conj gations.Certain categories of these verbs have obtained special names according to their vario s meanings : The Ca satives,formed by a change in the stem-vowel. The Desideratives,formed by the addition of -io to nomina agentis in tor;afterwa rds a desiderative force was associated with the combination -torio(-tario),and it was applied indiscriminately. The Freq entatives come originally probably from participial stems in -to;Latin developed also the s ffix -ito;f rther,this being added again to to gave rise to -tito(-sito).

The Inchoatives,formed by a special s ffix,-sco(sko),are treated in conj gation as primitives belonging to the Third Conj gation. The Meditatives have not been explained. NOTE.Theoretically the Verbalia are all Denominativa,b t owing to the wide worki ng of Analogy,it has been impossible in many cases,as in amare,monere,to discove r an original no n;while in other cases,as the verbal is formed from a part of a denominative verb,it is convenient to retain the division. 191. A.Verbalia(derived from verbstems,190,N.):

1.Freq entatives or Intensives,denoting "repeated or intense Action".These verbs end in -tare(-sare),-itare,-titare(-sitare), and follow the s pine stem(perfect passive form). (a) cantare,sing;compare cano(cant m) : c rsare,r n to and fro; compare c rro(c rst n) : dictare,dictate;compare dico(dict m) : dormitare,be sleepy;compare dormio(dormit m) : habitare,keep,dwell; compare habeo(habitnm) : pollicitari,promise freely;compare polliceor (pollicit s) : p lsare,beat;compare pello(p ls m). (b) agitare(ago), noscitare(nosco), sciscitare(scisco), visitare(viso), vocitare(voco), volitate(volo). (c) cantitare(cantare), dictitare(dictare), c rsitare(c rsare). NOTES.1.The simple verb pres pposed by the freq entative or intensive is often o t of se,as in the case of : g stare,taste; hortari,exhort. The freq entative or intensive in -tare is often o t of se : actitare,repeatedly or ealo sly agitate(no actare),from ago,act m: lectitere,read caref lly(no lectare),from lego, lect m. 2.The verbs of the Fo rth Conj gation form no freq entatives except dormio,sleep,dormito; m nio,fortify,m nito(rare); salio,leap,salto; aperto,lay bare, and operto,cover, and compo nds of vento(venio,come). 2.Inchoatives indicate "entrance pon an action".For their formation see 133,V. 3.Desideratives denote "Desire or Tendency".They are formed

[FORMATION OF WORDS.139] by means of the s ffix -t rio(-s rio) : es rire(for edt),to be sharp-set for eating,h ngry; empt rire,to be all agog() for b ying. 4.Ca satives signify "the Effecting of the Condition" indicated by their origina l verb.They are fo nd mainly in the Second Conj gation, and show s ally a chang e in the stem-vowel. Change: cadere,fall,and caedere,fell; liq gre,melt(trans.),and liq ere,melt(intr.); from root men(as in memento) comes monere, remind; necare,kill,and nocere,be death to; placere,please,and placare,ca se to be pleased,appease; sedere,sit,and sedare,settle. No change; f gere,flee,and f gare,p t to flight; iacere,throw,and iacere,(lie) thrown; pendere(hang) weigh,and pendere,hang(intr.). 5.Meditatives :(verbs that look forward to an action).These end in -essere : arcessere,to s mmon; capessere,to catch at; facessere,to do eagerly; incessere,to enter; lacessere,to irritate(136,3,V). 192.B.Denominatives(derived from no n-stems) : 1.These are most commonly fo nd in the First Conj gation,even tho gh the stemvow el of the no n is i or . (a) acervare,heap p(from acervos); aest are,seethe(aest s); coronare,wreathe(corOna); levare,lighten(levis); mac lare,besmirch(mac la); nominare,name(nomen,nominis); onerare,load (on s,oneris). The Deponents signify "Condition,Employment" : aneillari,be maid (ancilla); aq ari,be a drawer of water(aq a);y f rari,thieve(fOr); laetari,be glad(laet s). (b) albere,be white(alb s); florere,be in bloom(flos,floris); frondere, be in leaf(frons.frondis); l cere,be light(l x,l cis). (c) arg ere(be bright,sharp),prove;

laedere,h rt; met ere,be in fear(met s). (d) c stodire,g ard(c stes,c stodis); finire,end(finis); lenire soften(lenis); vestire,clothe(vestis). 3.Noteworthy are the Dimin tives formed by the s ffix -illare : stillare,drop(stilla);N scintillare,sparkle(scintilla); oscillare,to swing (oscill m). Similar in f nction b t of different formation are p ll lare,spro t(p ll s); fodicare,p nch(fodere,dig) albicare,whiten (alb s). NOTES.1.The Denominatives of the First,Third,and Fo rth Conj gations are reg lar ly transitive,those of the Second Conj gation are reg larly intransitive. 2.These verbs are often fo nd only in combination with prepositions : ab ndare, r n over,abo nd(from nda,wave); acc sare,acc se(from ca sa,case); exaggerare,pile p(from agger); exstirpare,root o t(stirps); ill minare,ill mine.(from l men,l minis). [140 FORMATION OF WORDS.] B.Compo nd Words. I.FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS. 193.1.By composition words are so p t together that a new word is made with a si gnification of its own.The second word is reg larly the f ndamental word,the fir st the modifier. NOTE.Properly speaking,composition occ rs only in the case of s bstantives,i.e., where two or more simple stems come together.In verbs,there is either j xtaposi tion, where the parts still retain their original force,or the combination of a verb with a preposition.Broadly speaking,however,composition applies to all comb inations of words. 2.Composition is either proper or improper. 194.S bstantive. In Composition Improper there are either traces of constr ction or the first par t is still inflected : enormis = ex norma,o t of all r le,; legislator,lawgiver; Senat s-cons lt m,decree of the Senate. Many of these compo nds have grad ally become inflectional :

delir s(delira),cra y from fear; egregi s(egrege),disting ished(from the crowd); procons l(for pro console); tri mvir(from tri m vir m),etc.

Noteworthy are the Cop lative compo nds;s ch are compo nd n merals like ndecim,d odecim,etc., and occasional others : s -ove-ta r-ilia,offerings of swine,sheep,and b lls. 195.Composition Proper. 1.The first part of the compo nd may be a particle,as nefari s, nefario s(y); vesan s,mad,o t of one's so nd senses : or a s bstantive. If it is a s bstantive (a) The stems in -a,-o,- reg larly weaken these vowels into -i before the conso nants of the second part,which i may vanish : ca sidic s,pleader,lawyer(ca sa); signifer,standard-bearer(sign m); corniger,horn-wearer(corn ); manceps(man and cap-),one who takes in hand,contractor. The i-stems retain i or drop it : ignivom s,fire vomiting(ignis); na frag s,shipwrecked(navis). (b) Vowel-stems drop their vowel before the vowel of the second part : magnanim s,greatso led; nanim s,of one mind.

(c) Consonant-stems either drop their consonants or add i: homicida,manslayer(homin); lapicida,stonec tter(lapid); matricida, mother-m rderer,matricide. NOTE.The first part is rarely,if ever,a verb.APULEIUS ses the form poscin mmi s, [FORMATION OF WORDS.141] 2.The second part of the composition is a no n :

NOTE.From composition we m st disting ish j xtaposition.So a preposition is bro ght into j xtaposition with a s bstantive,or a s bstantive with a s bstantive : admod m,to a degree,very; obviam,in the way,meeting; s sfr ct s, s fr ct(); I ppiter,Father Jove.

trienni m,space of three years(ann s); misericors,tenderhearted(cor). When the second part ends in a vowel,it adapts itself,if an adjective,to changes of gender,as flavicom s,yellowhaired(coma,hair), b t more often this final vowel becomes i and the adjective follows the third de clension :

triremis,trireme(rem s,oar); abnormis,abnormal (norma,norm).

NOTE.From gen s(G.generis),is formed degener, II.SIGNIFICATION OF COMPOUNDS. 196.Compo nd s bstantives and adjectives are divided according to their signific ation into two main classes : Determinative and Possessive. In Determinative compo nds one of the terms is s bordinate to the other.They fal l into two classes : Attrib tive or Appositional,and Dependent. 197.1 Attrib tive compo nds.The first part is the attrib te of the second. The first word is,(1) a s bstantive : alipes,wingfoot(ed); (2) an adjective : magnanim s,greathearted; latif ndi m,large estate; (3) a n meral : bienni m(i.e.,spati m),space of two years. 2.Dependent compo nds.In these the second word is simply limited by the other,it s signification not being altered. (a) The first word is :(i) an adjective : meridies(from medidie = medio die),midday; (2) an adverb : benefic s(welldoing),beneficent; malefic s,evildoing; (3) a n meral :

When the second part ends in a consonant,the last term ge : bidens,two-pronged; simplex(simplecs),simple,

s ally

ndergoes no chan

tergemin s,triple; (4) a particle : disson s,harsh-so nding; permagn s,very large; indign s, nworthy; (5) a verb-stem : horrific s,horrible(horror-stirring). (b) The first word gives a case relation,s ch as (1) the Acc sative : armiger = arma gerens,armo r-bearer; agricola =.agr m colens(land tiller),h sbandman; (2) the Genitive : solstiti m = solis statio(s n staying),solstice; (3) the Locative : alienigena(born elsewhere),alien; (4) the Instr mental : tibicen = tibia canens,fl teplayer. 198.Possessive Compo nds are adjectival only,and are so called beca se they impl y the existence of a S bject possessing the q ality indicated. The first term is, (1) a s bstantive :

ang iman s,(having a) snake hand(elephant) : (2) an adjective : flavicom s,(having) yellow hair; (3) a n meral :

bifrons,(having) two front(s); (4) a particle : discors, discordant ;. iners,inactive. [142 FORMATION OF WORDS.] NOTE.Notice that these divisions r n into each other;th s magnanim s is possessi ve,attrib tive,and dependent. 199.Verb. In Composition Improper the verb is joined to a verb,s btantive,or adverb.In Com

position Proper the verb is combined with a preposition. 200.1,Composition Improper . (a) Verb with verb : This only takes place when the second part of the compo nd is facio or fio(173,N.2).The first part of the compo nd is reg larly an intrans itive of the second conj gation : calefacio,calefio,warm,am warmed. (b) Verb with s bstantive : animadverto = anim m adverto,take notice; man mitto,set free; s capio,acq ire by se.

(c) Verb with adverb : benedico,bless; maledico,c rse; malo, nolo (for mage(magis)volo,ne- volo), satisfacio,satisfy. 2.Composition Proper. The verb combines with separable or inseparable prepositions Compare 413,R.3. (a) With inseparable prepositions : ambeo,go abo t; amplector,enfold; anhelo.draw deep breath,pant; disc rro,r n apart; dirimo, 160,1,and 715,R.1; portendo,hold forth,portend(y); reddo,give back; resolvo,resolve; sei ngo,separate. (b) With separable prepositions : abeo,go away; adeo,come p; antec rro,r n in advance; compono,p t together; dec rro,r n down, finish a co rse; excedo,overstep; incl do,sh t in; obd co,draw over; peragro,wander thro gh; posthabeo,keep in the backgro nd; praedico,foretell; praetereo,pass by; prodeo,go forth; praevideo,foresee; s bicio,p t nder; s bterf gio,flee from nder; s pers m, remain over; transgredior,pass beyond.

[143] SYNTAX. 201.SYNTAX treats of the formation and combination of sentences. A sentence is t he expression of a tho ght(sententia) in words. Sentences are divided into simpl e and compo nd. A simple sentence is one in which the necessary parts occ r b t once;for the compo nd sentence see 472. The necessary parts of the sentence are the s bject and the predicate. The predicate is that which is said of the s bjec t. The s bject is that of which the predicate is said. L na f lget,The moon shines. L na is the s bject;f lget,the predicate. REMARKS.1.The Interjection(16,R.2) and the Vocative case(23, 5) stand o tside th e str ct re of the sentence,and therefore do not enter as elements into Syntax,e xcept that the Vocative is s bject to the laws of Concord.See R.3. 2.The Vocative differs from the Nominative in form in the second declension only ,and even there the Nominative is sometimes sed instead,especially in poetry an d solemn prose. Almae fili s Maiae,H.,O.,I.2,43;son of mild Mala! A di t , pop l s Alban s,L.,1.24,7;hear tho ,people of Alba ! O is prefixed to give emphasis to the address: O formose p er,nimi m ne crede colori,V.,EC.2.17;O shapely boy! tr st no t complexion all too m ch. The Vocative is commonly interjected in prose,except in highly emotional pas3.On the se of the Vocative of an adjective or participle in apposition,attrib tion ,or predication,see 289,325,R.1. SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 202.The most simple form of the sentence is the finite verb : s m,I am; doces,tho teachest; scribit,he writes. [144 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.] REMARK.Here the form contains in itself all the necessary elements(compare 114), the persons being indicated by the endings. From the expansion and modification of the finite verb arise all the complicated forms of the compo nd sentence. 203.SUBJECT.The s bject of the finite verb is always in the Nominative Case,or s o considered.

204.The s bject may be a s bstantive or a prono n,or some other word,phrase,or c la se sed as a s bstantive :

De s m nd m g bernat,GOD steers the

niverse.

REMARKS.1.The s bj.of the Inf.is in the Acc sative(343,2). 2.The in Latin is the same as in English.

se of the Nom.

Ego reges eieci,[C.] ad Her.,iv.53,66;I drove o t kings. Sapiens res adversas non timet,THE SAGE does not fear adversity, Victi in servit tem redig nt r,THE VANQUISHED are red ced to slavery. Contendisse decor m est,Ov.,M.,ix.6;TO HAVE STRUGGLED is hono rable. Magn m benefici m [est] nat rae q od necesse est mori,SEN.,E.M.,101,14; it is a great boon of nat re,THAT WE MUST NEEDS DIE. Vides habet d as syllabas,(the word) "VIDES" has two syllables. NOTES.1.Masc line and feminine adjectives,and to a less degree participles, are sed as s bstantives,b t with the following limitations :

(a) Many adjectives in -ari s and -ic s(the latter mostly Greek),designating of fice or occ pation,and words expressing friendship,kinship,or other relationship , are sed often as s bstantives both in the Sing,and the Pl.of the masc line an d femi-nine : aq ari s,waterman; librari s,bookman(-seller,ivriler,etc.); grammatic s,grammarian; amic s,friend; cognat s,kinsman; soci s,partner. Many of these have become almost wholly fixed as s bstantives,as amic s,friend.S ee 16,N.1.

pa peres,the poor; divites,the rich. In the obliq e cases of the Sing., this se is also not ncommon;b t in the Nom. the s bstantive is generally expressed : vir bon s,a good man; m lier peregrina,a foreign woman.

Plato,doctissim s homo,the learned Plato. Exceptions are rare and scattering in prose : ego et s avissim s Cicero valem s,C.,Fam.,xiv.5,1.

cani(capilli),gray hairs; calida(aq a),warm water; dextra(man s),right hand.

(d) When persons are not meant,a s bstantive is

(c) On the

se of participles as s bstantives see 437,N. nderstood :

So reg larly,if

sed with a proper name :

(b) Adjectives are very often ignate a class :

sed as s bstantives in the masc.Pl.when they des

2.Ne ter adjectives and participles are freely employed as s bstantives in both n mbers;in the Pl. s ally in Nom.and Acc.,in the Sing,in all cases,b t especiall y in connection with prepositions : medi m,the midst; extrem m,the end; reliq om,the resid e; f t r m,the f t re; bon m,good; bona,blessings,possessions; mal m,evil; mala,misfort nes. The Pl ral is freq ently employed when the English idiom prefers the Sing lar : vera,the tr th; omnia,everything. 3.Adjectives of the Second Declension are sometimes sed as ne ter s bstantives in the Gen.,after words of q antity or prono ns : aliq id boni,something good; nihil mali,nothing bad. Adjectives of the Third Declension are th s employed only in combination with th ose of the Second,and even then very rarely(369,R.i). Us ally the adjective of the Third Declension draws the adjective of the Second into its own constr ction : Q id habet ista res a t laetabile a t glorios m ? C.,T sc.,1.21,49;what is there to be glad of or to brag abo t in that ? [SUBJECT-PREDICATE-COPULA.145] 4.Instead of the ne ter adjective,the word res,thing, is freq ently sed,especially in forms which are identical for different genders ,and conseq ently ambig o s;so bonar m rer m,of blessings, rather than bonor m(masc.and ne t.). 5.In Latin the Pl.of abstract s bstantives occ rs more freq ently than in Englis h; advent s imperator m,the arrival(s) of the generals (beca se there were several generals,or beca se they arrived at different times) .Pl ralising abstract s bstantives often makes them concrete : fortit dines,gallant actions; formidines,b gbears( ); irae,q arrels.

6.Other Pl.expressions to be noted are: nives,snow(-flakes); grandines,hail (-stones); pl viae,(streams of) rain; ligna,(logs of) wood; carnes,pieces of meat; aera,articles of bron e; also symmetrical parts of the h man body : cervices,neck; pectora,breast. The Pl.is freely sed in poetry and in later prose : Otia si tollas,periere C pidinis arc s,Ov.,Rem.Am.,139;if yo do away wi th holidays,C pid's bow(and arrows) are r ined. 7.The rhetorical Roman often ses the First Person Pl.for the First Person Sing lar. The sage originates in modesty,b t mock modesty is the worst form of pompo sity. It is never very common,and is not fo nd before CICERO : Libr m ad te de senect te misim s,C.,Cat.M.,i,3;we(I) have sent yo a tr eatise on old age. In poetry there is often an element of shyness; Sitq e memor nostri necne,referte mihi,Ov.,Tr.,iv.3,10;bring me back(wor d) whether she thinks of s(me among others) or no. 8.(a) The Sing.,in a collective sense,is also sed for the Pl.,b t more rarely: faba,beans; porc s,pig(meat); gallina,fowl(as articles of food); vestis,clothing. (b) The se of the Sing,in designations of nationalities and divisions of troops is introd ced by LIVY : Roman s,the Roman forces; Poen s,the Carthaginians; hostis,the enemy; miles,the soldiery; pedes,the infantry; eq es,the cavalry. 205.PREDICATE and COPULA.- When the predicate is not in the form of a verb,b t i n the form of an adjective or s bstantive,or eq ivalent,the so-called cop la is generally employed,in order to co ple the adjective or s bstantive with the s bj ect. The chief cop la is the verb s m,I am. Fort na caeca est,C.,Lael.,15,54;fort ne is blind. Us s magister est optim s,C.,Rab.Post.,4,9;practice is the best teacher.

NOTE.Strictly speaking,the cop la is itself a predicate,as is shown by the trans lation when it stands alone or with an adverb : est De s,there is a God,God exists; recte semper er nt res,things will always be(go on) well; sic vita homin m est,C.,Rosc.Am.,30,84;s ch is h man life;"So r ns the w orld away." 206.Other cop lative verbs are : videri,to seem; nasci,to be born; fieri,to become; evadere,to t rn o t; creari,to be created; deligi,to be chosen; p tari,to be tho ght; haberi,to be held; dici,to be said; appellari,to be called; nominari,to be named. Hence the r le : Verbs of seeming,becoming,with the passive of verbs of making,c hoosing,showing,thinking,and calling,take two Nominatives,one of the s bject,one of the predicate : [146 SUBJECT OMITTED.IMPERSONAL VERBS.] Nemo nascit r dives,SEN.,E.M.,20,13; no one is born rich. Aristides i st s adpellat r,Aristides is called j st. [Servi s] rex est declarat s,L.,1.46,1;Servi s was declared king. [Th cydides] n mq am est n merat s orator,C.,O.,9,31;Th cydides has neve r been acco nted an orator. REMARKS.1.With esse, videri, haberi, d ci,be serve as; seem; be held; deemed,

and rarely with other verbs,instead of the Predicate Nom.,a phrase may be employ ed,as : pro with Abl., (in) loco, in n mero,with Gen.,etc. A dacia pro m ro habet r,S.,C.,58,17;boldness is co nted as a b lwark(). In filii loco,C.,Red,in Sen.,14,35;as a son. 2.The previo s condition is given by

ex or de and the Abl.(396,N.2). Ex oratore arator fact s,C.,Ph.,iii.9,22;a pleader t rned plowman. 3.All cop lative verbs retain the Nom.with the Inf.after a xiliary verbs(423). Beat s esse sine virt te nemo potest,C.,N.D.,1.18,48;no one can be happy witho t virt e. 4.On the Do ble Acc.after Active Verbs,see 340. NOTES.1.The verbs mentioned,with some others,are fo nd in good prose.Others are either poetical or nclassical,th s : perhiberi,to be held, is early; apparere,to appear, is poetic and post-classical for videri; reddi is not sed for fieri; sisti,to be set down,is Pla tine; manere,to remain,is late(permanere once in CICERO). 2.Noteworthy is the se of a dire,like the Greek ako ein,to be called, which is confined to HORACE; rexq e paterq e a disti,Ep.,1.7,38;S.,11.6,20, j st as "hear" in this sense is said to be confined to MILTON.

Amam s parentes,We love(o r) parents. Ego reges eieci,vos tyrannos introd citis,[C.] ad Her.,iv.53,66;I drove o t kings,ye are bringing in tyrants. NOTE.The insertion of the prono n witho t emphasis is very common in the comic p oets,and seems to have been a colloq ialism.Also common in CATULLUS,SALLUST(as a n archaism),and PETRONIUS. 208.IMPERSONAL VERBS.- Impersonal Verbs are verbs in which the agent is reg larl y implied in the action,the s bject in the predicate,so that the person is not e xpressed. Chief of these are : 1.Verbs pertaining to the state of the weather: tonat,it th nders,the th nder th nders,or rather,the Th nderer th nders; f lget,f lg rat(less common),f lminat(poet.),it lightens; [COPULA OMITTED.147]

207.SUBJECT OMITTED.- The personal prono n is not expressed in classical prose, nless it is emphatic,as,for example,in contrasts :

pl it(poet.),it rains; ningit,it snows,etc. Nocte pl it tota,V.,(POET.LAT.MIN.,iv.155,B.);all night it(he,J piter) r ains. NOTE.The divine agent is sometimes expressed;so,nat rally,in religio s or pop la r lang age : Iove tonante,f lg rante,c.,Div.,ii.18,43; Iove f lgente,C.,N.D.,ii.25,65. 2.The passive of intransitive verbs is often sed impersonally;so reg larly of v erbs which in the active are constr ed with the Dat.(217): vivit r,people live; c rrit r,there is a r nning; p gnat r,there is a battle; mihi invidet r,I am envied. The s bject is contained in the verb itself :

sic vivit r = sic vita vivit r,s ch is life; p gnat r = p gna p gnat r,a battle is(being) fo ght. In the same way explain taedet,it wearies; miseret,it moves to pity; piget,it disg sts; p det,it p ts to shame. NOTES.1.With all other so-called Impersonal Verbs an Inf.(422,535) or an eq ival ent(523) is conceived as a s bject : Non l bet mihi deplorare vitam ,C.,Cat. M.,23,84. Sed accidit perincommode q od e m n sq am vidisti,C.,Att.,1.17,2. 2.Other ses coincide with the English.So the Third Person PL of verbs of Saying ,Thinking,and Calling.Also the ideal Second Person Sing lar(258).To be noticed i s the occasional se of inq it,q oth he, of an imaginary person,b t not by CAESAR,SALLUST,or TACITUS :

209.COPULA OMITTED.- Est or s nt is often omitted in saws(M ) and proverbs,in short st atements and q estions,in rapid changes,in conditional cla ses,and in tenses com po nded with participles : S mm m i s s mma ini ria,C.,Off.,1.10,33;the height of right(is) the hei ght of wrong. Nemo mal s felix,J v.,iv.8;no bad man(is) happy.

Non concedo,inq it,Epic ro,C.,Ac.,ii.32,101; I do not yield the point,q oth(=said) he(one),to Epic r s.

Q id d lci s q am habere q ic m omnia a deas loq i ? C.,Lael.,7,22;what sweeter than to have some one with whom yo can vent re (q ic m=q oc m 105 N.3) to talk abo t everything ? Sed haec vetera;ill d vero recens,C.,Ph.,ii.II,25.(All of this is old ne ws,b t here is something recent) Aliq amdi certat m,S.,I g.,74,3.

C r hostis Spartac s,si t civis? C.,Parad.,4,30.(CNa So also esse,with participles and the like : Caesar stat it exspectandam classem,CAES.,B.G.,iii.14,1 : Caesar resolve d that the fleet m st be waited for. NOTES.1.The omission of esse is not common with the Nom.and Infinitive. 2.Pop lar speech omits cop la(esse,est) freely;so, mir m ni,mir m q in,fact m, in Latin comedy;likewise potis and pote for forms of posse.To a like origin are d e mir m q ant m, nimi m q ant m,etc., fo nd at all periods. 3.The ellipsis of other forms of the cop la is n s al.Th s CICERO occasionally omits sit in the Indirect Q estion,and TACITUS other forms of the S bjv.besides. F isse is omitted by LIVY,and not nfreq ently by TACITUS.

non d bito te esse sapientem dicere(to declare yo to be wise) were reg larly c t down to non d bito te sapientem dicere(to declare yo wise). [148 AGREEMENT OF PREDICATE WITH SUBJECT.] 5.The ellipsis of other verbs,s ch as facere,ire,venire,dicere,etc.,

4.The Ellipsis of esse was sometimes d e to the desire of avoiding the heaping p of Infinitives.Th s sentences like

is characteristic of pop lar speech;it is therefore not ncommon in CICERO'S let ters(ad Att.), in PLINY'S letters,and in works involving dialog e,s ch as CICERO 'S philosophical writings.The historians avoid it,and it never occ rs in CAESAR and VELLEIUS.

210.THE THREE CONCORDS.- There are three great concords in Latin : 1.The agreement of the predicate with the s bject(211). 2.The agreement of attrib tive or appositive with the s bstantive (285,321). 3.The agreement of the relative with antecedent(614). 211.Agreement of the Predicate with the S bject. The verbal predicate agrees with its s bject in n mber and person. The adjective predicate agrees with its s bject in n mber gender and case. The s bstantive predicate agrees with its s bject in case. S bstantiva mobilia(21,2) are treated as adjectives,and follow the n mber and ge nder of the s bject. Ego reges eieci,vos tyrannos introd citis,[C.] ad Her.,iv.53,66(207). Verae amicitiae sempiternae s nt,C.,Lael.,9,32;tr e friendships are abid ing(). Dos est decem talenta,TER.,And.,950;the dowry is ten talents. Us s magister est optim s,C.,Rab.Post.,4,9(205). Arx est monosyllab m,"Arx" is a monosyllable. Compare ignis confector est et cons mptor omni m,C.,N.D.,ii.15,41;fire is the do er- p(destroyer) and eater- p (cons mer) of everything, with confectrix rer m omni m vet stas,C.,Frag. REMARKS.1.The violation of the r les of agreement is d e chiefly to one of two c a ses; either the nat ral relation is preferred to the artificial(constr ctio ad sens m,per synesin,according to the sense),or the nearer is preferred to the mo re remote.Hence the following EXCEPTIONS.(a) S bstantives of m ltit de often take the predicate in the Pl ral: pars,part; vis(power),q antity(); m ltit do,crowd; organi ed bodies more rarely.Also,b t not often,s ch words as q isq e, terq e, nemo,etc.

CONCORD.

Pars maior receperant sese,L.,xxxiv.47,6;the greater part had retired. Omnis m ltit do abe nt,L.,xxiv.3,15;all the crowd depart. [AGEEEMENT OF PREDICATE WITH SUBJECT.149] Magna vis emin s missa telor m m lta nostris v lnera inferebant, CAES.,B.C.,ii.6,5.( NMN )

Uterq e eor m ex castris exercit m ed c nt,CAES.,B.C.,iii.30,3.( NOTE.This sage is very common in comedy,b t extremely rare in model pro se. LIVY shows a greater variety and a larger n mber of s bstantives than any ot her a thor,and poets and late prose writers are free.Yet HORACE ses reg larly t he Sing.with a collective,while VERGIL varies,often employing first a Sing.and t hen a Pl.verb with the same s bstantive(as A.,ii.64).TACITUS often ses q isq e with a Pl ral. (b) The adjective predicate often follows the nat ral gender of the s bject;so e specially with milia. This sage belongs pre-eminently to the historians. Capita coni rationis virgis caesi(s nt),L.,x.1,3;the heads of the conspi racy were flogged. Samniti m caesi tria milia,Cf.L.,x.34,3; of the Sammies(there) were slai n three tho sand. The passive verb often agrees in gender with the predicate : Non omnis error st ltitia dicenda est,C.,Div.,ii.43,90;not every false s tep is to be called folly. (c) The cop la often agrees with the n mber of the predicate("the wages of sin i s death ") : Amanti m irae(204,N.5)amoris integratio est,TER.,And.,555; lovers' q arr els are love's renewal. 2.A s perlative adjective defined by a Partitive Gen.follows the gender of the s bj.when it precedes:

Ind s,q i est omni m fl min m maxim s,C.,N.D.,ii.52,130;the Ind s,which is the greatest of all rivers. Otherwise it follows the Genitive;b t this sage is post-classic : Velocissim m omni m animali m est delphin s,PLIN.,N.H.,ix.8,20; the dolp hin is the swiftest of all animals.(Velocissim manimal) 3.The Voc.is sometimes sed by the poets in the predicate,either by anticipation or by assimilation.(See 325,R.1.)

4.The ne ter adjective is often

sed as the s bstantive predicate of a masc line

or feminine s bject : Triste l p s stab lis,V.,EC.,3,80;the wolf is a balef l thing to the fol ds. Vari m et m tabile semper femina,V.,A.,iv.569;"a thing of moods and fanc ies " is woman ever. This constr ction is poetical;in CICERO it is sed with a few words only;s ch as extrem m, comm ne : Omni m rer m(204,N.4) mors [est] extrem m,Cf.C.,Fam:,vi.21,1; death is t he end of all things. 5.The demonstrative prono n is commonly attracted into the gender of the predica te : Negat Epic r s;hoc enim vostr m l men est,C.,Fin.,ii.22,70;Epic r s says No;for he is yo r great light. Ea non media sed n lla via est,L.,xxxii.,21,33;that is not a middle co r se,b t no co rse at all. [150 FORMS OF THE VERBAL PREDICATE.] B t in negative sentences,and when the prono n is the predicate,there is no chan ge.So in definitions : Q id a t q ale [est] De s ? Cf.C.,N.D.,1.22,60;what or what manner of th ing is God ? Nec sopor ill d erat,V.,A.,iii.173( y). Q od ita erit gest m,id lex erit,C.,Ph.,1.10,26.(MNy) Exceptions are b t apparent.C.,O.,ii.38,157. 6.The adjective predicate sometimes agrees with a s bstantive in apposition to t he s bject.So especially when the appositive is oppid m,civitas,and the like : Corioli oppid m capt m [est],L.,ii.33,9; Corioli-town was taken. Corinth m,toti s Graeciae l men,exstinct m esse vol er nt,C.,Imp.,5,11;t hey wo ld have Corinth,the eye of all Greece,p t o t. NOTES.1.Pec liar is the occasional se of the F t.participle in - r m for femini nes in early Latin :

Altero(gladio) te occis r m ait(Casina), altero vilic m.PL.,Cas.,693.(}y 2.Age is often sed in early Latin as if it were an adverb,with the Pl ral;occas ionally also cave : Age modo fabricamini.PL.,Cas.,488.( }) Akin is the se of a Voc.Sing,with a Pl.verb,which is occasionally fo nd in clas sical prose also :

T m Scaevola;"q id est,Cotta ?" inq it,"q id tacetis?" C.,O.,1.35,160.( The se of

aliq is,some one of yo , in this way is early :

Aperite aliq is act t m(adv immediately) osti m,TER.,Ad.,634.(Y} 3.Other less s al constr ctions ad sens m are : the se of a ne ter demonstrati ve where a s bstantive of a different gender is expected,and the constr ction of res as if it were ne ter(both fo nd also in CICERO);the ne ter Sing lar s mming p a preceding Pl ral : In Graecia m sici flor er nt,discebantq e id(that [accomplishment]') omn es, C.,T sc.,1.2,4. N yN }m

Servitia rep diabat,c i s(of which [class]) initio ad e m magnae copiae conc rrebant, S.,C.,56,5( X Forms of the Verbal Predicate. VOICES OF THE VERB. 212.There are two Voices in Latin -- Active and Passive. REMARK.The Latin Passive corresponds to the Greek Middle,and,like the Greek Midd le,may be explained in many of its ses as a Reflexive. 213.ACTIVE.--The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds from the s bject. Verbs sed in the Active Voice fall into two classes,as follows : Verbs are called Transitive when their action goes over to an object( transeo,I go over );Intransitive when their action does not go beyond the s bject : occdere,to fell = to kill(Transitive); occidere,to fall(Intransitive). [PASSIVE VOICE.151] REMARK.-Properly speaking,a Transitive Verb in Latin is one that forms a persona l passive,b t the traditional division given above has its convenience,tho gh it does not rest pon a difference of nat re,and a verb may be trans,or intrans.ac cording to its se.So (a) Transitive verbs are often sed intransitively,in which case they serve simp ly to characteri e the agent().This is tr e especially of verbs of movement;as declinare,deviate inclinare,lean movere,move

m tare,change vertere,t rn and the like,and is fo nd at all periods. (b) On the other hand,many intrans.verbs are often sed transitively.This occ rs also at all periods,b t the Acc.is s ally the inner object(332).

214.PASSIVE.The Passive Voice denotes that the s bject receives the action of the verb. The instr ment is p t in the Ablative. Virgis caedet r,C.,Verr.,iii.28,69;he shall be beaten with rods. [ignis] l mine prodit r s o,Ov.,Her.,15,8;the fire is betrayed by its ow n light. The agent is p t in the Ablative with ab(a). Ab amicis prodim r,C.,Cl ent.,52,143;we are betrayed by friends. Virgis caesi trib ni ab legato s nt,L.,xxix.18,13;the trib nes were beat en with rods by the lie tenant. REMARKS.1.Intrans.verbs of passive signification are constr ed as passives : fame perire,C.,Inv.,ii.57,172,to perish of h nger(<pereo).So vnire,to be sold;(< vneo) vap lare(chiefly v lgar),to be beaten,ab aliq o,by some one. Ab reo f stib s [vap lavit],Cf.QUINT.,ix.2,12; he was whacked with c dge ls by the defendant. Salvebis a meo Cicerone,C.,Att.,vi.2,10; greeting to yo from Cicero. 2.When the instr ment is considered as an agent,or the agent as an instr ment,th e constr ctions are reversed : Vinci a Vol ptate,C.,Off.,1.20,68;to be overcome by Dame Pleas re. Patriciis i venib s saepserant latera,L.,iii.37,6;they had flanked him w ith a g ard of patrician yo ths.(<saepio) The latter constr ction is very rare in CICERO,and seems to belong pre-eminently to the historians. Animals,as independent agents,are treated like persons. A cane non magno saepe tenet r aper,Ov.,Rem.Am.,422;a boar is often held fast by a little dog. Animals,as instr ments,are treated like things. Compare eq o vehi,to ride a horse(to be borne by a horse),with in eq o,on horseb

(c) On the

se of the Inf.active,where English ses the passive,see 532,N.2.

ack. [152 VOICES OF THE VERB.] 215.The person in whose interest an action is done is p t in the Dative.Hence th e freq ent inference that the person interested is the agent.See 354. 1.With the Perfect passive it is the nat ral inference,and common in prose. Mihi res tota provisa est,C.,Verr.,iv.42,91;I have had the whole thing p rovided for. Carmina n lla mihi s nt scripta,Ov.,Tr.,v.12,35; poems I have none writt en(I have written no poems). 2.With the Ger ndive it is the necessary inference,and the Dative is the reignin g combination. Nihil [est] homini tam timend m q am invidia,C.,Cl ent.,3,7;there is not hing that one has to fear to the same extent as envy. 216.The Direct Object of the Active Verb(the Acc sative Case) becomes the S bjec t of the Passive. Alexander Dare m vicit,Alexander conq ered Dari s. Dare s ab Alexandro vict s est,Dari s was conq ered by Alexander. 217.The Indirect Object of the Active Verb(Dative Case) cannot be properly sed as the S bject of the Passive.The Dative remains nchanged,and the verb becomes a Passive in the Third Person Sing lar(Impersonal Verb).This Passive form may ha ve a ne ter s bject corresponding to the Inner object(333,i). Active: Passive : Miseri invident bonis,The wretched envy the well-to-do. mihi invidet r,I am envied, tibi invidet r,tho art envied, ei invidet r,he is envied, nobis invidet r,we are envied, vobis invidet r,yo are envied, iis invidet r,they are envied. } } } }ab aliq o by so } }

me one

Nihil facile pers adet r invitis,QUINT.,IV.3,10;people are not easily pe rs aded of anything against their will. An lis nostris pl s q am animis credit r,SEN.,Sen.,III.15,3;o r seals ar e more tr sted than o r so ls

NOTES.1.The poets and later prose writers sometimes violate the r le, nder Greek infl ence or in imitation of early sage : C r invideor ?(for c r invidet r mihi?),H.,A.P.,56; vix eq idem credar,Ov.,Tr.,III.10,35;

2.On the exceptional .

sage of personal Ger ndives from intrans.verbs see 427,N.5

REMARKS.1.In like manner a Gen.or Abl.in dependence e made the s bj.of the passive.

pon an active verb cannot b

pers as s videt r esse,[C.] ad Her.,I.6,9.(Pers adeo hospitem,PETR.,62,2 ,is perhaps an intentional solecism.) [REFLEXIVE DEPONENT.153] 2.Similar liberties are taken by poets and late prose writers with the passive o f other intrans.verbs,s ch as concedere, permittere, praecipere, pron ntiare : Fatis n mq am concessa(= c i concess m est) moveri Camarina,V.,A.,iii.70 0.(h y / ) 218.REFLEXIVE.Reflexive relations,when emphatic,are expressed as in English : Omne animal se ips m diligit,C.,Fin.,v.9,24,Every living creat re loves itself. B t when the reflexive relation is more general,the passive(middle) is employed :

lavor,I bathe,I bathe myself. P rgari [neq iver nt],Cf.L.,xxiv.18,4;they co ld not clear themselves. C m in mentem venit,ponor ad scribend m,C.,Fam.,ix.15,4; when the notion strikes me,I set myself to writing.(NaNMa ) NOTE.Some of these verbs approach the deponents,in that the reflexive me aning of the passive extends also to some active forms;th s,from vehor,I ride,we get the form vehens,riding(rare) :

Ad lescentiam per medias la des q asi q adrigis vehentem,C.,Br.,97,331.( 219.As the active is often sed to express what the s bject s ffers or ca ses to be done,so the passive in its reflexive (middle) sense is often sed to express an action which the s bject s ffers or ca ses to be done to itself : trahor,I let myself be dragged; tondeor,I have myself shaved. D os Mysos [ins isti] in c le m,Cf.C.,Q.F.,1.2,2,5;yo sewed two Mysians into a sack(had them sewn).( ) Sine gemit ad r nt r,C.,T sc.,v.27.77;they let themselves be b rned wit ho t a moan. Dir it,aedificat,H.,Ep.,1.i,100;he is p lling down,he is b ilding. Ipse docet q id agam; fas est et ab hoste doceri,Ov.,M.,iv.428;he himsel f teaches (me) what to do;it is(b t) right to let oneself be ta ght even by an e nemy(to take a lesson from a foe). 220.DEPONENT.The Deponent is a passive form which has lost,in most instances,its

passive(or reflexive) signification.It is commonly translated as a transitive o r intransitive active : hortor,I am exhorting(trans.); morior,I am dying(intrans.). NOTES.1.A n mber of intrans.verbs show also a Perfect Part.passive sed actively;not,however,in classical prose combined with esse to take the place of the reg lar Perfect.On the se of s ch participles as s bstantives,see 167,N.1. Q id ca sae excogitari potest,c r te la t m vol erit,cenat m nol erit oc cidere ? C.,Dei.,7,20.( yNha}y 2.Many verbs show both active and deponent forms side by side.In this case the a ctive forme belong more often to early a thors.See 163-167. [154 TENSES.] 221.RECIPROCAL.--Reciprocal relations("one another") are expressed by inter,amon g,and the personal prono ns,nos, s;vos,yo ;se,themselves. Inter se amant,They love one another. REMARKS.--1.Combinations of alter alter m,ali s ali m, terq e alter m,and the like,also often give t he reciprocal relation : sometimes there is a red ndancy of expression. Placet Stoicis homines homin m ca sa esse generatos, t ipsi inter se ali i aliis prodesse possent,C.,Off.,1.7,22;it is a tenet of the Stoics that men are bro ght into the world for the sake of men,to be a blessing to one another. 2.Later writers se invicem or m t o, inter se, vicissim; and early Latin shows occasionally terq e tr mq e.

Q ae omnia h c spectant, t invicem ardenti s diligam s,PLIN.,Ep.,vii.20,7 ;all these things look to o r loving one another more fervently. Uterq e triq est cordi,TER.,Ph.,800;either is dear to other.

TENSES. 222.The Tenses express the relations of time,embracing : 1.The stage of the action(d ration in time). 2.The period of the action(position in time). The first tells whether the action is going on,or finished. The second tells whe ther the action is past,present,or f t re. Both these sets of relations are expressed by the tenses of the Indicative or De clarative mood less clearly by the S bj nctive.

223.There are six tenses in Latin;

224.An action may f rther be regarded simply as attained,witho t reference to it s contin ance or completion.Contin ance and completion req ire a point of refere nce for definition;attainment does not.This gives rise to the aoristic or indefi nite stage of the action,which has no especial tenseform. [TABLE OF TEMPORAL RELATIONS.155] It is expressed by the Present tense for the present; by the F t re and F t re P erfect tenses for the f t re; and by the Perfect tense for the past. Of especial importance are the Indefinite or Historical Present and the Indefini te or Historical Perfect(Aorist),which differ materially in syntax from the Defi nite or P re Present and Perfect. 225.The Tenses are divided into Principal and Historical.The Principal Tenses ha ve to do with the Present and F t re.The Historical Tenses have to do with the P ast. The Present,P re Perfect,F t re,and F t re Perfect are Principal Tenses. The Historical Present,Imperfect,Pl perfect,and Historical Perfect are Historica l Tenses. The Historical Tenses are well embodied in the following distich :

Talia tentabat,sic et tentaverat ante, l Vixq e dedit victas tilitate man s.Ov.,Tr.,1.3,87. 226. Table of Temporal Relations. INDICATIVE MOOD. ACTIVE. Contin ance. Attainment. PEES.scribo, scribo, I am writing. FUT.scribam, scribam(scripsere), I shall be writing. PAST.scribebam, scripsi, I was writing. Completion. scripsi, I have written. scripsero, I shall have written. scripseram, I had written. PASSIVE. I wrote. I shall write. I write.

1.The 2.The 3.The 4.The 5.The 6.The

Present,denoting contin ance in the present. F t re,denoting contin ance in the f t re. Imperfect,denoting contin ance in the past. Perfect,denoting completion in the present. F t re Perfect,denoting completion in the f t re. Pl perfect,denoting completion in the past.

Contin ance. Attainment.

Completion. scribit r, is written. is written.

will have been, will be written. scripta erat had been written, was written.

will be

PAST.scribebat r, est, The letter was written(writing). [156 PRESENT TENSE.]

scripta was written,

REMARK.The English passive is ambig o s.The same form is c rrently sed for cont in ance,attainment,and completion.The context alone can decide.A convenient test is the s bstit tion of the active. { Contin ance,Some one was writing a let ter. A letter was written : { Completion,Some one had written a letter. { Attainment,Some one wrote a letter.

Present Tense. 227.The Present Tense is sed as in English of that which is going on now(Specif ic Present),and of statements that apply to all time,(Universal Present). Specific Present : A rib s teneo l p m,TER.,Ph.,506;I am holding a wolf by the ears.(}) Universal Present :

Probitas la dat r et alget,J v.,1.74;honesty is bepraised and free es.( D lce et decor m est pro patria mori,H.,O.,iii.2,13;sweet and seemly 'ti s to die for fatherland.( }}) So reg larly of the q oted views of a thors,the inscriptions of books,etc.: De i ven m amore scribit Alcae s,C.,T sc.,iv.33,71;Alcae s writes concer ning the love of yo ths. l Z mNaaa NOTES.1.The Specific Pr.is often to be translated by the English Progressive Pre sent.The Universal Pr.is Aoristic,tr e at any point of time. 2.As contin ance involves the notion of incompleteness the Pr.(see 233) is sed of attempted and intended action(Present of Endeavor).B t on acco nt of the do ble e of the Pr.this signification is less prominent and less important than in the Impf .Do not mistake the Endeavor which lies in the verb for the Endeavor which lies in the tense.

FUT.scribet r, r, The letter will be written. written(writing).

scripta erit,

PRES.scribit r(epist la),scripta est, The letter is written has been written, (writing).

scribet

Peric l m vitant,C.,Rosc.Am.,1.1;they are trying to avoid danger. In the example sometimes cited : Q int s frater T sc lan m venditat,C.,Att.,1.14,7; Brother Q int s is "t rying to sell" his T sc lan villa; venditare itself means to offer for sale.Translate : intends to offer fo r sale,if the notion lies in the Tense. 3.The Pr.when sed with a negative often denotes Resistance to Press re(233);thi s is,however,colloq ial : Tace:non taceo,PL.,Cas.,826;keep q iet! I WON'T. 4.The ambig ity of o r English passive often s ggests other translations.Use and Wont make Law;hence the freq ent inference that what is done is what o ght to b e done;what is not done is not to be done :

(De s) nec bene promeritis capit r,nec tangit r ira,LUCR.,ii.651;God is not to be inveigled by good service,nor to ched by anger. 228.The Present Tense is sed more rarely than in English in anticipation of the f t re,chiefly in compo nd sentences : Si vincim s,omnia t ta er nt,S.,C.,58,9;if we conq er(= shall conq er) e verything will be safe. Anteq am ad sententiam redeo de me pa ca dicam,C.,Cat.,iv.10,20;before I ret rn to the s bject,I will say a few things of myself . [IMPERFECT TENSE.157] Exspectabo d m venit,TER.,E n.,206;I will wait all the time that he is c oming,or, ntil he comes. NOTES.1.This constr ction is archaic and familiar.It is very common in the Comic Poets,very rare in CICERO and CAESAR,b t more common later.Some sages have bec ome phraseological,as si vivo,if I live,as I live.() 2.On the Pr.Indic.for the Deliberative S bjv.,see 254,N.2. 229.The Present Tense is sed far more freq ently than in English,as a lively re presentation of the past(Historical Present) : Cohortis incedere i bet,S.,C.,60,1;he orders the cohorts() to advance. Mat rat proficisci,CAES.,B.G.,1.7,1;he hastens to depart.

D m,so long as, follows the ordinary law,571,ff . D m haec in colloq io ger nt r,Caesari n ntiat m est,CAES.,B.G.,1. 46,1;

REMARK.D m,while(yet),commonly takes a Pr.,which is d.

s ally referred to this hea

while these things were transacting in the conference,word was bro ght to Caesar .

iam,now; iam di ,now for a long time; iam pridem,now long since. In English we often translate by a Progressive Perfect. (Mithridates) ann m iam terti m et vicesim m regnat,C.,Imp.,3,7; Mithrid ates has been reigning now going on twenty-three years. Liberare vos a Philippe iam di magis v ltis q am a detis,L.,xxxii.21,36 ; yo have this long time had the wish rather than(= tho gh not) the co rage to deliver yo rselves from Philip. "How does yo r honor for this many a day?" SHAK.,Ham.,iii.i,91. NOTES.1.The Pr.sometimes gives the res lting condition : Q i mortem non timet,magn m is sibi praesidi m ad beatam vitam comparat,C .,T sc.,ii.i,2;he who fears not death gets for himself great warrant for a happy life. (Dic nt) vincere(= victorem esse) bello Roman m,L.,ii.7,2. 2.More free is this sage in the poets,sometimes nder Greek infl ence : A ctore Phoebo gignor(gignomai= genos eimi); ha d generis p det. SEN.,Ag .,295.( Xa Xaya )

Postq am alt m ten ere rates nec iam ampli s llae adparent terrae, A.,i ii.192.(N}) Imperfect Tense. 231.The Imperfect Tense denotes contin ance in the past: p gnabam,I was fighting. The Imperfect is employed to represent manners,c stoms,sit ations; to describe a nd to partic larise.A good example is TER.,And.,74 ff. SI. primo haec p dice vitam parce ac d riter agebat [158 IMPERFECT TENSE.] The Imperfect and the Historical Perfect serve to ill strate one another.The Imp erfect dwells on the process; the Historical Perfect states the res lt.The Imper fect co nts o t the items; the Historical Perfect gives the s m. A good example is NEP.,ii.i,3. 232.The two tenses are often so combined that the general statement is given by

VERGIL is especially prone to se a Pr.after a Past,denoting by the Past the ca se,by the Pr.the effect:

230.The Present is especially with

sed in Latin of actions that are contin ed into the present,

the Historical Perfect,the partic lars statement is given by the Historical Perf ect,the partic lars of the action by the Imperfect : (Verres) in for m venit;ardebant oc li;toto ex ore cr delitas eminebat, C.,Verr.,v.62,161;Verres came into the for m,his eyes were bla aing,cr elty was standing o t from his whole co ntenance. 233.The Imperfect is sed of attempted and interr pted,intended and expected act ions(Imperfect of Endeavor).It is the Tense of Disappointment and(with the negat ive) of Resistance to Press re.(Mere negation is reg larly Perfect.) C riam relinq ebat,TAC.,Ann.,ii.34,1; He was for leaving the senate-ho s e. [Lex] abrogabat r,Cf.L.,xxxiv.i,7;the law was to be abrogated. Sim l ostendebat r(an attempt was made to show) q omodo constit tionem r eperiri oporteret,[C.] ad Her.,ii.i,2.() Dicebat(positive) meli s q am scripsit(negative) Hortensi s, C.,Or.,38,1 32;Hortensi s spoke better than he wrote. Adit m non dabat,NEP.,iv.3,3;he WOULD not grant access(dedit,DID not).Se e also MART.,xi.105. NOTES.1.The Impf.as the Tense of Evol tion is a Tense of Vision.B t in English,I mpf.and Hist.Pf.coincide;hence the vario s translations to p t the reader in the place of the spectator. 2.The contin ance is in the mind of the narrator;it has nothing to do with the a bsol te d ration of the action.The mind may dwell on a rapid action or h rry ove r a slow one.With definite n mbers,however large,the Hist.Pf.m st be sed, nless there is a notion of contin ance into another stage(overlapping). (Gorgias) cent m et novem vixit annos,QUINT.,iii.i,9;Gorgias lived one h ndred and nine years. Bienni m ibi perpet om misera ill m t li,TER.,Hec.,87;I bore him there poor me !.- for two long years together. 3.As the Tense of Disappointment,the Impf.is occasionally sed,as in Greek,to ex press a startling appreciation of the real state of things(Imperfect of Awakenin g). Greek infl ence is not nlikely. ).

Peream male si non optim m erat,H.,S.,ii.i,6;perdition catch me if that was not the best co rse(after all)(595).( Ny aa Hence the modal se of debebam and poteram(254,R.2). 234.The Imperfect is sed as the English Pl perfect,which often takes a progress ive translation;especially with iam, iam di , iam d d m, [PERFECT TENSE.159]

aderas,TER.,Ph.,858;(so it t rns o t that) yo were here(all the time

Iam d d m tibi adversabar,PL.,Men.,420;I had long been opposing yo . (Archias) domicili m Romae m ltos iam annos [habebat], Cf.C.,Arch.,4,7;A rchias had been domiciled at Rome now these many years.(a) REMARK.As the Hist.Pr.is sed in lively narrative,so the Hist.Inf.is sed in liv ely description,parallel with the Imperfect(647). Perfect Tense.

1.P re Perfect. ist).

235.The P re Perfect Tense expresses completion in the Present,and hence is some times called the Present Perfect. 1.The P re Perfect differs from the Historical Perfect,in that the P re Perfect gives from the point of view of the Present an instantaneo s view of the develop ment of an action from its origin in the Past to its completion in the Present,t hat is,it looks at both ends of an action,and the time between is regarded as a Present.The Historical Perfect obliterates the intervening time and contracts be ginning and end into one point in the Past. 2.An intermediate sage is that in which the Perfect denotes an action in the Pa st(Historical),whose effect is still in force(P re). 236.Accordingly,the Perfect is sed : 1 .Of an action that is now over and gone. Vixim s,C.,Fam.,xiv.4,5;we have lived(life for s has been}. Fili m nic m habeo,immo hab i,TER.,Hea t.,94;I have an only son nay,hav e had an only son. Tempera q id faci nt : hanc volo,te vol i,MART.,vi.40,4;what difference times make !(Time is) I want HER,(Time HAS BEEN) I wanted YOU. 2.Far more freq ently of the present res lt of a more remote action(res lting co ndition) : Eq m et m l m Br ndisii tibi reliq i,C.,Fam.,xvi.9,3;I have left a hors e and m le for yo at Br nd si m(they are still there). Perdidi spem q a me oblectabam,PL.,R d.,222;I've lost the hope with whic h I entertained myself. Act mst,peristi,TER.,E n.,54; it is all over; yo 're ndone. REMARK.--The P re Pf.is often translated by the English Present : novi,I have become acq ainted with,I know; memini,I have recalled,.I remember; odi,I have conceived a hatred of,I hate; cons evi,I have made it a r le,I am acc stomed,etc.

The Perfect Tense has two distinct

ses : 2.Historical Perfect(Aor 1.PURE PERFECT.

[160 HISTORICAL PERFECT.] Oder nt hilarem tristes tristemq e iocosi,H.,Ep.,1.18,89; the long-faced hate the lively man,the jokers hate the long-faced man. B t the Aorist force is sometimes fo nd : Tace,inq it,ante hoc novi q am t nat s es,PHAED.,v.g,4;silence,q oth he ,I knew this ere that(=before) yo were born. NOTE.The Pf.is sed of that which has been and shall be(Sententio s or Gnomic Pe rfect,242,N.1),b t s ally in poetry,from CATULLUS on,and freq ently with an ind efinite adjective or adverb of n mber or a negative.It is seldom an Aorist(Greek ). Evertere domos totas optantib s ipsis di faciles,J v.,x.7;whole ho ses a t the masters'own req est the(too) compliant gods overt rn. Nemo repente f it torpissim s,J v.,11.83;none of a s dden(hath ever) rea ch(ed) the depth of baseness. 237.As the Present stands for the F t re,so the Perfect stands for the F t re Pe rfect. (Br t s) si conservat s erit,vicim s,C.,Fam.,xii.6,2;Br t s ! if HE is s aved,we are victorio s,we(shall) have gained the victory. 238. habeo or teneo,I hold,I have,with the Acc sative of the Perfect Particip le Passive, is not a mere circ mloc tion for the Perfect,b t lays pec liar stress on the mai ntenance of the res lt. Habeo stat t m,Cf.C.,Verr.,iii.41,95;I have resolved,and hold to my reso l tion. sight. Perspect m habeo,Cf.C.,Fam.,iii.10,7;I have perceived,and I have f ll in

2.HISTORICAL PERFECT. 239.The Historical or Indefinite Perfect(Aorist) states a past,action,witho t re ference to its d ration,simply as a thing attained. Milo dom m venit,calceos et vestimenta m tavit,pa lisper commorat s est, C.,Mil.,10,28; Milo came home,changed shoes and garments,tarried a little while. (Gorgias) cent m et novem vixit annos,QUINT.,iii.i,9(233,N.2). Veni,vidi,vici,SUET.,I l.,37;I came,saw,overcame. NOTE.The Pf.,as the "short hand " for the Pl pf.,is mainly post-Ciceronian,b t b egins with CAESAR.It is never common: s periorib s dieb s nona Caesaris legio castra eo loco pos it, CAES.,B.C .,iii.66,2.

Exc sat m habeas me rogo,ceno domi,MART.,ii.79,2;I pray yo have me exc sed,I dine at home.

240.The Historical Perfect is the great narrative tense of the Latin lang age,an d is best st died in long connected passages,and by caref l comparison with the Imperfect.See C.,Off.,iii.27,100;T sc.,1.2,4. [PLUPERFECT TENSE-FUTURE TENSE.161] Pl perfect Tense. 241.The Pl perfect denotes Completion in the Past,and is sed of an action that was completed before another was beg n.It is,so to speak,the Perfect of the Impe rfect.Hence it is sed : 1.Of an action j st concl ded in the past. Modo Caesarem regnantem videram s,C.,Ph.,ii.42,108;we had j st seen Caes ar on the throne. 2.Of an action that was over and gone. F erat inimic s,C.,Red.in Sen.,10,26;he had been my enemy. 3.Of a res lting condition in the past. Massilienses portas Caesari cla serant,CAES.,B.C.,1.34,4;the Marseillese had sh t their gates against Caesar.(Their gates were sh t.) REMARK.When the Pf.of Res lting Condition is translated by an English Pr.(236,2, R.),the Pl pf.is translated by an English Imperfect : noveram,I had become acq ainted with,I knew; memineram,I remembered; oderam,I hated; cons everam,I was acc stomed,etc. NOTES.1 .Not nfreq ently in early Latin,rarely in classical prose,b t more ofte n in the poets,the Pl pf.seems to be sed as an Aorist;so very often dixerat : Nil eq idem tibi abst li. EV.At ill d q od tibi abst leras cedo(175,6), PL.,A l.,635.( Non s m ego q i f eram,PROP.,1.12,11.See Ov.,Tr.,iii.ii,25. 2.The Periphrastic Pl pf.with habeo corresponds to the Perfect(238).It is rare,a nd shows two forms,one with the Imperfect and one with the Pl pf.,the latter bei ng post-classical. Eq itat m,q em ex omni provincia coact m habebat,praemittit.CAES.,B.G.,1 .15,1. M ltor m a res illa ling a attonitas hab erat,VAL.M.,iii.3.(N

F t re Tense. 242.The F t re Tense denotes Contin ance in the F t re : scribam,I shall be writing.

The F t re Tense is also

sed to express indefinite action in the F t re :

aya

scribam,I shall write. REMARKS.1.In s bordinate cla ses the Latin lang age is more exact than the Engli sh in the expression of f t re relations. Donec eris felix,m ltes n merabis amicos,Ov.,Tr.,1.9,5;so long as yo shall be(are) happy,yo will co nt many friends. 2.Observe especially the verbs volo,I will,and poss m,I can. Odero si potero; si non,invit s amabo,Ov.,Am.,iii.ii,35;I will hate if I sha ll be able(can);if not,I shall love against my will. [162 FUTURE PERFECT TENSE.] Q i adipisci veram gloriam volet,i stitiae f ngat r officiis, C.,Off.,ii.13, 43; whoso shall wish to obtain tr e glory,let him discharge the calls of j stice . 3.The F t.is often sed in concl sions,especially in CICERO :

S nt illa sapientis;aberit igit r a sapiente aegrit do,C.,T sc.,iii.8,18.( NOTES.1.The F t.is sed sometimes as a gnomic(236,N.) tense :

Et tremet sapiens et dolebit,et expallescet,SEN.,E.M.,71,29.2.

Verb m hercle hoc ver m erit,TER.,E n.,732;this will be God's own tr th. 243.The F t re is sed in an imperative sense,as in English,chiefly in familiar lang age. ng).

C m volet accedes,c m te vitabit abibis,Ov.,A.A.,ii.529;when she wants y o ,approach;and when she avoids yo ,begone,sir. Non me appellabis,si sapis,PL.,Most.,515; see C.,Fam.,v.12,10.Compare tet r and tat r,CORN.,ii.3,5. Similar is the F t re in Asseverations(comic). Ita me amabit I ppiter,PL.,Trin.,447;so help me God !

F t re Perfect Tense. 244.The F t re Perfect is the Perfect,both P re and Historical,transferred to th e f t re,and embraces both completion and attainment: fecero,TER.,Ph.,882;I shall have done it,or I shall do it(once for all); videro,TER.,Ad.,538;I will see to it;

T nihil dices,H.,A.P.,385;yo will(are to) say nothing(do yo

say nothi

Observe the(principally comic)

se of the F t re to indicate likelihood :

Ha t fac l femina inveniet r bona,AFR.,7; all be fo nd that's good.(fac l=facile)

nneth(= neath= hardly) a woman sh

profecerit,C.,Fin.,iii.4,14; it will prove profitable.

novero,I shall know; cons evero,I shall be acc stomed; odero,si potero,Ov.,Am.,iii.ii,35(242,R.2). 2.In s bordinate sentences,the Latin lang age is more exact than the English in the se of the F t.Perfect;hence,when one action precedes another in the f t re, the action that precedes is expressed by the F t.Perfect. Q i prior strinxerit ferr m,ei s victoria erit,L.,xxiv.38,5;who first dr aws the sword,his shall be the victory. 3.The F t.Pf.is freq ently sed in volo,I will; nolo,I will not; poss m,I can; licet,it is left free; libet,it is agreeable; placet,it is the pleas re; whereas the English idiom familiarly employs the Present. Si pot ero,faciam vobis satis,C.,Br.,5,21; if I can,I shall satisfy yo . [PERIPHRASTIC TENSES.163] 4.The F t.Pf.in both cla ses denotes sim ltaneo s accomplishment or attainment;o ne action involves the other. Q i Antoni m oppresserit,is bell m confecerit,C.,Fam.,x.19,2; he who sha ll have cr shed(cr shes) Antony,will have finished(will finish) the war. [Ea] vitia q i f gerit,is omnia fere vitia vitaverit,C.,Or.,69,231;he wh o shall have escaped these fa lts,will have avoided almost all fa lts. Sometimes,however,the first seems to denote antecedence,the second finality.An I mpv.is often sed in the first cla se. Imm ta(verbor m collocationem),perierit tota res,C.,Or.,70,232; change t he arrangement of the words,the whole thing falls dead. NOTES.1.The independent se of the F t.Pf.is characteristic of Comedy,b t occ rs occasionally later in familiar style.Sometimes it gives an air of positiveness : Bene merenti bene prof erit,male merenti par erit,PL.,Capt.,315;good des ert shall have good iss e;ill desert shall have its d e. Ego cras hic ero : cras hab ero, xor,ego tamen convivi m,PL.,Cas.,786. N sq am facili s hanc miserrimam vitam vel s stentabo vel abiecero,C.,Att .,iii.19,1.See also C.,Ac.,ii.44,135;L.,i.58,10. 2.The Periphrastic F t.Pf.with habeo is rare.It corresponds to the Pf.and Pl per

REMARKS.--1.Hence,when the Pf.is

sed as a Pr.,the F t.Pf.is sed as a F t re :

fect. Q od si feceris,me maximo beneficio devinct m habebis,C.,Att.,xvi.16 B.9 . 245.As the F t re is sed as an Imperative,so the F t re Perfect approaches the Imperative. De te t videris;ego de me ipse profitebor,C.,Ph.,ii.46,118;do yo see t o yo rself;I myself will define my position. NOTE.This is confined in CICERO almost entirely to videris,

Periphrastic Tenses. 246.The Periphrastic Tenses are formed by combining the vario s tenses of esse,t o be,with participles and verbal adjectives.See 129. I.PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION-ACTIVE VOICE. 247.The Periphrastic Tenses of the Active are chiefly combinations of esse and i ts forms with the so-called F t re Participle Active.The F t re Participle is a verbal adjective denoting capability and tendency.Compare amator and amat r s.Th e translation is very vario s : 1.Script r s s m,I am abo t to write,I am to write,I p rpose to write,I am likely to write. 2.Script r s eram,I was abo t to write,etc. [164 PERIPHRASTIC TENSES.]

s f eram,I had been abo t to write,etc. s ero,I shall be abo t to write,etc. s f ero,I shall have made p my mind to write,etc.(of

1.Fiet ill d q od f t r m est,C.,Div.,ii.8,21;what is to be,will be. 2.[Rex] non interf t r s navali certamini erat,L.,xxxvi.43,9;the king di d not intend to be present at the naval combat. 3.Fascis ipsi ad me delat ri f er nt,C.,Ph.,xiv.6,15;they themselves wer e ready to tender() the fasces to me. Deditos ltimis cr ciatib s adfect ri f er nt,L.,xxi.44,4;they wo ld hav e p t the s rrendered to extreme tort res. 4.Maior Romanor m gratia f it q am q anta f t ra Carthaginiensi m f erat , L.,xxii.22,19;the Romans' credit for this was greater than the Carthaginians' wo ld have been.

3.Script r have written). 4.Script r 5.Script r 6.Script r co rse very rare).

s f i,I have been or was abo t to write(often = I sho ld

which is s spicio sly like the familiar Greek f t re opsei,and is me way.

sed in the sa

5.Eor m ap d q os aget a t erit act r s,mentes sens sq e deg stet, C.,Or .,1.52,223;he m st taste-and-test the state of mind of those before whom he will plead or will have to plead. 6.(Sapiens) non vivet,si f erit sine homine vict r s,SEN.,E.M.,9,17; The wise man will not contin e to live,if he finds that he is to live witho t h man society.(The only example cited,and that do btf l.) REMARKS.1.The forms with s m,eram,and the corresponding S bjv.forms with sim,ess em,are m ch more common than those with f i,etc.,probably for e phonic reasons. 2.The S bjv.and Inf.

script r s

sim, essem, f erim, f issem, esse f isse,

script r m

are of great importance in s bordinate cla ses.(656.) NOTES.1.The se of forem

Fore for esse is post-classical. Dicit se venisse q aesit m pacem an bell m agitat r s foret,S.,I g.,109, 2.(Nha ) 2.The periphrastic se of the Pr.Part,with forms of esse is rare,and in most cas es do btf l,as the q estion always arises whether the Part,is not rather a virt al s bstantive or adjective.So with the not ncommon t sis sciens (TER.,And 508)

of the Comic Poets.The effect of this periphrasis is to emphasise the contin anc e.

Nemo mq am tam s i despiciens(despiser of self,self-depreciator) f it q in speraret meli s se posse dicere,C.,Or.,ii.89,364.(NXy II.PERIPHRASTIC TENSES OF THE PASSIVE. A.Of F t re Relations.

248.The periphrases fat r m esse(more often fore) t,(that) it is to be that, and

f t r m f isse

t,(that) it was to be that,

for essem appears first in SALLUST,b t is not ically later.

ncommon in LIVY,and occ rs sporad

[PERIPHRASTIC TENSES.165] when the verb forms no F t re Participle.In the passive they are more common tha n the S pine with iri. Spero fore t contingat id nobis,C.,T sc.,1.34,82;I hope that we shall h ave that good fort ne. In fatis script m Veientes [habebant] fore t brevi a Gallis Roma capere t r,C.,Div.,1.44,100;the Veientes had it written down in their prophetic books t hat Rome wo ld shortly be taken by the Ga ls. REMARK. Posse,to be able, and velle,to will, on acco nt of their f t re sense,do not req ire a periphrasis.In the absence of periphrastic forms,the forms of posse are often sed instead.(65(5,R.) NOTES.1.These periphrases do not occ r in early Latin.

is sed chiefly with Pr.and Impf.S bjv.; Pf.and Pl pf.are very rare.(C.,Att.,xv i.16E.16.) 3.The form

is sed with passive and Spineless verbs,to express the dependent apodosis of an nreal conditional sentence. Nisi eo ipso tempore n ntii de Caesaris victoria essent allati,existimab ant pleriq e f t r m f isse t (oppid m) amitteret r,CAES.,B.G.,iii.101,3.(656,2 .) 4.The S bjv.forms

f t r m sit, esset, f erit t, are sed in the grammars to s pply the periphrastic S bjv.of passive and S pinel ess verbs(see 515,R.2).Warrant in real sage is scarce. An tiq e f t r m sit t Carthaginem s perent Romani ? QUINT,iii.8,17 (n ot merely periphrastic).(/ ) 249.In eo est, it is on the point, } t that(of),with erat} was(Impersonal), } the s bj nctive. f it}

f t r m f isse

2.Fore

with the S bj nctive,are very commonly nitive active;necessarily so

sed to take the place of the F t re Infi

In eo [erat] t(Pa sanias) comprehenderet r,NEP.,IV.5,1;it was on the po int that Pa sanias sho ld be(P.was on the point of being) arrested. NOTE.This phrase occ rs in NEPOS and LIVY,seldom in earlier writers.

B.--Of Past Relations. 250.The Perfect Participle passive is sed in combination with s m,I am,and f i,I have been,I was, to express the P re Perfect and Historical Perfect of the Passive Voice. Eram,I was,and f eram,I had been, stand for the Pl perfect;and ero,I shall be,and f ero,I shall have been, for the F t re Perfect. REMARKS.1.F i is the favorite form when the participle is freq ently sed as an adjective : convivi m exornat m f it,the banq et was f rnished forth; f i is the necessary form when the Pf .denotes that the action is over,a nd gone; amat s f i,I have been loved(b t I am loved no longer). [166 TENSES IN LETTERS.] THe same principle applies to f eram and f ero, tho gh not so reg larly.

Sim lacr m e marmore in sep lcro posit m f it;hoc q idam homo nobilis de portavit,C.,Dom.,43,111;a marble effigy WAS deposited in the tomb;a certain man of rank has carried it off.(Na }yN) Arma q ae fixa in parietib s f erant,ea s nt h mi inventa,C.,Div.,1.34,74 ;the arms which had been fastened to the walls were fo nd on the gro nd. Q od tibi f erit pers as m,h ic erit pers as m,C.,Rosc.Com.,i,3;what is (shall have proved) acceptable to yo will be acceptable to him. 2.To be disting ished is that se of the Pf .where each element has its f ll for ce,the Participle being treated as an adjective.In this case the tense is not pa st. Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres,CAES.,B.G.,i,1.(

NOTES.1.The f i,etc.,forms are rarely fo nd in CICERO,never in CAESAR,b t are ch aracteristic of LIVY and SALLUST. 2.Forem

for essem is common in the Comic Poets,occ rs twice in CICERO'S letters (Att.,vi i.21,2;x.14,8),never in CAESAR,b t in LIVY and NEPOS is very common,and practica lly synonymo s with essem. C.--Periphrastic Conj gation Passive Voice. 251.I .The combination of the Tenses of esse,to be,with the Ger ndive(verbal in -nd s),is called the Periphrastic Conj gation of the Passive,and follows the law s of the simple conj gation(129).The idea expressed is s ally one of necessity. Praeponenda [est] divitiis gloria,C.,Top.,22,84;glory is to be preferred to riches. 2.According to the r le(217) the Ger ndive of intransitive verbs can be sed onl y in the Impersonal form : Parcend m est victis,The vanq ished m st be spared. NOTES.1.The Ger ndive is a verbal adjective,which prod ces the effect of a Progr essive Participle.Whenever a participle is sed as a predicate it becomes charac teristic,and good for all time.As amans not only = q i amat,b t also = q i amet,so amand s = q i amet r.Compare 438,R.

TENSES IN LETTERS. 252.The Roman letter-writer not nfreq ently p ts himself in the position of the receiver,more especially at the beginning and at the end of the letter,often in the phrase Nihil erat(habebam) q od scriberem,I have nothing to write. This perm tation of tenses is never kept p long,and applies only to temporary s it ations,never to general statements. [MOODS.167] Table of Perm tations. scribo, scripsi, scribam, I am writing,becomes I write, I have written," I wrote, or remains nchanged. I shall write, "

scribebam. " scripseram. scripseram, script r s eram.

The adverbial designations of time remain nchanged or

Formias me contin o recipere cogitabam,C.,Att.,vii.15,3;I am thinking of retiring forthwith to Formiae.

to-morrow, now,

" "

postero die,postridie. t m.

heri, hodie, i,dabam. cras, n nc,

yesterday, to-day,

becomes "

2.Forem for essem is post-classical and comparatively

ncommon.

pridie. q o die has litteras ded

scripsi,

C m mihi dixisset Caecili s p er m se Romam mittere,haec scripsi raptim, C.,Att.,ii.9,1;as Caecili s has told me that he is sending a servant to Rome,I w rite in a h rry. (Litteras) eram dat r s postridie ei q i mihi prim s obviam venisset,C., Att.,ii.12,4;I will give the letter to-morrow to the first man that comes my way . NOTE.CICERO is m ch more consistent in this tense-shifting than PLINY;and except ions are not n mero s proportionally : Ego etsi nihil habeo q od ad te scribam,scribo tamen q ia tec m loq i vi deor,C.,Att.,xii.53. MOODS. 253.Mood signifies manner.The mood of a verb signifies the manner in which the p redicate is said of the s bject. There are three moods in Latin : 1.The Indicative. 2.The S bj nctive. 3.The Imperative. NOTE.The Infinitive form of the verb is generally,h t improperly,called a mood. The Indicative Mood. 254.The Indicative Mood represents the predicate as a reality.It is sometimes ca lled the Declarative Mood,as the mood of direct assertion. The se of the Latin Indicative differs little from the English. REMARKS.1.The Latin lang age expresses possibility and power,obligation and nece ssity,and abstract relations generally,as facts; whereas,o r translation often i mplies the fail re to realise. [168 INDICATIVE MOOD.] S ch expressions are :

debeo,I o ght,it is my d ty : oportet,it behooves;d Ma }} necesse est,it is absol tely necessary; poss m,I can,I have it in my power; convenit,it is fitting; par,aeq om est,it is fair; infinit m,endless; difficile,hard to do; long m,tedio s; and many others;also the Indic.form of the passive Periphrastic Conj gation. Observe the difference between the se of the Inf.in Eng.and in Latin after past tenses of debeo,poss m,oportet,etc. Poss m perseq i perm lta oblectamenta rer m r sticar m,C.,Cat.M.,16,55;I might rehearse very many delights of co ntry life.

Long m est perseq i tilitates asinor m,C.,N.D.,ii.64,159;it wo ld be te dio s to rehearse the sef l q alities of asses(I will not do it).

Vol mnia deb it in te officiosior esse,et id ips m,q od fecit,pot it dil igenti s facere,C.,Fam.,xiv.16;it was Vol mnia 's d ty to be(V.o ght to have bee n) more attentive to yo ;and the little she did do,she had it in her power to do (she might have done) more caref lly.(Vol mnia Z Q ae condicio non accipienda f it poti s q am relinq enda patria ? C.,At t.,viii.3,3;what terms o ght not to have been accepted in preference to leaving thy co ntry ? [E m] viv m illinc exire non oport erat,C.,M r.,25,51;he o ght never to have gone o t thence alive. The Pf.and Pl pf .always refer to a special case. 2.The Impf.as the Tense of Disappointment is sometimes sed in these verbs to de note opposition to a present state of things : debebam,I o ght(b t do not); poteras,yo co ld(b t do not). These may be considered as conditionals in disg ise.(See R.3.) Poteram morbos appellare,sed non conveniret ad omnia,C.,Fin.,iii.10,85;I might translate(that Greek word) " diseases," b t that wo ld not s it all the c ases(poteram si conveniret). At poteras,inq is,meli s mala ferre silendo,Ov.,Tr.,v.i,49;" B t," yo s ay," yo co ld(yo do not) bear yo r misfort nes better by keeping silent"(poter as si sileres). 3.The Indic. is sometimes sed in the leading cla se of conditional sentences(th e Apodosis),thereby implying the certainty of the res lt,had it not been for the interr ption.The Indic.cla se generally precedes,which is s fficient to show th e rhetorical character of the constr ction. With the Impf.the action is often really beg n : Labebar longi s,nisi me retin issem,C.,Leg.,1.19,52;I was letting myself go on(sho ld have let myself go on) too far,had I not checked myself. Omnino s pervac a erat doctrina,si nat ra s fficeret,QUINT.,ii.8,8;train ing were wholly s perfl o s,did nat re s ffice. Praeclare viceram s,nisi Lepid s recepisset Antoni m,C.,Fam.,xii.10,3;we had(sho ld have) gained a brilliant victory,had not Lepid s received Antony. [SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.169] In all these sentences the English idiom req ires the S bjv.,which is disg ised by coinciding with the Indic.in form,except in " were." 4.In general relative expressions,s ch as the do ble formations,

Ad mortem te d ci oportebat,C.,Cat.,I.i,2;it behooved yo t to have been) led to exec tion(yo were not).

to be(yo o gh

q isq is,no matter who, q otq ot,no matter how many, and all forms in -c mq e,-ever,the Indic.is employed in classical Latin where we may se in English a S bjv.or its eq ivalent : q isq is est,no matter who he is,be,may be; q alec mq e est,whatever sort of thing it is,be,may be. Q idq id id est,timeo Danaos et dona ferentes,V.,A.,ii.49;whatever it(ma y) be,I fear the Danai even when they bring presents. CICERO has occasional exceptions(Ideal Second Person or by attraction) to this r le,and later writers,partly nder Greek infl ence,freq ently violate it.Excepti ons in early Latin are not common. NOTES.1.CICERO introd ces (non) p taram," I sho ld(not) have tho ght so," and mal eram,I co ld have preferred. LUCAN and TACITUS alone imitate the latter; the former was never followed. Mal eram,q od erat s scept m ab illis,silentio transiri, C.,Att.,ii.19,3 . Feriam t a viscera,Magne;mal eram soceri(=viscera ferire)l

a.In early Latin,occasionally in the more familiar writings of CICERO,and here a nd there later we find the Pr.Indic.(in early Latin occasionally the F t.) sed in place of the S bjv.in the Deliberative Q estion. Compressan palma an porrecta ferio ?l Advolone an maneo ? C.Att,.xiii.40,2.(aX) Q oi dono lepid m novom libell m,CAT.,i,1(ay )

S bj nctive Mood. 255.The S bj nctive Mood represents the predicate as an idea,as something merely conceived in the mind(abstracts from reality). REMARK.The Latin S bjv.is often translated into English by the a xiliary verbs m ay,can,m st,might,co ld,wo ld,sho ld.When these verbs have their f ll significat ion of possibility and power,obligation and necessity,they are represented in La tin by the corresponding verbs,th s : may,can,might,co ld by the forms of posse,to be able, licet,it is left free; will and wo ld by velle,to will,to be willing;

]m,LUC

m PL.,Cas.,405

m st,by

Nostras ini rias nec potest nec possit ali s lcisci q am vos, L.,xxix.1 8,18;o r wrongs no other than yo has the power or can well have the power to av enge.* ------------------------------------------------------------------------------* *In this niq e passage nec potest denies with the head,nec possit ref ses to be lieve with the heart. NOTE.In the Latin S bjv.are combined two moods,the S bjv.proper,and the Optative ,sometimes disting ished as the moods of the will and the wish.This f sion has r endered it diffic lt to define the f ndamental conceptions of certain constr cti ons. [170 POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE.] 256.1.The realisation of the idea may be in s spense,or it may be beyond control .The first,or p rely Ideal S bj nctive,is represented by the Present and Perfect Tenses;the second,or Unreal,is represented by the Imperfect and Pl perfect.

2.The following modifications of the above principles m st be caref lly observed : (a) The Romans,in lively disco rse,often represent the nreal as ideal,that whic h is beyond control as still in s spense.(596,R..1.)

2.The idea may be a view,or a wish.In the first case the S bj nctive is said to be Potential,in the second case Optative.The Potential S bj nctive is nearer the Indicative,from which it differs in tone;the Optative S bj nctive is nearer the Imperative,for which it is often sed. Potential S bj nctive. 257.1.The Potential S bj nctive represents the opinion of the speaker as an opin ion.The tone varies from vag e s rmise to moral certainty,from " may " and " mig ht " to " m st." The negative is the negative of the Indicative,non. 2.The Potential of the Present or F t re is the Present or Perfect S bj nctive.T he verification is in s spense,and so f t re;the action may be present or f t re : with Perfect sometimes past. Velim,I sho ld wish; nolim,I sho ld be nwilling; malim,I sho ld prefer; dicas,yo wo ld say; credas,yo wo ld believe,yo m st believe;

(b) In transfers to the past,the Impf.represents the Pr.,and the Pl nf.the Pf.S bj nctive.(510.)

NOTES.1.The S bjv.,as the name implies(s bi ngo,I s bjoin ),is largely dent sentences,and will be treated at length in that connection.

debeo or oportet(of moral obligation),by necesse est(of absol te obligation).

sed in depen

dicat,dixerit aliq is,some one may ndertake to say,go so far as to say. Caedi discip los minime velim,QUINT.,1.3,13; I sho ld by no means like p pils to be flogged.(N discip los discentes)

T Platonem nec nimis valde nec nimis saepe la daveris,C.,Leg.,iii.i,1;y o cant praise Plato too m ch nor too often. NOTES.1.The Pf .S bjv.as a Potential seems to have been very rare in early Latin .CICERO extended the sage slightly and employed more persons;th s First Person Pl.and Second Sing,occ r first in CICERO.From CICERO'S time the sage spreads,pe rhaps nder the infl ence of the Greek Aorist.It was always rare with Deponents and Passives.Another view regards this dixerit as a Fnt.Pf .Indicative. 2.The Potential S bjv.is sometimes explained by the ellipsis of an Ideai or,of a n [OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.171] Unreal Conditional Protasis.B t the free Potential S bjv.differs from an ellipti cal conditional sentence in the absence of definite ellipsis,and hence of defini te translation.Compare the two sentences above with : E m q i palam est adversari s facile cavendo(si caveas) vitare possis, C .,Verr.,1.15,39;an open adversary yo can readily avoid by ca tion(if yo are ca tio s).

Nil ego cont lerim i c ndo san s(= d m san s ero) amico,H.,S.,1.5,44;the re is na ght I sho ld compare to an agreeable friend,while I am in my so nd sens es. 3.The Potential S bjv.,as a modified form of the Indic.,is often fo nd where the Indic.wo ld be the reg lar constr ction.So after q anq am(607,R.i). 258.The Potential of the Past is the Imperfect S bj nctive,chiefly in the Ideal Second Person,an imaginary " yo ."

Ha d facile discerneres tr m Hannibal imperatori an exercit i carior es set,L.,xxi.4,3;not readily co ld yo have decided whether Hannibal was dearer to general or to army. Miraret r q i t m cerneret,L.,xxxiv.9,4;any one who saw it then m st hav e been astonished. Vellem,I sho ld have wished; nollem,I sho ld have been nwilling; mallem,I sho ld have preferred(it is too late). NOTES.1.With vellem,nollem,mallem,the inference points to non-f lfilment of the wish in the Present(261,R.);with other words there is no s ch inference. 2.The Unreal of the Present and the Ideal of the Past coincide.What is nreal of a real person is simply ideal of an imaginary person.The Impf.is sed as the te nse of Description.

The Aoristic Pf .S bjv.and the Pl pf.S bjv.are rarely ast:

sed as the Ideal of the P

Crederes victos,L.,ii.43,9;yo

wo ld,might,have tho ght them beaten.

Hi ambo salt s() ad Lib os Gallos ded xerint(var.ded xissent),L.,xxi.38,7.(

Ea q a minim m credidisset(cons l) resistebant hostes,L.,xxxii.17,4.(aya 259.The Mood of the Q estion is the Mood of the expected or anticipated answer(4 62).Hence the Potential S bj nctive is sed in q estions which serve to convey a negative opinion on the part of the speaker. Q is d bitet( nemo d bitet) q in in virt te divitiae sint ? C.,Parad.,vi .2,48;who can do bt that tr e wealth consists in virt e ?(No one.) Q is t lerit Gracchos de seditione q erentes ? J v.,ii.24;who co ld bear the Gracchi complaining of rebellion ?(No one.) Ap d exercit m f eris ? C.,M r.,9,21;can yo have been with the army ? Hoc tant m bell m q is mq am arbitraret r ab no imperatore confici pos se? C.,Imp.,ii,31;who wo ld,co ld,sho ld have tho ght that this great war co ld be bro ght to a close by one general ? Optative S bj nctive. 260.The S bj nctive is sed as an Optative or wishing mood. [172 OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.] The reg lar negative is

ne. Non is sed chiefly to negative a single word;b t very rarely in the classical perio d.A second wish may be added by neq e or nec (reg larly if a positive wish precedes),b t this is also rare in the classical p eriod,and is denied for CAESAR. The Pr.and Pf.S bjv.are sed when the decision is in s spense,no matter how extr avagant the wish;the Impf.and Pl pf.are sed when the decision is adverse.The Pf .is rare and old. Stet haec rbs,C.,Mil.,34,93;may this city contin e to stand ! Q od di omen avertant,C.,Ph.,iii.14,35;which omen may the gods avert. Ita di faxint(= fecerint),PL.,Poen.,911;the gods grant it ! Ne ist c I ppiter optim s maxim s sirit(= siverit <sino) ! L.,xxxiv.24,2 ; may J piter,s premely great and good,s ffer it not ! 261.The Optative S bj nctive freq ently takes t(archaic and rare), tinam, tinam ne, tinam non;also o si,oh if(poetical and very rare);

q i(chiefly in early Latin and in c rses). Valeas beneq e t tibi sit,PL.,Poen.,912;farewell ! God bless yo ! Utinam modo conata efficere possim,C.,Att.,iv.16; may I b t have it in m y power to accomplish my endeavo rs. Utinam reviviscat frater ! GELL.,x.6,2;wo ld that my brother wo ld come to life again !

Ill d tinam ne vere scriberem,C.,Fam.,v.17,3;wo ld that what I am writi ng were not tr e ! Utinam s scept s non essem,C.,Att,iii.ii,8; wo ld I had not been born !( CICERO'S only example of non.) O mihi praeteritos referat si I ppiter annos,V.,A.,viii.560; if Jove wer e to bring me back the years that are gone by !

Vellem adesse posset Panaeti s! C.,T sc.,1.33,81; wo ld that Panaeti s c o ld be present ! Vellem me ad cenam invitasses,C.,Fam.,xii.4,1;wo ld that yo had invited ME to yo r dinner-party. So velim,nolim,etc.,for the simple wish(546,R.2). T am mihi dari velim eloq entiam,C.,N.D.,ii.59,147;I co ld wish yo r elo q ence given to me. NOTES.1.Utinam was perhaps originally an Interrogative,How,pray? If so,it belong s partly to the potential;hence the freq ent occ rrence of non. O si(occasionally si,V.,A.,vi.187) introd ces an elliptical conditional sentence,which is not intended to have an Apodosis.When the Apodosis comes,it ma y come in a different form;as in the example : V.,A.,viii.560,568. 2.The Impf.S bjv.is occasionally sed in early Latin to give an nreal wish in t he Past.This is almost never fo nd in the later period. Utinam te di pri s perderent,q am periisti e patria t a,PL.,Capt.,537. T nc mihi vita foret,TIB.,1.10,ii. [OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.173 ] 262.The Optative S bj nctive is sed in asseverations : Ita vivam t maximos s mpt s facio,C.,Att.,v.15,2;as I live,I am spendin g very largely(literally,so may I live as I am making very great o tlay). Moriar,si magis ga derem si id mihi accidisset,C.,Att.,viii.6,8;may I di e if I co ld be more glad if that had happened to me.

REMARK.For the wish with adverse decision,vellem and mallem (theoretically also nollem) may be sed with the Impf.and sometimes (especially vellem) with the Pl pf.S bj nctive.

Utinam inserere iocos moris esset,QUINT.,ii.10,9; wo ld that it were s al to introd ce jokes !

NOTE.The F t.Indic.in this sense is rare :

263.The S bj nctive is sed as an Imperative : 1.In the First Person Pl ral Present,which has no Imperative form :

Ne difficilia optem s,C.,Verr.,iv.7,15;let s not desire what is hard to do. NOTE.In the First Person Sing lar,the command fades into the wish. 2.In the Second Person. (a) In the Present chiefly in the Sing lar,and chiefly of an imaginary " yo " : Isto bono tare,d m adsit,c m absit,ne req iras,C.,Cat.M.,10,33; yo m s t enjoy that blessing so long as 'tis here,when it is gone yo m st not pine for it. NOTE.The Comic Poets se the Pr.negatively very often of a definite person,somet imes combining it with an Impv.: ignosce,irata ne sies,PL.,Am.,924; b t in the classical period s ch sage is rare,and s ally open to other explana tions;a definite person may be sed as a type,or the sentence may be elliptical. (b) In the Perfect negatively : Ne transieris Hiber m,L.,xxi.44,6; do not cross the Ebro. Ne vos mortem tim eritis,C.,T sc.,1.41,98; have no fear of death ! 3.In the Third Person Present(reg larly) : S m q isq e noscat ingeni m,C.,Off.,1.31,114;let each one know his own mind. Donis impii ne placare a deant deos,C.,Leg.,ii.16,41; let the wicked not dare to try to appease the gods with gifts. NOTE.The Pf.in this sage is very rare.S.,I g.,85,47;TAC.,Ann.,iv.32,1. 264.The S bj nctive is sed as a Concessive : Sit f r,C.,Verr.,v.i,4;(granted that) he be a thief. F erit(mal s civis),C.,Verr.,1.14,37;(s ppose) that he was a bad citi en . For other examples with t and ne,see 608.

NOTE.The past tenses are very rarely mpf.);Sest.,19,43(Pl pf.).

eed concessively;see C.,T sc.,iii,19,75 (I

Amem s patriam,C.,Sest.,68,143; let

s love o r co ntry.

Sic me di amab nt

t me t ar m miserit mst fort nar m,TER.,Hea t.,463.]

[174 IMPERATIVE MOOD.]

Gen ine q estions are commonly p t in the First Person,or the representative of the First Person : Utr m s perbiam pri s commemorem an cr delitatem,C.,Verr.,1.47,122;shall I mention the insolence first or the cr elty ? Magna f it contentio tr m moenib s se defenderent an obviam irent hosti b s,NEP.,1.4,4;there was a,great disp te whether they sho ld defend themselves b ehind the walls or go to meet the enemy.(Utr m nos defendam s an obviam eam s ?) [Example of Third Person,428,N.1.] Rhetorical q estions(q estions which anticipate the answer), nder this head,are hardly to be disting ished from Potential. Q o me n nc vertam ? Undiq e c stodior,C.,Att.,x.12,1;whither shall I no w t rn ? Sentinels on every side. Q id agerem? C.,Sest.,19,42;what was I to do? REMARK.The answer to the Deliberative Q estion is the Impv,or the Imperative S b jv.of the Present(263,2) or Past(272,3). Imperative Mood. 266.The Imperative is the mood of the will; It wills that the predicate be made a reality.The tone of the Imperative varies from stern command to piteo s entrea ty.It may appear as a demand,an order,an exhortation,a permission,a concession,a prayer. Abi in malam rem,PL.,Capt.,877;go(to the mischief),and be hanged. Compesce mentem,H.,O.,1.16,22;c rb yo r temper. Da mihi hoc,mel me m! PL.,Trin.,244;give me this,honey dear ! 267.The Imperative has two forms,known as the First and the Second Imperative(al so,b t less acc rately,as the Present and F t re Imperative).The First Imperativ e has only the Second Person;the Second Imperative has both Second and Third Per sons.The First Person is represented by the S bj nctive(263,i). REMARK.Some verbs have only the second form.This may be d e to the signification : so scito,know tho ; memento,remember tho ; and habeto,in the sense of know,remember. [IMPERATIVE MOOD.175] On violation of Concord with the Imperative,see 211,N.2. NOTE.The se of the Prono ns t ,vos,etc.,with the Impv.,is colloq ial,hence comm on in Comedy;or solemn : see V.,A.,vi.95,365,675,834,etc.

265.The S bj nctive is sed in Q estions which expect an Imperative answer(coni nctiv s deliberativ s).

268.1.The First Imperative looks forward to immediate f lfilment(Absol te Impera tive) : Special : Patent portae;proficiscere,C.,Cat.,1.5,10,Open stand the gates; depart. General: I stitiam cole et pietatem,C.,Rep.,vi.16,16,C ltivate j stice and piety. 2.The Second Imperative looks forward to contingent f lfilment(Relative Imperati ve),and is chiefly sed in laws,legal doc ments,maxims,recipes,and the like : li kewise in familiar lang age. REGIO IMPERIO DUO SUNTO;IIQUE CONSULES APPELLAMINO(130,5,c); NEMINI PARE NTO; OLLIS(104,III.N.1) SALUS POPULI SUPREMA LEX ESTO,C.,Leg.,iii.3,8;there shal l be two(officers) with royal power;they shall be called cons ls;they are to obe y no one;to them the welfare of the people m st be the paramo nt law. Rem vobis proponam : vos eam penditote,C.,Verr.,iv.i,1;I will propo nd t he matter to yo ;do yo there pon perpend it.(perpend ) Percontatorem f gito,nam garr l s idem est,H.,Ep.,1.18,69;avoid yo r q e stioner,for he is a tell-tale too. 269.STRENGTHENING WORDS.The Imperative is often strengthened and emphasised by t he addition of Adverbs,fossilised Imperatives,Phrases,etc.: age, agite, aged m, agited m,come; enclitic d m,then; modo,only; iamd d m,at once; proinde,well,then; q in,why not? sane,certainly; amabo, obsecro, q aeso,please;(I pray) sis(= si vis), s ltis(si voltis), sodes(= si a des),if yo please. Most of these belong to familiar lang age,and are therefore fo nd in great n mbe rs in Comedy and in CICERO'S letters.In the classical prose,and even later,they are not common. D m in classical times is confined to aged m; q in is cited twice in CICERO(Mil.,29,79;Rosc.Com.,9,25),and rarely late r. iamd d m begins with VERGIL,and belongs to poetry and late prose.

Sane is not cited for the classical period. S ltis is confined to early Latin;and sodes occ rs b t once in CICERO(At t,vii.3,11). Mittite,aged m,legatos,L.,xxxviii.47,11. Q in t i modo,PL.,Cas.,755.(y

ya

}y

NOTE.On the violation of Concord with age,see 211,N.2. 270.NEGATIVE OE THE IMPERATIVE.--1.The reg lar negative of the Imperative is ne( neve,ne ),which is fo nd with the Second Imperative;with the First Imperative,it is poetical or colloq ial.

Impi s ne a deto placare donis iram deor m,C.,Lev.,ii.9,22;the impio s m an m st not dare attempt to appease by gifts the anger of the gods. [176 IMPERATIVE MOOD.]

2 Instead of ne with the First Imperative was employed either noli with the Infinitive(271,2);or ne with the Pf.S bjv.,b t the latter is very rare in elevated prose(263, 2,b).On ne with Pr.S bjv.see 263,2,a. NOTE.The se of non with the act al Impv.is fo nd only in OVID;b t the addition of a second Impv.by neq e,nec,instead of neve,ne ,begins in classical times (C.,Att.,xii.22, 3),and becomes common later.The se of neq e(nec),nihil,nemo,n ll s with the S bjv.in an Impv.sense has recentl y been claimed for the Potential S bjv.(m st,257,1) on acco nt of the negative. 271.PERIPHRASES.--1. C ra(c rato) t,take care that; fac(facito) t,ca se that; fac(facito),do,with the S bj nctive,are common circ mioc tions for the P ositive Imperative. C ra t q am prim m(303,R.i) venias,C.,Fam.,iv.10,1;manage to come as so on as possible. Fac cogites,C.,Fam.,xi.3,4,Do reflect ! NOTES.1. Facito is almost wholly confined to early Latin,especially PLAUT

Op s poliat lima,non exterat,cf.QUINT.,x.4,4;let the file r b the work p,not r b it o t.

A legib s non recedam s,C.,Cl ent.,57,155;let s not recede from (let stick to) the laws.

REMARKS.1.Non may be

sed to negative a single word: s

T ne cede malis,sed contra a dentior ito,V.,A.,vi.95;yield not tho misfort nes,b t go more boldly(than ever) to meet them.

Hominem mort m in rbe ne sepelito neve rito,C.,Leg.,ii.23,58; tho alt not b ry nor b rn a dead man in the city.

a)

sh

to

US; SO also c rato. 2.Early Latin also shows vide and videte with S bjv. TERENCE introd ces VOlo,velim,with S bjv.,which is fo nd also in later times;as,C.,Fam.,ix. 12,2.

noli,be nwilling,with the Infinitive,are circ mioc tions for the Negati ve Imperative(Prohibitive) . Fac ne is also familiarly sed. Cave festines,C.,Fam.,xvi.12,6;do not be in a h rry. Tant m c m finges ne sis manifesta caveto,Ov.,A.A.,iii.801; only when yo pretend,beware that yo be not detected.

Noli,amabo,verberare lapidem,ne perdas man m,PL.,C rc.,197;don't beat a stone,I pray yo ,lest yo spoil yo r hand. Fac ne q id ali d c res hoc tempore,C.,Fam.,xvi.ii,1; see that yo pay n o attention to anything else,at this time. NOTES.1.Rare and confined to early Latin is the se of "cave" with any b t the s econd person.Cf.PL.,A l.,660;TER.,And.,403. 2.Other phrases are those with vide ne and c rato ne,with S bjv.; comperce, compesce with Inf.(all ante-classical); parce, mitte, omitte with Inf.(poetical and post-classical); nolim with S bjv.(Cic.); f ge with Inf.(Hor.); absiste with Inf.(VERG.). [IMPERATIVE MOOD.177] 272.REPRESENTATIVES OF THE IMPERATIVE.1.Instead of the Positive Imperative,may b e employed : (a) The Second Person of the Present S bj nctive(263,2). (b) The Second Person of the F t re Indicative(243). (c) The Third Person of the Present S bj nctive(263,3). 2.Instead of the Negative Imperative(Prohibitive),may be employed : (a) The Second Person of the Present S bj nctive,with ne(263,2,N.). (b) The Second Person of the Perfect S bj nctive,with ne(263,2). (c) The Second Person of the F t re,with non(243).

2.

Cave and cave(caveto) ne,beware lest,with the S bj nctive,and

(d) The Third Person of the Present or Perfect S bj nctive,with ne(263,3). REMARK.The Pr.S bjv.is employed when stress is laid on the contin ance of the ac tion;the Pf.,when stress is laid on the completion.Hence the se of the Pf.S bjv .in total prohibitions and passionate protests. 3.The Imperative of the Past is expressed by the Imperfect and Pl perfect S bj n ctive( nf lfilled d ties).Compare 265,R. Dotem daretis;q aereret ali m vir m,TER.,Ph.,297;yo sho ld have given h er a portion;she sho ld have so ght another match. Cras ires poti s,hodie hic cenares.Vale,PL.,Pers.,710; yo o ght rather to have p t off going till to-morrow,yo o ght to(have) dine(d) with s to-day.G ood-bye.(Anything decided is regarded as past.) Poti s doceret(ca sam) non esse aeq am,C.,Off.,iii.22,88;he sho ld rathe r have shown that the plea was not fair. Ne poposcisses(libros),C.,Att.,ii.i,3;yo o ght not to have asked for th e books. Observe the difference between the Unf lfilled D ty and the Unreal of the Past(5 97). Moreret r; fecisset certe si sine maximo dedecore pot isset,C.,Rab.Post., 10,29; he o ght to have died;he wo ld certainly have done so,co ld he have(done so) witho t the greatest disgrace. NOTE.The Pl pf .tense in this sage is not ante-classical. 273.Passionate q estions are eq ivalent to a command : Non taces ? PL.,Am.,700;won't yo hold yo r tong e ? Q in taces? Why don't yo hold yo r tong e ?

C r non t plen s vitae conviva recedis ? LUCR.,iii.938;why do yo not w ithdraw as a g est sated with life ? [178 TENSES OF THE MOODS.] 274.P ta, t p ta,for example,begins with [C.] ad Her.,ii.ii,16(reading do btf l); then H.,S.,ii.5,32, Q inte,p ta,a t P bli. Later it becomes more common,especially with the J rists.See C.,Ph.,ii.6,15. 275.S mmary of Imperative Constr ctions, Positive.

2d P.

A di,hear tho ; a dito(legal or contingent);

Q in datis,si q id datis? PL.,Cas.,765;why don't yo ng to do it ?(Compare Fac,si q id facis,MART.,1.46,1.)

give,if yo are goi

a dies(familiar); a dias(ideal Second Person chiefly).

Negative.

276.The Indicative alone expresses with niform directness the period of time. 277.1.The Present and Imperfect S bj nctive have to do with contin ed action,the Perfect and Pl perfect with completed action.The Perfect S bj nctive is also s ed to express the attainment. 2.In simple sentences Present and Perfect S bj nctive postpone the ascertainment of the Predicate to the F t re.The action itself may be Present or F t re for t he Present S bj nctive;Present,Past,or F t re for the Perfect S bj nctive. Credat.He may believe(now or hereafter). Crediderit.Let him have had the belief(heretofore,X),he may have come to the belief(now),he may come to the belief(hereafter). 3.In simple sentences the Imperfect and Pl perfect S bj nctive are Past Tenses,a nd reg larly serve to indicate nreality.(See 597.) NOTE.A S bjv.of the Past,being a f t re of the past,gives a prospective(or f t r e) action the time of which is over(or past),so that the analysis of the past te nses of the S bjv.shows the same elements as the Periphrastic Conj gation with e ram and f i.

4.In dependent sentences the S bj nctive is f t re if the leading verb has a f t re signification(515,R.3);otherwise

[TENSES OF THE MOODS.179] the S bj nctive represents the Indicative.The tense is reg lated by the law of s eq ence.(See 509.) 278.The Imperative is necessarily F t re.

1.Its se as a S bstantive. 2.Its se as a representative of the Indicative.

279.The Infinitive has two

ses :

Hence the freq ent parallel

se.See 254,R.2,and 597,R.3.

3d P.

Ne a dito(legal),let him not hear; ne a diat; ne a diverit. Tenses of the Moods and Verbal S bstantives.

2d P.

Ne a di,hear not(poetic); ne a dito(legal); non a dies(familiar); ne a dias(chiefly ideal); noli a dire(common); ne a diveris(rare).

3d P.

A dito(legal),Let him hear; a diat.

280.THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBSTANTIVE.--As a S bstantive the Infinitive has two te nses,Present and Perfect.(See 419.) 1 .The Present Infinitive is the common form of the Infinitive, sed as a S bstan tive.It has to do with contin ed action. (a) The Present Infinitive is sed as a s bject or predicate.(See 423,424.) Q ib sdam tot m hoc displicet philosophari,C.,Fin.,1.i,1;to some this wh ole b siness of metaphysics is a n isance. (b) The Present Infinitive is sed as the object of Verbs of Creation(A xiliary Verbs,Verbs that help the Infinitive into being;see 423.) Cato servire q am p gnare mav lt,C.,Att.,vii.15,2;Cato prefers to be a s lave rather than to fight(being a slave to fighting). 2.The Perfect Infinitive is comparatively little sed as a S bstantive.It has to do with completed action,and is also sed to express attainment. (a) As a s bject,it is sed chiefly in fixed expressions or in marked opposition to the Present. Pl s proderit demonstrasse rectam protin s viam q am revocare ab errore iam lapsos,QUINT.,11.6,2;it will be more profitable to have pointed o t the right pa th immediately than to recall from wandering those that have already gone astray . [Non] tam t rpe f it vinci q am contendisse decor m est,Ov.,M.,ix.5;'twas no t so m ch dishono r to be beaten as 'tis an hono r to have str ggled. REMARKS.1.By a kind of attraction dec it,became,takes occasionally a Pf.Inf.(emotional). T nc flesse dec it,L.,xxx.44,7;that was the time when it wo ld have been bec oming to weep(to have wept). Et er b isse decebat,Ov.M,,iv,330;the very fl sh of shame was becoming. [180 TENSES OF THE MOODS.] 2.So oport it,behooved,d MN}

is freq ently followed by the Pf.Part,passive,with or witho t esse.This seems to have belonged to familiar style;it is accordingly very common in early Latin. [Hoc] iam pridem fact m esse oport it,C.,Cat.,1.2,5;this o ght to have been done long ago. (b) As an object,the Perfect Infinitive is seldom fo nd in the active,except aft er velle,to wish,which seems to have been a legal sage. Neminem nota stren i a t ignavi militis notasse vol i,L.,xxiv.16,11; I wishe d to have marked(to mark finally,to brand) no soldier with the mark of bravery o r of cowardice.

Annales,q ib s credidisse malis,L.,XLII.ii,1.(N) NEIQUIS EORUM BACANAL HABUISE VELET, S.C.DE BAG (Senat s cons lt m de Baccha nalib s < < yya). Otherwise it is fo nd mainly in the poets(after the fashion of the Greek Aor ist Inf.),and s ally with the Pf.and Pl pf.tenses, vol i,etc.,pot i,deb eram(deb i).

Fratres tendentes opaco Pelion impos isse Olympo,H.,O.,iii.4,52;The brothers striving to pile Pelion on shady Olymp s. NOTES.1.This sage with velle seems to have approached often the F t.Pf.in force .A Pf.Inf.after the Pr.of posse occ rs very rarely : Non potes probasse n gas,PL.,A l.,828; see V.,A.,vi.78,and several cases in OVID and MARTIAL. 2.The Pf.Inf.act.(s bj.or obj.) is often fo nd in the poete,especially in elegia c poetry,as the first word in the second half of a pentameter,where it can hardl y be disting ished from a Present.This sage may be d e partly to analogy with v erbs of wishing,partly to the exigencies of the metre,partly to the infl ence of the Greek Aorist.It m st be disting ished from the normal se of the Perfect : Q am i vat immites ventos a dire c bantem Et dominam tenero detin isse s in ! TIB.,1.1,45.(yayNMaa_)

debeo with the Pf.Inf.act.in the sense "m st have": statim vicisse debeo,C.,Rosc.Am.,23,73; () debes adnotasse,PLIN.,Ep.,vii.20,6.(}y aaNaya)

(c) In the Passive,the Perfect Infinitive is sed after verbs of Will and Desire ,to denote impatience of anything except entire f lfilment.See 537. [Patriam] exstinctam c pit.C.,Fin.,iv.24,66;he desires his co ntry blott ed o t. Here the Infinitive esse is seldom expressed. Corinth m patres vestri toti s Graeciae l men exstinct m esse vol er nt, C.,Imp.,5,11(211,R.6). NOTE.This sage is common in Comedy and in CICERO,rare,if at all,in CAESAR and S ALLUST;and later also it is rare,s rviving chiefly in phrases.The principal verb is volo,less often c pio,very rarely expeto and nolo. 281.THE INFINITIVE AS THE REPRESENTATIVE OF THE INDICATIVE.---As the representat ive of the Indicative,the [TENSES OF THE MOODS.181 ] Infinitive has all its Tenses : Present,Past,F t re,and F t re Periphrastics.

3.Noteworthy is the occasional

se of

1.The Present Infinitive represents contemporaneo s action -- hence the Present Indicative after a Principal Tense,and the Imperfect after a Historical Tense : Dico e m venire, dicebam e m venire, I say that he is coming; I said that he was coming.

2.The Perfect Infinitive represents Prior Action hence the Perfect and Imperfect Indicative after a Principal Tense,and the Pl perfect,Imperfect,and Historical Perfect Indicative after a Historical Tense : Dico e m venisse,I say that he came,has come, sed to come. Dixi e m venisse,I said that he had come, sed to come,did come. NOTE.Memini,I remember,when sed of personal experience,commonly takes the Prese nt : T m me regem appellari a vobis memini,n nc tyrann m vocari video, L.,xxx iv.31,13;I remember being styled by yo a king then,I see that I am called a tyr ant now. So also rarely memoria teneo, recorder,I remember,I recall,and f git me,I do not remember. When the experience is not personal,the ordinary constr ction is followed : Memineram Mari m ad infimor m homin m misericordiam conf gisse, C.,Sest. ,22,50;I remembered that Mari s had thrown himself on the mercy of a set of low creat res. The pec liar constr ction with the Pr.arises from the liveliness of the recollec tion.When the action is to be regarded as a bygone,the Pf.may be sed even of pe rsonal experience : Me memini irat m dominae t rbasse capillos,Ov.,A.A.,ii.169;I remember in my anger having to sled my sweetheart's hair. 282.The Present Participle active denotes contin ance; the Perfect passive,compl etion or attainment. NOTE.The Latin is more exact than the English in the se of the tenses.So the Pf .Part,is freq ently employed when we se the Present;especially in classical pro se,with verbs that indicate a condition,mental or physical,where the action of t he participle is conceived as contin ing p to,and sometimes into,that of the le ading verb,as rat s,thinking; verit s,fearing; gavis s,rejoicing,etc. This sage spreads later :

complex s,embracing; hortat s,exhorting. 283.The F t re Participle(active) is a verbal adjective,denoting capability and tendency,chiefly employed in the older lang age with s m,I am,as a periphrastic tense.In later Latin it is sed freely,j st as the Present and Perfect Participl

es,to express s bordinate relations. NOTES.1.The so-called F t.Part,passive is more properly called the Ger ndive,and has already been disc ssed(251). 2.The S pine,being witho t tense relations,does not belong here. [182 SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED.] SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED. 284.The sentence may be expanded by the m ltiplication or by the q alfiication,A ,of the s bject,B,of the predicate. A. 1.M ltiplication of the S bject. Concord. 285.NUMBER.The common predicate of two or more s bjects is p t in the Pl ral n m ber : L ci s Tarq ini s et T llia minor i ng nt r n ptiis,L.,1.46,9; L ci s Ta rq ini s and T llia the yo nger are nited in marriage. Pater et mater mort i [s nt],TER.,E n.,518;father and mother are dead. EXCEPTIONS.1.The common predicate may agree with a Sing.s bject when that s bjec t is the nearest or the most important: " My flesh and my heart faileth," PSA.,L XXIII.26. Aetas et forma et s per omnia Roman m nomen te ferociorem facit,L.,xxxi. 1 8,3;yo r yo th and bea ty,and,above all,the name of Roman,makes yo too mettle some(Naa). Latag m saxo occ pat os faciemq e adversam V.,A.,x.698(323,N.2). The agreement depends lareely also pon the position of the verb.if it precedes or follows the first s bj.,the Sing,is more apt to stand. 2.Two abstracts in combination,when conceived as a nit,take a Sing,verb : " Whe n distress and ang ish cometh pon yo ," PROV.,1.27. Religio et fides anteponat r amicitiae,C.,Off.,iii.10,46;let the religio s obligation of a promise be preferred to friendship. nion : " Yo r gold and silver is cankered()," JAS.,v.3.

Senat s pop l sq e Roman s intellegit,C.,Fam.,v.8,2; the senate and peop le of Rome perceives(= Rome perceives). T a fama et gnatae vita in d bi m veniet,TER.,Ad.,340;yo r good name wil l be jeoparded and yo r da ghter's life. 3.When the same predicate is fo nd with two or more s bjects,who are conceived a s acting independently,classical sage req ires that the predicate be in the Sin g lar.LIVY introd ces the Pl.,which grows,and becomes the r le in TACITUS :

So any close

Palati m Rom l s,Rem s Aventin m ad ina gnrand m templa capi nt,L.,1.6,4 . NOTES.1.Neq e-neq e,neither nor, allows the Pl.chiefly when the Persons are different :

[CONCORD.183] The same is tr e,b t not so common,of et-et(as well ,), a t-a t,either or. 2.A Sing,s bj.combined with another word by c m,with,is treated properly as a Si ng lar.It is treated as a Pl.once each by CATO,TERENCE(Hea t.,473),CICERO (by an acol thon),CAESAR(B.C.,iii.88),more often by SALLUST and his imitators,LIVY,and later writers.VELLEIUS,VALERIUS M.,and TACITUS follow the classical sage. S lla c m Scipione ....leges inter se cont ler nt,C.,Ph.,xii.ii,27. Ipse d x c m aliq ot principib s capi nt r,L.,xxi.60,7; the general hims elf with some of the leading men are capt red. 3.In the Abl.Aba.the Part,stands s ally in the Pl.with persons, s ally in the S ing.with,things.C.Graccho et M.F lvio Flacco interfectis,S.,I g.,16,2.Caritate b enevolentiaq e s blata,C.,Lael.,27,102. 286.GENDER.- When the Genders of combined s bjects are the same,the adjective pr edicate agrees in gender;when the genders are different,the adjective predicate takes either the strongest gender or the nearest. 1.In things with life,the masc line gender is the strongest;in things witho t li fe,the ne ter. (a) The strongest : Pater et mater mort i [s nt],TER.,E n.,518(285). M r s et porta de caelo tacta erant,L.,xxxii.29,1;wall and gate had been str ck by lightning.

Hoc anima atq e anim s vincti s nt foedere semper,LUCR.,iii.416.( (b) The nearest : Convicta est Messalina et Sili s,Cf.TAC.,Ann.,xii.65;Messalina was convi cted and(so was) Sili s. Hippoloch s Larissaeor mq e dedit m est praesidi m, L.,xxxvi.9,14;Hippoloch s an d the Larissaean garrison(were) s rrendered. 2.When things with life and things witho t life are combined,the gender varies. (a) Both as persons : Rex regiaq e classis profecti(s nt),L.,xxi.50,11;the king and the king's fleet set o t.

Haec neq e ego neq e t fecim s,TER.,Ad.,103;neither yo

nor I did this.

(b) Both as things : Nat ra inimica [s nt] libera civitas et rex,Cf.L.,XLiv.24,2; a free stat e and a king are nat ral enemies. 3.When the s bjects are feminine abstracts the predicate may be a ne ter Pl ral( 211,R.4). St ltitiam et intemperantiam dicim s esse f gienda,C.,Fin.,iii.ii,39;fol ly and want of self-control(we say) are(things) to be avoided. NOTE.This sage does not appear in early Latin,nor in CAESAR or SALLUST. [184 ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE.] 287.PERSONS.When the persons of combined s bjects are different,the First Person is preferred to the Second,the Second to the Third : Si t et T llia,l x nostra,valetis,ego et s avissim s Cicero valem s, C. ,Fam.,xiv.5,1;if T llia,light of my life,and yo are well,dearest Cicero and I a re well. REMARK.(a) In contrasts,and when each person is considered separately,the predic ate agrees with the person of the nearest s bject. Et ego et Cicero me s flagitabit,C.,Att.,iv.18,5;my Cicero will demand i t and(so will) I. Beate vivere alii in alio,vos in vol ptate ponitis,C.,Fin.,ii.27,86;some make a blessed life to rest on one thing,some on another,yo on pleas re. So reg larly with disj nctives,see 285,N.1. (b) The order is commonly the order of the persons,not of modern politeness : Ego et xor mea,Wife and I. 2.Q alification of the S bject. 288.The s bject may be q alified by giving it an attrib te.An attrib te is that which serves to give a specific character. The chief forms of the attrib te are : I.The adjective and its eq ivalents : amic s cert s,a s re friend. REMARK.The eq ivalents of the adjective are : 1.The prono ns hic,this,ille,that, etc.2.S bstantives denoting rank,age,trade: serv s homo,a slave person; homo senex,an old fellow; homo gladiator,a gladiator-fellow; m lier ancilla,a servant-wench. 3.The Genitive (360,i).4.The Ablative(400).5.Preposition and case : excess s e vita,depart re from life. 6.Adverbs,chiefly with s bstantival participles :

recte facta,good actions. 7.Relative cla ses(505). II.The s bstantive in apposition : Cicero Orator,Cicero

289.The Adjective Attrib te agrees with its s bstantive in gender,n mber,and cas e : GENDER. NUMBER. Vir sapiens,a wise man, M lier p lchra,a bea tif l woman, n. Regi m don m,royal gift, [ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE.185] CASE. Viri sapientis,of a wise.man. bone fili ! good son ! M lierl p lchrae,for a bea tif l woman, regio dono,by royal gift. Vir m sapientem,wise man. m lieres p lchras,bea ti f l women. 290.The common attrib te of two or more s bstantives agrees with the nearest;rar ely with the most important. Vol sen s,vir et consilii magni et virt tis,CAES.,B.G.,iii.5,2;Vol sen s ,a man of great wisdom and valo r. C ncta maria terraeq e patebant,S.,C.,10,1;all seas and lands lay open. viri sapientes,wise men. m lieres p lchrae,bea tif l wome regia dona,royal gifts.

M lta alia castella viciq e a t deleta hostiliter a t integra in potesta tem venere,L.,ix.38,1.(N X REMARKS.1.For emphasis,or to avoid ambig ity,the adj.is repeated with every s bs tantive.Sometimes also for rhetorical reasons simply. (Semproniae) m ltae facetiae,m lt sq e lepos inerat,S.,C.,25,5;Sempronia had a treas re of witticisms,a treas re of charming talk. 2.When a s bstantive is constr ed with several similar adjectives in the Sing.,i t may be in agreement with one in the Sing,or may stand in the PL,according to i ts position : Q arta et Martia legiones,C.,Fam.,xi.19,1, b t Legio Martia q artaq e, C.,Ph.,v.17,46,The fo rth and Martian legions.

NOTES.1.A common s rname is p t in the Pl ral : M.(et) Q.Cicerones,Marc s and Q int s Cicero; C.,Cn.,M.Carbones,Gai s,Gnae s(and) Marc s Carbo; otherwise, M.Cicero et Q.Cicero,Marc s and Q int s Cicero.

I.ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE. Concord.

2.Poets are free in regard to the position of the adjective: Semper hones nomenq e t m la desq e maneb nt,V.,A.,1.609. 291.Position of the Attrib te.T.When the attrib te is emphatic,it is commonly p t before the s bstantive,otherwise in classical Latin ordinarily after it.B t se e 676. 1.F gitiv s serv s,a r naway slave(one complex). 2.Serv s f gitiv s,a slave(that is) a r naway(two notions).

Many expressions,however,have become fixed form la?,s ch as civis Roman s,Roman citi en; pop l s Roman s,people,of Rome. Compare body politic,heir apparent in English. REMARKS.1.Variation in the position of the adj.often ca ses variation in the mea ning of the word.Th s res bonae,good things; bonae res,articles of val e,or good circ mstances; res rbanae,city matters; rbanae res,witticisms; mensa sec nda,a second table; sec nda mensa,dessert.

[186 NUMERALS.]

s mma aq a,the s rface of the water; s mm s mons,the top of the mo ntain; vere prime,primo vere,in the beginning of spring.Similarly in media rbe,in the midst of the city;reliq a,cetera Graecia,the rest o f Greece,and the like. 2.When the attrib te belongs to two or more words,it is placed sometimes after t hem all,sometimes after the first,sometimes before them all. Divitiae,nomen,opes vac ae consilio dedecoris plenae stint,C.,Rep.,1.34,51 : ric hes,name,reso rces(when) void of wisdom are f ll of dishono r. For examples of the other positions see 290. N merals. 292.D o means simply two, ambo,both(two considered together), terq e,either(two considered apart,as," They cr cified two other with h im,on either side one," JOHN,xix.18) ( 0): S pplicatio ambor m nomine et tri mph s triq e decret s est,L.,xxviii.9 ,9;a thanksgiving in the name of both and a tri mph to either(each of the two) w

2.S perlatives which denote order and seq ence in time and space are often partitively,and then generally precede their s bstantive :

sed

as decreed. Q i tr mq e probat,ambob s deb it ti,C.,Fin.,ii.7,20;he who approves o f either o ght to have availed himself of both. REMARK.Uterq e is seldom Pl,except of sets;so with pl ralia tant m. Utriq e(i.e.,plebis fa tores et senat s) victoriam cr deliter exercebant , S.,C.,38,4;either party(democrats and senate) made a cr el se of victory. D ae f er nt Ariovisti xores : traeq e in ea f ga perier nt, CAES.,B.G .,1.53,4;Ariovist s's wives were two in n mber;both perished in that flight. Proximo die Caesar e castris trisq e copias s as ed xit, G.,1.50,1.() On terq e with the Pl.,

see 211,R.i;with Gen.,see 371,R.

mille milites,rather than mille milit m,a tho sand soldiers; in the Pl.it is a declinable s bstantive,and m st have the Genitive : d o milia milit m,two tho sand(s of) soldiers = two regiments of soldier s.

[NUMERALS.187]

B t

d o milia q ingenti hosti m in acie periere,L.,xxii.7,3. NOTE.The se of mille as a s bstantive with the Part.Gen.is fo nd mostly in ante -classical and post-classical Latin.CICERO and CAESAR se it b t rarely,and in p hrases s ch as mille n mm m,mille pass m.LIVY is fonder of it. 294.ORDINALS.The Ordinals are sed more often in Latin than in English;th s alwa ys in dates : anno d centfisimo q arto,in the year 204.Sometimes they are sed f or the cardinals with a carelessness that gives rise to ambig ity : Q att or anni s nt,ex q o te non vidi,It is fo r years,that I have not s een yo (since I saw yo ). Q art s ann s est,ex q o te non vidi.It is the fo rth year( fo r years,g oing on fo r years).

3500 cavalry,

{ tria milia q ingenti eq ites, { tria milia eq it m et q ingenti b t {eq ites tria milia q ingenti,or {eq it m tria milia q ingenti.

If a smaller n mber comes between,the s bstantive s ally follows the smaller n mber :

293.Mille,a tho sand,is in the Sing,an indeclinable adj.and is less freq ently sed with the Genitive:

CAES.,B.

NOTE.To avoid this ambig ity forms of incipere,to begin,and exigere,to finish,se em to have been sed.Cf.,PL.,Capt.,980;Cist.,161.On q isq e with the ordinal,see 318,2. 295.DISTRIBUTIVES.The distrib tives are sed with an exactness which is foreign to o r idiom wherever repetition is involved,as in the m ltiplication table. Bis bina q ot [s nt] ? C.,N.D.,ii.18,49; how many are twice two? Script m ec le m c m q inq e pedib s,p llos gallinaceos tris c m ternis pedib s natos esse,L.,xxxii.i,11;a letter was written to say that a colt had bee n foaled with five feet(and) three chickens hatched with three feet(apiece). With sing li the distrib tive is preferred,b t the cardinal may be sed. Antoni s(pollicit s est) denarios q ingenos sing lis militib s dat r m, C.,Fam.,x.32,4;Antoni s promised to give five h ndred denarii to each soldier. Sing lis censorib s denarii trecenti(so all MSS.) imperati s nt, C.,Verr .,ii.55,137;the censors were req ired to pay three h ndred denarii apiece. NOTE.Poets and later prose writers often se the distrib tive when the cardinal wo ld be the r le;th s bini is not nfreq ently sed of a pair even in CICERO : binos (scyphos) habebam,Verr.,iv.14,32.

Carmen ab ter novenis virginib s cani i sser nt,L.,xxxi.is,9;they ordere d a chant to be s ng by thrice nine virgins. [188 COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.] On the other hand,prose sometimes shows a cardinal when exact sage wo ld req ir e a distrib tive.So reg larly milia. Milia talent m per d odecim annos(dabitis),L.,xxxvii.45,15. On the distrib tives with pl ralia tant m,see 97,R.3. Comparatives and S perlatives. 296.COMPARATIVE.The comparative degree generally takes a term of comparison eith er with q am,than,or in the Ablative : Ignoratio f t ror m malor m tilior est q am scientia,C.,Div.,ii.g,23; i gnorance of f t re evils is better than knowledge(of them). Nihil est virt te amabili s,C.,Lael.,8,28;nothing is more lovable than v irt e.

Caesarem pl s amam s {q am Pompei m}

we love Caesar more than Pompey.

Caesar minor est {q am Pompei s} {Pompei, }

Caesar is yo nger than Pompey.

REMARKS.1.(a) The Abl.is m.or Acc.(644).

sed only when the word with q am wo ld stand in the No

When there is an idea of gro ping,the distrib tive is often broken tiplicative and a distrib tive;as,

p into a m l

{Pompeio,

In the second example the se of the Abl.may give rise to ambig ity,as the sente nce may also mean "we love Caesar more than Pompey loves him." This ambig ity is always present when adverbs are sed,and hence good prose avoids sing a compar ative adv.with an Ablative.See H.,S.,1.i,97. (b) With cases other than Nona,or Acc.,q am is reg larly sed to avoid ambig ity . An lis nostris pl s q am animis creditor,SEN.,Ben.,iii.15,3(217). 2.The Abl.is very common in negative sentences,and is sed excl sively in negati ve relative sentences. Polybi m seq am r,q o nemo f it diligentior,C.,Rep.,II.14,27;let s foll ow Polybi s,than whom no one was more caref l. 3.Meas re of difference is p t in the Ablative(403). 4.Q am is often omitted after and

pl s,ampli s,more, min s,less,and the like,witho t affecting the constr ction : Homini misero pl s q ingentos colaphos infregit mihi,TER.,Ad.,199; he ha s dealt me,l ckless creat re,more than five h ndred cr shing boxes on the ear. Spati m est non ampli s ped m sescentor m,CAES.,B.C.,1.38,5;the space is not more than(of) six h ndred feet. B t the normal constr ction is not excl ded : Pal s non latior pedib s q inq aginta,CAES.,B.G.,vii.19,1;a swamp not br oader than fifty feet(or pedes q inq aginta). Nostri milites ampli s horis q att or p gnaver nt,CAES.,B.G.,iv.37,3. [COMPARATIVES.189] 5.In statements of age we may have a variety of expressions;th s,more than thirt y years old may be : 1.Nat s pl s(q am) triginta annos.3.Maior(q am) triginta annos nat s. 2.Nat s pl s triginta annis(rare).4.Maior triginta annis(nat s). 5.Maior triginta annor m. 6.On the combination of the comparative with opinione,opinion, spe,hope,and the like,see 398,N.1. NOTES.1.Verbs and other words involving comparison sometimes have the Abl.where another constr ction wo ld be more nat ral.Th s, malle,to prefer(poet,and post-classical), aeq o,adaeq e,eq ally(early and late), ali s,other(mainly poetic and rare):

N llos his mallem l dos spectasse,H.,S.,ii.8,79. Q i me in terra aeq e fort nat s erit? PL.,C rc.,141. Ne p tes ali m sapiente bonoq e beat m,Ep.,1.16,30. 2.Instead of the Abl.,the Gen.is fo nd occasionally in late Latin.

prae,in comparison with, praeter,ante,beyond; also s pra q am. Poetical is the circ mioc tion with q alis,as Hor.,Epod.,5,59. Inferior is sometimes constr cted with the Dat.,according to the sense;" inferior to" instead of "lower than". 4.Atq e for q am is mainly poetical;see 644,N.2. 297.Standard of Comparison omitted. When the standard of comparison is omitted,it is s pplied : 1.By the context; 2.By the s al or proper standard; 3.By the opposite. 1.By the context : Solent reges Persar m pl res xores habere,Cf.C.,Verr.,iii.33,76; the ki ngs of Persia s ally have more wives [than one]. 2.By the proper standard : Senect s est nat ra loq acior,C.,Cat.M.,16,55,Old age is nat rally rathe r(or too) talkative. 3.By the opposite : Q iesse erit meli s,L.,iii.48,3;it will be better to be-perfectly-q iet( than to make a dist rbance). 298.Disproportion. Disproportion is expressed by the comparative with q am pro,than for, and the Ablative,or with q am t,that, or q am q i,who, and the S bj nctive : Minor caedes q am pro tanta victoria f it,L.,x,14,21;the loss was (too) small for so great a victory.

3.Instead of q am or the Abl.,prepositional nd; as

ses with the positive are often fo

Q is non intellegit Canachi signa rigidiora esse q am t imitent r verit atem ? C.,Br.,18,70;who does not perceive that Canach s's fig res are too stiff to imitate the tr th of nat re ? ( ) Maior s m q am c i possit Fort na nocere,Ov.,M.,vi.195; I am too great f or Fort ne possibly to h rt me. [190 COMPARATIVES.] REMARK.Disproportion may also be expressed by the positive in combination with p repositional phrases,etc.: pro m ltit dine ang sti fines,CAES.,B.G.,1.2,5;bo ndaries too small for their m ltit de. NOTES.1.The constr ctions q am pro and q am q i are both post-Ciceronian. 2.The t is freq ently omitted after q am,as : Dolabella celeri s Asia [excessit],q am eo praesidi m add ci pot isset, C.,Fam.,xii,15,1.( N) This is especially common after poti s q am. 299.Two Q alities compared.When two q alities of the same s bstantive are compar ed,we find either magis and q am with the positive,or a do ble comparative : Celer t s disert s magis est q am sapiens,C.,Att.,x.i,4;yo r (friend) C eler is eloq ent rather than wise - more eloq ent than wise,. Ac tiorem se q am ornatiorem [v lt],C.,Opt.Gen.,2,6;he wishes to be ac t e rather than ornate. NOTES.1.There is no distinction to be made between the two expressions.In the la tter t rn,which is fo nd first,b t rarely,in CICERO,the second comparative is me rely attracted into the same form as the first.The same r le applies to the adve rb : forti s q am felici s,with more bravery than good l ck. 2.Post-A g stan Latin shows occasionally the comparative followed by q am,and th e positive() :

Nimia pietas vestra acri s q am considerate excitavit,TAC.,H.,1.83.(} 300.Restriction to the Comparative.--When b t two objects are compared,the compa rative exha sts the degrees of comparison,whereas,in English,the s perlative is employed, nless the idea of d ality is emphatic. Nat maior,the eldest(of two),the elder; nat minor,the yo ngest,the yo nger. Prior,the first; posterior,the last. Posteriores cogitationes, t ai nt,sapientiores solent esse, C.,Ph.,xii.2

,5;aftertho ghts,as the saying is,are s ally the wisest. REMARK.--The same r le applies to the interrogative ter,which of two ?(whether ?) : Ex d ob s ter dignior ? ex pl rib s,q is dignissim s ? QUINT.,vii.4,21; of two,which is the worthier ? of more(than two),which,is the worthiest ?

301.Comparative Strengthened.--The comparative is often strengthened d ring the classical period by the insertion of etiam,even;later also by adh c,still. M lto is properly the Ablative of difference,and is the normal form nti l the time of VERGIL,when its place is taken largely by longe,except in HORACE,who retains m lto.Ante-classical and post-classic al Latin occasionally do bles the comparative : magis d lci s,PL.,Stich.,699.

Nihil invenies magis hoc certo certi s,PL.,Capt.,643.(}yy [PRONOUNS.191] Even in CICERO a word involving inference is sometimes strengthened by poti s : [Themistocli f it] optabili s oblivisci posse poti s q am meminisse, C., Or.,ii.74,1300;Themistcles tho ght it(more) preferable to be able to forget(rath er) than to be able to remember. 302.S perlative.--The Latin s perlative is often to be rendered by the English p ositive(),especially of persons : Q int s Fabi s Maxim s,Q int s Fabi s the Great. Maximo impet ,maiore fort na,L.,xxviii.36,2;with great vigo r,with great er l ck. Tam felix esses q am formosissima vellem,Ov.,Am.,1.8,27;wo ld tho wert fort nate as(tho art) fair. 303.S perlative Strengthened.--The s perlative is strengthened by m lto,m ch(especially in early Latin); longe,by far(the normal sage in the classical period); vel,even; n s, n s omni m,one above all others; q am(with adverbs and adjectives), q ant s(with maxim s), t (with adverbs) --potest,pot it,as--as possible.

Ex Britannis omnib s longe s nt h manissimi q i Canti m incol nt, CAES., B.G.,v.14,1; of all the Britons by far the most c ltivated are those that inhabi t Kent. Protagoras sophistes illis temporib s vel maxim s,C.,N.D.,1.23,63; Prota

NOTE.Q is is rarely

sed instead of ter,as C.,Fam.,vi.3,1;V.,A.,xii.725.

goras,the very greatest sophist(= professor of wisdom) in those times. Urbem nam mihi amicissimam declinavi,C.,Planc.,41,97; I t rned aside fr om a city above all others friendly to me. (Caesar) q am aeq issimo loco potest castra comm nit,CAES.,B.G.,v.49,7;C aesar fortifies a camp in as favo rable a position as possible. REMARKS.1.The omission of potest leaves q am with the s perlative,which becomes a reg lar combination: as(great) as possible. 2.For tam,tant m,with positive followed by q am,q ant m q i,and the s perlativ e,see 642,R.5. PRONOUNS.I.Personal Prono ns.

2.The Genitive forms,mei,t i,s i,nostri,vestri,are sed mainly as Objective Geni tives;see 364,N.2. (Marcellin s) se acerrim m t i defensorem fore ostendit, C.,Fam.,I.i,2;M arcellin s showed that he wo ld be yo r keenest defender. NOTES.1.Nostr m and vestr m for nostri,vestri,are very rare :

2.The Possessive prono ns sometimes are fo nd in place of this Genitive : Neq e neglegentia t a neq e odio id fecit t o,TER.,Ph.,1016;he did this neither from neglect of thee nor from hatred of thee. [192 PRONOUNS.] Vester conspect s reficit et recreat mentem meam,C.,Planc.,i,2;the sight of yo refreshes and renews my spirits. " If I be a master,where is my fear ? " MAL,1.6. 3.The Genitive forms,nostr m and vestr m,are sed partitively;see 364,R.

2.Demonstrative Prono ns. 305. Hic,this(the Demonstrative of the First Person),refers to that which is nearer the speaker,and may mean :

2.For a Part.Gen.of the third person(reflexive) a circ mioc tion m st be sed,s ch as ex se or the Possessive s or m.

NOTES.1.So reg larly also in certain phraseological ses which may be partitive at basis. Freq entia vestr m,consens s vestr m,reg larly in combination with omni m(364,B.),and occasionally when the Possessive is more nat ral; is enim splendor est vestr m,C.,Att.,vii.ISA,3.

Te ad me venire terq e nostr m c pit,C.,Att.,xiii33,2;each of sires that yo sho ld come to me.

[I ppiter,c stos] h i s

rbis ac vestr m,Cf.C.,Cat.,iii.12,29.

304.1.The personal Prono n is ee 207.

s ally omitted when it is the s bject of a verb;s

s two de

1.The speaker himself : hic homo = ego,PL.,Trin.,1115. 2.The persons with whom the speaker identifies himself,e.g.,the j dges in a s it at law : si ego hos novi,if I know these men(= the j ry). 3.The most important s bject immediately in hand : hic sapiens de q o loq or,C.,Ac.,ii.33,105;this(imaginary) wise man of w hom I am speaking. 4.That in which the speaker is pec liarly interested : hoc st di m,this p rs it of mine,of o rs. 5.That which has j st been mentioned : haec hacten s,these things th s far = so m ch for that. 6.Very freq ently,that which is abo t to be mentioned : his condicionib s,on the following terms. 7.The c rrent period of time : hic dies,to-day; haec nox,the night j st past or J st coming; hic mensis,the c rrent month.

refers to that which belongs more pec liarly to the Second Person(Demonstrative of the Second Person) : Perfer istam militiam,C.,Fam.,vii.ii,2;end re that military service of y o rs. Advent t o ista s bsellia vac efacta s nt,C.,Cat.,1.7,16;at yo r approa ch the benches in yo r neighbo rhood were vacated. NOTE.The s pposed contempt o s character of iste arises from the ref sal to take any direct notice of the person nder disc ssion," the person at whom one speak s or points," and precisely the same thing is tr e of hic and ille, b t less common. 307.

Ille,that(the Demonstrative of the Third Person),

denotes that which is more remote from the speaker,and is often sed in contrast to hic,this. [PRONOUNS.193] Sol me ille admon it,C.,Or.,iii.,55,209;that(yon) s n reminded me. Q.Cat l s non antiq o illo more sed hoc nostro er dit s,C.,Br.,35,132; Q .Cat l s,a c ltivated man,not after the old-fashioned standard of a by-gone time (illo) b t by the standard of to-day(hoc). Ille may mean :

306.

iste,that(of thine,of yo rs),

1.That which has been previo sly mentioned(often ille q idem): ill d q od initio vobis propos i,C.,Font.,7,17; that which I propo nded to yo at first. 2.That which is well known,notorio s(often p t after the s bstantive) : test la illa,that(notorio s) potsherd instit tion of ostracism; ill d Solonis,that(famo s saying) of Solon's. 3.That which is to be recalled : ill d imprimis mirabile,that(which I am going to remind yo of) is espec ially wonderf l. 4.That which is expected : Illa dies veniet mea q a l g bria ponam,Ov.,Tr.,iv.2,73;the day will com e when I shall lay aside(cease) my mo rnf l strains.

(a) When both are matters of indifference the nat ral signification is observed : hic,the latter; ille,the former. Ignavia corp s hebetat,labor firmat;illa mat ram senect tem,hic longam a dolescentiam reddit,CELS.,1.i;la iness weakens the body,toil strengthens it;the one(the former) hastens old age,the other(the latter) prolongs yo th. (b) When the former is the more important, hic is the former, ille,the latter : Melior t tiorq e est certa pax q am sperata victoria;haec in nostra,illa in deor m man est,L.,xxx.30,19;better and safer is certain peace than hoped-fo r victory;the former is in o r hand(s),the latter in the hand(s) of the gods. 2. Hic et ille; ille et ille; ille a t ille, this man and(or) that man = one or two. Non dicam hoc sign m ablat m esse et ill d;hoc dico,n ll m te sign m rel iq isse, C.,Verr.,1.20,53;I will not say that this stat e was taken off and that ;(what) I say(is) this,that yo left no stat e at all. 3.The derived adverbs retain the personal relations of hic,iste,ille : hic,here(where I am); hinc,hence(from where I am); h c,hither (where I am);

REMARKS.1.Hic and ille are ,the former-the latter.

sed together in contrasts : as,the latter-the former

istic,there(where yo are); illic,there(where he is),etc. 4.The Demonstratives hic,iste,ille,and the Determinative is, are often strengthened by q idem,indeed. The second member is then introd ced by sed, sed tamen(more rarely tamen,ver m,a tem,vero), ver mtamen, and sometimes is added asyndetically.The sentence often req ires that either the demonstrative or the particle be left ntranslated. [194 PRONOUNS.] Optare hoc q idem est,non docere,C.,T sc.,ii.13,30; THAT is a (pio s) wi sh,not a (logical) proof. Nihil perfert r ad nos praeter r mores satis istos q idem constantes sed adh c sine a ctore,C.,Fam.xii.9.1; nothing is bro ght to s except reports,cons istent eno gh,it is tr e,b t th s far not a thoritative. Ille is most often sed th s; is, iste, hic, more rarely. NOTES.1.Hic and ille are sometimes employed to add a q alification to a s bstantive by means of a con trast : Orator non ille v lgaris sed hic excellens,C.,Or.,14,45;an orator,not of the(yon) common type,b t of the ideal excellence(we seek). 2.Not nfreq ently in poetry,very rarely in prose,in a long sentence a s bstanti ve is repeated by means of ille : V.,A.,1.3, ille et terris iactat s;(X H.,O.,iv.9,51. 3.Sometimes two forms of hic,ille,or is are fo nd in the same cla se referring t o different s bstantives : Evolve diligenter ei s [i.e.,Platonis] e m libr m,q i est de anima, C.,T sc.,1.ii,24.(}}a ) }[0])

4.Ille may refer to an obliq e form of is :

Non est amici talem esse in e m,q alis ille in se est,C.,Lael.,16,59.lN 5.Ille is fo nd chiefly in poetry with the personal prono ns ego,t ,and occasionally with hic, and when so sed takes its f llest force. H nc ill m fatis externa ab sede profect m portendi gener m,V.,A.,vii.25 5. (=0) X lacc < genermy 3.Determinative and Reflexive Prono ns. 308. is,that, is the determinative prono n,and serves as the lacking prono n of the Third Pers on.It f rnishes the reg lar antecedent of the relative : Mini venit obviam t s p er;is mihi litteras abs te reddidit,C.,Att.,ii. i,1;I was met by yo r servant;he delivered to me a letter from yo . Is minimo eget mortalis q i minim m c pit,SYRUS,286(Fr.); that mortal is in want of least,who wanteth least. REMARKS.1. is,as the antecedent of the relative, is often omitted,chiefly in the Nom.,more rarely in an obliq e case(619). Bis dat q i dat celeriter,SYRUS,235(Fr.); he gives twice who gives in a triceYhh. Often it has the force of talis(631,i) in this connection: Ego is s m q i nihil mq am mea poti s q am meor m civi m ca sa fecerim, C.,Fam.,v.21,2; I am a man never to have done anything for my own sake,rather t han for the sake of my fellow-citi ens. 2.is, with a cop lative or adversative particle,is sed as he or that in English,for t he p rpose of emphasis.S ch expressions are : et is, atq e is, isq e,and he too,and that too; neq e is, et is non,and he not,and that not; sed is,b t he, f rther strengthened by q idem,indeed. To refer to the whole action id is employed. Exempla q aerim s et ea non antiq a,C.,Verr.,iii.90,210;we are looking f or examples,and those,too,not of ancient date.

Epic r s na in domo et ea q idem ang sta q am magnos ten it amicor m gr eges,C..Fin.,1.20.65;what shoals of friends Epic r s had in one ho se,and that a pinched- p one ! aa [PRONOUNS.195] Negoti m magn m est navigere atq e id mense Q inctili,C.,Att.v.12,1; it is a big job to take a voyage and that in the month of J ly. 3. is

does not represent a s bstantive before a Gen.,.as in the English "that of".In L atin the s bstantive is omitted,or repeated,or a word of like meaning s bstit te d. Non i dicio discip lor m dicere debet magister sed discip li magistri, Q UINT.,ii.2,13; the master is not to speak according to the j dgment of the p pil s;b t the p pils according to that of the master. N lla est celeritas q ae possit c m animi celeritate contendere, C.,T sc .,1.19,43; there is no speed that can possibly vie with that of the mind. M.Coeli s trib nal s m i xta C.Treboni sellam collocavit,CAES.,B.C.,iii .20,1; Marc s Coeli s placed his chair of office next to that of Gai s Treboni s . Of co rse hic,ille,and iste can be sed with the Gen.in their proper sense. 309.REFLEXIVE.Instead of forms of is,the Reflexive Prono n,s i,sibi,se,together with the Possessive of the Reflexive s os(- s),s a,s om(- m) is sed.(See 521.) 1.Reg larly when reference is made to the grammatical s bject of the sentence : Ipse se q isq e diligit q od sibi q isq e car s est,C.,Lael.,21,80; ever y one loves himself,beca se every one is dear to himself. (Fadi s) a me diligit r propter s mmam s am h manitatem,C.,Fam.,xv.14,1; Fadi s is a favo rite of mine by reason of his exceeding kindiiness. The s bject may be indefinite or(occasionally) impersonal. Content m s is reb s esse maximae s nt divitiae,C.,Par.,vi.3,51; to be c ontent with one's own things(with what one hath) is the greatest riches. Pervent m ad s os erat,L.,xxxni.8,6. " P re religion and ndefiled is this ...to keep himself nspotted from the worl d." JAMBS,i.27. 2.Freq ently when reference is made to the act al s bject(521,R.2) : S os rex reginae placet,PL.,St.,133;every q een favo rs her own king(eve ry Grill loves her own Jack). Osc lat r tigrim s s c stos,SEN.,E.M.,85,41;her own keeper kisses the t igress(the tigress is kissed by her own keeper). C i proposita sit conservatio s i necesse est h ic partes q oq e s i car as esse,C.,Fin.,v.13,37; he who has in view the preservation of himself(self-pre

servation) m st necessarily hold dear the parts of(that) self also.

[196 PRONOUNS.] 3.S i,sibi,se are the reg lar complements of the infinitive and its eq ivalents when a reflexive idea is involved;they are also sed with prepositions erga, inter, propter, per,for especial emphasis.

Ips m F rni m per se vidi libentissime,C.,Fam.,x.3,1.(

4.S os(- s) is also sed in prepositional phrases that are joined closely with t he s bstantives;so after c m,inter,and more rarely after in,intra,and ad. Magonem c m classe s a in Hispaniam mitt nt,L.,xxiii,32,11;they sent Mag o with his fleet to Spain. Helvetios in fines s os reverti i ssit,CAES.,B.G.,I.28,3;he ordered the Helvetians to ret rn to their own co ntry. So the phrases s o tempore,at the right time; s o loco,at the right place. Comoediae q em s m in p eris p tem s o loco dicam,QUINT.,1.8,7; what I consider to be the good of comedy in the case of boys I will mention in the prop er place. NOTES.1.The writer may retain forms of is,if he desires to emphasise his own poi nt of view.So too in prepositional combinations. (Caesar) Ciceronem pro ei s merits la dat,CAES.,B.G.,v.52,4;Caesar prais es Cicero according to his desert.

[Pompei s] c m decret m de me Cap ae fecit,ipse c nctae Italiae ei s fid em imploranti sign m dedit,C.,Mil.,15,39.( a 2.In early comedy and then again in late Latin,s os is sometimes strengthened by sibi: S o sibi gladio h nc i g lo(),TER.,Ad.,958; very rarely in classical Latin (C.,Ph.,ii.37,96).Similarly mea mihi,PL.,Tr c.,698. 3.On s m q isq e,see 318,3.

(Romani) s i colligendi hostib s fac ltatem(non) relinq iii.6,1;the Romans do not leave the enemy a chance to rally.

nt, CAES.,B.G.,

This is especially common with s os,which when th s employed has hatic sense : own,pec liar,proper,

s ally its emp

4.In dependent cla ses the reflexive is sed with reference either to the princi pal or to the s bordinate s bject.See for f ller treatment 521. 310. Idem,the same,serves to nite two or more attrib tes or predicates on a person or thing;it is often to be translated by at the same time;likewise,also;y et,notwithstanding. (Cimon) incidit in eandem invidiam q am pater s s,NEP.,v.3,1; Cimon fel l into the same odi m as his father. Q idq id honest m [est] idem [est] tile,C.,Off.,ii.3,10;whatever is hon o rable is also(at the same time) sef l. Nil prodest q od non laedere possit idem,Ov.,Tr.,ii.266;nothing helps th at may not likewise h rt. (Epic r s),c m optimam et praestantissimam nat ram dei dicat esse,negat idem esse in deo gratiam,C.,N.D.,1.43,121; altho gh Epic r s says that the nat r e of God is transcendently good and great,yet(at the same time) he says that the re is no sense of favo r in God. [PRONOUNS.197] Difficilis facilis,i c nd s acerb s,es idem,MART.,xii.47,1;crabbed(and) kindly,sweet(and) so r,are yo at once. REMARKS.1.When a second attrib te is to be added to a s bstantive it is often co nnected by idemq e, et idem, atq e idem: Vir doctissim s Plato atq e idem gravissim s philosophor m omni m, C.,Le g.,ii.6,14; Plato,a most learned man,and at the same time weightiest of all the philosophers. 2.The same as is expressed by idem with q i, with atq e or ac, with t, with c m,and poetically with the Dative. See 359,N.6,642,643.

311.1.Ipse,self,is the distinctive prono n,and separates a s bject or an object from all others : Ipse feci,I myself did it and none other,I alone did it,I did it of my o wn accord,I am the very man that did it. N nc ips m,at this very instant,at this precise moment. Valvae s bito se ipsae aper er nt,C.,Div.,1.34,74;the foldingdoors s dde nly opened of their own accord.

3.Idem cannot be

sed with is,of which it is only a stronger form (is + dem).

Tibi mec m in eodem est pistrino vivend m,C.,Or.,ii.33,144;yo ive in the same treadmill with me.

have to l

(Cato) mort s est annis octoginta sex ipsis ante [Ciceronem] cons lem, C.,Br.,15,61;Cato died j st eighty-six years before Cicero's cons lship.

H ic rei q od satis esse vis m est milit m reliq it(Caesar);ipse c m leg ionib s in fines Treveror m proficiscit r,CAES.,B.G.,v.2,4.(y REMARKS.1.Owing to this distinctive character,ipse is often sed of persons in o pposition to things; riders in opposition to horses; inhabitants in opposition to the towns which they inhabit; the master of the ho se in opposition to his ho sehold,etc. Eo q o me ipsa misit,PL.,Cas.,700; I am going where mistress sent me. Ipse dixit,C.,N.D.,1.5,10;the master said(a tos epha). 2.Et ipse,likewise,as well, is sed when a new s bject takes an old predicate : [Locri rbs] desciverat et ipsa ad Poenos,L.,xxix.6,1;Locri-city had lik ewise(as well as the other cities) revolted to the Carthaginians.(< descisco) [Camill s] ex Volscis in Aeq os transiit et ipsos bell m molientes, L.,v i.2,14; Camill s went across from the Volscians to the Aeq ians,who were likewis e(as well as the Volscians) getting p war. CICERO prefers in this meaning ipse alone,b t et ipse occ rs occasionally(not in CAESAR or SALLUST),and becomes the prevailing form in LIVY and later. 2.Ipse is sed to lay stress on the reflexive relation;in the Nominative when th e s bject is emphatic,in the Obliq e Cases when the object is emphatic. [198 PRONOUNS.] Se ipse la dat,he(and not another) praises himself. Se ips m la dat,he praises himself(and not another). Piger ipse sibi obstat,PROV.(SEN.,E.M.,94,28);the la y man stands in his own way,is his own obstacle. Non egeo medicina;me ipse consolor,C.,Lael.,3,10;I do not need medicine; I comfort myself(I am my own comforter). Eodem modo sapiens erit affect s erga amic m q o in se ips m, C.,Fin.,1. 20,68;the wise man will feel towards his friend as he feels towards himself. Exceptions are common : Q iq e aliis cavit,non cavet ipse sibi,Ov.,A.A.,1.84;and he who cared fo r others,cares not for himself. NOTE.LIVY seems to se sometimes ipse in connection with a reflexive as if it we re indeclinable or absol te : c m dies venit,ca sa ipse pro se dicta,damnat r,L.,iv.44,10;when the app

ointed day came he pleaded his own ca se and was condemned. 4.Possessive Prono ns. 312.The Possessive Prono ns are more rarely sed in Latin than in English,and ch iefly for the p rpose of contrast or clearness. Man s lava et cena,C.,Or.,ii.60,246;wash(yo r) hands and dine. Praedia mea t possides,ego aliena misericordia vivo,C.,Rosc.Am.,50,145; yo are in possession of my estates,(while) I live on the charity of others. REMARKS.1.Observe the intense se of the Possessive in the sense of property,pec liarity,fitness : s m esse,to belong to one's self,to be one's own man. Tempore t o p gnasti,L.,xxxviii.45,10;yo have fo ght at yo r own time(= when yo wished). Hoc honore me adfecistis anno meo,C.,Leg.Agr.,ii.2.4;yo visited me with this hono r in my own year (= the first year in which I co ld be made cons l). P gna s m finem,c m iacet hostis,habet,Ov.,Tr.,iii.5,34; a fight has re ached its fit end when the foe is down. 2.On the se of the Possessive Prono ns for the Gen.,see 364. 5.Indefinite Prono ns. 313.Q idam means one,a,a certain one, definite or indefinite to the speaker,b t not definitely designated to the heare r.In the Pl ral,it is eq ivalent to some,s ndry,witho t emphasis. [PRONOUNS.199] Interea m lier q aedam commigravit h c,TER.,And.,69 meanwhile a certain woman took p her q arters here. Intellegend m est q ib sdam q aestionib s alios,q ib sdam alios esse apt iores locos,C.,Top.,21,79; it is to be observed that some gro nds are more s ita ble for some q estions,for some,others. Tam nescire q aedam milites q am scire oportet,TAC.,H.,1.83.( REMARKS.1.With an adjective q idam often serves to heighten the attrib te by add ing a vag eness to it.(Gr.TIS). Est q odam incredibili robore animi,C.,Mil.,37,101;really he is endowed with a strange strength of mind(one that is past belief). 2.q idam is often sed with or witho t q asi,as if,to modify an expression : Non s nt isti a diendi q i virt tem d ram et q asi ferream esse q andam vol nt,C.,Lael.,13,48;those friends of yo rs are not to be listened to who will have it(maintain) that virt e is hard,and,as it were,made of iron.

Est q aedam virt t m vitior mq e vicinia,QUINT.,ii.12,4(cf.iii.7,25);the re is a certain neighborly relation between virt es and vices. 3.q idam may be strengthened by the addition of

Vita agenda est certo genere q odam,non q olibet,C.,Fin.,iii.7,24.( Est eloq entia na q aedam de s mmis virt tib s,C.,Or.,iii.14,55. 314.Aliq is(aliq i) means,some one,some one or other, wholly indefinite to the speaker as well as to the hearer :

In the predicate it is often emphatic(by Litotes,700) : s m aliq is,aliq id,I am somebody = a person of importance,something = o f some weight;opposed to : n ll s s m,nihil s m,I am a nobody,nothing. This force is often heightened by a following contrast : Est hoc aliq id,tametsi non est satis,C.,Div.in Caec.,15,47;this is some thing,altho gh it is not eno gh. Fac, t me velis esse aliq em,q oniam,q i f i et q i esse pot i,iam esse non poss m,C.,Att.,iii.15,8; do make o t that I am somebody,since I can no longe r be the man I was and the man I might have been. REMARKS.1.Aliq is and aliq i are disting ished as s bstantive and adjective : ac cordingly,when aliq is is sed with a s bstantive the relation is appositional.T his always occ rs with Proper names; and even with other s bstantives the Romans seem to have preferred aliq is to aliq i.(See 107.N.1.) 2.With n merals,aliq is is sed like English some.Occasionally also it has the f orce of many a. So in CAES.,B.C.,1.2,2, dixerat aliq is leniorem sententiam, where aliq is refers to three persons,named later. [200 PRONOUNS.] 315.Q is(q i),fainter than aliq is,is sed chiefly after si,if; nisi, nless; ne,lest; n m,whether, and in relative sentences.See 107,R. Ne q id nimis ! TER.,And.,61;nothing in excess! Fit pler mq e t ii q i boni q id vol nt adferre,adfingant aliq id,q o f

[Declamabam] c m aliq o cottidie,C.,Br.,90,310;I mebody or other daily.

cert s or

n s:

sed to declaim with so

aciant id q od n ntiant laeti s,C.,Ph.,1.3,8; it often happens that those who wi sh to bring(some) good tidings,invent something more,to make the news more cheer ing. NOTE.1.Aliq is is sed after si,etc.,when there is stress :

Si aliq id dand m est vol ptati,senect s modicis conviviis delectari pot est, C.,Cato.M.,14,44;if something is to be given to pleas re(as something or ot her m st),old age can take delight in mild festivities. Aliq is is reg lar if the sentence contains two negatives : [Verres] nihil mq am fecit sine aliq o q aest ,C.,Verr.,v.5,11.(446.) 2.Q is and q i are disting ished as aliq is and aliq i,b t the distinction is of ten neglected,even in classical Latin.See 107,N.1. 316.Q ispiam is rarer than aliq is,b t not to be disting ished from it,except th at q ispiam never intimates importance. Dixerit q ispiam,C.,Cat.M.,3,8;some one may say. 317.1.

and are sed chiefly in negative sentences,in sentences that imply total negatio n,and in sweeping conditions : body.

[I stitia] n mq am nocet c iq am,C.,Fin.,1.16,50;j stice never h rts any Q is mq am Graecor m rhetor m a Th cydide q idq am d xit ? C.,Or.,9,317 ; what Greek rhetorician ever drew anything from Th cydides ? [None]. Si q isq am,ille sapiens f it,C.,Lael.,2,9; if any one at all(was) wise, he was. Q amdi q isq am erit q i te defendere a deat,vives,C.,Cat.,1.2,6;so lon g as there shall be any one to dare defend yo ,live on. Hostem esse in Syria negant ll m,C.,Fam.,iii.8,10;they say that there i s not any enemy in Syria. Omnino nemo lli s rei f it emptor c i def erit hic venditor, C.,Ph.,ii. 38,97;generally there was never a b yer of anything who lacked a seller in him ( no one ever wanted to b y anything that he was not ready to sell). So after comparatives : Solis candor inl strior est q am lli s ignis,C.,N.D.,ii.15,40;the brill iancy of the s n is more radiant than that of any fire. NOTES.1.Q isq am is occasionally(principally in LIVY) strengthened by n s,espec ially after a negative :

Q isq am and

ll s(adjective) mean any one(at all),

si si si si

q is,if any; aliq is,if some; q id,if anything; q idq am,if anything at all.

C m m lti magis fremerent,q am q isq am n s rec sare a deret,L.,iii.45, 4. 2.After sine,witho t,

Sine omni c ra dormias,PL.,Trin.,621. 3.On the se of q isq am as an adj.,see 107,3,N.2. [PRONOUNS.201] 2.The negative of q isq am is nemo,nobody; nihil,nothing(108). The negative of ll s is n ll s,no,none, which is also sed reg larly as a s bstantive in the Genitive and Ablative inste ad of neminis and nemine.

Nemo vir magn s,C.,N.D.,II.66,167;no great man,no one(who is) a great ma n. NOTES.1.On neq e q isq am and et nemo,see 480. 2.N ll s is sed in familiar lang age instead of non(so sometimes in English) : Philipp s n ll s sq am,L.,xxxii.35,2;no Philip anywhere. Q is is also sed familiarly : Prospect m petit,Anthea si q em videat,V.,A.,1.181;an Anthe s,i.e.,Anthe s or somebody who wo ld answer for him. n s.

318.1. Q isq e means each one, as opposed to

Mens c i sq e,is est q isq e,C.,Rep.,vi.24,26;each man's mind is each ma n's self.

omnis,every,and is

s ally post-positive.

3.Nemo and n ll s are occasionally strengthened by

Nemo is also sometimes tion is s ally appositional.

sed apparently as an adjective,tho gh the concep

omni is often sed instead of

llo( lla) in early Latin :

La dati omnes s nt donatiq e pro merits q isq e,L.,xxxviii.23;all were p raised and rewarded,each one according to his desert. Q am q isq e norit artem in hac se exerceat,[C.],T sc.,1.18,41.(616.) 2.With s perlatives and ordinals q isq e is loosely translated every : Optim m q idq e rarissim m est,C.,Fin.,ii.25,81;every good thing is rare ;more acc rately,the better a thing,the rarer it is.(645,R.2.) Q into q oq e anno Sicilia tota censet r,C.,Verr.,ii.56,139; every fifth year al l Sicily is assessed. 3.Q isq e combines readily with the reflexives,

s i,sibi,se,s s,in their emphatic sense(309,2). Here,except for special reasons,the reflexive precedes.

S a q emq e fra s et s s terror vexat,C.,Rosc.Am.,24,6?;it is his own s in and his own alarm that harasses a man. NOTES.1.After CICERO'S time,owing to the phraseological character of the combina tion,s i etc.q isq e,we find it sed witho t agreement. Exercit s amisso d ce ac passim m ltis sibi q isq e imperi m petentib s brevi dilabit r,S.,I g.,18,3.

2.Classical b t not common is the attraction of q isq e into the case of the ref lexive. Haec proclivitas ad s m q odq e gen s a similit dine corporis aegrotati o dicat r,C.,T sc.,iv.12,28. [202 PRONOUNS.] 3.Q isq e combined with prim s has two meanings :(a) as early as possible,(b) on e after the other in order(deinceps). Primo q oq e tempore,C.,Ph.,iii.15,39;at the earliest time possible. Prim m q idq e(each thing in order) considera q ale sit,C.,N.D.,1.27,77. 4.The vario s ses of q isq e are well s mmed p NAEGELSBACH's form lae : a.Non omnia omnib s trib enda s nt,sed s m c iq e; b.Omnes idem faci nt,sed optim s q isq e optime; c.Non omnib s annis hoc fit,sed tertio q oq e anno; d.Non omnes idem faci nt,sed q od q isq e v lt. 319.Alter and ali s are both translated other,another, b t

Instigando s os q isq e pop los effecere , L.,ii.38,6.

t omne Volsc m nomen deficeret

m c iq e has become a standing phrase.

alter refers to one of two, ali s to diversity. They are sed in vario s phraseological ways,which can be best shown by examples : Sol s a t c m altero,alone or with(only) one other; alter Nero,a second Nero. Alter alter m q aerit,one(definite person) seeks the other(definite pers on); ali s ali m q aerit,one seeks one,another another; alteri alteri,one party another party(already defined); alii alii,some others. Alter often means neighbor,brother,fellow-man; ali s,third person. Alter: (Agesila s) f it cla d s altero pede,NEP.,xvii.8,1 : Agesila s was lame of one foot. Altera man fert lapidem,panem ostentat altera,PL.,A l.,195; in one hand a stone he carries,in the other holds o t bread. Mors nec ad vivos pertinet nec ad mort os : alteri n lli(317,2,N.2) s nt ,alteros non attinget, C.,T sc.,1.38,91;death concerns neither the living nor th e dead : the latter are not,the former it will not reach. Ali s: Fallacia alia aliam tr dit,TER.,And.,779;one lie treads on the heels of another(indefinite series). Alii vol ptatis ca sa omnia sapientes facere dixer nt;alii c m vol ptate dignitatem coni ngendam p taver nt,C.,Cael.,15,41;some have said that wise men do everything for the sake of pleas re,others have tho ght that pleas re is to b e combined with dignify. Divitias alii praepon nt,alii honores,C.,Lael.,6,20; some prefer riches, others honors. Alii vestr m anseres s nt,alii canes,C.,Rosc.Am.,20,57;some of yo are g eese,others dogs. Ali d alii nat ra iter ostendit,S.,C.,2.9;nat re shows one path to one m an,another path to another man. Alter and ali s : Ab alio expectes alteri q od feceris,SYRUS,2(Fr.);yo may look for from another what yo 've done nto yo r brother(from No.3,what No.1 has done to No.2) . [APPOSITION.203] NOTES.1.Ali s is fo nd occasionally,especially in late Latin,for alter : ali s N ero,SUET.,Tit.7;b t in CAES.,B.G.,1.1,1,ali s follows n s.Alii for reliq i or c

eteri is occasional,in the earlier times,b t more common in LIVY and later. 2.The Greek sage of ali s in the meaning besides,is poet-Ciceronian and rare. Eo missa pla stra i mentaq e alia,L.,iv.41,8.

320.By apposition one s bstantive is placed by the side of another,which contain s it : Cicero Orator,Cicero the orator. Rhen s fl men,the river Rhine.

321.The word in apposition agrees with the principal word (or words) in case,and as far as it can in gender and n mber :

Cnid s et Colophon,nobilissimae rbes,captae s nt,Cf.C.,Imp.,12,33; Cnid s and Colophon,most noble cities,were taken.

Omni m doctrinar m inventrices Athenae,Cf.C.,Or.,1.4,13; Athens,the inve ntor of all branches of learning. REMARKS.1.Exceptions in n mber are d e to special ses,as,for example,when cleli ciae or amores,etc.,are sed of a Sing lar : Pompei s,nostri amores,ipse se afflixit,C.,Att.,ii.19,2;Pompey,o r speci al passion,has wrecked himself, 2.The Possessive Prono n takes the Gen.in apposition : T m,hominis simplicis,pect s vidim s,C.,Ph.,ii.43,111 : we have seen yo r bosom bared,yo open-hearted creat re ! ni s opera f it salva,Cf.C.,Pis.,3,6;the city was saved by my

3.On the agreement of the predicate with the word in apposition,see 211,R.6. NOTES.1.In poetry,instead of the Voc.in apposition,the Nom.is often fo nd. Semper celebrabere donis,Corniger Hesperid m,fl vi s regnator aq ar m, V .,A.,viii.77. In prose not before PLINY.

D m patres et plebem,invalida et inermia,l dificet r,TAC.,Ann.,1.46. 322.Partitive Apposition.Partitive Apposition is that form of Apposition in whic h a part is taken o t of the whole.It is sometimes called Restrictive Apposition .

2.Very rarely persons are looked ne ter :

pon as things,and the Appositives sed in the

Urbs mea exertions alone.

Nom. Gen. Dat.

Herodot s pater historiae,Herodot s the father of history; Herodoti patris historiae; Herodoto patri historiae.

APPOSITION.

CONCORD.

Max ma pars fere morem h nc homines habent,PL.,Capt.,232;mankind--pretty m ch the greatest part of them--have this way. Cetera m ltit do sorte dec m s q isq e ad s pplici m lecti(s nt), L.,ii. 59,11;(of) the rest of the crowd every tenth man was chosen by lot for p nishmen t. [204 APPOSITION.] 323.Distrib tive Apposition.Distrib tive Apposition is that form of Apposition i n which the whole is s bdivided into its parts,chiefly with alter alter,the one the other; q isq e, terq e,each one; alii alii,pars pars,some others.(It is ofte n called Partitive Apposition.) D ae filiae altera occisa altera capta est,CAES.,B.G.,1.53,4;(of) two da ghters,the one was killed,the other capt red.

REMARK.The Part.Gen.is more commonly employed than either of these forms of appo sition. NOTES.1.Partitive Apposition is not fo nd in CICERO or CAESAR,and Distrib tive A pposition rarely.They are more freq ent in SALLUST,and not ncommon in LIVY. 2.The Greek fig re of the whole and the part(schema katolon kai meros) is rare a nd poetical in Latin. Latag m saxo occ pat os faciemq e adversam,V.,A.,x.698; smites Latag s w ith a bowlder(a),f ll(in) mo th and face(Cf.Eng." hand and foot "). 324.Apposition to a Sentence. Sometimes an Acc sative stands in apposition to a whole preceding sentence : eit her explaining the contents of the sentence or giving the end or the aim of the action involved in the sentence.The latter sage,however,is not fo nd,in CICERO or CAESAR. Admoneor t aliq id etiam de sep lt ra dicend m existimem,rem non diffic ilem,C.,T sc.,1.43,102;I am reminded to take into consideration that something i s to be said abo t b rial also--an easy matter. Deser nt trib nal, t q is praetorianor m milit m occ rreret man s intent antes,ca sam discordiae et initi m armor m,TAC.,Ann.,I.27. If the main verb is passive the Appositive may be in the Nominative : TAC.,Ann., iii.27. NOTES.1.Ne ter adjectives and participles are occasionally sed in the same way, and some regard s ch ne ters as Nominatives. 2.This Acc.is to be regarded as the object effected(330) by the general action o f the sentence. Predicative Attrib tion and Predicative Apposition. 325.Any case may be attended by the same case in Predicative Attrib tion or Appo sition,which differ from the ordinary Attrib tion or Apposition in translation o nly. NOMINATIVE : Fili s aegrot s rediit.

Ordinary Attrib tion : The sick son ret rned. Predicative Attrib tion : The son ret rned sick = he was sick when he ret rned. Herc les i venis leonem interfecit. Ordinary Apposition : The yo ng man Herc les slew a lion. [APPOSITION.205] Predicative Apposition : Herc les,when a yo ng man,slew a lion = he was a yo ng man when he slew a lion. GENITIVE : Potestas ei s adhibendae xoris,the permission to take her to wife. DATIVE ive. ACCUSATIVE : Herc les cervam vivam cepit. Ordinary Attrib tion : Herc les ca ght a living doe. Predicative Attrib tion : Herc les ca ght a doe alive. ABLATIVE : :

REMARKS.1.The Voc.,not being a case proper,is not sed predicatively.Exceptions are apparent or poetical. Q o,morit re,r is ? V.,A.,x.810;"whither dost tho r sh to die " (tho d oomed to die) ? Sic venias,hodierne,TIB.,1.7,53.(Ca) Notice here the old phrase : Macte virt te esto,H,S.,1.2,31;increase in virt e = heaven speed thee in thy high career. Macte is regarded by some as an old Voc.,from the same stem ae magn s;by others as an adverb.A third view is that macte with esto is an adverb,and only when sed abso l tely a Vocative. 2.Victores redier nt may mean,the conq erors ret rned,or,they ret rned conq eror s;and a similar predicative se is to be noticed in idem,the same: Iidem abe nt q i venerant,C.,Fin.,iv.3,7;they go away j st as they had c ome(literally,the same persons as they had come).

Aere t nt r importato,they se is imported.

se imported copper = the copper which they

Amico vivo non s bvenisti,yo

did not help yo r friend (while he was) al

3.Predicative Attrib tion and Apposition are often to be t rned into an abstract s bstantive : Defendi rem p blicam ad lescons,non deseram senex,C.,Ph.,ii.46,118; I de fended the state in my yo th,I will not desert her in my old age. So with prepositions : Ante Ciceronem cons lem,before the cons lship of Cicero; ante rbem conditam,before the b ilding of the city. 4.Do not confo nd the "as" of apposition with the "as" of comparison t, q asi, tamq am, sic t, vel t(602,N.1,642) :

Hanc(virt tem) vobis tamq am hereditatem maiores vestri reliq er nt, C., Ph.,iv.5,13; yo r ancestors left yo this virt e as(if it were) a legacy. 5.When especial stress is laid on the adjective or s bstantive predicate,in comb ination with the verbal predicate,the English lang age is prone to resolve the s entence into its elements : Fragilem tr ci commisit pelago ratem prim s,H.,O.,I.3,10; his frail bark to the wild waves he tr sted first = to tr st his frail bark to the wild waves he was first. Una sal s victis n llam sperare sal tem,V.,A.,ii 353; sole safety for th e vanq ished 'tis,to hope for none - the only safety that the vanq ished have is to hope for none. [206 PREDICATE.] 6.The English idiom often ses the adverb and adverbial expressions instead of t he Latin adjective : so in adjectives of inclination and disinclination,knowledg e and ignorance,of order and position,of time and season,and of temporary condit ion generally : libens,with pleas re; volens,willing(ly); nolens, nwillingly); invit s,against one's will; pr dens,aware; impr dens, nawares; sciens,knowing(ly); prim s,prior,first; ltimas,last; medi s,in,abo t the middle; hodiern s,to-day; mat tin s,in the morning; freq ens,freq ently); s blimis,aloft; tot s,wholly; sol s, n s,alone,and many others.

Ego e m a me invitissim s dimisi,C.,Fam.,xiii.63,1;I dismissed him most nwillingly.

Pl s hodie boni feci impr dens q am sciens ante h nc diem mq am, TER.,H ec.,880;I have done more good to-day nawares than I have ever done knowingly be fore.

Q i prior strinxerit ferr m ei s victoria erit,L.,xxiv.38,5(244,R.2). Vespertin s pete tect m,H.,Ep.,1.6.20;seek thy dwelling at eventide(). Rar s venit in cenac la miles,J v.,x.18;the soldiery rarely comes into t he garret. Se totos tradider nt vol ptatib s,C.,Lael.,23,86;they have given themsel ves wholly to pleas re. Soli hoc contingit sapienti,C.,Par.,v.i,34;this good l ck happens to the wise man alone = it is only the wise man who has this good l ck. 7.Caref lly to be disting ished are the ses of prim s,and the adverbs prim m,first,for the first time, and primo,at first. Prim m means first in a series; prima,first in a contrast. B t these distinctions are not always observed. Prim m docent esse deos,deinde q ales sint,t m m nd m ab iis administrar i, postrema cons lere eos reb s h manis, C.,N.D.,ii.i,3;first,they teach s that there are gods,next of what nat re they are,then that the world is r led by the m,finally,that they take tho ght for h man affairs. Primo Stoicor m more agam s,deinde nostro instit to vagabim r, C.,T sc., iii.6,13;let s treat the s bject at first after the manner of the Stoics,afterw ards we will ramble after o r own fashion. B. 1.M ltiplication of the Predicate. 326.The M ltiplication of the Predicate req ires no f rther r les than those tha t have been given in the general doctrine of Concord. 2.Q alification of the Predicate. 327.The Q alification of the Predicate may be regarded as an External or an Inte rnal change : [EXTERAL CHANGE ACCUSATIVE.207] I.External change : combination with an object. 1.Direct Object,Acc sative.2.Indirect Object,Dative. II.Internal change : combination with an attrib te which may be in the form of

Adc rrit,mediam m lierem complectit r,TER.,And.,133;he r ns arms abo t the woman's waist.

p,p ts his

1.The Genitive case. 2.The Ablative.

3.Preposition with a case. 4.An Adverb.

NOTE.The infinitive forms(Infinitive,Ger nd,Ger ndive,and S pine) appear now as objects,now as attrib tes,and req ire a separate treatment. I.External Change.Acc sative. The great f nction of the Acc sative is to form temporary compo nds with the ver b,as the great f nction of the Genitive is to form temporary compo nds with the no n.Beyond this statement everything is more or less extra-grammatical,and shar p s bdivisions are often nsatisfactory.Still it may be said that 328.The Acc sative is the case of the Direct Object. The Direct Object is the object which defines directly the action of the verb. REMARK.The Dative defines indirectly beca se it involves an Acc sative;and the G enitive with the verb depends pon the nominal idea contained in the verb. 1.(a) The Object may be contained in the verb(Inner Object,Object Effected) : De s m nd m creavit,God made a creation the niverse. (b) Akin to this is the Acc sative of Extent : A recta conscientia travers m ng em non oportet discedere, C.,Att.,xiii .20,4;one o ght not to swerve a nailbreadth from a right conscience. Decem annos(Troia) opp gneta est,L.,v.4,11;ten years was Troy besieged. Maximam partem lacte viv nt,CAES.,B.G.,iv.i,8;for the most part they liv e on milk. 2.The object may be distinct from the verb(O ter Object,Object Affected) :

[208 ACCUSATIVE.] General View of the Acc sative. 329.I.Inner Object : Object Effected : Cognate Acc sative. Acc sative of Extent. 1.In Space. 2.In Time. 3.In Degree. Terminal Acc sative(Point Reached). II.O ter Object : Object Affected : 1.Whole. 2.Part(so-called Greek Acc sative). III.Inner and O ter Objects combined : 1.Asking and Teaching. 2.Making and Taking. IV.Acc sative as the most general form of the object(object created or called p by the mind) : 1.In Exclamations.

De s m nd m g bernat,God steers the

niverse.

2.Acc sative and Infinitive. DIRECT OBJECT(Inner and O ter). NOTE.The Acc sative is the object reached by the verb.This object is either in a pposition to the res lt of the action of the verb,and then it is called the inne r Object or Object Effected;or it is in attrib tion to the res lt of the action, and then it is said to be the O ter Object or Object Affected.The inner Object i s sometimes called the Vol ntary Acc sative,beca se it is already contained in t he verb;the O ter Object is sometimes called the Necessary Acc sative,beca se it is needed to define the character of the action;both verb and s bstantive contr ib te to the res lt; compare hominem caedere(occidere),to slay a man(Object Affected), with homicidi m facere(Cf.QUINT.,v.9,9),to commit mansla ghter(Object Effecte d). 330.Active Transitive Verbs take the Acc sative case : Rom l s Urbem Romam condidit,Cf.C.,Div.,I.17,80;Rom l s fo nded the City of Rome.(Object Effected.) [Mens] regit corp s,C.,Rep.,vi.24,26;mind governs body.(Object Affected. ) REMARK.Many verbs of Emotion which are intrans.in English are trans,in Latin,as : dolere,to grieve(for); desperare,to despair(of); horrere,to sh dder(at); mirari,to wonder(at); ridere,to la gh(at).

Necata est Vitia q od filii necem flevisset(541),TAC.,Ann.,vi.10,1;Vitia was exec ted for having wept(for) her son's exec tion. Conscia mens recti Famae mendacia risit,Ov.,F.,iv.311; conscio s of righ t,her so l(b t) la ghed(at) the falsehoods of R mo r. [ACCUSATIVE.209] NOTES.1.From the definition of transitive given above(213,R.) it will be seen th at this traditional r le reverses the poles;it is retained merely for practical p rposes. 2.This Acc.with verbs of Emotion is very rare in early Latin,and is not widely e xtended even in the classical period.With most verbs an Abl.of Ca se or a prepos itional phrase is m ch more common,as : C r de s a virt te desperarent ? CAES.,B.G.,1.40,4. 3.The Acc.with verbal s bstantives is confined to PLAUTUS : q id tibi nos tactiost,mendice homo ? A l.,423.(=tactio est,

Honores desperant,C.,Oat.,ii.9,19;they despair of hono rs(give them n despair).

p i

4.The Acc.with verbal adjectives in - nd s is rare and mainly post-classical : Haec prope contionab nd s circ mibat homines,L.,iii.47,2. 331.Verbs compo nded with,the prepositions ad,ante,circ m,con,in,inter,ob,per,praeter,s b,s bter,s per,and trans,wh ich become transitive,take the Acc sative. All with circ m,per,praeter,trans,and s bter. Many with ad,in,and s per. Some with ante,con,inter,ob,and s b.See 347. Pythagoras Persar m magos adiit,C.,Fin.,v.29,87;Pythagoras applied to(co ns lted) the Persian magi. Stella Veneris antegredit r solem,C.,N.D.,ii.20,53;the star Ven s goes i n advance of the s n. Omnes Domiti m circ msist nt,CAES.,B.C.,1.20,5;all s rro nd Domiti s. Eam,si op s esse videbit r,ipse conveniam,C.,Fam.,v.ii,2; I will go to s ee her,myself,if it shall seem expedient.

Fret m,q od Na pact m et Patras interfl it,L.,xxvii.29,9; the frith that flows between Na pact s and Patrae. Alexander tertio et tricesimo anno mortem obiit,C.,Ph.,v.17,48;Alexander died in his thirty-third year. Caesar omnem agr m Picen m perc rrit,CAES.,B.C.,1.15,1;Caesar traversed rapidly all the Picenian district. [Pop l s] solet dignos praeterire,C.,Planc.,3,8;the people is wont to pa ss by() the worthy.

Crimin m vim s bterf gere n llo modo poterat,C.,Verr.,I.3,8;he co ld in no way evade the force of the charges. Romani r inas m ri s pervadebant,L.,xxxii.24,5;the Romans marched over t he r ins of the wall. Crass s E phratem n lla belli ca sa transiit,Cf.C.,Fin.,iii.22,75; Crass s crossed the E phrates witho t any ca se for war.

REMARKS.1.If the simple verb is trans.,it can take two Acc satives : Eq it m magnam partem fl men traiecit,CAES.,B.C.,1.55,1;he threw a great part of the cavalry across the river. 2.With many of these verbs the preposition may be repeated;b t never circ m :

Epaminondas poenam s biit,Cf.NEP.,xv.8,2;Epaminondas s bmitted to the p nishment.

Convivia c m patre non inibat,C.,Rosc.Am.,18,52;he wo ld not go to banq ets with his father.

Copias traiecit Rhodaa m,or s the Rhone.

3.Sometimes a difference of signification is ca sed by the addition of the prepo sition : [210 ACCUSATIVE.] Adire ad aliq em,to go to a man; adire aliq em,to apply to(to cons lt) a man.

332.Any verb can take an Acc sative of the inner Object,when that object serves to define more narrowly or to explain more f lly the contents of the verb. The most common form of this object is a ne ter prono n or adjective. The most striking form is the so-called Cognate Acc sative. 333.1.Ne ter Prono ns and Adjectives are often sed to define or modify the s bs tantive notion that lies in the verb. Xenophon eadem fere peccat,C.,N.D.,I.12,31;Xenophon makes very m ch the same mistakes. Vellem eq idem idem possem gloriari q od Cyr s,C.,Cat.M.,10,32;for my part I co ld wish that it were in my power to make the same boast as Cyr s. With trans,verbs an Acc.of the person can be employed besides: Discip los id n m moneo t praeceptores s os non min s q am ipsa st dia ame nt,QUINT.,ii.9,1;I give p pils this one piece of advice,that they love their tea chers no less than their st dies themselves. REMARKS.1.The sage is best felt by comparing the familiar English it after intr ans.verbs," to walk it,to foot it," etc.,where " it " represents the s bstantive that lies in "walk,foot," etc. 2.In many cases the feeling of the case is lost to the conscio sness,so especial ly with the interrogative q id,which has almost the force of c r. Q id rides ? what(la ghter) are yo la ghing = what means yo r la ghter ? Id nos ad te,si q id velles,venim s,PL.,M.G.,1158;that's why we have com e to yo ,to see if yo wanted anything. NOTES.1.With verbs of Emotion this Acc.gives the gro nd of the emotion : Utr mq e laetor(I have a do ble gladness,I am do bly glad),et sine dolore te f isse et animo val isse,C.,Fam.,vii.i,1. Laetae exclamant : venit ! id q od (in this that,for this that) me repente a spexerant, TER.,Hec.,368.

trans Rhodan m,he threw his troops acros

INNER OBJECT.

From this arises the ca sal force of q od,in that beca se.

Q ae homines arant(what men do in the way of plowing,etc.), navigant,aedific ant,omnia virt ti parent,S.,C.,2,7. Id ips m q od maneam in vita(in the very fact of my remaining in life) pecca re me [existima],C.,Fam.,iv.13,2. 2.Cognate Acc sative.When the dependent word is of the same origin or of kindred meaning with the verb,it is called the Cognate Acc sative,and s ally has an at trib te. [ACCUSATIVE.211] Faciam t mei memineris d m vitam vivas,PL.,Pers.,494;I'll make yo think of me the longest day yo live. Mir m atq e inscit m somniavi somni m,PL.,R d.,597;a marvello s and ncanny d ream I've dreamed. I ravi verissim m i s i rand m,C.,Fam.,v.2,7; I swore the tr est of oaths. REMARK.After the analogy of the Cognate Acc.are many phraseological sages,s ch as rem certare,to fight a case; foed s ferire,to make a treaty(compare,to strike a bargain); i s respondere,to render an opinion; ca sam vincere,to win a case,etc. Also the phrases with ire : exseq ias ire,to attend a f neral; infitias ire,to deny,etc. (malam rem ire,malam cr cem ire Ter.Phor.) NOTES.1.The omission of the attrib te is fo nd most often in legal phraseology,p roverbs,and the like : Maior m nemo servit tem servivit,C.,Top.,6,29;of o r ancestors no one ever s laved(what yo wo ld call) a slavery. Si servos f rt m faxit noxiamve noxit,xii.Tab.(

)N

2.When the Cognate Acc.is replaced by a word of similar meaning,b t of a differe nt root,the effect is m ch the same as when an adjective is employed with the no rmal Acc sative.This sage,however,is rare,and mainly poetical. Tertiam iam aetatem hominnm(Nestor) vivebat,C.,Cat.M.,10,31(reading do btf l ).0 Omne militabit r bell m,H.,Epod.,i,23.} aNM

3.Interesting extensions are fo nd in the poets,and rarely in prose. Q i C rios sim lant et Bacchanalia viv nt,J v.,ii.3.y

ayN

2.Occasionally,b t at all periods,the relative is tion with a demonstrative cla se :

sed th s,to facilitate connec

N nc Satyr m,n nc agrestem Cyclopa movet r,H.,Ep.,ii.2,125.} } 4.Instead of the inner Acc.the Abl.is occasionally fo nd : lapidib s pl ere,to rain stones; sang ine s dare,to sweat blood. Herc lis sim lacr m m lto s dore manavit,C.,Div.,1.34,74; the stat e of Herc les ran freely with sweat.

5.Verbs of Smell and Taste have the inner Object,which is an extension of the Co gnate variety. Piscis sapit ips m mare,Cf.SEN.,N.Q.,iii.18,2;the fish tastes of the very se a. Non omnes poss nt olere ng enta exotica,PL.,Most.,42;it is not every one ca n smell of foreign perf mes. 6.A poetical and post-classical constr ction is that which makes a s bstantival ne ter adjective the object of a verb.This occ rs chiefly with verbs of so nd : nec mortale sonans,V.,A.,vi.50; magna sonat r m,H.,S.,1.4,44. Yet bolder is nec vox hominem sonat,V.,A.,1.328. A verb of sight is fo nd in tam cernis ac t m,H.,A,1.3 ,26.Cf.d lce ridentem,H.,O.,1.22,23. Acc sative of Extent. The Acc sative of Extent has to do with Degree,Space,or Time. 334.The Acc sative of Extent in Degree is confined to ne ter adjectives and pron o ns sed s bstantively, m lt m,pl s,tant m,q ant m,etc. Si me amas tant m q ant m profecto amas,C.,Att.,ii.20,5;if yo love me a s m ch as in fact yo do love me. [212 ACCUSATIVE.] REMARKS.1.The n mber of adjectives and prono ns so sed is large,and in many cas es the form is felt more as an adverb than as a s bstantive. 2.Here belong the adverbial Acc satives t am,etc.,partem,vicem,which occ r occas ionally at all periods. 335.The Acc sative of Extent in Space is sed properly only with words that invo lve a notion of space.When space is not involved in the governing word the idea of extent is given by the se of per,thro gh. Trabes,distantes inter se binos pedes,in solo collocant r, CAES.,B.G.,vi

i.23,1;beams two feet apart are planted in the gro nd. A recta conscientia travers m ng em non oportet discedere, C.Att.,xiii. 20,4(328,b). Eq ites per oram maritimam dispositi s nt,Cf.CAES.,B.C.,iii.24,4;cavalry were posted along the sea shore. Phoebidas iter per Thebas [fecit],NEP.,xvi.i,2;Phoebidas marched thro gh Thebes. Milites aggerem lat m pedes trecentos triginta alt m pedes octoginta exs tr xer nt,CAES.,B.G.,vii.24,1; the soldiers raised an embankment three h ndred a nd thirty feet wide(and) eighty feet high. REMARKS.1.The adjectives in most common se with this Acc sative are long s,long ,lat s,wide,alt s,deep,high.Thickness,which was indicated in early times by cras s s,is expressed by phrases with crassit de.Similarly occ r phrases with magnit de,longit de,latit de,altit de.Prof nd s,deep,never occ rs with the Acc sative.

NOTE.When the point of reference is taken for granted,ab(a) with the Abl.is occa sionally sed;b t only by CAESAR and LIVY.Here it has been s ggested that ab is sed adverbially,and the Abl.is one of Meas re. (Hostes) ab milib s pass m min s d ob s castra pos er nt, CAES.,B.G.,ii .7,3;the enemy pitched their camp less than two miles off. 336.The Acc sative of Extent in Time accompanies the verb,either with or witho t per,in answer to the q estion,How long? D odeq adraginta annos tyrann s Syrac sanor m f it Dionysi s, C.,T sc.,v .20,57;thirty-eight years was Dionysi s tyrant of Syrac se. (Gorgias) cent m et novem vixit annos,QUINT.,iii.i,9(233,N.2). L di per decem dies facti s nt,C.,Cat.,iii.8,20;games were performed for ten days. Est mec m per diem tot m,PLIN.,Ep.,1.16,7;he is with me the livelong day .

Sedet aetern mq e sedebit infelix These s,V.,A.,vi.617;there sits and sh all forever sit nhappy These s. [ACCUSATIVE.213] REMARKS.1.In giving definite n mbers with iam,iam di ,iam d d m,etc.,the Latin o ften employs the ordinal where the English prefers the cardinal.Compare the Abla tive of Meas re(403). Mithridates ann m iam terti m et vicesim m regnat,C.,Imp.,3,7(230). 2.Per with the Acc.is freq ently sed like the Abl.of Time Within Which. Per illa tempora = illis temporib s,in those times. So especially with the negative :

2.With abesse and distare,an Abl.of Meas re may also be sed : Milib s pass att or et viginti abesse,CAES.,B.G.,1.41,5;to be twenty-fo r miles from

m q

N lla res per trienni m nisi ad n t m isti s i dicata est,C.,Verr.,1.5,1 3;no matter was decided d ring(in) the three years except at his beck(). 3.With an Aoristie tense the dating point is given by abhinc, which s ally precedes the temporal designation.

Abhinc annos fact mst sedecim,PL.,Cas.,39;'twas done sixteen years ago. Demosthenes abhinc annos prope trecentos f it,C.,Div.,ii.57,118; Demosth enes lived nearly three h ndred years ago. The se of an Acc.with an Aoristie tense witho t a dating word,like abhinc,is ve ry rare and do btf l.CAES.,B.G.,ii.35,4,has been emended. 4.Nat s,old(born),seems to be an exception to R.3,b t it is only an apparent one ,as the dating point is involved in the verb with which it is constr ed.For vari o s constr ctions with nat s,see 296,R.5. P er decem annos nat s est,the boy is ten years old. Q adraginta annos nat s regnare [coepit],C.,Div.,1.23,46;(he was) forty years old(when) he began to reign.

sempitern m, VERGIL introd ces aetern m(see example above), while perpet m does not appear ntil APULEIUS.

id temporis, id aetatis, which belonged to the pop lar speech,and never became firmly rooted in literat r e.Th s CICERO rarely ses them,except in his earliest works and his letters. Id gen s is sed after the same general analogy,b t is not temporal.This occ rs in CICERO b t once,Att,xiii.12,3.CAESAR never ses any of these forms.

N nc tertia vivit r aetas,Ov.,M.,xii.188 = n nc tertiam vivit r aetatem. Tota mihi dormit r hiems,MART.,xiii.59,1 = totam dormio hiemem.

3.Poetical and rare is the extension which makes the Acc sative of Extent the s bject of a passive verb.

2.Here belong the phraseological

ses

NOTES.1.The se of the indefinite s bstantival adjective is rare.PLAUTUS

ses

Normally the verb becomes impersonal or is reg larly sed with a proper s bject, and the Acc sative of Extent is nchanged :

Acc sative of the Local Object.

Terminal Acc sative. 337.The activity of a verb may be defined by the Point Reached.Hence the r le : Names of Towns and small islands,when sed as limits of Motion Whither,are p t i n the Acc sative. [214 ACCUSATIVE.] So also r s,into the co ntry, dom m,domos,home. Missi legati Athenas s nt,L.,iii.31,8;envoys were sent to Athens. Latona conf git Del m,Cf.C.,Verr.,1.18,48;Latona took ref ge in Delos. Ego r s ibo atq e ibi manebo,TER.,E n.,216; I shall go to the co ntry an d stay there. Inn merabiles(philosophi) n mq am dom m reverter nt, C.,T sc.,v.37,107;i nn merable philosophers never ret rned home. REMARKS.1.Co ntries and large islands being looked pon as areas,and not as poin ts,req ire prepositions,s ch as : in,into; ad,to; vers s,-ward; in Graeciam proficisci,to set o t for Greece. 2.When rbem,city,or oppid m,town,precedes the name of the city or town,the idea of area is emphasised,and the preposition in or ad is prefixed;if rbem or oppi d m follows,in or ad may be omitted : In(ad) oppid m Cirtam,to,in(at) the town(of) Cirta. When rbem or oppid m is q alified by an adjective,it reg larly follows the name of the town,and has the preposition :

3.Dom m,with a possessive prono n,or Gen.,may mean ho se as well as home,and acc ordingly may or may not have in before it : dom m meam,or, in dom m meam,to my ho se; dom m Pompeii,or,in dom m Pompeii,to Pompey's ho se;also dom m ad Pompei m.Otherwise :

I g rtha Thalam pervenit in oppid m magn m et op lent m, S.,I g.,75,1;J g rtha arrived at Thala,a great and wealthy town.

[Bell m] q o d odecim m ann m Italia

rebat r,L.,xxvii.39,9.

in magnificam dom m venire,to come into a grand ho se. 4.Ad means to the neighbo rhood of,often before,of military operations. Ad M tinam,to the neighbo rhood(siege of) M tina (Modena). 5.The simple Acc.will s ffice even for extent : Omnia illa m nicipia,q ae s nt a Vibone Br ndisi m,C.,Planc.,41,97; all the free towns from Vibo to Br ndisi m. 6.Motion to a place embraces all the local designations : Phalara in sin m Maliac m processerat,L.,xxxv.43,8;he had advanced to Ph alara on the Maliac G lf. Tarent m in Italiam inferiorem proficisci,to set o t for Tarent m in Low er Italy. NOTES.1.The omission of the preposition before co ntries and large islands is po etical and post-classical.CAESAR shows s ch omission with Aegypt s only,CICERO n ot at all. 2.Poets and later prose writers extend the Acc.also to names of peoples and stre ams.Beginnings of this are seen in CICERO : c m Bosphor m conf gisset,M r.,16,34 . 3.The insertion of the preposition with names of towns and small islands is rare in good prose,b t is always? legitimate when the preposition is to be emphasise d. 4.The se of sq e with this Acc.to emphasise the contin ity of the motion is fo nd first in TERENCE,occasionally in CICERO.From LIVY on it spreads and is sed also with other local designations. 5.Verbal s bstantives are also occasionally followed by this Acc sative : KeditU S Romam,C.,Ph.,ii.42,108;ret rn to Rome. [ACCUSATIVE.215] OUTER OBJECT Acc sative of Respect. 338.The Acc sative of the object affected sometimes specifies that in respect to which the statement of a passive or intransitive verb,or an adjective,applies.T here are two varieties : 1.Definite: The Acc sative of the part affected. Perc ssa nova mentem formidine,V.,G.,iv.357;her mind stricken with a new dread. Iam v lgat m actis q oq e sa ci s pect s,QUINT.,ix.3,17;by this time " b reast-wo nded" is act ally become a common newspaper phrase. 2.Indefinite : cetera,alia,reliq a,oinnia,pleraq e,c ncta;in other respects,in a ll respects,in most respects. Cetera adsentior Crasse,C.,Or.,1.9,35;in all other points I agree with C rass s.

Omnia Merc rio similis,V.,A.,iv.558;in all respects like nto Merc ry. NOTES.1.This is commonly called the Greek Acc sative,beca se it is so m ch more common in Greek,and beca se its extension in Latin is d e to Greek infl ence.The first variety is very rare in early Latin;introd ced into prose by SALLUST,it i a extended in LIVY,b t in both is applied s ally to wo nds.It is m ch more comm on in the poets.Of the second variety cetera is fo nd here and there at all peri ods;the others are very rare.Good prose ses the Ablative for the first variety, and for the second,ad cetera,in ceteris,per cetera,etc. 2.Different is the Acc sative with ind or,I don;ex or,I doff; cingor,I gird on m yself,and other verbs of clothing and nclothing,as well as passives,where the S bject is also the Agent;in which verbs the reflexive or middle signification is retained.These ses are poetical or post-classical. In tile ferr m cingit r,V.,A.,ii.510;he girds on(himself) a seless blad e. Loricam ind it r fidoq e accingit r ense,V.,A.,vii.640;he dons a corsele t and begirds himself with his tr sty glaivelm. (Armini s) impet eq i pervasit oblit s faciem s o cr ore ne nosceret r, TAC.,Ann.11.17,7; Hermann p shed his way thro gh,thanks to the onset of his cha rger,having smeared his face with his own gore,to keep from being recognised. DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE(Inner and O ter). When two Acc satives depend on the same verb,one is the Inner and the other the O ter object.Theoretically any combination of Inner and O ter objects is allowab le; practically the lang age has restricted its sage to varieties a and b. 339.(a) Active verbs signifying to inq ire,to Req ire,to Teach,and celare,to conceal, take two Acc satives,one of the Person,and the other of the Thing. P sionem q ondam Socrates interrogat q aedam geometrica, C.,T sc.,1.24,5 7;Socrates asks an rchin() s ndryl ym q estions in geometry. Caesar Aed os fr ment m flagitabat,CAES.,B.G.,1.16,1;Caesar kept demandi ng the corn of the Aed i. Q id n nc te,asine,litteras doceam ? (265),C.,Pis.,30,73;why sho ld I no w give yo a lesson in literat re,yo donkey ? [216 ACCUSATIVE.]

REMARKS.1.The expressions vary a good deal.Observe : This then is not the only way, Posco,I claim,and flagito, For it is also right to say, And always peto,post lo, Docere and celare de, Take aliq id ab aliq o, Interrogate de q a re. While q aero takes ex,ab,de,q o. Adherbal Romam legates miserat,q i senat m docerent de caede fratris, S.

Non te celavi sermonem Ampii,C.,Fam.,ii.16,3,I did not keep yo ark abo t my talk with Ampi s.

in the d

,I g.,13,3;Adherbal had sent envoys to Rome to inform the senate of the m rder o f his brother. Bass s noster me de hoc libro celavit,C.,Fam.,vii.20,3;o r friend Bass s has kept me in the dark abo t this book.

2.With doceo the Abl.of the instr ment is also sed : docere fidib s,eq o,to teach the lyre,to teach riding; with gr dire,the Abl.,in with the Abl.or(rarely) de.

Doct s and er dit s generally take the Abl.: Doct s Graecis litteris,a good Grecian. 3.With celari the Acc.of the Thing becomes the s bject,and the Acc.of the Person is retained;or the Acc.of the Person is made the s bject,and instead of the Acc .of the Thing,de with the Abl.is sed. NOTES.1.There is a great deal of difference ia the relative freq ency of these v erbs.So doceo and its compo nds, rogo,posco,reposco,celo,are common; interrogo,oro,exposed,post lo,flagito,cons lo,are rare, exigo(in passive),percontor,are ante-classical and post-classical. So,too,the classical Latin in general avoids two Acc satives, nless one is a ne ter prono n. 2.The constr ction with ab,with verbs of Req iring,is m ch more common than the do ble Acc.,and in some cases is necessary;so,too,the constr ction with de after verbs of inq iring. 3.Other verbs of teaching than doceo and its compo nds,and er dire,always have de ntil late Latin,as instr ere,etc.So docere,when it means to inform. 4.The Passive form,with the Nom.of the Person and the Acc.of the Thing,is sparin gly sed. Discere is the prose word for doceri,except that the past participle doc t s is classical b t rare. Mot s doceri ga det Ionicos mat ra virgo,H.,O.,iii.6,21;the rare ripe ma id delights to learn ionic dances. Vir omnes belli artes edoct s,L.,xxv.40,5; one who had learned(been ta g ht) thoro ghly all the arts of war. 340.(b) Verbs of Naming,Making,Taking,Choosing,Showing,may have two Acc satives of the same Person or Thing : [Iram] bene Enni s initi m dixit insaniae,C.,T sc.,iv.23,52;well did Enn i s call anger the beginning of madness. Anc m Marci m regem pop l s creavit,L.,1.32,1;the people made Anc s Marc i s king.

Cato Valeri m Flacc m hab it collegam,Cf.NEP.,xxiv.i,2; Cato had Valeri

Aq am a p mice n nc post las,PL.,Pers.,41;yo p mice-stone(blood of a t rnip).

are now asking water of a

s Flacc s(as) colleag e. a god.

Atheniensib s Pythia praecepit t Miltiadem sibi imperatorem s merent, N EP.,1.i,3;the Pythia instr cted the Athenians to take Miltiades(as) their comman der. [ACCUSATIVE.217] Praesta te e m q i mihi es cognit s,C.,Fam.,1.6,2;show yo rself the man that I know yo to be.

REMAKKS.1.The Do ble Acc.is t rned into the Do ble Nom.with the Passive(206). Reddo,I render,is not sed in the Passive,b t,instead thereof, fio,I become. Habeo,with two Acc satives,commonly means to have;in the sense of hold,r egard,other t rns ane sed; s ally pro. Utr m pro ancilla me habes an pro filia ? PL.,Pers.,341;do yo look pon me as a maid-servant or as a da ghter ? Similarly habere servor m loco, (in) n mero deor m,to regard as slaves,as gods. 2.With verbs of Taking and Choosing the end is indicated by the Dat.or ad with A cc sative. (Rom l s) trecentos armatos ad c stotliam corporis hab it,L.,I.15,8; Rom l s had three h ndred armed men as a body-g ard.

341.(c) Do ble Acc satives,where one is the cognate,are very ncommon : Te bonas preces precor,CATO,R.R.,1.3,4. Tam te basia(=kiss) m lta basiare vesano(= nsane) satis et s per Cat llo st,CAT.,vii.9. NOTES.1.C rio s extensions occasionally occ r : Idem i s i rand m adigit Afrani m,CAES.,B.C.,1.76. 2.In early Latin freq ently,and in later times occasionally,the Inner object is given by a ne ter prono n,in the simplest form. Q id me vis ? what do yo want of me? what do yo want me for ? So with prohibere; also with

Q em intellegim s divitem ? C.,Par.,vi.i,42;whom do we rich man ?

nderstand by the

D m simillim m deo i dico,C.,Marc.,3,8;I j dge him(to be) very like

nto

i bere(once in CICERO and CAESAR), admonere,etc. Neq e me I ppiter neq e di omnes id prohibeb nt,PL.,Am.,1051. Litterae q ae te aliq id i berent,C.,Fam.,xiii26,3. 342.(d) In early Latin we find cases of two Acc satives with a single verb,where the verb forms a single phrase with one of the Acc satives,and the second Acc s ative is the object of the phrase : anim m advertere,to perceive; l dos facere,t o make game of; man m inicere,to lay hands on,etc.In classical Latin these phras es have been s ally,where possible,formed into a single word : animadvertere,l dificari. Anim m advertit Gracch s in contione Pisonem stantem, C.,T sc.,iii.20,48 ;Gracch s perceived Piso standing in the assembly. NOTE.On the Do ble Acc sative with compo nd verbs,see 331,R.1. ACCUSATIVE AS A GENERAL OBJECTIVE CASE. 343.The Acc sative as the Objective Case generally ift sed as an object of Tho ght,Perception,Emotion;an object created by the mind,evoked or deprecated by the will.Hence the se of the Acc sative : [218 DATIVE.] (a) In Exclamations.(6) With the infinitive. 1 .The Acc sative is sed in Exclamations as the general object of Tho ght,Perce ption,or Emotion : Me miser m,C.,Fam.,xiv.i,1;poor me ! Me caec m q i haec ante non viderim,C.,Att.,x.10,1;blind me ! not to hav e seen all this before. So in Exclamatory Q estions : Q o mihi fort nam,si non concedit r ti ? H.,Ep.,1.5,12;what(is the obje ct of) fort ne to me if I'm not allowed to enjoy it ? Interjections are sed : He me miser m ! Alas ! poor me ! O miseras homin m mentes,O pectora caeca,LUCR.,ii.14;oh,the wretched min ds of men,oh,the blind hearts ! So,in apposition to a sentence,see 324. NOTES.1.with the Voc.is an address;with the Nora,a characteristic;with the Acc.a n object of emotion. 2.Em,Lo! and Ecce,Lo here! have the Acc.in the earlier lang age : Em tibi hominem! PL.,Asin.,880;here's yo r man!

Ecce me ! PL.,Ep.,680; here am I.! So ecc m, ell m, eccam, eccillam, in comic poetry. Ecce takes only the Nom.in classical Latin.Disting ish between em and en,

Pro takes the Vocative : Pro di immortales ! Ye immortal gods ! The Acc sative occ rs in: Pro de m atq e homin m fidem! C.,T sc.v.i6,48; for heaven's sake! and similar phrases. Ei(hei) ! and Vae ! take the Dative. Ei mihi ! Ah me! Vae victis ! Woe to the conq ered ! 2.The Acc sative and the Infinitive are combined so as to present the notion of S bject and Predicate as an object of tho ght or perception(527).Hence the Acc s ative with the Infinitive is sed : (a) In Exclamations.(See 534.) (b) As an Object.(See 527.) (c) As a S bject.(See 535.} DATIVE. 344.The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object,and always involves a Direct O bject,which may be contained in the verb or expressed by the complex of verb and object.: [DATIVE.219] Nemo errat ni sibi,SEN.,E.M.,94,54;no one errs(makes mistakes) to(for) himself alone.(Mya) Non omnib s dormio,C.,Fam.,vii.24,1;it is not for everybody that I am as leep.( ya)

the latter of which,in the sense lo! does not appear es the Nominative.

ntil CICERO'S time,and tak

Tibi exercit m patria pro se dedit,C.,Ph.,xiii.6,14;yo r co ntry gave yo an army for its own defence.(Nh }[

M lier sibi felicior q am viris,C.,Ph.,v.4,11.(a NOTE.In English the form of the Indirect Object is the same as that of the Direc t : " He showed me(Dat.) a p re river;" "he showed me(Acc.) to the priest." Orig inally a case of Personal Interest,it is sed freely of Personified Things,spari ngly of Local Relations,and this despite the fact that Locative and Dative are b lended in the First and Third Declensions.If a Locative,the Dative is a sentient Locative. Dative with Transitive Verbs. 345.The Indirect Object is p t in the Dative with Transitive verbs,which already have a Direct Object in the Acc sative.Translation,to,for,from.This Acc sative becomes the Nominative of the Passive.The Dative depends on the complex. Active Form : To : Facile omnes,q om valem s,recta consilia aegrotis dam s, TER.,And.,309;r eadily all of s,when well,give good co nsel to the sick. FOR : Frangam tonsori cr ra man sq e sim l,MART.,xi.58,10;I'd break the barber 's legs for him and hands at once. FROM : Somn m mihi [ademit],C.,Att.,ii.16,1;it took my sleep away from me. Passive Form : Merces mihi gloria det r,Ov.,F.,iii.389; let glory be given TO me as a r eward. Immeritis frang nt r cr ra caballis,J v.,x,60;the innocent hacks get the ir legs broken FOR them. Arma [adim ntnr] militib s,L.,xxii.44,6;the soldiers have their arms tak en FROM them. Dom s p lchra dominis aedificat r non m rib s,Cf.C.,N.D.,iii.10,26;a han dsome ho se is b ilt for its owners,not for the mice. REMARKS.1.These constr ctions are fo nd with more or less freq ency at,all perio ds.B t the Dat.with verbs of Taking Away,Prohibiting,and the like,is mostly conf ined to poetry and later prose.The translation from is merely approximate,instea d of for.When the idea of Personal Interest is not involved,the Abl.is necessary . Is frater,q i erip it fratrem carcere,non pot it eripere fato, SEN.,Dial ,,xi.14,4.(y A good example of a play on constr ction is PL.,A l.,635 : ST. Nihil eq idem tibi abst li. E . At ill d q od tibi abst leras cedo.(241,N.1) a.The translation For is nearer the Dat.than To. It is the reg lar [220 DATIVE.]

form when the Acc.is that of the object effected;when it is that of the object a ffected the translation is more often to;b t for(in defence of) is pro : pro patria mori,to die for one's co ntry. To(with a view to) is ad or in,and when the idea of motion is involved,the prepo sition m st be sed,even with dare,which gives its name to the Dative : Litteras alic i dare,to give one a letter(to carry or to have). Litteras ad aliq em dare,to indite() a letter to one.

Libros iam pridem a te misissem si esse edendos p tassem,C.,Fam.,1.9,23; I sho ld have sent the books to yo long since if I had tho ght they o ght to be p blished. Dative with Intransitive Verbs. 346.The Indirect Object is p t in the Dative with many Intransitive Verbs of Adv antage or Disadvantage,Yielding and Resisting,Pleas re and Displeas re,Bidding a nd Forbidding. F it mirific s in Crasso p dor,q i tamen non obesset ei s orationi,C.,Or. ,1.26,122;Crass s had a marvello s modesty,not,however,s ch as to be a bar to th e effectiveness of his oratory. Ipsa sibi imbecillitas ind lget,C.,T sc.,iv.18,42;weakness gives free co rse to itself. Prob s invidet nemini,C.,Tim.,3,9;yo r pright man cherishes envy to no one. Catilina litteras mittit se fort nae cedere,S.,C.,34,2; Catiline writes that he gives way to fort ne. Dies st ltis q oq e mederi solet,C.,Fam.,vii.,28,3;time is wont to prove a medicine even to fools. Moderari et animo et orationi,est non mediocris ingenii,C.,Q.F.,I.ii.13, 38; to p t bo nds both to temper and to lang age is the work of no mean ability. Sic agam, t ipsi a ctori h i s disciplinae placet,C.,Fin.,1.9,29;I will act as it seems good to the head of this school(of tho ght) himself. [M nd s] deo paret et h ic oboedi nt maria terraeq e,C.,Leg.,iii.i,3;the niverse is obedient to God,and seas and lands hearken nto him.

Virt ti s or m satis credit,Cf.S.,I g.,106,3; he p ts f ll confidence in the valo r of his men. Illi poena,nobis libertas [appropinq at],C.,Ph.,iv.4,10; to him p nishme nt,to s freedom,is drawing nigh. REMARKS.1.Of co rse the passives of these verbs are sed impersonally(208) : Q i invident egent,illis q ib s invidet r,i rem habent,PL.,Tr c.,745; th ose who envy are the needy,those who are envied have the st ff.

Rogas t mea tibi scripta mittam,C.,Fam.,1.9,23;yo y writings(yo wish to have them).

ask me to send yo m

2.The verbs fo nd with this Dat.in classical Latin are : prodesse,obesse,nocere,cond cit,expedit;assentiri,blandiri,c pere,favere ,gratificari,grat lari,ignoscere,ind lgere,morigerari,st dere,s ffragari; adversari.insidiari.invidere.irasci,maledicere,minari,minitari,obtrectar e, [DATIVE.221] officere,refregari,s scensere; cedere,concedere; resistere; a xiliari,cons lere,mederi,opit lari,parcere,prospicere; moderari,temperare(sibi); placere,displicere; a sc ltare,imperare,oboedire,obseq i,obtemperare,parere,pers adere,servi re,s adere; credere,fidere,confidere,diffidere,desperare; accidit,contingit,evenit; libet,licet; appropinq are,rep gnare. Also n bere,to marry(of a woman); s pplicare,to implore. NOTES.1.Some other verbs are sed occasionally in the same way,as incommodare, which CICERO ses once.Also, dolere,with Dat.of s ffering: person,is fo nd sometimes in CICERO,tho gh it belongs rather to the Comic Poets. 2.Some of these words have also other constr ctions.These occ r s ally in antec lassical and post-classical Latin;if in classical Latin a different meaning is s ally fo nd in the new constr ction.Th s ind lgere aliq id,to grant a thing, invidere alic i aliq id, obtrectare,with Acc., s adere, pers adere,with Acc.of the Person, are post-classical and late; moderari,with Acc., is fo nd in LUCRETIUS and in Silver Latin;

temperare,meaning mix, takes Acc.at all periods. Fidere, confidere, diffidere

are fo nd also with Ablative. Sometimes the personal interest is emphasised when the Dat.is employed,as over a gainst the Acc sative.So reg larly with verbs of Fearing,as : met ere aliq em,to dread some one, b t

met ere alic i,to fear for some one; cavere alic i take preca tions for some one, b t cavere aliq em(also de,ab aliq o),to take preca tions against some one; cavere aliq a re(early),to beware of a thing. Cons lere aliq em,to cons lt a person; cons lere alic i,to cons lt for a person.

On convenire,see 347,R.2. Noteworthy are the constr ctions of invidere and vacare : Invidere alic i(in) aliq a re(Cic. ses prep ) }to begr dge a man a thin g . alic i aliq id(VERG.,HOR.,LIVY,etc.) } alic i s rei(once in HORACE,S.,ii.6,84),to begr dge a thing. (alic i s) alic i rei(common),to envy something belonging to a man . Vacare rei,to be at leis re for,to attend to } re,a re,to be at leis re from } a matter Sometimes there is hardly any difference in meaning : Comitor aliq em,I accompany a man; comitor alic i,I act as companion to a man; praestolor alic i(better) or aliq em,I wait for. 3.Some words with similar meanings take the Acc sative;the most notable are : aeq are,to be eq al; docere(to disting ish),to be becoming; deficere,to be wanting'; delectare,to please; i vare,to be a help; i bere,to order; laedere,to inj re; and vetare,to forbid. Eam pict ram imitati s nt m lti,aeq avit nemo,PLIN.,N.H.,xxxv.ii,126;tha t style of painting many have imitated,none eq alled. Forma viros neglecta decet,Ov.,A,A.,1.509;a careless bea ty is becoming to men. Me dies deficiat,Cf.C.,Verr.,ii.21,52;the day wo ld fail me. Fortis fort na adi vat,TER.,Ph.,203; fort ne favo rs the brave. TACITUS is the first to se

i bere with Dative;Ann.,iv.72,etc. 4.The Dat. se is often obsc red by the absence of etymological translation.So n bere alic i,to marry a man(to veil for him); mederi alic i,to heal(to take one's meas res for) a man ;, s pplicare,to beg(to bow the knee to); pers adere,to pers ade(to make it sweet). 5.After the analogy of verbs the phrases a dientem esse,to hear,i.e.,to obey, s pplicem esse,to entreat, a ctorem esse,to advise, fidem habere,to have faith in, are also fo nd with the Dative : Si potest tibi dicto a diens esse q isq am,C.,Verr.,1.44,114.

[222 DATIVE.] meaning as those given.So se miscere,to mingle with;coire,conc rrere,to meet; ve rbs of contending,as contendere,bellare,p gnare,certare;verbs of disagreement,as differre,discrepare,distare,dissentire.Here belongs haerere with the Dat.,as V. ,A.,iv.73,which may,however,be a Locative constr ction. Dative and Verbs Compo nded with Prepositions. 347.Many verbs compo nded with the prepositions ad,ante,con,in,inter,ob,(post),prae,s b,and s per, take the Dative,especially in moral relations. Transitive Verbs have an Acc sative case besides. Plebes c ncta comitiis adf it,C.,Planc.,8,21;the entire commonalty() was p resent at the election. Omnis sens s homin m m lto antecellit sensib s bestiar m, C.,N.D.,ii.57, 145;every sense of man is far s perior to the senses of beasts. (Enni s) eq i fortis et victoris senect ti comparat s am, C.,Cat.M.,5,14 ;Enni s compares his(old age) to the old age of a gallant and winning steed. Imminent d o reges toti Asiae,C.,Imp.,5,12;two kings are menaces to all Asia.

Piger ipse sibi obstat,PROV.(311,2). Omnib s Dr idib s praeest n s,CAES.,B.G.,vi.13,8;at the head of all the Dr ids is one man.

Interes consiliis,C.,Att.,xiv.22,2;yo o their plans.(< inters m)

are in their co ncils,are privy t

6.The poets are very free in their

se of the Dat.with verbs of the same general

Neq e deesse neq e s peresse rei p blicae volo,C.(POLLIO),Fam.x..33,5; n o life that is not tr e to the state,no life that o tlives the state's that is m y motto. REMARKS.1.The Dat.is fo nd,as a r le,only when these verbs are sed in a transfe rred sense.In a local sense the preposition sho ld be employed,altho gh even cla ssical Latin is not wholly consistent in this matter.In poetry and later prose t he Dat.is extended even to the local signification.In early Latin the repetition of the preposition is the r le. So inc mbere in gladi m,C.,Inv.,ii.51,154,to fall pon one's sword. 2.The principal intrans.verbs with the Dat.in classical Latin are: Accedere(to join,or,to be added;otherwise s ally preposition ad); acc mbere(once in Cic.); adesse(also with ad,in,and,in PLAUT.,ap d); adhaerescere(ad of local ses); arridere(once in Cic.); ann ere(occasionally with Acc.); assentiri; assidere; antecedere(also with Acc.) : anteire(also with Acc.); antecellere(with Acc.from LIVY on); congr ere(also with c m); consentire(also with c m); constare; convenire(to s it;with c m,to agree with,especially in the phrase convenit mihi c m aliq O,I agree with); ill dere(also with Acc.and occasionally in and Acc.); impendere(with Acc.is archaic;occasionally in); incedere (SALL.,LIVY,etc.); incidere(twice in Cic.; reg larly in); inc bare(b t inc mbere reg larly with in or ad); inesse(once in Cic.); inhaerere(occasionally ad or in with Abl.); [DATIVE.223] inhiare(PLAUT.has Acc.only); innasci (innat s); inservire; insin are(once in Cic.; s ally in); insistere (locally,in with Abl.; occasionally Acc.); instare; invadere(once in Cic.; occasionally Acc.; reg larly in); intercedere; interc rrere; interesse(also with in and Abl.);

s'eggs

Anat m ova gallinis saepe s pponim s,C.,N.D.,ii.48,124;we often p t d ck nder hens(for them to hatch).(< anas)

intervenire; obesse; obrepere( s ally in,ad); obsistere; obstare; obstrepere; obtingere; obvenire; obversari; occ rrere; occ rsare; praestare; praesidere; s besse; s bvenire; s ccedere; s cc mbere; s ccrescere(once in Cic.); s cc rrere; s peresse. 3.The same variety of constr ction is fo nd with transitive verbs,in composition . 4.After the analogy of praestare, excellere,to excel, is also fo nd with the Dative. 5.Some trans,verbs,compo nded with de and ex(rarely with ab),take the Dat.,b t i t properly comes nder 345.

Caesar Deiotaro tetrarchian erip it,eidemq e detraxit Armeniam, Cf.C.,Di v.,ii.37,79;Caesar wrested from Dejotar s his tetrarchy(),and stripped from him . Dative with Verbs of Giving and P tting. 348.A few verbs,chiefly of Giving and P tting,take a Dative with an Acc sative,o r an Acc sative with an Ablative,according to the conception. Praedam militib s donat,CAES.,B.G.,vii.ii,9; he presents the booty to th e soldiers. B t R bri m corona donasti,C.,Verr.iii.80,185; tho didst present R bri s wi th a crown. Nat ra corp s animo circ mdedit,SEN.,E.M.,92,13;Nat re has p t a body ar o nd the mind. B t De s anim m circ mdedit corpore,Cf.C.,Tim.,6,20;God has s rro nded the m ind with a body. REMARKS.1.These are:

aspergere,to besprinkle and to sprinkle on; circ mdare,circ mf ndere,to s rro nd; donare,to present; impertire,to endow and to give; ind ere,to clothe and to p t on; ex ere,to strip of and to strip off; intercl dere,to sh t off; miscere,to mix and to mix in. 2.In general,classical Latin here prefers the Dat.of the person,b t no fixed r l e is followed. Dative of Possessor. 349.Esse,to be,with the Dative,denotes an inner connection between its s bject a nd the Dative,and is commonly translated by the verb to have : [Controversia] mihi f it c m av nc lo t o,C.,Fin.,iii.2,6; I had a debat e with yo r ncle. An nescis longas regib s esse man s ? Ov.,Her.,xvi.166;or perhaps yo do not know that kings have long arms ? [224 DATIVE.] Compare non habet, t p tam s,fort na longas man s,SEN.,E.M.,82,5. REMARKS.1.The predicate of esse,with the Dat.,is translated in the ordinary mann er : Caesar amic s est mihi,Caesar is a friend to me (amic s me s,MY friend,f riend of MINE). 2.The Dat.is never simply eq ivalent to the Genitive.The Dat.is the Person inter ested in the Possession,hence the Possession is emphatic;the Gen.characterises t he Possession by the Possessor,hence the Possessor is emphatic.The Gen.is the pe rmanent Possessor,or owner; the Dat.is the temporary Possessor.The one may incl de the other: Latini conced nt Romam cap t Latio esse,Cf.L.,viii.4,5; the Latins conce de that Lati m has its capital in ROME.(Latii: that LATIUM'S capital is Rome.) 3.Possession of q alities is expressed by esse with in and the Abl.,by inesse with Dat.or with in,or by some other t rn : F it mirific s in Crasso p dor,C.,Or.,1.26,122(346). Cimon habebat satis eloq entiae,NEP.,v.2,1;Cimon had eloq ence eno gh.SA LLUST introd ces the Dat.also for these relations. 4.Abesse and deesse,to be it-anting,to fail,take also the Dat.of Possessor. 5.The Dat.of the person is reg lar with the phrases nomen(cognomen) est,indit m est,etc.Here the name is in the Nom.in apposition to nomen,in the best sage.Rar ely in CICERO,once in SALLUST,never in CAESAR,more often in early and post-Cicer onian Latin,the name is fo nd in the Dat.; either by attraction with the Dat.of

the person or on the analogy of the Do ble Dative.The Appositional Genitive (361 ) is first cited from VELLEIUS.The ndeclined Nom.after an active verb appears f irst in OVID;then in SUETONIUS. Fons aq ae d lcis,c i nomen Areth sa est,C.,Verr.,iv.53,118;a fo ntain o f sweet water named Areth sa. Apollodor s,c i Pyragro cognomen est,C.,Verr.,iii.31,74;Apollodor s,s rn amed Pyragr s(firetongs). Nomen Arct ro est mihi,PL.,R d.,5;my name is Arct r s. Tibi nomen insano pos ere,H.,S.,ii.3,47;they called yo " cracked." [Samnites] Malevent m,c i n nc rbi Benevent m nomen est,perf ger nt, L. ,ix.27,14;the Samnites fled to Malevent m(Ilcome),a city which now bears the nam e Benevent m(Welcome). Aetas,c i fecim s 'a rea' nomen,Ov.,M.,xv.96;the age to which we have gi ven the name 'Golden.'

Dative of Personal Interest. In its widest sense this category incl des the Dative with Transitive and Intran sitive Verbs,already treated,and the Ethical Dative,Dative of Reference,and Dati ve of Agent,to follow.In its narrower sense it applies only to persons or their eq ivalents who are essential to,b t not necessarily participant in or affected by,the res lt,and differs from'the Dative with Transitive and Intransitive Verbs ,in that the connection with the verb is m ch more remote. [DATIVE.225] 350.1.The person from whose point of view the action is observed,or towards whom it is directed,may be p t in the Dative.A convenient b t not exact translation is often the English Possessive(Dativ s Energic s). Ei libenter me ad pedes abieci,Cf.C.,Att.,viii.9,1;I gladly cast myself at his feet. In conspect m venerat hostib s,HIRT.,viii.27;he had come into the sight of the enemy. T o viro oc li dolent,Cf.TER.,Ph.,1053; yo r h sband's EYES ache; nearer ,yo r h sband has a pain in his eyes(t i viri oc li,yo r HUSBAND'S eyes). NOTE.This Dative is not common in CICERO and is not cited for early Latin.B t it becomes common from LIVY on.With Relative and Demonstrative prono ns it is ofte n sed by Ciceronian and A g stan poets.In the case of many of the examples we h ave parallel constr ctions with the Gen.of Possessor,which is the normal sage. 2.The Dative is sed of the person in whose hono r,or interest,or advantage,or f or whose pleas re,an action takes place,or the reverse (Dativ s Commodi et Incom modi) : Cons rrexisse omnes [Lysandro] dic nt r,C.,Cat.M.,18,63; all are said to have risen p together in hono r of Lysander. [Deo] nostra altaria f mant,V.,EC.,1.43; o r altars smoke in hono r of t he god.

Si q id peccat mihi peccat,TER.,Ad.,115;if he commits a fa lt,it is at m y cost. Ethical Dative. 351.The Ethical Dative indicates special interest in the action.It may be called the Dative of Feeling,and its se is confined to the personal prono ns(Dativ s Ethic s.)

Ecce tibi Sebos s! C.,Att.,ii.15;here's yo r Sebos s ! " She's a civil modest wife,and one,I tell yo ,that will not miss <yo > morning nor evening prayer." SHAKESPEARE. y NOTES.1.This is essentially a colloq ialism,common in comedy,especially with ecce and em,(here is) freq ent in CICERO'S letters,occasionally fo nd elsewhere.In poetry,notably A g stan,it is almost wholly absent;b t there are several cases in HORACE.CICERO doe s not se em. LIVY does not se ecce. 2.Especially to be noted is sibi velle,to want,to mean : Q id tibi vis,insane,C.,Or.,ii.67,269;what do yo want,madman? Q id volt sibi haec oratio ? TER.,Hea t.,615;what does all this holding forthlm mean ?

Dative of Reference. 352.This indicates the person in whose eyes the statement of the predicate holds good(Dativ s l dicantis). Ut mihi deformis,sic tibi magnific s,TAC.,H.,xii.37;to me a monster,to y o rself a prodigy of splendo r. Q intia formosa est m ltis,CAT.,86,1;Q intia is a bea ty in the eyes of many. [226 DATIVE.] NOTE.This Dative is characteristic of the A g stan poets,b t it is also common e no gh in CICERO and the prose a thors. 353.Noteworthy is the se of this Dative in combination with participles,which s hows two varieties,one giving the local point of view,the other the mental,both post-Ciceronian and rare.CAESAR gives the first local sage,LIVY the first menta l. [Hoc] est oppid m prim m Thessaliae venientib s ab Epiro, CAES.,B.C.,iii

yo

T mihi Antonii exemplo isti s a daciam defendis? C.,Verr.,iii.91,213;do defend me(to my face) by Antony's example that fellow's a dacity ?

.80;this is the first town of Thessaly to those coming(as yo come) from Epir s. Vere aestimanti,L.,XXXVTI.58,8;to one whose j dgment was tr e. NOTES.1.This constr ction is probably drawn from the Greek,altho gh VITRUvros sh ows several examples. 2.Certainly Greek is the Dat.of the person with volenti,C pienti,invito(est) etc .,which is fo nd first in SALLUST,once in Livy,and sporadically in TACITUS,and l ater. Dative of the Agent. 354.The Dative is sed with Passive Verbs,in prose chiefly with the Perfect Pass ive,to show the interest which the agent takes in the res lt.That the person int erested is the agent is only an inference.(See 215.) Mihi res tota provisa est,C.,Verr.,iv.42,91;I have had the whole matter provided for. C i non s nt a ditae Demosthenis vigiliae? C.,T sc.,iv.19,44;to whom are not Demosthenes'long watchings a familiar hearsay ? 0 NOTES.1.Instances of this Dat.with the Tenses of Contin ance are poetical,or adm it of a different explanation : Barbar s hic ego s m q i non intellegor lli,Ov..Tr.,v.io,37;I am a barb arian here beca se I can't make myself intelligible to any one.

Sic dissimillimis bestiolis comm niter cib s q aerit r,C.,N.D.,ii.48,123 ; so,tho gh these little creat res are so very nlike,their food is so ght in co mmon. Carmina q ae scrib nt r aq ae potorib s,H.,Ep.,1.IQ,3;poems which are wr itten when people are water-drinkers. Cena ministrat r p eris trib s,H.,S.,1.6,116; Dinner is served,(the wait ers being) the waiters are(b t) three. 2.This Dat.is rare in early Latin,rare,if ever,in CAESAR,not ncommon in CICERO. B t it is m ch liked by the poets and by some prose writers,notably by TACITUS. 355.The agent of the Ger nd and Ger ndive is p t in the Dative,at all periods. Diligentia praecip e colenda est nobis,C.,Or.,ii.35,148;caref lness is t o be c ltivated by s first and foremost. Desperanda tibi salva concordia socr ,J v.,vi.231;yo m st despair of ha rmony while Motherin-law's alive. [DATIVE.227] REMARK.To avoid ambig ity,especially when the verb itself takes the Cat.,the Abl .with ab(a) is employed for the sake of clearness : Civib s a vobis cons lend m,C.,Imp.,2,6;the interest of the citi ens m s t be cons lted by yo .

Whenever an adj.or an eq ivalent is

sed,the Dat.Pl.may be an Ablative :

S pplicatio ab eo decernenda non f it,C.,Ph.,xiv.4,11. Where there is no ambig ity there is no need of ab : Ling ae moderand m est mihi,PL.,C rc.,486;I m st p t bo nds to my tong e . NOTE.Poets are free in their se of this Dative;so with verbals in bilis;as,

m ltis ille bonis flebilis occidit,H.,O.,1.24,9;}y n lli exorabilis,SIL.ITAL.,v.131. ya

Dative of the Object For Which. 356.Certain verbs take the Dative of the Object For Which(to what end),and often at the same time a Dative of the Personal Object For Whom,or To Whom. Nemini me s advent s labori a t s mpt i f it,C.,Verr.,1.6,16;to no one w as my arrival a b rden or an expense. Virt s sola neq e dat r dono neq e accipit r,S.,I g.,85,38;virt e alone is neither given nor taken as a present. Habere q aest i rem p blicam t rpe est,C.,Off.,ii.,22,77;it is base to h ave the state for one's excheq er(). REMARKS.1.Noteworthy is the legal phrase c i bono? to whom is it for an advantage ? = who is advantaged ? 2.In the classical times the principal verbs in this constr ction are esse,dare,d cere,habere,vertere, and a few others which occ r less freq ently.Later Latin extends the sage to ma ny other verbs,and especially to Ger ndive constr ctions.Dare is sed principall y in the phrase dono dare. 3.The Do ble Dative is fo nd principally with esse,b t occasionally with other v erbs.Here there seems to have been a tendency,mainly post-Ciceronian,to se the predicative Nom.instead of the Dative.Interesting sometimes is the shift in sag e;th s, CICERO says est t rpit do,baseness NEPOS, f it t rpit dini. NOTES.1.In the same category,b t with the idea of finality more clearly indicate d,are the agric lt ral sages, alimento serere,sow for food, condit i legere;(Col.2,22,4). the medical, remedio adhibere;apply as a remedy

the military terms, praesidio,a xilio,mittere,esse,etc.send for a help 2.With LIVY we notice the great extension of this Dat.with verbs of seeking,choo sing,etc.,where classical Latin wo ld prefer some other constr ction.So loc m insidiis(insidiar m is classical) circ mspectare Poen s coepit,L., xxi.53,11.( ) TACITUS goes f rthest in s ch sages.CAESAR,however,shows a few instances(B.G.,1 .30,8). 3.The Final Dative with intrans.verbs is military and rare.So recept i canere,to so nd a retreat, is fo nd first in CAES.,B.G.,vii.47.SALLUST shows a few examples.The Dat.,with s imilar s bstantives,is an extension,and is very rare.CICERO,Ph.,xiii.7,15,says

recept i sign m. [228 DATIVE.] 4.The origin of this sage may have been mercantile(Key).In English we treat Pro fit and Loss as persons : Q em fors dier m c mq e dabit l cro appone,H.,O.,1.9,14;"Every day that Fate shall give,set down to Profit." (N ) On the Dative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive in a similar sense,see 429. Dative with Derivative S bstantives. 357.A few derivative s bstantives take the Dative of their primitives : I stitia est obtemperatio legib s,C.,Leg.,1.15,42;j stice is obedience t o the laws. NOTE.We find a few examples in PLAUTCTS,several in CICEEO,and only sporadically elsewhere.Us ally the verbal force is very prominent in the s bstantives;as,insi dias cons li mat rare,S,C.,32,2. Local Dative. 358.The Dative is sed in poetry to denote the place whither. Karthagini iam non ego n ntios mittam s perbos,H.,O.,iv.4,69; to Carthag e no more shall I send ha ghty tidings.

NOTES.1.This constr ction begins with Accrtrs,and is not ncommon in the A g sta n poets.No examples are cited from PLACTUS or TERENCE,hence the inference is fai r that it was not a colloq ialism.As a poetical constr ction it seems to have sp r ng from personification.

2.Occasionally the s bstantive is also th s constr ed;as in the facilis descens a Averno of VERGIL(A.,vi.126).

Iam satis terris nivis atq e dirae grandinis misit pater, H.,O.,1.2,1;f ll,f ll eno gh of snow and dire hail the Sire() hath sent the Land.

The extreme is reached when the Dative follows ire and the like : It caelo clamorq e vir m clangorq e t bar m,V.,A.,xi.192;mo nts to High Heaven warriors'sho t and tr mpets' blare. 3.Tendere man s has a few times,even in CICERO and CAESAR,the Dat.of the person, which is sometimes referred to this head.B t the s al constr ction is ad. Matres familiae Romanis de m ro man s tendebant,CAES.,B.G.,vii.48. Dative with Adjectives. 359.Adjectives of Likeness,Fitness,Friendiiness,Nearness,and the like,with their opposites,take the Dative : Canis similis l po est,C.,N.D.,1.35,97;the dog is like nto the wolf. Castris idone s loc s,CAES.,B.G.,vi.10,2;a place s itable for a camp. Utile est rei p blicae nobiles homines esse dignos maiorib s s is,C.,Ses t.,9,21;it is to the advantage of the state that men of rank sho ld be worthy of their ancestors. Vir mihi amicissim s,Q.Fabrici s,C..Sest.,35,75;my very great friend, Prox m s s m egomet mihi,TER.,And.,636;myself am nearest to me. Omni aetati mors est comm nis,Cf.C.,Cat.M.,19,68;death is common to ever y time of life. [DATIVE.229] (Testis) id dicit q od illi ca sae maxime eat alien m,C.,Caec.,g,24;the witness says what is especially damaging to that case(side).

amic s,friend; affinis,connection; aeq alis,contemporary; alien s (rare),foreign,strange; cognat s,kinsman; comm nis,common; contrari s,opposite; par,match; propri s, pec liaris,own,pec liar; similis,like(" we ne'er shall look pon his like again "),especially of gods and men,and reg larly with personal prono ns,and in early Latin; sacer,set apart,sacred; s perstes(rare),s rvivor. Comparatives have reg larly the Dative;S perlatives vary. [Ille],c i s pa cos pares haec civitas t lit,C.,Pis.,4,8;(he was) a man few of whose peers the state hath borne. Utinam te non sol m vitae,sed etiam dignitatis meae s perstitem reliq is sem, C.,Q.F.,1.3,1;wo ld that I had left thee s rvivor not only of my life b t a

REMARKS.1.Many adjectives which belong to this class are es,and as s ch are constr ed with the Genitive :

sed also as s bstantiv

lso of my position. 2.The object toward which is expressed by the Acc.with in,erga,advers s : Manli s(f it) sever s in fili m,C.,Off.,iii.31,112;Manli s was severe to ward his son. Me esse scit sese erga benivol m,PL.,Capt.,350;he knows that I am kindly disposed toward him.

3.The object for which may be expressed by the Acc.with ad,to : Homo ad n llam rem tilis,C.,Off.,iii.6,29;a good-for-nothing fellow. This is the more common constr ction with adjectives of Fitness. NOTES.1. Propior,nearer, proxim s,next, are also constr ed(like prope,near) occasionally with the Acc.(principally by CA ESAR,SALLUST,LIVY),the adverbial forms also with the Abl.with ab,off: Crass s proxim s mare Ocean m hiemarat,CAES.,B.G.,iii.7,2;Crass s had wi ntered next the ocean. Id propi s fidem est,L.,11.41,11;that is nearer belief,i.e.,more likely.

is also constr ed with the Abl.,with or witho t ab(a);so commonly abson s. Homo s m,h mani nil a me alien m p to,TER.,Hea t.,77;I am a man,and noth ing that pertains to man do I consider foreign to me. 3. I nct s,coni ct s,joined, are also constr ed freq ently with c m.and the Abl.; sometimes with the Abl.only : improbitas scelere i ncta,C.,Or.,ii.58,237. 4. Similis

is said to be sed with the Gen.when the likeness is general and comprehensive;w ith the Dat.when it is conditional or partial;hence,in classical prose,always ve rl simile,LIVY being the first to say vfiro simile.

seems to be constr ed with the Gen.once in SALLUST(C.,52,7) and once in QUINTILI AN(xii.i,2).Invid s,envio s,is cited with the Gen.once in CICERO(Flac.,i,2),then not till late Latin;with the Dat.it is poetical;otherwise the possessive prono n is sed,as t i invidi(C.,Fam.,1.4,2).Pron s,inclined,with the Dat.,occ rs in S ALLUST(I g.,114,2),then not till TACITUS;the

5.

Advers s,opponent,

2.

Alien s,foreign,strange,

Vir advers s merita Caesaris ingratissim s,Cf.VELL.,ii.69,1;a man most ngratef l towards Caesar's services(to him).

[230 GENITIVE.]

6.In poetry,idem,(he same,is often constr ed after Greek analogy,with the Dative . Invit m q i servat idem facit occidenti,H..A.P,467;he who saves a man('s life) against his will does the same thing as one who kills him(as if he had ki lled him). 1.Adverbs of similar meaning sometimes take the Dative : Congr enter nat rae con venienterq e vivere,C.,Fin.,iii.7,26. II.Internal Change. Genitive. 360.1.The Genitive Case is the Case of the Complement,and is akin to the Adjecti ve,with which it is often parallel.It is the s bstantive form of the Specific Ch aracteristic. The chief English representatives of the Genitive are : (a) The Possessive case : Dom s regis,the king's palace. (b) The Objective case with of : Dom s regis,the palace of the king. (c) S bstantives sed as adjectives or in composition : Arbor abietis,fir-tree.

Patriae q is exs l se q oq e f git ? H.,O.,ii.16,19;what exile FROM his co ntry ever fled himself as well ? Boior m tri mphi spem collegae reliq it,L.,xxxiii.37,10;he left the hope of a tri mph OVER the Boii to his colleag e. Via mortis may be considered the way(mode) of death or the deathpath,instead of via ad mortem(L.,XLIV.4,14). 2.An abstract s bstantive with the Gen.is often to be translated as an attrib te : Verni temporis s avitas,C.,Cat.M.,19,70;the sweet spring-time. Fonti m gelidae perennitates,C.,N.D.,ii.39,98;cool springs that never fa

REMARKS.1.Other prepositions than of are not he Objective Genitive.(363,R.1.)

nfreq ently sed,especially with t

otherwise Dat.,or ad(in) with Acc.Notice the .,1.66,2;some other examples are do btf l.

s al constr ction is ad.Intent s,intent

pon,has Abl.in SALLUST(C.,a,9,etc.);

se of avers s with Dat.in TAC.,Ann

il. Compare S.,C.,8,3. And,on the other hand,the predicative attrib te is often to be translated as an abstract s bstantive with of : Ante Romam conditam,before the fo nding of Rome.(325,R.3.) Notice also hic met s,this fear = fear of this,and kindred expressions : Q am similit dinem = c i s rei similit dinem,C.,N.D.,ii.10,27. 2.The Genitive is employed : I.and II.Chiefly as the complement of S bstantives and Adjectives. III.Occasionally as the complement of Verbs. NOTE.As the Acc sative forms a complex with the verb,so the Genitive forms a com plex with the S bstantive or eq ivalent.No logical distrib tion can be wholly sa tisfactory,and the following arrangement has regard to convenience. [GENITIVE.231] I.GENITIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVES. Adnominal Genitive. Appositive Genitive,or Genitive of Specification. 361.The Genitive is sometimes sed to specify the contents of generic words inst ead of Apposition in the same case;there are two varieties : 1.Appositional Genitive.Genitive after s ch words as, vox,expression; nomen,name,no n; verb m,word,verb; res,thing,etc. Nomen amicitiae,C.,Fin.,ii.24,78;the name friendship. 2.Epexegetical Genitive.Genitive after s ch words as gen s,class; viti m,vice; c lpa,fa lt,etc. [Virt tes] continentiae,gravitatis,i stitiae,fidei,C.,M r.,10,23;the vir t es of self-control,earnestness,j stice,hono r. NOTES -1.The former variety is very rare in CICERO,the latter m ch more common.A special variety is the se of the Gen.after s ch words as rbs,oppid m,fl men,etc.

This is not fo nd in PLAUTUS and TERENCE,occ rs perhaps b t once in CICERO,and s eems to be confined to a few cases in poetry and later prose.Often personificati

on is at work;th s,in fons Timavi(V.,A.,1.244), Timav s is a river god,and fons is not eq al to Timav s. 2.Examples like arbor abietis(L.,xxiv.3,4),fir-tree; arbor fici(Cf.C.,Flac.,17,41),fig-tree,etc., occ r only here and there. 3.Colloq ial,and probably belonging here,are:

scel s viri(PL.,M.G.,1434),a sco ndrel of a man; flagiti m hominis(PL.,Asin.,473),a scamp of a fellow,and the like. Q aedam pestes homin m,C.,Fam.,v.8,2;certain pestilent fellows. Possessive Genitive,or Genitive of Property. 362.The Possessive Genitive is the s bstantive form of an adjective attrib te wi th which it is often parallel;it is sed only of the Third Person. Dom s regis = dom s regia,the palace of the king,the king's palace = the royal palace. REMARKS.1.The Possession in the First and Second Person(and in the Reflexive) is indicated by the Possessive Prono ns( ntil after LIVY): amic s me s,a friend of mine; gladi s t s,a sword of thine. B t when omni m is added,vestr m and nostr m are sed; aris et focis omni m nostr m inimic s,C.,Ph.,xi.4,10.(emeny to hearth an d home of s all) Sometimes the adjective form is preferred also in the Third Person : canis alien s,a strange dog,another man's dog; fili s erilis,master's son. 2.The attention of the st dent is called to the variety of forms which possessio n may take. Stat a Myronis,Myron's stat e,may mean: 1.A stat e which Myron owns; 2.Which Myron has made; 3.Which represents Myron. 3.Sometimes the governing word is omitted,where it can be easily [232 GENITIVE.] s pplied,so especially

aedes or templ m,after ad,

and less often after other prepositions : Pec nia tinam ad Opis maneret,C.,Ph.,1.7,17; wo ld that the money were still at Ops's(temple). NOTES.1.The Family Genitive,as Hasdr bal Gisgonis(L.,xxviii.,12,13),Gisgo's Hasdr bal,Hasdr bal,Gisgo's son(as it were,Hasdr bal O'Gisgo), Hectoris Andromache(V.,.4.,iii.319),Hector's(wife) Andromache, is fo nd twice only in CICERO,otherwise it is poetical and post-Ciceronian.Servo s,however,is reg larly omitted; Flacc s Cla di,Flacc s,Cla di s' slave. 2.The Chorographic(=geographic) Genitive is rare and post-Ciceronian : Rex Chalcidem E boeae venit,L.,xxvii.30,7; the king came to Chalcis of(i n) E boea. The Chorographic Genitive is not fo nd with persons.Here an adjective or a prepo sitional phrase is necessary : Thales Milesi s,or ex Mileto,Thales of Milet s. Active and Passive Genitive. 363.When the s bstantive on which the Genitive depends contains the idea of an a ction(nomen actionis),the possession may be active or passive.Hence the division into 1.The Active or S bjective Genitive : amor Dei,the love of God,the love which God feels(God loves); patriae beneficia,the benefits of(conferred by) one's co ntry(376,R.2). 2.Passive or Objective Genitive : amor Dei,love of God,love toward God(God is loved). REMARKS.1.The English form in of is sed either actively or passively : the love of women.Hence,to avoid ambig ity,other prepositions than of are often s bstit ted for the Passive Genitive,s ch as for,toward,and the like.So,also,sometimes i n Latin,especially in LIVY,and later Historians generally : Vol ntas Servilii erga Caesarem,Cf.C.,Q.F.,iii.1.6,26;the goodwill of Se rvili s toward Caesar. Odi m in bonos inveterat m,C.,Vat.,3,6;deep-seated hate toward the conse rvatives( bonos), 2.Both Genitives may be connected with the same s bstantive : Veteres Helvetior m ini riae pop li Romani,Cf.CAES.,B.G.,1.30,2; the anc ient inj ries of the Roman people by the Helvetians.

NOTE.The se of the Genitive with s bstantives whose corresponding verbs take ot her cases than the Acc sative,grad ally increases in Latin,beginning with the ea rliest times,b t it is not very common in the classical lang age. 364.The S bjective Genitive,like the Possessive,is sed only of the Third Person .In the First and Second Persons the possessive prono n is sed,th s showing the close relationship of Agent and Possessor. Amor me s,my love(the love which I feel). Desideri m t m,yo r longing(the longing which yo feel). [GENITIVE.233] Additional attrib tives are p t in the Genitive(321,R.2): I ravi hanc rbem mea ni s opera salvam esse,C.,Pis.,3,6;I swore that t his city owed its salvation to my exertions alone. REMARK.Nostr m and vestr m are sed as Partitive Genitives: Magna pars nostr m,a great part of s; terq e vestr m,either(both) of yo . Nostri melior pars means the better part of o r being,o r better part.

NOTES.1.Occasionally,however,in Latin,as in English,the Gen.is sed instead of t he possessive prono n; so CICERO says splendor vestr m(Att,vii.13 a,3), and consens s vestr m(Ph.,v.i,2), and one or two others;b t other examples are very rare ntil after TACITUS,when the Sing lar forms,after the example of OVID(M.,1.30),become not ncommon.See 30 4,3,N.1." For the life of me " = " for my life." 2.On the other hand the Genitives of the personal prono ns are sed reg larly as the Objective Genitive : Amor mei,love to me. Desideri m t i,longing for thee. Memoria nostri,memory of s(o r memory). Occasionally the possessive prono n is sed even here;see 304,2,N.2,and compare "The deep damnation of his taking off."(Shakespeare"Machbeth" =the inj stice of his m rder.) Genitive of Q ality. 365.The Genitive of Q ality m st always have an adjective or its eq ivalent. Vir magnae a ctoritatis,CAES.,B.G.,v.35,6; a man of great infl ence. Homo nihili(= n lli s pretii),PL.,B.,1188;a fellow of no acco nt. Trid i via,CAES.,B.G.,I.38,1; a three days'jo rney.

With omni m,the forms nostr m and vestr m m st be

sed(362,R.i).

Non m lti cibi hospitem accipies,m lti ioci,C.,Fam.,ix.26,4; yo will re ceive a g est who is a small eater b t a great joker. REMARKS.1.The Genitive of Q ality,like the adjective,is not sed with a proper n ame.Exceptions are very rare in classical Latin (CAES.,B.G.,v.35,6,Q int s L cani s,ei sdem ordinis, B t later they are more common. 2.The Genitive of Q ality is less common than the Ablative,being sed chiefly of the essentials.The Genitive always of N mber,Meas re,Time,Space;the Ablative al ways of externals,so of parts of the body.Often the se seems indifferent.(400.) NOTE.The omission of the adjective is not fo nd before APULEIUS,in whom,as in En glish,"a man of infl ence" may be for "a man of great infl ence". Genitive as a Predicate. 366.The Genitives of Possession and Q ality may be sed as Predicates. Hic vers s Pla ti non est,hic est,C.,Fam.,ix.16,4; this verse is not by Pla t s,this is .( yaN ) [234 GENITIVE.] Omnia q ae m lieris f er nt,viri fi nt dotis nomine,C.,Top.,iv.23; every thing that was the woman's becomes the h sband's nder the title of dowry.

Virt s tantar m viri m est t se ipsa t eat r,C.,T sc.,v.1,2; virt e is of s ch strength as to be her own protector.(N}N REMARKS.1.The Possession appears in a variety of forms,and takes a variety of tr anslations :

H i s ero viv s,mort s h i s ero,PROP.,ii.15,35; hers I shall be,living ; dead,hers I shall be.(a} }) Nolae senat s Romanor m,plebs Hannibalis erat,L.,xxiii39,7; at Nola the senate was(on the side) of the Romans,the common folk(on) Hannibal's. Damnatio est i dic m,poena legis,C.,S ll.,22,63; condemning is the j dge s'(b siness),p nishment the law's.

Est animi ingen i c i m lt m debeas eidem pl rim m velle debere, C.,Fam. ,ii.6,2;it shows the feeling of a gentleman to be willing to owe very m ch to hi m to whom yo already owe m ch.(}yay

Pa peris est n merare pec s,Ov.,M.,xiii.823;'tis only the poor man that co nts his flock('tis the mark of a poor man to co nt the flock)(h Observe the special variety,"Genitiv s A ctoris" : Is [Herc les] dicebat r esse Myronis,C.,Verr.,iv.3,5;that(stat e of) Her c les was said to be Myron's(work),by Myron.(} Z }) So also with

facere,to make(ca se to be),which is common in LIVY especially :

S mm m imperi m in orbe terrar m Macedon m fecerant,L.,XLV.7,3; the para mo nt a thority of the world they had bro ght(into the hands) of the Macedonians . 2.For the personal representative of a q ality,the q ality itself may be sed so metimes with b t little difference,as : st ltitiae est,it is the part of folly; st lti est,it is the part of a fool. So,too, st lt m est,it is foolish. B t when the adj.is of the Third Declension,the ne ter sho ld not be sed,except in combination with an adj.of the Second. Tempori cedere semper sapientis est habit m,C.,Fam.,iv.9,2;to yield to t he press re of the times has always been held wise. Pigr m et iners videt r s dore adq irere q od possis sang ine parare, TA C.,G.,14,17;it is tho ght slow and spiritless to acq ire by sweat what yo can g et by blood. Some combinations become phraseological,as : cons et dinis,moris est(the latter post-classical),it is the c stom. 3.The same methods of translation apply to the Possessive Prono n in the Predica te("Vengeance is mine") : me m est,it is my property,b siness,way. Non est mentiri me m,TER.,Hea t.,549;lying is not my way(I do not lie). His tantis in reb s est t m videre,q id agat r,C.,M r.,38,83;in this im portant crisis it is yo r b siness to see what is to be done. [GENITIVE.235] Partitive Genitive. 367.The Partitive Genitive stands for the Whole to which a Part belongs.It is th erefore b t an extension of the Possessive Genitive.It may be sed with any word that involves partition,and has the following varieties(368-372) : 368.The Partitive Genitive is sed with s bstantives of Q antity,N mber,Weight. Maxim s vini n mer s f it,permagn m pond s argenti,C.,Ph.,ii.27,66;there was a large amo nt of wine,an enormo s mass of silver. In i gero Leontini agri medimn m tritici serit r,C.Verr.,iii.47,112;on a j ger of the Leontine territory a medimn s of wheat is sown. Campanor m alam,q ingentos fere eq ites excedere acie i bet,L.,x.29,2;he orders a sq adron of Campanians,abo t 500 horsemen,to leave the line.

Romanae dicionis facere,L.,xxi.60,3;to bring

nder the Roman sway.(/

REMARK.This is sometimes called the Oenitiv s Generis,Whether the conception be partitive or not,depends on circ mstances.

NOTE.The reversed constr ction is occasionally fo nd. Sex dies ad eam rem conficiendam spatii post lant,CAES.,B.C.,1.3,6,inste ad of spati m sex dier m. 369.The Partitive Genitive is sed with the Ne ter Sing lar of the following and kindred words,b t only in the Nominative or Acc sative. tant m,so m ch, m lt m,m ch, pa l m,little, satis,eno gh, hoc,this, q ant m,as(how m ch), pl s,more, min s,less, par m,too little, id,ill d,ist d,that, aliq ant m,somewhat, pl rim m,most, minim m,least, nihil,nothing, idem,the same, q od and q id,which and what ? with their compo nds. Q od in reb s honestis operae c raeq e ponet r,id i re la dabit r,C., Off.,1 .6,19;what(of) effort and pains shall be bestowed on rep table deeds,will receiv e a j st recompense of praise. is loc s ab omni t rba id temporis(336,N.2) vac s [erat],C.,Fin.,v.i,1;that place was at that (point of) time free from anything like a crowd. Satis eloq entiae,sapientiae par m,S.,C.,5,4;eno gh(of) eloq ence,of wisdom too little. REMARKS.1.Ne ter adjectives of the Second Declension can be treated as s bstanti ves in the Gen.; not so adjectives of the Third,except in combination with adjec tives of the Second,b t here s ally the Second Declension adjective is attracte d : aliq id bon m,or boni,something good; aliq id memorabile,something memorable; aliq id boni et memorabilia,something good and memorable(better aliq id bon m et memorabile). [236 GENITIVE.] Q id habet ista res a t laetabile a t glorios m? C.,T sc.,1.21,49 (204,n.3). 2.A familiar phrase is : Nihil reliq i facere.1.To leave nothing (not a thing).2.(Occasionally), to leave nothing ndone.

Medimn s tritici,a medimn s of wheat,may be a medimn s of WHEAT(Genitiv s Generis) or a MEDIMNUS of wheat(Partitive).

NOTES.1.The conception is often not so m ch partitive as characteristic.So Q odc mq e hoc regni,V.,A.,1.78;this realm,what(little) there is of it(what little realm I have). Perhaps,too,s ch combinations as flagiti m hominis may be classed nder this head.See 361,N.3. 2.The partitive constr ction,with a preposition,is not fo nd in CICERO or CAESAR ,b t begins with SALLUST : Ad id loci,S.,C.,45,3; ad id locor m,S.,I g.,63,6. 370.The Partitive Genitive is sed with n merals both general and special. Special : Cent m milit m,a h ndred(of the) soldiers,a h ndred(of) soldiers. (Cent m milites,a,the h ndred soldiers.) Q int s reg m,the fifth(of the) Tcing(s). (Q int s rex,the fifth king.) General : M lti milit m,many of the soldiers,many soldiers. (M lti milites,many soldiers.) REMARKS.1.The English lang age commonly omits the partition, nless it is especia lly emphatic : M lti civi m ads nt,many CITIZENS are present. M lti cives ads nt,MANY are the citi ens present. 2.When all are embraced,there is no partition in Latin : (Nos) trecenti coni ravim s,L.,ii.12,15;three h ndred of s have bo nd o rselves by an oath.

Volnera q ae circ m pl rima m ros accepit patrios,V.,A.,ii.277; wo nds w hich he received in great n mbers before his co ntry's walls. Q i omnes,all of whom. Q ot estis ? how many are(there of) yo ? So always q ot,tot,totidem. Here the English lang age familiarly employs the partition.Exceptions are very r are. 3.On mille and milia,see 293.On prepositions with n merals,see 372,R.2. 371.The Partitive Genitive is sed with Prono ns.

Ii milit m,those(of the) soldiers. Ii milites,those soldiers. Illi Graecor m,those(of the) Greeks. Fidenati m q i s pers nt.ad rbem Fidenas tend nt,L.,iv.33,10;th s rvivi ng Fidenates take their way to the city of Fidenae. [GENITIVE.237] REMARKS.1.Uterq e,either(both),is commonly sed as an adjective with s bstantive s : terq e cons l,either cons l = both cons ls;

terq e hor m,both of these;b t terq e ille d x.

Compare terq e nostr m,C.,S ll.,4,13, triq e nos,C.,Fam.,xi.20,3.See 292. se of prepositions instead of the Genitive,see 372,R.2. with

NOTE.The se of the relative with the Genitive is characteristic of LIVY. 372.The Partitive Genitive is sed with Comparatives and S perlatives : Prior hor m in proelio cecidit,NEP.,xxi.i,2;the former of these fell in an engagement. Ind s est omni m fl min m maxim s,C.,N.D.,ii.52,130(211,R.2). REMARKS.1.When there are only two,the comparative exha sts the degrees of compar ison(300). 2.Instead of the Partitive Genitive with N merals,Prono ns,Comparatives,and S pe rlatives,the Abl.may be employed with ex,o t of, de,from(especially with proper names and sing lars), in,among(rare), or the Acc.with inter,among,ap d : Gall s provocat n m ex Romanis,the Ga l challenges one of the Romans; n s de m ltis,one of the many (the masses); Croes s inter reges op lentissim s,Croes s,wealthiest of kings.

3.On the concord of the S perlative see 211,R.2.

With n s,ex or de is the more common constr ction,except that when t in a series,the Gen.is common.

n s is firs

2.On the

So,too,with relatives in the ne ter,and with Pl ral forms of the r le.

as a s bstantive with prono ns, nless a s bstantive is also

sed :

terq e,concord is

NOTES.1.The Partitive Genitive with positives is occasional in poetry;in prose i t begins with LIVY and becomes more common later. Seq im r te,sancte deor m,V.,A.,iv.576;we follow thee,holy deity. Can m degeneres(ca dam) s b alvom flect nt,PLIN.,N.H.,XI.,50,265; c rris h dogs c rl the tail p nder the belly. 2.S bstantival ne ters,with no idea of q antity,were rarely followed by the Gen. in early Latin.CICERO shows a few cases of Pl rals of s perlatives,and one case of a Pl ral of a comparative in this constr ction : in interiora aedi m S llae (Att.iv.,3,8). CAESAR shows one case of a positive : in occ ltis ac reconditis templi(B.C.,iii.105,5). SALLUST shows the first case of the Sing lar : in praer pti montis extremo(I g.,37,4). Then the sage extends and becomes common,especially in TACITUS.In the poets it begins with LUCRETIUS. Ard a d m met nt amitt nt vera viai(29,N.2=via G),LUCR.,1.660;the while they fear the steeper road,they miss the tr e. So amara c rar m,H.,O.,iv.12,19; bitter elements of cares,bitter cares; strata viar m,V.,A.,1.422 = stratae viae,the paved streets.

armor m adfatim,L.,xxvii.17,7;ab ndance of arms; bi terrar m,genti m? where in the world ?(Very late Latin, t m temporis,at that time.)

The sage with h c,eo,as h c,eo arrogantiae processit,he got to this,that pitch of pres mption, is a colloq ialism,which begins with SALLUST,b t is not fo nd in CICERO or CAESA R. [238 GENITIVE.] Notice especially the phrase : q od(or q oad) gi s(facere) poss m,as far as I ca n do so: C.,Fam.,iii.2,2;Att.,xi.12,4;I.,ii.,6,20. 4.The Partitive Genitive with proper names is rare,and mostly confined to LIVY : Cons l m S lpici s in dextro Poeteli s in laevo corn consist nt,L.,ix.27,8. 5.The Partitive Genitive as a Predicate is Greekish : Fies nobili m t q oq e fo nti m,H,O.,iii.,13,13;tho too shalt co nt among the famo s fo ntains. Genitive with Prepositional S bstantives. 373.Ca sa,gratia,ergo,and instar are constr ed with the Genitive. [Sophistae] q aest s ca sa philosophabant r,C.,Ac.,ii.23,72;the professo rs of wisdom dealt in philosophy for the sake of gain.

3.The Partitive Genitive is also

sed with Adverbs of Q antity,Place,Extent :

Virt tis ergo,C.,Opt.Gen.,7,19; on acco nt of valor. Instar montis eq s,V.,A.,ii.15;a horse the bigness of a mo ntain. Plato mihi n s instar est omni m,C.,Br.,51,191;Plato by himself is in m y eyes worth them all. REMARKS.1.Ca sa and gratia,for the sake,commonly follow the Gen.in classical Lat in and also in the J rists.In LIVY and later they often precede.Ergo,on acco nt, belongs especially to early Latin,except in form lae and laws,and follows its Ge nitive.It is rare in the poets.Instar is probably a fossilised Infinitive(Instar e),meaning " the eq ivalent," whether of si e or val e. 2.Except for special reasons ca sa takes the possessive prono n in agreement,rat her than the personal prono n in the Genitive;more rarely gratia : Vestra reiq e p blicae ca sa,C.,Verr.,v.68,173;for yo r sake and that of the commonwealth.B t in antithesis, m lta q ae nostri ca sa n mq am facerem s,facim s ca sa amicor m! C.,Lae l.,16,57(disp ted). II.GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. 374.Adjectives of F lness,of Participation,and of Power,of Knowledge and Ignoran ce,of Desire and Disg st,take the Genitive. Plen s rimar m,TER.,E n.,105;f ll of chinks("a leaky vessel"). Particeps consilil,C.,S ll.,4,12;a sharer in the plan. Mentis compos,C.,Ph.,ii.38,97; in possession of(one's) mind. M ltar m rer m perit s,C.,Font.,ii,25;versed in many things. C pid s pec niae,Cf.C.,Verr.,1.3,8;grasping after money. Fastidios s Latinar m(litterar m),C.,Br.,70,247;too dainty for Latin. Omni m rer m insci s,C.,Br.,85,292;a niversal ignoram s.y C r non t plen s vitae conviva recedis ? LUCR.,iii.938(273). Sitq e memor nostri necne,referte mihi,Ov.,Tr.,IV.3,10(204,N.7). [GENITIVE.239] Conscia mens recti Famae mendacia risit,Ov.,F.,IV.311 (330,R.). Agricolam la dat i ris leg mq e perit s,H.,S.,1.i,9; the h sbandman('s l ot) is praised by the co nsel learned in the law. Omnes immemorem beneficii oder nt,C.,Off.,ii.18,63;all hate a man who ha s no memory for kindness. (Bestiae) s nt rationis et orationis expertes,C.,Off.,1.16,50;beasts are devoid of reason and speech(lack disco rse of reason).

T me amoris magis q am honoris servavisti gratia,ENN.,F.,287(M.); tho didst save me more for love's(sake) than(tho didst) for hono r's sake.

Omnia plena consilior m,inania verbor m videm s,C.,Or.,1.9,37; we see a world that is f ll of wise meas res,void of eloq ence. Gallia fr g m fertilis f it,L.,v.34,2; Ga l was prod ctive of grain. NOTES.1.Of adjectives of F lness,with the Gen.,only plen s, replet s, inops, and inanis are classical and common;single instances are fo nd of liberalis, prof s s, in SALLUST(C.,7,6;5,4),and iei n s occ rs once in CICERO.PLAUTUS also ses on st s and prodig s. Poets and later prose writers are free. Plen s occ rs very rarely with the Abl.in CICERO and CAESAR,more often in LIVY. Refert s is sed by CICERO s ally with the Abl.of the Thing and with the Gen.of the Pers on. 2.Participation : Classical are particeps, expers, censors, with some adjectives expressing g ilt,as manifest s(archaic), affinis, re s. Of these particeps takes also the Dat.in post-classical Latin,and expers has also the Abl.(not classical) from PLAUTUS on.(See S.,C.,33,1.) Affinis has the Dat.in LIVY,in local sense also in CICERO; re s takes Abl.or de. 3.Power: Compos alone is classical,and is occasionally fo nd with Abl.in SALLUST,VERGIL,LIVY. Potens is fo nd in PLAUTUS,the poets,and post-classical prose; impos in PLAUTUS,and the n not ntil SENECA. 4.Knowledge and Ignorance : Classical are some eighteen.Of these perit s has also Abl.,and rarely ad ; ins et s

takes also Dat.as well as de; pr dens has also ad; r dis has Abl.with in. more often than the Gen.in CICERO,b t also ad.Anteclassical Latin shows a few mo re adjectives. 5.Desire and Disg st : Classical are avid s, c pid s, fastidios s, st dios s. Of these avid s has also in with Acc.and with Abl.; st dios s has Dat.in PLAUTUS (M.Q.,801);single examples are cited with ad and in.Fastidios s occ rs b t once in CICERO(see above);see H.,O.,iii.i,37. 6.In later Latin and in the poets almost all adjectives that denote an affection of the mind take a Gen.of the Thing to which the affection refers,where model p rose req ires the Abl.or a preposition:

consilii ambig s,TAC.,H.,iv.21;do btf l of p rpose. Ingrat s sal tis,V.,A.,x.665. The analogy of these adjectives is followed by others,so that the Gen.becomes a complement to the adjective,j st as it is to the corresponding s bstantive. Integer vitae,H.,O.,1.22,1;spotless of life; like integritas vitae.(Compare fama et fort nis integer,S.,H.,ii.41,5 D;in fame and fort nes intact.) 7.The seat of the feeling is also p t in the Gen.,chiefly with animi and ingenii (which were probably Locatives originally). Aeger animi,L.,1.58,9;sick at heart,heartsick. A dax ingenil,STAT.,S.,iii.2,64;daring of disposition. The Pl.is animis. 8.The Gen.with adjectives involving Separation instead of the Abl.(390,3) begins with the A g stan poets;tho gh SALLUST shows n d s and vac s(I g.,79,6;90,1); liber labor m,H.,A.P.,212. 9.Classical Latin ses cert s with Gen.only in the phrase certiorem facere,to inform, which has also de (always in CAESAR). 10. Dign s,worthy, and indign s, nworthy,

with Gen.are poetical and rare. 11.On alin s,strange,see 359,N.2.On aeq alis, comm nis, consci s, contrari s, par, propri s, similis, s perstes, and the like,see 359,R.1. [240 GENITIVE.] Genitive with Verbals. 375.Some Present Participles take the Genitive when they lose their verbal nat r e;and so occasionally do verbals in -ax in poetry and later prose. (Epaminondas) erat adeo veritatis diligens t ne ioco q idem mentiret r, NEP.,xv.3,1;Epaminondas was so caref l(s ch a lover) of the tr th as not to tel l lies even in jest. Omni m consens capax imperii nisi imperasset,TAC.,H.,1.49;by general co nsent capable of empire,had he not become emperor. NOTES.1.The participle is transient;the adjective permanent.The simple test is t he s bstit tion of the relative and the verb : amans(participle),loving(who is loving); amans(adjective),fond,(s bstantive),lover; patiens(participle),bearing (who is bearing); patiens(adjective),end ring,(s bstantive),a s fferer. 2.Ante-classical Latin shows only amans, c piens, conc piens, f gitans, gerens, perseq ens, sciens, temperans. CICERO carries the sage very far,and it is characteristic of his style.CAESAR,o n the other hand,has very few cases(B.C.,1.69,3). CICERO also shows the first case of a Gen.after a compared participle. S m s nat ra appetentissimi honestatis,C.,T sc.,ii.24,58. These participles can also revert to the verbal constr ctions. 3.Of verbals with the Gen.,PLAUTUS shows one example : mendax(Asin.,855); CICERO perhaps one : rapax(Lael.,14,50). The sage in later Latin and the poets is confined at most to abo t one do en ve rbals.

III.GENITIVE WITH VERBS. Genitive with Verbs of Memory. 376.Verbs of Reminding,Remembering,and Forgetting,take the Genitive.

Est propri m st ltitiae alior m vitia cernere,oblivisci s or m, C.,T sc. ,iii.30,73; the fact is,it shows a fool to have keen eyes for the fa lts of othe rs,to forget one's own.

REMARKS.1.Verbs of Reminding take more often the Abl.with de(so reg larly in CIC ERO),and the Acc.ne t.of a prono n or N meral adjective.TACITUS alone ses moner e with the Gen.(Ann.,1.67,1).

2.Verbs of Remembering and Forgetting also take the Acc.,especially of Things; [GENITIVE.241] Haec olim meminisse i vabit,V.,A.,1.203;to remember these things one day will give s pleas re. Q i s nt boni cives,nisi q i patriae beneficia meminer nt ? C.,Planc.,33 ,80;who are good citi ens except those who remember the benefits conferred by th eir co ntry ?

Eecordor(literally = I bring to heart,to mind) is constr ed with the Acc .of the Thing,except in three passages from CICERO;de is fo nd with Persons. Et vocem Anchisae magni volt mq e recordor,V.,A.,viii.156;and I recall(c all to mind) the voice and co ntenance of Anchises the Great. Memini,I bear in mind,I(am old eno gh to) remember,takes the Acc sative : [Antipatr m] t probe meministi,C.,Or.,iii.50,194;yo remember Antipater very well.

may be constr ed impersonally with the Gen.,or personally with a s bject;the lat ter by CICERO only when the s bject is a ne ter prono n. Venit mihi Platonis in mentem,C.,Fin.,v.i,2;Plato rises before my mind's eye.

3.

Venit mihi in mentem,it comes into( p to) my mind,

Oblivisci nihil soles nisi ini rias,C.,Lig.,12,35;yo nothing except inj ries.

Discip los id

n m moneo,QUINT.,ii.9,1(333,i).

are wont to forget

Oro t Terentiani moneatis de testaments,C.,Att.,xi.16,5; I beg yo t Terentia in mind of the will.

to p

Ipse i bet mortis te meminisse de s,MART.,ii.59; a god himself bids yo remember death.

Te veteris amicitiae commonefecit,[C.] ad Her.,iv.24,33;he reminded yo of yo r old friendship.

Genitive with Verbs of Emotion. 377. Misereor,I pity,

takes the Genitive,and miseret,it moves to pity, paenitet,it repents, piget,it irks, p det,it makes ashamed, taedet and pertaes m est,it tires,

Miseremini socior m,C.,Verr.,1.28,72;pity yo r allies ! S ae q emq e fort nae paenitet,C.,Fam.,vi.i,1;each man is discontented w ith his lot. Me non sol m piget st ltitiae meae,sed etiam p det,C.,Dom.,n,29;I am not only fretted at my folly,b t act ally ashamed of it. REMARKS.1.P det is also sed with the Gen.of the Person whose Presence excites t he shame : P det deor m homin mq e,L.,iii.19,7;it is a shame in the sight o f gods and men. 2.These Impersonals can also have a s bject,chiefly a Demonstrative or Relative prono n : Non te haec p dent? TER.,Ad.,754;do not these things p t yo to the bl s h ? 3.Other constr ctions follow from general r les.So the Inf.(422) and q od(542). Non me vixisse paenitet (aya),C.,Cat.M.,23,84(540). Q int m paenitet q od anim m t m offendit,Cf.C.,Att.,xi.13,2; Q int s i s sorry that he has wo nded yo r feelings. [242 GENITIVE.] NOTES.1.With the same constr ction are fo nd misereo(early Latin),misereco (poet ical),disp det(early Latin),distaedet(early Latin),vereor(mostly in early Latin) ,and a few others. 2.Miserari and commiserari,to pity,commiserate,take Acc. ntil very late Latin. Genitive with J dicial Verbs. The Genitive with J dicial Verbs belongs to the same category as the Genitive wi th Verbs of Rating,both being extensions of the Genitive of Q ality. 378.Verbs of Acc sing,Convicting,Condemning,and Acq itting take the Genitive of the Charge. (Miltiades) acc sat s est proditionis,NEP.,1.7,5;Miltiades was acc sed o f treason.

take the Acc sative of the Person Who Feels,and the Genitive of the Exciting Ca se.

[Fanni s] C.Verrem insim lat avaritiae,C.,Verr.,I.49,128;Fanni s charges Gai s Verres with avarice. Video non te absol t m esse improbitatis sed illos damnatos esse caedis, C.,Verr.,1.28,72; I see not that yo are acq itted of dishono r,b t that they a re convicted of m rder. REMARKS.1.J dicial Verbs incl de a n mber of expressions and sages.So capi, teneri, deprehendi, se adstringere, se adligare, se obligare (ante-classical),and others,mean to be fo nd g ilty; increpare, increpitare, rgere, deferre, arg ere,etc.,mean charge. So also kindred expressions : re m facere,(to make a party) to indict,to bring an action against; nomen deferre de,to bring an action against; sacrilegii compert m esse,to be fo nd(g ilty) of sacrilege. 2.For the Gen.of the Charge may be s bstit ted nomine or crimine with the Gen.,or the Abl.with de: nomine(crimine) coni rationis damnare,to find g ilty of conspiracy; acc sare de vi,of violence(Gen.vis rare); de veneficio,of poisoning; de reb s repet ndis,of extortion. Pest lare always has de in CICERO. We find sometimes in with Abl.; convict s in crimine,on the charge;or, inter : inter sicarios damnat s est,convicted of homicide (C.,Cl ent.,7,21;Cf.Ph .,ii.4,8). 3.Verbs of Condemning and Acq itting take the Abl.as well as the Gen.of the Char ge and the P nishment,and always the Abl.of the definite Fine;the indefinite Fin e, q anti,d pli,q adr pli,etc.,is in the Genitive. Acc sare capitis,or capite,to bring a capital charge. Damnare capitis,or capite,to condemn to death. Damnari decem milib s,to be fined ten tho sand. M ltare,to m lct(),is always constr ed with the Ablative : M ltare pec nia,to m lct in(of) money.lm Manli s virt tem filii morte m ltavit,QUINT.,v.ii,7;Manli s p nished the valo r of his son with death. 4.Destination and Enforced Labor are expressed by ad or in,b t all examples are post-classical :

damnari ad bestias,to be condemned(to be thrown) to wild beasts; [GENITIVE.243] ad(in) metalla,to the mines; ad(in) op s p blic m,to hard labo r. Voti damnari,to be bo nd to f lfil a vow,is Livian(except NEP.,xx.5,3,wh ere it has a different sense). 5.Verbs of Acc sing may have also the Acc.of the Thing and the Gen.of the Person : inertiam acc sas ad lescenti m,C.,Or.,1.58,246. (}ya) Genitive with Verbs of Rating and B ying. 379.Verbs of Eating and B ying are constr ed with the Genitive of the general va l e or cost,and the Ablative of the partic lar val e or cost.(404.) Verbs of Rating are : aestimare, existimare(rare),to val e; p tare,to reckon; d cere(rare in CICERO),to take; habere,to hold; pendere (mostly in Comedy),to weigh; facere,to make,p t; esse,to be(worth); fieri,to be considered. Verbs of B ying are : emere,to b y; vendere,to sell; venire,to be for sale; stare and constare,to cost,to come to; prostare,licere (y) ,to be exposed,left(for sale)(a); cond cere,to hire(); locare,to let.() 380.1.Verbs of Rating take : Magni,m ch, pl ris,more, pl rimi,maximi,most, Parvi,little, minoris,less, minimi,least, Tanti,tantidem,so m ch, q anti(and compo nds),how m ch, nihili,na ght, Eq ivalents of nihili,nothing,are

flocci,a lock of wool() , na ci,a trifle(ya), assis,a copper(G of as ya),

pili(Cya)(both in CATULLUS,mainly), and the like,and so also h i s,that(a snap of the finger)(Nya) vili s, all s ally with the negative.(nonN) D m ne ob malefacta,peream; parvi exist mo,PL.,Capt.,682,; so long as it be not for misdeeds,let me die;little do I care.( ya [Vol ptatem] virt s minimi facit,C.,Fin.,11.13,42;virt e makes very litt le acco nt of the pleas re of the senses. [I dices] rem p blicam flocci non faci nt,Cf.C.,Att.,iv.15,4;the j dges do not care a fig for the State.(y haya) Non habeo na ci Mars m a g rem,C.,Div.,1.58,132;I do not val e a Marsian a g r a bawbee(=halfpenny).(Marsiaya) REMARK. Tanti

operae preti m est = it is worth while. Est mihi tanti h i s invidiae tempestatem s bire,C.,Cat.,ii.7,15;it is w orth while(the cost),in my eyes,to bear this storm of odi m. NOTES.1. Aestimo is fo nd with the Abl.as well as with the Genitive.So

aestimare magno and magni,to val e highly. CICERO prefers the Ablative. 2.Observe the phrases : boni(aeq i boniq e) facio(a colloq ialism), boni cons lo(an old form la),I p t p with,take in good part. Non pensi habere(d cere),to consider not worth the while, is post-A g stan and rare. [244 GENITIVE.] 2.Verbs of B ying take tanti,q anti,pl ris,and minoris,The rest are p t in the A blative. Vendo me m(fr ment m) non pl ris q am ceteri,fortasse etiam minoris, C., Off.,iii.12,51;I sell my corn not dearer than everybody else,perhaps even cheape r. Magis illa i vant q ae pl ris em nt r,J v.,xi.16;(aNyC are bo ght for more. Emit(Cani s hortes) tanti q anti Pythi s vol it,C.,Off.,iii.14,59;Cani s

is often

sed in the sense of

Mya

aa

bo ght the gardens at the price Pythi s wanted. Q anti cenas ? What do yo give for yo r dinner ? Q anti habitas ? What is the rent of yo r lodgings ? B t: Parvo fames constat,magno fastidi m,SEN.,E.M.,17,4;h nger costs little,d aintiness m ch. An instr ctive shift: Emit? perii hercle: q anti? Viginti minis,TER.,E n.,984;he bo ght her ? I'm ndone.For how m ch ? Twenty minae.(NN}}M REMARK.

So,too,other adverbs : meli s,optime,pei s,pessime. Genitive with Interest and Refert. 381. Interest and Refert take a Genitive of the Person,seldom of the Thing,co ncerned. Interest omni m recte facere,C.,Fin.,ii.22, 72;it is to the interestof a ll to do right. (a})

Refert compositionis q ae q ib s anteponas,QUINT.,ix.4,44;it is of impor tance for the arrangement of words,which yo p t before which.( Instead of the Genitive of the personal prono ns,the Ablative Sing lar feminine of the possessives is employed. Mea interest,mea refert,I am concerned.l}m NOTES.1.Refert is commonly sed absol tely,occasionally with mea,etc.,seldom wi th the Gen.,in the classical lang age. 2.Instead of Apposition se the Relative :

Vehementer intererat vestra,q i patres estis,liberos vestros hic potissi m m discere,PLIN.,Ep.,iv.13,4;it were vastly to the interest of yo parents,that yo r children,if possible,were ta ght at home.(}y y 3.The Nom.as a s bject is rare,except in PLINY'S Nat ral History :

Usq e adeo magni refert st di m atq e vol ptas,LUCR.,iv.984.(C prono n is fo nd : Q id(Acc.) t a id(Nom.) refert ? TER.,Ph.,723;what b siness is that of y o rs? 4. Refert is the more ancient,and is employed by the poets(interest is excl ded from Dactylic poetry by its form) to the end of the classical period. Interest is pec liar to prose,employed excl sively by CAESAR,and preferr

Bene bene male male

emere,to b vendere,to emere,to b vendere,to

y cheap;aaa sell dear;aa y dear; sell cheap.

ed by CICERO when a complement is added. [GENITIVE.245] 5.No satisfactory explanation has been given of this constr ction.One view is th at mea refert was originally [ex] mea re fert (like ex mea re est),it is to my advantage,and that the ex was lost. Interest having m ch the same force,b t being later in development,took the constr ctions of refert by false analogy.The Gen.wo ld be b t parallel to th e possessive. 382.1.The Degree of Concern is expressed by an Adverb,Adverbial Acc sative,or a Genitive of Val e. Id mea min me refert,TER.,Ad.,88 1;that makes no difference at all to me . Theodori nihil interest,C.,T sc.,I.43,102;It is no concern of Theodor s. Magni interest mea na nos esse,C.,Att.,xiii4;it is of great importance to me that we be together. 2.The Object of Concern is commonly p t in the Infinitive,Acc sative and Infinit ive, t or ne with the S bj nctive,or an Interrogative Sentence. Q id Milonis intererat interfici Clodi m ? C.,Mil.,13,34;what interest h ad Milo in Clodi s' being killed ? [Caesar dicere solebat] non tam s a q am rei p blicae interesse ti salv s esset,SUET.,I l.,86;Caesar sed to say that it was not of so m ch importance to him(self) as to the State that his life sho ld be spared.

Q id refert tales vers s q a voce legant r ? J v.,xi.182;what matters it what voice s ch verses are recited with ? 3.The Thing Involved is p t in the Acc sative with ad : Magni ad honorem nostr m interest q am prim m me ad rbem venire, C.,Fam .,xvi.i,1;it makes a great difference to ching o r hono r that I sho ld come to the city as soon as possible. Occasional Uses. 383.1 The Genitive is fo nd occasionally with certain Verbs of F lness : in clas sical Latin principally implere,complere,egere,indigere. Piso m ltos codices implevit ear m rer m,C.,Verr.1.46,119;Piso filled ma ny books f ll of those things. Virt s pl rimae commentationis et exercitationis indiget, Cf.C.,Fin.,iii .15,50;virt e stands in need of m ch(very m ch) st dy and practice. NOTES.1.Classical Latin shows in all cases the Abl.m ch more freq ently than the Gen.,except in the case of indigere,where CICERO prefers the Genitive.LIVY like wise prefers the Gen.with implere.

Vestra interest ne imperatorem pessimi faciant,TAC.,H.,1.30;it is to yo r interest that the dregs of creation do not make the emperor.

2.Ante-classical and poetic are explere(VERG.),ab ndare(L c.),scatere (LUCR.),sat rare(PLAUT.), obsat ra re(TER.),carere(TER.). Carere and egere have the Acc.occasionally in early Latin. 3.Other Grecisms are labor m decipit r,H.,O.,ii.13,38(reading do btf l). [246 ABLATIVE.] Regnavit pop lor m,H.,O.,iii.30,12.Also mirari with Gen.in VERGIL(A.,xi.126). Noteworthy is the occasional se of credere with Gen.in PLAUTUS;so once falli. 2.A Genitive of Separation,after the analogy of the Greek,is fo nd in a few case s in the poets. Ut me omni m iam labor m levas,PL.,R d.247;how yo relieve me at last of all my toils and tro bles. Desine molli m tandem q erellar m,H.,O.,ii.9,17;cease at last from woman ish complainings. 3.The Genitive in Exclamations occ rs in a very few instances in the poets.CAT., ix.5;PROP.,iv.(v.) 7,21;compare PL.,Most.,912; LUCAN,ii.45. On the Genitive after comparatives,see 296,N.2.

ABLATIVE. 384.The Ablative is the Adverbial,as the Genitive is the Adjective case.It conta ins three elements : A.Where? B.Whence? C.Wherewith? In a literal sense,the Ablative is commonly sed with prepositions; in a fig rat ive sense,it is commonly sed witho t prepositions. A.The Ablative of the Place Where appears in a fig rative sense as the Ablative of the Time When. B.The Ablative of the Place Whence appears as : 1.The Ablative of Origin. 2.The Ablative of Meas re. C.The Ablative of the Thing Wherewith appears in a fig rative sense,as : 1.The Ablative of Manner. 2.The Ablative of Q ality. 3.The Ablative of Means. REMARK.It is impossible to draw the line of demarcation with absol te exactness.

So the Ablative of Ca se may be derived from any of the three f ndamental signif ications of the case,which is evidently a composite one. To these we add : D.The Ablative of Ca se. E.The Ablative Absol te. I.The Literal Meanings of the Ablative. A.ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHERE. Ablativ s Localis. 385.The Ablative answers the q estion Where ? and takes as a r le the prepositio n in. In port navigo,TER.,And.,480; I am sailing in harbo r. Pons in Hibero prope effect s(erat),CAES.,B.C.,1.62,3; the bridge OVER t he Ebro was nearly finished. [ABLATIVE.247] Histrio in scaena [est],PL.,Poen.,20;the actor is ON the stage. Haeret in eq o senex,Cf.C.,Dei.,10,28;the old man sticks TO his horse. REMARKS.1.Verbs of Placing and kindred significations take the Abl.with in,to de signate the res lt of the motion : classical are ponere,to place,and compo nds; locare,collocare,to p t; stat ere,constit ere,to set; considere,to settle; defigere,to plant; demergere,to pl nge; imprimere,to press pon; insc lpere,to engrave(fig rative); inscribere,to write pon; incidere,to carve pon; incl dere,to sh t into. Plato rationem in capite pos it,iram in pectore locavit, C.,T sc.,1.10,2 0;Plato has p t reason in the head,has placed anger in the breast. (L cretia) c ltr m in corde defigit,L.,1.58,11;L cretia plants a knife i n(thr sts a knife down into) her heart. Philosophi in iis libris ipsis q os scrib nt de contemnenda gloria s a n emina inscrib nt,C.,T sc.,1.15,34;philosophers write their own names on(the titl es of) the very books which they write abo t contempt of glory.

The same observation applies to s b : Pone s b c rr nimi m propinq i solis in terra domib s negata,H .,O.,1.2 2,21;p t(me) nder the chariot of the all-too neighboring s n,in a land denied t o dwellings.

(Foed s) in col mna aenea incis m,C.,Balb.,23,53;a treaty c t en col mn.

pon a bra

2.Verbs of Hanging and Fastening take ex,ab,or de. C i spes omnis pendet ex fort na,h ic nihil potest esse certi, C.,Par.,i i.17;to him who has all his hopes s spended on fort ne,nothing can be certain. 3.Here and there in is often rendered by per : C.,Fam.,1.7,6, per provincias,here and there in the provinces;V.,A.,iii.236.

terra,on land; mari,by sea; s ally in the phrase

terra mariq e(rarely in the reversed order),on land and sea. in terra is more common otherwise than terra. Loco and locis,especially when sed with adjectives, s ally omit in.The same is tr e of parte and partib s;so reg larly dextra (parte),sinistra,laeva,etc.,on the right,on the left. LIVY ses regio like loc s.The tendency,however,is observable as early as CICERO 'S time to omit the in when an adjective is employed,even in words other than th ose given above;this tendency becomes more marked in Livy and is very strong in later Latin.The poets are free.Regard m st always be had to 389. 2.The Acc.with in after verbs of Placing is very rare in classical prose.In earl y Latin it is more common;so with ponere,imponere,collocare. The examples with Acc.in classical Latin are principally with compo nds of poner e,as imponere( s ally),reponere,exponere.collocare with in and Acc.in CAES.,B .G.,1.18,7,is not in a local sense.Sometimes the Dat.is fo nd with imponere. 3.With a verb of Rest the motion antecedent to the rest is often emphasised by c onstr ing the verb with "in and the Acc".instead of with "in and the Abl".This o cc rs most often with esse and habere,and seems to have been colloq ial,as it is very rare in classical prose. N mero mihi in mentem f it dis(<de s Pl,D) advenientem(=me) gratias ager e,PL.,Am.,180.y [248 ABLATIVE.] Adesse in senat m i ssit,C.,Ph.,v.7,19(cf.h c ades,come hither). Parcere victis in anim m habebat,L.,xxxiii.10,4. 386.Names of Towns in the Sing lar of the Third Declension,and in the Pl ral of all Declensions,take the Ablative of Place Where witho t in. Ut Romae cons les sic Carthagine q otannis bini reges creabant r, NEP.,x xiii.7,4;as at Rome(two) cons ls,so in Carthage two kings,were created yearly. Talis(Romae Fabrici s),q alis Aristides Athenis,f it,C.,Off.,iii.22,87; Fabrici s was j st s ch a man at Rome as Aristides was at Athens. REMARKS.1.Appositions are p t in the Abl.commonly with in; when the appositive h

NOTES.1.In classical prose the rds,mostly phraseological.So

se of the Abl.witho t in is confined to a few wo

as an attrib te,the proper name reg larly precedes : Neapoli,in celeberrimo oppido,C.,Rab.Post.,10,26; at Naples,a pop lo s t own. 2.In the neighborhood of,at,is ad with Acc.,especially of military operations: p gna ad Cannas(better Cannensis),the battle at Cannae; pons ad Genavam,CAES.,B.G.,1.7; the bridge at Geneva. NOTE.The Abl.in names of Towns of the Second Declension is fo nd once in CAESAR( B.C.,iii.35,b t the reading is q estioned);more often in VITRUVIUS and later Lat in,b t in Greek words only.Apparent exceptions in CAESAR and CICERO are to be re ferred to the Abl.of Separation.The poets,however,are free. 387.In citations from Books and in En merations,the Ablative of the Place Where is sed witho t in. Libro tertio,third book; vers decimo,tenth verse; alio loco,elsewhere. B t "in" is necessary when a passage in a book and not the whole book is meant : Agric lt ra la dat r in eo libro q i est de t enda re familiari, C.,Cat. M.,17,59; agric lt re is praised in the work on domestic economy. 388.In designations of Place,with tot s,c nct s,whole; omnis,all;medi s,middle,t he Ablative of the Place Where is generally sed witho t in. Menipp s,meo i dicio,tota Asia disertissim s,C.,Br.,91,315;Menipp s,in m y j dgment,the most eloq ent man in all Asia(Minor). Battiades semper toto cantabit r orbe,Ov.,Am.,1.15,13;Battiades(Callimac h s) will always be s ng thro gho t the world. REMAKE.In is not excl ded when the idea is thro gho t,in which case per also may be sed.Nego in Sicilia tota(thro gho t the whole of Sicily) ll m argente m va s f isse,etc.,C.,Verr.,iv.i,1. 389.In all s ch designations of Place as may be regarded in the light of Ca se,M anner,or Instr ment,the Ablative is sed witho t a preposition. [ABLATIVE.249] Ut terra Thermopylar m ang stiae Graeciam,ita mari fret m E ripi cla dit , L.,xxxi.23,12;as the pass of Thermopylae bars Greece by land,so the frithlm of E rip s by sea. Ariovist s exercit m castris contin it,CAES.,B.G.,1.48,4;Ariovist s kept his army within the camp. Egress s est non viis sed tramitib s,C.,Ph.,xiii.9,19;he went o t not by high roads b t by cross-c tslm. Nemo ire q emq am p blica prohibet via,PL.,C rc.,35;no man forbiddeth(an y one to) travel by the p blic road. Matris cineres Romam Tiberi s bvecti s nt,Cf.SUET.,Cal.,15; his mother's ashes were bro ght p to Rome by the Tiber.

So recipere aliq em tecto,oppido,port ,to receive a man into one's ho se,to wm, harbo r; where,however,the Acc.with "in" is not excl ded: gentes niversae in civitatem s nt receptae,C.,Balb.,13,31. B.ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHENCE.Ablativ s Separativ s. 390.1 .The Ablative answers the q estion Whence ? and takes as a r le the prepos itions ex,o t of, de,from, ab,off. (E m) ext rbasti ex aedib s ? PL.,Trin.,137;did yo h stle him o t of th e ho se ? Araneas deiciam de pariete,PL.,St.,355;I will get the cobwebs down from the wall. Alcibiadem Athenienses e civitate exp ler nt,Cf.NEP.,vii.6,2;the Athenia ns banished Alcibiades from the state. Decedit ex Gallia Romani Naevi s,C.,Q inct.,4,16;Naevi s withdrew from G a l to Rome. Unde deiecisti sive ex q o loco,sive a q o loco(whether OUT OF or FROM w hich place),eo restit as,C.,Caec.,30,88. 2.The prepositions are often omitted with Verbs of Abstaining,Removing,Relieving ,and Excl ding;so reg larly with domo,from home, r re,from the co ntry. With Persons a preposition(chiefly ab) m st be sed. (Verres) omnia domo ei s abst lit,C.,Verr.,11.34,83;Verres took everythi ng away from his ho se. Ego,c m T lli s r re redierit,mittam e m ad te,C.,Fam.,v.20,9;when T lli s ret rns from the co ntry,I will send him to yo .

Compare Alieno man m abstineant,CATO,Agr.,5,1;let them keep their hand(s)from ot her people's property, with [Alexander] vix a se man s abstin it,C.,T sc.,iv.37,79;Alexander hardly kept(co ld hardly keep) his hands from himself(from laying hands on himself). Compare Lapidib s optimos viros foro pellis,C.,Har.Res.,18,39; yo drive men of

the best classes from the for m with stones, with ist m aem l m ab ea pellito,TER.,E n.,215;drive that rival from her. Compare Omni m rer m nat ra cognita liberam r mortis met ,C.,Fin.,1.19,63; by th e knowledge of niversal nat re we get rid of the fear of death, [250 ABLATIVE.] with Te ab eo libero,C.,Q.F.,iii.1.3,9; I rid yo of him. Compare Amicitia n llo loco excl dit r,C.,Lael.,6,22;friendship is sh t o t from no place, with Ab illa excl dor,hoc concl dor,Cf.TER.,And.,386;I am sh t o t from HER(a nd) sh t p here(to live with HER). NOTES.1.In classical Latin the preposition is s ally employed in local relation s,and omitted in metaphorical relations;tho gh there are some exceptions. 2.It is to be noted that in the vast majority of cases the separation is indicat ed by a verb;hence this Abl.is fo nd commonly with verbs compo nded with preposi tions.Th s,classical Latin shows b t few simple verbs with the Abl.,as follows : movere,chiefly in general or technical combinations : movere loco,senat ,trib (CAESAR,however,has no case); pellere,in technical lang age with civitate, domo,foro,patria,possessionib s,s is sedib s; cedere is fo nd with patria,vita,memoria,possessione,Italia; cadere,technical with ca sa; solvere with lege (legib s),religione,etc.,somno; levare and liberate are fo nd chiefly in metaphorical combinations,and e specially in CICERO; arcere has pec liarly ab with metaphorical,Abl.with local forces.In the case of most of these verbs,the preposition with the Abl.is also fo nd. 3.Of compo nd verbs with the Abl.,CICERO shows only se abdicate(principally tech nical),abesse(rarely),abhorrere(once);abire(in technical ses = se abdicare),abr mpere(once),absolvere,abstinere(intra s.witho t,trans,more often with,prepositi on),deicere(with aedilitate,etc.),demovere(once),depellere,desistere,det rbare;e d cere(rare);efferre(rare);egredi;eicere;elabi(rare);emittere(CAES.);gripere(rar e; s ally Dat.);gvertere;excedere;excl dere; exire(rare);expellere;exsolvere;exs istere(rare);ext rbare;intercl dere; interdicere(alic i aliq a re;also alic i al iq id);praecipitare(CAES.);probibere;s persedere. Early Latin shows a few more verbs with this constr ction.The poets are free wit h the Abl.,and also later prose writers,beginning with LIVY.

4.

H mo,from the gro nd,begins with VERGIL.-The preposition a is fo nd occa

sionally with domo;necessarily with a word(adjective or adverb) involving meas r ement,as; longinq e,longe,proc l. 5.Compo nds with di(dis) also take the Dative(in poetry) : Pa l m sep ltae distat inertiae celata virt s,H.,O.,iv.9,29; little doth hidden worth differ from b ried sloth.(XY ) 6.The Place Whence gives the Point of View from which.In English a different tra nslation is often given,tho gh not always necessarily : a tergo,in the rear; ex parte dextra,on the right side; ab oriente,on the east; a tanto spatio,at s ch a distance; ex f ga,on the flight; a re fr mentaria labor are,to be embarrassed in the matter,qf provisions . 3.The prepositions are also omitted with kindred Adjectives. Anim s excels s omni est liber c ra,C.,Fin.,1.15,49;a lofty mind is free from all care. (Cato) omnib s h manis vitiis imm nis,semper fort nam in s a potestate h ab it,VELL.,ii.35,2;Cato,exempt from all h man failings,always had fort ne in hi s own power. I g rtha(Adherbalem) extorrem patria effecit,S.,I g.,14,11;I g rtha rend ered Adherbal an exile from his co ntry,Utr mq e(fra s et vis) homine alienissim m,C.,Off.,1.13,41.

[ABLATIVE.251] NOTES.1.The preposition is more s al in most cases.P r s and imm nis,with simpl e Abl.,are poetical and post-A g stan.Expers,with Abl.instead of with Gen.,belon gs to early Latin and SALLUST.Recens,fresh from,with Abl.,belongs to TACITUS. 2. Proc l,far from,reg larly takes the preposition ab,except in the poets a nd later prose. 3.The Abl.of the S pine is early and late,as CATO,Agr.,5;

391.Names of Towns and Small islands are p t in the Ablative of the Place Whence . Demaret s f git Tarq inios Corintho,C.,T sc.,v.37,109;Demarat s fled to Tarq inii from Corinth. Dolabella Delo proficiscit r,C.,Verr.,1.1 8,46;Dolabella sets o t from D elos. REMARKS.--1.The prepositions ab(a) and ex(e) are sometimes sed for the sake of greater exactness,b t rarely in model prose.So reg larly ab with the Place from which distance is meas red : [Aesc lapii templ m] q inq e milib s pass m ab rbe [Epida ro] distat,Cf .L.,XLV.28,3(403,N.1).

Vilic s prim s c bit

s rgat,postrem s c bit m eat.See 436,N.4.

When the s bstantives rbe,city,and oppido,town,are employed,the se of the prep osition is the r le,as also when not the town,b t the neighbo rhood is intended; also always with longg.When the Appositive has an attrib te the proper name reg larly precedes. A lide,ex oppido Boeotiae,from A lis,a town of Boeotia. Ex Apollonia Ponti rbe,from Apollonia,a city of Pont s. Ex oppido Gergovia,CAES.,B.G.,vii.4,2;from the town of Gergovia.

2.The Place Whence embraces all the local designations : Agrigento ex Aesc lapii fano whereas we sho ld say,from the temple of Aesc lapi s at Agrigent m. Unde domo? V.,A.,v i.114; from what home ? 3.Letters are dated from rather than at a place. NOTE.Names of co ntries are b t rarely sed in the Ablative.CICEEO,SALLUST,and L IVY show no instance,CAESAR only one(B.C.,iii.58,4).Occasional examples are fo n d in early Latin and in old inscriptions;then in later historians,beginning with VELLEIUS.The se of prepositions with towns seems in general to have been a col loq ialism,Cf.SUET.,A g.,86.The poets are free in their sage. C.ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH. Ablativ s Sociativ s. 392.The Ablative of Attendance takes the preposition c m,'with. C m febri dom m rediit,C.,Or.,iii.2,6;he ret rned home with a fever. [252 ABLATIVE.] Catilina stetit in comitio c m telo,Cf.C..Cat.,1.6,15;Catiline stood in the place of election with a weapon(on him).( ) C m bac lo peraq e [senex],MART.,iv.53,3;an old man with stick and walle t. Nec tec m poss m vivere nec sine te,MART.,xii.47.2; I can't live either with yo or witho t yo . REMARKS.1.In military phrases,the troops with which a march is made are p t in t he Ablative,with or witho t c m;generally witho t c m when an adjective is sed(Ablative of Manner), with c m when no adjective is sed(Ablative of Attendance). With definite n mbers,however,c m is reg larly employed. Albani ingenti exercit in agr m Roman m impet m fecere,L..I.23,3; the A lbans attacked the Roman territory with a h ge army. Caesar c m eq itib s DCCCC in castra pervenit,CAES.,B.C.,1.41,1; Caesar arrived in camp with nine h ndred cavalry.

Early Latin is free in the eems to increase.

se of prepositions;and also from LIVY on the sage s

2.Not to be confo nded with the above is the Instr mental Ablative : Navib s profect s est,C.,Fam.,xv.3,2;he set o t by ship. So also with verbs which denote other military actions : Hasdr bal mediam aciem Hispanis firmat,L.,xxiii.29,4;Hasdr bal strengthe ns the centre with Spanish troops. Act m nihil est nisi Poeno milite portas frangim s,J v.,x.155;na ght is accomplished nless we break the gates with the P nic soldiery(as if with a batt ering-ram). II.The Fig rative Meanings of the Ablative. A.The Place Where is transferred to the Time When.

393.Time When or Within Which is p t in the Ablative. Q a nocte nat s Alexander est,eadem Dianae Ephesiae templ m deflagravit, Cf.C.,N.D.,ii.27,69;on the same night on which Alexander was born,the temple,of Diana of Ephes s b rned to the gro nd. Sat rni Stella triginta fere annis c rs m s m conficit,C.,N.D.,ii.20,52 ;the planet Sat rn completes its period in abo t thirty years. Many adverbial forms of time are really Locative Ablatives : So hodie,to-day; heri(e),yesterday; mane,in the morning. REMARKS.1.Time Within Which may be expressed by per and the Acc sative : Per eos ipsos dies q ib s Philipp s in Achaia f it,Philocles salt m Cith aeronis transcendit, L.,xxxi.26,1;d ring those very days,while Philip was in Ach aia,Philocles crossed the range of Cithaeron. 2.Time Within Which may embrace both extremities;so s ally with tot s,all,whole : [ABLATIVE.253] Nocte pl it tota,rede nt at mane serena,V.(PoET.LAT.MIN.,iv.155 B);all n ight(J piter) rains; clear skies come back in the morning.Cf.CAES.B.G.,1.26,5. So with definite n mbers; b t rarely, ntil the post-A g stan period : Script m est triginta annis vixisse Panaeti m,posteaq am illos libros ed idisset, C.,Off.,iii.2,8;it is written that Panaeti s lived for thirty years aft er he had p blished those books(not to be confo nded with the.Abl.of Difference, 403). Ap d Pythagoram discip lis q inq e annis tacend m erat,SEN.,E.M.,52,10; in the school of Pythagoras the disciples had to keep silence five years.

Ablative of Time.

Ablativ s Temporis.

3.When the Notion is Negative,the English Time For Which is the Latin Wi thin Which. [Rosci s] Romam m ltis annis non venit,C.,Rosc.Am.,27,74;Rosci s has not come to Rome in(for) many years. Not always,however; compare Sex mensis iam hic nemo habitat,PL.,Most.,954;no one has been living her e these six months. 4.Especially to be noted is the Abl.of Time with hic,this; ille,that :

C i viginti his annis s pplicatio decreta est? C.,Ph.,xiv.4,11;to whom d ring these last twenty years has a s pplication been decreed ? ( N

[Karthaginem] hoc biennio evertes,C.,Rep.,vi.ii,11;Carthage yo will ove rt rn in the next two years. Transferred to Oratio Obliq a, hic becomes ille(660,3) : Diodor s [respondit] ill d argent m se pa cis illis dieb s misisse Lilyb ae m, C.,Verr.,iv.18,39;Diodor s answered that he had sent that silver plate to Lilybae m within a few days(a few days before). 5.The Abl.of Time is reg larly accompanied by an attrib te in classical Latin,ex cept in the case of a n mber of common designations,as aestate, die, hieme, nocte, vespere(vesperi). Exceptions are rare,s ch as comitiis, l ce, pace, militia, and some names of games. 394.The Ablative with the preposition in is sed of points within a period of ti me,or of the character of the time. Bis in die,twice a day; in p eritia,in boyhood; in ad lescentia,in yo th. N llo modo mihi plac it bis in die sat r m fieri,C.,T sc.,v.35,100; it d id not s it me in any way to eat my fill twice a day. Feci ego istaec itidem in ad lescentia,PL.,B.,410;I did those things too

in my yo th. REMARK.The se or omission of in sometimes changes the meaning.So bello Persico,at the time of the Persian war;b t in bello,in war times; in pace,in peace times.Phraseological is in tempore,more freq ent than tempore,at the right time.B t in illo tempore means in those circ mstances,at that crisis.At present,f or the present,is always in praesentia or in praesenti(rare). [254 ABLATIVE.] NOTES.1.Classical Latin confines the se of in to designations of Time o f Life (tho gh here,when an adjective is employed,in is s ally omitted) and to the periods of time.Later in is sed m ch more extensively.With n merals in is t he r le.CATO and the poets have sometimes bis die (twice a day),as dies = n s d ies. 2.De,from,is also sed in designations of time : principally in the phra se de die,de nocte.Ut i g lent hominem s rg nt de nocte latrones,H.,Epi.,1.2,32; to kill a man,highwaymen rise by night,i.e.,while it is yet night. Inter,between : Q ae prandia inter contin om perdidi trienni m,PL.,St.,21 3;what l ncheons I have lost d ring three years together. Intra,within: S begit sol s intra viginti dies,PL.,C rc.,448; he q elled them all alone in less than twenty days. On per,thro gh,see 336,R.2. C m,with,is fo nd occasionally in phrases,as c m prima l ce,with,daybrea k. B.The Place Whence is transferred : 1.To Origin.2.To Respect or Specification. I.Ablative of Origin. 395.Participles which signify Birth take the Ablative of Origin;sometimes with t he prepositions ex and de. Amplissima familia nati ad lescentes,CAES.,B.G.,vii.37,1; yo ng men born of a great ho se. N mae Pompilii regis nepos,filia ort s,Anc s Marci s erat,L.,1.32,1;King N ma Pompili s's grandson,a da ghter's iss e,was Anc s Marci s. Maecenas atavis edite regib s,H.,O.,1.i,1; Maecenas,offshoot of great-gr andsire kings. Dis genite et genit re deos,V.,A.,ix.639;begotten of gods,and destined t o beget gods ! Sate sang ine div m! V.,A.,vi.125;seed of blood divine ! Ex me atq e ex hoc nat s es,TER.,Hea t.,1030;yo are his son and mine.

Oder nt natos de paelice,J v.,vi.627; they hate the offspring of the con c bine. Ab,and occasionally ex,are employed of remote progenitorslm : Pleriq e Belgae s nt orti ab Germanis,Cf.CAES.,B.G.,ii.4,1; Belgians are mostly of German descent. Ori ndi ex Etr scis,Cf.L.,ii.9,1; of Etr scan origin. NOTES.1.The principal participles th s sed are nat s,prognat s,ori nd s; ort s, genit s,and sat s begin in prose with LIVY;edit s and cret s are poetic; procrea t s is late.CICERO ses ori nd s b t once;it denotes remote origin. 2.With names of Places the preposition is the r le(362,N.2);b t there are a few exceptions in early Latin and in CICERO,and a co ple of examples in CAESAR.Later the simple Abl.disappears.The Abl.was the r le with names of Tribes. Periphanes Rhodo mercator,PL.,Asin.,499. Magi s Cremona,CAES.,B.C.,1.24,4. Q.Verres Romilia,C.,Verr.,1.8,23;Q.Verres of the Romilian tribe. 3.With finite verbs denoting Origin,the preposition is reg lar,except occasional ly with nasci. 4.The Ablative of Agent properly belongs here.B t for convenience of contrast it is treated nder 401. 396.The Ablative of Material takes ex in classical Latin. [ABLATIVE.255] Ex anima constam s et corpore,Cf.C.,Fin.,iv.8,19;we consist of mind and body. Stat a ex a ro,ex aere,facta,a stat e made of gold,of bron e.Often an ad jective is sed : a re s,golden; ligne s,wooden. NOTES.1.After CICERO constare is sed more often with the Abl.; consistere (with the Abl.) is poetical. Contineri,to be contained in,i.e.,almost " to consist of," takes the Abl .only,b t with a different conception.

2.With fieri the previo s state is indicated by de as well as by ex. De templo carcerem fieri! C.,Ph.,v.7,18;from a temple to become a jail. Fies de rhetore cons l,J v.,VII.197;from(having been) rhetorician yo wi ll become cons l. Ex oratore arator fact s,C.,Ph.,iii.9,22(206,R.2). 3.Otherwise the simple Ablative of Material is poetic or late : Mavors caelat s ferro,V.,A.,viii.700;Mars carven of iron. Meliore l to finxit,J v.,xiv.35;he fashioned it of better clay.

Medicina tota constat experimentis,QUINT.,ii.17,9;all medicine is made p of experiments(is empirical).

2.Ablative of Respect. 397.The Ablative of Respect or Specification gives the Point From Which a thing is meas red or treated,and is p t in answer to the q estions From What Point of View ? According to What ? By What ? In Respect of What ? Discript s pop l s cens ,ordinib s,aetatib s,C.,Leg.,iii.19,44;a people drawn off according to income,rank,(and) age.

Noteworthy are the phrases : crine r ber,red-haired; capt s oc lis (literally,ca ght in the eyes),blind; capt s mente,insane; mea sententia,according to my opinion; i re,by right; lege,by law,etc.; and the S pines in - (436). NOTES.1.Prepositions are also sed,which serve to show the conception : (Caesaris) advent s ex colore vestit s cognit s,cf.CAES.,B.G.,vii.88,l; the arrival of Caesar was known by the color of his clothing. De gest intellego q id respondeas,C.,Vat.,15,35;I nderstand by yo r ge st re what answer yo are giving. Ab animo aeger f i,PL.,Ep.,129;at heart I was sick. Otios m ab animo,TER.,Ph.,340;easy in mind.Na Similarly ex lege,according to law; ex pacto,according to agreement; ex(de) more,according to c stom; ex animi sententia,according to(my) heart's desire; ex s , sef l. 2.A special category is formed by words indicating eminence or s periori ty;so excellere,antecellere,praestare,s perare,vincere;and the adjectives : Insi gnia,ill stris,dign s;excellens,praeceliens.Praecellere is fo nd in early and la te Latin,while dignari is poetic and post-A g stan. Maxime pop l s Roman s animi magnit dine excellit,C.,Off.,1.18,61;the Ro man people excel most in loftiness of mind. On dign s with Gen.,see 374,N.10. [256 ABLATIVE.] A c rio s sage is that of decor s and decere,with Abl.,in PL.,M.G.,619; Asin.577. 3.The origin of these constr ctions is still ndetermined.They may be ded ced al

in art

Enni s ingenio maxim s,arte r dis,Ov.,Tr.,ii.424;Enni s in geni s great, nskilled. Animo ignav s,procax ore,TAC.,H.,ii.23,18;coward of so l,sa cy of tong e

so from the Instr mental side of the Abl.,or from the Locative side. 398.The Ablative of Respect is sed with the Comparative instead of q am,than,wi th the Nominative or Acc sative;b t in the classical lang age mainly after a neg ative,or its eq ivalent.(Ablativ s Comparationis.) T nica propior palliost,PL.,Trin.,1154;the shirt is nearer than the cloa k. Nihil est virt te amabili s,C.,Lael.,8,28;nothing is more attractive tha n virt e. Q id est in homine ratione divini s ? C.,Leg.,1.7,22;what is there in ma n more godlike than reason ? So also after adverbs,b t not so freely in prose : Lacrima nihil citi s arescit,C.,Inv.,I.56,109;nothing dries more q ickly than a tear. Nemo est q i tibi sapienti s s adere possit te ipso,C.,Fam.,ii.7,1;there is no one who can give yo wiser advice than yo yo rself. P lcr m ornat m t rpes mores pei s caeno conlin nt,PL.,Most.,291;fo l be havior doth bedraggle() fine apparel worse than m d. REMARK.When the word giving the point of view is a relative,the Abl.m st be sed .See 296,R.2. Phidiae sim lacris q ib s nihil in illo genere perfecti s videm s,cogita re tamen poss m s p lchriora,C.,Or.,2,8;the stat es of Pheidias,than which we se e nothing more perfect in their kind,still leave room for s to imagine those th at are more bea tif l. NOTES.1.The comparative is also employed with the Abl.of certain abstract s bsta ntives and adjectives sed as s bstantives;so opinione,spe,exspectatione; aeq o,i sto,solito,and the like, all post-Ciceronian except aeq o,opinione. (Cons l) seri s spe(= q am spes f erat) Romam venit,L.,xxvi.26,4;the con s l came to Rome later than was hoped. Solito citatior amnis,L.,xxiii.19,11; the river r nning faster than s a l. 2.Aeq e and adaeq e are fo nd once each in PLAUTUS with the Abl.; and th en not till the time of the elder PLINY. 3.For other details,see 296 and 644. C.ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH. Ablativ s Sociativ s.Ablative of Attendance. 1 .Ablative of Manner. 399.The Ablative of Manner answers the q estion How ? and is sed with the Prepo sition c m when it has no Adjective;with or witho t c m when it has an Adjective or its eq ivalent.(Ablativ s Modi.)

[StellaeJ circ los s os orbesq e confici nt celeritate mirabili, C.,Rep. ,vi.15,15;the stars complete their orbits with wonderf l swiftness. [ABLATIVE.257] Vos oro t attente bonaq e c m venia verba mea a diatis,C..Rose.Am.,4,9; I beg yo to hear my words attentively and with kind ind lgence. Beate vivere,honeste,id est c m virt te,vivere,C.,Fin.,iii.8,29;to live happily is to live honestly,that is,virt o sly. NOTES.1.The simple Abl.witho t an attrib te is confined to a few s bstantives, w hich have acq ired adverbial force;early Latin shows ast ,c rric lo,dolo and ergo,gratiis

ingratiis,ioc lo,merito,n mero,optato,ordine,sortito,vol ntate,v lgo. TERENCE adds : vi,i re,ini ria. Classical Latin shows some of these,also ratione,ratione et via,morib s,cons et dine,silentio,cas ,lege,fra de,vi tio, sacramento(beginning with LIVY), and a few others.Sometimes the idea of Specification is prominent,as in lege,i re(397); sometimes it is hard to disting ish between the Manner and the Instr ment : vi,violently and by violence; vi et armis,by force of arms; pedib s,afoot; navib s,by ship. Notice,also,the se of per,thro gh,with the Acc sative : per vim,by violence; per litteras,by letter. 2.The post-Ciceronian Latin extends the se of the Abl.witho t an attrib te. 3.The phrases s b condicione,s b lege,etc.,begin with LIVY.

2.Ablative of Q ality. (Descriptive Ablative.) 400.The Ablative of Q ality has no Preposition,and always takes an Adjective or an eq ivalent. [Hannibalis] nomen erat magna ap d omnes gloria,C.,Or.,ii.18,75; the nam e of Hannibal was glorio s in the esteem of all the world. (Agesila s) stat ra f it h mili,NEP.,xvii.8,1;Agesila s was(a man) of lo w stat re(). Ista t rpic lo p ella naso,CAT.,41,3;that girl of yo rs with the gly no

se. Clavi ferrei digiti pollicislm crassit dine,Cf.CAES.,B,G.,iii.13,4;iron nails of the thickness of yo r th mb. REMARKS.1.External and transient q alities are p t by preference in the Ablative ;Meas re,N mber,Time,and Space are p t in the Genitive only;parts of the body in the Ablative only.Otherwise there is often no difference.

agn s c m s illo capite,L.,xxxi.12,7;a lamb with a swine's head.

3.Ablative of Means. 401.The Means or Instr ment is p t in the Ablative witho t a Preposition. The Agent or Doer is p t in the Ablative with the Preposition ab(a).The Person T hro gh whom is p t in the Acc sative with per.

senger. [258 ABLATIVE.]

Q i s nt homines,a q ib s ille se lapidib s adpetit m,etiam perc ss m es se dixit ? C.,Dom.,5,13;who are the men by whom he said he had been thrown at wi th stones,and even hit ? V lgo occidebant r ? Per q os et a q ib s ? C.,Rosc.Am.,29,80; Were they c t down openly ? Thro gh whose instr mentality and by whose agency ? Nec bene promeritis capit r neq e tangit r ira,LUCR.,ii.651(227,N.4). Ipse docet q id agam: fas est et ab hoste doceri,Ov.,M.,iv.428(219). Discite sanari per q em didicistis amare,Ov.,Rem.Am.,43; learn to be hea led by means of(him by) whom yo learned to love. REMARKS.1.When the Instr ment is personified and regarded as an Agent,or the Age nt is regarded as an Instr ment,the constr ctions are reversed;when an adjective is sed,the constr ction may be do btf l; see 354,x.i,and 214,R.2. So iacent s is testib s,C.,Mil.,18,47;they are cast by their own witnesses; or,they are cast,their own men being witnesses. 2.A q ality,when personified,has the constr ction of the person.So deseri a mente,a spe,

NOTES.1.The n mber of verbs constr ed with this Abl.is very large and comprises several categories;so verbs of Clothing and Providing,Adorning and Endowing,Trai ning(er dire also takes in;others take Acc.,see 339),Living and No rishing,etc.

Vobis anim s ab ignavia atq e socordia conr pt s [est],S.,I g.,31,2; yo have had yo r so l(s) deba ched by sloth() and indifference.

Xerxes certior fact s est, Xerxes was informed,

{1.n ntio,by a message {2.a n ntio,by a messenger {3.per n nti m,by means of a mes

2.Of

nnat ral prod ctions c m may be

sed :

2.Of special importance are ass esco, ass efacio, ass et s; (Catilina) sceler m exercitatione ass efact s,C.,Cat.,ii.5,9. The Dat.is fo nd first in LIVY in prose.Ad with the Acc.is also classical. 3.Afficere,to treat,with the Ablative, is a favorite t rn;see the Lexicons. 4.Verbs of sacrificing,s ch as sacrificare, sacr m facere, divinam rem facere, facere and fieri(mostly poetical), immolare, litare(poetical), have the Abl.of Means.B t immolare s ally has Acc.and Dat.,and so the others occasionally,except facere.

Q inq aginta capris sacrificaver nt,L.,XLV.16,6;they sacrificed fifty sh e -goats. Here belong also verbs like pl ere, s dare(not classic), stillare(not classic), fl ere, manare, and the like : sang ine pl isse,L.,xxiv.10,7. The Acc.is also common. 6.Nitor,I stay myself,is constr ed with the Abl.; occasionally with in. Fido,confido,I tr st,rely on,have the Abl.; b t with persons the Dat.,so metimes also with things.On the other hand, diffido,I distr st,always has the Dat.in classical Latin,b t TACITUS sho ws Abl.,and so do other later writers. Stare,to abide by, s ally has the Abl.,b t occasionally in;

Acq iescere,to acq iesce in,with Abl.is rare.

manere has

s ally in;the Abl.is poetical.

Fret s,s pported,takes the Abl.reg larly; LIVY alone ses the Dative.

Sal s omni m non veritate sol m sed etiam fama nitit r,Cf.C.,Q.F.,1.ii.i ,2; the welfare of all rests not on tr th alone,b t also on rep te. Ei s i dicio stare nolim,C.,TUSC.,ii.26,63;I sho ld not like to abide by his j dgment.

Q id fecisti scipione ? PL.,Cas.,975;what have yo done with the wand ? Q id me fiet ? PL.,Most.,1166;what will become of me? [ABLATIVE.259]

Q id hoc homine facias ? C.,Verr.,ii.16,39 how will yo dispose of this man? Q id h ic homini facias ? C.,Caecin.,ii,30 what will yo do to this man? Q id de nobis f t r m [est] ? C.,Fam.,ix.17,1 what is to happen in o r c ase?

The constr ction is colloq ial,and never fo nd in CAESAR and TACITUS;it is alway s in an interrogative sentence,except in CATO and OVID. 4.Ablative of Standard.Ablativ s Mens rae. 402.The Standard of Meas re is p t in the Ablative with verbs of Meas rement and J dgment. Benevolentiam non ardore amoris sed stabilitate i dicem s, C.,Off.,1.15, 47;good will we are to j dge not by ardo r b t by steadfastness. Magnos homines virt te metim r,non fort na,NEP.,xviii.i,1;we meas re gre at men by worth,not by fort ne.

REMARKS.1.It is often hard to disting ish the Meas re from the Respect(see 397). 2.Ex with the Abl.is freq ently fo nd with these verbs;so reg larly with aestimare, existimare, spectare, in the sense of j dge,val e. Dicend m erit non esse ex fort na fidem ponderandam,C.,Part.Or.,34,117;t

Sonis homines t aera tinnit men by so nd,as coppers by ring.

dignoscim s,QUINT.,xi.3,81;we disting ish

The se of the Dative is rare,and still more rare the

se of de.

Q id te f t r mst ? TER.Ph.,137;what is to become of yo

7.A remnant of the old

sage is fo nd with fI5,facio,and esse :

Content s,satisfied with(by),is sed only of one's own possessions (reb s,fort na,etc.),and has the Ablative.

he plea will have to be made that faith is not to be weighed by fort ne. Sic est v lg s : ex veritate pa ca,ex opinione m lta aestimat, C.,Rosc.C om.,10,29;this is the way of the rabble : they val e few things by(the standard of) tr th,many by(the standard of) opinion. 403.Meas re of Difference is p t in the Ablative.

(Via) altero tanto longiorem habebat anfract m,NEP.,xviii.8,5; the road had a bend(that made it) longer by as m ch again,as long again. Q inq iens tanto ampli s Verres,q am licit m est,civitatib s imperavit, Cf.C.,Verr.,iii.97,225;Verres levied on the vario s cities five times more than was allowed by law. T rres denis pedib s q am m r s altiores s nt,CURT.,v.i,26;the towers ar e(by) ten feet higher than the wall. Tanto est acciisare q am defendere,q anto facere q am sanare v lnera,fac ili s, QUINT.,v.13,3; it is as m ch easier to acc se than to defend,as it is eas ier to inflict wo nds than to heal them. Perfer et obd ra : m lto graviora t listi,Ov.,Tr.,v.n,7; end re to the e nd and be firm : yo have borne m ch more grievo s b rdens.(X NOTES.1.This r le applies to verbs involving difference(s ch as abesse,distare,m alle,praestare,excellere,etc.),as well as to comparatives,with which m st be rec koned infra,s pra, ltra. [260 ABLATIVE.] [Aesc lapii templ m] q inq e milib s pass m ab rbe [Epida rol distat,Cf .L.,XLV.28,3;the temple of Aesc lapi s is five miles from the city of Epida r s.

3.The Pla tine Abl.nimio,with the comparative,is not classical(compare [C.],Att, x.8 A,1),b t reappears in LIVY. Aliter with this Abl.is very rare and is not classical. So also the Abl.with the positive,of which a few examples are cited from early L atin,as TER.,Hea t.,205.

Pa cis ante dieb s,Pa cis dieb s ante,a few days before. Pa cis post dieb s,Pa cis dieb s post,a few days after,afterward. D ob s annis postq am Roma condita est,two years after Rome was fo nded. Pa lo post Troiam captam,a little while after the taking of Troy. The Acc.can also be employed : post pa ces annos,after a few years; ante pa cos annos,a few years before;

4.(a) Especially to be noted is the nd post,offer :

se of the Abl.of Meas re with ante,before,a

2.The Acc.is sometimes employed(see 335);especially with ne ter adjectives m lt m,tant m,etc.,b t this is not common except with verbs.

Sol m ltis partib s maior(est) q am terra s n is many parts larger than the whole earth.

niversa,C.,N.D.,11.36,92; the

and the ordinal as well as the cardinal n mbers(b t only when q am follows) : tw o h ndred years after(ward) may be :

(b) Ante and post do not precede the Abl.in classical Latin except with aliq ant o (rare) and pa lo.Ante and post,with the Acc.followed by q am,instead of anteq am and postq am with the Abl.,belong preeminently to post-classical Latin; class ical examples are rare.CICERO never has ante. (c) Ante hos sex menses,six months ago(compare 393,R.4) more freq ently abhinc sex menses(336,R.3);abhinc sex mensib s,means six months before.

Mors Roscii q adrid o q o is occis s est,Chrysogono n ntiat r,c.,Rosc.Am. ,37,105;the death of Rosci s was anno nced to Chrysogon s fo r days after he was killed(in the co rse of the fo r days within which he was killed).See 393. (e) Hence is ad : ad sex menses,six months hence. (f) Do not conf se the Acc.with ante and post with the Acc.of D ration of Time. 5.Ablative of Price. 404.Definite Price is p t in the Ablative. Eriphyla a ro viri vitam vendidit,C.,Inv.,1.50,94; Eriphyle sold her h s band's life for gold. Viginti talentis nam orationem Isocrates vendidit,PLIN.,N.H.,vii.31,110 ; Isocrates sold one speech for twenty talents. Emit morte immortalitatem,QUINT.,ix.3,71;he p rchased deathlessness with death. Argent m accepi,dote imperi m vendidi,PL.,Asin.,87;the cash I took,(and) for a dowry sold my sway. NOTES.1.M tare,to exchange,is sometimes Give,sometimes Get; sometimes Sell,somet imes B y.The latter se is confined to poetry and later prose.

Misera pax vel bello bene m tat r,Cf.TAC.,Ann.,iii.44,10;a wretched peac e is well exchanged even for war. B t

2.So venalis,vilis,cheap;

c r valle perm tem Sabina divitias operosiores ? H.,O.,iii.i,47;why sho ld I exchange my Sabine vale for riches s re to breed(me) greater tro ble?

Nemo nisi victor pace bell m m tavit,S.,C.,58.15;no one nless victorio s (ever) exchanged war for peace.

(d) With a relative sentence the Abl.of the relative may be f ante(post) q am :

sed alone,instead o

D centis annis post Post d centos an os

or or

D centesimo anno post, Post d centesim m ann m.

car s,dear. Non,edepol,minis trecentis carast,PL.,Pers.,668;she in not dear,'fore Ge orge,at three h ndred minae.(by George ) 3.For Genitive of Price,see 379. [ABLATIVE.261] 6.Ablative with Verbs of Plenty and Want. 405.Verbs of Depriving and Filling,of Plenty and Want,take the Ablative. [Democrit s] dicit r oc lis se privasse,C.,Fin.,v.29,87; Democrit s is said to have deprived himself of his eyes. De s bonis omnib s explevit m nd m,Cf.C.,Univ.,3,9; God has filled the nive rse with all blessings.

Non caret effect ,q od vol ere d o,Ov.,Am.,ii.3,16; what two have resolved o n never lacks exec tion. Q o maior est in [animis] praestantia,eo maiore indigent diligentia,C.,T sc. ,iv.27,58.Ya =N} NOTES.1.Verbs of Depriving are commonly referred to the Ablative of Separation,r ather than to the Instr mental Ablative,and are p t here for convenience of cont rast.B t it m st be remembered that in the classic tong es the constr ction of o pposites is identical. 2.Egeo and(more freq ently) indigeo also take the Genitive : Non tam artis indigent q am laboris,C.,Or.,1.34,156;they are not so m ch in need of skill as of ind stry.So impleri,V.,A.,1.214. 3.Adjectives of Plenty and Want take the Gen.,b t Borne of them follow the analo gy of the verb(374,N.1).So on st s,orb s,have Abl.more often than Gen.; indig s, egen s,and inops have the Gen.more commonly.Plen s has s ally the Gen.; the Abl .in increasing proportion from LUCRETIUS on.Freq ens and valid s do not take the Gen. ntil the post-A g stan period.See 374. Asell s on st s a ro,C.,AtL,1.16,12; a donkey laden with gold. Pollicitis dives q ilibet esse potest,Ov.,A.A.,1.444;anybody can be rich in promises. Amor et melle et felle est fec ndissim s,PL.,Cist.,67;love is(very) fr itf l both in honey and in gall(of acrimony). 406. Op s and s s take the Dative of the Person who Wants and the Ablative o f the Thing Wanted;b t the Thing Wanted may be the s bject,and op s(not s s) th e predicate. Novo consilio mihi n nc op s est,PL.,Ps.,601;a new device is what I'm needin g now. Viginti iam s st filio argenti minis,PL.,Asin.,89; my son has rgent need o

Cap a fortissimor m viror m m ltit dine red ndat,C.,Pis.,1 1,25; Cap a is f ll to overflowing with a m ltit de of gallant gentlemen.

f twenty silver minae. Nihil op s est sim latione et fallaciis,C.,Or.,ii.46,191;there is no need of making believe,and of cheating tricks.

Emas non q od op s est,sed q od necesse est;q od non op s est asse car m est ,CATO(SEN.,E.M,94,27); b y not what yo want,b t what is absol tely needf l; wha t yo do not want(have no se for) is dear at a penny. So with the Perfect Participle Passive. Q od parato op s est para,TER.,And.,523;what m st be got ready,get ready. Vicino conventost op s,PL.,Cas.,502;the neighbo r m st be called on. [262 ABLATIVE.]

Citi s q od non factost s s fit q am q od factost op s,PL.,Am.,505. NOTES.1.Op s est means properly :there is work to be done with; s s est,there is making se of (like tor); hence the Ablative.Some think that op s takes Abl.by analogy with s s. 2.Op s est is common thro gho t; s s est is very rarely fo nd after the early period.It belongs especially to comedy. 3.The Gen.with op s occ rs twice in LIVY ; also in PROPERTIUS,QUINTILIAN,and APU LEIUS.

Q id(Acc.) digitos op s est graphio lassare tenendo ? Ov.,Am.,1.ii,23; what is the se of tiring the fingers by holding the styl s? 5.Besides the Pf.Part,pass.,we find the Infin.and sometimes t;in this case the Person is s ally in the Dat.with op s( s s),b t may be in the Acc.with the Inf. ,or may be omitted. Op s est te animo valere t corpore possis,C.,Fam.,xvi.14,2;yo m st be well in mind in order to be well in body. An q oiq amst s s homini se t cr ciet ? TER.,Hea t.,81;of what good is it to any man to tort re himself?(q oiq amst=c iq am est) The S pine is fo nd occasionally;in CICERO only scit (Inv.,1.20,28;disp ted). 6.In PLAUTUS and LUCRETIUS are occasional examples of s s as a predicate,with t he Thing Wanted as the s bject. 7.Ablative with S ndry Verbs. 407.The Deponent Verbs tor,

4.The ne t Acc.is

s ally adverbial(333,i) :

Non op s est verbis sed f stib s,C.,Pis.,30,73;there is need not of words,b t of c dgels.

ab tor,ab se fr or, f ngor, potior, and vescor, take the Ablative. Victoria ti nescis,L.,xxii.51,4;how to make se of victory yo know not . Q o sq e tandem ab tere patientia nostra,C.,Cat.,1.i,1; how long,tell m e,will yo ab se o r patience ? L x q a fr im r a Deo nobis dat r,Cf.C.,Rosc.Am.,45,131;the light which we enjoy is given to s by God. F ng nt r officio;defend nt s os,C.,Cael.,9,21;they acq it themselves of a d ty;they defend their own people. F ngar vice cotis,H.,A.P.,304; I shall acq it myself of ,discharge,the o ffice of a whetstone. T ti s esse arbitrabant r sine llo v lnere victoria potiri, CAES.,B.G., iii.24,2; they tho ght it safer to make themselves masters of the victory witho t any wo nd. N midae lacte vescebant r,S.,I g.,89,7;the N midians made their food of milk(fed on milk). NOTES.1.These Ablatives are commonly regarded as Ablatives of the Instr ment : b t fr or,I get fr it,and vescor,I feed myself from, and perhaps f ngor,may take the Abl.as a Whence-case.

2.These verbs seem to have been originally constr ed with the Acc.; b t this cas e is not fo nd in classical Latin except in the Ger ndive constr ction(427,N.5). (a) Utor with Acc.

is very common in PLAUTUS,less so in TERENCE,b t only with ne ter prono ns.CATO ses also the ne ter of s bstantives.Ab tor is combined only with Acc.in early L atin.

is not in PLAUTUS,b t occasionally in TERENCE and CATO.Fr niscor(rare) is transi tive in PLAUTUS and QUADRIGARIUS(ap.GELL.).

is the r le in early Latin(TER.,Ad.,603,is disp ted),then in NEPOS,TACITUS,SUETO NIUS,and later. (d) Potior has Gen.at all periods(rare in CICERO;once in CAESAR);the Acc. [ABLATIVE.263]

(c)

F ngor with Acc.

(6)

Fr or with Acc.

occasionally in early and late Latin,in the b.Afr.,the b.Ilisp.,and in SALLUST.N oteworthy is the se of an act.potire with Gen.in PL.,Am.,178,and a pass,potit s with Gen.in several places in PLAUTUS. (e) in. 3. Vescor takes the Acc.rarely in early Latin,in the poets,and in later Lat Vivere,hell ari,take Abl.like vesci. Utor is a favorite word,and has a most varied translation : Uti aliq o amico,to avail one's self of(to enjoy) a man's friendship(to have a friend in him); ti consilio,to follow advice; ti bono patre,to have the advantage of having a good father; ti legib s,to obey the laws.See the Lexicons.

D.ABLATIVE OF CAUSE. 408.The Ablative of Ca se is sed witho t a preposition,chiefly with Verbs of Em otion.Ablativ s Ca sae. In c lpa s nt q i officia deser nt mollitia animi,C.,Fin.,1.10,33; they are to blame who shirk their d ties from effeminacy of temper. Oder nt peccare boni virt tis amore,H.,Ep.,1.16,52;the good hate to sin from love of virt e. Delicto dolere,correctione ga dere(oportet),C.,Lael.,24,90;one o ght to be sorry for sin,to be glad of chastisement. Non dici potest q am flagrem desiderio rbis,C.,Att.,v.ii,1;I b rn (am a fire) beyond expression with longing for Rome. NOTES.1.A n mber of combinations become phraseological,as the verbals : arbitrat ,hortat ,imp ls ,i ss ,miss ,rogat ,etc.; also consilio,a ctoritate,with a Gen. or possessive prono n : i ss Civi m,at the bidding of the citi ens;meo rogat ,a t my req est.

2.The moving ca se is often expressed by a participle with the Abl.,which s all y precedes : add ct s,led;ardens,fired;commot s,stirred p;incitat s,egged on;in cens s,inflamed;imp ls s,driven on;mot s,moved,and many others; amore,by love;ir a,by anger;odio,by hate;met ,by fear;spe,by hope,etc.Met perterrit s,sore frigh tened;verec ndia deterrit s,abashed,etc. 3.Instead of the simple Abl.the prepositions de and ex(sometimes in),with the Ab l.,ob and propter with the Acc.,are often sed;perhaps occasionally ab. 4.The preventing ca se is expressed by prae,for(417,9) : Prae ga dio bi sim nescio,TER.,Hea t.,308;I know not where I am for joy . 5.On ca sa and gratis with the Gen.,see 373. 6.The se of the Abl.for the external ca se,as regale gen s non tam regni q am regis vitiis rep diat m est (C.,Leg.,iii .7,15),the kingly form of government was rejected not so m ch by reason of the f a lts of the kingly form,as by reason of the fa lts of the king, is not common in the early and in the classical period,except in certain form le

e;b t it becomes very common later. 7.The Ablative of Ca se may have its origin in the Instr mental Ablative,in the Ablative of So rce,or in the Comitative Ablative. E.ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 409.The so-called Ablative Absol te is an Ablative combined with a participle,an d serves to modify the verbal predicate of a sentence.Instead of the participle, a predicative s bstantive or adjective can be employed. [264 ABLATIVE.] NOTE.This Ablative,which may be called the Ablative of Circ mstance,springs from the Temporal Use of the Ablative the Temporal from the Local.Another view regar ds it as an Ablative of Manner,with a predicate instead of an attrib te. 410.The Ablative Absol te may be translated by the English so-called Nominative( originally Dative) Absol te,which is a close eq ivalent;b t for p rposes of styl e,it is often well to analyse the tho ght,to change Passive into Active,to make se of an abstract s bstantive. Xerxe regnante(= c m Xerxes regnaret),Xerxes reigning.When Xerxes was re igning.In the reign of Xerxes. Xerxe victo( c m Xerxes vict s esset),Xerxes being,having been,defeated. When Xerxes had been defeated.After the defeat of Xerxes. Xerxe rege(= c m Xerxes rex esset),Xerxes [being] king.When Xerxes was k ing. Patre vivo,WHILE father is,was alive(in father's lifetime). Urbe exp gnata imperator rediit :

ACTIVE FORM : Having taken the city(after he had taken the city),the general ret rned.

ABSTRACT FORM : After the taking of the city.After taking the city. Maximas virt tes iacere omnes necesse est vol ptate dominante, C.,Fin.,i i.35,117;all the great(est) virt es m st necessarily lie prostrate,IF(or WHEN) t he pleas re(of the senses) is mistress. Romani veteres regnari omnes volebant libertatis d lcedine nond m expert a,L.,1.17,3; the old Romans all wished to have a king over them(BECAUSE they had ) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty. REMARKS.1.As the Latin lang age has no Pf.Part,active,except when the Deponent i s th s sed,the passive constr ction is far more common than in English : I venes veste posita corpora oleo per nxer nt,C.,T sc.,I.47,113;the yo t hs,(having) laid aside their clothing,anointed their bodies with oil; or,laid as ide their clothing,and anointed their bodies with oil. 2.The Abl.Abs.,tho gh often to be rendered by a coordinate sentence,for convenie nce'sake,always presents a s bordinate conception :

PASSIVE FORM : The city [being] taken(after the city was taken),the general ret rned.

(Lysander) s adet Lacedaemoniis t regia potestate dissol ta ex omnib s d x deligat r ad bell m gerend m,NEP.,vi.3,5;Lysander advises the Lacedaemonians that the royal power be done away with,AND a leader be chosen from all,to cond ct the war. Here the one is necessary to the other. [LOCATIVE.265] 3.As a r le,the Abl.Abs.can stand only when it is not identical with the s bject ,object,or dependent case of the verbal predicate. Manli s slew the Ga l and stripped him of his necklace is to be rendered : Manli s caes m Gall m torq e(Abl) spoliavit. This r le is freq ently violated at all periods of the lang age,for the p rpose either of emphasis or of stylistic effect.The shifted constr ction is clearer,mo re vigoro s,more conversational. Neq e ill m me vivo corr mpi sinam,PL.,B.,41 9;nor will I s ffer him to be deba ched while I am alive. The violation is most freq ent when the dependent case is in the Genitive : I g rtha fratre meo interfecto regn m ei s sceleris s i praedam fecit,S. ,I g.,14,11;J g rtha killed my brother,and(= after killing my brother) made his throne the booty of his crime. NOTES.1.The Pf.Part,of Deponents and Semi-deponents as an active in the Abl.Abs. is not fo nd in early Latin,and is not common in classical Latin,where it is alw ays witho t an object and is confined to verbs of Growth(principally ort s, coort s, nat s ),Death,and Motion.It becomes common later,being sed with an object from SALLUS T on. 2.The Pf.Part,of Deponents as a passive in the Abl.Abs.is confined in classical Latin to emerit s,pact s,partit s.

adept s(Ann.,1.7,8) and a s s(Ann.,iii.67,4). 3.The F t.Part.act.in the Abl.Abs.is post-Ciceronian,beginning with POLLIO and L IVY. 4.The impersonal se of the Abl.Abs.is fo nd not nfreq ently in early Latin and CICERO,rarely in CAESAR and SALLUST.Most of the forms so sed have become adver bial in character,as optato,sortito,intestato.cons lto,a spicate,directo,merito,etc.

SALLUST and LIVY,as well as later writers,extend the b t two cases :

sage.TACITUS,however,shows

The se of a following cla se dependent pon the Abl.is beg n in CICERO : adi ncto t(Off.,ii.12,42). SALLUST ses

a dito and comperto with the Infinitive. B t LIVY extends this constr ction very greatly,and introd ces the se of ne ter adjectives in the same way : incerto prae tenebris q id a t peterent a t vitarent,L.,xxviii.36,12.( It is freq ent in TACITUS. 5.The se of adjectives and s bstantives in the Abl.is not common in early Latin ,b t is a favorite sage of the classical period and later : me a ctore,C.,Or.,iii.14,54.(

6.A predicate s bstantive,with the participle,is rare,b t occ rs in good prose :

Praetore designato mort o filio,C.,T sc,,iii.28,70.(}N LOCATIVE. 411.In the Sing lar of the First and Second Declensions,names of Towns and Small islands are p t in the Locative of the Place Where. Pompei s hiemare Dyrrhachii,Apolloniae omnib sq e oppidis constit erat,CA ES.,B.C.,iii.5,i;Pompey had determined to winter at Dyrrhachi m,Apollonia,and al l the towns. Timothe s Lesbi(vixit),NEP.,xii.3,4;Timothe s lived at Lesbos. Rhodi ego non f i,sed f i in Bithynia,C.,Planc.,34,83;I was not at Rhode s,b t I was in Bithynia. [266 PREPOSITIONS.] REMARKS.1.A few s bstantives of the Third Declension also form sporadic Locative s;so Carthagini, in PLAUTUS,CICERO,and later; Tib ri in CICERO,LIVY,and later,and a few others.See 386. 2.Other Locative forms are, domi,at home(61,R.2), h mi,on the gro nd(first in CICERO), belli,and militiae,in the combinations domi militiaeq e, belli domiq e,in peace and in war,at home and in the field;

r ri,in the co ntry(b t r re meo,on my farm). Parvi s nt foris arma nisi est consili m domi,C.,Off.,1.22,76; of little val e are arms abroad nless there is wisdom at home. Iacere h mi,C.,Cat.,1.10,26;to lie on the gro nd. H mi prosternere,L.,XLV.20,9; to throw flat on the gro nd. Belli is fo nd alone occasionally in TERENCE and CICERO;ENNIUS,VERGIL,and OVID have

terrae; VERGIL also campi. 3.Appositions are p t in the Ablative,commonly with in,and reg larly follow when q alified by an attrib te : Milites Albae constiter nt in rbe opport na,C.,Ph.,iv.2,6; the soldiers halted at Alba,a conveniently sit ated town. Archias Antiochlae nat s est celebri q ondam rbe,C.,Arch.,3,4;Archias w as born at Antioch,once a pop lo s city. When rbe,city, oppido,town,or ins la,island,

precedes,the preposition is always employed : In rbe Roma,in the city(of) Rome. In oppido Citio,in the town of Citi m. In Ins la Samo,in the island(of) Samos. 4.Domi takes the possessive prono n in the Genitive : Domi s ae senex est mort s,C.,N.D.,iii.32,81; the old man died at his o wn ho se.

Also alienae dom l(61,R.2),C.,T sc.,1.22,51; in a strange ho se; domi illi s,C.,Div.in Caec.,18,58;in his ho se. B t

in domo Pericli(65),NEP.,vii.2,1;in the ho se(hold) of Pericles. In domo casta,in a p re ho se.

Met is t meae domi c ret r diligenter,TER.,Hec.,257; yo will not be caref lly n rsed at my ho se.

fear that she

In domo,in the ho se(not,at home). NOTES.1.Early Latin shows a n mber of Locative forms that have disappeared for t he most part in the classical period.So temperi(tempori) replaced by tempore in CICERO(LIVY and TACITUS only in tempore); mani,replaced by mane; vesperi and heri;and rare forms like die,crastini,proximi.See 37,5. 2.On Locative forms of the prono ns,see 91,3.On animi,see 374,N.7.

412.The Prepositions are originally local adverbs,which serve to define more nar rowly the local ideas involved in the cases.The analogy of the local adverbs is followed by other adverbs,which are not so m ch prepositions as prepositional ad verbs.Of the Prepositions proper,that is,Prepositions [PREPOSITIONS.267] sed in composition(see Note),as well as in the regimen of cases,c m(con) does n ot clearly indicate a local relation.

The only cases that involve local ideas are the Acc sative and Ablative.The Acc sative,as the case of the Direct Object,represents the relation whither ? the Ab lative represents the relations whence? and where? REMARKS.1.In verbs of Motion,the Res lt of the Motion is often considered as Res t in a place(where).See 385,N.2. 2.In verbs of Rest,the Rest is sometimes conceived as the Res lt of Motion(whith er).See 385,N.3. NOTE.Prepositions derive their name from the fact that they are prefixed in comp osition.Many of the Latin Prepositions are not sed in composition,and these may be called improper Prepositions.The prefixes amb-(am- an-),dis(di),por-(porr-,p ol-),red-(re-),sed-(se-) and ve- are sometimes called inseparable prepositions. 413.Position of the Preposition.-- The Preposition generally precedes the case. REMARKS.1.C m always follows a personal prono n,and may or may not follow a rela tive prono n : mec m,with me; q oc m or c m q o,with whom. De is not ncommonly placed after q o and q a,rarely after q ib s.Positi on after the relative is fo nd here and there also in the case of other Preposit ions,b t principally in early Latin or the poets,as follows : ab,ad(also in CICERO),ex,in,per,post(after h nc,C.,T sc.,ii.6,15),and pr o. Dissyllabic Prepositions are postponed more often,b t CICERO restricts this to p rono ns,with the following Prepositions :

PREPOSITIONS.

ante,circa,contra,inter,penes,propter,sine, ltra. CAESAR postpones intra also. Ten s,as far as,and vers s,-ward,always follow. 2.When the s bstantive has an attrib te the Preposition may come between; hanc igit r ob ca sam(C.,Br.,24 ,94),for this reason,therefore. 3.The Preposition may be separated from its case by an attrib tive adjective or its eq ivalent,or other modifier of the case : post vero S llae victoriam,b t after S lla's victory; ad beate vivend m,for living happily. B t model prose s ally avoids separating the Preposition by more than a word or two.The poets have no scr ples. NOTES.1.A pec liarity of poetry,LIVY,and later prose is the post-position of bot h Preposition and attrib te :

2.Especially to be noted is the position of per,thro gh(by),in adj rations: Lydia dic per omnes te deos oro,H.,O.,1.8,1;Lydia,tell,by all the gods,I pray thee. Per ego te deos oro,TER.,And.,834;I pray thee,by the gods. 3.Between the Preposition and its case are often inserted the enclitics q e, ne, ve; and after ante,post,and praeter the conj nctions a tem, enim, q idem, tamen, vero, occ r,b t not freq ently.The first word in the combinations et - et, a t - a t, [268 PREPOSITIONS.] sim l - sim i, vel - vel, sometimes follows the Preposition;

met

in magno,L.,ix.37,11;in great fear.

c m et di rno et noct rno met ,C.,T sc.,v.23,66. 414.Repetition and Omission of the Preposition.--With different words which stan d in the same connection,the Preposition is repeated,when the Preposition is emp hatic,or the individ al words are to be disting ished;so reg larly after a t - ant, et - et, nec - nec, vel - vel, non modo - sed etiam, sed, nisi, q am, and in comparative cla ses with t.

Otherwise it is omitted;so always with q e. Et ex rbe et ex agris,C.,Cat.,ii.10,21;both from(the) city and from(the ) co ntry. De honore a t de dignitate contendim s,C.,T sc.,iii.21,50;we are strivin g abo t office,or abo t position. REMARKS.1.When a relative follows in the same constr ction as its antecedent,the Preposition is s ally omitted. (Cimon) incidit in eandem invidiam(in) q am pater s s,NEP.,v.3,1; Cimon fell into the same disrep te into which his father had fallen. 2.So in q estions : Ante temp s mori miser m.Q od tandem temp s ? C.,T sc.,i.39,93;a hard ca se() 'tis,to die before the time.(Before) what time,pray(=I pray yo to tell me) ? 3.After q asi,tamq am,sic t,the Preposition is more often inserted. R s ex rbe tamq am e vinclis evolaver nt,Cf.C.,Or.,ii.6,22;they sped fr om the city to the co ntry as if from a jail. 4.Two Prepositions are rarely sed with the same word.Either the word is repeate d,a form of "is" sed,or one Prep,t rned into an adverb : Pro Scipione et advers s Scipionem,for and against Scipio. Ante p gnam et post eam,before and after the battle. Et in corpore et extra [s nt] q aedam bona,C.,Fin.,ii.21,68.B t intra extraq e m nitiones,CAES.,B.C.,iii.72,2.

Ad,abo t,with n merals in CAESAR,LIVY,and later; advers s,to meet,especially in PLAUTUS and TERENCE;

415.As adverbs witho t a case are

sed :

ante and post of Time(403,N.4); contra,opposite,on the other hand; circa,ro nd abo t,and circ m(rare); prae,forward,in PLAUTUS and TERENCE; prope,near,and propter(rare); i xta,near by(rare); intra,inside(post-classical); extra,o tside; infra,below; s pra,above; s bter,beneath,and s per,above,both rare; citra,on this side; ltra,beyond; coram,in the presence of; clam,secretly.

I.- Prepositions Constr ed with the Acc sative. 416.The Prepositions constr ed with the Acc sative are : Ad,advers s,ante,ap d,circa,circ m,circiter,cis,citra, [PREPOSITIONS.269] clam,contra,erga,extra,Infra,inter,intra,i xta,ob,penes,per,post(pone),praeter,p rope,propter,sec nd m,s pra,trans, ltra, sq e,vers s. 1.Ad. Of Motion Whither,to, p to.Of Direction,towards (ad orientem). Of Respect,for,with regard to (ad has res perspicax); fo nd first in TERENCE. Of Manner,after,according to (ad h nc mod m); colloq ial

(in CICERO'S speeches only q em ad mod m). Of Place,at (= ap d),colloq ial (ad montem,C.,Fam.,xv.2,2) and legal (ad for m,ad te), rare in CICERO'S speeches. Of Time,at,refers only to f t re,and gives either a point (ad vesper m,at evening),

an interval (ad pa ces dies,a few days hence) ,or an approaching time,towards. With N merals,abo t. Of P rpose,for

(castra hosti ad praedam relinq nt,L.,iii.63,4). Also in phrases.Post-Ciceronian Latin extended the sphere of ad,and colloq ially it was often a s bstit te for the Dative. 2.Advers s(- m),[i.e.,t rned to]. Towards,over against,against.Rare in early Latin and in CAESAR and SALLUST.In th e sense,over against,it is fo nd first in LIVY.In the transferred sense,towards, it expresses s ally hostile disposition,b t begins to indicate friendly disposi tion in CICERO. Exadvers s(- m) is fo nd occasionally,beginning with CICERO,and is always local. 3.Ante [i.e.,over against,facing]. Of Place Where,before. Of Place Whither,before;rarely(not in CICERO). Of Time,before;the most freq ent se. Of Degree,before;not in CICERO or CAESAR. 4.Ap d is sed chiefly of Persons. At the ho se of(characteristic locality). In the presence of(i dicem). In the writings of(Platonem). In the view of. Of Place,at,in(= "in");common in comedy (ap d villam) ;rare elsewhere,especially with proper names,where ad was preferred,except by SA LLUST.In phrases like ap d se esse,to be in one's senses. 5.Circa(circ m).Aro nd.

Circ m is excl sively local(except once in VITRUVIUS,where it is tempora l).Circa in the local sense is fo nd first in CICERO. In the meaning abo t,of Time or N mber,it is fo nd first in HORACE.So,too,in the transferred sense of the sphere of mental action : circa virentis est anim s campos,H.,O.,11.5,5.(y}}) 6.Circiter. Of Place,abo t;once in PLAUTUS. Us ally of Time,abo t, especially with n merals;b t the prepositional sage is on the whole small. 7.Cis,citra. This side,short of. Of Place;cis fo nd first in VARRO,citra in CICERO. Cis is occasionally temporal in PLAUTUS,SALLUST,OVID. Citra,of Time,within,this side of; fo nd first in OVID. Witho t(stopping short of);fo nd first in LIVY,then in OVID,and the post-A g sta n prose writers. [270 PREPOSITIONS.] In C.,Or.,18,50,citra may be rendered f rther back;i.e.,nearer the beginning. 8.Clam. Secretly.With Acc.in early Latin,in the b.Hisp.,and in the J rists. With Abl.in CAESAR(B.C.,11.32,8),and in the b.Afr.,ii,4(both pa ssages disp ted). Clanc l m with Acc.,only in TERENCE. 9.Contra. Opposite to,over against,opposed to,against. It appears as a Preposition first in the classical period,and is sed both in lo cal and transferred senses.In the latter case the force is predominantly hostile . 10. Erga.Opposite,towards.

Of Place;very rarely,in early and late Latin.Us ally in the transferred sense of friendly relations. The hostile sense is occasional in comedy,NEPOS,and later writers. Erga is sed always of Persons or personified Things ntil the time of T ACITUS. 11. Extra.Witho t,o tside of,beside.

It is sed of local and transferred relations;rarely in the sense of

occasionally in sense of praeter,except. 12.Infra. Beneath,lower down. Of Space;more freq ently in classical Latin, of Rank or Grade; Temporal b t once(C.,Br.,10,40). It occ rs b t rarely in later Latin,and is cited only once from early Latin(TER. ,E n.,489). 13.Inter. Between. Of Place Where,rarely of Place Whither.Colloq ial were phrases like inter viam(vias),on the road, inter nos,between o rselves. Inter pa cos,preeminently, is post-classical. Of Time,d ring;at all periods,b t in CICERO principally in the Letters. 14.Intra. Within. Of Local and Temporal(not in CICERO) relations. The sage in transferred relations is post-classical,and mainly poetical. 15.I xta [i.e.,adjoining]. Hard by,near,next to. It appears as a Preposition first in VARRO,then in CAESAR,b t not in CICERO.It i s sed locally ntil LIVY,who employs it also in transferred senses of Time,Orde r,etc. 16.Ob [i.e.,over against,opposite to]. Right before. Of Place occasionally at all periods(not in CAESAR,LIVY,CURTIUS,TACITUS). Of Ca se,for;fo nd in early Latin(not with personal prono ns in PLAUTUS),in clas sical and post-classical Latin in increasing proportion.

rem(res) and ca sam.

CICERO and CAESAR do not

se

CAESAR

ses it only in form lae with

sine(TAC.,H.,1.49);

ob id or ob ea, which,fo nd in early Latin,reappear in SALLUST. Ob has almost completely s pplanted propter in TACITUS. With the s bstantive and participle(ob defens m Capitoli m) ob is fo nd first in LIVY. 17.Penes. With = in the hands of; of Persons. Applied to things,it is fo nd in poetry first in HORACE;in prose first in TACITU S. It is fo nd wholly with esse ntil later Latin. [PREPOSITIONS.271] 18.Per.

It is sed phraseologically in oaths,by; also with persons(sometimes things),as per me licet,as far as I am concerned yo may. Per = ab of Agent is fo nd only in late Latin. 19. Pone.Behind,

only in Local relations;it is most freq ent in PLAUTUS,occ rs b t once in CICERO ,never in CAESAR or HORACE,and is rare in general. 20. Post.Of Place,behind;

rare,b t in good sage. Of Time,after. Of Rank,s bordinate to;in SALLUST,poets,and late prose. 21.Praeter.Of Place,in front of,on before,past. In a transferred sense,except;contrary to(opinionem and the like). Of Rank,beyond

Of of of of of

Space,thro gh; Time,d ring; Ca se,owing to; Instr ment,by(both persons and things); Manner,by,in.

(praeter omnes is cited only from PLAUTUS and HORACE; s ally praeter cet eros). 22.Prope.Of Place,near; fo nd first in the classical period.It sometimes has the constr ctions of adject ives of Nearness. Of Time,near; very rare and post-classical,as LIVY,SUETONIUS. Propi s is fo nd first in CAESAR as a preposition. 23.Propter. Of Place,near. Of Ca se,on acco nt of; very common in early and classical Latin,b t avoided by many a thors,notably TACITUS. With s bstantive and participle it appears first in VARRO; then is common in LIV Y,and later. 24.Sec nd m [i.e.,following]. Of Place,along(lit s),close behind; very rare(C.,Fam.,iv.12,1). Of Time,immediately after;in early Latin and CICERO,common in LIVY,b t never in CAESAR,SALLUST,TACITUS. Of Series,next to;in PLAUTUS and CICERO. Of Reference,according to;at all periods. Sec s is ante-classical and rare. 25.S pra.

26.Trans. On the other side,beyond,across;only in Local relations. 27.Ultra. Of Space and Meas re,on that side,beyond. Of Time; only in late Latin. The early form ls

is very rare and in form lae,as,

In late Latin ltra s pplants praeter almost wholly. 28.Usq e, p to,

Cis Tiberim et

ls Tiberim.

Of Of Of Of

Place,above,beyond;so CICERO almost excl sively. Time,beyond; very rare. Grade,above. A thority,in charge of; VITRUVIUS and later.

is fo nd once in TERENCE,several times in CICERO,and occasionally later,with the Acc.of the name of a town. With other names of localities it appears first in LIVY. 29.Vers s,-ward. As a preposition it first appears in the classical period and is fo nd s ally with names of Towns,and small islands; with other words it is reg larly combined with the prepositions ad(not in CICERO ) or in. [272 PREPOSITIONS.] II.Prepositions Constr ed with the Ablative. 417.Prepositions constr ed with the Ablative are a(ab,abs), absq e, coram, c m, de, e(ex), prae, pro, sine, ten s; rarely fine,palam,proc l,sim l. 1. A(ab,abs).Of Place Whence,from,especially of the point of depart re;so i n phrases, a tergo, a capite,etc.

Note.- The form before vowels and h is always ab ; before consonants s ally a, tho gh ab is not ncommon before consonants other than the labials b, f, p, V, a nd is freq ent before 1,n,r,s,and i( j);abs is fo nd only before te and in the c ombination absq e.CICERO ses abs t in his early writings,b t prefers a te in hi s later ones. 2. Absq e [i.e.,off].Witho t.Pec liar to early Latin,where it is sed in co nditional sentences only.Occasionally in later Latin,as,absq e sententia(Q iNT., vii.2,44),for praeter sententiam. 3. Coram.Face to face with,in the presence of; it is sed with Persons only ,and is fo nd first in CICERO,and then in later writers,b t in general it is rar e ntil the time of TACITUS,who ses it very often in the Annals and always post pones. 4. C m..With; of Accompaniment in the widest sense.With Abl.of Manner reg l arly when there is no attrib tive;often when there is one.Sometimes it is sed o f m t al action : orare c m,plead with(PLAUTUS),etc. 5. De.Of Place,down from,and then from; especially with compo nds of de and ex.Of So rce,from; with verbs of Receiving(act al and mental).Of Origin; b t ma inly in poetry and later prose.Of Object,concerning.Of Time; in phrases de nocte ,de die(diem de die,day after day).Of the Whole from which a part is taken.Of Re ference,according to(de sententia).Of Material;poetical and late.

Of Of Of Of Of Of

Ca se,from(ira); beginning with LIVY. Agent,by. Remote Origin,from. Time,from. Reference,according to,after. Specification,in (doleo ab oc lis);often with compo nd verbs.

e,from; ex tempore is phraseological.Of Origin,from.Of Reference,according to.Of Manner;in many phrases,as ex aeq o,ex ordine.E is sed before consonants only,ex before both vowel s and consonants. 7. Fine(or fini).Up to;fo nd in PLAUTUS and CATO,then not ntil very late L atin.With the Gen.it occ rs in b.Afr.and in SALLUST,Fr.; then not ntil OVID and very late Latin. 8. Palam,in the sense of coram,in the presence of,is fo nd first in HORACE and LIVY,and is rare. [PREPOSITIONS.273] 9. Prae.Of Place,in front of; with verbs of Motion only,in classical Latin. In early Latin in the phrase prae man ,at hand.Of the Preventive Ca se,for;with negatives only,in and after the classical period;in early Latin,also in positive sentences.Of Comparison,in comparison with;occasionally at all periods. 10. Pro.Of Place,before; not in early Latin,b t fo nd first in the classical period,where it is confined to certain combinations,as pro rostris,castris,aede,vallo,etc., and means before and on.In behalf of; not cited for early Latin.Instead of; very common at all periods.In proportion to;at all periods. Q am pro;fo nd first in LIVY. 11. Proc l,far from,is poetical,and begins in prose with LIVY.In classical L atin prose always with ab.

14. Ten s,to the extent of.Of Space(act al and transferred),as far as.It is fo nd occasionally with the Gen.,b t almost wholly with Pl.,and perhaps b t once in CICERO(Arat.,83);otherwise it belongs to poetry,making its first appearance in prose in CICERO(Dei.,13,36) and LIVY.It occ rs with the Acc.in late Latin.Ten s is always postponed. III.Prepositions Constr ed with the Acc sative and Ablative.

1.In(the forms endo,ind ,are early and rare),(a) With Acc sative : Of Place,into ,into the midst of.Of Disposition and Direction,towards.Of Time,into(m ltam noct em),for(diem,m ltos annos,poster m).Of P rpose or Destination,for;mostly post-cl assical.Of Manner,in,after.Phraseologically with ne ter adjectives : in dsteri s ,for the worse;b t mainly post-classical.With Distrib tives,to,among. (b) With Ablative : Of Place,in,on.Of Time,within.Of Reference,in the case of,in regard to,in the matter of.Of Condition,in (armis).In many phrases,especially w ith ne ter adjectives,in incerto,d bio,integro,ambig o,etc. 2.S b.(a) With Acc sative : Of Place Whither, nder.Of Time Approaching,abo t(noc tem,vesper m);j st Past,immediately after.Of Condition, nder(s b potestatem redi

418.Prepositions constr ed with the Acc sative and Ablative are in,s b,s bter,s per.

13.

Sine,witho t,is opposed to c m.

12.

Sim l,in the sense of c m,belongs to poetry and TACITUS(Ann.,in.64).

6.

E(ex).Of Place,o t of,from.Often in phraseological sages,as ex parte,partly;ex asse,and the like.With verbs of Receiving,from.Of Tim

gi). (b) With Ablative : Of Place Where, nder; also in phrases,s b armis,etc.Of Time When,abo t;rare,and first in CAESAR.Of Position, nder(rege,i dice,etc.).Of Condi tion, nder(ea condicione);first in LIVY. [274 INFINITIVE.] 3.S bter,(a) With Acc sative;rare,and locally eq al to s b. (6) With the Ablative;more rare and almost wholly poetical(CATULLUS and VERGIL). Cf.C.,T sc.,v.i,4,which may be Acc.S bt s occ rs only in VITR.,iv.2,5,and then w ith the Acc sative. 4.S per,(a) With Acc sative b t once before the classical time : Of Place,over,a bove.Of Time,d ring;fo nd first in PLINY,Epp.Metaphorically of Degree,beyond(s p er mod m);post-classical. (b) With the Ablative : Of Space,above.Of Time,d ring(not ntil the A g stan poe ts).Metaphorically = praeter;very rare : = de,concerning;colloq ial;hence in PLA UTUS,CATO,CICERO'S Letters(ad Att),SALLUST,HORACE,LIVY; b t ncommon. INFINITIVE. The Infinitive as a S bstantive. 419.The Infinitive is the s bstantive form of the verb. NOTE.--The Infinitive differs from a verbal s bstantive in that it retains the a dverbial attrib te,the designations of voice and time,and the regimen of the ver b : Amare,to love; valde amare,to love h gely; amari,to be loved; amavisse,to have loved; amare aliq em,to love a man; nocere alic i,to h rt a man. B t the great claim of the Infinitive to be considered a verb lies in the invol tion of predicate and s bject.Like the finite verb,the Infinitive involves predi cate and s bject;b t the s bj.is indefinite and the predication is dependent. 420.The Infinitive,when it stands alone,involves an indefinite Acc sative S bjec t,and the Predicate of that S bject is,of co rse,in the Acc sative Case. Regem esse,to be king. Bon m esse,to be good. Compare q id st lti s q am aliq em eo sibi placere q od ipse non fecit, SEN.,E.M .,74,17;what is more foolish than for a man to(that a man sho ld) pride himself on what he has not done himself. So in the paradigm of the verb : Amat r m esse,to be abo t to love. NOTE.On the Nom.with the Inf.by Attraction,see 528.

In conseq ence of this do ble nat re,the Infinitive may be sed as a s bstantive or as a verb. 421.The Infinitive,as a s bstantive,is sed reg larly in two cases only Nominati ve and Acc sative.In the other cases its place is s pplied by the Ger nd and the Ablative S pine. NOTES.1.Traces of the original Dat.(or Loc.) nat re of the Infinitive are still apparent iii many constr ctions,which are,however,mostly poetical : [INFINITIVE.275]

Abiit aedem visere Minervae,PL.,B.,900;she went away to visit the temple of Minerva. Semper in Ocean m mittit me q aerere gemmas,PROP.,ii.(iii.) 16 (8),17;sh e is always sending me to the Ocean to look for(in q est of) pearis. (b) With verbs of Giving,Rendering,and the like,in early Latin and the poets,whe re the Acc.of the Ger ndive is to be expected.Classical is the se of bibere onl y,in this way.(The old form biber points to the effacement of the final sense of this Inf.) Iovi bibere ministrare,Cf.C.,T sc.,1.26. Q em vir m a t heroa lyra vel acri tibia s mes celebrare,Clio? H.,O.,1.1 2,1. Different,of co rse,are cases like di tibi posse t os trib ant detendere semper,Ov.,Tr.,iii.5,21,where poss e defendere is felt as potestatem defendendi.

In early Latin the adjectives are parat s,cons et s,defess s. B t this sage is widely extended by the A g stan poets VERGIL and HORACE,and la ter. It is confined principally,however,to adjectives of capability,ability,necessity ,etc.,and adjectives like facilis(with act.as well as pass.Inf.,first in PROP.), difficilis,and the like : Roma capi facilis,LUCAN,ii.656. Note the strange sage dissentire manifest s,TAC.,Ann.,ii.57,4, and occasionally elsewhere.

(c) With many adjectives where the S p,in o be expected.

,or some constr ction of P rpose,is t

(a) With verbs of Motion in early Latin and the later poets,when ndive or S p.is to be expected.

t,ad with Ger

2.The Inf.may take an adj.attrib te,b t in classical prose this is limited to ips m,hoc ipsnm,and tot m hoc : Vivere ips m t rpe est nobis,living itself is a disgrace to s. Q ib sdam tot m hoc displicet philosophari(280,i,a). The Infinitive as a S bject. 422.The Infinitive,as a S bject,is treated as a ne ter s bstantive.

Miser m est det rbari fort nis omnib s,C.,Q inct.,3 1,95;it is wretched to find one's self t rned r dely o t of all one's fort nes. Non tam t rpe f it vinci q am contendisse decor m est,Ov.,M.,ix.6(280,2, a). NOTES.1.The se of the Inf.as a s bj.grew o t of its se as an obj.,b t the orig inal Dat.(Loc.) sense was lost to the conscio sness j st as the prepositional se nse of o r own "to" is lost when o r Inf.becomes a s bj.; as in,"to err is h man ,to forgive divine".No Roman felt t rpe f it vinci,as,"there was disgrace in being beaten"; bon m est legere was to him another bona est lectio(see PRISCIAN,408,27). 2.The s bstantives sed as predicates are not common in early Latin. L bido est is confined to PLAUTUS. St ltitia est, consili m est,and temp s est are niversal.CICERO introd ces the not ncommon mos est, and many others with est,as : cons et do(-inis),viti m,i s,fas,nefas,facin s,fat m,cap t,res(CAESAR), op s,m n s,offici m,on s,sapientia,and a few others. Still more are fo nd later.Many of these also take t;

so offici m always in comedy(except TER.,And.,331). 3.Ne ter adjectives are sed as predicates in great variety.Ciceronian are certi s (q am), consentane m, fals m,incredibile, integr m,glorios m, ma i s(q am),mir m,novom,optim m,rect m,sing lare,trit m,verisimile,ver m. Most of them,however,b t once.Some of these also take t,b t not often in good prose.

Incipere m lto est q am inpetrare facili s,PL.,Poen.,974;beginning is m ch easier(work) than winning.

[276 INFINITIVE.]

condecet,disp det,s bolet, and adds some,s ch as paenitet,dedecet,displicet,prodest,obest,attinet. Others come in later.Some,s ch as oportet,also take t or the simple S bjv.Noteworthy is est,it is possible, fo nd first in VARRO and LUCR.,then not till VERG.and Hor.,and never common. 5.Certain abstract phrases,whose meanings are akin to the words already mentione d,take the Inf.as a s bject.So especially predicate Genitives,as cons et dinis and meris; or combinations like q id negotii, nihil negotii est; predicate Datives s ch as cordi est, c rae est, both nclassical;or phrases,as

operae preti m, in animo esse, in mentem venire, of which the last two were introd ced by CICERO. The Infinitive as an Object. 423.1.The Infinitive is sed as the Object of Verbs of Creation,commonly known a s A xiliary Verbs. These Verbs help the Infinitive into existence. 2.S ch verbs denote Will,Power,D ty,Habit,Inclination,Resolve,Contin ance,End,an d the like,with their opposites. Emori c pio,TER.,Hea t.,971;I want to die. [Cato] esse q am videri bon s malebat,S.,C.,54,5;Cato preferred being(go od) to seeming good.

Sed precor

t possim t ti s esse miser,Ov.,Tr.,v.2,78;b t I pray that I

4.In early Latin many impersonal verbs are tains most of them,b t drops

sed as predicates.Classical Latin re

may be more safely wretched. Vincere scis,Hannibal;victoria ti nescis,L.,xxii.51;how to win victory, yo know,Hannibal; how to make se of victory,yo know not. Q i mori didicit,servire dedidicit,SEN.,E.M.,26,10;he who has learned to die has nlearned to be a slave. Maledictis deterrere ne scribat parat,TER.,Ph.,3;he is preparing(trying) to frighten(him) from writing,by ab se.(in Prolog e) Q i mentiri solet,peierare cons evit,C.,Rosc.Com.,16,46;he who is wont t o lie is acc stomed to swear falsely. V lnera q ae fecit deb it ipse pati,Ov.,Am.,ii.3,4;the wo nds he gave he sho ld himself have s ffered. Vereor la dare praesentem,C.,N.D.,1.21,58;I feel a delicacy abo t praisi ng a man to his face. Religion m anim m nodis exsolvere pergo,LUCR.,1.932; I go on to loose th e spirit from the bonds of s perstitio s creeds. T a q od nil refert,percontari desinas,TER.,Hec.,810;cease to inq ire wh at is not to yo r advantage. So habeo,I have(it in my power). Tant m habeo polliceri me tibi c m late satisfact r m,C.,Fam.,I.5 A.3;so m ch I can promise,that I will give yo ab ndant satisfaction. NOTES.1.The original force of the Inf.is,in most of these constr ctions,hard to determine,and was certainly not felt by the Romans themselves.In many cases the Inf.seems to have been sed beca se the governing word or phrase was felt to be more or less eq ivalent to a Verb of Creation. 2.The principal verbs,constr ed th s with the Inf.,are as follows : Will : velle,malle,nolle,c pere,optare(rare,except in passive),petere,pest lare ,: [INFINITIVE.277] met ere(anto-class.),vereri,timere,formidare(ante-class.),reformidare,ho rrere,horrescere,hortari and compo nds,monere and compo nds,s adere(first in Cic.),pers adere,i bere, imp erare,praecipere,cogere,permittere(once in Cic.,then later),concedere(first in C ic.),c rare(not in CAES.,SALL.,LIVY),vetare,rec sare(first in Cic.),mittere, omi ttere,intermittere,c nctari,cessare,morari,d bitare,gravari,prohibere,impedire,d eterrere. Power : posse,q ire,neq ire,s stinere(first in Cic.),valere(first in Cic.), poll ere(first in Cic.),habere(rare,except in Cic.),scire,nescire. D ty : debere,necesse habeo. avere,a dere,desiderare(first in Cic.),praegestire,gestire,ardere,

Habit : ass escere,ass efacere(first in Cic.),cons escere,solere. Inclination : conari(only with Inf.),st dere,contendere,intendere(CAES.),laborare(alwa ys with neg.in Cic.), moliri(rare),aggredi,ingredi,adoriri,niti (first in CAES.), eniti(ante-c lass,and post-class.),q aerere(first in Cic.),temptare (first in HIBTIUS). Resolve . cogitare,meditari,memini(mostly poet.),parare,stat ere(first in Cic.), c onstit ere(first in TER.),decernere(not class,in pass.),i dicare(first in Cic.), destinare(first in CAES.),cert m est,deliberat m est,proposit m est (first in C ic.). Contin ance : stare(first in Cic.),instare,perstare(once in Cic.,then late), persevera re(first in Cic.),properare(only word sed in early Latin), festinare(first in C ic.),mat rare(first in Cic.). Beginning and End : coepi,incipere(first in Cic.),exordiri,pergere,desinere. Poets are free in sing the Inf.after other verbs. 3.Notice that coepi,I have beg n, and desino,I cease,

later the constr ction varies,and TACITUS does not observe the r le. Bello Athenienses ndiq e premi s nt coepti,NEP.,xiii.3,1;the Athenians began to feel the press re of war on(from) all sides. Veteres orationes legi s nt desitae,C.,Br.,32,123;the old speeches have ceased to be read. When the passives are really reflexives or ne ter,the active forms may be sed. 4.Verbs of Will and Desire take " t" as well as the Infinitive.So reg larly opto,I choose,in classical prose. 5.Verbs which denote Hope,Promise,and Threat are treated as verbs of Saying and Thinking(530),b t also occasionally as in English : Sperant se maxim m fr ct m esse capt ros,C.,Lael.,21,79;they hope that t hey will derive great advantage. S br pt r m pallam promisit tibi,PL.,Asin.,930;he promised to steal the mantle from yo . 6."Doceo",I teach, i beo,I bid, veto,I forbid,

are s;

sed in Pf .pass,with passive Infinitives,in early Latin,CICERO,CAESAR,alway

sino,I let, take the Inf.as a Second Acc sative(339) : (Dionysi s) ne coll m tonsori committeret tondere filias s as doc it, C. ,T sc.,v.20,58;Dionysi s,to keep from tr sting his neck to a barber,ta ght his d a ghters to shave(ta ght them shaving). Ipse i bet mortis te meminisse de s,MART.,ii.59(376). Vitae s mma brevis spem nos vetat inchoare longam,H.,O.,1.4,15;life's br ief s m forbids s open(a) long(acco nt with) hope. d ride Ne sinas Medos eq itare in ltos,H.,O.,1.2,51;nor let the Median ride an np nished.The Infinitive as a Predicate.

Docto homini et er dito vivere est cogitare,C.,T sc.,v.38,111;to a learn ed and c ltivated man to live is to think. [278 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.] GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 425.The other cases of the Infinitive are s pplied by the Ger nd.With Prepositio ns,the Ger nd,and not the Infinitive,is employed. N. Legere difficile est,reading(to read) is hard to do. G. Ars legendi,the art of reading. P er st dios s est legendi,the boy is ealo s of reading. D. P er operam dat legendo,the boy devotes himself to reading. Ac.P er c pit legere,the boy is desiro s to read. P er propens s est ad legend m,the boy has a bent toward reading. AB.P er discit legendo,the boy learns by reading. NOTE.Of co rse the Inf.may be q oted as an abstract notion,a form of the verb : M lt m interest inter " dare " et " accipere," SEN.,Sen.,5,10;there is a vast difference between "Give" and "Receive." 426.As a verbal form,the Ger nd,like the Infinitive,takes the same case as the v erb. Homines ad deos n lla re propi s acced nt,q am sal tem hominib s dando. C.,Lig.,12,38;men draw nearer to the gods by nothing so m ch as by bringing deli verance to their fellow-men. NOTES.1.The Ger nd is the s bstantive of the Ger ndive(251,N.1).The most pla sib le theory connects the forms in -nd -with those in -nt-(Pr.Part,active) as being verbal no ns originally witho t any distinction of voice.The signification of n ecessity comes mainly from the se as a predicate,i.e.,thro gh the characteristi c idea.Th s,he who is being loved,implies he who is of a character to be loved(q

424.The Infinitive,as a verbal s bstantive,may be cop la "esse",to be,and the like.

sed as a Predicate after the

i amet r),and then he who sho ld be loved.

The Ger ndive is passive : the Ger nd,like other verbal no ns(363),is theoretica lly active or passive,according to the point of view.Practically,however,the pas sive signification of the Ger nd is rare. I g rtha ad imperand m(= t ei imperarat r,perhaps an old military form la) Tisidi m vocabat r,Cf.S.,I g.,62,8.

2.Ger ndive and Pf .Part,passive are often translated alike;b t in the one case the action is progressive or prospective,in the other it is completed. Caesare interficiendo Br t s et Cassi s patriae libertatem restit ere co nati s nt;by the m rder of Caesar(by m rdering Caesar),Br t s and Cassi s endeav o red to restore their co ntry's freedom to her. Caesare interfecto,Br t s et Cassi s patriae libertatem non restit er nt ;by m rdering Caesar,Br t s and Cassi s did not restore their co ntry's freedom to her. 427.Ger ndive for Ger nd.Instead of the Ger nd,with an Acc sative Object,the obj ect is generally p t in the case of the Ger nd,with the Ger ndive as an Attrib t e. G.Placandi Dei,of appeasing God. D.Placando Deo,for appeasing God. AB.Placando Deo,by appeasing God. [GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.279] In model prose this constr ction is invariably employed with Prepositions. Ad placandos Deos,for appeasing the gods(C.,Cat.,iii.8,20). In placandis Diis,in appeasing the gods. NOTES.1.It is impossible to make a distinction between the Ger nd and the Ger nd ive form.They are often sed side by side,where there can be no difference(L.,xx i.5,5;xxv.40,6;xxviii.37,1;xxxi.26,6).The preference for the Ger ndive is of a p iece with the se of the Pf.Part.pass,in preference to an Abstract S bstantive ( 360,R.2). 2.The impersonal Ger ndive is fo nd with an Acc.obj.once in PLAUTUS(agitand mst vigilias,Trin.,869),and occasionally elsewhere in early Latin(principally VARRO) ;very rarely in CICERO and for special reasons(Cat.M.,2,6);here and there later( not in CAESAR,HORACE,OVID,and,perhaps,LIVY). Aeternas q oniam poenas in morte timend mst,LUCR.,1.m;since we m st fear eternal p nishments in death. 3.Ne ter adjectives and prono ns are not attracted : aliq id faciendi ratio,C.,Inv.,1.25,36;method of doing something. C piditas pl ra habendi,greed for having more. B t when the ne ter adjective has become a s bstantive(204,N.2),the Ger ndive fo rm may be sed : c piditas veri videndi,C.,Fin.,ii.14,46;the desire of seeing the tr th.

4.The Ger ndive with personal constr ction can be formed only from Transitive Ve rbs,like other passives(217).Hence the impersonal form m st be sed for all verb s that do not take the Acc.,b t with s ch verbs prepositions are rarely fo nd. Ad non parend m senat i,L.,XLII.9;for not obeying the senate. 5.B t the Ger ndives from tor,fr or,f ngor,potior,vescor(407)

have the personal constr ction,b t s ally only in the obliq e cases(C.,Fin.,1.1 ,3,is an exception),as a remnant of then-original sage. The poets and later prose writers se still more forms in the same way,as laetand s,dolend s,medend s,paenitend s,etc. CICERO also shows single instances of gloriand s,disserend s,respondend s. 6.The se of the Nom.of the Ger ndive follows the ordinary r les of the Nomina t ive. Genitive of the Ger nd and Ger ndive. 428.The Genitive of the Ger nd and Ger ndive is sed chiefly after s bstantives and adjectives which req ire a complement : Sapientia ars vivendi p tanda est,C.,Fin.,I.13,42;philosophy is to be co nsidered the art of living. Et propter vitam vivendi perdere ca sas,J v.,viii.84;and on acco nt of l ife,to lose the reasons for living. Ra caq e garr litas st di mq e immane loq endi,Ov.,M.,v.678;and hoarse c hattiness,and a monstro s love of talking. Triste est nomen ips m carendi,C.,T sc.,1.36,87; dismal is the mere word " carere "(go witho t). Non est placandi spes mihi n lla Dei,Ov.,Tr.,v.8,22;I am not witho t hop e of appeasing God. Ignorant c pidi maledicendi pl s invidiam q am convici m posse, QUINT.,v i.2,16;those who are eager to ab se know not that envy has more power than billi ngsgate. (Tit s) eq itandi peritissim s f it,SUET.,Tit.,3;Tit s was exceedingly s kilf l in riding. Ne ter s i protegendi corporis memor(erat),L.,ii.6,9;neither tho ght of shielding his own body. [280 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.] Q i hic mos obsidendi vias et viros alienos appellandi ? L.,xxxiv.2,9;wh at sort of way is this of blocking p the streets and calling pon other women's h sbands ? S mma el dendi occasiost mihi n nc senes,TER.,Ph.,885; I have a tip-top chance to fool the old chaps now. REMARKS.1.As mei,t i,s i,nostri,vestri,are,in their origin,ne ter sing lars,from

me m,my being,t m,thy being,s m,one's being,etc.,the Ger ndive is p t in the same form : conservandi s i,of preserving themselves; vestri adhortandi,of exhorting yo ; and no regard is had to n mber or ge nder. Copia placandi sit modo parva t i,Ov.,Her.,20,74;let(me) only have a sli ght chance of trying to appease yo (feminine).

ca sa,less often with gratia,and rarely with(antiq ated) ergo,on acco nt of,to express Design : Dissim landi ca sa in senat m venit,S.,C.,31,52; he came into the senate for the p rpose of dissim lation. The Gen.alone in this final sense is fo nd once in TERENCE,several times in SALL UST,occasionally later,especially in TACITUS. (Lepid s arma) capit libertatis s bvort ndae,S.,Phil.Fr.,10; Lepid s too k p arms as a matter of(for the p rpose of) s bverting freedom. More commonly ad,rarely ob.See 432. Esse with this Gen.may be translated by serve to;this is occasional in CICERO;se e 366,429,1. Omnia discrimina talia concordiae min endae [s nt],L.,xxxiv.54,5; all s ch distinctions are matters of(belong to) the diminishing of concord(serve to di minish concord).Compare CAES.,B.G.,v.8,6: [naves] q as s i q isq e commodi fecerat,ships which each one had(had) m ade (as a matter) of personal convenience. NOTES.1.In early Latin,in CICERO(early works,Philippics and philosophical writin gs),then in later a thors,we find occasionally a Gen.Sing,of the Ger nd,followed by a s bstantive in the Pl ral.Here it is better to conceive the second Gen.as objectively dependent pon the Ger nd form. Agit r tr m Antonio fac ltas det r agror m s is latronib s condonandi, C.,Ph.,v.3,6;the q estion is whether Antony shall receive the power of giving aw ay(of) lands to his pet highwaymen. 2. Fas est, nefas est, i s est, fat m est, copia est, ratio est, consili m est, consili m capere, consili m inire,

and a few others,have often the Inf.where the Ger nd might be expected.Sometimes there is a difference in meaning;th s temp s,with Ger nd,the proper time(season),with Inf.,high time.

2.The Gen.of the Ger nd and Ger ndive is

sed very commonly with

The poets and later prose writers extend this sage of the Infinitive. 3.Another pec liarity of the poets is the constr ction of the adj.or s bst.like the cognate verb with the Inf.,instead of with the Gen.of the Ger nd. (At) sec ra q ies et nescia fallere(= q ae nesciat fallere) vita, V.,G., 11.467;q iet witho t a care,and a life that knoweth not how to disappoint(ignora nt of disappointment). Later prose is more caref l in this matter. 4.The Gen.of Ger nd,depending pon a verb,is rare and Tacitean(Ann.,ii.43).TACIT US also ses the appositional Ger nd with a s bstantival ne ter(Ann.,xiii.26). [GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.281] 5.Some s bstantives,like

a ctor, d x,may have a Dat.instead of a Gen.; Liv.,1.23 : me Albani gerendo bello d cem creavere. Dative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive. 429.The Dative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive is sed chiefly after words that deno te Fitness and F nction. 1.The sage is rare in classical Latin,and begins with a few verbs and phrases :

esse(= parem esse),to be eq al to; praeesse and praeficere,to be(p t) in charge of; st dere and operam addere,laborem impertire,to give one's attention to; then it is sed with a few s bstantives and adjectives to give the object for wh ich,and with names of Boards. Solvendo civitates non erant,Cf.C.,Fam.,iii.8,2;the comm nities were not eq al to(ready for) payment'(were not solvent). [Sapiens] vires s as novit,scit se esse oneri ferendo,SEN.,E.M.,71,26;th e wise man is acq ainted with his own strength;he knows that he is(eq al) to bea ring the b rden. So comitia decemviris creandis(C.,Leg.Agr.,2,8); tri mvir coloniis ded cendis(S.,I g.,42); reliq a tempora demetendia fr ctib s accommodata s nt,C.,Cat.M.,19,70. 2.Classical Latin req ires ad with the Acc.,b t from LIVY on the se of this Dat .spreads,and it is fo nd reg larly after words which imply Capacity and Adaptati on.It is fo nd also technically with verbs of Decreeing and Appointing,to give t he P rpose. Aq a nitrosa tilis est bibendo,Cf.PLIN.,N.H.,xxxi.32,59; alkaline water is good for drinking(to drink).

Lign m arid m materia est idonea eliciendis ignib s,Cf.SEN.,N.Q.,ii.22,1 ;dry wood is a fit s bstance for striking fire(drawing o t sparks). Refer ndae ego habeo ling am natam gratiae,PL.,Pers.,428;I have a tong e that's born for showing thankf lness. NOTES.1.In early Latin the se of this Dat.is very restricted,it being fo nd pri ncipally after st dere; operam dare, or s mere(both revived by LIVY); finem (or mod m) facere; and a few adjectival forms.Of the latter,CICERO ses only accommodat s,CAESAR only par.

Epidic m operam q aerendo dabo,PL.,Ep.,605. Acc sative of the Ger ndive. 430.The Ger ndive is sed in the Acc sative of the Object to be Effected,after s ch verbs as Giving and Taking,Sending and Leaving,Letting,Contracting,and Under taking.(Factitive Predicate.) Diviti homini id a r m servand m dedit,PL.,B.,338;he gave that gold to a rich man to keep. [282 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.] Conon m res reficiendes c rat,NEP.,ix.4,5; Conon has the walls reb ilt. Patriam diripiendam reliq im s,C.,Fam.,xvi.12,1;we have left o r co ntry to be pl ndered. [Carvili s] aedem faciendam locavit,L.,x.46,14;Carvili s let the(contrac t of) b ilding the temple. Of co rse,the passive form has the Nominative : Fili s Philippi Demetri s ad patrem red cend s legatis dat s est, L.,xxx vi.35,13;the son of Philip,Demetri s,was given to the envoys to be taken back to his father. NOTES.1.Early Latin shows with this constr ction dare,cond cere,locare,rogare,petere,habere,propmare. Classical Latin gives p rogare,petere,propinare,b t adds others,as tradere,obic ere,concedere,committere,c rare,relinq ere,proponere. LIVY introd ces s scipere.The se of ad in place of the simple Acc.is not common . [Caesar] oppid m ad diripiend m militib s concessit,CAES.,B.C.,iii.80,6. B t ad is necessary in

2.Rare and

nclassical is the Acc.in dependence pon a Dat.of the Ger nd.

nemini se ad docend m dabat,C.,Br.,89,306;he wo ld yield to no one for t eaching,i.e.,wo ld accept no one as a p pil. 2. Habeo dicend m and the like for habeo dicere,or,habeo q od dicam,belongs to later Latin(TAC.,Dial.,37;Ann.iv.40,etc.). Ablative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive. 431.The Ablative of the Ger nd or Ger ndive is sed as the Ablative of Means and Ca se,seldom as the Ablative of Manner or Circ mstance. Un s homo nobis c nctando restit it rem,ENNIUS(C.,Cat.M.,4,10); one man by lingering raised o r ca se again. Hominis mens discendo alit r et cogitando,C.,Off.,I.30,105; the h man mi nd is no rished by learning and thinking. Pla s m meo nomine recitando deder nt,Cf.C.,Att.,iv.i,6;they clapped whe n my name was read. Exercendo cottidie milite hostem opperiebat r,L.,xxxiii.3,5; drilling th e soldiers daily he waited for the enemy. NOTES.1.The Abl.with adjectives is post-Ciceronian : digna stirps s scipiendo(instead of q ae s sciperet) patris imperio, TAC .,Ann.,xiii.14. So too with verbs : contin ando abstitit magistrat ,L.,ix.34,2. 2.The Abl.after a comparative is cited only from C.,Off.,1.15,47. 3.In post-A g stan Latin,and occasionally earlier,we find the Abl.of the Ger nd paralleled by the Pr.participle :

Prepositions with the Ger nd and Ger ndive. 432.The Acc sative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive follows the preposition ad, seldom ante,circa,in,inter,ob, and propter.See 427. N lla res tant m ad dicend m proficit q ant m scriptio,C.,Br.24,92; noth ing is as profitable for speaking as writing . [SUPINE.283]

Attic s philosophor m praeceptis ad vitam agendam non ad ostentationem tebat r, Cf.NEP.,xxv.17,3; Attic s made se of the precepts of philosophers for the cond ct of life,not for display.

Bocch s,se rep tando(= rep tans) ...se

admonit s,etc.,S.,I g.,103,2.

Inter spoliand m corp s hostis exspiravit,Cf.L.,ii.20,9; while in the ac t of stripping the body of the enemy he gave p the ghost.a

(pal s Romanos ad inseq end m tardabat,CAES.,B.G.,vii.26,2/ with s bstantives to give the End(for); with adjectives of Capacity and Adaptation(apt s,facilis,etc.).See 439,2. NOTES.1.Ante is very rare(L.,Praef.,6; V.,G.,iii.206). Circa and erga are post-A g stan and very rare. In gives the End For Which,and is classical b t not common. Inter is temporal,d ring,while,and is fo nd rarely in early,more often i n later,b t not in classical prose. Ob is sed first by CICERO(not by CABSAB),and is rare. Propter occ rs first in VALERIUS MAXIMUS; s per first in TACITUS. 2.On the Infinitive after a Preposition,see 435. 433.The Ablative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive takes the prepositions ab,de,ex,often in,b t seldom pro.Post-classic and rare are c m and s per . Prohibenda maxime est ira in p niendo,C.,Off.,I.25,89; especially to be forbidden is anger in p nishing. [Br t s] in liberanda patria(= d m liberat) est interfect s, C.,Cat.M.,2 0,75;Br t s was slain in the effort to free his co ntry. Philosophi in iis libris ipsis q os scrib nt de contemnenda gloria s a n omina inscrib nt, C.,T sc.,1.15,84(385,B.i). Ex discendo capi nt vol ptatem,Cf.C.,Fin.,v.18,48;they receive pleas re from learning. NOTES.1.In with Abl.is sometimes almost eq ivalent to a Pr.participle : In circ me ndo exercit animadvertit,b.Afr.,82. 2.Sine is sed once in VARRO,L.L.,6,75,and in DONATUS(sine d cenda Phil mena TE R.,And.,391). 3.Even when the word and not the action is meant,the Ger nd is the r le : Discrepat a timendo confidere,C.,T sc.,iii.7,14;the Inf.in VARRO,L.L.,6, 50.

SUPINE. 434.The S pine is a verbal s bstantive,which appears only in the Acc sative and Ablative cases. The Acc sative S pine.

435.The Acc sative S pine(S pine in - m) is o express Design.

sed chiefly after verbs of Motion,t

REMARK.Ad is very common;noteworthy is its

se with verbs of Hindering

Galliae legati ad Caesarem grat lat m convener nt,CAES.,B.G.,I.30,1;the comm issioners of Ga l came to congrat late Caesar. [284 SUPINE.] Spectat m veni nt; veni nt spectent r t ipsae,Ov.,A.A.,1.99; they come to s ee the show; they come to be themselves a show. (Galli gallinacei) c m sole e nt c bit m,PLIN.,N.H.,x.24,46; cocks go to roo st at s nset.Y St ltitia est venat m d cere invitas canes,Pl..,St.,139; 'tis foolishness to take nwilling dogs a-h nting.aNy NOTES.1.ire and venire are the most common verbs with the S pine,and they form m any phraseological sages,as : ire coct m,c bit m,dormit m,past m,s pplicat m,sess m,sal tat m,etc. Similarly dare is fo nd in phrases with n pt m,ven m,pess m. 2.The S pine is very common in early Latin,less so in CICERO,comparatively rare in CAESAR,freq ent again in SALLUST and LIVY.Later Latin,and especially the poet s,show b t few examples,as the final Inf.takes its place. 3.The Acc.S pine may take an object,b t the constr ction is not very common : (Hannibal) patriam defens m(more s al,ad defendendam patriam) revocat s(est ), NEP.,xxiii6,1;Hannibal was recalled to defend his co ntry. 4.The F t.Inf.passive is act ally made p of the passive Inf.of ire,to go,iri(th at a movement is made,from it r;208,2),and the S pine : R mor venit dat m iri gladiatores,TER.,Hec.,39;the r mo r comes that gladiat ors(gladiatorial shows) are going to be given. The conscio sness of this is lost,as is shown by the Nom.(528). Re s damnat m iri videbat r,QUINT.,ix.2,88;the acc sed seemed to be abo t to be condemned. The Ablative S pine. 436.The Ablative S pine(S pine in - ) is sed chiefly with Adjectives,as the Abl ative of the Point of View From Which(397).It never takes an object. Mirabile dict ,wonderf l(in the telling) to tell, vis ,to behold. Id dict q am re facili s est,L.,xxxi.38,4;that is easier in the saying than in the fact(easier said than done). NOTES.1.CICERO and LIVY are the most extensive sers of this S pine;CAESAR has b t two forms : fact and nat ; SALLUST b t three;CICERO ses twenty-fo r.In early Latin and in the poets the s age is ncommon;in later Latin it grows.Altogether there are over one h ndred S pines,b t only abo t twenty-five S pines occ r in Abl.alone;the most common are

dict ,to tell, fact ,to do, a dit ,to hear, vis ,to see, memorat ,relat ,tractat ; then,less often, cognit ,to know, invent ,intellect ,scit ,adspect . 2.The adjectives generally denote Ease or Diffic lty,Pleas re or Displeas re,Rig ht or Wrong(fas and nefas).These adjectives are commonly sed with Dative,and a pla sible theory views the S pine in as an original Dative( i). 3.Ad,with the Ger ndive,is often sed instead : Cib s facillim s ad concoq end m,C.,Fin.,ii.20,64;food(that is) very eas y to digest. The Infinitive, facilis concoq i,is poetical. Common is facile concoq it r. Other eq ivalents are active Infin.,a verbal s bstantive,a Pf.Part.pass,(with op s),or a relative cla se(with dign s) se of the Abl.S pine with verbs is very rare.

(Vilic s) prim s c bit s rgat,postrem s c bit m eat,CATO,Agr.,5,5;the s teward m st be the first to get o t of bed,the last to go to bed. US).

[PARTICIPLE.285] PARTICIPLE, 437.The Participle may be sed as a s bstantive,b t even then generally retains something of its predicative nat re. Nihil est magn m somnianti,C.,Div.,ii.68,141;nothing is great to a dream er(to a man,when he is dreaming). Regia,crede mihi,res est s cc rrere lapsis,Ov.,Pont.,ii.9,11; it is a ki ngly thing,believe me,(to r n to catch those who have slipped,) to s cco r the f allen. REMARK.The Attrib te of the Participle,employed as a s bstantive,is generally in the adverbial form : recte facta,right actions; facete dict m,a witty remark. NOTES.1 .This se as a s bstantive is rare in classical prose,b t more common in the poets and in post-classical prose.In the Pr.Part.,principally sapiens,ad lescens,amans; in the Pf .more often,b t s ally in the Pl ral;

Obsonat

redeo,PL.,Men.,377;I come back from marketing(imitated by STATI

4.The

docti,the learned, victi,the conq ered. The first examples of F t.Part, sed as s bstantives are n ntiat ri (CUBT.,vii.4,32),peccat ros(TAC.,Agr.,19). 2.The se of an attrib tive or predicative Pf.Part,with a s bstantive is a growt h in Latin.Early Latm shows very few cases,and those mostly with op s and s s, CATO has post dimiss m bell m, and this innovation is extended by VARRO, with propter. CICERO is ca tio s,employing the prepositions ante,de,in,post,praeter, b t SALLUST goes m ch farther,as the strange sentence inter haec parata atq e decreta (664,R.2) indicates.LIVY and TACITUS are,however,characterised by these prepositional ses more than any other a thors.The se of a Part,in the Nom,in this way is fo nd f irst in LIVY. 438.The Participle,as an adjective,often modifies its verbal nat re,so as to be characteristic,or descriptive. (Epaminondas) erat temporib s sapienter tens,NEP.,xv.3,1; Epaminondas w as a man who made(to make) wise se of opport nities ( is q i teret r). Senect s est operosa et semper agens aliq id et moliens,Cf.C.,Cat.M.,8,2 6; old age is b sy,and always doing something and working. REMARK.Especial attention is called to the parallelism of the participle or adje ctive with the relative and S bj nctive: Res parva dict ,sed q ae st diis in magn m certamen excesserit,L.xxxiv.i ;a small thing to mention,b t one which,by the excitement of the parties,termina ted in a great contest. M nera non ad delicias m liebres q aesita nec q ib s nova n pta comat r, TAC.,Germ.,18. NOTE.The F t.Part,active is rarely sed adjectively in classical Latin except th e forms f t r s,vent r s. The predicate se after verbs of Motion to express P rpose is fo nd first in CIC ERO(Verr.,1.21,56),tho gh very rarely,b t becomes increasingly common from LIVY' S time.LIVY is the first to se the F t.Part,as an adjective cla se,a sage whic h also becomes common later. (Marobod s) misit legates ad Tiberi m orat ros a xilia,TAC.,Ann.,ii.46; Marbod sent commissioners to Tiberi s,to beg for reinforcements.

[286 ADVERB.] Servili s adest de te sententiam lat r s(perhaps d e to est), C.,Verr.,1 .21,56. i.10,11. Rem a s s pl s famae habit ram(that was likely to have) q am fidei, L.,i [Dictator] ad hostem d cit,n llo loco,nisi q ant m necessitas cogeret,fo rt nae se commiss r s(with the intention of s bmitting),L.,xxii.12,2. ADVERB. 439.1.The Predicate may be q alified by an Adverb. 2.Adverbs q alify verbs,adjectives,and other adverbs,and sometimes s bstantives, when they express or imply verbal or adjective relations. Male vivit,he lives ill; bene est,it is well; fere omnes,almost all; nimis saepe,too often; admod m ad lescens,a mere yo th; late rex(V.,A.,1.21),wide-r ling; bis cons l,twice cons l; d o sim l bella,two sim ltaneo s wars. NOTES.1.The form of the Adverb does not admit of any f rther inflection,and ther efore the Adverb req ires no r les of Syntax except as to its position. 2.With other adverbs and with adjectives,adverbs of degree only are allowable,to which m st be reckoned bene,egregie,and(later) Insigniter.Poetical are s ch exp ressions as t rpiter ater,splendide mendax(H.,A.P.,3;0.,iii.ii,35).Male as a neg ative is fo nd with san s only in CICERO(Att.,ix.15,5);other combinations are po etical,or post-classical. 3.The translation for "very" varies at different periods; m lt m is common in PLAUTUS and in HORACE'S Satires and Epistles,rare elsewhere; valde is introd ced by CICERO,b t did not s rvive him,to any extent. Sane is also freq ent in CICERO,especially in the Letters ad Attic m.CORNFICIUS affec ted vehementer, and so do colloq ial a thors,as VITRUVIUS; fortiter comes in later; bene

is occasional in PLAUTUS and TERENCE,more common in CICERO; oppido is characteristic of early Latin,and LIVY and the Archaiste; admod m is Ciceronian,b t adfatim comes later and is rare. Ab nde is rare before the t ne of SALLUST. Nimi m(nimio) belongs to early Latin,as do impense and impendio. Satis is common in the classical period,a d also nimis,b t mainly with negatives. 4.The Adverb as an attrib te of s bstantives is rare.CICERO shows t m,saepe,q as i,tamq am.LIVY ses more. 440.Position of the Adverb.Adverbs are commonly p t next to their verb,and befor e it when it ends the sentence,and immediately before their adjective or adverb. Ini ste facit,he acts nj stly. Admod m p lcher,handsome to a degree,very handsome. Valde diligenter,very caref lly. REMARK.Exceptions occ r chiefly in rhetorical passages,in which great stress is laid on the adverb,or in poetry: [iram] bene Enni s initi m dixit insaniae,C.,T sc.,iv.23,52;well did Enn i s call anger the beginning of madness. Vixit d m vixit bene TER.,Hec.,461;he lived while he lived(and lived) we ll. One class of Adverbs demands special notice the Negatives. [ADVERB.287] Negative Adverbs. 441.There are two original negatives in Latin,ne and ha d(ha t,ha ).From ne is d erived non [ne-oinom( n m),no-whit,not],Ne is sed chiefly in compo nds,or with the Imperative and Optative S bj nctive.The old se appears in ne--q idem.Non is sed with the Indicative and Potential S bj nctive;ha d negatives the single wo rd,and is sed mainly with adjectives and adverbs. 442.Non(the absol te not) is the reg lar Negative of the Indicative and of the P otential S bj nctive. Q em amat,amat;q em non amat,non amat,PETR.,37;whom she likes,she likes;whom she does not like,she does not like.Non a sim,I sho ld not vent re.

REMARKS.1.Non,as the emphatic,specific negative,may negative anything.(See 270,R .1.) 2.Non is the r le in antitheses : Non est vivere sed valere vita,MART.,vi.70,15;not living,b t being well, is life. NOTES.1.Non in combination with adjectives and adverbs,and rarely with s bstanti ves and verbs,takes the place of negative in-or ne-.Non arbitrabat r q od effice ret aliq id posse esse non corp s(asomaton),C.,Ac.,1.ii,39; Cat.M.,14,47. 2.Other negative expressions are ne tiq am(ne tiq am),by no means; nihil,nothing (" Adam,with s ch co nsel nothing swayed ").On n ll s,see 317,2,N.2. 3.Nec = non is fo nd in early Latin,here and there in VERG.,LIVY,and TACITUS.In classical Latin it ia retained in a few compo nds,as : necopinans,negoti m,and in legal phraseology. 443.Ha d is the negative of the single word,and in model prose is not common,bei ng sed chiefly with adjectives and adverbs :

ha d q isq am,not any; ha d magn s,not great; ha d male,not badly. NOTES.1.Ha is fo nd only before consonants,and belongs to early Latin and VERGI L.Ha t(early) and ha d are fo nd indiscriminately before vowels. 2.Ha d is very rarely or never fo nd in Conditional,Concessive,Interrogative,Rel ative,and Infinitive sentences.

CICERO says also ha d d bito, ha d ignoro, ha d erravero,and a few others; and combines it also with adjectives and adverbs,b t not when they are compo nded with negative particles,i.e., he does not say "ha d difficilis",and the like. 4. Ha d with verbs is very common in early Latin,and then again in Livy and TACITUS. In antitheses it is not ncommon in comedy,b t s ally in the second member : inceptiost amenti m ha d amanti m,TER.,And.218;the ndertaking is one of l natics,not lovers. 5.A strengthened expression is ha d q aq am. [288 ADVERB.] 444.1.Ne is the Negative of the Imperative and of the Optative S bj nctive.

3.CAESAR

ses ha d b t once,and then in the phrase ha d scio an(457,2).

T ne cede malis,V.,A.,vi.95;yield not tho to misfort nes. Ne transieris Hiber m,L.,xxi.44,6;do not cross the Ebro. Ne vivam,si scio,C.,Att.,iv.16,8;may I cease to live(strike me dead),if I know. NOTES.1.On the negative with the Imperative,see 270,N. 2.Ne as a general negative particle,= non,is fo nd very rarely in early Latin,mo stly with forms of velle(ne parc nt,PL.,Most.,124,is disp ted).Classical Latin r etains this only in ne-q idem,in compo nd neq aq am, and in a shortened form in nefas,nego,neq e,etc. 2.Ne is contin ed by neve or ne .See 260. Ne illam vendas ne me perdas hominem amantem,PL.,Ps.,322 : don't sell h er,and don't r in me,a fellow in love. 445.S bdivision of the Negative.A general negative may be s bdivided by neq e--n eq e,as well as by a t--a t,or strengthened by ne--q idem,not even. Nihil mq am neq e insolens neq e glorios m ex ore [Timoleontis] process it, NEP.,xx.4,2;nothing insolent or boastf l ever came o t of the mo th of Timol eon. Conscior m nemo a t lat it a t f git,L.,xxiv.5,14;of the accomplices no one either hid or fled. N mq am [Scipionem] ne minima q idem re offendi,C.,Lael.,27,103;I never wo nded Scipio's feelings,no,not even in the slightest matter. (" I will give no tho sand crowns neither." SHAKESPEARE.) NOTE.In the same way nego,I say no, is contin ed by neq e-neq e(nec-nec) : Negant nec virt tes nec vitia crescere,C.,Fin.,iii.15,48;they deny that either virt es or vices increase(that there are any degrees in). 446.Negative Combinations.--In English,we say either no one ever,or,never any on e;nothing ever,or,never anything;in Latin,the former t rn is invariably sed : nemo mq am,no one ever. Verres nihil mq am fecit sine aliq o q aest ,C.,Verr.,v.5,11;Verres nev er did anything witho t some profit or other. NOTES.1.No one yet is nond m q isq am; no more,no longer,is iam non.

2.The resol tion of a negative non ll s for n ll s, non mq am for n mq am, non scio for nescio, is poetical,except for p rposes of emphasis,or when the first part of the resolv ed negative is combined with coordinating conj nction(480) : Non lla tibi facta est ini ria,Cf.C.,Div.in Caas.,18,60. 3.Nemo often eq als ne q is: Nemo de nobis n s excellat,C.,T sc.,v.36,105. [POSITION OF THE NEGATIVE.289]

Assem sese dat r m negat,C.,Q inct.,5,19;he says that he will not give a copper. Vel ai vel nega,Acci s,125(R.);say yes or say no !

volo from nolo, i beo from veto, scio from nescio, q eo from neq eo, q isq am from nemo, t from ne.

POSITION OF THE NEGATIVE. 448.The Negative nat rally belongs to the Predicate,and s ally stands immediate ly before it,b t may be placed before any emphatic word or combination of words.

Saepe viri fall nt;tenerae non saepe p ellae,Ov.,A.A.,iii.31;often do me n deceive;soft-hearted maidens not often.

Non ego ventosae plebis s ffragia venor,H.,Ep.,1.19,37; I do not h nt th e voices of the windy commons,no,not I. NOTES.1.As the Cop la esse,to be,is,strictly speaking,a predicate,the Negative g enerally precedes it,contrary to the English idiom,except in contrasts.The diffe rence in position can often be bro ght o t only by stress of voice : felix non e rat,he wastft happy;non felix erat,he was NOT happy,he was FAR PROM happy.

2.Ne-q idem straddleslXYm the emphatic word or emphatic gro p(445);b t very rarely does he gro p consist of more than two words. 3.A negative with an Inf.is often transferred to the governing verb :

Non omnis aetas,Lyde,l do convenit,PL.,B.,129; not every age,(good) Lyd s(Playfair),sorts with play.

Potes non reverti,SEN.,E.M.,49,10;possibly yo reverti,yo cannot possibly ret rn.)

may not ret rn.(Non potes

REMARK.The positive(aio,I say) is sometimes to be s pplied for a s bseq ent cla se,as C.,Fin.,1.18,61.The same thing happens with the other negatives,as

447.Nego(I say no,I deny),is commonly

sed instead of dico non,I say-not.

non p tant l gend m(esse) viris,C.,T sc.,iii.28,70; on nego,see 447. 449.Two negatives in the same sentence destroy one another,and make an affirmati ve,b t see 445 :

Non nego,I do not deny(I admit}. REMARKS.1.Non poss m non,I cannot b t(I m st): Q i mortem in malis ponit non potest eam non timere,C.,Fin.,iii.8,29;he who classes death among misfort nes cannot b t(m st) fear it. 2.The do ble Negative is often stronger than the opposite Positive;this is a com mon form of the fig re Litotes, nderstatement(700). Non indoct s,highly ed cated; non s m nesci s,I am well aware. Non indecoro p lvere sordidi,H.,O.,ii.i,22; swart(soiled) with(no dis)ho no rable d st. Non ignara mali miseris s cc rrere disco,V.,A.,1.630;not nacq ainted(= b t too well acq ainted) with misfort ne,I learn to s cco r the wretched. [290 INCOMPLETE SENTENCE.] 3.It follows from R.2 that nec non is not simply eq ivalent to et,and; nec belongs to the sentence, non to the partic lar word : Nec hoc [Zeno] non vidit,C,Fin.,iv.22,60; nor did Zeno fail to see this. At neq e non(di) dilig nt nos,C.,Div,ii.49,102;b t neither(is it tr e th at) the gods do love s,etc. In the classical Latin this form of connection is sed to connect cla ses b t no t single words,and the words are reg larly separated.VAREO,the poets,and later p rose se necnon like et,and connect with it also single ideas. 4.Of especial importance is the position of the Negative in the following combin ations; Indefinite Affirmative.General Affirmative. nonnihil,somewhat; nihil non,everything; nonnemo,some one,some; nemo non,everybody; nonn lli,some people; n lli non,all;

nonn mq am,sometimes; n mq am non,always; nonn sq am,somewhere; n sq am non,everywhere. In ipsa c ria non nemo hostis est,C.,M r.,39,84;in the senate-ho se itse lf there are enemies(nemo non hostis est,everybody is an enemy). Non est placandi spes mihi n lla Dei,Ov.,Tr.,v.8,22(428);I have some hop e of appeasing God(n lla spes non est,I have every hope). Nemo non didicisse mav lt q am discere,QUINT.,iii.i,6; everybody prefers having learned to learning. INCOMPLETE SENTENCE. Interrogative Sentences. 450.An interrogative sentence is necessarily incomplete.The answer is the comple ment. 451.A q estion may relate : (a) To the existence or the non-existence of the Predicate : Predicate Q estion. Vivitne pater ? is my father alive ? (b) To some ndetermined essential part of the sentence,s ch as S bject,Object,A djective,Adverbial modifier : Nominal Q estion.

For a list of Interrogative Prono ns see 104. REMARKS.1.The second class req ires no r les except as to mood (462). 2.The form of the q estion is often sed to imply a negative opinion on the part of the speaker : [DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS.291] Q id interest inter peri r m et mendacem? C.,Rosc.Com.,16,46; what is th e difference between a perj red man and a liar ? All q estions of this kind are called Rhetorical. 452.1.Interrogative sentences are divided into simple and compo nd(disj nctive). Am I?(simple);Am I,or am I not?(disj nctive). NOTE.Strictly speaking,only the simple interrogative sentence belongs to this se ction;b t for the sake of completeness,the whole s bject will be treated here. 2.Interrogative sentences are f rther divided into direct and indirect,or indepe ndent and dependent.Am I?(direct);He asks whether I am(indirect).

DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS.

Q Q Q C

is est ? Who is it ? id ais ? What do yo say ? i hic mos ? What sort of way is this ? r non discedis ? Why do yo not depart ?

453.Direct simple q estions sometimes have no interrogative sign.S ch q estions are chiefly passionate in their character,and serve to express Astonishment,Blam e,Disg st.

He s,inq it.ling am vis meam praecl dere ? PHAEDR.,1.23,5; Ho ! ho ! q oth h e,yo wish to sh t my mo th,yo do ?(Yo shall not.) T om parasit m non novisti ? PL.,Men.,505;yo don't know yo r own parasite ? (Strange !) H nc t vitae splendorem mac lis adspergis istis ? C.,Planc.,12,30;yo bespa tter()this splendid life with s ch blots() as those ? NOTES.1.Q estions of this kind are characteristic of the Comic Poets.In CICERO t hey are fo nd especially in expressions of do bt,with posse,and with an emphatic personal prono n. 2.S ch a q estion may have the force of a command.So in the phrase etiam t taces ? won't yo keep q iet ? common in comedy(PL.,Trin.,514).

Amat ? sapit,PL.,Am.,995;is he in,love? He is sensible. Tristis es ? indignor q od s m tibi ca sa doloris,Ov.,TV.,iv.3,33(542).See 5 93,4. 4.When several q estions follow in immediate s ccession,only the first generally takes the Interrogative Prono n,or -ne.Repeated q estioning is passionate. 5.On t in the exclamatory q estion,see 558. 454.Interrogative Particles.-Ne(enclitic) is always appended to the emphatic wor d,and generally serves to denote a q estion,witho t indicating the expectation o f the speaker. Omnisne pec nia dissol ta est ? C.,Verr.,iii.77,180; is ALL the money paid o t ? (Estne omnis pec nia dissol ta ? is all the money paid o t ?) REMARKS.1.As the emphatic word s ally begins the sentence, [292 DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS.] so -ne is s ally appended to the first word in the sentence.B t exceptions are not ncomon. 2.-Ne is originally a negative.Q estioning a negative leans to the affirmative; and -ne is not always strictly impartial. NOTES.1.-Ne sometimes c ts off a preceding -s(in which case it may shorten a pre ceding long vowel),and often drops its own e.

3.Noteworthy is the occasional

sage of the q estion in place of a condition.

Infelix est Fabrici s q od r s s m fodit ? SEN.,Dial.,1.3,6; Fabrici s is nhappy beca se he digs his own field ?(Impossible !)

Viden? Seest? (=Videsne?) (pergin = pergisne pergitin = pergitisne) T n? Yo ?(=T ne) Satin ? For certain? (=Satisne)(censen=censes ne) Also scin,ain,vin,itan,etc.This occ rs especially in early Latin. 2.This -ne is not to be confo nded with the asseverative -ne,which is fo nd occa sionally in PLAUTUS and TERENCE,CATULLUS,HORACE (o seri st dior m,q ine p tetis,etc.,H.,S.,1.10,21,a m ch disc ssed passage), and later appended to personal,demonstrative,and relative prono ns. 3.In poetry -ne is sometimes appended to interrogative words,to heighten the eff ect : tr mne(H.,S.,ii.3,251),q one(H.,S.,ii.3,295). 4.-Ne is often added to personal prono ns in indignant q estions : t ne inane q icq am p tes esse ? C.,Ac.,ii.40,125. 5.In early Latin -ne seems to be sed sometimes with a force similar to that lat er exercised by nonne;b t in most of the examples the expectation of an affirmat ive answer seems to be d e rather to the context than to ne;see,however,R.2. 455.Nonne expects the answer Yes.

Nonne is generosissim s q i optim s ? QUINT.,v.ii,4; is he not the tr es t gentleman who is the best man ? So the other negatives with -ne : nemone,nihilne,and the like. NOTE.Nonne is denied for PLAUTUS,b t wrongly,tho gh it occ rs b t rarely,and reg larly before a vowel.It is also rare in TERENCE.In classical Latin it is freq e nt,b t is never fo nd in CATULLUS,TIBULLDS,and SENECA RHETOR.

N mq is est hic ali s praeter me atq e te ? Nemo est,PL.,Tr.,69; is anyb ody here besides yo and me ? No. N m tibi c m fa ces rit sitis,a rea q aeris poc la? H.,S.,1.2,114;when thirst b rns yo r throat for yo ,do yo ask for golden c ps ? [No.] NOTE.N mne is fo nd very rarely,perhaps only in C.,N.D.,1.31,88,and Lael.,ii,36. N mnam belongs to early Latin.In many cases in early Latin, n m seems to introd ce a simple q estion for information,witho t expecti ng a negative answer. 457.1. An(or) belongs to the second part of a disj nctive q estion. Sometimes,however,the first part of the disj nctive q estion is s ppressed,or,ra ther,involved.The second alternative with "an" serves to rge the acceptance of the positive or negative proposition involved in the preceding statement.This ab r pt form of q estion(or,then) is of freq ent se in Remonstrance,Expost lation, S rprise,and Irony.

456.

N m.expects the answer No.

Nonne meministi C.,Fin.,ii.3,10;do yo

not remember ?

Non man m abstines ? An tibi iam mavis cerebr m dispergam hic ? TER.,Ad. ,781;are yo not going to keep yo r hands off ? Or wo ld yo rather have me scat ter yo r brains over the place now ?(Vir c stodit absens,my h sband keeps g ard, tho gh absent.is it not so ?) [DIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS.293]

NOTES.1.This sage is fo nd in early Latin,b t is a characteristic of CICERO esp ecially. 2.An is strengthened by ne.This is fo nd freq ently in early Latin,more rarely later. CICERO ses anne only in disj nctive q estions,and HORACE,TIBULLUS,PROPERTIUS n ot at all. 3.In early Latin very freq ently,less often in the poets;occasionally in prose,beginning with LIVY,an is sed as a simple interrogative;so nescio an = nescio n m. There seems to be good reason for believing that "an" was originally a simple in terrogative particle,b t became identified later with disj nctive q estions. 2.Especially to be noted,in connection with "an",are the phrases, nescio an(first in CICERO,and not common), ha d scio an(this is the s al phrase : ha d sciam an is rare),I do not know b t; d bito an,I do bt,I do bt b t = I am inclined to think; incert m an(once in CICERO), and rarely d bitarim and d bi m an,which give a modest affirmation; very rarely a negation.Negative particles,added to these expressions,give a mild negation. (ya) Ha d scio an ita sit,C.,T sc.,ii.17,41; I do not know b t it is so. Hand scio an n lla(senect s) beatior esse possit,C.,Cat.M.,16,56; I do n ot know b t it is impossible for any old age to be happier. D bito an [Thrasyb l m] prim m omni m ponam,NEP.,viii.i,1; I do bt b t I sho ld(= I am inclined to think I sho ld) p t Thrasyb l s first of all. NOTE.In early Latin these phrases are still d bitative.The affirmative f orce comes in first in CICERO,and seems to have been eq ivalent to forsitan,perh aps,with the Potential S bj nctive : Forsitan et Priami f erint q ae fata req iras,V.,A.,ii.506;perhaps yo m ay ask what was the fate of Priam,too. DIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS. 458.Direct Disj nctive Q estions have the following forms :

First Cla se. tr m,whether,

Second and S bseq ent Cla ses. an(anne),or

An nescis longas regib s esse man s ? Ov.,Her.,16,166;or perhaps yo not know(yo do not know,then) that kings have long hands(arms).

do

-ne, .

an, an(anne)

Eloq ar an sileam ? V.,A.,iii.39; shall I speak,or hold my peace ? Utr m hoc t par m commeministi,an ego non satis intellexi,an m tasti senten tiam C.,Att.,ix.2; do yo not remember this,or did I mis nderstand yo ,or have y o changed yo r view ? [294 INDIRECT QUESTIONS.] NOTES.1.Utr nme an is fo nd once in CICERO(Inv.,1.31,61),not in CAESAR or LIVY,o ccasionally elsewhere(H.,Epod.,i,7); tr m ne an is more common. Ne-an,which is common in prose,is not fo nd in CAT.,TIB.,PROP.,Hor.,LUCA N. 2.Ne in the second member,with omitted particle in first member,occ rs only in H .,Ep.,1.ii,3(disp ted),in the direct q estion,except in the combination necne(45 9). 3.Ne-ne is very rare;V.,A.,H.738;xi.126. 4.A t(or),in q estions,is not to be confo nded with an.A t gives another part of a simple q estion,or another form of it(or,in other words).An excl des,a t exte nds. (Vol ptas) melioremne efficit a t la dabiliorem vir m ? C.,Parad.,1.3,15 ; does pleas re make a better or more praiseworthy man ?(Answer : neither)

459.In direct q estions,or not is annon(an non),rarely necne; in indirect,necne,rarely annon. isne est q em q aero,annon? TER.,Ph.,852; is that the man I am looking f or,or not ? Sitq e memor nostri necne,referte mihi,Ov.,Tr.,iv.3,10(204,N.7). NOTES.1.Necne is fo nd indirect q estions in CICERO,T sc.,iii.18,41 (s nt haec t a verba necne ?), Flacc.,25,59;and also LUCR.,iii.713. Annon in indirect q estions occ rs in CICERO,Inv.,1.50,95;ii.20,60;Cael. ,21,52;Balb.,8,22,etc. 2.Utr m is sometimes sed with the s ppression of the second cla se for whether or no? b t not in early Latin.So C.,Flacc.,19,45,etc.

T vir m me a t hominem dep tas adeo esse? TER.,Hec.,524;do yo to be yo r h sband or even a man ?

hold me

Vosne L ci m Domiti m an vos Domiti s deser it ? CAES.,B.C.,ii.32,8;have yo deserted L ci s Domiti s,or has Domiti s deserted yo ?

e yo

Utr m nescis q am alte ascenderis,an pro nihilo id p tas ? C.,Fam.,x.26,3;ar not aware how high yo have mo nted,or do yo co nt that as nothing ?

INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 460.Indirect q estions have the same particles as the direct,with the following modifications. 1 .Simple Q estions. (a) N m loses its negative force,and becomes simply whether.It decays in later L atin.

Spec lari(i sser nt) n m sollicitati animi socior m essent,L.,XLII.19,8; they ordered them to spy o t whether the allies had been tampered with.(N (b) Si,if,is sed for whether,chiefly after verbs and sentences implying trial.C ompare O si(261). Temptata res est si primo impet capi Ardea posset,L.,1.57,2; an attempt was made(in case,in hopes that,to see)if Ardea co ld be taken by a dash(co p-de -main). Ibo,visam si domi est(467,N.),TER,.,Hea t.,170; I will go(to) see if he is at home. NOTES.1.An is sometimes sed for n m and ne,b t never in model prose. Cons l it deinde (Alexander) an toti s orbis imperi m fatis sibi destina ret r,CURT.,iv.7,26;Alexander then asked the oracle whether the empire of the wh ole world was destined for him by the fates. 2.Nonne is cited only from CICERO and only after q aerere(Ph.,xii.7,15). [MOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.295] 2.Disj nctive Q estions. In addition to the forms for Direct Q estions(458),a form with -ne in the second cla se only is fo nd in the Indirect Q estion,b t is never common;see 458,N.2. arq ini s Prisci Tarq inii regis fili s neposne f erit par m liq et,L.,1 .46,4; whether Tarq in was the son or grandson of king Tarq in the Elder does no t appear.( }ya) NOTES.1.The form -no is not fo nd in CAESAR or SALLUST. 2.The form ne - ne is poetical,except once in CAESAR(B.G.,vii.141,8). 3.Utr m-ne-an is rare b t classical.Utr mne-an begins with HORACE,is not fo nd i n LIVY,VELL.,VAL.M.,and both PLINYS.In TACITUS only in the THalog s. SUMMARY OF DIRECT AND INDIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS. 461.Direct. Is the,last syllable short or long ? Cf.C.,Or.,64,217. Postrema syllaba tr m brevis est an longa ? brevisne est an longa ? Indirect. In a verse it makes no difference whether the last syllable be short or long :

{ tr m postrema syllaba brevis sit an longa.In vers nihil refert{ postrema syllaba brevisne sit an longa. { postrema syllaba brevis an longa sit( CICERO). { postrema syllaba brevis sit longane. MOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 1.In Direct Q estions. 462.The Mood of the q estion is the Mood of the expected or anticipated answer. 463.Indicative q estions expect an Indicative answer,when the q estion is gen in e. A.Q is homo est ? B.Ego s m,TER.,And.,965;who is that ? It is I. A.Vivitne(pater) ? B.Vivom liq im s,PL.,Capt.,282; is his father living ? We left him alive. 464.Indicative q estions anticipate an Indicative answer in the negative when th e q estion is rhetorical. Q is non pa pertatem extimescit ? C.,T sc.,v.31,89;who does not dread po verty ? [296 MOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.] REMARK.Nonne and n m in the direct q estion are often rhetorical (see PL.,Am.,53 9;C.,Div.,1.14,24). With nonne a negative answer is anticipated to a negative,hence the affirmative character.Compare f rther,451,R.2. 465.S bj nctive q estions which expect Imperative answers are p t chiefly in the First Person,when the q estion is deliberative. A.Abeam? B.Abi,PL.,Merc.,749;shall I go away ? Go. A.Q id n nc faciam ? B.Te s spendito,PL.,Ps.,1229; what shall I do now ? Hang yo rself. REMARK.So in the representative of the First Person in dependent disco rse(265). 466.S bj nctive q estions anticipate a potential answer in the negative,when the q estion is rhetorical. Q is hoc credat ? who wo ld believe this ? [No one wo ld believe this.] Q id faceret ali d? what else was he to do ? [Nothing.] Q is t lerit Gracchos de seditione q erentes ? J v.,ii.24(259). REMARK.On the Exclamatory Q estion see 534,558. 2.In Indirect Q estions. 467.The Dependent Interrogative is always in the S bj nctive. The S bj nctive may represent the Indicative.

[Considerabim s] q id fecerit(Indic.fecit),q id faciat(Indic.facit),q id fact r s sit(Indic.faciet or fact r s est),Cf.C.,Inv.,1.25,36; we will consider what he has done,what he is doing,what he is going to do (will do). (Epaminondas) q aesivit salv sne esset clipe s,C.,Fin.,ii.30,97;Epaminon das asked whether his shield was safe.(Salv sne est ?) The S bj nctive may be original.See 265.

Q aero a te c r C.Corneli m non defenderem,C.,Vat.,2,5;I inq ire of yo why I was not to defend C.Corneli s.(C r non defenderem ? why was I not to defen d ?) REMARKS.1.

may be sed exactly as indefinite prono ns,and then have no effect on the constr ction.This sage is fo nd at all periods.

Nescio q id mai s nascit r Iliade,PROP.,ii.(iii.) 32(34),66;something,I know not what,is coming to the birth,greater than the Iliad. [PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.297] 2.The Relative has the same form as the Interrogative q is ? except in the Nom.S ing.; hence the importance of disting ishing between them in dependent sentences .The interrogative depends on the leading verb,the relative belongs to the antec edent.(611,R.2.) Interrogative : dic q id rogem,tell me what it is I am asking. Relative : dic q od rogo,TER.,And.,764;tell me that which I am ask ing wer to my q estion). The relative is not nfreq ently sed where we sho ld expect the interrogative,e specially when the facts of the case are to be emphasised : Dicam q od sentio,C.,Or.,1.44,195;I will tell yo my real opinion. Incorporated relatives are not to be confo nded with interrogatives : Patefacio vobis q as isti penit s abstr sas() insidias(= insidias q as) se pos issse arbitrant r,C.,Agr.,ii.18,49; I am exposing to yo r view the schemes w hich those people fancy they have laid in profo nd secrecy. NOTE.In the early Latin of Comedy the leading verb is very freq ently disconnect ed from the interrogative,which conseq ently appears as an independent sentence with the Indicative.This is most common after dic,

Nescio nescio nescio nescio

q q q q

is, id, i, od,I know not who,what,which,

(the ans

Ipse docet q id agam; fas est et ab hoste doceri,Ov.,M.,iv.428(219); (Q id agam,what I am to do;not what I am doing).

responde, loq ere,and kindred Imperatives; vide(PLAUTUS also circ mspice,respice); te rogo, interrogo, q aero,and similar phrases; a dire, videre,etc., scin; relative words, t,q omodo,etc.,where the modal and not interrogative force is pr ominent. Classical prose has given p all these sages.A few cases in CICERO are conteste d or differently explained.In poetry and later prose the examples are fo nd only here and there. Dic,q id est ? PL.,Men.,397; tell me,what is it?(Dic q id sit,tell me wh at it is.)

Dic mihi q id feci nisi non sapienter amavi,Ov.,Her.,ii.27; tell me what have I done,save that I have loved nwisely. So also, nescio q omodo,I know not how = strangely;and mir m q ant m,it (is) marvello s how m ch = wonderf lly, are sed as adverbs : Mir m q ant m prof it ad concordiam,L.,ii.i,11;it served wonderf lly to promote harmony. Nescio q o pacto vel magis homines i vat gloria lata q am magna, PLIN.,E p.,iv.12,7;somehow or other,people are even more charmed to have a widespread re p tation than a grand one. Early Latin shows also perq am,: admod m q am, minis q am, incredibile q ant m; CICERO mir m(mire)q am, nimi m q ant m, sane q am, valde q am; CAESAR none of these; SALLUST immane q ant m; LIVY adds oppido q ant m; PLINY MAI. immens m, Infinit m q ant m; FLORUS

Q in t no verbo dic : q id est q od me velis ? TER.,And.,45;won't yo tell me in one word : What is it yo want of me?

pl rim m q ant m. The position excl des a conscio s ellipsis of the S bj nctive. PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 468.The s bject of the dependent cla se is often treated as the object of the le ading cla se by Anticipation(Prolepsis). Nosti Marcell m q am tard s sit,CAELIUS(C.,Fam.,viii.10,3); yo know Mar cell s,what a slow creat re he is. NOTE.This sage is very common in Comedy,and belongs to conversational style in general. [298 PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.] 469.Contrary to o r idiom,the interrogative is often sed in participial cla ses .In English,the participle and verb change places,and a Ca sal sentence becomes Final or Consec tive. Q am tilitatem petentes scire c pim s illa q ae occ lta nobis s nt ? C. ,Fin.,iii.1 1,37;what advantage do we seek when we desire to know those things w hich are hidden from s ?

NOTE.The Abl.Abe.with the interrogative is rare.C.,Verr.,iii.80,185. 470.Final sentences(sentences of Design) are sed in q estions more freely than in English. Sess m it praetor.Q id t i dicet r I C.,N.D.,iii.30,74;the j dge is goi ng to take his seat.What is to be adj dged ?(To adj dge what ?) REMARK.The Latin lang age goes f rther than the English in combining interrogati ve words in the same cla se;th s two interrogatives are not ncommon :

Considera q is q em fra dasse dicat r,C.,Rosc.Com.,7,21.(Nh Yes and No. 471.(a) Yes is represented : 1.By sane,(literally) so ndly, sane q idem,yes indeed, etiam,even (so), vero(rarely ver m),of a tr th, ita,so, omnino,by all means, certe,s rely, certo,for certain, admod m,to a degree,etc. A t etiam a t non respondere [potest],C.,Ac.,ii.32,104;he can answer eit her yes or no.

[Solon Pisistrato tyranno] q aerenti q a tandem re fret s sibi iter resisteret,respcndisse dicit r senect te,C.,Cat.M.,20,72;Solon,to s the s rper,asking him(= when Pisistrat s the s rper asked him) on g relying (= on what he relied that) he resisted him so boldly,is said nswered " old age"

tam a dac Pisistrat what thin to have a

2.By censeo,I think so; scilicet,to be s re. Q id si etiam occentem hymenae m ? Censeo,PL.,Cas.,806;what if I sho ld also sing a marriage-song ? I think yo had better. 3.By repeating the emphatic word either with or witho t the confirmatory particl es, vero(principally with prono ns),sane,prors s,etc. Estisne? S m s,are yo ? We are.

(b) No is represented : 1.By non,non vero,non ita,minime,by no means, nihil,nothing, minime vero,nihil sane,nihil min s. 2.By repeating the emphatic word with the negative : [SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.299] Non irata es ? Non s m irata,PL.,Cas.,1007;yo are not angry ? I am not. (c) YEA or NAY.Immo conveys a correction,and either removes a do bt or heightens a previo s statement : yes indeed,nay rather. Ecq id placeant(aedes) me rogas? Immo perplacent,PL.,Most.,907; do I lik e the ho se,yo ask me ? Yes indeed,very m ch. Ca sa igit r non bona est ? Immo optima,C.,Att.,ix.7,4;the ca se,then,is a bad one ? Nay,it is an excellent one. REMARK.Yes,for,and no,for,are often expressed simply by nam and enim : T m Antoni s : Heri enim,inq it,hoc mihi propos eram,C.,Or.,ii.10,40;the n q oth Antony : Yes,for I had proposed this to myself yesterday. SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 472.1.A compo nd sentence is one in which the necessary parts of the sentence oc c r more than once;one which consists of two or more cla ses. 2.Coordination(Parataxis) is that arrangement of the sentence according to which the different cla ses are merely placed side by side. 3.S bordination(Hypotaxis) is that arrangement of the sentence according to whic h one cla se depends on the other. He became poor and we became rich; the second cla se is a coordinate sentence. He became poor that we might be rich; the second cla se is a s bordinate sentenc e. 4.The sentence which is modified is called the Principal Cla se,that which modif

Dasne? DO sane,C.,Leg.,1.7,21;do yo

grant ? I do indeed.

ies is called the S bordinate Cla se." He became poor " is the Principal Cla se, " that we might be rich " is the S bordinate Cla se. REMARK.Logical dependence and grammatical dependence are not to be confo nded.In the conditional sentence, vivam si vivet,let me live if she lives,my living depends on her living; yet " vivam " is the principal," si vivet " the s bordinate cla se.It is the dep endence of the introd ctory particle that determines the grammatical relation. COORDINATION. 473.Coordinate sentences are divided into vario s classes,according to the parti cles by which the separate cla ses are bo nd together. [300 COORDINATION.] REMARK.Coordinate sentences often dispense with conj nctions (Asyndeton).Then th e connection m st determine the character. Cop lative Sentences. 474.The following particles are called Cop lative Conj nctions : et,-q e,atq e(a c),etiam,q oq e. NOTE.The Cop lative Conj nctions are often omitted,in climax,in en merations,in contrasts,in standing form lte,partic larly in dating by the cons ls of a year,i f the praenomina are added;and finally,in g mming p previo s en merations by s ch words as alii,ceteri,c ncti,m lti,omnes,reliq i. 475.Et is simply and,the most common and general particle of connection,and comb ines likes and likes. Panem et aq am nat ra desiderat,SEN.,E.M.,25,4;bread and water (is what) nat re calls for. Probitas la dat r et alget,J v.,1.74;honesty is bepraised and free es.

Fieri potest, t recte q is sentiat et id,q od sentit,polite eloq i non p ossit,C.,T sc.,1.3,6. 2.Et sometimes introd ces a concl sion to a condition expressed in the Imperativ e,b t only once in early Latin,never in classical prose. Dic q ib s in terris;et eris mihi magn s Apollo,V.,EC.,iii.104. 3.Et,instead of a temporal conj nction,begins with CAESAR(Cf.B.G.,I.37,1) and SA LLUST(I g.,97,4);it is never common. 4.On neq e ll s for et n ll s and the like,see 480.On et after words indicating Likeness,see 643.On et for eti am,see 478,N.2. 476.-d e(enclitic) nites things that belong closely to one another.The second m ember serves to complete or extend the first.

NOTES.1.We find sometimes two cla ses connected by et where we sho ld expect et tamen.This sage is characteristic of TACITUS,b t is fo nd all thro gh the lang age.

Senat s pop l sq e Roman s,C.,Planc.,37,90; the Senate and people of Rom e. Ibi mort s sep lt sq e Alexander,L.,xxxvi.20,5;there Alexander died and was b ried.

NOTES.1.Q e was very common in early Latin,especially in legal phraseology,where it was always retained. 2.Q e - q e - q e is ante-classical and poetic. 3.Q e is always added to the first word in the cla se it introd ces,in PLAUTUS,a s well as in classical prose;b t the A g stan poets are free in their position,f or metrical reasons.As regards prepositions,q e is never appended to ob and s b, rarely to a and ad,b t freq ently to other monosyllabic prepositions;it is alway s appended to dissyllabic prepositions in -a,and often to other dissyllabic prep ositions. 4.On q e for q oq e see 479,N.2. 5.Combinations : () et et; (b) q e et; rare in early Latin,never in CICERO,CAESAR; begins with SALLUST. [COORDINATION.301] SALLUST and TACITUS always add the q e to the prono n,LIVY and later prose write rs to the s bstantive. (c) et q e;rare,and beginning with ENNIUS. (d) q e q e begins with PLAUTUS,ENNIUS.CICERO has it b t once(noctesq e diesq e, Fin.,1.16,51);it enters prose with SALLUST,and poets are fond of it. Et domino satis et nimi m f riq e l poq e,TIB.,iv.i,187;eno gh for owner ,and too m ch for thief and wolf. 477. Atq e(compo nded of ad and -q e) adds a more important to a less importa nt member.B t the second member often owes its importance to the necessity of ha ving the complement(-q e). Ac(a shorter form,which does not stand before a vowel or h) is fainter t han atq e,and almost eq ivalent to et. Intra moenia atq e in sin rbis s nt hostes,S.,C.,52,35;within the wall s,ay,and in the heart of the city,are the enemies. A.Servos ? Ego ? B.Atq e me s,PL.,Cas.,735;a slave ? I? And mine to boot . NOTES.1.The confirmative force of atq e,as in the second example,is fo nd especi ally in PLAUTUS,occasionally later.

ecastor,

2.

Atq e adds a climax,and then is often strengthened by

[Sol] oriens et occidens diem noctemq e conncit,C.,N.D.,ii.40,102;the s n by its rising and setting makes day and night.

profecto, vero,etc.,PL.,B.,86;C.,T sc.,1.20,46. 3.In comedy,atq e has sometimes demonstrative force : atq e ecc m,PL.,St.,577. 4.Occasionally in CICERO,then in the A g stan poets,LIVY and later prose writers ,notably TACITUS,atq e or ac is often sed to connect the parts of a cla se in w hich fit or q e(sometimes both) has been already employed : Et potentes seq it r invidia et h miles abiectosq e contempt s et t rpes ac nocentes odi m,QUINT.,iv.i,14;the powerf l are followed by envy;the low and grovelling,by contempt;the base and h rtf l,by hatred. 5.Atq e-atq e is fo nd occasionally in CATO,CATULLUS,CICERO,and VERGIL.Q e atq e begins in poetry with VERGIL,in prose with LIVY,and is very rare. C. Atq e,introd cing a principal cla se after a temporal conj nction,belong s excl sively to PLAUTUS : D m circ mspecto m,atq e ego lemb m conspicor,B.,279. Also Ej).,217.

8.On atq e,after words indicating Likeness,see 643.Atq e follows a comparative o nly after a negative in early and classical Latin.HORACE is first to se it afte r a positive. 9.Phraseological is ali s atq e ali s,one or another,fo nd first in LIVY,and rare. 478. Etiam,even(now),yet,still,exaggerates(heightens),and generally precedes the word to which it belongs. Nobis res familiaris etiam ad necessaria deest,Cf.S.,C.,20,11;we lack me ans even for the necessaries of life. Ad Appi Cla di senect tem accedebat etiam t caec s esset, C.,Cat.M.,6,1 6(553,4). NOTES.1.Etiam as a temporal adverb refers to the Past or Present,and means still ; it is sometimes strengthened by t m(t nc) or n m(n nc).B t beginning with LIVY , [302 COORDINATION.] adh c,which properly refers only to the Present,is extended to the Past and sed like etiam(t m). Non satis me pernosti etiam q alis sim,TER.,And.,503;yo still do not kn ow well eno gh(= little know) what manner of person I am. C m iste(i.e.,Polemarch s) etiam c baret,in c bic l m introd ct s est, c .,Verr.,iii.23,56;while the defendant(Polemarch s) was still in bed,he was intro d ced into the bedroom. 2.Instead of etiam,et is occasional in PLAUTUS,in a change of person.CICERO ses it also after an adversative conj nction,as ver m et;also after nam and sim l; more often when a prono n follows,as et ille,et ipse.CAESAR never ses it so,SAL

1. Atq e is sed before consonants,as well as ac,to connect single notions : when sentences or cla ses are to be connected,ac only is allowable;either atq e or ac with expressions of Likeness.STAMM.

LUST rarely,b t it becomes common from Livy on. 3.Phraseological is etiam atq e etiam,time and again. On etiam for yes,see 471,1. 479.Q oq e,so also,complements(compare q e) and always follows the words to whic h it belongs. C m patri(Timothei) pop l s stat am pos isset,filio q oq e dedit, Cf.NEP .,x i.2,3;the people,having erected a stat e in hono r of the father of Timothe s,gave one to the son also(likewise). REMARK.The difference between etiam and q oq e is not to be insisted on too rigi dly : Grande et conspic m nostro q oq e tempore monstr m,J v.,iv.115; a h ge and conspic o s prodigy,even in o r day. NOTES.1.In ante-classical and post-classical Latin the do ble forms etiam q oq e ,etiam q oq e,are sometimes fo nd,and in classical Latin also q oq e etiam occas ionally : n nc vero meo q oq e etiam ca sa rogo,C.,Or.,1.35,164.

480.Cop lation by means of the Negative.Instead of "et" and the negative,

neq e(nec) and the positive is the r le in Latin. Opinionib s v lgi rapim r in errorem nec vera cernim s,C.,Leg.,ii.17,43; by the prej dices of the rabble() we are h rried into error,and do not disting ish the tr th. (Caesar) properans noctem diei coni nxerat neq e iter intermiserat, CAES .,B.C.,iii.13,2; Caesar in his haste had joined night with day and had not broke n his march. REMARKS.1.Et-non,(and-not),is sed when the negation is confined to a single wor d,or is otherwise emphatic;b t neq e is fo nd occasionally here,even in CICERO(O ff.,iii.10,41). Et militavi non sine gloria,H.,O.,iii.26,2;and I have been a soldier not witho t glory. On nec non,the opposite of et non,see 449,R.3. 2.In combination with the negative we have the following

. [COORDINATION.303]

Paradigms :

And no one, And no, And nothing, And never,

neq e q isq neq neq neq

am, nor any one. e ll s, nor any. e q idq am, nor anything. e mq am, nor ever

2.Q e in the sense of q oq e is rare(compare meq e,CAT.,cii.3;me too),and is fo nd chiefly in the post-A g stan hodieq e,to-day also.

3.Nec is often nearly eq ivalent to nec tamen,and yet not : Extra invidiam nec extra gloriam erat,TAC.,Agr.,8,3;he was beyond the re ach of envy,and yet not beyond the reach of glory.Cf.TER.,E n.,249; C.T sc.ii.25 ,60. NOTES.1.Neq e = ne q idem,is ante-classical and post-classical : nec n n c,c m me vocat ltro,accedam ? H.,S,ii.3,262(the only case in HORACE).

3.Combinations : (a) neq e-neq e;nec-nec;neq e-nec;nec-neq e.Sometimes the first neq e has the fo rce of and neither;b t this is limited in prose to CAESAR,SALLUST,and LIVY;in po etry to CATULLUS and PROPERTIUS. (6) neq e-et;neq e-q e;neq e-ac.Of these neq e et is rare in early Latin,b t mor e common in CICERO and later;neq e-q e is rare,and fo nd first in CICERO;neq e-a tq e(ac) is very rare,and begins in TACITUS. (c) et-neq e is fo nd first in CICERO,who is fond of it,b t it fades o t after h im. 4.Neq e is s ally sed for non,when followed by the strengthening words enim,ta men,vero,etc. 481.1.Insertion and Omission of Cop latives.When m lt s,m ch,many, is followed by another attrib te,the two are often combined by cop lative partic les : many renowned deeds, m lta et praeclara facinora; many good q alities, m ltae bonaeq e artes. 2.Several s bjects or objects,standing in the same relations,either take et thro gho t or omit it thro gho t.The omission of it is common in emphatic en meratio n. Phryges et Pisidae et Cilices, C.,Div.,1.41,92; or, Phryges,Plsidae,Cilices, Phrygians,Pisidians,and Cilicians. NOTE.Et before the third member of a series is rare,b t occ rs here and there at all periods;in CICERO it s ally draws especial attention to the Last member. Atq e (ac) is sed th s a little more freq ently

2.CAESAR,LUCRETIUS,VERGIL,and PROPERTIUS

se neq e reg larly before vowels.

Neq e amet q emq am nec amet r ab nd be loved by none.

llo,J v.,xii.130;may he love no one,a

(mores instit ta atq e vita, C.,Fam.,xv.4,14), and q e is not ncommon : aegrit dines,irae libidinesq e,C.,T sc.,1.33,80. 3.Et is f rther omitted in climaxes,in antitheses,in phrases,and in form la. Viri non [est] debilitari dolore,frangi,s cc mbere,C.,Fin.,ii.29,95; it is nmanly to allow one's self to be disabled( nnerved) by grief,to be broken-sp irited,to s cc mb. Difficilis facilis,i c nd s acerb s,es idem,MART.,xii.47,1(310). Patres Conscripti,Fathers(and) Conscript(Senators). I ppiter Optim s Maxim s,Father Jove,s premely good(and) great. [304 COORDINATION.] Other Particles Employed. 482.Other particles are sometimes employed instead of the cop lative in the same general sense. 1.Temporal : t m-t m,then-then; alias-alias,at one time-at another; iam-iam, n nc-n nc, modo-modo,now-now; sim l-sim l,at the same time. T m Graeco t m Latine,partly in Greek,partly in Latin. Horati s Cocles n nc sing los provocabat,n nc increpabat omnes, Cf.L.,ii .10,8; Horati s Cocles now challenged them singly,now ta nted them all. Modo h c,modo ill c,C.,Att.,xiii.25,3;now hither,now thither (hither and thither). Sim l spernebant,sim l met ebant,they despised and feared at the same ti me(they at once despised and feared). NOTES.1.Of these t m-t m is not ante-classical,n nc-n nc is fo nd first in LUCR.,and is introd ced into prose by LIVY : sim l-sim l is fo nd first in CA ESAR,b t not in CICERO;iam-iam begins with VERGIL and LIVY. Aliq ando-aliq ando, q andoq e-q andoq e, are post-A g stan; interd m-interd m is rare,b t occ rs in CICERO.

2.The combinations vary in many ways.Ciceronian are t m-alias; alias -pler mq e; interd m-alias; modo-t m; modo-vicissim; most of them fo nd b t once.Some fifteen other combinations are post-Ciceronian. 3.On c m t m,see 588. 2.Local : In CICERO only alio-alio; hinc-illinc. Others are : hic-illic(first in VERGIL); hinc-hinc(VERGIL,LIVY); hinc-inde(TACITUS); illinc-hinc(LIVY); inde-hinc(TACITUS); alibi-alibi(LIVY); ali nde-ali nde(PLINY). 3.Modal : aliter-aliter; q a-q a, rare,and lacking in many a thors (e.g.,CAESAR,SALLUST).In CICERO only fo r times ,and confined to the Letters; pariter-pariter is poetical and post-classical; aeq e-aeq e is fo nd once in HORACE and once in TACITUS. 4.Comparative : t-ita,as-so : Dolabellam t Tarsenses ita Laodiceni ltro arcessier nt,C.,Fam.,xii.13, 4;as the people of Tars s so the people of Laodicea(= both the people of Tars s and those of Laodicea) sent for Dolabella of their own accord.

Haec omnia t invitis ita non adversantib s patriciis transacta, L.,iii. 55,15;all this was done,the patricians,tho gh nwilling,yet not opposing(= again st the wishes,b t witho t any opposition on the part of the patricians). NOTE.There are also many other similar combinations,as : q emadmod m - sic; t - sic;

Often,however,the actions compared are adversative;and ted altho gh,while.

t may be loosely transla

tamq am - sic,etc. The adversative se of t-ita is rare in the classical period,b t extends later. [COORDINATION.305] 5.Adversative : non modo, non sol m, non tant m,not only; sed, sed etiam, sed q oq e, ver m etiam,b t even,b t also : Urbes maritimae non sol m m ltis peric lis oppositae [s nt] sed etiam ca ecis,C.,Rep.,ii.3,5 : cities on the seaboard are liable not only to many dangers ,b t even(also) to hidden(ones). [Non] doceri tant m sed etiam delectari vol nt,QUINT.,iv.i,57;they wish not merely to be ta ght,b t to be tickled( ) to boot( X). In the negative form, non modo non, not only not; sed ne q idem, b t not even; sed vix, b t hardly. Ego non modo tibi non irascor,sed ne reprehendo q idem fact m t m,C.,S ll.,1 8,50;I not only am not angry with yo ,b t I do not even find fa lt with yo r action.

REMARKS.1.Instead of non modo(sol m) non-sed ne-q idem,the latter non is general ly omitted,when the two negative cla ses have a verb in common,the negative of t he first cla se being s pplied by the second;otherwise both negatives are expres sed. Pisone cons le senat i non sol m i vare rem p blicam sed ne l gere q ide m licebat, Cf.C.,Pis.10,23; when Piso was cons l,it was not only not left free f or the senate(= the senate was not only not free) to help the commonwealth,b t n ot even to mo rn(for her). 2.Ned m,not(to speak of) yet,m ch less, is also sed,either with or witho t a verb in the S bj nctive;it is fo nd first and only once in TERENCE,never in CAESAR and SALLUST,in CICERO only after negati ve sentences;from LIVY on it is sed after affirmative cla ses as well. Satrapa n mq am s fferre ei s s mpt s q eat,ned m t possis,TER.,Hea t., 454; a nabob() co ld never stand that girl's expendit res,m ch less co ld yo . NOTES.1.Non tant m is never fo nd in early Latin,CAESAR and SALLUST,rarely in CI CERO.Sed q oq e is fo nd first in CICERO;so,too,sed simply,b t rarely.LIVY is es pecially free in his se of sed.Ver m,in the second member,is not ante-classical nor Tacitean.Non alone in the first member is rare,b t Ciceronian,it is s ally followed by sed only;occasionally by sed etiam.Sed is sometimes omitted from LI VY on.Cf.L.,xxviii.39,II;TAC.,Ann.,iii.19,2,etc, 2.Sed et,for sed etiam,belongs to post-A g stan Latin.

Adversative Sentences. 483.The Adversative particles are : a tem, sed, ver m, vero, at, atq i, tamen, ceter m. Of these only sed and tamen are really adversative. NOTE.The Adversative particles are often omitted : as when an affirmative is fol lowed by a negative,or the reverse,or in other contrasts. 484.A tem(post-positive) is the weakest form of b t,and [306 COORDINATION.] indicates a difference from the foregoing,a contrast rather than a contradiction .It serves as a particle of transition and explanation(= moreover,f rthermore,no w),and of res mption(to come back),and is often sed in syllogisms. Modo accedens,t m a tem recedens,C.,N.D.,ii.40,102;now approaching,then again receding. R morib s mec m p gnas,ego a tem a te rationes req iro,C.,N.D.,iii.5,13; yo fight me with r mo rs,whereas I ask of yo reasons. Q od est bon m,omne la dabile est;q od a tem la dabile est,omne est hone st m;bon m igit r q od est,honest m est, C.,Fin.,iii.8,27; everything that is go od is praiseworthy;b t everything that is praiseivorthy is virt o s; therefore,w hat is good is virt o s. REMARK.A tem commonly follows the first word in the sentence or cla se;b t when an nemphatic est or s nt occ pies the second place,it is p t in the third.So ig it r and enim. NOTES.1.Noteworthy is the se of a tem in lively q estions.CICERO employs it in this way,also to correct his own previo s q estions(Epanorthosis). Egon debacchat s s m a tem an t in me ? TER.,Ad.,185.(ay

N m q is testis Post mi m appellavit ? Testis a tem ? non acc sator ? C. ,Rab.Post.,5,10.(N N y)(text 2.A tem is a favorite word with CICERO,especially in his philosophical and moral works,b t not with the Historians,least of all with TACITUS,who ses it only ni ne times in all. 485.Sed(set) is sed partly in a stronger sense,to denote contradiction,partly i n a weaker sense,to introd ce a new tho ght,or to revive an old one. Non est vivere sed valere vita,MART.,vi.70,15(442,R.2). Domiti s n lla q idem arte sed Latine tamen dicebat,C.,Br.,77,267; Domit

y)

i s spoke with no art it is tr e,b t for all that,in good Latin. NOTES.1.The se of sed to carry on a narrative is characteristic of the historia ns,tho gh fo nd also in CICERO. Sed in ea coni ratione f it Q.C ri s,S.,C.,23,1.(

2.Sed is repeated by anaphora(682),occasionally in CICERO(Verr.,iii.72,169),more often later. 3.Sed may be strengthened by tamen;by vero,enimvero,enim;by a tem, b t only in connection with q id,and then only in comedy and in VERGIL.Sometimes it is eq al to sed tamen,as in V.,A.,iv.660.

always takes the first place in a sentence,and is practically eq ivalent to sed in its stronger sense. Si cert m est facere,faciam;ver m ne post conferas c lpam in me, TER.,E n.,388;if yo are determined to do it,I will arrange it;b t yo m st not afterwa rd lay the blame on me. [COORDINATION.307] NOTE.Ver m grad ally gives place to sed in CICERO.It is sed occasionally to ret rn to the s bject (ver m haec q idem hacten s,C.,T sc.,iii.34,84)(X) ,and in yielding a point (ver m esto,C.,Fin.,ii.23,75),( )

487.Vero,of a tr th,is generally p t in the second place,asserts with conviction ,and is sed to heighten the statement. [Platonem] Dion adeo admirat s est t se tot m ei traderet.Neq e vero mi n s Plato delectat s est Dione,NEP.,x.2,3; Dion admired Plato to s ch a degree t hat he gave himself wholly p to him;and indeed Plato was no less delighted with Dion. NOTES.1.Vero is properly an affirmative adverb,and s ch is its only se in PLAUT US.In TERENCE it has also acq ired adversative force,which it preserves thro gho t the lang age in greater or less degree;so in the historians it is hardly more than a tem.

2.The combination ver m vero is ante-classical;on combinations with enim,see 498,N.6. 3.Vero is also,b t not so commonly, sed in transitions;especially in the form la e age vero,

where sed is the

s al word.

486.

Ver m,it is tr e,tr e,

Ma)

iam vero. 488.At(another form of ad = in addition to) introd ces startling transitions,liv ely objections,remonstrances,q estions,wishes,often by way of q otation. "Philocteta,St! brevis dolor." At iam decim m ann m in spel nca iacet,C. ,Fin.,ii.29,94 ;" Philoctetes,still ! the pain is short." B t he has been lying in his cave going on ten years. "At m ltis malis affect s?" Q is negat? C.,Fin.,v.30,92; "b t he has s f fered m ch ? " Who denies it ? At videte hominis intolerabilem a daciam ! C.,Dom.,44,115; well,b t see the fellow's ins fferable a dacity! At vobis male sit! CAT.,iii.13; and ill l ck to yo ! NOTES.1.Ast is the archaic form of at,and is fo nd occasionally in CICERO,de Leg .and ad AM.,b t more often in the poets and the later archaists. 2.At is sed in anaphora,and also,especially in the poets,in contin ing the narr ative.Noteworthy is its se after conditional sentences(in CICERO only after neg atives,never in SALLUST),where it is freq ently strengthened by certe, tamen, saltem: si min s s pplicio adfici,at c stodiri oportebat,C.,Verr.,v.27,69.( 489.Atq i(b t at any rate,b t for all that) is still stronger than at,and is se d chiefly in arg ment. Vix credibile.Atq i sic habet,H.,S.,1.9,52; scarce credible.B t for all that,'tis so. NOTES.1.Atq in is occasional in early Latin,and even in CICERO.2.At seems someti mes to be sed for atq i.C.,T sc.,iii.9,19. 490.Tamen(literally,even th s),nevertheless,is often combined with at,ver m,sed. [308 COORDINATION.] It is commonly prepositive, nless a partic lar word is to be made emphatic. Nat ram expelles f rca,tamen sq e rec rret,H.,Ep.,1.10,24;yo may drive o t Dame Nat re with a pitchfork(),for all that she will ever be ret rning. Domiti s n lla q idem arte sed Latine tamen dicebat,C.,Br.,ii.77,267(485 ). REMARK.Nihilomin s(nothing the less),nevertheless,is sed like tamen,by which it is occasionally strengthened. 491.Ceter m,for the rest,is sed by the Historians as an adversative particle. D o imperatores,ipsi pares ceter m opib s disparib s,S.,I g.,52,1; two c ommanders,eq al in personal q alities,b t of neq al reso rces. NOTE.Ceter m is fo nd once in TERENCE(E n.,452),once in CICERO(Q.F.,ii.12,1),oth

erwise not before SALLUST. Disj nctive Sentences. 492.The Disj nctive particles are a t,vel,-ve,sive(sen), NOTE.The Disj nctive particles are b t rarely omitted,and then mainly in contras ted opposites like pa per-dives,pl s-min s, and the like. 493.1 .A t,or,denotes absol te excl sion or s bstit tion. Vinceris a t vincis,PROP.,ii.8,8;yo are conq ered or conq ering. 2.A t is often corrective "or at least","at most","rather"

(a t saltem,a t poti s). C ncti a t magna pars fidem m tavissent,S.,I g.,56,5;all,or at least a g reat part,wo ld have changed their allegiance(). D o a t s mm m tres i venes,L.,xxx i.5,8;two,or at most three,yo ths. 3.A t-a t,either-or. Q aedam terrae partes a t frigore rigent a t r nt r calore, Cf.C.,T sc. ,1.28,68;some parts of the earth are either fro en with cold or b rnt with heat.

A t dic a t accipe calcem,J v.,iii.295;either speak or take a kick.(a NOTES.1.The se of a t to carry on a preceding negative is fo nd first in CICERO .b t becomes more common later :

nemo trib nes a t plebem timebat,L.,iii.16,4.( 2.A t is sometimes eq ivalent to partly-partly in TACITUS; Ha sta a t obr ta Campaniae ora,H.,1.2. 3.On a t in interrogative sentences,see 458,N.4. 494.1.Vel(literally,yo may choose) gives a choice,often with etiam, even, poti s,rather. [COORDINATION.309] Ego vel Cl vien s,.J v.,I.80;I,or,if yo choose,Cl vien s. Per me vel stertas licet,non modo q iescas,C.,Ac.,ii.29,93;for all I car e,yo may(even) snore,if yo choose,not merely take yo r rest(sleep). Satis vel etiam nimi m m lta,C.,Fam.,iv.14,3;eno gh,or even too m ch.

Epic r s homo minime mal s vel poti s vir optim s, C.,T sc.,ii.19,44;Epi c r s(was) a person by no means bad,or,rather,a man of excellent character. 2.Vel-vel,either-or(whether-or). [Miltiades dixit] ponte rescisso regem vel hosti m ferro vel inopia pa c is dieb s interit r m,NEP.,1.3,4;Miltiades said that if the bridge were c t the king wo ld perish in a few days,whether by the sword of the enemy,or for want of provisions. NOTES.1.Vel,for example,is rare in PLAUTUS and TERENCE,b t common in CICERO,espe cially in the Letters. 2.Vel in the sense of a t is rare in the classical period(C.,Rep.,ii.28,50),b t is more common later,beginning with OVID.See TAC.,Ann.,1.59. 3.Vel vel is fo nd in PLAUTUS occasionally in the sense as well as,b t in classi cal Latin is rigidly disting ished from et 6t. 4.A t is not ncommonly s bdivided by vel vel : a t canere vel voce vel fidib s, C.,Div.,ii.59,122. 495.-Ve(enclitic) is a weaker form of vel,and in CICEEO is sed principally with n merals,in the sense at most,or with words from the same stem or of similar fo rmation. Bis terve,C.,Fam.,ii.i,1;twice or at most thrice(bis terq e,twice and in deed as m ch as thrice,if not more). C r timeam d bitemve loc m defendere? J v.,1.103;why sho ld I fear or he sitate to maintain my position ? Aliq id faciendi non faciendive ratio,C.,Inv.,ii.9,31;the method of doin g something or not doing it. NOTES.1.In early Latin ve is more often cop lative than adversative.2.Ve ve is p oetical only. 496.1. Sive(se ),if yo choose,gives a choice between two designations of the s ame object. Urbem matri se novercae relinq it,L.,1.3,3;he leaves the city to his mo ther or(if it seems more likely) to his step-mother.

Sive medic m adhib eris sive non adbib eris non convalesces, C.,Fat.,12, 29;whether yo employ a physician,or do not employ(one),yo will not get well. Se visa est cat lis cerva fidelib s se r pit teretes Mars s aper plaga s, H.,O.,1.i,27;whether a doe hath appeared to the faithf l ho nds,or a Marsian boar hath b rst the tightly-twisted toils. NOTES.1.Single sive(= or) is not fo nd in PLAUTUS or TERENCE( Cf.And.,190),b t i t occ rs in LUCRETIUS,LUCILIUS,and is common in CICEHO.CAESAR and SAL[310 COORDINATION.] LUST,however,do not se it,and it is rare in the Poets.In the sense of sive-sive it is fo nd occasionally in poetry;b t in prose only three t nes in TACITUS.

2.

Sive - sive(se se ),whether or(indifference).

2.Sive -Sive is not fo nd in TERENCE,b t from CICERO on becomes common. 3.No distinction seems possible between sive and se . 497. An is sed in the sense of or not ncommonly in CICERO,especially in the Letters; occasionally in LIVY,and freq ently in TACITUS.Elsewhere it is rare.Se e 457. Tiberi s cas an manib s [Haterii] impedit s prociderat, TAC.,Ann.,1.13, 7;Tiberi s had fallen forward,either by chance or tripped by Hateri s'hands. Ca sal and Illative Sentences. 498.A.The Ca sal particles are nam,enim,namq e.and etenim,for. Nam is p t at the beginning of a sentence; enim is post-positive (484,R.) : namq e and etenim are commonly p t in the first place. Sens s mirifice conlocati s nt;nam oc li tamq am spec latores altissim m loc m obtinent,C.,N.D.,2.56,140;the senses are admirably sit ated;for the eyes, like watchmen,occ py the highest post. Pisces ova relinq nt,facile enim illa aq a s stinent r,C.,N.D.,2.51,129 ; fish leave their eggs,for they are easily kept alive by the water. [Themistocles] m ros Atheniensi m restit it s o peric lo;namq e Lacedaem onii prohibere conati s nt,NEP.,2.6,2;Themistocles restored the walls of Athens with risk to himself;for the Lacedaemonians endeavo red to prevent it. NOTES.1.The A g stan poets postpone both nam and namq e according to the req ire ments of the metre,and in prose,beginning with LIVY,namq e is fo nd sometimes in the second place,b t more often in LIVY than later. In early Latin enim is often first in the sentence;etenim is postponed in prose only in the elder PLINY and APULEIUS;in the poets,not ncommonly,so in AFRANIUS, TIBULLUS,PROPERTIUS,and HORACE. 2.These particles are originally asseverative,and are often sed not only to f r nish a reason,b t also to give an explanation or ill stration(as for instance). Q id enim agas? what,for instance,can yo do? This is especially tr e of enim,b t is also common eno gh with nam(N.3),and a br oad difference between nam and enim (which is of common origin with nam) cannot be proved.Etenim is often sed to carry on the arg ment,and gives an additional gro nd. 3.The asseverative force of nam is retained in conversational style occasionally ,even in CICERO( Verr.,1.51,133). Enim is almost wholly asseverative in PLAUTUS and TERENCE. Namq e is very rare in PLAUTUS and TERENCE,and is fo nd before vowels on ly.In classical Latin it is also rare,and fo nd s ally before vowels.With LIVY it comes into general se before vowels and consonants eq ally.

Etenim is fo nd b t once in PLAUTUS(Am.,26,an interpolation) and fo r ti mes in TERENCE;in post-classical Latin also it is not common,b t it is very freq ent in classical Latin,especially in CICERO.

4.Noteworthy is the se of nam,in passing over a matter : nam q id ego de actione ipsa pl ra dicam ?(C.,O.,1.5,18 5.Nam shows an affinity for interrogative particlesl ang age(TER.,Ph.,932), [COORDINATION.311] b t becomes firmly attached in the classical period in the forms

m.Here it sometim

q isnam, binam,etc.,

which,however,sometimes s ffer tmesis and transposition in poetry(V.,G.,4,445). 6.In atenim(first in CICERO),nempe enim(ante-classical and post-classical), sed enim(rare),ver menim,enimvero,ver m enimvero, as in etenim, the enim gives a gro nd or an ill stration of the leading particle,b t translati on by an ellipsis wo ld be too heavy,and enim is best left ntranslated : A. A di q id dicam. B. At enim taedet iam a dire eadem miliens,TER.,Ph.,487; A.Hear what I say. B.B t(I won't,for) I am tired of hearing the same things a tho sand times alread y. 7. Enim

is sed pleonastically after q ia in early Latin,and then again in PETRONIUS and GELLIUS;also after t and ne in early Latin.

q ippe is eq al to enim. 499.B.Illative() particles are itaq e,igit r,ergo; eo,hinc,inde,ideo,idcirco,q ocirca,propterea,q apropter,proin,proinde.

is p t at the beginning of the sentence by the best writers,and is sed of facts that follow from the preceding statement. Nemo a s s est Phocionem liber sepelire;itaq e a servis sep lt s est, Cf .NEP.,xix.4,4; no free man dared to b ry Phocion,and so he was b ried by slaves.

500.

Itaq e(literally,and so),therefore,

is originally interrogative.From this the ca sal force developes,which is not common in CICERO.In SALLUST,and especially in LIVY and later writers,

8.

Q ippe n

REMARK.Itaq e in early and classical Latin has first place in a sentence.It is f irst postponed by LUCRETIUS,then by CORNIFICIUS and HORACE,and more often later.

is sed of opinions which have their nat ral gro nd in the preceding statement;i n CICERO it is s ally post-positive,in SALLUST never. Mihi non satisfacit.Sed q ot homines tot sententiae;falli igit r poss m s, C.,Fin.,1.5,15;ME it does not satisfy.B t many men many minds.I may therefore be mistaken. NOTE.In historical writers

Occasionally also(not in classical Latin),it seems to have the force of enim(PL.,Most.,1102,MSS.).

and is sed especially in arg ments,with somewhat more emphasis than igit r. Negat haec filiam me s am esse; non ergo haec mater mea est,PL.,Ep.,590; she says that I am not her da ghter,therefore she is not my mother. NOTES.1.In the Poets ergo sometimes introd ces a strong concl sion in advance of the premise(H.,O.,1.24,5).In the classical period,however,its predominant se i a to introd ce the logical concl sion. [312 SUBORDINATION.] 2. Ergo s ally comes first,b t its position is apt to vary in accordance w ith the stress laid pon it.

ergo igit r in PLAUTUS. 503.Other Coordinating Conj nctions : hinc,hence, is fo nd not nfreq ently : hinc illae lacr mae,TER.,And.,126. Inde,thence,therefore, is rare,and first in CICERO,b t more common in later Latin. Eo,therefore, is fo nd in early Latin,rarely in CICERO(Fam.,vi.20,1),not in CAESAR or SALLUST; again in Livy and later;so b t

ideo,on that acco nt,

3.

Itaq e ergo is fo nd in TERENCE and LIVY;

502.

Ergo denotes necessary conseq ence,

igit r is sometimes

sed like itaq e.

501.

Igit r,therefore,

atq e ideo is fo nd once in CAESAR.

Idcirco,on that acco nt, is rare,b t from the earliest times. Q ocirca,on which acco nt, is fo nd first in the classical period;

q apropter is fo nd here and there in early Latin,b t more commonly in the classical time,r arely later; propterea,on that acco nt, is rare,and belongs to early Latin. Proin,proinde,accordingly, are employed in exhortations,appeals,and the like. Q od praecept m(nosce te ips m),q ia mai s erat q am t ab homine videre t r,idcirco assignat m est deo,C.,Fin.,v.16,44;this precept (know thyself),(beca se it was too great to seem to be of man),was,(on that acco nt),attrib ted to a god.

Proinde a t exeant a t q iescant,C.,Cat.,ii.5,11; let them then either d epart or be q iet.

SUBORDINATION. 504.S bordinate sentences are only extended forms of the simple sentence,and are divided into Adjective and S bstantive sentences,according as they represent ad jective and s bstantive relations. This arrangement is a matter of convenience merely,and no attempt is made to rep resent the development of the s bordinate sentence from the coordinate. 505.Adjective sentences express an attrib te of the s bject in an expanded form.

506.S bstantive sentences are introd ced by particles,which correspond in their origin and se to the Obliq e Cases,Acc sative and Ablative. These two cases f rnish the mass of adverbial relations,and hence we make a s bd ivision for this class,and the distrib tion of the s bordinate sentence appears as follows : 507.A.S bstantive sentences. I.Object sentences. [SUBORDINATION.313] II.Adverbial sentences :

Uxor q ae bona est,PL.,Merc.,812(624) =

xor bona.

1.Of Ca se.(Ca sal.) 2.Of Design and Tendency.(Final and Consec tive.) 3.Of Time.(Temporal.) 4.Of Condition and Concession.(Conditional and Concessive.) B.Adjective sentence s.(Relative.) Moods in S bordinate Sentences. 508.1.Final and Consec tive Cla ses always take the S bj nctive.Others vary acco rding to their conception.Especially important are the changes prod ced by Orati o Obliq a. 2.Oratio Obliq a,or Indirect Disco rse,is opposed to Oratio Recta,or Direct Disc o rse,and gives the main drift of a speech and not the exact words.Oratio Obliq a,proper,depends on some Verb of Saying or Thinking expressed or implied,the Pri ncipal Declarative Cla ses being p t in the Infinitive,the Dependent in the S bj nctive.

Socrates dicere solebat : O.R.Omnes in eo q od sci nt satis s nt eloq entes. Socrates sed to say : "All men ARE eloq ent eno gh in what they UNDERST AND." O.O.Omnes in eo q od scirent satis esse eloq entes,.C.,Or.,1.14,63. RSTOOD.

3.The obliq e relation may be confined to a dependent cla se and not extend to t he whole sentence.This may be called Partial Obliq ity. O.R.Nova n pta dicit : Fleo q od ire necesse est. The bride says : I weep beca se I m st needs go. O.O.Nova n pta dicit se flere q od ire necesse sit. The bride says that she weeps beca se she m st needs go. O.R.Nova n pta flet q od ire necesse est,Cf.CAT.,LXI.81. The bride weeps beca se she m st go. O.O.Nova n pta flet q od ire necesse sit. The bride is weeping beca se " she m st go "(q oth she). [314 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.] 4.Akin to O.O.is the so-called Attraction of Mood,by which cla ses originally In dicative are p t in the S bj nctive beca se they depend on Infinitives or S bj n ctives.(603.) Non d bito q in nova n pta fleat q od ire necesse sit.I do not do bt tha

Socrates

sed to say that all men WERE eloq ent eno gh in what they UNDE

t the bride is weeping beca se she m st go. REMARK.The f ll disc ssion of O.O.m st,of co rse,be reserved for a later period. See 648. SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 509.1.In those dependent sentences which req ire the S bj nctive,the choice of t he tenses of the dependent cla se is determined largely by the time of the leadi ng or principal cla se,so that Principal Tenses are ordinarily followed by Princ ipal Tenses;Historical,by Historical. NOTE.As the s bordinate sentence arose o t of the coordinate,hypotaxis o t of pa rataxis,the tenses of the S bjv.had originally an independent val e,and the asso ciation was simply the nat ral association of time.B t in some classes of senten ces a certain mechanical levelling has taken place,as in the Final sentence;and in others,as in the Interrogative sentence,the range of the S bjv.is restricted by the necessity of clearness,j st as the range of the Inf.is restricted by the necessity of clearness(530); so that a conventional Seq ence of Tenses has to be recognised.To s bstit te for every dependent tense a corresponding independent tense,and so do away with the whole doctrine of Seq ence,is impossible.At the sa me time it m st be observed that the mechanical r le is often violated by a ret rn to the primitive condition of parataxis,and that 2.This r le is s bject to the following modifications : 1.Tense means time,not merely tense-form,so that (a) The Historical Present may be conceived according to its sense (Past) or acc ording to its tense(Present).(229.) (b) In the P re Perfect may be felt the past inception or origin (Past),or the p resent completion(Present).(235,1.) 2.The effect of a past action may be contin ed into the present or the f t re of the writer(513). 3.The leading cla se may itself consist of a principal and dependent,cla se,and so give rise to a conflict of tenses with varying Seq ence (511,R.2). 4.An original S bj nctive(467) of the past(265) resists levelling,especially in the Indirect Q estion. [SEQUENCE OF TENSES.315 ] 510. All forms that relate } bj nctive to the Present and } ion); F t re(so especially } are followed by Principal Tenses) } action). erfect S bj nctive All forms that relate to} the Past(so especially } are followed by Historical Tenses) }

{(for contin ed act {the Perfect S bj nctive {(for completed

{the Imp

{(for contin ed action); {the Pl perfect S bj nc{tive(for completed ac-

{ the Present S

{tion). REMARK.The action which is completed with regard to the leading verb may be in i tself a contin ed action.So in English : I do not know what He has been doing,I did not know what he had been doing.The Latin is nable to make this distinction ,and accordingly the Imperfect Indicative(I was doing) is represented in this de pendent form by the Perfect and Pl perfect,when the action is completed as to th e leading verb. 511.

FUT.,

When the S bj nctive is original,we have : cognosco,etc.,I am finding o t,{ q id facias, what yo are to do. { q id faceres, what yo were to do. cognovi,etc.,I knew, { q id faceres, what yo were to do.

. Nihil refert postrema syllaba brevis an longa sit,Cf.C.,Or.,64,217 (461) . Ubii(Caesarem) orant(historical) t sibi parcat,CAES.,B.G.,vi.9,7(546,i) . [316 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.] Nemo adeo fer s est t non mitescere possit,H.,Ep.,1.i,39 (552). Nec mea q i digitis l mina condat erit,Ov.,Her.,10,120(681,2). R stic s exspectat d m defl at amnis,H.,Ep.,1.2,42(572). Post mortem in morte nihil est q od met am mali,PL.,Capt.,741(631,2). Ardeat ipsa licet,tormentis ga det amantis,J v.,vi.209(607). Utr m nescis q am alts ascenderis an pro nihilo id p tas ? C.,Fam.,x.26, 3(458).

PLUPF.,

HIST.Pr.,

IMPF.,

Principal Tenses

HIST.PR.,

FUT.PF.,

done, PURE PP.,

cognovi, I have fo nd o t { what yo have been (I know), { doing(what yo did), cognovero, I shall have fo nd { what yo were doing o t(shall know), { (before). cognosco, I am(was) finding { q id faceres, o t, { what yo were doing; cognoscebam,I was finding o t,{ q id fecisses, { what yo had done,what cognovi, I fo nd o t, { yo had been doing, { what yo were doing cognoveram,I had fo nd o t { (before). (I knew),

PR.(PURE

cognosco,I am finding o t, { q id facias, OR HIST.), { what yo are doing; cognoscam,I shall(try to) { q id feceris, find o t, { what yo have

La dat African m Panaeti s q od f erit abstinens,C.,Off.,ii.22,76(542). Non is es t te p dor mq am a t rpit dine revocarit,C.,Cat.,1.9,22(552) . Q em mea Calliope laeserit n s ego(s m),Ov.,Tr.,ii.568(631,i). Sim licet extrem m,sic t s m,miss s in orbem,Ov.,Tr.,iv.9,9(607). M lti f er nt q i tranq illitatem expetentes a negotiis p blicis se remo verint, C.,Off.,1.20,69(631,2). Historical Tenses. Epaminondas q aesivit salv sne esset clipe s,C.,Fin.,ii.30,97(467). Noct amb labat in p blico Themistocles q od somn m capere non posset, C .,T sc.,iv.19,44(541). [Athenienses] creant decem praetores q i exercit i praeessent, NEP.,1.4, 4(545). Accidit t na nocte omnes Hermae deicerent r,NEP.,vii.3,2(513,R.2). Ad Appi Cla di senect tem accedebat etiam t caec s esset, C.,Cat.M.,6,1 6(553,4). Hannibal omnia pri sq am excederet p gna(erat) expert s,L.,xxx.35,4(577) . (Agesila s) c m ex Aegypto reverteret r decessit,NEP.,xvii.8,6(585). Tanta opib s Etr ria erat t iam non terras sol m sed mare etiam fama no minis s i implesset,L.,1.2,5(521,R.i). C m primi ordines hosti m concidissent,tamen acerrime reliq i resisteban t, CAES.,B.G.,vii.62,4 (587). Deleta (est) A son m gens perinde ac si internecivo bello certasset, L., ix.25,9(602).

Original S bj nctive Retained. Ipse docet q id agam(original,agam); fas est et ab hoste doceri,Ov.,M.,iv.428(219). Q aero a te c r ego C.Corneli m non defenderem (original,defenderem), C. ,Vat.,2,5(467). Miser nt Delphos cons lt m q id facerent(original,faciam s),NEP.,ii.2,6( 518). REMARKS.1.The treatment of the Hist.Pr.according to its sense (past) is the r le in classical Latin,especially when the dependent cla se precedes.B t there are many exceptions. Ag nt gratias q od sibi pepercissent;q od arma c m hominib s consang ine is cont lerint q er nt r,CAES.,B.C.,1.74,2; they ret rn thanks to them for havin

g spared them,and complain that they had crossed swords with kinsmen. 2.Noteworthy is the shift from the primary to the secondary seq ence; this is mo stly confined to cla ses of do ble dependence,i.e.,where one s bordinate cla se is itself principal to a second s bordinate cla se. [SEQUENCE OF TENSES.317 ]

Rogat t c ret q od dixisset,C.,Q inct.,5,18;he asks him to attend to wh at he had said(he wo ld). So of a thors : [Chrysipp s] disp tat aethera esse e m q em homines Jovem appellarent, C .,N.D.,1.15,40;Chrysipp s maintains that to be ether which men call Jove. 3.The P re Pf.is s ally treated as a Hist.Pf.in the matter of seq ence : Q ae s bsidia haberes et habere posses,expos i,Q.CICERO,4,13;what s ppor ts yo have or can have I have set forth. 4.The reverse sage,when an Hist.Pf.is followed by a primary S bjv.,is not commo n.Many of those cited from CICERO are from the Letters,where the shift of tense might be infl enced by the letter-tense principle(252). Sed q o consilio redierim,initio a distis,post estis experti, C.,Ph.,x.4 ,8. Q is miles f it,q i Br ndisii illam non viderit,C.,Ph.,11.25,61.(The con text shows that f it cannot be P re Pf.) 512.Seq ence of Tenses in Sentences of Design.Sentences of Design have,as a r le ,only the Present and Imperfect S bj nctive.The Roman keeps the p rpose and the process,rather than the attainment,in view.

eder nt,they ate,

Spectat m veni nt,veni nt spectent r t ipsae,Ov.,A.A.,1.99(435).

Gallinae pennis fovent p llos ne frigore laedant r,Cf.C.,N.D.ii.52,129(5 45). Legem brevem esse oportet,q o facili s ab imperitis teneat r,SEN.,E.M.,9 4,38 (545). Me praemisit dom m haec t n ntiem xori s ae,PL.,Am.,195;he has sent me home ahead of him,to take the news to his wife.

Sed precor

t possim t ti s esse miser,Ov.,Tr.,v.2,78(424).

IMPF., PLUPF., o HIST.PP.,

edebant,they were eating, ederant,they had eaten,

} t viverent, } that they might live(t live).

PR., PUBE PP., FUT., FUT.PP.,

ed nt,they are eating, eder nt,they have eaten, edent,they will eat, ederint,they will have eaten,

} } t vivant, } that they may live(to } live

Here the first has

s ally the primary,the second the secondary seq ence.

[Laeli s] veniebat ad cenam t satiaret desideria nat rae,C.,Fin.,ii.8,2 5;Laeli s sed to go to table,to satisfy the cravings of nat re. i). [318 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.] REMARK.Parenthetical final sentences like t ita dicam,ne erretis,

are really dependent on the tho ght or tterance of the speaker,and have the pre sent seq ence everywhere. Ne longior sim,vale,C.,Fam.,xv.19; not to be tedio s,farewell!

NOTES.1.The Pf.and Pl pf.S bjv.are sometimes fo nd in sentences of Design,chiefl y in earlier and later Latin(no example is cited from CAESAU or SALLUST),when st ress is laid on completion,or when an element of Hope or Fear comes in : Ut Sic dixerim(first fo nd in QUINT.),if I may be allowed to se the exp ression. Affirmare a deo me omni ope adnis r m esse ne fr stra vos hanc spem de m e conceperitis,L.,XLIV.22;I dare ass re yo that I will strain every nerve to ke ep yo from having conceived this hope of me in vain.(After a past tense,n conce pissetis.) N nc agend m est ne fr stra oppress m esse Antoni m gavisi sim s,C.,ad B r.,1.4,3. _N_yya} Hic obsistam,ne impr denti h c ea se s brepsit(131,4,b.2) mihi,PL.,M.G., 333.M N ] yaa

Effecit ne c i s alteri s sacrilegi m res p blica q am Neronis sensisset , TAC.,Agr.,6.0yay0 When the tense is compo nd,the participle is s ally to be considered as a mere adjective. Patron s extiti(=exstiti) ti ne [Sex.Bosci s] omnino desert s esset,C.,R osc.Am.,2,5;where desert s = sol s. NyaNy 2.Occasional apparent exceptions are to be explained in vario s ways.Th s,in C., Sest.,14,32 : etiamne edicere a deas ne maererent?, y}h

we have a repetition as an indignant q estion of the preceding statement :

edic nt(Hist.Pr.) d o cons les t ad s

m vestit m senatores redirent.

t yo l.

Ne tamen ignores,virt te Neronis Armeni s cecidit,H.,Ep.,I.12,25;b t tha may not fail to know it,it was by the valo r of Nero that the Armenian fel

(Phaethon) optavit

t in c rr m patris tolleret r,C.,Off.,iii.25,94(546,

Oc los ecfodiam tibi ne me observare possis,PL.,A l.,53; I will go ge o t yo r eyes for yo ,to make it impossible for yo to watch me.

513.Exceptional Seq ence of Tenses : Sentences of Res lt(Consec tive Sentences). In Sentences of Res lt,the Present S bj nctive is sed after Past Tenses to deno te the contin ance into the Present,the Perfect S bj nctive to imply final res l t.This Perfect S bj nctive may represent either the P re Perfect or Aorist,the l atter especially with the negative : the action happened once for all or not at all. Present Tense : [Siciliam Verres] per trienni m ita vexavit t ea restit i in antiq m s tat m n llo modo possit,C.,Verr.,I.4,12;Verres so harried() Sicily for three years a s to make it tterly impossible for it to be restored to its original condition. In [L c llo] tanta pr dentia f it t hodie stet Asia,C.,Ac.,ii.i,3;L c l l s's foretho ght was so great that Asia stands firm to-day. Perfect Tense(P re) : (M rena) Asiam sic obiit t in ea neq e avaritiae neq e l x riae vestigi m reliq erit,C.,M r.,9,20;M rena so administered Asia as not to have(that he ha s not) left in it a trace either of greed or deba chery (there is no trace there ). [SEQUENCE OF TENSES.319 ] Perfect Tense(Aorist) : Eq ites hosti m acriter c m eq itat nostro conflixer nt,tamen t nostri eos in silvas collesq e comp lerint,CAES.,B.G.,v.15,1;the cavalry of the enemy engaged the cavalry on o r side briskly,and yet(the pshot was that) o r men for ced them into the woods and hills. Neq e vero tam remisso ac lang ido animo q isq am omni m f it q i ea noc te conq ieverit,CAES.,B.C.,1.21,5; and indeed there was no one at all of so slac k and indifferent a temper as to take(a wink of) sleep that night. REMARKS.1.After a P re Pf.,if the dependent cla se is affirmative,CICEILO prefer s the Impf.(he has b t five cases of Pf.); if negative the Pf.(in the proportion 2 to 1). 2.After accidit,contigit,and other verbs of Happening,

Accidit t na nocte omnes Hermae deicerent r,NEP.,vii.,3,2;it happened that in one night all the Hermae were thrown down. NOTES.1.The se of the Aoristic Pf.S bjv.after an Aoristic Pf.Indic.seems to hav e been an attempt of the Romans to replace the consec tive Aor.Inf.in Greek with wore.Examples are not fo nd in early Latin,are rare in CICERO,very rare in CAES AR,perhaps not at all iij SALLUST;more freq ent in LIVY,common in TACITUS,very c ommon in NEPOS and SUETONIUS,etc. 2.In two coordinated cla ses depending on the same verb we find the tenses occas ionally varying.The Pf.in the first s bordinate,with Impf.in the second,is do bt f l in any case,rare in CICERO,and is cited b t once each from CAESAR(B.G.,vii.1 7) and VELLEIUS(1.9,1).The reverse constr ction,Impf.followed by Pf.,is more com mon,b t fo nd first(tho gh rarely) in LIVY,and belongs mainly to late Latin.

the Impf.is always

sed,the res lt being already emphasised in the Indic.form.

Zeno n llo modo is erat q i nervos virt tis inciderit,sed contra q i omn ia in virt te poneret,C.,Ac.,1.10,35. yy Here the shift is d e to the negative. Tant s pavor omnes occ pavit t non modo ali s q isq am arma caperet sed etiam ipse rex perf gerit,L.,xxiv.40,12. Here the tenses depend on the ideas of contin ance and completion,of the many an d the single(non capiebant-rex perf git). 3.In relative sentences of coincident action with ca sal coloring,either the coi ncidence is retained,or a principal cla se in the Past is followed by the Impf.S bj nctive.

C m hoc Pompei s vehementer egit c m diceret,etc.,C.,Att.,ii.22,2. Videor mihi grat m fecisse Sic lis,q od eor m ini rias sim persec t s, c .,Verr.,ii.6,15 (518,R.). Representation of the S bj nctive in the F t re and F t re Perfect Tenses. 514.The S bj nctive has no F t re or F t re Perfect,which are represented either by the other S bj nctives,or in the Active by the S bj nctive of the Periphrast ic Conj gation. RULE I.(a) After a F t re or F t re Perfect Tense,the F t re relation(contempora ry with the leading F t re) is [320 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.] represented by the Present S bj nctive;the F t re Perfect (prior to the leading F t re) by the Perfect S bj nctive,according to the r le.

} }

(will have done).

(b) B t whenever the dependent F t re is s bseq ent to the leading F t re,the Pe riphrastic Tense m st be employed. Cognoscam, I shall(try to) find o t, } q id fact r s si s Cognovero, }what yo are going to d o(what I shall have fo nd o t(shall know), } yo will do) ' [Considerabim s],[we shall consider]. A.Q id fecerit a t q id ipsi accident a t q id dixerit,what he has done, or what has happened to him,or what he has said. B.A t q id faciat,q id ipsi accidat,q id dicat,or,what he is doing,what

(will be doing). } q id feceris,what yo

Cognoscam, re doing I shall(try to) find o t, Cognovero, have done I shall have fo nd o t(shall know),

} q id facias,what yo a

h manissime fecisti q i me certiorem feceris,C.,Att.,xiii43,1.

is happening to him,what he is saying. C.A t q id fact r s sit,q id ipsi cas r m sit,q a sit s r s oratione, C .,Inv.,1.25,36; or what he is going to do(will do),what is going to (will) happe n to him,what plea he is going to employ(will employ). T q id sis act r s peregrat m erit si ad me scripseris,C.,Fam.,ix.2,5; it will be a great favo r if yo will write to me what yo are going to do. REMARK.In some of these forms ambig ity is navoidable.So A may represent a real Perfect,B a real Present. 515.RULE II.After the other tenses,the F t re relation is expressed by the Activ e Periphrastic S bj nctive,Present or Imperfect.

[SEQUENCE OF TENSES.321 ] Tam ea res est facilis t inn merabilis nat ra m ndos effect ra sit,effi ciat,effecerit,Cf.C.,N.D.,1.21,53; the thing is so easy that nat re will make,is making,has made,inn merable worlds. Incert m est q am longa c i sq e nostr m vita f t ra sit,C.,Verr.,1.58,1 53;it is ncertain how long the life of each one of s is going to be(will be). Antea d bitabam vent raene essent legiones;n nc mihi non est d bi m q in vent rae non sint,C.,Fam.,ii.17,5;before,I was do btf l whether the legions wo ld come(or no);now I have no do bt that they will not come. REMARKS.1.The Pf.and Pl pf.S bjv.of the Periphrastic are sed only to represent the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional Sentence. Cognosco, Cognovi, q id fact r e f eris,(wh at yo have been I am finding o t,I have fo nd o t what yo wo ld have done, going to do). (know), Cognoscebam, Cognoveram, [q id fact ri f isses,(what yo had been I was trying to find o t,I had fo nd o t,what yo wo ld have going to do). done,rare.] 2.There is no Periphrastic for the F t.Pf.active,no Periphrastic for passive and S pineless Verbs.The Grammars make p a Periphrastic for all these from f t r m sit,esset t,as : l have ret rned

{ t redierit,that he wil

Cognoscebam, I was trying to find o t, Cognoveram, I had fo nd o t,

} } q id fact r s esses(what yo were going to } do),what yo wo ld do. }

Cognosco, I am finding o t, Cognovi, I have fo nd o t(know),

} } q id fact r s sis(what yo are going to } do),what yo will do. }

B t there is no warrant in act al sage.For the dependent F t.Pf.act.TERENCE say s(Hec.,618).: T a refert nil tr m illaec feceri t q ando haec aberit. For the dependent F t.Pf.pass.CICERO says(Fam.,vi.12,8) : Nec d bito q in confecta res f t ra sit,nor do I do bt b t the matter wi ll have been settled. In the absence of the Periphrastic forms, se the proper tenses of posse.(248,R.) 3.When the preceding verb has a f t re character(Fear,Hope,Power,Will,and the li ke),the simple S bjv.is s fficient. Galli,nisi perfregerint m nitiones,de omni sal te desperant;Romani,si re m obtin erint,finem labor m omni m exspectant,CAES.,B.G.,vii.85,3;the Ga ls desp air of all safety nless they break thro gh(shall have broken thro gh) the forti fications;the Romans look forward to an end of all their toils,if they hold thei r own(shall have held). Vener nt q erentes nec spem llam esse resistendi,nisi praesidi m Roman s misisset, L-,xxxiv.ii,2;they came with the complaint that there was no hope of resistance nless the Roman sent a force to protect them.

Intenti q ando hostis impr dentia r eret,TAC.,H.,ii.34.(N Of co rse the Deliberative S bj nctive is f t re : Examples,265.

Et certamen habent leti,q ae viva seq at r coni gi m,PROP.,iv.12,19(M.).N 516.Seq ence of Tenses in Oratio Obliq a : In Oratio Obliq a and kindred constr ctions,the attraction of tenses applies also to the representatives of the F t r e and F t re Perfect S bj nctive. [322 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.] In [clava] erat script m nisi dom m reverteret r se capitis e m damnat r os,NEP.,iv.3,4; it was written on the staff that if he did not ret m home,they w o ld condemn him to death.(Oratio Recta : nisi dom m reverteris,te capitis damna bim s, nless yo (shall) ret rn home,we will condemn yo to death). Pythia praecepit t Miltiadem sibi imperatorem s merent;id si fecissent( O.R.,feceritis) incepta prospera f t ra (O.R.,er nt),NEP.,1.i,3;the Pythia instr cted them to take Miltiades for their general;that if they did that,their nder takings wo ld be s ccessf l.

Lacedaemonii,Philippo minitante per litteras se omnia q ae conarent r (O .R.,conabimini) prohibit r m,q aesiver nt n m se esset etiam mori prohibit r s ( O.R,prohibebis), C.,T sc.,v.14,42; the Lacedaemonians,when Philip threatened the m by letter that he wo ld prevent everything they ndertook(sho ld ndertake),as ked whether he was going to(wo ld) prevent them from dying too. 517.Seq ence of Tenses after the other Moods.The Imperative and the Present and

Non d bito q in f t r m sit, I do not do bt

{ t maereat,that he will grieve { t necet r,that he will be killed.

Perfect S bj nctive have the Seq ences of the Principal Tenses;the Imperfect and Pl perfect have the Seq ences of the Historical Tenses. [Ne] compone comas q ia sis vent r s ad illam,Ov.,Rem.Am.,679; do not ar range(yo r) locks beca se(forsooth) yo are going to see her. Excellentib s ingeniis citi s def erit ars q a civem regant q am q a hos tem s perent,L.,ii.43,10; great geni ses wo ld be more likely to lack the skill to control the citi en than the skill to overcome the enemy. Q id me prohiberet Epic re m esse,si probarem q ae ille diceret ? C.,fin .,1.8,27; what wo ld prevent me from being an Epic rean if I approved what he sa id(says) ? T m ego te prim s hortarer di pensitares q em potissim m eligeres, PLIN .,Ep.,iv.15,8; in that case I sho ld be the first to exhort yo to weigh long wh om yo sho ld choose above all others. Q ae vita f isset Priamo si ab ad lescentia scisset q os event s senect tis esset habit r s ? C.,Div.,ii.9,22;what sort of life wo ld Priam have led if he had known,from early manhood,what were to be the closing scenes of his old ag e ? REMARKS.1.Of co rse,when the Pf.S bjv.represents an Historical Tense,it takes th e historical Seq ence : Magna c lpa Pelopis q i non doc erit fili m q aten s esset q idq e c ran d m, C.,T sc..1.44,107; greatly to blame is Pelops for not having ta ght his son how far each thing was to be cared for. Q i scis an ea ca sa me odisse adsim laverit, t c m matre pl s na esset ? TER.,Hec.,235; how do yo know b t she has pretended to hate me in order to b e more with her(own) mother ? [SEQUENCE OF TENSES.323 ] So also in the Conditional proposition,when the action is past.For varying conce ption,see C.,Off.,iii.24,92. 2.The Impf.S bjv.,being sed in opposition to the Present,might be treated as a Principal Tense,b t the constr ction is less s al : Vererer ne immodicam orationem p tares nisi esset generis ei s t saepe incipere saepe desinere videat r,PLIN.,Ep.,ix.4,1; I sho ld be afraid of yo r th inking the speech of immoderate length,if it were not of s ch kind as to prod ce the effect of often beginning,often ending. O ego ne possim tales sentire dolores q am mallem in gelidis montib s es se lapis ! TIB.,ii.4,7. 518.Seq ence of Tenses after an Infinitive or Participle.When a s bordinate cla se depends on an Infinitive or Participle,Ger nd or S pine,the tense of that cla se follows the tense of the Finite verb,if the Finite verb is Past;if the Finit e verb is Present,it follows the tense that the dependent verb wo ld have had,if it had been independent.

{q id egeris,

what yo have done,

Dicit se interrogate(original ng, interrogo),

{q id agas,

what yo are doi

{q id agat,

he gave {q id act r s { esset, . { o, { ing to d { no anwhat he was go- { swer

Ap d Hypanim fl vi m Aristoteles ait bestiolas q asdam nasci q ae nam d iem vivant, C.,T sc.,1.39,94(650). Satis mihi m lta verba fecisse videor q are esset hoc bell m necessari m , C.,Imp.,10,27; I think I have said eno gh(to show) why this war is necessary. [324 REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.] Apelles pictores eos peccare dicebat q i non sentirent q id esset satis, C.,Or.,22,73; Apellea sed to say that those painters bl ndered who did not per ceive what was(is) eno gh.

C pido incessit animos i ven m sciscitandi ad q em eor m regn m Roman m esset vent r m,L.,1.56,10; the minds of the yo ng men were sei ed by the desire of inq iring to which of them the kingdom of Rome wo ld come. Miser nt Delphos cons lt m q id facerent,NEP.,ii.2,6;they sent to Delphi to ask the oracle what they sho ld do.See 265.

Videor mihi grat m fecisse Sic lis q od eor m ini rias meo peric lo sim persec t s,C.,Verr:,ii.6,15; I seem to have pleased the Sicilians,in that I have followed p their inj ries at my own risk(on acco nt of the coincidence,513,N.3 ).

REMARK.--Nevertheless examples are not rning verb is retained :

nfreq ent where the seq ence of the gove

Athenienses Cyrsil m q endam s adentem t in er nt,C.,Off.,iii.ii,48(546).

rbe manerent lapidib s obr

when I asked him, {non re(literally : to me asking),

{ {q id egisset, { what he had

Mini interroganti,

{q id act r s, what he is going { no an{ sit, to do(will do), { swer. {q id ageret, what he was do-

is doing, {non reMini interroganti, {spondet, when I ask him, ives (literally : to me asking),

{q id egerit, done

what he has {he g

{ spondit, done, {

do). Dicit se interrogasse(original interrogavi), He says that he asked, Dixit se interrogare(original interroge), He said that he was asking,

} }q id ageres, what yo were doing. }q id egisses, what yo had done. }q id act r s esses,what yo were going } to do(wo ld do). } what he

He says that he is asking,

{q id act r s sis, what yo are going { to do(will

ing,

519.Original S bj nctives in Dependence--1.The Potential of Present or F t re af ter a Past tense goes into the Past;the same is tr e of Deliberative Q estions(4 65).On the other hand,the Potential of the Past m st be retained even after a Pr esent tense(467).

Video ca sas esse perm ltas q ae [Tit m Rosci m] impellerent, C.,Rosc.Am .,33,92;I see that there are very many ca ses which might have impelled() Tit s Ros s. Q aero a te c r Gai m Corneli m non defenderem,C.,Vat.,2,5(467).

2.On the behavio r of Conditional S bj nctives in dependence see 597,R.4. REMARK.The Seq ence of Tenses is not nfreq ently deranged by the attraction of parenthetic cla ses or,especially in long sentences,by the shifting of the conce ption.Examples are C.,Balb,,1.2;Ph.,iii.15,39;Ac.,ii.1 8,56,and many others. USE OF THE REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 520.In s bordinate cla ses,the Reflexive is sed with reference either to the s bject of the principal,or to the s bject of the s bordinate,cla se;and sometimes first to the one and then to the other. 521.The Reflexive is sed of the principal s bject when reference is made to the tho ght or will of that s bject; hence,in Infinitive Sentences,in Indirect Q es tions,in Sentences of Design,and in Sentences which partake of the Obliq e Relat ion. [REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.325] Sentit anim s se vi s a,non aliena moveri,C.,T sc.,I.23,55; the mind fee ls that it moves by its own force,(and) not by that of another. Q aesiver nt n m se esset etiam mori prohibit r s,C.,T sc.,v.14,42 (516) . Pompei s a me petivit t sec m et ap d se essem cottidie, Cf.C.,Att,v.6, 1;Pompey asked me to be with him,and at his ho se,daily. Paet s omnes libros q os frater s s reliq isset mihi donavit, C.,Att.,i i.i,12;Paet s presented to me all the books(as he said) that his brother had lef t(q os frater ei s reliq erat,wo ld be the statement of the narrator). REMARKS.1.Sentences of Tendency and Res lt have forms of is,when the s bj.is not the same as that of the leading verb;otherwise the Reflexive : Tarq ini s sic Servi m diligebat t is ei s v lgo haberet r films,G.,Rep .n.21,38;Tarq in loved Servi s so that he was commonly considered his son.B t Tanta opib s Etr ria erat t iam non terras sel m sed mare etiam fama ne minis s i implesset,L.,1.2,5; so great in means(= so powerf l) was Etr ria that she had already filled not only the land,b t even the sea,with the rep tation of her name. 2.The Reflexive may refer to the real agent,and not to the grammatical s bj.of t he principal cla se.(309,2.)

A Caesare invitor sibi t sim legat s,C.,Att.,ii.18,3; I am invited by Caesar(= Caesar invites me) to be lie tenant to him. Especially to be noted is the freer se of s s(309,4).The other forms are emplo yed chiefly in reflexive form lae(309,3),as se recipere,to withdraw,etc.

3.The Reflexive is sed in general sentences,as one,one's self,etc.(309,i): DSfo rme est de se ips m praedicare,C.,Off.,1.38,137; it is nseemly to be bragging a bo t one's self. With the Inf.this follows nat rally from 420. 4.In Indic.relative sentences,which are mere circ mioc tions(505),is is the r le : Socrates inhonestam sibi credidit orationem q am ei Lysias reo compos er at, QUINT.,ii.15,30; Socrates believed the speech which Lysias had composed for him when he was arraigned,dishonoring to him. Sometimes,however,the Reflexive is p t contrary to the r le : Metell s in iis rbib s q ae ad se defecerant praesidia imponit, S.,I g. ,61,1; Metell s p t garrisons in those towns which had gone over to him;reg larl y,ad e m. Ille habet q od sibi debebat r,PETR.,43,1; he has his d e; reg larly,ei. [326 REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.] 5.Sometimes the Demonstrative is sed instead of the Reflexive,beca se the narra tor presents his point of view: Solon,q o t tior vita ei s esset,f rere se sim lavit,C.,Off.,1.30,108; S olon feigned madness that his life might be the safer.(The notion of Res lt intr des.)

Pompei s ignes fieri prohib it,q o occ ltior esset ei s advent s, CAES., B.C.,iii.30,5; Pompey forbade fires to be kindled in order that his approach mig ht be the better concealed. NOTES.1.Occasionally,principally in early Latin,the Reflexive seems to be sed w ith the force merely of a third personal prono n : Vitis si macra erit,sarmenta s a concidito min te,CATO,Agr.,37,3. B t sentences like e m fecisse ai nt q od sibi faci nd m f it(PL.,Poen.,956),where the rela tive cla se is b t a circ mioc tion for offici m s om, belong properly nder R.4.Similarly,C.,Inv.,1.33,55.In the sentence,

Cicero tibi mandat, t Aristodemo idem de se respondeas q od de fratre s o respondisti(C.,Att.,ii.7 ,5),

(Romani) s i colligendi hostib s fac ltatem(non) relinq iii.6,1(309,3).

nt, Caes.,B.G.,

de fratre ei s wo ld jar(Mya) on acco nt of the se to which it refers. 2.Examples of Reflexives pointing both ways : [Romani] legates miser nt q i a [Pr sia] peterent ne inimicissim m s m (=Romanor m) ap d se(= Pr siam) haberet,NEP.,xxiii.12,2;the Romans sent ambassad ors to ask Pr sias not to keep their bitterest enemy at his co rt. Agrippa Attic m flens orabat atq e obsecrabat t se sibi s isq e reserva ret, Cf.NEP.,xxv.22,2;Agrippa begged and conj red Attic s with tears to save him self [Attic s] for him [Agrippa] and for his own family [Attic s] . Hopeless ambig ity : Heres me s dare illi damnas esto(h) omnia s a,QUINT.,VII.9,12;my heir is to ve him all that is his.. 3.For the sake of clearness,the s bj.of the leading sentence is not nfreq ently referred to in the form of the Demonstrative instead of the Reflexive : (Helvetii) Allobrogib s sese vel pers as ros existimabant vel vi coact r os t per s os fines eos ire paterent r,CAES.,B.G.,1.6,3;the Helvetians tho ght that they wo ld pers ade or force the Allobroges to let them [the Helvetians] go thro gh their tenitory. 4.Ipse is always sed in its proper distinctive sense;so,when it represents the speaker in O.O.(660.)

Ei s and S i. 522.Alexander moriens an l m s m dederat Perdiccae,NEP.,xviii.2,1; Alexander,[w hen] dying,had given his ring to Perdiccas. Perdiccas acceperat ei s an l m,Perdiccas had received his ring. Q are Alexander declaraverat se regn m ei commendasse,thereby,Alexander had declared that he had committed the kingdom to him. Ex q o Perdiccas coniecerat e m regn m sibi commendasse,from this Perdic cas had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him. Ex q o omnes coniecerant e m regn m ei commendasse,from this,all had gat hered that he had committed the kingdom to him. Perdiccas post lavit t se regem haberent c m Alexander an l m sibi dedi sset,Perdiccas demanded that they sho ld have him for king,as Alexander had give n the ring to him. Amici post laver t t omnes e m regem haberent c m Alexander an l m ei dedisset,(his) friends demanded that all sho ld have him for king,as Alexander h ad given the ring to him.(Lattmann and M eller.) [OBJECT SENTENCES.327] Ita se gesserat Perdiccas t ei regn m ab Alexandra commendaret r,Perdic cas had so behaved himself that the kingdom was intr sted to him by Alexander. OBJECT SENTENCES.

523.Verbs of Doing,Perceiving,Conceiving,of Thinking and Saying,often take their object in the form of a sentence. NOTES.1.These sentences are regarded,grammatically,as ne ter s bstantives.The Ac c sative of ne ter s bstantives is employed as a Nominative.Hence,a passive or i ntransitive verb may take an object sentence as a s bject. 2.To object sentences belong also Dependent Interrogative cla ses,which have bee n treated elsewhere for convenience of reference.See 452,i,N.,460,467. I.Object Sentences introd ced by QUOD. 524.Cla ses which serve merely as periphrases(circ mioc tions) or expansions of elements in the leading sentence are introd ced by q od,that. NOTES.1.This sage seems to be in origin explanatory; that is,a demonstrative in the leading cla se is explained by the q od cla se.B t as the relative can alwa ys incl de the antecedent demonstrative,the prevailing sage is witho t an antec edent.In any case,however,the connection is essentially relative. 2.The original relation of q od and its antecedent is adverbial.They are Acc sat ives of Extent,that = in that,and are to be classed nder the Inner Object(332). B t after transitive verbs q od and its antecedent are felt as O ter Objects,tho gh whenever the notion of Ca se intr des(in.that = beca se),the original relati on comes back,as in ca sal sentences proper.

3.The antecedent demonstrative(whether omitted or inserted) wo ld therefore be e ither the direct object of the verb or it wo ld be in adverbial or prepositional relation.We have then two ses of the explanatory cla se;(a) with verbs,with or witho t an antecedent demonstrative;(b) as explanatory of an antecedent(express ed or implied) in adverbial relation to the verb or dependent pon a preposition . 525.1.Q od(the fact that,the circ mstance that,in that) is sed to introd ce exp lanatory cla ses,after verbs of Adding and Dropping,and after verbs of Doing and Happening with an adverb. Adde h c q od perferri litterae n lla condicione pot er nt,POLLIO (C.,Fa m.,x.31,4); add to this the fact that letters co ld nder no circ mstances be go t thro gh. Adde q od ingen as didicisse fideliter artes emollit mores nec sinit ess e feros,Ov.,Pont.,ii.9,47; add(the fact) that to have acq ired faithf lly the ac complishments(ed cation) of a gentleman,softens the character,and does not let i t be savage. [328 OBJECT SENTENCES.] Praetereo q od eam sibi dom m delegit,C.,Cl ent.,66,188;I pass over the fact that he chose that ho se for himself. Bene facis q od me adi vas.C.,Fin.,in.4,16;yo do well(in) that yo help me. Accidit perincommode q od e m n sq am vidisti,C.,Att.,1.17,2;it happened very nfort nately that yo saw him nowhere. Bene mihi evenit q od mittor ad mortem,C.,T sc.,1.41,97; it is fort nate for me that I am sent to death(exec tion).

NOTES.1.Of verbs of Adding adicere is introd ced by LIVY,addere is cited once ea ch from Acci s(209,R.) and TERENCE(Ph.,168),then more often from LUCRETIUS,HORAC E,and OVID,b t not from CICERO and VERGIL.AccBdere is the passive of addere and occ rs at all periods.Of verbs of Dropping,only praetereo,mitto,and omitto(C.,At t.,viii.3,3) are cited(all classical). 2.Esse is fo nd mostly in the combinations q id(hoc) est q od,why is it that,this is why, which are confined to early Latin :

Scin q id est q od ego ad te venio ? PL.,Men.,677;(NMa hoc est q od ad vos venio,PL.,St.,127. Est q od,nihil est q od,etc., occ r here and there later,b t the effect of the negative on the mood is notewor thy.Compare positive sed est q od s scenset tibi(TER.,And.,448);there is something that makes him angry with yo , with negative nihil est iam q od mihi s scenseas (PL.,Merc.,317);there is nothing to m ake yo angry with me. 3.To this gro p belongs the exclamatory interrogation Q id ? q od,or q id q od ? what of this,that ?

Q id q od sim lac mihi collibit m est praesto est imago ? C.,N.D.,1.38,1 08; what is to be said of the fact that the image presents itself as soon as I s ee fit ?(Nay,does not the image present itself?) (NhYN 4.The se of q od after verbs of Doing and Happening is fo nd first in CICERO; PLAUTUS ses q ia i n this constr ction. 5.With several of the above-mentioned verbs t can be employed,as well as q od ( t,of the tendency q od,of the fact) : Ad Appi Cla di senect tem accedebat t etiam caec s esset,C.,Cat.M.,6,16 (553,4),or,q od caec s erat. Accedit q od patrem pl s etiam q am ipse scit amo,C.,Att.,xiii21,7;besid es,I love the father even more than he himself knows. B t when the action is prospective or conditional, t m st be sed : Addit r ad hanc definitionem a Zenone recte t illa opinio praesentis ma li sit recens,C.,T sc.,iii.31,75. 6.Q od with verbs of Motion as an adverbial Acc.is confined to early Latin and t o venio(PL.,Men.,677) and mitto(PL.,Ps.,639).

7.The extension of q od to verba sentiendi et dicendi is very n s al.One exampl e in early Latin(PL.,Asin.,52) is m ch disp ted;s spicio s examples are C.,Fam., iii.8,6; CAES.,B.C.,1.23,8,b t a certain example is in b.Hisp.(10,2), ren ntiar nt q od haberent. The only case in A g stan poets is V.,A.,ix.289;It is do btf l in LIVY;perhaps t wice in TACITUS(Ann.,iii.34;xiv.6).In later Latin,from PETRONIUS on,it becomes f req ent. 2.Q od(in that,as to the fact that) is sed to introd ce explanatory cla ses aft er demonstratives(expressed or implied),independent of the leading verb.See 627, R.2. Mihi q idem vident r homines hac re maxime bestiis praestare,q od loq i poss nt,C.,Inr.,1.4; to me men seem to excel beasts most in this,that they have the power of speech. Praeterq am q od fieri non pot it,ne fingi q idem potest.C.,Div.,11.12,2 8; besides the fact that this co ld not be done,it co ld not even be made p. [OBJECT SENTENCES.329] Nil habet infelix pa pertas d ri s in se q am q od(= id q od) ridic les homines facit,J v.,iii.152; nhappy poverty hath in itself nothing harder(to bea r) than that it makes people ridic lo s. Magn m benefici m [est] nat rae q od necesse est mori,SEN.,E.M.,101,14(2 04). Q od spiro et placeo,si placeo,t m est,H.,O.,iv.3,24; that I do breathe and please,if that I please,is thine. NOTES.1.In early sage the antecedent is not common,b t it is employed very ofte n by CICERO,for the p rposes of arg ment. 2.Prepositional sages with the Abl.are ex eo, de eo, in eo, pro eo, c m eo q od. Of these c m eo q od,with the proviso() that,is very rare,occ rring b t once in CIC ERO(Att.,vi.i,7). The prepositional sages with the Acc.are ad id q od (only in LIVY); s per id q od(only in TACITUS); praeter q od(FLORUS and late writers); prae q od(PLAUTUS only). Similar is rative in force,we find excepto q od(HoR.,QUINT.).As praeter and s per are compa praeter q am q od(early Latin,Cic.,and later), s per q am q od(only in LIVY). Similar to praeter q od is nisi q od(PLAUT.,CICERO [not Orations],SALI,.,LIVY,an d later). Tant m q od = nisi q od,once in CICERO(Verr.,1.45,116) and is ra

re; tant m q od,temporal,"j st," is colloq ial,and fo nd first in CI CERO'S Letters,then not till the post-A g stan period. 3.Q od,"as to the fact that," is combined also with,the S bjv.in early L atin: q od ille gallinam se sectari dicat,etc.(PL.,M.G.,162). This is explained as being the Potential S bjv.,inasm ch as all the exam ples cited involve s pposed statements or actions of a second or third(often indefinite) person,which the speaker merely wishes to anticipate. The sage is occasional,also,later : C.,Pis.,27,66;Verr.,v.68,175,and sp oradically in FRONTO and GAIUS.Sometimes the idea of Partial Obliq ity enters,as in C.,Br.,18,73, q od aeq alis f erit Livi s,minor f it aliq anto;Inv.,ir.29,89,( reading do btf l). In general the sage of q od,"as to the fact that," is familiar.CICERO ses it often in his Letters.B t CAESAR is fond of it too.TACITUS has it b t once (Dial.,25). 3.The reigning mood is the Indicative.The S bj nctive is only sed as in Oratio Obliq a. C m Castam acc sarem nihil magis pressi q am q od acc sator ei s praevar icationis crimine corr isset,PLIN.,Ep.,iii.9,34;when I acc sed Casta there was n o point that I laid more stress on than(what I stated) " that her acc ser had go ne to pieces nder a charge of coll sion." REMARK.Verbs of Emotion,s ch as Rejoicing,Sorrowing,etc.,take q od with the Indi c.or S bj nctive.See Ca sal Sentences,539. II.Object Sentences,with Acc sative and Infinitive. 526.Preliminary Observation.On the simple Infinitive as an object,see 423. The Inf.,as a verbal predicate,has its s bject in the Acc sative.(420.) 527.Active verbs of Saying,Showing,Believing,and Perceiving(verba sentiendi et d eclarandi),and similar expressions,take the Acc sative and Infinitive : Thales Milesi s aq am dixit esse initi m rer m,C.,N.D.,1.10,25; Thales o f Milet s said that water was the first principle of things. [330 OBJECT SENTENCES.] [Solon] f rere se sim lavit,C.,Off.,1.30,108; Solon pretended to be mad. Medici ca sa morbi inventa c rationem esse inventam p tant,C.,T sc.,in.1 0,23; physicians think that,(when) the ca se of disease(is) discovered,the metho d of treatment is discovered. Vol cres videm s fingere et constr ere nidos,C.,Or.,ii.6,23; we see that birds fashion and b ild nests. A diet cives ac isse ferr m,H.,O.,1.2,21; [the yo th] shall hear that ci ti ens gave edge to steel.

Timagenes a ctor est omni m in litteris st dior m antiq issimam m sicen extitisse,QUINT.,1.10,10; Timagenes is the a thority(for the statement) that of all intellect al p rs its m sic was the most ancient. The sentence very often passes over into the Acc.and Inf.(O.O) witho t any forma l notice. REMARKS.1.Verba sentiendi comprise two classes,those of(a) Act al and those of(b ) Intellect al Perception.Some verbs,s ch as sentire,videre,cernere,a dire, belong to both classes.Otherwise the most common are : (a) Conspicari,conspicere,aspicere,s spicere,prespicere,also rarely t eri and so mniare(early). (b) Intellegere; cognoscere,comperire,scire,nescire,and less commonly,b t Cicero nian,discere,ignorare,accipere,animadvertere,perspicere,etc. 2.Verba declarandi can likewise be divided into two classes : (a) those of Act al and(b) those of Intellect al Representation; b t the classes often fade into each other,or,rather,a verb of Intellect al Representation can be readily sed as one of Act al Representation. In general,verbs of Intellect al Representation are those of Thinking,Rememberin g,Belief and Opinion,Expectation,Tr st and Hope. Verbs of Act al Representation are those of Saying,Showing,Approving,Boasting,P retending,Promising,Swearing,Threatening,Acc sing(the last have more often q od) . Verbs of Concl ding belong always to both classes. The principal of these verbs are : p tare,d cere,arbitrari,censere,s spicari,credere,existimare,meminisse,c onfidere,sperare,desperare. Then dicere,edicere,affirmare,confirmare,aio(rare),loq i(rare),negare,fateri, narrare,tradere,scribere,n ntiare,ostendere,probare,gloriari,demonstrare,pers ad ere,significare,polliceri.promittere,minari,sim lare,dissim lare,etc.; concl dere,colligere,efficere. Also ponere,to s ppose(rare), facere,to represent. Similar expressions are spes est, opinio est, fama est, a ctor s m, testis s m, certiorem aliq em facere,etc. 3.When the s bj.of the Inf.is a personal or reflexive prono n,that s bj.may be o mitted chiefly with F t.Inf.and then esse also is dropped.This occ rs rarely in CICERO,more freq ently in early Latin,CAESAR,and later. [OBJECT SENTENCES.331] Refract ros carcerem minabant r,L.,vi.17,G;they threatened to break open the jail.

4.The simple Inf.is often sed in English,where the Latin takes Acc.and Infiniti ve.This is especially tr e of verbs of Hoping and Promising. Spero me hoc adept r m esse,I hope to(that I shall) obtain this. Promittebat se vent r m esse,he promised to(that he wo ld) come. 5.When the Acc.with the Inf.is followed by a dependent Acc.,ambig ity may arise : Aio te,Aeacida,Romanos vincere posse(C.,Div.,ii.56,116),in which te may be s bject or object. Real ambig ity is to be avoided by giving the sentence a passive t rn : Aio a to,Aeacida,Romanos vinci posse,I affirm that the Romans can be con q ered by thee,son of Aeac s. Aio te,Aeacida,a Romanis vinci posse,I affirm that tho ,son of Aeac s,ca nst be conq ered by the Romans. When the context shows which is the real s bj.,formal ambig ity is of no importa nce.B t see QUINT.,vii.9,10. NOTES.1.Verbs of Perception and Representation take the Part,to express the act al condition of the object of Perception or Representation(536).As there is no P r.Part,pass.,the Inf.m st be sed,and th s the difference between Intellect al a nd Act al Perception is effaced,sometimes even in the active,and,in fact,the se of the Part,is confined to a thors who are conscio sly infl enced by a rivalry with the Greek. A dio cives ac entes ferr m,Cf.H.,O.,1.2,21;I hear citi ens sharpen(ing) the steel. A dio a civib s ac i ferr m,I hear that the steel is sharpened by citi e ns; or,the steel as it is sharpened by citi ens. Octavi m(dolore) confici vidi,C.,fin.,ii.28,93;I have seen Octavi s(when he was) wearing o t with ang ish. Vidi histriones flentes egredi,QUINT.,vi.2,35;I have seen actors leave t he stage weeping.

Polyphem m Homer s c m ariete conloq entem facit, C.,T sc.,v.39,115(536) . Fac,q aeso,q i ego s m esse te,C.,Fam.,vii.23,1;s ppose,I pray,yo rself to be me. 2.The(Greek) attraction of the predicate of the Inf.into the Nom.after the Verb of Saying or Thinking,is poetical;the first example is PL.,Asin.,634. Phasel s ille,q em videtis,hospites,ait f isse navi m celerrim s, CAT.,i v.i;that pinnace yonder,which yo see,my stranger g ests,declares she sed to be (claims to have been) the fastest craft afloat.

t the

(Plato) a Deo aedificari m nd m facit,C.,N.D.,1.8,19;Plato makes o t tha niverse is b ilt by God.

There is one example in CICERO(Agr.,ii.21,57). 3.The se of the Acc.and Inf.with verba declarandi is an o tgrowth of the se af ter verbs of Creation(423),j st as in English "I declare him to be," is an exten sion of " I make him to be," in which Acc.and Inf.have each its proper force.Thi s is the origin of the so-called Oratio Obliq a,or Indirect Disco rse,which repr esents not the exact lang age sed,b t the general drift,and in which the tenses of the Inf.seem to represent approximately the tenses of the Indicative.It was to complete the scheme of the Tenses that the F t.Inf.was developed,and this is the sole se of that tense.The se of the Acc.and Inf.after verba sentiendi,like the se in English " I see him go," is more primitive,b t the original case of the Inf.is no longer felt. [332 NOMINATIVE WITH INFINITIVE.] Nominative with Infinitive. 528.Passive verbs of Saying,Showing,Believing,and Perceiving : 1.In the Simple tenses prefer the personal constr ction,in which the Acc sative S bject of the Infinitive appears as the Nominative S bject of the leading verb. 2.In the Compo nd tenses prefer the impersonal constr ction,which is the r le wi th Ger nd and Ger ndive. Th s,instead of

Trad nt Homer m caec m f isse,they say that Homer was Hind, we sho ld have,

Tradit r Homar s caec s f isse,Homer is said to have been blind,or, [Tradit m] est Homar m caec m foisse,C.,T sc.,v.39,114;there is a tradit ion that Homer was blind. [Aristae s] inventor olei esse dicit r,C.,Verr.,iv.57,128;Aristae s is s aid to be the inventor of oil. Terenti fabellae propter elegantiam sermonis p tabantnr a Laelio scribi, C.,Att.,vii.3,10;Terence's plays,on acco nt of the elegance of the lang age,wer e tho ght to be written by Laeli s. [Si Veios migrabim s] amisisse patriam videbim r,L.,v.53,5;if we remove to Veji,we shall seem to have lost o r co ntry. Re s damnat m iri videbat r,QUINT.,ix.2,88(435,N.4). Creditor Pythagorae a ditorem f isse N mam,L.,XL.29,8;it is believed tha t N ma was a hearer of Pythagoras. B t:

[Venerem] Adonidi n psisse prodit m est,C.,N.D.,iii.23,59;it is recorded that Ven s married Adonis. (Philonem) existimand m est disert m f isse,C.,Or.,1.14,62;we m st s ppo se that Philo was eloq ent. REMARKS.1.The impersonal constr ction is the r le if a Dat.is combined with the

verb :

2.Vario s pec liarities are noteworthy in the matter of these verbs.Th s, dicit r s ally means it is maintained, dict m est,it is said. Credit r,etc.(impersonal),is the reg lar form in classical prose; the personal constr ction is poetical and late. Videri is sed,as a r le,personally; the impersonal constr ction videt r is rare. The active forms trad t,cred nt,etc.,are everywhere common. [TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE.333 ] NOTES.1.In early Latin the personal constr ction is fo nd with arg i,cl ere(a virt al passive), dici,existimari,inveniri,i beri,n ntiar i,perhiberi,reperiri. All these,except cl ere,are retained in the classical period.CICERO and CAESAR a dd twenty-five new verbs,and from this time on the constr ction increases. 2.Virt al passives,on the analogy of cl ere,are rare; apparere, constare, venire in s spicionem, are Ciceronian; so also op s est in [C.],Fam.,xi.ii,2,and perhaps TER.,And.,337. 3.A second cla se following a Nom.with the Inf.takes Its S bj.in the Acc sative C.,Or.,ii.74,299. 4.In verbs of Saying,except dico(compare TAC.,Ann.,iv.34,8),the personal constr ction fs confined to the third person.The poets are free in treating verbs nder this head. Tenses of the Infinitive with Verba SentiendT et Declarandi. 529.The Infinitive denotes only the stage of the action,and determines only the relation to the time of the leading verb(281). 530.After verbs of Saying,Showing,Believing,and Perceiving,and the like, The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneo s action; The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action; The F t re Infinitive expresses f t re action. REMARK.The action which is completed with regard to the leading verb may be in i tself a contin ed action.So in English : I have been st dying,I had been st dyin g.Hence,the Impf .Indic.(I was st dying) is represented in this dependent form b y the Pf.Inf.,beca se it is prior to the leading verb. -> In this table the Present is taken as the type of the Principal,the Imperfect as the type of the Historical,Tenses.

531.

Contemporaneo s Action.

mihi n ntiabat r Parthos transisse E phratem,C.,Fam.,xv.i,2;it was anno nced to me that the Parthians had crossed the E phrates.

ACTIVE.

PASSIVE.

Prior Action.

that yo were de (that people hav

[334 TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE.]

that yo had bee

(that pe

S bseq ent Action.

Periphrastic F t re. The following form(the Periphrastic F t re) is necessary when the verb has no S p.or F t.participle.It is often formed from other verbs to intimate an interval, which cannot be expressed by other forms,and is more common in the passive than the F t.Inf.pass,of the paradigms.

P.T.Dicit : fore(f t r m esse) t erres(met as) ,

fore

t decipiaris(met aris),

H.T.Dicebat : te errat r m esse, He was saying,that yo were abo t ing to(wo ld) be to(wo ld) go wrong, deceived.

te decept m iri, that yo were go

P.T.Dicit: te errat r m esse, He says,that yo (are abo t to go ill be dewrong),will(be) go(ing) wrong, ceived.

te decept m iri, that yo (are going to) w

that yo

H.T.Dicebat : te errasse, , He was saying,that yo had gone n deceived, wrong, that yo went wrong, were deceived(Aor.), that yo had been ople had been deceiving yo ), going wrong,

te decept m esse

P.T.Dicit : te errasse, He says,that yo have gone wrong, deceived, that yo went wrong, ceived(AoR.), that yo have been going e been deceiving yo ) wrong,

te decept m esse, that yo have been(are)

H.T.Dicebat : te errare,. He was saying,that yo eived,wrong,

were going

te decipi, that yo were(being) dec

P.T.Dicit : te errare, He says,that yo ived(217,R.).

are going wrong,

te decipi, that yo are(being) dece

ly

, decept m,fore(not f t r m esse H.T.Dicebat : fore(f t r m esse) t errares(met eres) fore t decipereris(met ereris), errasses(rare), decept m fore(ra rely : fore t decept s e sses). NOTES.1.For examples of the Periphrastic,see 248. Carthaginienses debellat m mox fore rebant r,L.,xxiii.13,6;the Carthagin ians tho ght that the war wo ld soon be(have been) bro ght to an end. From debellat m erit,it will be(have been) bro ght to an end. So in the deponent adept m fore.(< adipiscor) 2.Pondero s periphrastics are of rare occ rrence.So

fetiales decrever nt tr m eor m fecisset recte fact r m(L.,xxxi.8); not

tr m feceris,recte feceris.(244,R.4.)

See Weissenborn's note. 3.Posse,velle,etc.,do not req ire the Periphrastic,and seldom take it.(248,R.) 4.Sperare,to hope,promittere(polliceri),to promise,which reg larly take the F t. Inf.,have occasionally the Pr.when an immediate realisation of the hope is antic ipated.With spes est the Pr.Inf.is more common. Legati veni nt q i polliceant r obsides dare,CAES.,B.G.,iv.21,5; ambassa dors come to promise the giving of(to give) hostages. So,too,when the F t.Inf.is not available,sometimes also when it is.posse and the Pr.is a fair s bstit te. Toti s Galliae sese potiri posse(= potit ros esse) sperant, CAES..B.G.,1 .3,8;they hope they can(will) get possession of the whole of Ga l.See 423,N.5. Of co rse sperare may be sed simply as a verb of Thinking. [ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.335] Acc sative and Infinitive with Verbs of Will and Desire.

fore

t fecisset,altho gh the O.R.req ires

fore(f t r m esse) t erraveris(rare)

fore

t decept s sis(rare), s al

532.Verbs of Will and Desire take a Dependent Acc sative and Infinitive. The relation is that of an Object to be Effected. Si vis me flere,dolend m est prim m ipsi tibi,H.,A.P.,102; if yo wish m e to weep,yo m st first feel the pang yo rself. Utr m [Milonis] corporis an Pythagorae tibi malis vires ingenii dari ? C .,Cat.M.,10,33; which(whether) wo ld yo rather have given to yo ,Milo's strengt h of body or Pythagoras'strength of mind ? Ipse i bet mortis t meminisse de s,MART.,ii.59(376). Vitae s mma brevis spem nos vetat inchoare longam,H.,O.,1.4,15(423,N.6). Nemo ire q emq am p blica probibet via,PL..C re.,35(389). Germaini vin m ad se omnino importari non sin nt,CAES.,B.G.,iv.2,6; the Germans do not permit wine to be imported into their co ntry at all. REMARKS.1.A list of these verbs is given in 423,N.2. 2.When the s bj.of the Inf.is the same as the s bj.of the leading verb,the s bj. of the Inf.is s ally not expressed : Ni parere velis,pere nd m erit ante l cernas,J v.,x.339; nless yo resol ve to obey,yo will have to perish before candle-light. Et iam mallet eq os n mq am tetigisse paternos,Ov.,M.,ii.182; and now he co ld have wished rather never to have to ched his father's horses. B t the s bj.may be expressed,and commonly is expressed,when the action of the I nf.is not within the power of the s bject;so especially with an Inf..passive : (Timoleon) mal it se diligi q am met i,NEP.,xx.3,4; Timoleon preferred t hat he sho ld be loved rather than that he sho ld be feared. Ego r s abit ram me certo decrevi,TER.,Hec.,586. Principem se esse mav lt q am videri,C.,Off.,1.19,65. NOTES.1.On the constr ction of this class of verbs with t(ne,q omin s),see 546. Impero,I command,in model prose takes only the Inf.passive or deponent; in SALLU ST,HIRTIUS,CURTIUS,TACITUS,and the Poets sometimes the active. (Hannibal) imperavit q am pl rimas venenatas serpentes vivas colligi, NE P.,23,10;Hannibal ordered as many poisono s serpents as possible to be ca ght al ive. Permitto seldom takes the Inf.(e.g.,C.,Verr.,v.9,22); the Acc.with Inf.b egins in TACITUS; concedo takes Inf.pass,only,in classical prose. I beo,I bid;sino,I let; veto,I forbid;prohibeo,I prohibit,always have th e Inf.of passive verbs. With sino and veto the model constr ction is Inf.only. Sino takes t occasionally in early and late Latin, veto does not have ne till in the post-Ciceronian period. I bere takes t when it is applied to decrees of the Senate,and from LIV Y on when sed of the orders of generals; prohibre takes ne and q omin s.

These verbs may themselves be t rned into the passive : i beor,sinor,vetor,prohibeor. 2.After i beo,Ibid,and veto,I forbid,the Inf.act.can be sed witho t a s bj.(eve n an imaginary or indefinite one) : I bet reddere,he bids ret rn(orders the ret rning). [336 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.] Vetat adhibere medicinam,C.,Att,xvi.15,5;he forbids the administration o f medicine. Infand m,regina,i bes renovare dolorem,V.,A.,ii.3; nspeakable,q een,the ang ish which yo bid(me, s) revive. 3.After volo,nolo,malo in early Latin, t and the S bjv.is proportionally more co mmon than in the classical time.B t with the Potential forms,velim,malim,vellem, mallem,CICERO ses only the S bjv.(witho t t).When volo means maintain,it takes the Inf.only;see 546,R..1.

5.On the se of the Pf .Inf.instead of the Pr.after these verbs,see 537,N.1.

Acc sative and Infinitive with Verbs of Emotion. 533.Verbs of Emotion take a dependent Acc sative and Infinitive,inasm ch as thes e verbs may be considered as verbs of Saying and Thinking.(542.) Salvom te advenisse ga deo,TER,.,Ph.,286;I rejoice that yo sho ld have arrived safe(to think that yo have arrived safe,at yo r arriving safe).Q od sal vos advenisti,that yo have arrived safe. Q od salvos adveneris,that(as yo say) yo have arrived safe. Inferiores non dolere [debent] se a s is dignitate s perari, C.,Lael.,20 ,71;inferiors o ght not to consider it a grievance that they are s rpassed in ra nk by their own(friends). REMARKS.1.This constr ction,o tside of a few verbs,is not common,tho gh fo nd in a wide range of a thors. Ga dere, laetari, dolere, q eri(beginning in Cic.), mirari, are common;in addition CICERO ses,rarely,however,more than once each, maerere, l gere, confici, discr ciari, angi, sollicitari, indignari, fremere,

6.The Poets go m ch f rther in d Desire.See 423,N.4.

sing verbs and phrases as expressions of Will an

4.It is noteworthy that in classical Prose c pere never takes ver takes the Infinitive.

t,while optare ne

demirari, admirari,s besse timorem.Early Latin shows ridere(NAEV.),gestire,mihi do let(TER.),maest s s m (PLAUT.),cr ciari(PLAUT.),lamentari(PLAUT.,HOR.),s spirare (LUCR.),incendor ira(TER.),ferex est(PLAUT.),invidere(PLAUT.,HOR.),formidare,ver eri,in addition to the common ga dere,etc.,already cited. 2.On the Participle after a verb of Emotion,536,N.2. Acc sative and Infinitive in Exclamations. 534.The Acc sative with the Infinitive is sed in Exclamations and Exclamatory Q estions as the object of an nexpressed tho ght or feeling. Hem,mea l x,te n nc,mea Terentia,sic vexari,C.,Fam.,xiv.2,2; h'm,light o f my life,for yo to be so harassed now,Terentia dear. Hominemne Roman m tam Graeco loq i ? PLIN.,Ep.,TV.3,5;a Roman speak s ch good Greek ?(To think that a Roman sho ld speak s ch good Greek.) [ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.337] Mene incepto desistere ? V.,A.,1.37; I desist from my ndertaking? Hinc abire matrem? TER.,Hec.,612;mother go away from here ? REMARKS.1.Different is q od,which gives the gro nd. Ei mihi q od n llis amor est sanabilis herbis,Ov.,M.,1.523; woe's me tha t(in that,beca se) love is not to be c red by any herbs. 2.On t,with the S bjv.in a similar sense,see 558.Both forms offer an objection.

Acc sative and Infinitive as a S bject. 535.The Acc sative with the Infinitive may be treated as the S bject of a senten ce.The Predicate is a s bstantive or ne ter adjective,an impersonal verb or abst ract phrase. In the English " for to," the "for " belongs not to the case b t to the Infiniti ve,b t the object relation has been effaced here as it has been in Latin.See 422 ,N.1. Est in sitat m regem re m capitis esse,C.,Dei.,1.i;it is an extraordinar y thing that a king sho ld(for a king to) be tried for his life. Facin s est vincire civem Roman m,C.,Verr.,v.66,170; it is an o trage to p t a Roman citi en in chains. Necesse est facere s mpt m q i q aerit (= e m q i q aerit) l cr m PL.,A s.,218; need is that he make o tlay() who an income seeks. N Legem brevem esse oportet,q o facili s ab imperitis teneat r,SEN.,E.M.,9 4,38; it is proper that a law sho ld be brief (a law o ght to be brief),that it may the more easily be grasped by the ned cated. Q id Milonis intererat interfici Clodi m,C.,Mil.,13,34 (382,2). Op s est te animo valere,C.,Fam.,xvi.14,2(406,N.5). REMARKS.1.A list of expressions taking the Inf.as a s bj.is given in 422,NN.

2.Oportet,it is proper,and necesse est,m st needs,

Necesse also takes the Dat.of the Person : Ut c lpent alii,tibi me la dare necesse est,Ov.,Her.,12,131;let others b lame,b t yo m st give me praise. 3.When the indirect obj.of the leading verb is the same as the s bj.of the Inf.t he predicate of the s bj.is p t in the same case as the indirect object : in sta ndard prose chiefly with licet,it is left(free); in poetry and later prose with necesse,with sati s est,it is better, contingit,it happens, vacat,there is room. Lic it esse otioso Themistocli,C.,T sc.,1.15,33;Themistocles was free to live a life of leis re. The Acc.is occasionally fo nd;always if the Dat.is not expressed. Medios esse iam non licebit(nos),C.,Att.,x.8,4; it will no longer be all owable to be ne tral. [338 CAUSAL SENTENCES.] Object Sentences Represented by the Participle. 536.The Participle is sed after verbs of Perception and Representation,to expre ss the act al condition of the object of perception or representation. Catonem vidi in bibliotheca sedentem m ltis circ mf s m Stoicor m libris , C.,Fin.,iii.2,7;I saw Cato sitting in the library with an ocean of Stoic books abo t him. Prodiga non sentit pere ntem femina cens m,J v.,vi.362;the lavish woman does not perceive(how) the income(is) dwindiing. Saepe illam a divi f rtiva voce loq entem,CAT.,LXVII.41; I have often he ard her talking in a stealthy(in an nder-) tone. Ga de q od spectant oc li te mille loq entem,H.,Ep.,1.6,19(542). Polyphem m Homer s c m ariete conloq entem facit,C.,T sc.,v.39,115;Homer represents Polyphem s(as) talking with the ram. NOTES.1.This cons traction is fo nd b t once in early Latin(Piso),then in CICERO ,SALLUST,NEPOS,VITBUVIUS,LIVY,HORACE.The nat ralisation of it is d e to CICERO,a nd other st dents of Greek models.The poverty of Latin in participles was a seri o s drawback to the convenient distinction from the Infinitive;and it may be sai d that the participle was never perfectly at home. 2.On the Inf.,see 527,N.1.The Greek constr ction of Part,agreeing with the leadi

are often sed with the S bj nctive.So also many other phrases with )

t.(See 557.

ng Nom.after verbs of Perception and Emotion,is rare and poetical : Ga dent scribentes,H.,.Ep.,ii.2,107; they have joy while writing. Sensit medios delaps s in hostes,V.,A.,ii.377;he perceived(it) having fa llen(that he had fallen} 'midst the enemy. Ga dent perf si sang ine fratr m,V.,G.,ii.510;they rejoice,bedrenched wi th brothers' blood. 537.The Perfect Participle Passive is sed after verbs of Ca sation and Desire,t o denote impatience of anything except entire f lfilment : Si q i vol ptatib s d c nt r missos faciant honores,C.,Sest.,66,138; if any are led captive by sens al pleas res ,let them dismiss hono rs(at once and f orever).

NOTES.1.After verbs of Will and Desire,the Inf.esse is occasionally fo nd with t his Part.,and hence it may be considered a Pf.Infinitive(280,2,c). Compare,however,Pf.Part.pass,with op s est, s s est(406). he rter 2.The verbs of Ca sation th s employed are c rare,dare,facere,reddere. The sage is most common in early Latin.In the classical period only miss m facere.

CAUSAL SENTENCES. 538.Ca sal sentences are introd ced :

[CAUSAL SENTENCES.339] 3.By c m(q om),as.(Inference.) 4.By the Relative Prono n,partly alone,partly with t, tpote,q ippe,etc.(See 626 ,634.) NOTES.1. Q od is the Acc.Sing,ne ter,and q ia is probably the Acc.Pl.ne t er from the relative stem.They have accordingly often a correlative demonstrativ e; so with q od : eo,ea re,ideo,idcirco,ea gratia(in SALLUST only),hoc,hac mente (H.,S.,ii.2,90),propterea,and a few combinations with ob and propter; with q ia are fo nd eo,ea re,ideo,idcirco,propterea,and ergo(in PLAUTUS only). 2. Q od and q ia differ in classical prose,chiefly in that q od is sed,and not q ia,when the ca sal sentence is at the same time an object sentence.

3.

Q oniam is originally temporal,and as s ch is still fo nd in PLAUTUS.The

1.By q ia,beca se,q od,(in that) beca se. 2.By q oniam(q om iam),now that,q ando,q andoq idem,since.

} }(Ca se Proper)

H ic mandes si q id recte c rat m velis,TER.,Ad.,372;yo him whatever yo want properly attended to.

m st intr st to

ca sal se of it becomes m ch more extensive in classical prose,and,like q ando (q andoq idem),it is sed of evident reasons. 4. Q ando is sed principally as a temporal particle.In a ca sal sense it i s very rare in CICERO(in the Orations never, nless compo nded with q idem),and i s not fo nd in CAESAR.The compo nd with q idem is more common. 5. Q aten s,in so far as,is poetical and in late prose.HORACE shows first e xample,O.,iii.24,30.VALERIUS M.,Q.UINTILIAN,TACITUS,PLINY MINOR,and SUETONIUS sh ow occasional examples. Ca sal Sentences with QUOD,QUIA,QUONIAM,and QUANDO. 539.Ca sal sentences with q od,q ia,q oniam,and q ando are p t in the Indicative ,except in obliq e relation (Partial or Total). REMARK.The other person of the obliq e cla se may be imaginary,and the writer or speaker may q ote from himself indirectly : Laetat s s m,q od mihi liceret recta defendere,C.,Fam.,1.9,18;I was glad (to say to myself) that I was free to champion the right. 540.Ca sal sentences with q od,q ia,q oniam,and q ando take the Indicative in Di rect Disco rse. Torq at s fili m s m q od is contra imperi m in hostem p gnaverat necar i i ssit,S.,C.,52,30;Torq at s bade his son be p t to death beca se he had fo gh t against the enemy contrary to order(s) [q od p gnasset = beca se,as Torq at s said or tho ght]. Amantes de forma i dicare non poss nt,q ia sens m oc lor m praecipit ani m s, QUINT.,vi.2,6;lovers cannot j dge of bea ty,beca se the heart forestalls th e eye. Q ia nat ra m tari non potest,idcirco verae amicitiae sempiternae s nt, C.,Lael.,9,32; beca se nat re cannot change,therefore tr e friendships are everl asting. Neq e me vixisse paenitet q oniam ita vixi t non fr stra me nat m exist mem, C.,Cat.M.,23,84;and I am not sorry for having lived,since I have so lived that I think I was born not in vain.

Sol s ero q oniam non licet esse t m,PROP.,ii.9,46;I shall be alone sin ce I may not be thine. Vol ptas semovenda est q ando ad maiora q aedam nati s m s,Cf,C.,Fin.,v, 8,21; pleas re is to be p t aside beca se we are born for greater things. [340 CAUSAL SENTENCES.] Erant q ib s appetentior famae [Helvidi s] videret r q ando etiam sapien tib s c pido gloriae novissima ex it r,TAC.,H.,iv.6,1;there were some to whom He lvidi s seemed too eager for fame,since,even from the wise,ambition is the last (infirmity) that is p t off. Seq it r t liberatores(sint),q andoq idem terti m nihil potest esse, C. ,Ph.,ii.13,31. 541.Ca sal sentences with q od,q ia,q oniam,and q ando take the S bj nctive in O

bliq e Disco rse(Partial or Total). Noct amb labat in p blico Themistocles q od somn m capere non posset, C .,T sc.,iv.19,44;Themistocles sed to walk abo t in p blic at night beca se(as h e said) he co ld not get to sleep. Aristides nonne ob eam ca sam exp ls s est patria q od praeter mod m i s t s esset ? C.,T sc.,v.36,105;(there is) Aristides;was he not banished his co nt ry for the(alleged) reason " that he was nreasonably j st " ? [Ne] compone comas q ia sis vent r s ad illam,Ov.,Rem.Am.,679(517). Q oniam(so most MSS.) ipse pro se dicere non posset,verba fecit frater e i s Stesagoras,NEP.,1.7,5; "as [Miltiades] co ld not speak for himself," his bro ther,Stesagoras,made a speech.(Indirect q otation from the speech of Stesagoras. ) A good example is PL.,M.G.,1412-i5. NOTES.1.Q ia is the s al particle in the ca eal sense in PLAUTUS,q od being ver y rare;b t q od is more common in TERENCE,and is the reg lar particle in classical prose(CAESAR has b t one case of q ia),tho gh the se of q ia revives in postcla ssical Latin.CICERO makes a point on the difference in meaning in Rose.Am.,50,14 5 : concedo et q od(by reason of the fact that) anim s aeq s est,et q ia (b eca se) necesse est. 2.A rejected reason is introd ced by non q od with the S bjv.(as being the s ggestion of another person). The Indic.,which is properly sed of excl ded facts,is also sed of flat denials ,like the negative and Indic.in the independent sentence,b t the S bjv.is the r le. Non q ia is the r le in early Latin,b t classical prose shows very few e xamples.From LIVY on it becomes common.Other eq ivalents are non q o, non eo q od, non eo q o; f rther, non q in for non q o non.

All of these are fo nd with S bjv.only.The corresponding affirmative is given by sed q od or sed q ia indiscriminately,reg larly with the Indicative. S bj nctive : P giles in iactandis caestib s ingemisc nt,non q od doleant,sed q ia pro f ndenda voce omne corp s intendit r venitq e plaga vehementior, C.,T sc.,ii.23, 56; boxers in plying the caest s heave groans,not that(as yo might s ppose) the y are in pain,b t beca se in giving f ll vent to the voice all the body is p t t o the stretch and the blow comes with a greater r sh.

Maiores nostri in dominion de servo q aeri nol er nt;non q ia posset ver m inveniri,sed q ia videbat r indign m esse,C.,Mil.,22,59;o r ancestors wo ld n ot allow a slave to be q estioned by tort re against his master,not beca se(not as tho gh they tho ght) the tr th co ld not be got at,b t beca se s ch a co rse seemed degrading.

A [Lacedaemonior m ex lib s] praetor vim arc erat( ),non q ia salvos vellet s ed q ia perire ca sa indicta nolebat,L.,xxxv i.33,11;the praetor had warded off violence from the Lacedaemonian exiles,not(as yo might have s pposed) beca se h e wished them to escape,b t beca se he did not wish them to perish with their ca se not pleaded( nheard). [CAUSAL SENTENCES.341] The same principle applies to magis q od(q o), q ia q am q o(first in CICERO), q od(first in SALLUST), q ia(first in LIVY),with the moods in inverse order. Libertatis originem inde,magis q ia ann m imperi m cons lare fact m est q am q od demin t m q idq am sit ex regia potestate,n meres,L.,ii.i,7;yo may b egin to co nt the origin of liberty from that point,rather beca se the cons lar government was limited to a year,than beca se a ght was taken away from the roya l power. Indicative : S m non dicam miser,sed certe exercit s,non q ia m ltis debeo sed q ia s aepe conc rr nt aliq or m bene de me meritor m inter ipsos contentiones, C.,Plan c.,32,78;I am,I will not say,wretched,b t certainly worried,not beca se I am in debt to many,b t beca se the rival claims of some who have deserved well of me o ften conflict. Compare also H.,S.,ii.2,89. 3.Verbs of Saying and Thinking are occasionally p t in the S bjv.with q od by a kind of attraction.Compare 585,N.3. Impetrare non pot i,q od religione se impediri dicerent,C.,Fam.,iv.12,3; I co ld not obtain permission,beca se they said they were embarrassed(prevented ) by a religio s scr ple(= q od impedirent r,beca se(as they said) they were pre vented). This attraction is said to occ r not nf req ently in CICERO,several times in CA ESAR and SALLUST,b t is not cited from any other a thor.Compare,however,crederen t,L.,xxi.i,3. 4.On the se of tamq am,etc.,to indicate an ass med reason,see 602,N.4. 5.Q andoq e is archaic and rare.It is fo nd first in the Twelve Tables,a few tim es in CICERO and LIVY,three times in HORACE,and occasionally later. 6.Ca sal sentences may be represented by a participle(669),or by the relative(63 6).

QUOD with Verbs of Emotion. 542.Q od is sed to give the gro nd of Emotions and Expressions of Emotion,s ch

as verbs of Joy,Sorrow,S rprise,Satisfaction and Anger,Praise and Blame,Thanks a nd Complaint. The r le for the Mood has been given already:539. Indicative : Ga de q od spectant oc li te mille loq entem,H.,Ep.,1.6,19;rejoice that a tho sand eyes are ga ing at yo (while yo are) speaking. Dolet mihi q od t n nc stomacharis,C.,ad Br.,1.17,6;it pains me that yo are angry now. Q int m paenitet q od anim m t m offendit,Cf.C.,Att.,xi.13,2(377,R.3). I vat me q od vigent st dia,PLIN.,Ep.,1.13,1;I am charmed that st dies a re flo rishing.

Tibi gratias ago,q od me omni molestia liberasti,C.,Fam.,xiii.62; I than k yo ,that yo freed me from all annoyance. S bj nctive : Ga det miles q od vicerit hostem,Ov.,Tr.,ii.49;the soldier rejoices at h aving conq ered the enemy. [342 SENTENCES OF DESIGN AND TENDENCY.] Neq e mihi mq am veniet in mentem poenitere q od a me ipse non desciver im,C.,Att.,ii.4,2;it will never occ r to me to be sorry for not having been ntr e to myself.

La dat African m Panaeti s q od f erit abstinens,C.,Off.,ii.22,76;Panaet i s praises African s for having been abstinent. Nemo est oratorem q od Latine loq eret r admirat s,C.,Or.,iii.14,52; no one(ever) admired an orator for speaking(good) Latin. Socrates acc sat s est q od corr mperet i vent tem,QUINT.,iv.4,5;Socrate s was acc sed of corr pting yo th. Memini gloriari solit m esse Q int m Hortensi m q od n mq am bello civil i interf isset,C.,Fam.,ii.16,3; I remember that Q int s Hortensi s sed to boast of never having engaged in civil war. Ag nt gratias q od sibi pepercissent,CAES.,B.C.,1.74,2(511,R.i). REMARK.This class of verbs may be constr ed with the Acc.and Inf.: salvom te advenisse ga deo(533); also with q ia,principally in early Latin,and in CICERO'S Letters,then occasiona lly in LIVY,TACITUS,SUETONIUS,and later.B t in Expressions of Praise and Blame,T hanks and Complaint,q od is more common.On c m,see 564,N.2. Amo te et non neglexisse habeo gratiam,TER.,Ph.,54;I love yo (= m ch ob liged),and I am thankf l to yo for not having neglected,(it).

Tristis es ? indignor q od s m tibi ca sa doloris,Ov.,Tr.,iv.3,33; are y sad ? I am provoked(with myself) that I am a ca se of pain to yo .

Grat lor ingeni m non lat isse t m,Ov.,Tr.,1.9,54; I congrat late(yo ) that yo r geni s has not lain hidden. [Isocrates] q erit r pl s honoris corpor m q am animor m virt tib s dari ,QUINT.,iii.8,9;Isocrates complains that more hono r is paid to the virt es of t he body than to those of the mind. NOTES.1.Perplexing Emotion(Wonder) may be followed by a Conditional,or by a Depe ndent Interrogative,as in English,b t this constr ction is not fo nd in VERGIL,C AESAR,SALLUST,and is never common. Miror si [Tarq ini s] q emq am amic m habere pot it,C.,Lael.,15,54;I won der if Tarq in co ld ever have had a friend. Besides miror(and mir m),there is one case of ga deo si in CICERO( Yen:,TV.17,37),and a few cases after expressions of Fear in TACITUS.There are also sporadic cases of indignari(indignitas) si. 2.Noteworthy is the phrase mir m(-a) ni(nisi),'tis a wonder that not,which belongs to the colloq ia lisms of early Latin(Pl.,Capt.,820),b t reappears once in Livyr. SENTENCES OF DESIGN AND TENDENCY. 543.1.Sentences of Design are commonly called Final Sentences.Sentences of Tende ncy are commonly called Consec tive Sentences.Both contemplate the end-the one,a s an aim;the other,as a conseq ence. 2.They are alike in having the S bj nctive and the particle t(how,that),a relative conj nction.

[FINAL SENTENCES.343] 3.They differ in the Tenses employed.The Final Sentence,as a r le,takes only the Present and Imperfect S bj nctive.Consec tive Sentences may take also Perfect a nd Pl perfect. 4.They differ in the kind of S bj nctive employed.The Final Sentence takes the O ptative.The Consec tive Sentence takes the Potential.Hence the difference in the Negative.

REMARKS.1.Verbs of Effecting have the Final Seq ence. 2.Verbs of Hindering have the seq ence of the Final Sentence,b t often the signi fication of the Consec tive. 3.Verbs of Fearing belong to the Final Sentence only so far as they have the Opt

Final : ne( t ne), Consec tive : ne q is, ne ll s, ne mq am,(ne q ando,) ne sq am,(nec bi,) ne a t--a t,( t neve--neve,)

t t t t t t

non,that not. nemo,that no one. n ll s,that no. n mq am,that never, n sq am,that nowhere. neq e--neq e,that neither--nor.

NOTES.1.Inasm ch as the S bjv.cannot express a fact,the Latin Consec tive cla se does not properly express act al res lt,b t only a tendency,which may,we infer, lead to a res lt.To obviate this diffic lty,the Latin has reco rse to the circ m loc tions with accidit,evenit,etc. 2.It is to be remarked that the difference between Final and Consec tive often c onsists only in the point of view.What is final from the point of view of the do er is consec tive from the point of view of the spectator;hence the variation in seq ence after verbs of Effecting.A fr strated p rpose gives a negative res lt; hence the variation in negative after verbs of Hindering. 3.Here and there in CICERO,more often in LIVY and later writers,instead of neve (ne ),a second cla se is added by neq e,the force of the final particle being fe lt thro gho t the sentence. Monitor t s s adebit tibi t hinc discedas neq e mihi verb m ll m resp ondeas, C.,Div.in Caec.,16,52;yo r adviser will co nsel yo to depart hence and answer me never a word. FINAL SENTENCES. 544.Final Sentences are divided into two classes : I.Final Sentences in which the Design is expressed by the particle;P re Final Se ntences(Sentences of Design). Oportet esse, t vivas,non vivere t edas,[C.],ad Her.,iv.28,39; yo m st eat in order to live,not live in order to eat. [344 FINAL SENTENCES.] This form may be translated by.(in order) to;sometimes by that may,that might,th at,with the S bj nctive and the like. II.Final Sentences in which the Design lies in the leading verb(verba st dii et vol ntatis,verbs of Will and Desire); Complementary Final Sentences.

This form is often rendered by "to",never by "in order to",sometimes "by that" a nd the S bj nctive,or some eq ivalent.

Verbs of Hindering. Pec liar in their seq ence are : III.Verbs of Fearing. REMARKS.1.The se of the S bjv.with Temporal Particles often adds a fina l sense,inasm ch as the S bjv.reg larly looks forward to the f t re.So d m,donec ,q oad(572),anteq am,pri sq am(577).

Of the same nat re,b t partly Final and partly Consec tive in their seq ence,are :

Volo

ti mihi respondeas,C.,Vat.,7,17; I wish yo to answer me.

ative S bj nctive;the s bordinate cla se is only semidependent l,and we have a partial s rvival of original parataxis.

pon the principa

2.The general sense of a Final Sentence may also be expressed: (1) By the Relative q i with the S bj nctive.(630.) (2) By the Genitive of Ger nd or Ger ndive,with(seldom witho t) ca sa or gratia.(428,R.2.) (3) By ad with Ger nd and Ger ndive.(432.) (4) By the Dative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive.(429,2.) (5) By the Acc sative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive after verbs of Giving, etc.(430.) (6) By the Acc sative S pine after verbs of Motion.(435.) (7) By the F t re Participle Active(post-Ciceronian).(438,N.) (8) By the Infinitive(poetic and rare).(421,N.1,a.) I.P re Final Sentences. 545.P re Final Sentences are introd ced by : 1.Ut( ti)(how) that,and other relative prono ns and adverbs.(630.) Ut and ne are often preceded by a demonstrative expression,s ch as: idcirco,therefore; eo,to that end; propterea,on that acco nt; eo consilio,with that design; ea ca sa,re,for that reason. 2.Q o = t eo,that thereby; with comparatives,that the ...--; [FINAL SENTENCES.345] 3.Ne,that not,lest,contin ed by neve,ne .(444.) Oportet esse, t vivas,non vivere t edas,[C.],ad Her.,iv.28,39(544,I.). Inventa s nt spec la, t homo ipse se nosset,SEN.,N.Q.,1.17,4; mirrors we re invented,to make man acq ainted with himself. Ut ameris,amabilis esto,Ov.,A.A.,ii.107; that yo may be loved(to make y o rself loved,in order to be loved),be lovable. Legem brevem esse oportet,q o facili s ab imperitis teneat r, SEN.,E.M., 94,38(535). [Senex] serit arbores,q ae alteri saeclo prosint,CAECILIUS (C.,T sc.,1.1 4,31); the old man sets o t trees,to do good to the next generation. Semper habe Pyladen aliq em q i c ret Orestem,Ov.,Rem.Am.,589;always hav e some Pylades,to tend Orestes. [Athenienses] creant decem praetores q i exercit i praeessent,NEP.,1.4,4 ;the Athenians make ten generals to command their army. [Magnesiam Themistocli Artaxerxes] rbem donarat,q ae ei panem praeberet , NEP.,ii.10,3; Artaxerxes had given Themistocles the city of Magnesia,to f rnis h him with bread. Gallinae pennis fovent p llos,ne frigore laedant r,Cf.C.,N.D.,ii.52,129; hens keep (their) chickens warm with(their) wings,that they may not be(to keep them from being) h rt by the cold.

REMARKS.1.Ut ne is fo nd for ne with apparently no difference in signification,o ccasionally at all periods,b t not in CAESAR,SALLUST,LIVY. Q o witho t comparative is rare and cited only from PLAUTUS,TERENCE,SALL UST,OVID,and late Latin; q one(= t ne) is not fo nd till the time of DICTYS;apparent examples in classical Latin are to be otherwise explained. Q omin s and q in occ r in special ses. 2.Ut non is sed when a partic lar word is negatived : Confer te ad Malli m, t non eiect s ad alienos sed invitat s ad t os iss e(ivisse) videaris,C.,Cat.,1.9,23;betake yo rself to Malli s,that yo may seem t o have gone not as an o tcast to strangers b t as an invited g est to yo r own(f riends). 3.Ut and ne are sed parenthetically at all periods,depending on a s ppressed wo rd of Saying or the like.

The verb of Saying may be inserted : atq e t omnes intellegant dico,C.,Imp.,8,20;and that all may nderstand ,I say.

II.Complementary Final Sentences. A.Verbs of Will and Desire. 546.Complementary Final Sentences follow verbs of Willing and Wishing,of Warning and Beseeching,of Urging and Demanding,of Resolving and Endeavo ring(verba st d il et vol tatis). [346 FINAL SENTENCES.] 1.Positive : t. Volo ti mihi respondeas,C.,Vat..7.17(544,II.). (Phaethon) optavit t in c rr m patris tolleret r,C.,Off.,iii.25,94; Pha ethon desired to be lifted p into his father's chariot. Admoneo t cottidie meditere resistend m esse irac ndiae,C.,Q.F.,1.1.13, 38;I admonish yo to reflect daily that resistance m st be made to hot-headednes s. Ubii(Caesarem) orant, t sibi parcat,CAES.,B.G.,vi.9,7;the Ubii beg Caesa r to spare them. Sed precor t possim t ti s esse miser,Ov.,Tr.,v.2,78(423,2).

Exigis

t Priam s nator m f nere l dat,Ov.,Tr.,v.12,7; yo exact that Pr

Utq e magis st peas l dos Paridemq e reliq it,J v.,vi.87;and to st n yo more(I tell yo that) she left Paris and the games.

Dionysi s,ne coll m tonsori committeret,tondere filias s as doc it,d.,T sc.,v.20,58(423,N.6).

iam sport at(his) sons'f neral. Athenienses c m stat erent t naves conscenderent,Cyrsil m q endam s ade ntem t in rbe manerent lapidib s obr er nt,C.,Off.,iii.ii,48; the Athenians,re solving to go on board their ships,overwhelmed with stones( stoned) one Cyrsil s ,who tried to pers ade them to remain in the city.

Pythia respondit t moenib s ligneis se m nirent,NEP.,II.2,6 : the Pythi a answered that they m st defend themselves with walls of wood. 2.Negative : ne,nt ne;contin ed by neve(ne ),and not. Caesar s is imperavit ne q od omnino tel m in hostes reicerent, CAES.,B. G.,1.46,2;Caesar gave orders to his(men) not to throw back any missile at all at the enemy. Themistocles [collegis s is] praedixit t ne pri s Lacedaemonior m legat os dimitterent q am ipse esset remiss s,NEP.,ii.7,3;Themistocles told his collea g es beforehand not to dismiss the Lacedaemonian envoys before he were sent back . Pompei s s is praedixerat t Caesaris impet m exciperent neve se loco mo verent, CAES.,B.C.,iii.92,1;Pompey had told his men beforehand to receive Caesar 's charge and not to move from their position. REMARKS.1.When verbs of Willing and Wishing are sed as verbs of Saying and Thin king,Knowing and Showing,the Inf.m st be sed.The English translation is that,an d the Indic.: volo,I will have it(maintain), moneo,I remark, pers adeo,I convince, decerno,I decide, cogo,I concl de: [Moneo] artem sine adsid itate dicendi non m lt m i vare,Cf.[C.],ad Her. ,1.i,1;I remark that art witho t constant practice in speaking is of little avai l. Vix c iq am pers adebat r Graecia omni cess ros(Romanos), L.,xxx i.32,3; scarce any one co ld be pers aded that the Romans wo ld retire from all Greece. Non s nt isti a diendi q i virt tem d ram et q asi ferream esse q andam volant,C.,Lael.,13,48(313,R.2). [FINAL SENTENCES.347] Est mos homin m t nolint e ndem pl rib s reb s excellere,C.,Br t.,21,84 ; it is the way of the world not to allow that the same man excels in more thing s(than one). 2.When the idea of Wishing is emphatic,the simple S bjv.,witho t t,is employed, and the restriction of seq ence to Pr.and Impf.is removed : Velim existimes neminem c iq am cariorem mq am f isse q am te mihi, C., Fam.,1.9,24;I wish yo to think that no one was ever dearer to any one than yo to me.

So also any verb or phrase

sed as a verb of Willing or Demanding.

Malo te sapiens hostis met at q am st lti cives la dent,L.,xxii.39,20;I had rather a wise enemy sho ld fear yo than foolish citi ens sho ld praise yo . Exc sat m habeas me rogo,ceno domi,MART.,ii.79,2(238). H c ades,insani feriant sine litora fl ct s,V.,EC.,9,43;come hither(and) let the mad waves lash the shores. Tam felix esses q am formosissima vellem, Ov.,Am.,1.8,27(302). Vellem me ad cenam invitasses,C.,Fam.,xii.4,1(261,R.). Occidit occideritq e sinas c m nomine Troia,V.,A.,xii.828;'tis fallen,an d let Troy be fallen,name and all. So i beo in poetry and later prose.Compare also poti s q am,577,N.6.

impedio,I hinder, rec so,I ref se(548). Otherwise there seems to be no difference in meaning between it and ne,except th at sometimes the ne seems to apply more to a single word in the sentence. 4.On ned m,see 482,5,R.2. NOTES.1.S ch verbs and phrases are : Willing and Wishing: volo,nolo,malo,opto,st deo. Warning and Beseeching: hortor,adhortor,moneo,admoneo,a ctor s m,consili m do,oro,rogo,peto,prec or,posco,post lo,flagito,obsecro. Urging and Demanding: s adeo,pers adeo,conseo,impero,mando,praecipio,edico,dico,scribo. Resolving and Endeavo ring: stat o,constit o,decerno,nitor,contendo,laboro,p gno,id ago, operam do,c ro,video,provideo,prospicio,legem fero,lex est,etc. 2.S bstantives of kindred meaning,in combination with the cop la or other verbs, take similar constr ctions.S ch are vol ntas,c piditas,spes,ardor,a ctoritas,consili m (especially in the combination eo,hoc consilio), sign m,praecept m,exempl m,proposit m,offici m,negoti m,m n s,verba, and litterae(with dare,mittere,etc.),sententia,anim s(especially eo animo),c ondicio(especially ea condicione),foed s,i s,lex (ea lege),c ra,opera,ca sa,rati o. 3.Instead of t with the S bjv.,the Inf.is freq ently sed with this class of ve rbs.So,generally,with

3.Ut ne is not

sed after verbs of negative signification,as

i beo,I order,532. With verbs of Asking,however,the Inf.is not common ntil VERGIL. Orare has Inf.once in PLAUTUS,then in VERGIL and later poets;in prose fi rst in TACITUS. Rogare has t reg larly,Inf.only once(CAT.,xxxv.10). Q aeso, imploro, obsecro, obtestor, never have Inf., flagitare only once (H.,S.,ii.4,61) ntil SUETONIUS; post lare very often,especially in early Latin in the sense expect; poscere not till the A g stan poets.A thors vary.The se of the Inf.its wider in poetry and silver prose. B.Verbs of Hindering. 547.The dependencies of verbs of Hindering may be regarded as partly Final,partl y Consec tive.Ne and q omin s are originally final, [348 FINAL SENTENCES.] b t the final sense is often effaced,especially in q omin s.Q in is a consec tiv e particle.The seq ence of verbs of Hindering is that of the Final Sentence. The negative often disappears in the English translation. 548.Verbs and phrases signifying to Prevent,to Forbid,to Ref se,and to Beware,ma y take ne with the S bj nctive,if they are not negatived. Impedior ne pl ra dicam,C.,S ll.,33,92;I am hindered from saying more(I am hindered that I sho ld say no more). "Who did hinder yo that ye sho ld not obey the tr th ? " GAL.,v.7.

Servit s mea mihi interdixit ne q id mirer me m mal m,PL.,Pers.,621;my s lavery has forbidden me to marvel a ght at ill of mine.yN y Histiae s ne res conficeret r obstitit,NEP.,1.3,5;Histiae s opposed the thing's being done. (Reg l s) sententiam ne diceret rec savit,C.,Off.,iii.27,100; Reg l s re f sed to prono nce an opinion. Maledictis deterrere ne scribat parat,TER.,Ph.,3(423,2). Tant m c m finges ne sis manifesta caveto,Ov.,A.A.,iii.801(271,2). Tant m ne noceas d m vis prodesse videto,Ov.,Tr.,1.i,101; only see(to if

NOTES.1.The most important of these words are: Preventing: impedire, impediments esse, prohibere, tenere, retinere, deterrere, intercl dere, interpellare, deprecari, obsistere, obstare, intercedere, interponere. Forbidding: interdicere. Ref sing: rec sare, rep gnare, resistere, se tenere, se reprimere, sibi temperare, morari. Beware; cavere, videre,and a few others, especially the phrase per aliq em stare(more often with q omin s). 2.Many verbs of Preventing and Ref sing also take q omin s(549),and some also the Infinitive(423,2,N.2). 3."Cavere",to beware,and "praecavere" belong to verbs of Hindering only so far a s action is contemplated. Cavere,followed by t,means to be s re to; by ne or t ne,to see to it that not; by ne,to take preca tions against. When ne is omitted, cave,caveto,with the S bjv.,form circ mioc tions for the negative Impera tive (271,2). So with vide t,ne. Cavere also has the Inf.occasionally as a verb of negative Will(423,2,N. 2),beginning with PLAUTUS. In prose it is cited only from CATO(once), CICERO(Att.,iii.17,3), SALLUST(T g., 64,2),and PLINY MAI. 4."Vide ne(ne non)",see to it lest,

) that yo

do not do harm while yo wish to do good.

d bito an (457,2),I am inclined to think. Credere omnia vide ne non sit necesse,C.,Div.,ii.13,31. (N}hy a) 549.Verbs of Preventing and Ref sing may take q omin s (= t eo min s),that thereby the less,with the S bj nctive. Aetas non impedit q omin s agri colendi st dia teneam s.C.,Cat.M.,17,60; age does not hinder o r retaining interest in agric lt re. Non deterret sapientem mors q omin s rei p blicae cons lat, C.,T sc.,I.3 8,91;death does not deter the sage from cons lting the interest of the State. Q id obstat q omin s(De s) sit beat s ? C.,N.D.,1.34,95; what is in the way of God's being happy ? [FINAL SENTENCES.349] Caesar cognovit per Afrani m stare q omin s proelio dimicaret r, CAES.,B .C.,1.41,3;Caesar fo nd that it was Afrani s's fa lt that there was no decisive fight(stat,there is a stand-still). NOTES.1.With "impedire" and "prohibere" CAESAR never ses "q omin s";CICERO rare ly.B t with other words implying Hindrance CICERO ses q omin s not nfreq ently . With "probibere" the reg lar constr ction is the Inf.,b t this is rare with "imp edire,q omin s" being the r le. With rec sare,the Inf.is rare(CAES.,B.G.,iii.22,3) b t classical,becoming more f req ent from LIVY on. The passive of deterrere is also constr ed with the Inf.occasionally.

3.The difference in sage between q omin s and q in seems to be that while q in is always sed with negatives,q omin s occ rs sometimes with positives,so that a ccording to the connection it is either Final or Consec tive. 4."Q o seti s" for "q omin s" is archaic,b t occ rs twice in CORNIFICIUS and twi ce in CICERO(Inv.,ii.45,132;57,170). III.Verbs of Fearing. 550.1.Verbs of Fearing,and expressions that involve Fear,take the Present and Pe rfect,Imperfect and Pl perfect S bj nctive. The Present S bj nctive represents the Present and F t re Indicative.The Perfect S bj nctive reg larly represents the Perfect Indicative.

2.PLAUTUS does not se "q omin s",TERENCE first,b t seldom.It is on from the time of CICERO.In TERENCE the elements are sometimes min s),th s emphasising the relative character.B t it is not so sical Latin,and in the Silver Age the force of its origin ceases hat it is constr ed like "q in".The fact that it is not fo nd in VITRUVIUS has led to the s ggestion that it is a book-word.

especially comm separated (q o sed in the clas to be felt,so t PLAUTUS nor in

is often

sed as a polite form la for

Present and Perfect S bj nctive become Imperfect and Pl perfect after a Past Ten se. These constr ctions are s rvivals of the original parataxis,when "ne" and " t" w ere particles of wish.Th s, timeo : ne veniat,I am afraid; may he not come(i.e.,I am afraid that he will),becomes,when the two cla ses are combined, timeo ne veniat,I am afraid lest(that) he may(will) come.

2.With verbs of Fearing,"ne",lest,shows that the negative is wished and the posi tive feared;" t(ne non)" shows that the positive is wished and the negative fear ed : "ne non" is sed reg larly after the negative,or an interrogative with nega tive force. Vereor ne hostis veniat,I fear lest the enemy come,that he is coming,tha t he will come.(I wish he may not come.)

[350 FINAL SENTENCES.] Vereor t amic s veniat,I fear(how my friend can come) lest my friend co me not,that he is not coming,will not come.(I wish he may come.) Vereor t amic s venerit,I fear lest my friend have not come,that he has not come. Non vereor ne amic s non veniat,I do not fear that my friend is not comi ng,will not come. Non vereor ne amic s non venerit,I do not fear that my friend has not co me. Id paves,ne d cas t illam,t a tem t d cas.TER.,And.,349;that's what y o dread,YOU lest yo marry her(ne d cam !);YOU,on the other hand,lest yo don't ( tinam d cam!). Vereor ne d m min ere velim laborem a geam,C.,Leg.,1.4,12;I fear lest,wh ile I wish to lessen the toil,I increase it(that I am increasing it). Verem r ne par m hic liber mellis et absinthii m lt m habere videat r, Q UIXT.,iii.i,5; I am afraid that this book will seem to have too little honey and (too) m ch wormwood( ). Timeo ne tibi nihil praeter lacrimas q eam reddere,C.,Planc.,42,101; I a m afraid that I can give yo nothing in ret rn save tears. A r m inspicere volt ne s br pt m siet,PL.,A l.,39;he wishes to inspect the gold(for fear) lest it be filched(X). Timeo t s stineas(labores),C.,Fam.,xiv.2,3; I fear that yo mil not hol d o t nder yo r toils. Vereor ne d m defendam meos,non parcam t is,C.,Att.,1.17,3; I fear lest in defending my own I may not spare() thine.

Vereor ne hostis venerit,I fear lest the enemy have come,that(it will t rn o t that) he has come.

Similarly with " t",which in this

sage was originally how.Hence,

Non vereor ne t a virt s opinioni homin m non respondeat,Cf.C.,Fam.,ii.5 ,2; I do not fear that yo r virt e will not answer to(come p to) p blic expecta tion. Met o ne id consilii ceperim s q od non facile explicare possim s, C.,Fa m.,siv.12;I fear that we have formed a plan that we cannot readily explain. Un m ill d extimescebam ne q id t rpi s facerem,vel dicam,iam effecissem , C.,Att.,ix.7,1;the only thing I feared was,lest I sho ld act disgracef lly,or, I sho ld(rather) say,(lest) I had already acted disgracef lly.

met o,paveo,timeo,and vereor. Most common is vereor; met o is common in early Latin,b t is cited b t rarely later (HORACE,CIC ERO); paveo has to be s pplied once with " t" in TER.,And.,349. Timeo t is fo nd first in CICERO,and is very rare. 2 "Ne non" is very rare in early Latin,b t becomes more freq ent from CICERO on. "Ut ne" is never fo nd for "ne". 3.Two strange cases are cited where,instead of ne, t seems to be sed,vi .,HOR., S.,1.3,120,

and L.,xxviii.22,12,

In the first case the t cla se precedes,and the non vereor is sed by anacol th on;in the second the t cla se is a circ mloc tion for an omitted ill d,parallel to nihil.This is also helped by the antecedence of the t cla se. 4.When a verb of Fear is a verb of Uncertainty an indirect q estion may follow : vereor q o modo accept ri sitis,[C.],ad Her.,iv.37,49. [CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.351] 5.(a) With the Inf.verbs of Fear are verbs of(negative) Will : vereor = prae timore nolo. Vos Allobrog m testimoniis non credere timetis ? C.,Font.,12,26;are ye a fraid to disbelieve the testimony of the Allobroges? Vereor la dare praesentem,C.,N.D.,1.21,58(423,2). Nil met nt i rare,CAT.,LXIV.146;they have no fear to take an oath. These constr ctions are fo nd at all periods and with a wide range of words.CICE RO,however,is restrained in his sage,and the most examples are fo nd in the poe ts and later prose writers.

nihil min s,q am

t egredi obsessi moenib s a derent,timeri poterat.

nam

t fer la caedes merit m maiora s bire verbera,non vereor,

NOTES.1."Ut" seems to be

sed only after

(b) With the Acc.and Inf.verbs of Fear are verbs of Thinking or of Perception : vereor = c m timere p to or video. Verebar non omnes ca sam vincere posse s am [Ov.,Her.,16,75]. Tel mq e instare tremescit,V.,A.,xii,916. This constr ction is rare,b t occ rs at all periods;more often,however,it involv es the s bstantives timor and met s,especially in LIVY,who shows seven cases alt ogether. CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. Sentences of Tendency and Res lt. 551.1.Consec tive Sentences are those sentences which show the Conseq ence or Te ndency of Actions.In Latin,Kes lt is a mere inference from Tendency,tho gh often an irresistible inference.In other words,the Latin lang age ses so as thro gho t,and not so that,altho gh so that is often a convenient translation.The res lt is only implied,not stated. 2.Consec tive Sentences are divided into two classes : I.Consec tive Sentences in which the Tendency is expressed by the Particle : P r e Consec tive Sentences. II.Consec tive Sentences in which the Tendency lies in the leading Verb :(a) aft er verbs of Effecting;(I) after negatived verbs of Preventing,Do bt,and Uncertai nty;(c) after words and phrases req iring expansion. I.P re Consec tive Sentences. 552.P re Consec tive Sentences are introd ced by 1. Ut( ti),that,so that, and other relative prono ns and adverbs(631). 2. Ut-non, that,so that,as-not, contin ed by neq e,nec (543,4). 3. Q in = t non, after a negative sentence(554).Correlative demonstratives occ r very often : [352 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.] ita(sic),tam,tantopere,tanto,tant m,adeo,eo,h c;talis,tant s,tot,is,ei s modi,an d others of similar meaning. In virt te m lti s nt adscens s, t is maxime gloria excellat,q i virt te pl rim m praestet,C.,Planc.,25,60;in virt e there are many degrees,so that he e

xcels most in glory who is most advanced in virt e. Neq e me vixisse paenitet q oniam ita vixi at non fr stra me nat m exist mem,C.,Cat.M.,23,84(540).

Tanta vis probitatis est, t eam in hoste etiam diligam s,C.,Lael.,9,29;s o great is the virt e of prightness,that we love it even in an enemy. Non is es t te p dor mq am a t rpit dine revocarit,C.,Cat.,1.9,22;yo are not the man for shame ever to have recalled yo (= ever to have been recalled by shame) from baseness. Nemo adeo fer s est t non mitescere possit,H.,Ep.,1.i,39; no one is so savage that he cannot(be made to) soften. Nil tam difficile est q in q aerendo investigari possiet,TER.,Hea t.,675 ; na ght is so hard b t it can(= that it cannot) be tracked o t by search. N mq am tam male est Sic lis q in aliq id facete et commode dicant, C.,V err.,iv.43,95 ; the Sicilians are never so badly off as not to(have) something o r other clever and pat(to) say. REMARKS.1.Notice especially the impersonal tant m abest,af it (rarely aberat) - t- t. The phrase originates with an abstract Abl.dependent on a personal abs m,which a bstract Abl.is afterward expanded into a consec tive cla se with t. [Agesila s] tant m af it ab insolentia gloriae t commiserat s sit fort nam Graeciae,NEP.,xvii.5,2;Agesila s was so far from the insolence of glory that he pitied the(mis)fort ne of Greece. Tant m abest ab eo t mal m mors sit t verear ne homini sit nihil bon m ali d,C.,T sc.,1.31,76;so far is it from death(= so far is death from) being an evil that I fear man has no other blessing. Tant m af it, t illor m praesidio nostram firmarem s classem, t etiam a Rhodiis rbe prohiberent r nostri milites,LENTULUS [C.,Fam.,xii.15,2];so far wer e we from strengthening o r fleet by reinforcements from them that o r soldiers were act ally kept away from the city by the Rhodians. Tant m abest t nostra mirem r t sq e eo difficiles sim s t nobis non satisfaciat ipse Demosthenes,C.,Or.,29,104;so far are we from admiring o r own( compositions) that we are so hard to please that Demosthenes himself fails to sa tisfy s. The personal constr ction is extremely rare. The second at may be omitted,and a declarative sentence follow asyndetically : Tant m aberat t binos(libres) scriberent : vix sing los confecer nt, C. ,Att.,xiii.21,5;so far were they from writing two copies of each book,they with diffic lty finished p one. 2.Dign s,worthy,indign s, nworthy,apt s,idone s,fit,take a consec tive sentence with q i.Occasionally in early,more often in later [CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.353]

Latin, dign s and indign s take t.In poetry all these words are fo nd sometimes with the Infinitive. Q i modeste paret,videt r q i aliq ando imperet dign s esse, C.,Leg.,iii .2,5;he who obeys d ly seems to be worthy to command some day. 3.While ita(sic) is s ally antecedent to a consec tive t,it may also be antece dent to a final t or ne when the design or wish intr des. Ita me gessi ne tibi p dori essem,L.,XL.15,6;I behaved myself so as not to be a disgrace to yo .

Ita probanda est mans et do t adhibeat r rei p blicae ca sa severitas, C.,Off.,1.25,88;mildness is to be approved,so that(provided that) strictness be sed for the sake of the commonwealth.

Ita fr i vol nt vol ptatib s t n lli propter eas conseq ant r dolores, C.,Fin.,1.14,48; they wish to enjoy pleas res witho t having any pain to ens e o n acco nt of them. [Pythagoras et Plato] mortem ita la dant t f gere vitam vetent, C.,Sca r.,4,5; Pythagoras and Plato so praise death,that they (while they praise death) forbid fleeing from life.

Tant m a vallo [Pompei] prima acies aberat, ti ne telo adici posset, CAE S.,B.C.,iii.55.

Rex esse nolim t esse cr delis velim,SYR.,577;king I wo ld not be,if I m st school myself to cr elty. 4.Ut non is often = witho t,and the English verbal in -ing : (Octavian s) n mq am filios s os pop lo commendavit t non adiceret : si mereb nt r,SUET.,A g.,56; Octavian s(A g st s) never recommended his sons to th e people in s ch a way as not to add(= witho t adding) : if they are worthy. Q i ne mal m habeat abstinet se ab ini ria certe malet existimari bon s vir t non sit q am esse t non p tet r,C.,Fin.,II.22,71;he who,to avoid misfort ne,abstains from inj ry,will certainly prefer being tho ght a good man witho t being s ch,to being(a good man) witho t being believed(to be s ch).

II.Complementary Consec tive Sentences. A.Verbs of Effecting. 553.Verbs of Effecting belong partly to the Consec tive,partly to the Final Sent ence.The negative is non or ne;the seq ence,final. S ch verbs are :

Ut alone may also be

sed th s :

Ita t istaec t a misceto ne me admisceas,TER.,Hea t.,783;mix xings so yo mix me not withal.

p yo r mi

So not

nfreq ently when a restriction or condition is intended :

I.Verbs of Ca sation : facere,efficere,perficere,I make,effect,achieve; asseq i,conseq i,I attain,accomplish,and many others. The following are cited as more or less common in CICERO : proficere, [354 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.] impetrare,valere,committere,tenere,adipisci,praestare,ferre(in phrases cons et d o,nat ra,fort na fert),adferre,adi vare,exp gnare,extorq ere,exprimere,and a few others.

Sed perfice, t Crass s haec q ae coartavit nobis explicet,C.,Or.,I.35,16 3;b t bring it abo t that Crass s(make Crass s) nfold to s what he has condens ed. Non committam t ca sam aliq am tibi rec sandi dem,C.,Or.,ii.57,233; I s hall not make the bl nder of giving yo an exc se for ref sing. Negatives : Rer m obsc ritas non verbor m facit t non intellegat r oratio, C.,Fin., ii.5,15;it is the obsc rity of the s bject,not of the words,that ca ses the lang age not to be nderstood. Potestis efficere t male moriar, t non moriar non potestis, PLIN.,Ep.,i ii.16,11; yo may make me die a hard death,keep me from dying yo cannot. Efficiam posthac ne q emq am voce lacessas,V.,EC.,3,51; I will bring it abo t that yo challenge no one hereafter in song.

is often little more than a periphrasis;especially in the forms fac t and faxo,faxit(both pec liar to Comedy). Fort na vestra facit t irae meae temperem,L.,xxxvi.35,3; yo r fort ne c a ses that I(makes me) restrain my anger(p t metes'to my anger). Invit s(325,R.6) facio t recorder r inas rei p blicae,C.,Vat.,9,21;(it is) against my will that I(am doing so as to) recall the r ined condition of the commonwealth. 2.Verbs of Compelling and Permitting : Cogere, adigere, impellere, d cere, with its compo nds, movere, commovere, to which m st be added exorare,to force by pleading. Permittere, sinere, concedere,

Facere

Efficiam t intellegatis,C.,Cl ent.,3,7; I will ca se yo

to nderstand.

dare, (non) pati, and less often largiri. trib ere, ferre. Tenem s memoria Cat l m esse coact m t vita se ipse privaret, C.,Or.,ii i.3,9;we remember that Cat l s was forced to take his own life. Ill d nat ra non patit r, t alior m spoliis nostras copias a geam s, C., Off.,iii.5,22; nat re does not allow s to increase o r wealth by the spoils of others.

NOTE. Cogere has s ally the Inf.(423,2,N.2),so occasionally sinere,pati. On permittere,see 532,N.1. Cogere in the sense concl de is a verb of Saying(546,B.i). Facere and efficere,in the sense ca se,are very rarely sed with the Inf initive.Compare C.,Br.,38,142, (actio) tales oratores videri facit,q ales ipsi se videri vol nt. This becomes more common in very late Lain. 3.Passive verbs of Ca sation,and their eq ivalents, [CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.355] namely,many Impersonal Verbs of Happening and Following,of Accident and Conseq e nt. S ch verbs are

confici,effici,fit,accidit,contingit,obtingit,evenit,it happens, s venit,it occ rs, seq it r,it follows,

and many others.So also est,it is the case. Ex q o efficit r,non t vol ptas ne(the design of the arg er) sit vol pt as,sed t vol ptas non(the res lt of the arg ment) sit s mm m bon m, C.,Fin.,ii. 8,24; from which it res lts,not that pleas re is not pleas re,b t that pleas re is not the s preme good. .

Potest fieri t is nde te a disse dicis irat s dixerit, C.,Or.,ii.70,28 5;(it) may be(that) he from whom yo say yo heard(it) said it in anger.

Potest fieri

t fallar,C.,Fam.,xiii.73,2;(it) may be(that) I am mistaken

revailed

Collegam perp lerat ne contra rem p blicam sentiret,S.,C.,26,4; he had p pon his colleag e,not to take sides against the commonwealth.

Persaepe evenit t tilitas c m honestate certet,C.,Part.Or.,25,89; it v ery often(so) happens that profit is at variance with honor.

"fieri potis est t ne q a exeat",TER.,Ad.,626. 4.Very many impersonal verbs and combinations of ne ter adjectives with est,afte r the analogy of the impersonals j st mentioned. S ch are :

addit r, accedit,it is added; restat, reliq om est,it remains; apparet,it is plain. En merations,as,

proxim m,terti m,extrem m est; in sitat m,rar m est,it rarely happens that; novom,sing lare,mir m,ina dit m,ver m,fals m,(non) verisimile,conseq ens ,etc. Also rarely, interest,necesse est,necessari m est, and the like. Ad Appi Cla di senect tem accedebat etiam t caec s esset,C.,Cat.M.,6,16 ;to the old age of Appi s Cla di s was f rther added his being blind. Ei ne integr m q idem erat t ad i stitiam remigraret,C.,T sc.,v.21,62;f or him it was not even an open q estion to go back to j stice. Rar m(= raro accidit) t sit idone s s ae rei q isq e defensor, QUINT.,i v.i,46; it is rare for a man to be a good defender of his own case. REMARKS.1.Necesse est,it is necessary,generally,and oportet,it behooves, always omit t : [Le ctrica p gna] immortalis sit necesse est,NEP.,xv.10,2;the battle of Le ctra m st needs be immortal. Sed non eff gies;mec m moriaris oportet,PROP.,ii.8,25;b t yo shall not escape; yo m st die with me. 2.The ne ter adjectives with t are very rare ntil the post-classical period an d are far more commonly constr ed with the Infinitive. 3.Very common is the periphrasis fore(f t r m) t,which gives the common form of the F t.Infinitive.See 248. [356 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.] B.Verbs of Hindering.

NOTE.Noteworthy is the early Latin

se of"(fieri) potis t ne",as in

NOTES.1.Q in is compo nded of q i - an interrogative-relative Ablative or Locati ve and ne(non). Its first se is interrogative: "why not " in an indignant q estion;almost eq iv alent to an indignant Imperative,with which,thro gh the fading o t of its compos ition,it is occasionally connected,especially in early and later Latin,rarely in CICERO(269). 2.An indignant q estion(How not ? Why not ?) objects to opposition,and is theref ore nat rally constr ed with the negative of a verb of Hindering.Hence q in,as an interrogative(How not ?),takes the seq ence of the Interrogat ive Sentence.B t this shows itself only after words of do bt;after verbs of Prev enting the seq ence coincides with that of the Final Sentence,and after other ne gative sentences the seq ence coincides with that of the Consec tive Sentence. 3.By ite combination with verbs of Preventing, q in came to be felt as a consec tive particle = t non,and was then sed in other consec tive connections for at non.

555.Q in is sed when Verbs and Phrases of Preventing,Omitting,Refraining,Ref sing,and De laying,Do bt,and Uncertainty,are negatived or q estioned. 1.Verbs of Preventing and the like(seq ence of the Final Sentence). Vix n nc obsistit r illis q in lanient m nd m,Ov.,M.,I.58;they are now h ardly to be kept(that they sho ld not rend) from rending the niverse. Antioch s non se ten it q in contra s m doctorem libr m ederet, C.,Ac., ii.4,12; Antioch s did not refrain from p blishing a book against his teacher. Vix reprimor q in te manere i beam,PL.,M.G.,1368; I am scarcely kept bac k(keep myself back) from bidding yo remain. Neq e me I ppiter [prohibebit] q in sic faciam ti constit i,PL.,Am.,105 1;nor will J piter prevent me from doing j st as I determined to do. REMARK.The list of verbs is given in 548,N.1. 2.Verbs of Do bt and Uncertainty(seq ence of the Interrogative Sentence). Non d bi m est q in xorem nolit fili s,TER.,And.,172;there is no do bt that(my) son does not want a wife. Q ia d bitet(= nemo d bitet) q in in virt te divitiae sint? C.,Parad.,v i.2,48(259). Non d bitari debet q in f erint ante Homer m poetae,C.,Br.,18,71;it is n ot to be do bted that there were poets before Homer. N nc mihi non est d bi m q in vent rae non sint(legiones), C.,Fam.,11.17 ,5(515).

554.Q in is sed like q omin s,with Verbs of Preventing,Ref when they are negatived or q estioned.

sing,etc.,b t only

[CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.357] Occasionally verbs of Saying and Thinking are fo nd with the same constr ction,b eca se they are near eq ivalents. Negari non potest q in recti s sit etiam ad pacatos barbaros exercit m m itti, Cf.L.,XL.36,2; it cannot be denied(do bted) that it is better for an army to be sent to the barbarians even tho gh they be q iet. Non abest s spicio(Litotes [700] for d bitari non potest) q in(Orgetorix ) ipse sibi mortem consciverit,CAES.,B.Gr.,1.4,4; there is no lack of gro nd to s spect( there is no do bt that) Orgetorix killed himself. REMARKS.1.The principal gain of the interrogative seq ence is that the Periphras tic F t.may be employed(of which,however,the first example is cited from CICERO) ,b t according to 515,R.3, non d bito q in may have the simple S bjv.instead of the Periphrastic : Non d bitare q in de omnib s obsidib s s pplici m s mat(Ariovist s), CAE S.,B.G.,1.3i,15;" He did not do bt that Ariovist s wo ld p t all the hostages to death." Compare CAT.,cviii.3. So when there is an original S bjv.notion : Non d bito q in ad te statim veniam,C.,Att.,viii.II B,3; I do not do bt that I o ght to come to yo forthwith.(Veniam ? Shall I come ?) 2.Of co rse d bito and non d bito may have the ordinary interrogative constr cti ons(467).On d bito an,see 457,2. 3.Non d bito,with the Inf., s ally means I do not hesitate to: Non d bitem dicere omnes sapientes semper esse beatos,C.,Fin.,v.32,95;I sho ld not hesitate to say that all wise men are always happy. Et d bitam s adh c virt tem extendere factis ? V.,A.,vi.806; and do we s till hesitate to spread o r(fame for) valo r by o r deeds ? Compare vereor,timeo,I fear,hesitate to(550,2,N.5). So occasionally non d bito q in.See R.1. (Romani) arbitrabant r non d bitat r m fortem vir m q in cederet aeq o a nimo legib s,C.,Mil.,23,63; the Romans tho ght that a brave man wo ld not hesita te to yield with eq animity to the laws. NOTE.Non d bito with the Inf.for non d bito q in occ rs chiefly in NEPOS,LIVY,an d later writers. S nt m lti q i q ae t rpia esse d bitare non poss nt tilitatis specie d cti probent,QUINT.,iii.8,3; there are many who,led on by the appearance of prof it,approve what they cannot do bt to be base.

556.Q in,eq ivalent to t non,may be sed after any negative sentence(seq ence o f the Consec tive Sentence).Here it may often be translated " witho t." Nil tam difficile est q in q aerendo investigari possiet, TER.,Hea t.,67

5(552). N ll m adh c intermisi diem q in aliq id ad te litterar m darem, C.,Att. ,vii.15,1 ; I have th s far not allowed a day to pass b t I dropped yo (witho t dropping yo ) something of a letter(a line or two). [358 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.] Note the combination(facere) non poss m q in,I cannot b t,and similar combinatio ns;non poss m non with Inf.is also classical. Facere non poss m q in cottidie ad te mittam(litteras),C.,Att.,xii.27,2; I cannot do witho t(I cannot help) sending a letter to yo daily. Non poss m q in exclamem,PL.,Trin.,705;I cannot b t(I m st) cry o t. (N llo modo facere poss m t non sim pop laris,C.,Agr.,ii.3,7(reading do btf l);I cannot help being a man of the people.)

Nihil abest q in sim miserrim s,C.,Att.,xi.15,8; there is nothing wantin g that I sho ld be(= to make me) perfectly miserable. Fieri n llo modo poterat q in Cleomeni parceret r,C.,Verr.,v.40,104; it co ld in nowise happen b t that Cleomenes sho ld be spared(= Cleomenes had to be spared). Pa l m af it q in(Fabi s) Var m interficeret,CAES.,B.C.,ii.35,2; there w as little lacking b t Fabi s(had) killed Var s (= Fabi s came near killing Var s ). Explanatory Ut. 557.A Consec tive Sentence with t is often sed to give the contents or charact er of a preceding s bstantive,adjective,or prono n. Est mos homin m t nolint e ndem pl rib s reb s excellere, C.,Br.,21,84( 546,R.i). An q oiq amst s s homini se t cr ciet ? TER.,Hea t.,81(406,N.5). Est miseror m t malevolentes sint atq e invideant bonis,PL.,Capt.,583; the wretched have a way of being ill-nat red and envying the well-to-do. Nec me m ad te t mittam gratiis,PL.,Asin.,190; nor is it my style to le t her go to yo as a gracio s gift. Id est propri m civitatis t sit libera,C.,Off.,ii.22,78;it is the pec l iar privilege of a state,to be free. Ill d ips m habet cons l t ei reliq i magistrates pareant, C.,Leg.,iii. 7,16;the cons l has this very prerogative,that the other magistrates be obedient nto him. Tot m in eo est, t tibi imperes,C.,T sc.,ii.22,53; all depends pon this (one thing),yo r self-command. REMARK.These are principally mos,cons et de,habit,wont; op s, s s,need; many s bstantives of opinion and perception,as

opinio,sententia,cogitatio,mens,sapientia,scientia,cognitio;nat ra,gen s ,stat s, and others, s ally with a demonstrative attached;adjectives indicating possessio n : me m,t om,s om(all mainly ante-class.),propri m,comm ne,praecip m(LiVY) , and predicate Genitives with esse : id,hoc,ill d,etc. These sho ld be disting ished from final sages. NOTES.1.Tendency and Character lend themselves readily to circ mioc tion,and t with S bjv.becomes a manner of eq ivalent to the Inf.,which,however,is by far th e more common constr ction. 2.To the same principle is to be referred the se of t after maior(magis) q am, non aliter q am(witho t),first in LIVY;after nisi(591,b,R.3).See 298. Praecept m mai s erat q am t ab nomine videret r,C.,Fin.,v.16,44(503). [TEMPOEAL SENTENCES.359] Exclamatory Q estions. 558.Ut with the S bj nctive is sed in Exclamatory Q estions, s ally with the in sertion of -ne.

Di magni, t q i civem Roman m occidisset,imp nitatem acciperet, SEN.,Ben .,v.16,3;Great Gods ! that one who had slain a Roman citi en,sho ld escape np n ished ! NOTE.The expression is closely parallel with the Acc.and Infinitive.The one obje cts to the idea;the other,to any state of things that co ld prod ce the res lt.I n neither case is there any definite or conscio s ellipsis. Compare TER.,Hec.,589,with 613. TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 559.The action of the Temporal or Dependent cla se may stand to the action of th e Principal cla se in one of three relations : 1.It may be antecedent. CONJUNCTIONS : Postq am(Postea q am,not ante-class.),after that,after; t,as; bi,when(literally,where); sim lac,as soon as; t prim m, c m prim m,the first moment that. II.It may be contemporaneo s. CONJUNCTIONS : D m,donec,while, ntil; q oad, p to(the time) that; q amdi ,as long as;

t mq am te corrigas ? C.,Cat.,1.9,22; yo

ever reform yo rself?

Egone t te interpellem ? C.,T sc.,ii.18,42;I interr pt yo

c m,when. III.It may be s bseq ent. CONJUNCTIONS : Anteq am,pri sq am,before that,before. A special chapter is req ired by IV.C m(q om),when.

560.1.The mood of Temporal cla ses is reg larly the Indicative. 2.The S bj nctive is sed only : (1) In Oratio Obliq a(508),Total or Partial.So also in the Ideal Second Person. (2) When the idea of Design or Condition is introd ced. [360 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.] I.ANTECEDENT ACTION. 561.In historical narrative,Temporal Cla ses with postq am(posteaq am), bi, t, sim lac, t prim m, and c m primmn commonly take the Historical Perfect or the Historical Present Indicative. The English translation is not nfreq ently the Pl perfect. Postq am Caesar pervenit,obsides poposcit,CAES.,B.G.,I.27,3;after Caesar arrived,he demanded hostages. Q ae bi n ntiant r Romam.senat s extemplo dictatorem dici i ssit, L.,iv .56,8;when these tidings were carried to Rome,the senate forthwith ordered a dic tator to be appointed. Pompei s t eq itat m s m p ls m vidit,acie excessit,CAES.,B.C.,iii.94, 5;as Pompey saw his cavalry beaten,he left the line of battle. (Pelopidas) non d bitavit,sim l ac conspexit hostem,confligere (555,2,R. 3), NEP.,xvi.5,3;as soon as he(had) ca ght sight of the enemy,Pelopidas did not hesitate to engage(him). S bj nctive in Oratio Obliq a. Ariovist m, t semel Gallor m copias vicerit(O.R.vicit),s perbe imperare, CAES.,B.G.,1.31,12;" that Ariovist s,as soon as he had once beaten the forces o f the Ga ls,exercised his r le arrogantly" 562.The Imperfect is sed to express an action contin ed into the time of the pr incipal cla se(overlapping). The translation often indicates the spectator(233,N.1).

MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES.

T postq am q i tibi erant amici non poterant vincere, t amici tibi esse nt q i vincebant effecisti,C.,Q inct.,22,70;after(yo saw) that those who were f riendly to yo co ld not be victorio s yo managed that those sho ld be friendly to yo who were going to be victorio s. Ubi nemo obvi s ibat,ad castra hosti m tend nt,L.,ix.45,14;when (they sa w that) no one was coming to meet them,they proceeded to the camp of the enemy. S bj nctive in Oratio Obliq a. Scripsisti(e m) posteaq am non a deret(O.R.non a debat) reprehendere,la dare coepisse,C.,Att.,1.13,4;yo wrote that,after he co ld not get p the co rag e to blame,he began to praise. 563.1.The Pl perfect is sed to express an action completed before the time of t he principal cla se;often of the Res lting Condition.

Albin s postq am decreverat non egredi provincia,milites stativis castri s habebat, S.,I g.,44,4;after Albin s had f lly determined not to depart from th e province,he kept his soldiers in cantonments. [TEMPORAL SENTENCES.361] Posteaq am m ltit dinem collegerat emblemat m,instit it officinam, C.,Ve rr.,iv.24,54;after he had got together a great n mber of fig res,he set p shop. 2.The Pl perfect is sed with postq am when a definite interval is mentioned.Rar ely also the Historical Perfect (Aorist). Post and q am are often separated. With an Ablative of Meas re,post may be omitted(403,N.4,d). (Aristides) decessit fere post ann m q art m q am Themistocles Athenis e rat exp ls s, NEP.,iii.3,3;Aristides died abo t fo r years after Themistocles ha d been(was) banished from Athens. Post diem terti m gesta res est q am dixerat,C.,Mil.,16,44; the matter w as accomplished three days after he had said it wo ld be. [Hamilcar] nono anno postq am in Hispaniam venerat occis s est, NEP.,xxi i.4,2;Hamilcar was killed nine years after he came to Spain. (Aristides) sexto fere anno q am erat exp ls s in patriam restit t s est , NEP.,iii.i,5;Aristides was restored to his co ntry abo t six years after he wa s exiled. Trid o fere postq am Hannibal a ripa Rhodani movit,ad castra hosti m ven erat, L.,xxi.32,1;(within) abo t three days after Hannibal moved from the banks of the Rhone he had come to the camp of the enemy. S bj nctive in Oratio Obliq a. Script m a Posidonio est triginta annis vixisse Panaeti m posteaq am lib ros [de officiis] edidisset,C.,Off.,iii.2,8; it is recorded by Posidoni s that P anaeti s lived thirty years after he p t forth his books on D ties.

The attraction is sometimes neglected. NOTES.1.The most common of these conj nctions is postq am,b t the others also oc c r at all periods.Sim l(atq e) is rare in early Latin.In the following notes th e sage in Iterative action is excl ded. 2. The Impf.with postq am is cited b t once from early Latin(Pl..,Most.,640 ),it becomes more common in CICERO,b t is distinctive of LIVY,who shows nearly o ne h ndred examples. The Impf.with bi is cited once in early Latin (TER.,E n.,405),where,how ever,it is iterative,not at all from CICERO,once from CAESAR,after which it is f o nd more freq ently,b t never becomes common. The Impf.with t is fo nd first in CICERO,never in CAESAR,SALLUST,VERGIL ,b t not ncommonly in LIVY; only once in TACITUS(H.,iii.31),where it is Iterati ve. The Impf.with sim l(atq e) is not cited from CICERO and CAESAR,b t appea rs once in SALLUST,where it is Iterative;it is very rare. 3. The Pl pf.with postq am is not cited from PLAUTUS or HORACE,and b t once from TERENCE(And.177);CICERO ses it b t rarely,CAESAR b t once(B.C.,iii.58,5); LIVY ses it often,and TACITUS is fond of it. The Pl pf.with bi is fo nd once in PLAUTUS,twice each in CICERO and CAE SAR,and then more freq ently. The Pl pf.with t(prim m) is fo nd first in CICERO,perhaps b t once in C AESAR(B.C.,iii.63,6),more often later. The Pl pf.with sim l(atq e) is cited once from CICERO,not at all from CA ESAR,and rarely later. 4.Some do en cases are cited,principally from CICERO,of the S bjv.with postq am not in O.O.Most of these are disp ted. [362 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.] If the S bjv.is to remain in these passages it is to be explained as d e either to Partial Obliq ity or to the intr sion of the c m S bjv.into other temporal co nstr ctions.The S bjv.appears in late Latin. 5. The S bjv.with bi occ rs occasionally in early Latin,b t only once in C ICERO,not nfreq ently in LIVY and TACITUS.This is s ally explained as either t he Iterative or Potential S bj nctive. The S bjv.with t is post-classical,and the S bjv.with sim l does not oc c r. 564.Postq am and the like,with the Present and Perfect Indicative,ass me a ca sa tive signification(compare q oniam,now that = since). [C ria] minor mihi videt r posteaq am est maior,C.,Fin.,v.i,2 the senate -ho se seems to me smaller now that it is(really) greater. Tremo horreoq e postq am aspexi hanc,TER.,E n.,84;I q iver and shiver si nce I have seen her.

NOTES.1.The se of temporal conj nctions,especially postq am in the Present Sphe re,is m ch more common in early Latin than later. Ubi and t occ r at all periods,b t rarely; bi has almost the same force as si; t means ex q o,since. Sim l is rare,and fo nd first in LUCRETIUS. 2.C m,also,has sometimes the ca sal signification.

565.Ubi and sim l are occasionally fo nd with the F t re and F t re Perfect;not so postq am and t. Ubi me aspiciet ad carn ficem rapiet contin o,PL.,B.,689;as soon as he s hall catch(catches') sight of me he will h rry me at once to the hangman. Id tibi q idem hercle fiet,Demaenet m sim lac conspexero,PL.,Asin.,477; that indeed shall certainly be yo r fate,as soon as I shall have espied Demaenet s.

NOTE.When th s sed bi and sim l approach almost the meaning of c m(580).So als o q ando;se 580,N.3.These ses sho ld be disting ished from those of Iterative Action. Iterative Action. 566.RULE I.When two actions are repeated contemporaneo sly,both are p t in tense s of contin ance. H miles laborant bi potentes dissident,PHAED.,1.30,1;the lowly (NaN) s ffer when the powerf l disagree. Pop l s me sibilat;at mihi pla do ipse domi sim l ac n mmos contemplor i n arca,H,S.,1.I,66;the people hiss me;b t I clap myself at home as soon as I glo at o'er my cash in the strong box. Ubi fr mento op s erat,cohortes praesidi m agitabant,S.,I g.,55,4;when t here was need of corn,the cohorts wo ld serve as an escort. [TEMPORAL SENTENCES.363] The S bj nctive with the Ideal Second Person.

Bon s segnior fit bi neglegas,S.,I g.,31,28;a good man becomes more spi ritless when yo neglect him.( yNaXy 567.RULE II.When one action is repeated before another,the antecedent action is p t in the Perfect,Pl perfect,or F t re Perfect;the s bseq ent action in the Pre sent,Imperfect,or F t re,according to the relation. -> As this se r ns thro gh all sentences involving antecedent action,all the cl asses are represented in the following examples. Observe the greater exactness of the Latin expression.Compare 244,R.2. Q otiens cecidit,s rgit,As often as he falls,he rises. Q otiens ceciderat,s rgebat,As often as he fell,he rose. Q otiens ceciderit,s rget,As often as he falls,he will rise.

Grat lor tibi c m tant m vales,C.,Fam.,ix.14,3;I wish yo o have so m ch infl ence.

joy now that y

Sim l inflavit tibicen a perito carmen agnoscit r,C.,Ac.,ii.27,86; as so on as the fl ter blows,the song is recognised by the connoisse r. [Alcibiades] sim l ac se remiserat,l x rios s reperiebat r,NEP.,vii.1,4; as soon as Alcibiades relaxed,he was fo nd a deba chee. Dociliora s nt ingenia pri sq am obd r er nt,QUINT.,1.12,9;minds are mor e teachable before they(have) become hardened. [Ager] c m m ltos annos q ievit, beriores efferre fr ges solet,C.,Br.,4, 16;when a field has rested (rests) many years,it s ally prod ces a more ab ndan t crop. C m palam ei s an li ad palmam converterat(Gyges) a n llo videbat r, C., Off.,iii.9,38;when(ever) Gyges t rned the be el of the ring toward the palm (of his hand),he was to be seen by no one. Si pes condol it,si dens,ferre non poss m s,C.,T sc.,ii,22,62; if a foot ,if a tooth ache(s),we cannot end re it. Stomachabat r senex,si q id asperi s dixeram,C.,N.D.,1.33,93;the old man sed to be fretted,if I said anything(that was) rather harsh.

Q os laborantes conspexerat,his s bsidia s bmittebat,CAES.,B.G.,iv.26,4; to those whom he saw(had espied) hard pressed he wo ld send reinforcements. Haerebant in memoria q aec mq e a dierat et viderat (Themistocles), C.,A c.,ii.1,2;whatever Themistocles had heard and seen(= heard and saw) remained fix ed in his memory. Q i timere desierint,odisse incipient,TAC.,Agr.,32; those who cease to f ear will begin to hate. The S bj nctive with the Ideal Second Person.

The S bj nctive in Oratio Obliq a. [Cato] mirari se aiebat q od non rideret har spex har spicem c m vidisse t, C.,Div.,ii.24,51;Cato said that he wondered that an har spex did not la gh wh en he saw(another) har spex().(Non ridet c m vidit.) [364 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.] The S bj nctive by Attraction. [Araneolae] rete tex nt t si q id inhaeserit conficiant,C.,N.D.,ii.48,12 3;spiders weave webs to despatch() anything that gets ca ght(si q id inhaesit,conf ici nt). Q are fiebat, t omni m oc los,q otiesc mq e in p blic m prodisset,ad se converteret,NEP.,vii.3,5;whereby it happened that he attracted the eyes of all e very time he went o t in p blic (q otiesc nq e prodierat,convertebat). NOTE.The S bj nctive in Iterative Tenses may be acco nted for on the principle t hat a repeated action which is retrospective from the point of view of the narra tor,and so nat rally takes the Indicative,becomes prospective from the point of

Ubi cons l eris,mat re facto op s est,S.,C.,I,6;when yo d,yo want speedy action.

have deliberate

view of the agent,and so takes the S bj nctive.B t,however the constr ction is j stified,the fact remains that the S bj nctive in Iterative Sentences is a growt h in Latin.With the principal tenses it is confined mostly to the Ideal Second P erson.Indefinite q is is very near to this.So CICERO,Rab.Post.,13,36 : bi semel q is peieraverit-oportet.With Impf .and Pl pf .

the first examples(excl ding c m) are in CATULLUS(LXXXIV.t),and CAESAR(e.g.B.C., ii.15,3).Then it spreads,probably nder Greek infl ence,and is very common in th e historians,especially LIVY and TACITUS. Ubi and t are the particles employed;also very often si and relatives, in general q ic mq e,q otiens,etc.With c m, Iterative S bj nctives are fo nd to a limited extent also in CICERO and CAESAR;b t all cases of principal tenses in third person have been emended,and those wit h historical tenses are not common,and sometimes do btf l. C m ferr m se inflexisset,neq e evellere neq e p gnare poterant(= videba nt 86 non posse),CAES.,B.G.,1.25,3;when the iron had bent,they fo nd that they c o ld neither pl ck it o t nor fight. Inc rrere ea gens in Macedoniam solita erat(as if constit erat) bi rege m occ pat m externo bello sensisset,L.,xxvi.25,7;that tribe was wont to make a r aid on Macedonia,whenever they perceived the king engrossed() in foreign war. Q i n m ei s ordinis offendisset omnes adversos habebat(as if certo sci ebat se habit r m),L.,xxxiii.46,1;whoso had offended one of that order was s re to have all against him. Mod m adbibendo bi res posceret,priores erant,L.,iii.19,3;by the se of moderation,when the case demanded it,they were his s periors. II.CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION. 568.Conj nctions sed of Contemporaneo s Action are :

An action may be contemporaneo s in Extent so long as,while.

REMARK.D m,(while) yet,denotes d ration,which may be coextensive,so long as,or n ot.It is often ca sal.Donec(old form donic m, sed only in the sense ntil),is pa rallel with d m in the sense so long as, ntil.CICERO ses it only as ntil.

An action may be contemporaneo s in Limit

D q q c

m,donec,while,so long as, ntil; oad, p to(the time) that; amdi ,as long as; m,when.

ntil.

[TEMPORAL SENTENCES.365] 1.Contemporaneo s in Extent. (So long as,while.) 569.Complete Coextension.- D m,donec,q oad,q amdi ,so long as,while,take the Ind icative of all the tenses. Vita d m s perest,bene est,MAECENAS(SEN.,E.M.,101,11);while (so long 'as ) life remains,'tis well. Sibi vero hanc la dem relinq ont," Vixit,d m vixit,bene," TER.,Hec.,461; they leave indeed this praise for themselves," He lived well while he lived"(all the time). Tiberi s Gracch s tam di la dabit r d m memoria rer m Romanar m manebit , C,Off.,ii.12,43;Tiberi s Gracch s shall be praised so long as the memory of Ro man history remains(shall remain). F it haec gens fortis d m Lyc rgi leges vigebant,C.,T sc.,1.42,101;this nation was brave so long as the laws of Lyc rg s were in force. Donec grat s eram tibi,Persar m vig i rege beatior,H.,O.,iii.9,1;while I was pleasing in yo r sight,I throve more blessed than Persia's king. Q oad pot it,restitit,CAES.,S.G.,iv.12,5;as long as he co ld,he withstoo d. S bj nctive in Oratio Obliq a. (Reg l s dixit) q am di i re i rando hosti m teneret r non esse se sena torem, C.,Off.,iii.27,100;[Reg l s said] that as long as he was bo nd by his oat h to the enemy he was not a senator.(Q amdi teneor non s m senator.) S bj nctive by Attraction.

NOTES.1. D m.In the Past Sphere we have the Pf.(Aor.),Hist.Pr.,and Imperf ect.Of these the Hist.Pr.is fo nd first in SALLUST(C.,36,1),and the Impf.,while occ rring at all periods,is rare.The Pf .is not in CAESAR. D m in the Present Sphere is rare;the P re Pr.has heen observed in PL.,B .,737 : mane d m scribit,which looks m ch like parataxis,and occasionally in CIC KBO and later; the P re Pf .is cited only from TERENCE(And.,556,597),and is only apparent.Sever al examples of the F t re Sphere are cited,PL.,B.,225, non met o mihi d m hoc valebit pect s; TER.,Hea t.,107;C.,Rosc.Am.,32,99 1;V.,A.,1.607,etc. Donec is not fo nd in the sense " so long as," ntil LUCR.,v.178;then H. ,O.,1.9,16;iii,9,1.Also Ov.,Tr.,1.9,5.Livy ses it occasionally,b t TACITUS affe cts it,and employs Hist.Pf.,Impf.,and F t.tenses.

Faciam

t mei memineris d m vitam vivas,PL.,Pers.,494(333,2).

Q oad(correlative with adeo) belongs especially to the classical poets,b t is also fo nd in prose.Compare C.,Ph.,iii.ii,28,etc.It is s ally fo nd in th e Past Sphere;in the Present the adverbial force,"so far as," seems to preponder ate;PL.,Asin.,296 : q oad vires valent.The F t re tenses are more common. O.

2.When the actions are coextensive,the tenses are generally the same in both mem bers,b t not always. 570.Partial Coextension.--D m,while,while yet,d ring,commonly takes the Present Indicative after all Tenses: so especially in narrative. [366 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.] Cape h nc eq m,d m tibi viri m aliq id s perest,L.,xxii.49,7; take this horse,while yo have yet some strength left. D m haec Romae ag nt r,cons les ambo in Lig rib s gerebant bell m, L.,xx xix.i,1; while these things were going on at Rome,both cons ls were carrying on war in Lig ria. Praetermissa ei s rei occasio est,d m in castellis recipiendis temp s te rit r,L.,xxxiii.18,20;the opport nity was allowed to slip by,while time was wast ed in recovering miserable forts. -> D m in this sense often resists the change into S bjv.in O.O.,especia lly in post-classical Latin.(655,R.3.) NOTES.1.Q amdi and q oad are,by their composition,ihcapable of being sed in th is sense,and as donec was avoided,d m is the only temporal conj nction of limit that is loose eno gh in its formation to serve for partial coextension.The Pr.af ter it,formally an Hist.Pr.,always connotes contin ance,and the constr ction bec omes practically a periphrasis for a missing Pr.participle. 2.The P re Pr.of the Present Sphere is fo nd occasionally,principally in early L atin.In this sense the relation is often ca sal,and the constr ction is parallel with the Pr.participle,the lack of which in the passive it s pplies. Ard a d m met nt(= met entes) amitt nt vera viai,LUCR.,1.660(372,N.a). The ca sal relation is also often present with the other tenses. 3.Other tenses are extremely rare,as the F t re;PL.,Men.,214,d m coq et r,interi m potabim s; the Impf.,NEP.,xxiii2,4,q ae divina res d m conficiebat r,q aesivit a me. 4.LIVY,xxxii.24,5,shows one case of the Pl pf .as a shorthand to express the mai ntenance of the res lt,d m averterat = d m aversos tenebat. 2.Contemporaneo s in Limit.(Until.) 571.D m,donec,q oad, p to(the time) that, ntil, have the Present,Historical Present,Historical Perfect,and F t re Perfect Indica tive.

Q amdi (correlative with tamdi ) is fo nd with this

sage first in CICER

Tityre,d m redeo,brevis est via,pasce capellas,V.,EC.,9,23; Tityr s,whil e I am ret rning(= till I ret rn) - the way is short - feed my kids.

Epaminondas ferr m in corpora sq e eo retin it,q oad ren ntiat m est vi cisse Boeotios,Cf.NEP.,xv.9,3;Epaminondas retained the iron( ) in his body, ntil s bro ght back that the Boeotians had conq ered. Donec rediit Marcell s,silenti m f it,L.,xxiii.31,9; ntil Marcell s ret rned,there was silence./=NXX y

S bj nctive in Oratio Obliq a, Scipioni Silanoq e donec revocati ab senat forent prorogat m imperi m e st, L.,xxvii.7,17; Scipio and Silan s had their command extended ntil " they sh o ld have been recalled by the senate." [TEMPORAL SENTENCES.367] NOTES.1.With the Past Sphere the idea of limit precl des the employment of a ten se of contin ance,which wo ld nat rally involve the notion of Overlapping Action .The Impf.is,therefore,not fo nd ntil the time of TACITUS(once with donec,H.,1. 9).With the Present Sphere the tense m st be iterative or historical.Otherwise t he Pr.is sed by anticipation for the F t re. 2.The F t.Indic.is fo nd occasionally in early Latin, s ally,however,the Present .In the classical times,and afterwards,the S bjv.takes its place.Th s CICERO se s the S bjv.reg larly,after verba exspectandi,except in possibly fo r passages o f the earlier Orations and Letters.

4.Donic m belongs to early Latin,b t is not fo nd in TERENCE;one case with the S bjv.is fo nd in NEPOS.Doniq e is fo nd in LUCRETIUS fo r times with the Indic., always before vowels;in VITRUVIUS once with Indic.,three times with S bjv.; othe rwise it is not cited. 5.Q oad, ntil,occ rs once in PLAUTUS,and with the S bj nctive.Otherwise it is fo nd with both moods occasionally thro gho t the lang age. 6.LIVY introd ces donec invers m,like c m invers m(581).Seexxi.46,6; xxxv.50,4,e tc. 572.D m,donec,and q oad, ntil,take the S bj nctive when S spense and Design are involved. Vergini s d m collegam cons leret morat s(est),L.,iv.21,10; Vergini s de layed ntil he co ld(long eno gh to) cons lt his colleag e. At tanti tibi sit non ind lgere theatris,d m bene de vac o pectore cedat amor,Ov.,Rem.Am,,751;b t let it be worth the cost to yo (= deem it worth the co st) not to ind lge in play-going, ntil love be fairly gone from (yo r) ntenante d bosom.

3.Donec is not ncommon in early Latin,b t is very rare in CICERO,and never occ rs in CAESAR.On the other hand,TACITUS shows one h ndred and thirty-eight cases of it.

Exspectabo d m venit,TER.,E n.,206;I will wait

ntil he comes.

Ha d desinam donec perfecero hoc,TER.,Ph.,420; I will not cease have(shall have) accomplished it. X ya

ntil I

Often with verba exspectandi,especially exspecto,I wait.

R stic s exspectat d m defl at amnis,H.,Ep.,1.2,42; the clownlm waits for the iver to r n off(dry). REMARKS.1.The S bjv.is sometimes sed in narrative with d m,while,and donec,whil e, ntil,to express s bordination.The principle is that of Partial Obliq ity.Ther e is often a Ca sal or Iterative sense(like c m,584,R.). D m intent s in e m se rex tot s averteret,alter elatam sec rim in cap t deiecit,L.,1.40,7; while the king,intent pon him,was t rning q ite away,the ot her raised his axe and planted it in his sk ll.(Averteret from the point of view of alter = d m videt avertentem.) 2.Verba exspectandi have also other constr ctions,as t,si,q in,b t not the Infi nitive. 573.D m,modo,and d mmodo,if only,provided only, [368 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.] only,are sed with the Present and Imperfect S bj nctive in Conditional Wishes. The negative is ne(d m ne = ne interim). Oderint d m met ant,Acci s(C.,Off.,1.28,97); let them hate so long as th ey fear(provided that,if they will only fear).

Q o l beat n bant,d m dos ne fiat comes,PL.,A L,491;let them marry where (= whom) they please,if b t the dowry do not go with them.( hy D mmodo morata recte veniat,dotata est satis,PL.,A L,239; provided only she come with a good character,she is endowed(= her dowry is) eno gh. In eo m lta admiranda s nt : eligere modo c rae sit,QUINT.,x.i,131; many things in him are to be admired;only yo m st be caref l to choose. Copia placandi sit modo parva t i,Ov.,Her.,20,74(428,R.1).

2.D mmodo ne and modo ne are fo nd first in CICERO.In post-A g stan Latin non is sometimes sed for ne;J v.,vii.222,d mmodo non pereat. III.SUBSEQUENT ACTION.Anteq am and Pri sq am with the Indicative' 574.Anteq am and prinsq am,before,take the Present,Perfect,and F t re Perfect In dicative,when the limit is stated as a fact.The Present is sed in anticipation of the F t re. REMARKS.1.The elements ante,antes,prins,and q am are often separated. 2.As pri s(ante)-q am is negative in its signification(= necd m),the Indic.is so metimes fo nd where we sho ld expect the S bj nctive. NOTE.Anteq am is m ch rarer than pri sq am,especially in early Latin,where it is cited only from CATO,CAELIUS,TERENCE(Hec.,146,with S bjv.in O.O.),and VARRO.CIC ERO prefers it before a Pr.Indic.,pri sq am elsewhere.

NOTES.1.It has been noticed that TACITUS ialoffits,otherwise d m.

ses d mmodo only in the Germania and D

575.The Present Indicative is sed after positive sentences. Anteq am ad sententiam redeo,de me pa ca dicam,C.,Cat.,iv.10,20;(228) Omnia experiri cert m est pri s q am pereo,TER.,And.,311 ;I am determine d to try everything before I perish.(Pri s q am peream = sooner than perish,to k eep from perishing.) NOTES.1.The P re Pf.Indic.is sed of Iterative Action,and is rare.(567.) Dociliora s nt ingenia pri sq am obd r er nt,QUINT.,1.12,9(567).Instead of this,the Pr.S bjv.is more common in general statements.(567,N.) 2.TACITUS sho ws no example of the Pr.Indicative. [TEMPORAL SENTENCES.369] 576.The Perfect(Aorist) and F t re Perfect Indicative are sed both after positi ve and after negative cla ses,chiefly the latter. Heraclio,aliq anto ante q am est mort s,omnia tradiderat,C.,Verr.,ii.1 8,46; some time before he died he had handed over everything to Heracli s. Legati non ante profecti q am impositos in naves milites vider nt, L.,xx xiv.12,8;the envoys did not set o t ntil they saw the soldiers on board. Neq e defatigabor ante q am illor m vias rationesq e et pro omnib s et c ontra omnia disp tandi percepero,C.,Or.,iii.36,145; I will not let myself grow w eary before( ntil) I learn(shall have learned) their methods of disp ting for an d against everything. S bj nctive in Oratio Obliq a. Themistocles [collegia s is] praedixit, t ne pri s Lacedaemonior m legat es dimitterent q am ipse esset remiss s,NEP.,ii.7,3(546,2).(Non pri s dimittetis q am ego ero remiss s.) REMARK.After negative cla ses containing a historical tense the Pf .is the r le and the connection is always close : non pri sq am = d m.Violations of this r le are very rare;see 577,2. NOTES.1.The F t.is fo nd occasionally in PLAUTUS,b t has disappeared by the time of TERENCE.The F t.Pf.is never common,b t is fo nd atall periods.TACITUS avoids it,and so do other a thors. 2.The Impf .is confined to LIVY,who shows fo r examples,and to one case in late Latin.The Pl pf.is fo nd once in CICERO(Dam.,30,78),where it may be Iterative,an d once in early Latin. Anteq am and Pri sq am with the S bj nctive. 577.Anteq am and pri sq am are sed with the S bj nctive when an ideal limit is given;when the action is expected,contingent,designed,or s bordinate. 1.An ideal limit involves necessary antecedence,b t not necessary conseq ence.Af ter positive sentences,the S bj nctive is the r le,especially in generic sentenc es and in narrative.(Compare c m,585.) After Historical Tenses the S bj nctive i s almost invariable when the action does not,or is not to,take place.The transla tion is often before,and the verbal in -ing(Greek prin with the Infinitive).

Ante videm s f lgorem q am son m a diam s,SEN.,N.Q.,ii.12,6; we see the flash of lightning before hearing the so nd(we may never hear it). B t compare LUCR.,vi.170. In omnib s negotiis pri s q am aggrediare adhibenda est praeparatio dili gens, C.,Off.,1.21,73; in all affairs,before addressing yo rself(to them),yo m st make se of caref l preparation(Ideal Second Person). [370 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.] [Collem] celeriter pri sq am ab adversariis sentiat r comm nit, CAES.,B. C.,1.54,4; He speedily fortified the hill before he was(too soon to be) perceive d by the enemy(pri s q am =: pri s q am t). Hannibal omnia pri sq am excederet p gna (erat) expert s,L.,xxx.35,4; Ha nnibal had tried everything before withdrawing from the fight(= to avoid withdra wing from the fight). Saepe magna indoles virt tis pri sq am rei p blicae prodesse pot isset e xstincta est,C.,Ph.,v.17,47; often hath great native worth been exting ished bef ore it co ld be of service to the State. D centis annis ante q am rbem Romam caperent in Italiam Galli transcend er nt,L.,v.33,5; (it was) two h ndred years before their taking Rome(that) the G a ls crossed into Italy(here the S bjv.gives the nat ral point of reference). 2.After an historical tense in the negative,the S bj nctive is exceptional.(576, R.) Inde non pri s egress s est q am(= ibi manebat d m) rex e m in fidem rec iperet,NEP.,ii.8,4; he did not come o t ntil the king sho ld take him nder his protection(he stayed to make the king take him nder his protection).See CAES., B.G.,vi.37,2; L.,XLV.ii,3. NOTES.1.The Pr.S bjv.is common,b t is s ally generic; the few cases of Final S bjv.are confined to early Latin.Very rarely the Hist.Pr.is fo nd after a Hist.Pr esent See CAES.,B.C.,1.22. 2.The Pf .occ rs occasionally;it is s ally in a final sense. Non pri s dimitt nt q am ab his sit concess m,CAES.,B.G.,iii.18. 3.In LIVY we find the Impf .S bjv. sed not nfreq ently,where the idea of s spen se or design is very slight,m ch after the manner of c m - nond m(as C.,Ph.,v.i, 4). 4.The Pl pf.S bjv.is cited five times from CICERO and fo r times from LIVY.In th ese passages the completion rather than the contin ance is in s spense. 5.Postridieq am is fo nd in PLAUTUS,CICERO(Letters),and SUETONIUS with the Indic ative.In CICERO,Ac.,ii.3,9,with the S bj nctive.Pridieq am is fo nd in PLAUTUS a nd CICERO with the Indicative;in LIVY,VAL.MAX.,and SUETONIUS with the S bj nctiv e.Both are very rare. 6.When the will is involved, poti s q am is sed in the same way as pri s q am. Dep gna poti s q am servias,C.,Att.vii.7,7;fight it o t rather than be a

slave. IV.CONSTRUCTIONS OF CUM(QUOM). 578.C m is a(locative) relative conj nction. NOTE.Originally locative(where),q om became temporal(when) like nbi.When time is not defined by a fixed date,it readily becomes circ mstance,and this circ mstan ce is interpreted as ca se,condition,and the like.Compare the circ mstantial rel ative itself.The first constr ction was with the Indicative as with any other me rely relative cla se,and this is the sole constniction in earliest Latin.B t,beg inning with TERENCE,we can observe the drift ever increasing in Latin towards th e expression of .character by tendency(S bjv.) rather than by fact(Indic.),so th at the relative of character takes more and more the S bj nctive,and c m follows the lead of t and of the inflected relative prono n. 579.There are two great ses of c m : I.Temporal c m(when,then),.with the Indicative. [TEMPORAL SENTENCES.371] II.Circ mstantial c m(as,whereas),with the S bj nctive. In the second sage the relation is still p rely a matter of inference;b t accor ding to this inferential connection we disting ish : (a) Historical c m,as,giving the attendant circ mstances,mainly temporal, nder w hich an action took place. (b) Ca sal c m,as,whereas,since,indicating that the main action proceeded from t he s bordinate one. (c) Concessive c m,whereas,altho gh,indicating that the main action was accompli shed in spite of that of the s bordinate cla se. I. C m ver appetit,milites ex hibernis movent,when spring approaches,soldie rs move o t of winter-q arters. II.(a) C m ver appeteret,Hannibal ex hibernis movit,as spring was approaching(sp ring approaching),Hannibal moved o t of winterq arters. (b) C m ver appetat,ex hibernis movend m est,as(since) spring is approaching ,we m st move o t of winter-q arters. (c) C m ver appeteret,tamen hosted ex hibernis non mover nt,whereas (altho g h) spring was approaching,nevertheless the enemy did not move o t of winter-q ar ters. 1 .Temporal C m. 580. C m,when,is sed with all the tenses of the Indicative to designate mere ly temporal relations. In the Principal cla se,a temporal adverb or temporal expression is freq ently e mployed,s ch as t m,t nc,then; n nc,now; dies,day;

temp s,time; iam,already; vix,scarcely, and the like. Anim s,nec c m adest nec c m discedit,apparet,C.,Cat.M.,22,80; the so l is not visible,either when it is present,or when it departs. Stomachor c m alior m non me digna in me confer nt r,C.,Planc.,14,35; I get fretted when other people's jokes that are not worthy of me are foistedlm on [Sex libres de re p blica] t m scripsim s c m g bernac la rei p blicae t enebam s, C.,Div.,ii.i,3; I wrote the six books abo t the State at the time when I held the helm of the State. Recordare temp s ill d c m pater C rio maerens iacebat in lecto, C.,Ph., ii.18,45; remember the time when C rio the father lay abed from grief. Long m ill d temp s c m non ero magis me movet q am hoc exig m, C.,Att. ,xii.18,1; that long time(to come),when I shall not exist,has more effect on me than this scant(present time).

[372 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.] Iam dil cescebat c m sign m cons l dedit,L.,xxxvi.24,6; by this time day was beginning to dawn,when the cons l gave the signal.(See 581.) Ideal Second Person with the S bj nctive : Pater,homin m immortalis est infamia,Etiam t m vivit q om esse credas mo rt am, PL.,Pers.,355; Father,immortal is the ill-fame of the world.It lives on e ven when yo think that it is dead. B t the presence of a temporal adverb does not mean necessarily that the c m cla se is merely temporal.

REMARKS.1.F it c m commonly follows the analogy of other characteristic relative s(631),and takes the S bj nctive : F it temp s c m(= f it c m) r ra colerent homines,VARRO,R.R.,iii.i,1;the re was a time when all mankind tilled fields = were co ntrymen. The Indic.is rare. 2.Memini c m,I remember the time when,takes the Indic.,b t a dire c m takes the S bjv.parallel with the participle :

A divi Metrodor m c m de iis ipsis reb s disp taret,C.,Or.,ii.90,365; I have heard Metrodor s disc ss(ing) these very matters. 3.Pec liar is the se of c m with Lapses of Time.Lapses of Time are treated as D esignations of Time in Acc sative or Ablative :

when yo

Memini c m mihi desipere videbare,C.,Fam.,vii.28,1; I remember the time seemed to me to show the worst possible taste.

M lti anni s nt c m(= m ltos annos) in aere meo est,C.,Fam,.,xv.14,1;(it is) many years(that) he has been(230) in my debt. Perm lti anni iam erant c m inter patricios magistrates trib nosq e n ll a certamina f erant,L.,ix.33,3; very many years had elapsed since there had been any str ggles between the patrician magistrates and the trib nes. Nond m cent m et decent anni s nt c m(= ex q o = abhinc annos) de pec ni is repet ndis lata lex est,C.,Off.,ii.21,75; it is not yet one h ndred and ten y ears since the law concerning extortion was proposed. NOTES.1.In PLAUTUS c m with the Indic.may be explicative, ca sal, concessive, ad versative.

peregre advenis,cena det r,B,536. gh) c lpa carent,tamen mal m met ont,Most.,859. ltro q om(whereas) ipsi insani nt,Men.,831.

The same holds tr e for TERENCE,except that the S bjv.is now making its appearan ce in cases where it can be neither potential,ideal,nor attracted,as Hec.,341 : non visam xorem Pamphili,q om in prox mo hic sit aegra ? Of co rse,this prevalence of the Indic.does not excl de the attraction into the S bjv.,nor does it excl de the reg lar potential se. 2.The explicative se dies o t,except where it is akin to the conditional;b t it always retains the Indicative.With Ca sal and Concessive-Adversative ses,the S bjv.is sed more and more in place of the Indicative. 3.In early Latin we find q oniam and q ando, sed sometimes with the force of q om.

In the case of q oniam several examples are cited from PLAUTUS,in most of which, however,the ca sal conception lies very close at hand;the temporal force seems t o have disappeared by the time of TERENCE,and only reappears in GELLIUS.The [TEMPORAL SENTENCES.373] temporal nsage of q ando is still the prevailing one in PLAUTUS,over seventy ins tances having been collected.Of these the majority are in the Present and F t re Spheres,in which the shift to the ca sal conception is very easy;many of them a re also iterative. In TERENCE the temporal sage of q ando has disappeared nless possibly in one p assage(Ad.,206),b t sporadic cases are fo nd later,even in CICERO. Q oniam hinc est profect r s peregre thensa r m demonstravit mihi,PL.,Tr in.,149. T m,q ando legatos Tyr m misim s,C.,Leg.Agr.ii.16,41.

Explicative: salvos q om (that) Ca sal : salvos q om(sinee) Concessive : [servi] q om(altho Adversative: insanire me ai nt,

advenis,ga deo,Most.,1128.

581.C m Invers m.When the two actions are independent,c m is sometimes sed with the one which seems to be logically the principal cla se,j st as in English. Iam non longi s bid i via aberant,c m d as venissc legiones cognosc nt, CAES.,B.G.,vi.7,2;they were now distant not more than two days' march,when they learned that two legions were come. Similar is the addition of an ill strative fact,often ca sal or adversative,by c m interea(interim),q idem,tamen,etc.,with the Indicative. 582.Explicative c m. When the actions of the two cla ses are coincident,c m is almost eq ivalent to i ts kindred relative q od,in that.

C m tacent,clamant,C.,Cat.,1.8,21;when (= in that) they are silent,they cry alo d. Dixi omnia c m hominem nominavi,PLIN.,Ep.,iv.22,4; I have said everythin g,in naming the man. 583.Conditional c m.C m with the F t re,F t re Perfect,or Universal Present,is o ften almost eq ivalent to si,if,with which it is sometimes interchanged. C m posces,posce Latine,J v.,xi.148; when(if) yo (shall) ask(for anythin g),ask in Latin. C m veniet contra,digito compesce labell m,J v.,1.160;when(if) he meets yo ,padlock yo r lip with yo r finger. 584.Iterative c m.C m in the sense of q otiens,as often as,takes the Tenses of I terative Action. Solet c m se p rgat in me conferre omnem c lpam,C.,Att.,ix.2 A,1; He is acc stomed,when he clears himself,to p t off all the blame on me. [Ager] c mm ltos annos req ievit beriores efferre fr ges solet, C.,Br., 4,16(567). C m palam ei s an li ad palmam converterat(Gyges) a n llo videbat r, C., Off.,iii.9,38(567). REMARK.The S bjv.is also fo nd(567,N.) : C m in i s d ci debitorem vidissent, ndiq e convolabant,L.,ii.27,8;whene ver they saw a debtor taken to co rt,they made it a r le to h rry together from all q arters. [374 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.] 2.Circ mstantial C m. 585.Historical c m.C m,when(as),is vised in narrative with the Imperfect S bj nc tive of contemporaneo s action,,with the Pl perfect S bj nctive of antecedent ac tion,to characterise the temporal circ mstances nder which an action took place .

Aiacem,h nc q om vides,ips m vides,PL.,Copt.,615;when yo e Ajax himself.

see him,yo

se

Zenonem c m Athenis essem a diebam freq enter,C.,N.D.,I.21,59; when I wa s(being) at Athens,I heard Zeno(lect re) freq ently. Athenienses c m stat erent t naves conscenderent,Cyrsil m q endam s ade ntem t in rbe manerent,lapidib s obr er nt,C.,Off.,iii.ii,48(546). C m Caesar Anconam occ pavisset, rbem reliq im s,C.,Finn.,xvi.12,2;when( as) Caesar had occ pied Ancona(Caesar having occ pied Ancona),I left the city. Attal s morit r altero et sept agesimo anno,c m q att or et q adraginta annos regnasset,L..xxxiii.21,1; Attal s died in his seventy-second year,having r eigned forty-fo r years. REMARK.The s bordinate cla se generally precedes.The circ mstantiality often app ears as ca sality,b t sometimes the exact shade cannot be disting ished.Owing to this implicit character,c m with the S bjv.is a close eq ivalent to the partici ple,and often serves to s pply its absence.Compare 611 with 631,2. NOTES.1.How closely allied the ideas of time and circ mstance are,in these const r ctions,is seen from s ch examples as this : C m varices secabant r C.Mario,dolebat,C.,T sc.,ii.15,35(time). Mari s c m secaret r, t s pra dixi,vet it,etc., C.,T sc.,ii.22,53(circ m stances). C m ad trib m Polliam vent m est,(date) et praeco c nctaret r(circ mstan ces) citare ips m censorem; Cita,inq it Nero,M.Llvi m,L.,xxix.37,8. 2.The se of temporal particles with the Pr.is necessarily limited to iterative or ca sal(adversative) relations.Hence there is no room for the circ mstantial c m with the S hjv.except so far as it is ca sal-adversative.F t.and F t.Pf .are fo nd chiefly in general or iterative relations.

3.By attraction similar to that with q od(541,N.3) and other relatives,c m dicer et,with an Inf.,is fo nd where diceret wo ld be more nat rally omitted or insert ed as ( t dicebat);so c m adsentire se diceret for c m adsentiret,L.,1.54,1. Similarly with c m ca sal : " saying,as he did," C.,Mil.,5,12. 586.Ca sal c m. C m,when,whereas,since,seeing that, with any tense of the S bj nctive,is sed to denote the reason,and occasionally the motive,of an action(580,N.1). Q ae c m ita sint,effect m est nihil esse mal m q od t rpe non sit, C.,F in.,iii.8,29;since these things are so,it is made o t(proved) that nothing is ba d that is not dishono rable. C m [Athenas] tamq am ad mercat ram bonar m arti m sis profect s,inanem redire t rpissinmni est,C.,Off.,iii.2,6; as(since) yo set o t for Athens as if to market for accomplishments,it wo ld be tterly disgracef l to ret rn empty(ha nded).

[Agesila s] c m ex Aegypto reverteret r decessit,N EP.,xvii.8,6;Agesila s died as he was ret rning from Egypt.

[TEMPORAL SENTENCES.375] Dolo erat p gnand m,c m par non esset armis,NEP.,xxiii 10,4;he had to fi ght by stratagem,as he(seeing that he) was not a match in arms. REMARKS.1.The characteristic nat re of the S bjv.with c m comes o t more clearly in the ca sal connection,owing to the parallel with tpote,q ippe,and the relat ive(626,N.). 2.The primary tenses are more common,in this connection,b t the historical tense s are ab ndant eno gh.With the latter the ca sal relation need never be emphasis ed. 587.Concessive and Adversative c m.Ca sal c m,whereas,becomes Concessive c m,wli ereas,altho gh,with the S bj nctive,when the ca se is not s fficient;the relatio n is often adversative,and there is no limitation as to tense. The temporal notion is still at work; whether the times are for or against an ac tion is a matter o tside of lang age(580,N.1). Nihil me adi vit c m posset,C.,Att.,ix.13,3;he gave me no assistance, al tho gh(at a time when) he had it in his power. C m primi ordines hosti m conciclissent,tamen acerrime reliq i resisteba nt, CAES.,B.G.,vii.62,4; altho gh the first ranks of the enemy had fallen(been c t to pieces),nevertheless the rest resisted most vigoro sly. Perire artem p tam s nisi apparet,c m desinat ars esse,si apparet, QUINT .,iv.2,127; we think that (o r) art is lost nless it shows,whereas it ceases to be art if it shows. REMARKS.1.To emphasise the adversative idea,tamen is often added in the principa l cla se. 2.Adversative c m non,whereas not,is often conveniently translated witho t; c m non Inferior f isset,C.,Off.,1.32,116;witho t being inferior. 588.C m - t m. 1.When c m,when,t m,then,have the same verb,the verb is p t in the Indicative. C m - t m then has the force of "both - and" especially,and a strengthening adve rb,s ch as

maxime,praecip e,is often added to the latter. (Pa sanias) consilia c m patriae t m sibi inimica capiebat ,NEP.,iv.3,3; Pa sanias conceived plans that were h rtf l both to his co ntry and especially to himself. [376 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.] 2.When they have different verbs,the verb with c m is s ally in the Indicative, b t may be in the S bj nctive,especially when the actions of the two verbs are n ot contemporary;this S bj nctive often has a concessive force. [Sisennae historia] c m facile omnes vincat s periores,t m indicat tamen q ant m absit a s mmo,C.,Br.,64,228; altho gh the history of Sisenna easily s r passes all former histories,yet it shows how far it is from the highest(mark).

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 589.In Conditional Sentences the cla se which contains the condition(s pposed ca se) is called the Prdtasis,that which contains the conseq ence is called the Ap odosis. Logically,Protasis is Premiss;and Apodosis,Concl sion.Grammatically,the Apodosis is the Principal,the Protasis the Dependent,cla se. 590.Sign of the Conditional.The common conditional particle is si,if. NOTES.1.Si is a locative case,literally,so,in those circ mstances(comp.si-c,so,a nd the English : " I wo ld by combat make her good,so were I a man." SHAKESPEARE ).Hence,conditional cla ses with si may be regarded as adverbs in the Abl.case,a nd are often act ally represented by the Abl.Absol te. Sic is fo nd as the correlative of si in the colloq ial lang age,as : sic scribes allq id,si vacabis(C.,Att.,xii.38,2); sic ignovisse p tato me tibi,si cenas liodie mec m(H.,Ep.,1.7,69). Instead of sic,its eq ivalent t m occ rs at all periods,being in the A g stan time restricted to forma l ses. Igit r is also fo nd as late as CICERO,who likewise ses ita.Other parti cles are post-classical. 2.The connection with the Ca sal Sentence is shown by si q idem,which in later L atin is almost = q oniam;see 595,R.5. 3.The temporal particles c m and q ando,when, and the locative bi, are also sed to indicate conditional relations in which the idea of Time or Spa ce is involved. 591.Negative of si.The negative of si is si non or nisi. (a) With si non,if not,the non negatives the single word; hence an opposing posi tive is expected,either in a preceding condition,or in the concl sion.Therefore, si non is the r le : 1 .When the positive of the same verb precedes. Si feceris,magnam habebe gratiam;si non feceris,ignoscam,C.,Fam.,v.19;if yo do it,I will be very gratef l to yo ; if yo do not,I will forgive(yo ). [CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.377] 2.When the Condition is concessive;in this case the principal cla se often conta ins an adversative particle. Si mihi bona re p blica fr i non lic erit,at carebo mala,C.,Mil.,34,93;i f I shall not be allowed to enjoy good government,I shall at least be rid of bad .

(b) With nisi, nless,the negative ni-refers to the principal cla se,which is th s denied,if the conditional cla se is accepted;hence :

1. Nisi adds an exception or restriction to the leading statement.Compare t he general se of nisi,except(R.2). Nisi molest mst,pa cis percontarier(130,6) volo ego ex te,PL.,R d.,120; if it is not disagreeable,I wish to ask yo a few q estions. So the form lae nisi fallor(ni fallor is fo nd first in OVID),nisi me omnia fall nt (C., Att.,viii.7,1),and the like. 2.Nisi is in favorite se after negatives. Parvi(= nihili) s nt foris arma nisi est consili m domi, C.,Off.,I.22,76 (411,R.2). [Non] possem vivere nisi in litteris viverem,C.,Fam.,ix.26,1;I co ld not live nless I lived in st dy. Memoria min it r nisi eam exerceas,C.,Cat.M.,7,21; memory wanes nless(e xcept) yo exercise it.(Si non exerceas,in case yo fail to exercise it.) So more often than si non,in asseverations. Peream nisi sollicit s s m,C.,Fam.,xv.19,4;may I die if I am not tro ble d.

Nisi C rio f isset,hodie te m scae comedissent,Cf.QUINT.,xi.3,129;

Si non f isset wo ld be eq ally correct. 2.Nisi is often sed after negative sentences or eq ivalents in the sign ification of b t,except,besides,only : Inspice q id portem;nihil hic nisi triste videbis,Ov.,Tr.,iii.i,9; exami ne what I am bringing;yo will see nothing here except(what is) sad. Fals s honor i vat et mendax infamia terret,q em nisi mendos m et medica nd m? H.,Ep.,1.16,39;"false hono r charms and lying slander scares," whom b t th e fa lty and the fit for physic ? So nisi si,except in case,

with a following verb;occasional in early Latin,more common later,b t not in CAE S.(B.G.,1.31,14,is disp ted),SALL.,VERG.,HOR. Nisi t,except on condition that,is post-classical. Necesse est Casilinenses se dedere Hannibali;nisi si mal nt fame perire, C.,Inv.,ii.57,171; the people of Casilin m m st needs s rrender to Hannibal; nl ess(except in case) they prefer to perish by h nger. 3.Nisi q od introd ces an act al limitation with the exception,that (525 ,2,N.2);so

if it had not been for C rio,the flies wo ld have eaten yo

REMARKS.1.Sometimes the difference is

nessential :

p this day.

praeterq am q od;nisi t(e.g.C.,Imp.,23,67). [378 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.] Nihil acciderat [Polycrati] q od nollet nisi q od an l m q o delectabat r in mari abiecerat,C.,Fin,,v.30,92;nothing had happened to Polycrates that he c o ld not have wished,except that he had thrown into the sea a ring in which he t ook delight(= a favorite ring). Nihil peccat nisi q od nihil peccat,PLIN.,Ep.,ix.26,1; he makes no bl nd er except that he makes no bl nder(" fa ltily fa ltless "). 4.Nisi forte(fo nd very often in CICERO,very rarely earlier), nless,perhaps, nisi vero(pec liar to CICERO), nless,indeed,with the Indic.,either limit a previo s statement,or make an ironical concession : Nemo fere saltat sobri s nisi forte insanit,C.,M r.,6,13; there is scarc e any one that dances(when) sober, nless perhaps he is cracked. Plen m for m est eor m homin m,...nisi vero pa cos f isse arbitramini,C. ,S ll.,9,28; the for m is f ll of those men; nless,indeed,yo think they were(b t) few.

NOTES.1.Nisi is sometimes strengthened by tamen,b t,yet. Nisi etiam hic opperiar tamen pa lisper,PL.,A l.,805;Cf.C.,Att.,v.14,3. Even witho t tamen it is adversative in colloq ial Latin,especially after nescio . 2.Ni is fo nd mostly in early Latin and the poets,and in legal form las and coll oq ial phrases.It is rare in CICERO,and never sed in CAESAR. Peream ni piscem p tavi esse,VARRO,S.R.,iii.3,9;may I die if I did not t hink it was a fish. 3.Nisi forte is fo nd occasionally with the S bjv.from APULBIUS on. 592.Two Conditions excl ding each the other.When two conditions excl de each the other,si is sed for the first; sin,if not(b t if),for the second. Sin is f rther strengthened by a tem,vero(rare),b t; min s,less(not); se c s(rare),otherwise; aliter,else. Mercat ra,si tennis est,sordida p tanda est;sin magna et copiosa,non est admod m vit peranda,C.,Off.,I.42,151; mercantile b siness,if it is petty,is to be considered dirty(work); if(it is) not(petty,b t) great and ab ndant(= cond ct ed on a large scale),it is not to be fo nd fa lt with m ch. REMARK.If the verb or predicate is to be s pplied from the context,si min s,if l ess(not),sin min s,sin aliter,if otherwise,are commonly sed,rarely si non : Ed c tec m omnes t os;si min s,q am pl rimos,C.,Cat.,I.5,10; take o t wi th yo all yo r(followers);if not,as many as possible. Odero si potero;si non,invit s amabo,Ov.,Am.,iii.ii,35(242,R.2). NOTE.M ch less common are simple si, or

si strengthened by non,nihil,n ll s,min s,or by a tem,vero; or sed si,at si(COL.),si contra(HOR.,PLIN.). Sin may also be followed by non,b t commonly only when one or more words intervene. Poma cr da si s nt,vix evell nt r;si mattira,decid nt,C.,Cat.M.,19,71; i f fr it is green it can hardly be pl cked,if ripe it falls(of itself)(602 N.2) [CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.379] 593.Other Forms of the Protasis.1.The Protasis may be expressed by a Relative. Q i videret, rbem captam diceret,C.,Verr.,iv.23,52; whoso had seen it,ha d said that the city was taken. Miraret r q i t m cerneret,L.,xxxiv.9,4(258). 2.The Protasis may be contained in a Participle. Si latet ars,prodest;affert deprensa p dorem,Ov.,A.A.,ii.313;art,if conc ealed,does good;detected,it brings shame. Maximas virt tes iacere omnes necesse est vol ptate dominante, C.,Fin.,i i.35,117;all the greatest virt es m st necessarily lie prostrate,if the pleas re (of the senses) is mistress. Nihil [potest] evenire nisi ca sa antecedente,C.,Fat.,15,34; nothing can happen, nless a ca se precede. 3.The Protasis may be involved in a modifier. Fecer nt id servi Milonis q od s os q isq e servos in tali re facere vol isset, C.,Mil.,10,29;the servants of Milo did what each man wo ld have wished h is servants to do in s ch case(si q id tale accidisset). At bene non poterat sine p ro pectore vivi,LUCR.,v.18;b t there co ld be no good living witho t a clean heart(nisi p r m pect s esset).

Neq e enim materiam ipsam(censebant) cohaerere pot isse si n lla vi cont ineret r,neq e vim sine aliq a materia,C.,Ac.,1.6,24.( ya 4.The Protasis may be expressed by an Interrogative,or,what is more common,by an Imperative or eq ivalent. Tristis es ? indignor q od s m tibi ca sa doloris,Ov.,Tr.,iv.3,33(542). Cedit amor reb s : res age,t t s eris,Ov.,Rem.Am.,144;love yields() to b s iness;be b sy(if yo pl nge into b siness),yo will be safe. Imm ta(verbOr m collocationem),perierit tota res,C.,Or.,70,232(244,R.4).

Classification of Conditional Sentences. 594.Conditional sentences may be divided into three classes,according to the cha racter of the Protasis : I.Logical Conditional Sentences : si,with the Indicative.

II.Ideal Conditional Sentences : si,chiefly with Present and Perfect S bj nctive . III.Unreal Conditional Sentences : si,with Imperfect and Pl perfect S bj nctive. NOTES.1.In some grammars of Greek and Latin,conditional sentences,and sentences involving conditional relations,have been divided into partic lar and general.Wh ether a condition be partic lar or general depends simply on the character of th e Apodosis.Any form of the Conditional Sentence may be general,if it implies a r le of action.The forme for Iterative action have been given(566,567). [380 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.] 2.Conditional Sentences with the S bj nctive(Ideal and Unreal) are best ndersto od by comparing the forms of the Ideal and Unreal wish which have the same mood and the same tenses. The Unreal wish of the Past is the Pl pf ., that of the Present is the Impf.S bj nctive. The Ideal wish is the Pr.and Pf.S bj nctive. The same temporal relations appear in the conditional. I.LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 595.The Logical Conditional Sentence simply states the elements in q estion,acco rding to the form la : if this is so,then that is so;if this is not so,then that is not so. It may be compared with the Indicative Q estion. The Protasis is in the Indicative : the Apodosis is generally in the Indicative; b t in f t re relations any eq ivalent of the F t re(S bj nctive,Imperative) may be sed. PROTASIS.

APODOSIS. erras, yo are going wrong. errabas, yo were going wrong, errasti, yo went(have gone) wrong. errabis, yo will(be) go(ing) wrong(234,R

Si id credideris, erraveris, If yo (shall have) believe(d) that,yo will have gone(will go) wrong. Si q id credidisti, If yo have believed anything (= when yo believe anything), yo

erras, go wrong. Comp.569.

Si id credes, If yo (shall) believe that, .).

Si id credidisti, If yo (have) believed that,

Si id credebas, If yo believed that,

Si id credis, If yo believe that,

Si q id credideras, errabas, If yo had believed anything ( when yo believed anything), yo went wrong. Si spirit m d cit,vivit,C.,Inv.,I.46,86; if he is drawing(his)breath (br eathing) he is living. Parvi s nt foris arma nisi est consili m domi,C.,Off.,1.22,76(411,R.2). Si occidi,recte feci;sed non occidi,QUINT.,iv.5,13;if I killed him,I did right;b t I did not kill him. [Nat ram] si seq em r d cem,n mq am aberrabim s,C.,Off.,I.28,100; if we (shall) follow nat re(as o r) g ide,we shall never go astray. [Improbos ] si me s cons lat s s st lerit,m lta saec la propagarit rei p blicae C.,Cat.,ii.5,11; if my cons lship shall have done away with the destr ct ives,it will have added many ages to the life of the State. Si pes condol it,si dens,ferre non poss m s, C.,T sc.,ii.22,52(567). Stomachabat r senex,si q id asperi s dixeram,C.,N.D.,1.33,93(567). Vivam,si vivet;si cadet illa,cadam,PROP.,ii.(iii.) 28(25),42(8); let me live,if she lives; if she falls,let me fall. N nc si forte potes,sed non potes,optima coni nx,finitis ga de tot mihi morte malis,Ov.,Tr.iii.3,55; now,if haply yo can,b t yo cannot,noble wife,rejo ice that so many evils have been finished for me by death. [CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.381] Flectere si neq eo s peros,Acheronta movebo,V.,A.,vii.312; if I can't be nd the gods above,I'll ro se(all) hell below. Si tot exempla virt tis non movent,nihil mq am movebit;si tanta clades vilem vitam non fecit,n lla faciet,L.,xxii.60,14; if so many examples of valo r stir yo not,nothing will ever do it; if so great a disaster has not made life c heap,none(ever) will.

Peream male,si non optim m erat,H.,S.,ii.i,6;may I die the death if it w as not best. Si volebas participari,a ferres(= a ferre debebas) dimidi m dom m, PL.,T r c.,748; if yo wished to share in it,yo sho ld have taken the half home. Respiraro si te videro,C.,Att.,ii.24,5; I shall breathe again,if I shall have seen yo . REMARKS.1.After a verb of Saying or Thinking(Oratio Obliq a),the Protasis m st b e p t in the S bjv.,according to the r le. (Si id credis,erras.) rrare. (Si id credes,errabis.) Dico,te,si id credas,errare. Dixi,te,si id crederes,e Dico,te,si id credas,errat r m e

Desines timere,si sperare desieris,SEN.,E.M.,1.5,7;yo r,if yo (shall have) cease(d) to hope.

will cease to fea

sse. Dixi,te,si id crederes,e rrat r m esse. (Si id credidisti,errastl.) s,errasse. For examples,see Oratio Obliq a,657. 2.The S bjv.is sed by Attraction : [Araneolae] rete tex nt t si q id inhaeserit confici nt, C.,N.D.,ii.48, 123(567).(Si q id inhaesit confici nt.) 3.The Ideal Second Person takes the S bjv.in connection with the Universal Prese nt : (Senect s) plena est vol ptatis si illa scias ti,SEN.,E.M.,12,4; old ag e is f ll of pleas re if yo know(if one knows) how to enjoy it. Memoria min it r nisi eam exerceas,C.,Cat.M.,7,21(591,b.2). 4.Sive-sive(se se ) almost invariably takes the Logical form.(496,2.) The S bjv .is occasionally sed by Attraction or with the Ideal Second Person. Se vicit,ferociter instat victis;se vict s est,insta rat c m victorib s certamen,L.,xxvii.14,1;if he vanq ishes(567),he presses the vanq ished f rio s ly;if he is vanq ished,he renews the,str ggle,with the vanq ishers. 5. Siq idem,as giving the basis for a concl sion,often approaches the ca sa l sense(590,N.2).In this case the Apodosis precedes. Molesta veritas,siq idem ex ea nascit r odi m,C.,Lael.,24,89; tr th is b rdensome,if indeed(since) hatred arises from it. Si modo,if only,serves to limit the preceding statement.

6.

[382 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.] A deo tant m rationem habem s,si modo habem s.C.,N.D.,iii.28,71;all that we have from God is(bare) reason,if only we have it. Si vero when th s sed is ironical(C.,Ph.,viii.8,24).

Si tamen seems to be post-classical. NOTES.1.Phraseological are si q aeris(q aerim s) in a sense approaching that of profecto(C.,Off.,iii.20,80;T sc.,iii.29,73 ) : Si dis placet,if the gods will, often ironical(Cf.TER.,E n.,919;C.,Fin.,ii.10,31).

Dico,te,si id credideris,errasse. Dixi,te,si id credidisse

Si forte,peradvent re(C.,Or.,iii.12,47;Mil.,38,104 ). 2.It will be observed that the tense involved depends in each member pon the se nse.B t for this very reason certain combinations wo ld be ncommon.Th s Pr. - Impf.and F t.- Pr.are rare; Pr.- F t.is more common in ante-classical and post-classical Latin than F t.- F t., sed by anticipation.CICERO prefers F t.F t.CICERO also ses freq also fo nd elsewhere,b t rarely. CICERO,and is never common;also mostly fo nd in ante-classical and post-classical L for F t.Pf.,is not nfreq ent in early Latin.So C.,

(Br t s) si conservat s erit,vicim s(237); Cf.SEN.,Ben.,iii.62,145. PL.,Poen.,671,shows s o r only example of Pr.- F t.Pf .: Rex s m,si ego ill m ad me adiexero. II.IDEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 596.The Ideal Conditional Sentence represents the matter as still in s spense.Th e s pposition is more or less fancif i,and no real test is to be applied.There i s often a wish for or against.The point of view is s ally the Present. 1.The Protasis is p t in the Present S bj nctive for contin ed action,and in the Perfect S bj nctive for completion or attainment. The Apodosis is in the Present or Perfect S bj nctive.The Imperative and F t re Indicative or eq ivalents are often fo nd.The Universal Present is freq ently s ed,especially in combination with the Ideal Second Person(595,R.3;663,2). On the difference between S bj nctive and F t re,see 257. PROTASIS. APODOSIS. Si id credas, erres, If yo sho ld(were to) believe that, yo wo redas, s, If yo sho ld(were to) believe that, yo wo ris, 1.If yo sho ld(prove to) have believed that(Perfect;Action Past or F t re),yo 2.If yo sho ld(come to) believe that(Aor.; Action F t re), d be going wrong.Si id credideris, erraveris(rare), If yo (sho ld have) believe(d) that, yo wo [CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.383] Si vicin s t s eq m meliorem habeat q am t s est,t mne eq m malis a

ld be going wrong.Si id c erraveri ld go wrong.Si id credide erres, wo ld be going wrong.

yo wo l ld(have) go(ne) wrong.

F t.Pf .- F t.Pf .,which is Pf .- F t.is fo nd first in Impf.- Impf.Pl pf.- Impf.is atin.The Pf.,by anticipation Fam.,xii.6,2 :

the Pres.being ently

n illi s? C.,Inv.,1.31,52;if yo r neighbo r(were to) have a better horse than yo rs is,wo ld yo prefer yo r horse or his?

Hanc viam si asperam esse negem,mentiar,C.,Sest.,46,100;if I sho ld say that this way is not ro gh,I sho ld lie. Si n nc me s spendam,meam operam l serim,et meis inimicis vol ptatem cre averim,PL.,Cas.,424; sho ld I hang myself now,I sho ld(thereby)(have) fool(ed) m y work away,and give(n) to my enemies a charming treat. Ciceroni nemo d centes n nc dederit n mmos nisi f lserit an l s ingens,J v.,vii.139; no one wo ld give Cicero nowadays two h ndred two-pences nless a h ge ring glittered(on his hand).

Si q is f rioso praecepta det,erit ipso q em monebit,insanior, SEN.,E.M. ,94,17; if one sho ld give advice to a madman,he will be more o t of his mind th an the very man whom he advises. Si valeant homines,ars t a,Phoebe,iacet,Ov.,Tr.,iv.3,78; sho ld men keep well,yo r art,Phoeb s,is na ght. Otia si tollas,periere C pidinis arc s,Ov.,Rem.Am.,139(204,N.6). (Senect s) est plena vol ptatis,si illa scias ti,SEN.,E.M.,12,4(595,R.3 ). Memoria min it r nisi eam exerceas,C.,Cat.M.,7,21(591,b.2). N lla est exc satio peccati,si amici ca sa peccaveris,C.,Lael.,ii,37; it is no exc se for a sin to have sinned for the sake of a friend. 2.The Point of View may be the Past.In that case the Protasis is fo nd in the Im perfect,very rarely the Pl perfect S bj nctive,and the Apodosis has correspondin g forms.This sage,however,is rare,inasm ch as it coincides in form with the Unr eal Condition,from which,it is disting ishable only by a caref l st dy of the co ntext.When fo nd with indefinite persons,the constr ction is the Potential of th e Past. The idea of Partial Obliq ity freq ently enters,in which case si may often be tr anslated,in case that. Q od s non veniebat de eo si q is legem constit ent non tam prohibere videret r q am admonere,C.,T ll.,4,9; if one sho ld make a law abo t that which was not c stomary,he wo ld seem not so m ch to prevent as to warn.(Present : si q is constit at,videat r.)

[384 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.]

Si Alfen s t m i dici m accipere vellet,deniq e omnia cere vol isset,q id ageres ? C.,Q inct.,26,83;in case Alfen s o ndertake the trial,and sho ld have been willing afterwards req ired,what were yo to do ?(See the whole passage Present .vol erit,agas.)

q ae post lates fa was willing then t to do all that yo : si n nc velit,..

Si gladi m q is ap d te sana mente depos erit,repetat insaniens,reddere peccat m sit,offici m non reddere,C.,Off.,iii.25,95;if a man in so nd mind were to deposit(to have deposited) a sword with yo ,(and) reclaim it(when) mad,it wo ld be wrong to ret rn it,right not to ret rn it.

Si trib ni me tri mphare prohiberent,F ri m et Aemili m testes citat r s f i, L.,xxxviii.47; sho ld the trib nes prevent me from tri mphing,I was going to s mmon F ri s and Aemili s as witnesses. Q id faceret ? si vivere vellet,Seian s rogand s erat, SEN.,Cons.Marc.,2 2,6;what was he to do ? if he wished to live Sejan s was(the man) to be asked.Se e TAC.,Ann.,iii.13.

(Est si cedas.) Si l x riae temperaret,avaritiam non timeres, TAC.,H.,ii .62;if he were to control his love of pleas re,yo sho ld not have feared avaric e.(Si temperet,non timeas.)

C r igit r et Camill s doleret,si haec ...event ra p taret ? et ego dole am si...p tem? C.,T sc.,I.37,90.(Present: doleat si p tet.)(y N REMARKS.1.The Ideal is not controlled by impossibility or improbability,and the lively fancy of the Roman often employs the Ideal where we sho ld expect the Unr eal.(Comp.256,N.2.) This is more common in early Latin. T si hic sis,aliter sentias,TER.,And.,310; if yo were I(p t yo rself i n my place),yo wo ld think differently. Haec si tec m patria loq at r,nonne impetrare debeat ? C.,Cat.,I.8,19; i f yo r co ntry sho ld(were to) speak th s with yo ,o ght she not to get(what she wants) ? So C.,Fin.,iv.22,61. 2.Sometimes the conception shifts in the co rse of a long sentence : Si reviviscant et tec m loq ant r--q id talib s viris responderes ? C., Fin.,iv.22,61: if they sho ld come to life again,and speak with yo -- what answ er wo ld yo make to s ch men ? 3.When non poss m is followed by nisi(si non),the Protasis has the Ideal of the Past,after the past tense,and may have the ideal of the Present after a primary tense. Neq e m nitiones Caesaris prohibere poterat,nisi proelio decertare velle t,CAES.,B.C.,iii.44.See MADVIG on C.,Fin.,iii.21,70. 4.In comparing Ideal and Unreal Conditionals,excl de f t re verbs s ch as posse,velle,etc. The f t re sense of s ch Unreal Conditionals comes from the a xiliary. 5.In Oratio Obliq a the difference between Ideal and Logical F t re is necessari ly effaced,so far as the mood is concerned.(656.) III.UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 597.The Unreal Conditional sentence is sed of that which is Unf lfilled or Impo ssible,and is expressed by the Imperfect S bj nctive for contin ed action genera lly,in opposition to the Present();and by the Pl perfect S bj nctive niformly ition to the Past. [CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.385]

Erat Q incti s,si cederes,placabilis,L.,xxxvi.32,5;Q incti s was,if yo yielded to him,(s re to be) placable.

The notion of Impossibility comes from the irreversible character of the Past Te nse.Compare the Periphrastic Conj g.Perfect and Imperfect.Any action that is dec ided is considered Past(compare C.,Off.,ii.21,75).(See 277,3,N.) PROTASIS. APODOSIS. Si id crederes, errares, If yo believed(were believing) that,[yo do not,] yo wo ld be going wrong. Si id credidisses, eravisses, If yo had believed that,[yo did not,] g.

Sapientia non expeteret r,si nihil efficeret,C.,Fin.,1.13,43;wisdom wo l d not be so ght after,if it did no practical good. Caederem te,nisi irascerer,SEN.,Ira,1.15,3; I sho ld flog yo ,if I were not getting angry. Si ibi te esse scissem,ad te ipse venissem,C.,Fin.,1.8;if I had known yo were there,I sho ld have come to yo myself.

Hectora q is nosset,felix si Troia f isset ? Ov.,Tr.,iv.3,75;who wo ld k now(of) Hector,if Troy had been happy ? Nisi ante Roma profect s esses,n nc eam certe relinq eres,C.,Fam.,vii.ii ,1; if yo had not departed from Rome before,yo wo ld certainly leave it now. Ego nisi peperissem,Roma non opp gnaret r;nisi fili m haberem,libera in libera patria mort a essem,L.,ii.40,8;had I not become a mother,Rome wo ld not b e besieged; had I not a son,I sho ld have died a free woman in a free land. REMARKS.1.The Impf.S bjv.is sometimes sed in opposition to contin ance from a p oint in the Past into the Present.This is necessarily the case when the Protasis is in the Impf.,and the Apodosis in the Pl pf.,except when the Impf.denotes opp osition to a general statement,which holds good both for Past and for Present : Non tam facile opes Carthaginis tantae concidissent,nisi Sicilia classib s nostris pateret,Cf.C.,Verr.,ii.i,3;the great reso rces of Carthage(Carthage w ith her great reso rces) wo ld not have fallen so readily,if Sicily had not been (as it still contin es to be) open to o r fleets. Si p dorem haberes, ltimam mihi pensionem remisisses,SEN.,E.M.,29,10;if yo had(= yo had not,as yo have not) any delicacy,yo wo ld have let me off fr om the last payment, Memoriam ipsam c m voce perdidissem s,si tam in nostra potestate esset o blivisci q am tacere,TAC.,Agr.,2,4; we sho ld have lost memory itself,together w ith tterance,if it were as m ch in o r power to forget as to keep silent. The Impf.in both members,referring to the Past,always admits of another explanat ion than that of the Unreal;th s we have a case of Representation(654,N.) in

yo wo ld have gone wron

Protogenes si Ialys m ill m s m caeno oblit m videret,magn m,credo,acci peret dolorem,C.,Att.,ii.21,4; if Protogenes co ld see that famo s Ialys s of hi s besmeared with m d,he wo ld feel a mighty pang.See PL.,A l,742. [386 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.] 2.In Unreal Conditions,after a negative Protasis,the Apodosis is sometimes expre ssed by the Impf.Indic.,when the action is represented as interr pted(233); by t he Pl pf.and Hist.Pf.,when the concl sion is confidently anticipated(254,R.3). Labebar longi s,nisi me retin issem,C.,Leg.,1.19,52(254,R.3). This sage after a positive is cited first in the post-A g stan writers.Cases li ke C.,Verr.,v.42,129; L.,xxii.28,13,do not belong here. Omnino s pervac a erat doctrina,si nat ra s fficeret,QUINT.,ii.8,8 (254,R.3). Peract m erat bell m,si Pompei m Br ndisii opprimere pot isset, FLOR.,ii.13,19;t he war was(had been) finished,if he had been able to cr sh Pompey at Br nd si m. The Impf.Indic.is sometimes fo nd in the Protasis : Ipsam tibi epistolam misissem,nisi(v.l.,sed) tam s bito fratris p er proficisceb at r,C.,Att.,viii.I,2; I sho ld have sent yo the letter itself,if my brother's servant was not starting so s ddenly. 3.(a) The Indicative is the reg lar constr ction in the Apodosis with verbs whic h signify Possibility or Power,Obligation or Necessity - so with the active and passive Periphrastic vix,paene,scarcely,hardly,and the like. In many cases it is diffic lt to disting ish this sage from that of the Ideal(5 96,2). Cons l esse q i pot i,nisi e m vitae c rs m ten issem ? C.,Rep.,1.6,10;h ow co ld I have been cons l,if I had not kept that co rse of life ? Antoni gladios pot it contemnere,si sic omnia dixisset,J v.,x.123;he mig ht have despised Antony's swords,if he had th s(= nskillf lly like his poem) sai d all(that he did say). Emendat r s,si lic isset,eram,Ov.,Tr.,I.7,40;I sho ld have removed the f a lts,if I had been free(to do it). Pons iter paene hostib s dedit(paene dedit = dabat = dat ras erat),ni n s vir f isset,L.,ii.10,2; the bridge well nigh gave a passage to the enemy,had it not been for one man.

(b) With the Indic.the Possibility and the rest are stated absol tely; when the S bjv.is sed the Possibility and the rest are conditioned as in any other Unrea l sentence. Compare q id facere pot issem,nisi t m cons l f issem, with cons l esse q i pot i,nisi e m vitae c rs m ten issem,C.,Rep.,1.6,10.

Q i si f isset meliore fort na,fortasse a sterior et gravior esse pot is set,C.,Pis.,29,71. 4.In Oratio Obliq a the Protasis is nchanged;the Apodosis is formed by the Peri phrastic Pr.and Pf.Inf.(149),for the Active,f t r m(fore) t,f t r m f isse t f or passive and S pineless verbs.

A is very rare;A,theoretical.For the long form,B,the simple [CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.387] Perfect Infinitive is fo nd.Examples,see 659,R.In B,f isse is omitted occasional ly in later Latin;TAC.,Ann.,1.33,etc. 5.(a) When the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional is mad,e to depend on a sentenc e which req ires the S bjv.,the Pl pf.is t rned into the Periphrastic Pf.S bjv.; the Impf.form is nchanged. Non d bito, } q in,si id crederes,errares, I do not do bt, }that,if yo believed that,yo wo ld be going wr ong. Non d bitabam, f eris, I did not do bt, d have gone wrong.

Honest m tale est t,vel si ignorarent id homines,esset la dabile, Cf.C. ,Fin.,ii.15,49; virt e is a thing to deserve praise,even if men did not know it. Ea res tant m t m lt m ac f gam praeb it t nisi castra P nica extra rb em f issent,eff s ra se omnis pavida m ltit do f erit,L.,xxvi.10,1;that matter c a sed so m ch t m lt and flight(= so wild a panic),that had not the P nic camp b een o tside the city the whole,frightened m ltit de,wo ld have po red forth. Nec d bi m erat q in,si tam pa ci sim l obire omnia possent,terga dat ri hostes f erint,L.,iv.38,5;there was no do bt that,if it had been possible for s o small a n mber to manage everything at the same time,the enemy wo ld have t rn ed their backs. Dic q idnam fact r s f eris,si eo tempore censor f isses ? L.,ix.33,7;te ll(me) what yo wo ld have done,if yo had been censor at that time? See C.,Pis. ,7,14. (b) The Periphrastic Pl pf.S bjv.occ rs rarely,and then only in the Dependent In terrogative.The only examples cited are from LIVY. S bibat cogitatio anim m,q onam modo tolerabilis f t ra Etr ria f isset si q id in Samnio adversi evenisset;L.,x.45,3. (c) Pot i(254,R.i) commonly becomes pot erim,and f i with the Periphrastic passi ve in -d s becomes f erim,after all tenses. Ha d d bi m f it q in,nisi ea mora intervenisset,castra eo die P nica ca pi pot erint,L.,xxiv.42,3; there was no do bt that,had not that delay interfered

} that,if yo

had believed that,yo wo l

q in,si id credidisses,errat r s

A.Dico(dixi),te,si B.Dico(dixi),te,si A.Dico(dixi),si id B.Dico(dixi),si id

id crederes,errat r m esse. id credidisses,errat r m f isse. crederes,fore t decipereris. credidisses,f t r m f isse t decipereris.

,the P nic camp co ld have been taken on that day. Q ae (res) s a sponte nefaria est t etiamsi lex non esset,magnopere vit anda f erit,C.,Verr.,1.42,108.

Id ille si rep diasset,d bitatis q in ei vis esset allata? C.,Sest.,29,6 2;if he had rejected that,do yo do bt that force wo ld have been bro ght(to bea r) on him ? The active form is rarely nchanged(L.,ir.33,9).In the absence of the Periphrast ic tense the Inf.with pot erim is often a s fficient s bstit te; see L.,xxxii.28 ,6. NOTE.In PLAUTUS and TERENCE,absq e with the Abl.and esset(foret) ia fo nd a few times instead of nisi(si non) with Nom.,and esset(f isset) in the sense if it we re not(had not been) for. Nam absq e te esset,hodie n mq am ad solem occas m viverem, PL.,Men.,102 2.Cf.Liv.,ii.10,2(R.3,above). [388 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.] INCOMPLETE CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 598.Omission of the Conditional Sign.Occasionally the members of a Conditional s entence are p t side by side witho t a Conditional sign. An ille mihi(351) liber,c i m lier imperat ? poscit,dand m est;vocat,ven iend m est;eicit,abe nd m; minat r,extimescend m,C.,Parad.,5,2; or is he free(te ll) me,to whom a woman gives orders ? she asks,he m st give;she calls,he m st co me;she t rns o t(of door),he m st go;she threatens,he m st be frightened.

Dedisses h ic animo par corp s,fecisset q od optabat,PLIN.,Ep.,1.12,8; h ad yo given him a body that was a match for his spirit,he wo ld have accomplish ed what he desired. 599.Omission of the Verb of the Protasis.When the verb of the Protasis is omitte d,either the precise form or the general idea of the verb is to be s pplied from the Apodosis. Si q isq am(= si q isq am f it),Cato sapiens f it,Cf.C.,LaeL,2,9; if any one was wise,Cato was. Ed c tec m omnes t os;si min s,q am pl rimos,C.,Cat.,1.5,10(592,R.). 600.Total Omission of the Protasis.1.The Protasis is often contained in a partic iple or involved in the context; for examples see 593,2 and 3. 2.The Potential S bj nctive is sometimes mechanically explained by the omission of an indefinite Protasis(257,N.2). Nimio pl s q am velim [Volscor m] ingenia s nt mobilia,L.,ii.37,4; the d ispositions of the Volscians are(too) m ch more nstable than I sho ld like. T am mihi dari vellem eloq entiam.C.,N.D.,ii.59,147; I co ld wish to hav e yo r eloq ence given me.

Un m cognoris,omnis noris,TER.,Ph.,265; yo

know one,yo know all.

(d) The passive Conditional is

nchanged :

Tam felix esses q am formosissima vellem,Ov.,Am.,1.8,27(302).(Utinam ess es !) 601.Omission and Invol tion of the Apodosis.The Apodosis is omitted in Wishes(26 1),and implied after verbs and phrases denoting Trial(460,2).It is often involve d in Oratio Obliq a,and sometimes consists in the general notion of Res lt,Ascer tainment,or the like. Si ver m exc tias,facies non xor amat r,J v.,vi.143; if yo were to get o t the tr th(yo wo ld find that)it is the face,not the wife,that [CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.389] is loved.(I g rtha) timebat iram(=ne irasceret r) senat s,ni par isset legatis,S .,I g.,25,7;I g rtha was afraid of the anger of the senate (that the senate wo l d get angry) in case he did not(sho ld not have) obey(ed) the legates. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES OF COMPARISON. 602.The Apodosis is omitted in comparisons with t si, vel t si, ac si, q am si(rare), tamq am si, q asi, or simply vel t and tamq am,as if. The verb is to be s pplied from the Protasis,as is common in correlative sentenc es.The Mood is the S bj nctive. The tenses follow the r le of seq ence,rather than the ordinary se of the condi tional.In English,the translation implies the nreality of the comparison. Noli timere q asi [=q am timeas si] assem elephanto des,QUINT.,VI.3,59; don't be afraid,as if yo were giving a penny to an elephant. Parvi primo ort sic iacent tamq am [= iaceant si] omnino sine animo sin t, C.,Fin.,v.15,42;babies,when first born,lie(there),as if they had no mind at a ll. Hic est obstand m,milites,vel t si ante Romana moenia p gnem s,L.,xxi.41 ,15; here(is where) we m st oppose them,soldiers,as if we were fighting before t he walls of Rome(vel t obstem s,si p gnem s,as we wo ld oppose them,if we were t o fight). Me i vat,vel t ipse in parte laboris ac peric li f erim,ad finem belli P nici pervenisse,L.,xxxi.i;I am delighted to have reached the end of the P nic w ar,as if I had shared in the toil and danger(of it).

Tant s patres met s cepit vel t si iam ad portas hostis esset,L.,xxi.16, 2;a great fear took hold of the senators,as if the enemy were already at their g ates. Deleta(est) A son m gens perinde ac si internecive bello certasset,L.,ix. 25,9; the A sonian race was blotted o t,j st as if it had engaged in an internec

ine war(war to the knife). REMARKS.1.Occasionally the seq ence is violated o t of regard to the Conditional : Massilienses in eo honore a dim s ap d [Romanes] esse ac si medi m mbil ic m Graeciae incolerent,L.,xxxvii.54,21; we hear that the people of Marseilles are in as high hono r with the Romans as if they inhabited the mid-navel(= the h eart) of Greece. Ei s negoti m sic velim s scipias, t si esset res mea,C.,Fam.,ii.14,1;I wish yo wo ld ndertake his b siness j st as if it were my affair. 2.The principal cla se often contains correlatives,as : ita, sic, perinde, proinde, similiter, non(ha d) sec s,etc.

[390 CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.] Here the verbs with both cla ses are apt to be the same,in which case the verb w ith q asi or tamq am is s ally omitted in model prose.

Q asi poma ex arborib s,cr da si s nt,vix evell nt r,sic vitam ad lescen tib s vis a fert,C.,Cat.M.,19,71.y a

Mors est q aedam q asi migratio comm tatioq e vitae,Cf.C.,T sc.,1.12,27; death is as it were a shifting of life's q arters. 3.As in the ordinary Conditional sentence,so in the Comparative sentence,the Pro tasis may be expressed by a participle : Galli laeti t explorata victoria ad castra Romanor m perg nt, Cf.CAES., B.G.,iii.18,8;the Ga ls in their joy,as if(then-) victory had been f lly ascerta ined,proceeded to the camp of the Romans. Antioch s sec r s de bello Romano erat tamq am non transit ris in Asiam Romanis, L.,xxxvi.41,1;Antioch s was as nconcerned abo t the war with Borne as if the Romans did not intend to cross over into Asia Minor. 4.In CELSUS,QUINTILIAN,JUVENAL,FLINT MIN.,and especially in TACITUS and SUETONIU S,we find

to indicate an ass med reason,in imitation of the similar Greek se of is with t he participle,and occasionally where we might have expected the Acc.and Infiniti ve. Pridem invis s tamq am pl s q am civilia agitaret,TAC.,Ann.,1.12,6; long misliked as(in Tiberi s'j dgment) plotting high treason.

tamq am

sed almost like q od(541),

2.Q asi is sed to soften or apologise for a single word(=

t ita dicam).

NOTES.1.Tamq am and q asi are also .

sed in direct comparison with the Indicativc

S spect s tamq am ipse s as incenderit aedes,J v.,iii.222;s spected of h aving(as if he had) set his own ho se on fire. V lgi opinio est tamq am( cometes ) m tationem regni portendat, TAC.Ann. ,xiv.22,1;it is the pop lar belief that a comet portends a change in the kingdom . Other particles, q asi,sic t,and t, occ r m ch more rarely and are cited mainly from TACITUS(q asi only in the Annal s).Compare SUET.,Tit.,5. 5.Ut Si is rare in early Latin,not being fo nd at all in PLAUTUS.It is fo nd b t once in LIVY,b t freq ently in CICERO and later Latin.Vel t Si is fo nd first i n CAESAR.Vel t for vel t Si is fo nd first in LIVY.Ac si is eq ivalent to q asi only in late Latin. CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. 603.Concessive Sentences are introd ced by : 1.The Conditional particles,etsi,etiamsi,tametsi(tamenetsi). 2.The generic relative,q amq am. 3.The compo nds,q amvis,q ant mvis. 4.The verb licet. 5.The Final particles, t(ne). 6.C m(q om). These all answer generally to the notion altho gh. NOTE.Etsi(et + si),even if; etiamsi,even,now if; tametsi,yet even if; q amq am(q am + q am),to what extent soever; q amvis,to what extent yo choose; q ant mvis,to what amo nt yo choose; licet,it is left free(perhaps intrans.of linq o,I leave). 604.Etsi,etiamsi,and tametsi,take the Indicative or S bj nctive,according to the general principles which reg late [CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.391] the se of si,if,The Indicative is more common,especially with etsi. De f t ris reb s etsi semper difficile est dicere,tamen interd m coniect ra possis accedere,C.,Fam.,vi.4,1; altho gh it is always diffic lt to tell abo t the f t re,nevertheless yo can sometimes come near it by g essing.

[Hamilcar] etsi flagrabat bellandi c piditate,tamen paci servi nd m p ta vit,NEP.,xxii.i,3;altho gh Hamilcar was on fire with the desire of war,neverthel ess he tho ght that he o ght to s bserve(to work for) peace.

Inops ille etiamsi referre gratiam non potest,habere certe potest(=grati am habere), C.,Off.,ii.20,69; the needy man(spoken of),if he cannot ret rn a fav o r,can at least feel it.(a y) Me vera pro gratis loq i,etsi me m ingeni m non moneret,necessitas cogit , L.,iii.68,9; even if my disposition did not bid me,necessity compels me to spe ak what is tr e instead of what is palatable(=pleasinga). REMARKS.1.Si itself is often concessive(591,2),and the addition of et,etiam,and tamen serves merely to fix the idea. 2. Etiamsi is sed oftener with the S bjv.than with the Indic.,and seems to be fo nd only in conditional sentences.On the other hand, etsi is also sed like q amq am(605,R.2),in the sense "and yet;" 2;

so too,b t rarely,tametsi.Etsi is a favorite word with CICERO,b t does not occ r in QUINTILIAN nor in SALLUST,the latter of whom prefers tametsi.Tametsi is not fo nd in the A g stan poets nor in TACITUS,and belongs especially to familiar sp eech. 3.Tamen is often correlative even with tametsi. 605.Q amq am,to what extent soever.,falls nder the head of generic relatives(25 4,R.4),and,in the best a thors,is constr ed with the Indicative. Medici q amq am intelleg nt saepe,tamen n mq am aegris dic nt,illo morbo eos esse morit ros,C.,Div.,ii.25,54; altho gh physicians often know,nevertheles s they never tell their patients that they will die of that(partic lar) disease. REMARKS.1.The Potential S bjv.(257,N.3) is sometimes fo nd with q amq am : Q amq am exercit m q i in Volscis erat mallet,nihil rec savit,L.,vi.9,6; altho gh he might well have preferred the army which was in the Volscian co ntry,nevertheles s he made no objection. So especially with the Ideal Second Person. 2.Q amq am is often sed like etsi,b t more freq ently,at the beginning of sente nces,in the same way as the English,and yet,altho gh,however,in order to limit t he whole preceding sentence. 3.The Indic.,with etsi and q amq am,is,of co rse,liable to attraction into the S bjv.in Oratio Obliq a(506). [392 CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.] NOTE.The S bjv.with q amq am(not d e to attraction) is first cited from CICERO ( perhaps T sc.,v.30,85),NEPOS(xxv.13,6),after which,following the development in all generic sentences in Latin,it becomes more and more common;th s,in postA g s tan Latin,JUVENAL ses it excl sively,and PLINY MIN.and TACITUS reg larly. 606.Q amvis follows the analogy of volo,I will,with which it is compo nded,and takes the S bj nctive( s all y the principal tenses). Q ant mvis and q amlibet(as conj nctions) belong to poetry and silver pr

virt tem si

nam amiseris etsi amitti non potest virt s,C.,T sc.,ii.14,8

ose.

Q amvis ille niger,q amvis t candid s esses,V.,EC.,ii.16; altho gh he w as black,altho gh yo were fair. [Vitia mentis],q amvis exig a sint,in mai s exced nt,SEN.,E.M.,85,12;men tal ailments(= passions),no matter how slight they be,go on increasing. Q amvis sis molest s n mq am te esse confitebor mal m, C.,T sc.,ii.25,61 ;altho gh yo be tro blesome,I shall never confess that yo are evil. NOTES.1.The Indic.with q amvis is cited in prose first from C.,Rab.Post.,2.4;NEP.,1.2,3(except in fragments of VARRO and VATINIUS);in poetry it appears first in LUCRETIUS.Then it grows,so that in the post-A g stan period it is sed j st like q amq am with the Indic.,tho gh the S bjv.is also common : Q amvis ingenio non valet,arte valet,Ov.,Am.,1.15,14;altho gh he does no t tell by geni s,he does tell by art. 2.The verb of q amvis is sometimes inflected : Q am volet Epic r s iocet r,tamen n mq am me movebit,C.,N.D.,11.17,46. 607 Licet retains its verbal nat re,and,according to the Seq ence of Tenses,take s only the Present and Perfect S bj nctive : Licet irrideat si q i v lt,C.,Parad.,1.i,8; let any one la gh who will. Ardeat ipsa licet,tormentis ga det amantis,J v.,vi.209; tho gh she herse lf is aglow,she rejoices in the tort res of her lover. Sim licet extrem m,sic t s m,miss s in orbem,Ov.,Tr.,iv.9,9;altho gh I b e sent,as I have been,to the end of the world. NOTES.1.Exceptions are extremely rare : J v.,xiii56. 2.Q amvis is sometimes combined with licet,as : q amvis licet insectem r istos - met o ne soli philosopni sint, C.,T sc. ,iv.24,53.NCMNyaa 3.Occasionally licet is inflected; e.g.,H.,Epod.,15,19;S.,ii.i,59.From the time of APULEIUS licet is constr ed with the Indicative. 608.Ut and ne are also sed concessively for the sake of arg ment;this is common in CICERO,who often attaches to it sane; the basis of this is the Imperative S bj nctive. Ut desint vires,tamen est la danda vol ntas,Ov.,Pont.,iii.4,79;granted t hat strength be lacking,nevertheless yo m st praise(my) good will. [RELATIVE SENTENCES.393]

Q amvis sint s b aq a,s b aq a maledicere temptant,Ov.,M.,vi.376; altho gh they be nder the water, nder the water they try to revile.

Ne sit s mm m mal m dolor,mal m certe est,C.,T sc.,ii.5,14;granted that pain be not the chief evil,an evil it certainly is. REMARKS.1.Ut non can be sed on the principle of the Specific Negative: Hic dies ltim s est; t non sit,prope ab ltimo est,SEN.,E.M.,15,12;thi s is yo r last day;granted that it be not,it is near the last. 2.Examples with past tenses are rare: C.,Mil.,17,46; L.,xxxviii.46,3,etc. 3.On ita- t,see 262;on t-ita,see 482,4. 609.Concessive Sentence represented by a Participle or Predicative Attrib te.--T he Concessive sentence may be represented by a Participle or Predicative Attrib te. [Ris s] interd m ita repente er mpit, t e m c pientes tenere neq eam s, Cf.C.,Or.,ii.58,235; la ghter between whiles(=occasionally) breaks o t so s dden ly that we cannot keep it down,altho gh we desire to do so. M ltor m te oc ll et a res nQn sentientem c stodient,C.,Cat.,1.2,6; (of) many(the) eyes and ears will keep g ard over yo ,tho gh yo perceive it not(WIT HOUT yo r perceiving it). Q is Aristidem non mort nm diligit ? C.,Fin.,v.22,62; who does not love Aristides,(tho gh) dead ? NOTES.1.Q amq am,q amvis,and etsi are often combined with the participle. This,however,is rare in classical Latin,b t becomes more common later. (Caesar),q amq am obsidione Massiliae retardante,brevi tamen omnia s beg it, SUET.,I l.,34. 2.With adjectives and adverbs this is m ch more common,so especially with q amvis,which is sed with a positive as a circ mioc tion for the s perl ative.With the s perlative q amvis is rare. Etsi non iniq m,certe triste senat s cons lt m,L.,xxv.6,2. C m omnia per pop l m ger nt r,q amvis i st m atq e moderat m tamen ipsa aeq abilitas est iniq a,C.,Hep.,1.27,43. RELATIVE SENTENCES. 610.The Latin lang age ses the relative constr ction far more than the English : so in the beginning of sentences,and in combination with Conj nctions and othe r Relatives. REMARKS.1.The awkwardness,or impossibility,of a literal translation may generall y be relieved by the s bstit tion of a demonstrative with an appropriate conj nc tion,or the employment of an abstract no n : Q ae c m ita sint,now since these things are so(Ciceronian form la). F t ra modo exspectant;q ae q ia certa esse non poss nt,co fici nt r et angore et met ,C.,Fin.,1.18,60; they only look forward to the f t re;and beca se that cannot be certain,they wear themselves o t with distress and fear. [394 RELATIVE SENTENCES.]

[Epic r s] non satis polit s iis artib s q as q i tenent,er diti appella nt r,C:,Fin.,1.7,26; Epic r s is not s fficiently polished by those accomplishme nts,from the possession of which people are called c ltivated. 2.Notice especially q od in combination with si and its compo nds bi,q ia,q oni am, t(poetic and post-class.), tinam,ne, tinam ne,q i (rare),in which q od means "and as for that",and is sometimes translated by and,b t,therefore,whereas,some times not at all.

Q od ni f issem incogitans ita e m exspectarem t par f it, TER.,Ph.,155 ;whereas,had I not been heedless,I sho ld be awaiting him,in proper mood.(Ny NOTES.1.The se of the Relative to connect two independent cla ses instead of a demonstrative,is very rare in PLAUTUS,more common in TERENCE,b t f lly devel ope d only in the classical period. 2.The Relative is the fertile so rce of many of the introd ctory particles of th e compo nd sentence(q om,q ia,q oniam,compo nds of q am, t, bi,etc.),and is ther efore treated last on acco nt of the m ltiplicity of its ses. 611.Relative sentences are introd ced by the Relative prono ns in all their form s : adjective,s bstantive,and adverbial.(See Tables 109 foil.) REMARKS.1.The Relative adverbs of Place,and their correlatives,may be sed inste ad of a preposition with a Relative. Unde,whence,is freq ently sed of persons,b t the others rarely;occasion al examples are cited for bi and q o,the others less freq ently : ibi = in eo,etc.; bi = in q o,etc.; inde = ex eo,etc.; nde =ex q o,etc.; eo = in e m,etc.; q o = in q em,etc. Potest fieri t is, nde te a disse dicis,irat s dixerit,C.,Or.,ii.70,285 ; it may be that he,from whom yo say yo heard(it),said it in anger. Q o(= q ib s) l beat n bant,d m dos ne fiat comes,PL.,A l.,491(573). 2.The Relative is not to be confo nded with the Dependent Interrogative sentence (469,R.2). Q ae probat pop l s ego nescio,SEN.,E.M.,29,10; the things that the peop le approves,I do not know(q id probet,what it is the people approves}. Et q id ego te velim,et t q od q aeris,scies,TER.,And.,536; yo shall k now both what(it is) I want of yo ,and what(the thing which) yo are asking(= th e answer to yo r qestion). 612.Position of Relatives.The Relative and Relative forms are p t at the beginni ng of sentences and cla ses.The preposition,however,generally,tho gh not invaria bly,precedes its Relative(413). 613.Antecedent.The word to which the Relative refers is called the Antecedent,be ca se it precedes in tho ght even when it does not in expression. [RELATIVE SENTENCES.395]

REMARK.The close connection between Relative and Antecedent is shown by the freq ent se of one preposition in common(414,it.i).

614.The Relative agrees with its Antecedent in Gender,N mber,and Person. Is minimo eget mortalis,q i minim m c pit,SYRUS,286(Fr.)(308). Uxor contenta est q ae bona est no viro,PL.,Merc.,812;a wife who is goo d is contented with one h sband. Mal m est consili m q od m tari non potest,SYRUS,362(Fr.); bad is the pl an that cannot(let itself) be changed. Hoc illis narro q i me non intelleg nt,PHAEDR.,3,128; I tell this tale f or those who nderstand me not. Ego q i te confinno,ipse me non poss m,C.,Fam.,xiv.4,5;I who reass re yo ,cannot reass re myself.

REMARKS.1.The Relative agrees with the Person of the tr e Antecedent,even when a predicate intervenes;exceptions are very rare :

The Latin r le is the English exception : Acts,xxi.38; L ke,xvi.15. 2.When the Relative refers to a sentence, id q od,that which,is commonly sed(parenthetically).So also q ae res,or simple'q od,and,if reference is made to a single s bstantive ,is q i or some similar form. Si a vobis id q od non spero deserar,tamen animo non deficiam,C.,Rose.Am. ,4,10; if I sho ld be deserted by yo (which I do not expect),nevertheless I sho ld not become faint-hearted. Nec a diend s [Theophrasti] a ditor,Strato,is q i physic s appellat r, C .,N.D.,I.13,35. 3.The gender and n mber of the Relative may be determined : (a) By the sense,and not by the form;that is,a collective no n may be followed b y a Pl ral Relative,a ne ter n meral by a masc line Relative,a possessive prono n by a Relative in the person indicated by the possessive,etc. Caesa s nt ad sex milia q i Pydnam perf gerant,L.,XLIV.42,7;there were s lain p to six tho sand who had fled to Pydna. Eq itat m omnem praemittit,q i videant,CAES.,B.G.,1.15;he sent all the c avalry ahead,who sho ld see(that they might see,to see). (b) By the predicate or the apposition,and not by the antecedent; so especially when the Relative is combined with the cop la or with a cop lative verb. Thebae,q od Boeotiae cap t est,L.,XLII.44,3; Thebes,which is the capital of Boeotia.

T es is,q i(me) s mmis la dib s ad cael m ext listi,C.,Fam.,xv.4,11;yo are he that has(t) praised me to the skies.

CONCORD.

Fl men Scaldis,q od infl it in Mosam,CAES.,B.G.,vi.33,3;the river Scheld t,which empties into the Maas. [396 RELATIVE SENTENCES.] I sta gloria,q i est fr ct s virt tis,C.,Pis.,24,57;real glory,which is the fr it: of virt e. Exceptions are not nfreq ent,especially when the predicative s bstantive in the Relative cla se is a foreign word or a proper name. Stellae q as Graeci cometas vocant,C.,N.D.,ii.5,14; the stars which the Greeks call comets. Est gen s q oddam homin m q od Helotae vocat r,NEP.,iv.3,6;there is a ce rtain class of men called Helots. 4.The pronominal apposition may be taken p into the Relative and disappear : Testar m s ffragiis q od illi ostracism m vocant,NEP.,v.3,1; by potsherd ()votes(a,thing) which they call " ostracism." 5.When the Relative refers to the combined antecedents of different gender,the s trongest gender is preferred,according to 282 : Grandes nat matres et parvi liberi,q or m tr mq e aetas misericordiam vestram req irit,C.,Verr.,v.49,129; aged matrons and infant children,whose age o n either hand demands yo r compassion. Oti m ateq e divitiae,q ae prima mortales p tant,S.,C.,36,4;leis re and money,which mortals reckon as the prime things. Or,the nearest gender may be preferred : Eae fr ges atq e fr ct s q os terra gignit,C.,N.D.,ii.14,37;those fr its of field and tree which earth bears. 6.Combined Persons follow the r le,287. NOTE.A noteworthy pec liarity is fo nd in early Latin,where a generic Relative s entence with q i is made the s bject of an abstract s bstantive with est,and rep resented by a demonstrative in agreement with that s bstantive. istaec virt s est,q ando s st,q i mal m fert fortiter,PL.,Asin.,323; th at's manhood who(if one) bears evil bravely,when there's need. The parallel Greek constr ction s ggests Greek infl ence. 615.Repetition of the Antecedent.The Antecedent of the Relative is not seldom re peated in the Relative cla se,with the Relative as its attrib tive. (Caesar) intellexit diem instare,q o die fr ment m militib s metiri opor teret,CAES.,B.G.,1.16,5;Caesar saw that the day was at hand,on which day it beho oved to meas re corn(corn was to be meas red o t) to the soldiers. NOTE.This sage belongs to the formal style of government and law.CAESAR is very fond of it,especially with the word dies.It is occasional in PLAUTUS and TERENC E,and not ncommon in CICERO;b t after CICERO it fades o t,being fo nd b t rarel y in LIVY,and only here and there later.

616.Incorporation of the Antecedent.1.The Antecedent s bstantive is often incorp orated into the Relative [RELATIVE SENTENCES.397] cla se;sometimes there is a demonstrative antecedent,sometimes not. In q em prim m egressi s nt loc m Troia vocat r,L.,I.I,3; the first plac e they landed at was called Troy. Q am q isq e norit artem,in hac se exerceat,[C.],T sc.,1.18,41; what tra de each man is master of,(in) that let him practise(himself),that let him ply. NOTES.1.Incorporation,while m ch less freq ent than Repetition,is still not nfr eq ently met with in LIVY;after EIVY it decays.No examples are cited from SALLUS T with a demonstrative antecedent,and b t one from CAESAR.No example is cited fr om CAESAR witho t a demonstrative antecedent. 2.Instead of a principal cla se,followed by a consec tive cla se,the str ct re i s sometimes reversed.What wo ld have been the dependent cla se becomes the princ ipal cla se,and an incorporated explanatory Relative takes the place of the demo nstrative.This is confined to certain s bstantives,and is fo nd a n mber of time s in CICERO,b t rarely elsewhere(SALL.,HOR.,LIVY,OVID,SEN.,TAC.,PLINY MIN.). Q a enim pr dentia es,nihil te f giet(-ea pr dentia es, t nihil te f gia t), C.,Fam.,xi.13,1. Velis tant mmodo;q ae t a virt s(est),exp gnabis,H.,S,1.9,54. 2.An appositional s bstantive,from which a Relative cla se depends,is reg larly incorporated into the Relative cla se. [Aman s] Syriam a Cilicia dividit,q i mons erat hosti m plen s, C.,Att., v.20,3;Syria is divided from Cilicia by Aman s,a mo ntain which was f ll of enem ies. NOTE.This sage is fo nd first in CICERO.The normal English position is fo nd fi rst in LIVY,b t it becomes more common in later Latin. Prisc s,vir c i s providentiam in re p blica ante experta civitas erat, L.,iv.46,10. 3.Adjectives,especially s perlatives,are sometimes transferred from the s bstant ive in the principal cla se and made to agree with the Relative in the Relative cla se. [Themistocles] de servis s is q em hab it fidelissim m ad regem misit, N EP.,ii.4,3; Themistocles sent the most faithf l slave he had to the king. Nemini credo,q i large bland st dives pa peri,PL.,A l.,196; I tr st no r ich man who is lavishly kind to a poor man. 617.Attraction of the Relative.The Acc sative of the Relative is occasionally at tracted into the Ablative of the antecedent,rarely into any other case. Hoc confirmam s illo a g rio q o dixim s,C.,Att.,x.8,7; we confirm this by the a g ry which we mentioned. NOTES.1.This attraction takes place chiefly when the verb of the Relative cla se

m st be s pplied from the principal sentence;that is,with a xiliary verbs like velle,solere,i bere;and after verbs of Saying a d the like. [398 RELATIVE SENTENCES.] It is rare in early Latin,b t common from CICERO on. Q ib s poterat sa ciis d ctis sec m ad rbem pergit,L.,iv.39,9;havng tak en with him all the wo nded he co ld,he proceeded to the city. 2.Inverted Attraction.So-called Inverted Attraction is fo nd only in poetry,and then s ally in the Acc.,which may be considered as an object of tho ght or feel ing. This Acc.stands s ally for a Nom.,sometimes,b t only in Comedy,for the Gen.Dat. or Abl.A strange sage is the Nom.where the Acc.wo ld be expected.This may be no minativ s pendens,a form of anacol thon(697),and is fo nd only in early Latin. Urbem q am stat o,vestra est,V.,A .,1.573;(as for) the city which I am r earing,(it) is yo rs. Ist m q em q aeris,ego s m,PL.,C rc.,419;(as for) that man whom yo are looking for,I am he.

Ille q i mandavit,e m ext rbasti ex aedib s ? PL.,Trin.,137.(a (" He that hath ears to hear,let him hear." Matthew 11:15) 618.Correlative Use of the Relative.The s al Correlative of q i is is,more rare ly hic,ille. Is minimo eget mortalis,q i minim m c pit,SYRUS,286(Fr.)(308). Hic sapiens,de q o loq or,C.,Ac.,ii.33,105(305,3). Illa dies veniet,mea q a l g bria ponam,Ov.,Tr.,iv.2,73(307,4). 619.Absorption of the Correlative.The Correlative is, is often absorbed,especially when it wo ld stand in the same case as the Relativ e.This is a kind of Incorporation. Post me,non bene olet,q i bene semper olet,MART.,ii.12,4; Post m s,(he) smells not sweet,who always smells sweet. Q em arma non fregerant vitia vicer nt,CURT.,vi.2,1;(him) whom arms had not cr shed did vices overcome. Q em di dilig nt ad lescens morit r,PL.,B.,816; (he) whom the gods love dies yo ng. Xerxes praemi m propos it q i [= ei q i] invenisset novam vol ptatem, C. ,T sc.,v.7,20; Xerxes offered a reward to him who sho ld invent a new pleas re. Miseranda vita q i [= eor m q i] se met i q am amari mal nt,NEP.,x.9,5; pitiable is the life of those who wo ld prefer being feared to being loved. Discite sanari per q em [= per e m,per q em] didicistis amare, Ov.,Mem.A

m.,43(401). Diffic lt and rare are cases like :

620.Position of the Correlative cla se.The Relative cla se nat rally follows its Correlative,b t it often precedes; incorporation also is common. Male se res habet c m q od virt te effici debet id temptat r pec nia, C. ,Off.,ii.6,22;it is a bad state of affairs when what o ght to be accomplished by worth,is attempted by money. Q od vides accidere p eris hoc nobis q oq e mai sc lis p eris evenit, SE N.,E.M.,24,13; what yo see befall children (this) happens to s also,children o f a larger growth. Q am q isq e norit artem,in hac se exerceat,[C.],T sc.,1.18,41(616,i). [RELATIVE SENTENCES.399] The Correlative absorbed : Q od non dedit fort na,non eripit,SEN.,E.M.,59,18; what fort ne has not given(does not give),she does not take away.

621.Indefinite Antecedent.The Indefinite Antecedent is generally omitted. Elige c i dicas : t mihi sola places,Ov.,A.A.,1.42; choose someone to w hom yo may say : Yo alone please me. REMARK.S ch sentences are sometimes hardly to be disting ished from the Interrog ative: [Conon] non q aesivit bi ipse t to viveret,NEP.,ix.2,1;Conon did not se ek a place to live in safety himself, might be either Relative or Deliberative(265). TENSES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.

Sit liber,domin s q i volet esse me s,MART.,ii.32,8; he m st be free who wishes(shall wish) to be my master. Q i prior strinxerit ferr m,ei s victoria erit,Liv.(244,R.2). 623.Iterative Action.Relative sentences follow the laws laid down for Iterative action(566,567). I.Contemporaneo s action : Ore trahit q odc mq e potest,atq e addit acervo,H.,S.,I.I,34; drags with its mo th whatever it can,and adds to the treas re(heap).

622.F t re and F t re Perfect.--The F t re and F t re Perfect are ter exactness than in c rrent English(242,244).

sed with grea

Per q as nos petitis saepe f gatis opes,Qv.,A.A.,iii.132; the means yo take to win s often scare s off.

N nc redeo ad q ae(for ad ea q ae) mihi mandas,C.,Att.,v.ii,6.

Q ac mq e incedebat agmen,legati occ rrebant,L.,xxxiv.16,6; in whatever direction the col mn advanced,ambassadors came to meet them. II.Prior action : [Terra] n mq am sine s ra reddit,q od accepit,C.,Cat.N.,15,51;the earth never ret rns witho t interest what it has received(receives). Q od non dedit fort na,non eripit,SEN.,E.M.,59,18(620). Non cenat q otiens nemo vocavit e m,MART.,v.47,2; he does not dine as of ten as(when) no one has invited(invites) him. Haerebant in memoria q aec mq e a dierat et viderat [Themistocles], C.,A c.,ii.i,2(567). Seq ent r te q oc mq e perveneris vitia,SEN.,JS.M.,28,1; vices will foll ow yo whithersoever yo go. Q i timere desierint,odisse incipient,TAC.,Agr.,32(567). REMARK.On the S bjv.m Iterative Sentences,see 567,N. [400 RELATIVE SENTENCES.] MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 624.The Relative cla se,as s ch that is,as the representative of an adjective ta kes the Indicative mood. Uxor q ae bona est,PL.,Merc.,812;a wife who is good(a good wife). REMARK.The Relative in this se often serves as a circ mioc tion for a s bstanti ve,with this difference : that the s bstantive expresses a permanent relation;th e Relative cla se,a transient relation : ii q i docent = those who teach = the t eachers(inasm ch as they are exercising the f nctions).On the Relative with S bj v.after an adj.cla se,see 438,R. 625.Indefinite and Generic Relatives. 1. Q ic mq e,q isq is,and the like,being essentially Iterative Relatives,ta ke the Indicative according to the principles of Iterative action(254,R.4). So also simple Relatives when similarly sed. Q ac mq e incedebat agmen,legati occ rrebant,Liv.,xxxiv.16,6(62.3).

(1) In Oratio Obliq a(Total or Partial) : Marti Galli q ae bello ceperint(Pf.S bjv.) devovent(= se dat ras vovent) ,Cf.CAES.,B.G.,vi.17,3; the Ga ls devote(promise to give) to Mars whatever they( shall) take in war(6.B.,Q ae ceperim s,dabim s). (2) By Attraction of Mood(Complementary Cla ses) : Q is e m diligat q em met at ? C.,Lael.,15,53(629). (3) In the Ideal Second Person :

REMARK.According to 567,N.,the S bjv.is

sed :

Bon s segnior fit bi neglegas,S.,I g.,31,28(566). (4) By the spread of the S bjv.in post-classical Latin : Q i n m ei s ordinis offendisset omnes adversos habebat,L.,xxxm 46,1(567). 2.Q i = si q is,if any,has the Indicative when the Condition is Logical. [Terra] n mq am sine s ra reddit,q od accepit,C.,Cat.M.,15,51 (623).(Si q id accepit.) Q i mori didicit,servire dedidicit,SEN.,E.M.,26,10(423). REMARK.When the Condition is Ideal,the S bjv.is necessary(596).In post-classical Latin the S bjv.is the r le with all conditionals. 626.Explanatory Relative.Q i,with the Indicative (= is enim,for he),often approa ches q od,in that. Habeo senect ti magnam gratiam,q ae mihi sermonis aviditatem a xit, C.,C at.M.,14,46; I am very thankf l to old age,which(for it,in that it) has increase d me(= in me) the appetite for talk. [RELATIVE SENTENCES.401] REMARK.Q i with the S bjv.gives a gro nd,= c m is(586);q i with the Indic.,a fac t;and in many passages the ca sal sense seems to be inevitable: Insanit hic q idem,q i ipse male dicit sibi,PL.,Men.,309; cracked is thi s man,who calls( for calling) down c rses on himself. Erraverim fortasse q i me aliq id p tavi,PLIN.,Ep.,1.23,2; I may have er red in thinking myself to be something. NOTES.1.This ca sal sense is heightened by t, tpote,as; q ippe,namely. t q i is rare in early Latin,CAESAR,and CICERO,and is not fo nd at all in TERENCE and SALLUST.LIVY,however,is fond of it.The mood is everywhere the S b j nctive. Utpote is fo nd only here and there in Latin,and not at all in TERENCE,C AESAR,LIVY;b t once in PLAUTUS.The mood is the S bjv. ntil late Latin. Q ippe q i is the most common of the three,b t does not occ r in CAESAR. In early Latin the mood is the Indic.(except PL.,Pers.,699);also in SALLUST.CICE RO ses the S bjv.; LIVY ses both moods;later the S bjv.is the r le ntil the t ime of APULEIUS. 2.Simple Explanatory q i has the Indic.most commonly in early Latin,and in gener al developes on the same line that c m.follows. 627.The S bj nctive is employed in Relative cla ses when it wo ld be sed in a s imple sentence. POTENTIAL: Habeo q ae velim,C.,Fin.,1.8,28; I have what I sho ld like. OPTATIVE: Q od fa st m sit,regem create,L.,1.17,10; blessing be on yo r choice,make ye a king.

REMARKS.1.Especially to be noted is the S bjv.in restrictive phrases.Here the Re lative often takes q idem,sometimes modo. The early Latin shows only q od sciam(as if d m aliq id sciam),so far as I may be permitted to know anything abo t it(= q ant m scio,as far as I know,for all I know),which is sed thro gho t the lang age,and q od q idem veniat in mentem(PL.,Ep.,638).CICERO,however,shows a great v ariety. Q ant m sciam is fo nd first in QUINTILIAN. Omni m orator m q os q idem cognoverim ac tissim m i dico Sertori m, C., Br.,48,180;of all orators,so far as I know them,I consider Sertori s the most ac te.

N ll m ornat m q i modo non obsc ret s btrahend m p to,QUINT.,v.14,33;I think no ornament is to be withdrawn,provided that it do not ca se obsc rity. 2.Restrictions involving esse,posse,attinet, are reg larly in the Indicative.CICERO and CAESAR,however,show a very few cases of the S bjv.,especially with possis. Prodidisti et te et illam,q od q idem in te f it,TER.,Ad.,692; yo have betrayed both her and yo rself,so far as in yo lay. Ego q od ad me attinet,i dices,vici,C.,Verr.,II.1.8,21;I,j dges,so far a s pertains to me,have conq ered, [402 RELATIVE SENTENCES.] 628.The S bj nctive is sed in Relative cla ses which form a part of the tteran ce or the view of another than the narrator,or of the narrator himself when indi rectly q oted (539,R.).So especially in Oratio Obliq a and Final Sentences. Recte Graeci praecipi nt,non temptanda q ae effici non possint, QUINT.,i v.5,17; right are the Greeks in teaching that those things are not to be attempt ed which cannot be accomplished. Ap d Hypanim fl vi m Aristoteles ait,bestiolas q asdam nasci q ae n m d iem vivant,C.,T sc.,1.39,94(650). Virt s facit t eos diligam s in q ib s ipsa inesse videat r,C.,Off.,1.1 7,56; virt e makes s love those in whom she seems to reside. Post lat r ab hominib s t ab iis se abstineant maxime vitiis,in q ib s alter m reprehenderint,C.,Verr.,iii.2,4;it is demanded of men that they refrain from those fa lts most of all as to which they have blamed another. Senat s cens it ti q ic mq e Galliam provinciam obtineret,Haed os defen deret,CAES.,B.G.,1.35; the senate decreed that whoever obtained Ga l as his prov ince sho ld defend the Haed i. Paet s omnes libros q os frater s s reliq isset mihi donavit, C.,Att.,i i.i,12;(this is Paet s'statement; otherwise: q os frater ei s(521) reliq it;comp are C.,Att.,I.20,7).

Xerxes praemi m propos it q i [= ei q i] invenisset novam vol ptatem, C. ,T sc.,v.7,20(619). REMARK.Even in Oratio Obliq a the Indic.is retained : (a) In explanations of the narrator : N ntiat r Afranio magnos commeat s q i iter habebant ad Caesarem ad fl m en constitisse,CAES.,B.C.,1.51,1; it is(was) anno nced to Afrani s that large s pplies of provisions(which were on their way to Caesar) had halted at the river. In the historians this sometimes occ rs where the Relative cla se is an integral part of the sentence,especially in the Impf.and Pl perfect; partly for clearnes s,partly for liveliness.For shifting Indic.and S bjv.,see L.,xxvi.1. (b) In mere circ mloc tions : Q is neget haec omnia q ae videm s deor m potestate administrari? Cf.C., Cat.,iii.q,21; who wo ld deny that this whole visible world is managed by the po wer of the gods ? Providend m est ne q ae dic nt r ab eo q i dicit dissentiant,QUINT.,iii. 8,48; we m st see to it that the speech be not o t of keeping with the speaker. 629.Relative sentences which depend on Infinitives and S bj nctives,and form an integral part of the tho ght,are p t in the S bj nctive(Attraction of Mood). Pigri est ingenii content m esse iis q ae sint ab aliis inventa, QUINT. ,x.2,4; it is the mark of a slow geni s to be content with what has been fo nd o t by others.

[RELATIVE SENTENCES.403] Q is a t e m diligat q em met at a t e m a q o se met i p tet? G.,Lael., 15,53; who co ld love a man whom he fears,or by whom he deems himself feared ?

Ab alio exspectes alteri q od feceris,SYRUS,2(Pr.)(319). In virt te s nt m lti ascens s, t is gloria maxime excellat,q i virt te pl rim m praestet,C.,Plane.,25,60(552). Si solos eos diceres miseros q ib s moriend m esset,neminem eor m q i vi verent exciperes;moriend m est enim omnib s,C.,T sc.,1.5,9; if yo called only t hose wretched who had(have) to die,yo wo ld except none who lived(live);for all have to die.REMARK.The Indic.is sed : (a) In mere circ mioc tions;so,often in Consec tive Sentences : Necesse est facere s mpt m q i q aerit l cr m,PL.,As.,218(535). Efficit r ab oratore, t ii q i a di nt ita adficiant r t orator velit, Cf.C.,Br.,49,185; it is bro ght abo t by the orator that those who hear him ( hi s a ditors) are affected as he wishes(them to be}. (b) Of individ al facts :

Nam q od emas possis i re vocare t m,MART.,ii.20,2; for what yo may rightly call yo r own.

b y yo

Et q od vides perisse perdit m d cas,CAT.,viii.2;and what yo see (defin ite thing,definite person) is lost for aye(),for aye deem lost.(Q od videas,anybody ,anything.) 630.Relative Sentences of Design.Optative Relative sentences are p t in the S bj nctive of Design,when q i = t is. S nt m lti q i eripi nt aliis q od aliis largiant r,C.,Off.,1.14,43; man y are they who snatch from some to lavish on others. [Senex] serit arbores,q ae alteri saeclo prosint, CAECILIUS (C.,T sc.,1. 14,31)(545). Semper habe Pyladen aliq em q i c ret Orestem,Ov.,Rem.Am.,589(545).

NOTES.1.The basis of this constr ction is the characteristic S bjv.,and the conc eption seems Potential rather than Optative;b t in many cases the characteristic force is no longer felt. 2.After mittere there are a few cases where the Impf .Indic.is sed with m ch th e same force as the Impf.S bjv.,b t the p rpose is merely inferential from the c ontin ance in the tense. Inmittebant r illi canes,q i investigabant omnia,C.,Verr.,iv.21,47. 3.By attraction similar to that with q od(541,N.3) and q om(585,N.3),the Relative is sometimes fo nd with an Inf.and diceret,where the S bjv.of the verb in the Inf.,or the Indic.with a pare nthetical t dixit,is to be expected.

Litteras q as me sibi misisse diceret (=misisset,or miserat, t dixit) re citavit,C.,Ph.,ii.4,7. 631.Relative Sentences of Tendency.Potential Relative sentences are p t in the S bj nctive of Tendency,when q i= t is.

[404 RELATIVE SENTENCES.] The notion is generally that of Character and Adaptation,and we disting ish thre e varieties : 1.With a definite antecedent,when the character is emphasised;reg larly after idone s,s itable; apt s,fit; dign s,worthy ; indign s, nworthy; after is,talis,ei smodi,tam,tant s, and the like; after n s and sol s.

[Magnesiam Themistocli Artaxerxes] , NEP.,ii.10,3(545).

rbem donarat,q ae ei panem praeberet

Est innocentia adfectio talis animi,q ae noceat nemini, C.,T sc.,iii.8,1 6;harmlessness(innocence) is that state of mind that does harm to no one(is inno c o s to any one). Ille ego sim c i s laniet f riosa capillos,Ov.,A.A.,ii.451;may I be the man whose hair she tears in her seasons of fren y. Sol s es,C.Caesar,c i s in victoria ceciderit nemo,C.,Dei.,12,34; tho a rt the only one,Caesar,in whose victory no one has fallen. Q em mea Calliope laeserit n s ego,Ov.,Tr.,ii.568; I am the only one th at my Calliope(= my M se) has h rt. (Academici) mentem solam censebant idoneam c i crederet r,C.,Ac.,1.8,30; the Academics held that the mind alone was fit to be believed(tr stworthy). REMARKS.1.Ut is not nfreq ently fo nd instead of q i after the correlatives. 2.Idone s,dign s,etc.,take also t,and the Infinitive(552,R.2). 2.With an indefinite antecedent;so especially after negatives of all kinds,and t heir eq ivalents,and in combinations of

m lti,q idam,alii,nonn lli,etc.,with est,s nt,exsistit,etc. Est q i,s nt q i,there is,there are some who; nemo est q i,there is none to; nihil est q od,there is nothing; habeo q od,I have to; reperi nt r q i,persons are fo nd who(to) ...; q is est q i ? who is there who(to) ....? est c r,there is reason for, etc.So,also, f it c m,there was a time when(580,R.i). S nt q i discess m animi a corpore p tent esse mortem,C.,T sc.t 1.9,18;t here are some who(to) think that death is the depart re of the so l from the bod y. F it q i s aderet appellationem mensis A g sti in Septembrem transferend am, SUET.,A g.,100;there was a man who rged ( to rge) that the name of the mon th(of) A g st sho ld be transferred to September. M lti f er nt q i tranq illitatem expetentes a negotiis p blicis se remo verint, C.,Off.,1.20,69; there have been many who,in the search for q iet,have w ithdrawn themselves from p blic engagements. Omnino nemo lli s rei f it emptor c i def erit hic venditor, C.,Ph.,ii. 38,97(317,i). Post mortem in morte nihil est q od met am mali,PL.,Capt.,741; after dea th there is no ill in death for me to dread. Nec mea q i digitis l mina condat erit,Ov.,Her.,10,120;and there will be no one to close mine eyes with his fingers. [RELATIVE SENTENCES.405] Miserrim s est q i q om esse c pit q od edit(172,N.) non habet,PL.,Capt.

,463; he is a poor wretch who,when he wants to eat,has not anything to eat("non habet q id edat" wo ld mean "does not know what to eat"). Q ot s est q isq e q i somniis pareat,C.,Div.,ii.60,125;(how many men in the world),the fewest men in the world obey dreams. REMARKS.1.The Indic.may be sed in the statements of definite facts,and not of g eneral characteristics :

There are many to snatch away. Many are they who snatch away.

S nt-q i(= q idam)q od senti nt non a dent(so MSS.) dicere, C.,Off.,1.24 ,84;some dare not say what they think. S nt-q ib s ingrate timida ind lgentia servit,Ov.,A.A.,ii.435;to some tr embling ind lgence plays the slave all thanklessly. S nt q i(indefinite) non habeant,est-q i(definite) non c rat habere,H.,E p.,ii.2,182. 2.When a definite predicate is negatived,the Indic.may stand on acco nt of the d efinite statement,the S bj v.on acco nt of the negative : A.Nihil bon m est q od non e m q i id possidet meliorem facit;or, B.Nihil bon m est q od non e m q i id possideat meliorem faciat. A.Nothing that does not make its owner better is good. B.There is nothing good that does not make its owner better. 3.After comparatives with q am as an object cla se. Maiora in defectione deliq erant,q am q ib s ignosci posset,L.,xxvi.12,6 ;(in that revolt) they had been g ilty of greater crimes than co ld be forgiven( had sinned past forgiveness). Non longi s hostes aberant,q am q o tel m adici posset,CAES.,B.G.,ii.21, 3; the enemy were not more than ajaveliris throw distant. REMARKS.1.Classical Latin prefers t after comparatives. 2.Instead of q am t, q am is not nfreq ently fo nd alone,especially after poti s, b t also after ampli s,celeri s,etc.; in which case the constr ction resembles that of anteq am. 4.Parallel with a descriptive adjective with which it is connected by et or sed. Exierant(d o) ad lescentes et Dr si maxime familiares,et in q ib s magna m spem maiores collocarent,C.,Or.,1.7,25;two yo ng men had come o t(who were) in timates of Dr s s and in whom their elders were p tting great hopes. 632.Q in in Sentences of Character.

Of co rse this happens only after affirmative sentences.The poets more freely than prose writers :

se the Indic.

M lti s nt q i eripiant,

M lti s nt q i eripi nt,

After negative cla ses, s ally with a demonstrative tam,ita,etc., q in is often sed(556) where we might expect q i non,and sometimes where we sho ld expect q ae non,or q od non. [406 RELATIVE SENTENCES.] S nt certa vitia q ae nemo est q in eff gere c piat,C.,Or.,iii.ii,41; th ere are certain fa lts which there is no one b t(= everybody) desires to escape. Nil tam difficile est q in q aerendo investigari possiet(= possit),TER., Hea t.,675(552). REMARK.That q in was felt not as q i non,b t rather as t non,is shown by the fa ct that the demonstrative may be expressed : Non c m q oq am arma cont li q in is mihi s cc b erit,NEP.,xviii.ii,5; I have never meas red swords with() any one that he has not(b t he has) s cc mbed t o me.N 633.Relative in a Ca sal Sense.When q i = c m is,as he,the S bj nctive is employ ed.(See 586,R.1.) The particles t, tpote,q ippe,as,are often sed in conj nction with the Relative;for their range,see 626,N.1. (Canini s) f it mirifica vigilantia q i s o toto cons lat somn m non vi derit,C.,Fam.,vii.30,1;Canini s has shown marvello s watchf lness,not to have se en(= taken a wink of) sleep in his whole cons lship. O fort nate ad lescens,q i t ae virt tis Homer m praeconem inveneris ! C .,Arch.,10,24; l cky yo th ! to have fo nd a crier(= tr mpeter) of yo r valor(in ) Homer ! Maior gloria in Scipione,Q inctii recentior t q i eo anno tri mphasset, L.,xxsv.10,5; Scipio's glory was greater,Q incti s' was fresher,as(was to be ex pected in) a man who(inasm ch as he) had tri mphed in that year. REMARK.On the se of the Indic.after q ippe,etc.,see 626,N.1.On the seq ence of tenses,see 513,N.3. 634.Relative in a Concessive or Adversative Sense.Q i is sometimes sed as eq iv alent to c m is in a Concessive or Adversative Sense.

Ego q i leviter Graecas litteras attigissem,tamen c m venissem Athenas c ompl res ibi dies s m commorat s,C.,Or.,1.18,82; altho gh I had dabbled() b t sli in Greek,nevertheless,having come to Athens,I stayed there several days. NOTE.The Indic.is the r le for this constr ction in early Latin(580,N.1). 635.Relative and Infinitive.The Acc sative and Infinitive may be sed in Oratio Obliq a after a Relative,when the Relative is to be resolved into a Coordinating Conj nction and the Demonstrative. (Philosophi censent) n m q emq e nostr m m ndi esse partem,ex q o ill d nat ra co seq i t comm nem tilitatem nostrae anteponam s,C.,Fin.,iii.19,64; p hilosophers hold that every one of s is a part of the niverse,and that the nat

ral conseq ence of this is for s to prefer the common welfare to o r own.

[RELATIVE SENTENCES.407] NOTES.1.This sage is not cited earlier than CICERO,and seems to be fo nd princi pally there,with sporadic examples from other a thors. 2.Occasional examples are also fo nd of the Inf.after etsi(LIVY), q amq am (TAC.),in the sense and yet; c m interim(LIVY), q ia(SEN.), nisi(TAC.), si non (LIVY); and after q em admod m, t(Cic.,LIVY,TAC.),in comparative sentences. 636.Combination of Relative Sentences.Relative Sentences are combined by means o f Cop lative Conj nctions only when they are act ally coordinate. When the second Relative wo ld stand in the same case as the first,it is commonl y omitted(a). When it wo ld stand in a different case(b),the Demonstrative is often s bstit te d(c);or,if the case be the Nominative(d) or Acc sative(e),the Relative may be om itted altogether.

Examples :(a) CAES.,B.G.,iv.34,4;(b) C.,Lael.,23,87;T sc.,1.30,72;(c) C.,Br.,74, 258;T sc.,v.13,38;(e) C.,Off.,ii.6,21;L.,x.29,3;(d) S.,I g.,101,5;TKR.,Ad.,85. NOTES.1.The insertion of a demonstrative is almost confined to early Latin,LUCRE TIUS,and CICERO.CAESAR and SALLUST have no examples,and LIVY very few.On the oth er hand,the se of a relative by e gma(690) in connection with two or more verb s governing different cases is fo nd at all periods. 2.(a) The Relative is not combined with adversative or illative conj nctions(b t who,who therefore) except at the beginning of a sentence,when it represents a f ollowing demonstrative or anticipates it(620). Q i fortis est,idem fidens est;q i a tem fidens est,is non extimescit C. ,T sc.,iii.7,14;he who is brave is confident,b t he who is confident is not afra id.

Sophron mimor m q idem scriptor sed q em Plato probavit, QUINT.,1.10,17; Sophron,a writer of mimes,''tis tr e,b t(one) that Plato approved. (c) Q i tamen may be added to explain a foregoing statement.

(b) Sed q i,q i tamen,can be

sed in antithesis to adjectives.

(a) D D (b) D D (c) D D (d) D D (e) D D

mnorix q i principat m obtinebat ac plebi accept s erat(CAES.,B.G.,1-3,5), mnorix,who field the chieftaincy,and(who) was acceptable to the commons; mnorix q i principat m obtinebat c iq e plebs favebat, mnorix,who held the chieftaincy,and whom(he commons favo red; mnorix q i principat m obtinebat eiq e plebs favebat, mnorix,who held the chieftaincy,and whom the commons favo red; mnorix q em plebs diligebat et principat m obtinebat, mnorix,whom the commons loved,and(who) held the chieftaincy; mnorix q i principat m obtinebat et plebs diligebat, mnorix,who held the chieftaincy,and(whom) the commons loved.

3.Two or more Relative cla ses may be connected with the same antecedent when th e one serves to complete the idea of the principal cla se,the other to modify it : [408 COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.] Illa vis q ae investigat occ lta,q ae inventio dicit r,C.,T sc.,1.25,61; the fac lty that tracks o t hidden things,which is called(the fac lty of) resea rch. 4.The Relative is often repeated by anaphora(682) for stylistic reasons.Compare C.,T sc.,1.25,62;Plane.,33,81;L.,xxni.14,3. 637.Relative Sentence represented by a Participle.The Relative sentence is somet imes represented by a Participle,b t generally the Participle expresses a closer connection than the mere explanatory Relative. Onmes ali d agentes,ali d sim lantes perfidi(s nt),C.,Off.,iii.14,60; al l who are driving at one thing and pretending another are treachero s.

COMPARATIVE SENTENCES. 638.A pec liar phase of the Relative sentence is the Comparative,which is introd ced in English by as or than,in Latin by a great variety of relative forms :

(a) By correlatives;(b) by atq e or ac;(c) by q am. 639.Moods in Comparative Sentences.The mood of the Dependent cla se is the Indic ative, nless the S bj nctive is req ired by the laws of obliq e relation,or by t he conditional idea(602). REMARK.On poti s q am with the S bjv.,see below,644,R.3. 640.The dependent cla se often borrows its verb from the leading cla se.Compare 602. 6).

Servi morib s isdem erant q ib s domin s,Cf.C.,Verr.,iii.25,62;the serva nts had the same character as the master. 641.When the dependent cla se(or standard of comparison) borrows its verb from t he leading cla se,the dependent cla se is treated as a part of the leading cla s e;and if the first or leading cla se stands in the Acc sative with the Infinitiv e,the second or dependent cla se m st have the Acc sative likewise. Ita sentio Latinam ling am loc pletiorem esse q am Graecam,C.,Fin.,1.3,1 0; it is my opinion that the Latin lang age is richer than the Greek. [COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.409]

Ignoratio f t ror m malor m

tilior est q am scientia,C.,Div.,ii.9,23(29

[Pisistrat s] Homeri libros conf sos antea sic dispos isse dicit r at n nc habem s,C.,Or.,iii.34,137; Pisistrat s is said to have arranged the books of Homer,which were(whereas they were) in conf sion before,as we have them now.

Ca sam tibi expos im s Ephesi,q am t ,Fam.,xiii.55,1.

tamen coram facili s cognosces, C.

Ego Gai m Caesarem non eadem de re p blica sentire q ae me scio, C.,Pis. ,32,79; I know that Gai s Caesar has not the same political views that I(have). I.Correlative Comparative Sentences. 642.Correlative Sentences of Comparison are introd ced by Adjective and Adverbia l Correlatives : 1.Adjective correlatives :

2.Adverbial correlatives : tam q am, (so) as m ch tantopere q antopere,(so) as m ch totiens(es) q otiens(es), as often tamdi q amdi , as long | | | as |

Q ot homines,tot sententiae,(as) many men,(so) many minds,TER.,Ph.,454. Fr ment m tanti f it q anti iste aestimavit,C.,Verr.,iii.84,194;corn was worth as m ch as he val ed it. Pleriq e habere amic m talem vol nt,q ales ipsi esse non poss t,C.,Lael. ,22,82 ;most people wish to have a friend of a character s ch as they themselves cannot possess. Cimon incidit in eandem invidiam q am pater s s,NEP.,v.3,1 (310). Nihil est tam pop lare q am bonitas,C.,Lig.,12,37; nothing is so winning as kindness. Sic de ambitione q omodo de amica q er nt r,SEN.,E.M.,22,10; they compla in of ambition as they do of a sweetheart. Tamdi req iesco q amdi ad te scribo,C.,Att.,ix.4,1;I rest as long as I am writing to yo . Opto t ita c iq e eveniat, t de re p blica q isq e mereat r, C.,Ph.,ii. 46,119; I wish each one's fort ne to be s ch as he deserves of the state. 3.The Correlative is sometimes omitted.

REMARKS.1.Instead of idem q i,idem t is sometimes fo nd.

Disces q amdi voles,C.,Off.,1.i,2;yo

shall learn(as long) as yo wish.

Homo,non q am isti s nt,glorios s,L.,xxxv.49,7;a man,not(so) vainglorio s as they are.

ita,sic

| t, ti,sic t,tamq am(rare),| |q asi(rare), item,itidem |q emadmod m, |q omodo,

tot,totidem tant s talis idem

q q q q

ot, (so) as ant s,(so) as alis, i, the

many | great| s ch | same |

[410 COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.] Disp tationem exponim s eisdem fere verbis t act m disp tat mq e est, C.,T sc.ii.3,9; we are setting forth the disc ssion in very m ch the same w ords in which it was act ally carried on. On idem with atq e,ac,et,see 643; on idem with Dat.,see 359,N.6; on idem with c m,see 310,R.2. 2.(a) The more - the more,may be translated by q o(q isq e) - eo,and the like,with the comparatives; b t s ally by t(q isq e),q am - ita,tam,etc.,with the s perlative,especially w hen the s bj.is indefinite. Tanto brevi s omne q anto felici s temp s,PLINY,Ep.,viii.14,10; time is the shorter,the happier it is. Q am citissime conficies,tam maxime expediet,CATO,Agr.,64,2; the q icker the better. Ut q isq e sibi pl rim m confidit,ita maxime excellit,C.,Lael.,9,30; the more a man tr sts himself,the more he excels. (b) When the predicate is the same,one member often coalesces with the other: Op tim m q idq e rarissim m est,C.,Fin.,ii.25,81(318,2),= t q idq e optim m est,it a rarissim m. 3.Ut-ita is often sed adversatively(482,4).On ita- t,in asseverations,see 262. 4.Ut and pro eo t are freq ently sed in a limiting or ca sal sense,so far as,inasm ch as; pro eo t tempor m diffic ltas t lit(C.,Verr.,iii.54,126),so far as the hard times permitted;

Ut s nt h mana,nihil est perpet om dat m,PL.,Cist.,194; as the world wag s,nothing is given for good and all. 5.On q am,q ant s,and the S perlative,see 303. Notice in this connection q am q i, t q i,and the like,with the S perlative( s a lly maxime) : Tam s m amic s rei p blicae q am q i maxime(= est),C.,Fam.,v.2,6; I am a s devoted a friend to the state as he who is most(= as any man). Proeli m, t q od maxime mq am,commiss m est,L.,vii.33,5.

Vir etolian.

t inter Aetoles fac nd s,L.,xxxii.33,9; a man of eloq ence for an A

t t t t

t m res erant,as things were then; temporib s illis(C.,Verr.,iii.54,125),for those times; erat f rios s(C.,Hose.Am.,12,33),stark mad as he was; Sic li(C.,T sc.,1.8,15),as(is,was,to be expected of) Sicilians.

Dom s celebrat r ita, t c m maxime,C.,Q.F..n.4,6. 6.The Correlative forms do not always correspond exactly. S be nda dimicatio totiens,q ot coni rati s peressent,L.,ii.13,2. II.Comparative Sentences with ATQUE(AC). 643.Adjectives and Adverbs of Likeness and Unlikeness may take atq e or ac. Virt s eadem in homine ac deo est,C.,Leg.,1.8,25;virt e is the same in m an as in god. Date operam ne simili tam r fort na atq e si s m s,TER.,Ph.,30;do yo r endeavo r that we have not(ill)-l ck like that we had before. [COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.411] Dissim latio est c m alia dic nt r ac sentias,C.Or.,ii.67,269; dissim la tion is when other things are said than what yo mean(something is said other th an what yo mean). Similiter (602,R.2) facis ac si me roges c r te d ob s cont ear oc lis,e t non altero coniveam,C.,N.D.,iii.3,8; yo are acting(like) as if yo were to as k me why I am looking at yo with two eyes,and not blinking with one. Non dixi sec s ac sentiebam,C.,Or.,ii.6,24;I did not speak otherwise tha n I tho ght. NOTES.1.The expression is commonly explained by an ellipsis : Aliter dixi atq e [aliter] sentiebam,I spoke one way and yet I was think ing another way. So we find: Timeo ne ali d credam atq e ali d n nties,TER.,Hec.,844; I fear that I b elieve one thing,and yo are telling another. 2.Instead of atq e, et

is sometimes sed;this is not common,b t the greater proportion of cases occ rs in the classical period : Solet enim ali d sentire et loq i,C.,Fam.,viii.i,3;for he has a way of t hinking one thing and saying another. 3.These words are principally : aeq os,par,pariter,idem,i xta(from the classical period on) ,perinde,pro inde,pro eo; ali s,aliter,sec s( s ally with a negative) ,contra,contrari s,similis,d issimilis,sim l; and rarely item,talis,totidem,proxime, and a few others.

PLAUTUS ses th s some words which involve a similar meaning,as (de)m tare(M.G.,1130). Compare also M.G.,763;B.,725.

non ali s and other negative combinations seldom have atq e,commonly q am or nisi. After negative forms of ali s CICERO has reg larly nisi,occasionally pra eter. Philosophia q id est ali d(= nihil est ali d) nisi don m deor m ?.C.,T s c.,1.26,64;philosophy - what else is it b t the gift of the gods? III.Comparative Sentences with QUAM. 644.Comparative Sentences with q am follow the comparative degree or comparative expressions. The Verb of the dependent cla se is commonly to be s pplied from the leading cla se,according to 640. In Comparative Sentences q am takes the same case after it as before it. Melior t tiorq e est certa pax q am sperata victoria,L.,xxx.30,19 (307,R .i). Poti s amic m q am dict m perdidi,QUINT.,vi.3,20; I preferred to lose my friend rather than my joke. Velim existimes neminem c iq am cariorem mq am f isse q am te mihi, C., Fam.,1.9,24(546,it.i). REMARKS.1.When the second member is a s bj.,and the first member an obliq e case ,the second member m st be p t in the Nom.,with the proper form of the verb esse , nless the obliq e case be an Acc sative : .

Ego hominem callidiorem vidi neminem q am Phormidnem,TER.,Ph.,591;I have seen no shrewder man than Phormio(= q am Phormio est). Tibi,m lto maiori q am African s f it,me non m lto minorem q am Laeli m adi nct m esse patere,Cf.C.,Fam,,v.7,3. [412 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.]

3.(a) When two cla ses are compared by poti s,rather, pri s,before, citi s,q icker,sooner, the second cla se is p t in the Pr.or Impf.S bjv.(512),with or(in CICERO) witho

2.On

q am pro,and q am q i,see 298.On the do ble comparative,see 299.

Vicin s t s eq

m meliorem habet q am t s est,Cf.C.,Inv.,1.31,52 (596)

4.

Ali s and sec s have q am occasionally at all periods.On the other hand,

t t.

(Dixer nt) se miliens morit ros poti s q am t tant m dedecoris admitti patiant r,L.,iv.2,8; they said that they wo ld rather die a tho sand times than (to) s ffer s ch a disgrace to slip in. Morit ros se affirmabant citi s q am in alionos mores verterent r, L.,xx iv.3,12;they declared that they had rather die,than let themselves be changed to foreign ways. (b) If the leading cla se is in the Inf.,the dependent cla se may be in the Inf. likewise,and this is the reg lar constr ction in classical Latin when the Inf.fo llows a verb of Will and Desire;CICERO ses the Inf.reg larly,CAESAR generally,t ho gh examples of the simple S bjv.are not ncommon in both;LIVY is very fond of the S bjv.,especially with t,which is cited first from him. Se ab omnib s desertos poti s q am abs te defensos esse mal nt,C.,Div.in Caec.,6,21; they prefer to be deserted by all rather than defended by yo . NOTES.1.Instead of tam q am,so as,the Roman prefers the combinations non min s q am non magis q am(by Litotes).

(a) "Non min s q am" means "no less than" = "q ite as m ch" : Patria hominib s non min s q am liberi cara esse debet,(Cf.C.,) Fam.,iv. 5,2;co ntry o ght to be no less dear to men than children(= q ite as dear as). The meaning "as little as" is cited only from TER.,Hec.,647 : non tibi ill d fact al min s placet q am mihi,where not less than = q it e as m ch as = as little as. (b) Non magis q am means q ite as little,or q ite as m ch : Anim s non magis est san s q am corp s,Cf.C.,T sc.,iii.5,10;the mind is no more so nd than the body = as little so nd as the body.(Or it might mean : Th e mind is no more so nd than the body = the body is q ite as so nd as the mind.) So with other comparatives. Fabi s non in armis praestantior f it q am in toga,Cf.C.,Cat.M.,4,ll; Fa bi s was not more disting ished in war than in peace(no less disting ished in pe ace than in war,q ite as disting ished in peace as in war). 2.After a negative comparative, atq e is occasionally fo nd for q am in PLAUTOS,TERENCE,CATULLUS,VERGIL; m ch more often in HORACE(nine times in the Satires,twice in the Epodes),who s es it also after a positive. Non Apollinis magis ver m atq e hoc respons mst,TER.,And.,698. nil non min s ac tibi pectore rit r intimo flamma, CAT.,LXI.176.Cf.H.,S .,ii.7,96. THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.

Dep gna poti s q am servias,C.,Att.,vii.7,7(577,N.6).

645.The compo nd sentence may be red ced to a simple sentence,by s bstit ting an Infinitive or a Participle for the dependent cla se. [THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.413] THE INFINITIVE AND INFINITIVE FORMS. 646.The practical ses of the Infinitive and its kindred forms,as eq ivalents of dependent cla ses,have already been considered : Infinitive after Verbs of Creation : 423. Ger nd and Ger ndive : 425-433. S pine: 434-436. Infinitive in Object Sentences : 526-o31. Infinitive in Complementary Final Sentences : 532. Infinitive in Relative Sentences : 635. NOTE.Under the head of the Abridged Sentence will be treated the Historical Infi nitive and Oratio Obliq a : the Historical Infinitive,beca se it is a compendio s Imperfect : Oratio Obliq a,beca se it foreshortens,if it does not act ally abr idge,and effaces the finer distinctions of Oratio Recta. HISTORICAL INFINITIVE. 647.The Infinitive of the Present is sometimes sed by the historians to give a rapid seq ence of events,with the s bject in the Nominative;generally,several In finitives in s ccession. (Verres) minitari Diodoro,vociferari palam,lacrimas interd m vix tenere, C.,Verr.,iv.18,39;Verres threatened(was for threatening) Diodor s,bawled o t be fore everybody,sometimes co ld hardly restrain his tears. NOTES.1.The ancient ass mption of an ellipsis of coepit,began(QUINT.,ix.3,58), serves to show the conception,altho gh it does not explain the constr ction,whic h has not yet received a convincing explanation.A c rio s parallel is de with In finitive in French.The Final Infinitive(to be) for,may help the conception,as it sometimes does the translation.It takes the place of the Imperfect,is sed chie fly in rapid passages,and gives the o tline of the tho ght,and not the details;i t has reg larly the seq ence of a Past tense. 2.The Historical Infinitive is sometimes fo nd after c m, bi,etc.See S.,I g.,98, 2;L.,iii.37,6;TAC.,Ann.,ii.4,4;H.,iii.31;Ann.,iii.26,2.No examples are cited fro m CICEUO and CAESAR;this sage is characteristic of TACITUS. ORATIO OBLIQUA. 648.The tho ghts of the narrator,or the exact words of a person,as reported by t he narrator,are called Oratio Recta,or Direct Disco rse. Indirect Disco rse,or Oratio Obliq a,reports not the exact words spoken,b t the general impression prod ced.

REMARKS.I.U der the general head of Oratio Obliq a are embraced also those cla s es which imply Indirect Q otation(Partial Obliq ity).See 508. [414 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.] Inq am,q oth I,is sed in citing the Oratio Recta; aio,I say,generally in Oratio Obliq a. Inq am never precedes the Oratio Obliq a.b t is always parenthetic; aio may or may not be parenthetic.Oratio Recta may also be cited by a pa renthetic " t ait," " t ai nt," rarely ait,(as) he says,(as) they say. The s bject of inq it often precedes the q otation,b t when it is mentioned in t he parenthesis it is almost always p t after the verb. T m Cotta : r morib s mec m,inq it,p gnas,C.,N.D.,iii.5,13(484). Aliq ot somnia vera,inq it Enni s,C.,Div.,ii.62,127; "some dreams are tr e," q oth Enni s.

3.The lacking forms of inq am are s pplied by forms of dicere. 649.Oratio Obliq a differs from Oratio Recta,partly in the se of the Moods and Tenses,partly in the se of the prono ns. NOTES.1.It m st be remembered that as a r le the Roman tho ght immediately in O. O.,and did not think first in O.R.and then transfer to O.O.; also that O.O.is ne cessarily less acc rate in its conception than O.R.,and hence it is not always p ossible to constr ct the O.R.from the O.O.with perfect certainty.What is ideal t o the speaker may become nreal to the narrator,from his knowledge of the res lt ,and hence,when acc racy is aimed at,the narrator takes the point of view of the speaker,and in the last resort passes over to 0.Recta. 2.O.Obliq a often comes in witho t any formal notice,and the governing verb has often to be s pplied from the contest,sometimes from a preceding negative.

3.Sometimes,after a long stretch of O.Obliq a,the writer s ddenly shifts to the O.Recta.Examples : C.,T sc.,ii.25,61;L.,ii.7,9,etc. Moods in Oratio Obliq a. 650.In Oratio Obliq a the principal cla ses(except Interrogatives and Imperative s) are p t in the Infinitive,the s bordinate cla ses in the S bj nctive. Oratio Recta : Ap d Hypanim fl vi m,inq it Aristoteles, Oratio Obliq a : Ap d Hypanim fl vi m Aristoteles ait O.R.: bestiolae q aedam nasc nt r, O.O.: bestiolas q asdam nasci, O.R.: q ae n m diem viv nt, O.O.: q ae n m diem vivant,C.,T sc.,1.39,94. O.R.--On the river Bog,says Aristotle,} little creat res are born,that live(b t) O.O.--Aristotle says that on the river Bog,}'one day. Socrates dicere solebat :

(Idem Reg l s) reddi captivos negavit esse m ad lescentes esse,se iam confect m senect te,ib.

tile;(saying that) illos eni

(Reg l s) sententiam ne diceret rec savit;(saying that) q am di rando hosti m tenoret r,non esse se senatorem,C.,Off.,iii.27,100.

i re i

2.

O.R.Omnes in eo q od sci nt satis s nt eloq entes, O.O.Omnes in eo q od scirent satis esse eloq entes,C.,Or.,1.14,63 [THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.415] O.R.Socrates sed to say : "All men ARE eloq ent eno gh in what they UNDERSTAND. " O.O.Socrates sed to say that all men WERE eloq ent eno gh in what they UNDERS TOOD. REMARK.When the Principal Cla se,or Apodosis,is in the Indic.,the Inf.is sed ac cording to the r le for Verbs of Saying and Thinking.When the Principal Cla se,o r Apodosis,is in the S bjv.,as in the Ideal and Unreal Conditions,special r les are necessary(656). Otherwise,S bjv.in O.R.contin es to be S bjv.in O.O. NOTE.--In CAESAR,B.C.,iii.73,6,where a principal cla se is apparently p t in the S bjv.,instead of detriment m in bon m verteret,read(fore t) ...verteret,with Vossi s,D ebner,Perrin,Hoffmann.NEP.,ii.7,6,is disp ted. 651.Interrogative sentences are p t in the S bj nctive,according to 467;inasm ch as the verb of Saying involves the verb of Asking. Ariovist s respondit se pri s in Galliam venisse q am pop l m Roman m : q id sibi vellet c r in s as possessiones veniret,CAES.,B.G.,1.44,7;Ariovist s r eplied that he had come to Ga l before the Roman people; what did he(Caesar) mea n by coming into his possessions ?(Q id tibi vis?) REMARKS.1.Indicative Rhetorical Q estions(464),being s bstantially statements,ar e transferred from the Indic.of O.R.to the Acc.and Inf.of O.O.when they are in t he First and Third Persons.The Second Person goes into the S bj nctive. sse ?

CAES.,B.G.,1.14; Co ld he ? Q id est t rpi s ? What is baser ? [Nothing.] Q id esse t rpi s ? CAES.,B.G.,v.28,6; What was base r ? Q o se rep lses ab Romanis it res ? L.,xxxiv.11,6; whither sho ld they g o,if repelled by the Romans ? (Q o ibim s ?) C i non apparere ab eo q i prior arma int lisset ini riam ortam(esse) ? L.,xxxii.10,6; to whom is it not evident that the wrong began wit h him,who had been the first to wage war ?(C i non apparet ?) Examples are not fo nd in early Latin,are rare in classical period,b t are espec ially common in LIVY. Si bon m d cerent,q id pro noxio damnassent? L.,xxvii.34,13;'if they tho ght him a good man,why had they condemned him as g ilty ? (Si bon m d citis,q i d pro noxio damnastis ?)

The Q estion in the Second Person often veils an Imperative.Here from LIVY on th e S bjv.is the r le. Nec cessabant Sabini instare rogitantes q id tererent temp s, L.,iii.61,

O.R.N m poss m ?

Can I ?

[No.] O.O.N m po

13.(O.R.,Q id teritis ?) [416.THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.] Exceptions are rare;S bjv.with Third Person,CAES.,B.C.,1.32,8; Inf.with Second P erson,L.,vi.39,10. 2.In S bjv.Rhetorical Q estions the S bjv.is either retained or transferred to t he Infinitive.The Deliberative? S bjv.is always retained. Q is sibi pers aderet sine certa re Ambiorigem ad ei smodi consili m dis cendisse ? CAES.,B.G.,v.29,5;who co ld pers ade himself that Ambiorix had procee ded to an extreme meas re like that,witho t(having made) a s re thing(of it) ?(Q is sibi pers adeat ?)

The Inf.form wo ld be the F t re : q em sibi pers as r m ?(G59),and is not to be disting ished from the F t.Indicative. 652.Imperative sentences are p t in the S bj nctive,sometimes with, s ally witho t, t; the Negative is,of co rse,ne(never t ne). Reddit r respons m : nond m temp s p gnae esse;castris se tenerent, L.,i i.45,8; there was ret rned for answer,that it was not yet time to fight,that the y m st keep within the camp. (O.R.,castris vos tenete.) (Vercingetorix) cohortat s est : ne pert rbar ent r incommodo,CAES.,B.G.,vii.29,1;Vercingetorix comforted them(by saying) that they m st not allow themselves to be disconcerted by the disaster.(O.R.,nolite pert rbari.) REMARKS.1.Ut can be sed according to 546,after verbs of Will and Desire and the ir eq ivalents. Pythia respondit t moenib s ligneis se m nirent,NEP.,ii.2,6;the Pythia answered that they m st defend themselves with walls of wood. 2.Verbs of Will and Desire,being also verba dicendi,freq ently have an t cla se followed by an Acc.with the Inf.,the second cla se adding a st atement to the req est. Ubii orabant t sibi a xili m ferret;ad a xili m spemq e reliq i tempori s satis f t r m,CAES.,B.G.,iv.16,5. Tenses in Oratio Obliq a. 653.The Tenses of the Infinitive follow the laws already laid down(530) : The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneo s action; The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action; The F t re Infinitive expresses f t re action. REMARK.The Impf.Indic.,as expressing prior contin ance,becomes the Pf .Inf.in O. O.,and hence loses its note of contin ance. 654.The Tenses of the S bj nctive follow the laws of seq ence(510).The choice is reg lated by the point of new of the Reporter,or the point of view of the Speak er. [THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.417]

NOTE.By ass ming the point of view of the speaker,greater liveliness as well as greater acc racy is imparted to the disco rse.This form is technically called Re praesentatis.In Conditional Sentences Repraesentatio often serves to prevent amb ig ity.The point of view not nf req ently shifts from reporter to speaker,somet imes in the same sentence;this has the effect of giving additional emphasis to t he primary verb,and is therefore common in commands and in favo rable alternativ es. Point of View of the Reporter : Legationi Ariovist s respondit : sibi mir m videri q id in s a Gallia q am bello vicisset,Caesari negotii esset,CAES.,B.G.,1.34,4;to the embassy Ariovis t s replied,that it seemed strange to him(he wondered) what b siness Caesar had in his Ga l,which he had conq ered in war. Point of View of the Speaker : [Legatis Helvetior m] Caesar respondit : cons esse deos immortales,q o g ravi s homines ex comm tatione rer m doleant,q os pro scelere eor m lciscl veli nt,his sec ndiores interd m res concedere,CAES.,B.G.,1.14,5; to the envoys of th e Helvetians Caesar replied,that the gods were(are) wont,that men might(may) s f fer the more severely from change in their fort nes,to grant occasional increase of prosperity to those whom they wished(wish) to p nish for their crime.(A long passage is L.,xxviii.32.) Point of View shifted : Ad haec Marci s respondit : Si q id ab senat petere vellent,ab armis di scedant,S.,C.,34,1; thereto Marci s replied: If they wished to ask anything of t he senate,they m st lay down their arms. Proinde a t cederent( ndesired alternative) animo atq e virt te genti pe r eos dies totiens ab se victae,a t itineris finem sperent(desired alternative) camp m interiacentem Tiberi ac moenib s Romanis,L.,xxi.30,11; therefore they sho ld either yield in spirit and co rage to a nation which d ring those days they had so often conq ered,or they m st hope as the end of their march the plain tha t lies between the Tiber and the walls of Rome. 655.Object,Ca sal,Temporal,and Relative Cla ses follow the general laws for S bo rdinate Cla ses in Oratio Obliq a. For examples of Object Cla ses,see 525;for Ca sal,see 541;for Temporal,see 561-o 64,569-o77; for Relative,see 628. REMARKS.1.Coordinate Relative Cla ses are p t in the Acc.and Infinitive(635). [418 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.] 2.Relative Cla ses are p t in the Indicative :(a) In mere circ mloc tions,(b) In explanations of the narrator(628,R.). 3.D m,with the Indic.,is often retained as a mere circ mioc tion: Die,hospes,Spartae nos te hic vidisse iacentis,d m sanctis patriae legib s obseq im r,C.,T sc.,1.42,101;tell Sparta,stranger,that tho hast seen s lyin g here obeying(in obedience to) o r co ntry's hallowed laws.

So also sometimes c m;see C.,Lael.,3,12.

656.Conditional Sentences in Oratio Obliq a,Total and Partial. 1.The Protasis follows the r le.2.The Indicative Apodosis follows the r le,b t P resent,Imperfect,and Perfect S bj nctive are t rned into the F t re Infinitive o r its periphrases. The Pl perfect S bj nctive is transferred to the Perfect Infinitive of the Activ e Periphrastic Conj gation.

REMARK.Posse needs no F t.(248,R.),and pot isse no Periphrastic Pf.Inf.,so that these forms are often sed to lighten the constr ction. 3.Identical Forms.In the transfer of Conditions to O.O.,the difference between m any forms disappears.For instance, I.

II.

id credideris,erraveris. id credidisses,errares.

} }

NOTES.1.In No.I.the difference is not vital,tho gh exactness is lost. 2.(a) In No.II.the ambig ity lies practically between 2 and 3;inasm ch as Heprae sentatio is s ally employed for the Logical Condition,and the Periphrastic Pf . Inf.is employed in the Unreal,wherever it is possible.The difference between an Unf lfilled Present and an Unf lfilled Past wo ld nat rally vanish to the narrat or,to whom both are Past. Ariovist s rospondit : si q id ipsi a Caesare op s esset,sese ad ill m v ent r m f isse : si q id ille se velit,ill m ad se venire oportere, CAES.,B.G.,1 .34,2;Ariovist s answered,that if he had wanted anything of Caesar he wo ld have come to him;if he(Caesar) wanted anything of him,he o ght to come to him(Ariovi st s). O.R.: si q id mihi a Caesare op s esset,ego ad ill m venissem;si q id il le me v lt,ill m ad me venire oportet. [THE ABEIDGED SENTENCE.419] Fatent r se virt tis ca sa,nisi ea vol ptatem faceret,ne man m q idem ve rs ros f isse,C.,Fin.,v.31,93;they confess that for virt e's own sake,if it did not ca se pleas re,they wo ld not even t rn a hand.

III. 1.Si id 2.Si se. 3.Si 4.Si

credideris,errabis. id credideris,erres.

} }Dixi te,si id credidisses,errat r m es

1.Si 2.Si 3.Si 4.Si

id id id id

credis,errabis. } credes,errabis }Dixi te,si id crederes,errat r m esse. credas,erres. } crederes,errares.}'

1.Si id credis,errabis. } 2.Si id crecles,errabis. 3.Si id credas,erres. }

}Dico te,si id credas,errat r m esse.

Passive and S pineless Verbs take the circ mioc tion with f t r m f isse 248,N.3.

t ....

O,R.: nisi ea vol ptatem faceret ne man m q idem verterem s. (b) Occasionally in the Logical Condition the F t.Indic.is changed to the F t.Pe riphrastic S bjv.,th s : si adsens r s esset,etiam opinat r m is an Q.0.q otation for si ...adsen tiot r,opinabit r in C.,Ac.,ii.21,67.

fore(f t r m esse) are commonly employed for the active and the Pf .part iciple,with fore for the passive.In 4 the same fading o t of the difference betw een Unf lfilled Present and Past occ rs as in II. 657.Logical Conditions in Oratio Obliq a. 1. Ad haec Ariovist s respondit : si ipse pop lo Romano non praescriberet q emadmod m s o i re teret r,non oportere sese a pop lo Romano in s o i re imped iri,CAES.,B.G.,1.36,2;to this Ariovist s made answer: If he did not prescribe to the Roman people how to exercise their right,he o ght not to be hindered by the Roman people in the exercise of his right.(O.R.: si ego non praescribo,non opor tet me impediri.) 2. Si bon m d cerent,q id pro noxio damnassent ? Si noxi m comperissent,q i d alter m(cons lat m) crederent? L.,xxvii.34,13; if they tho ght him a good man, why had they condemned him as g ilty;if,on the other hand,they had fo nd him g i lty,why did they intr st him with a second cons lship ?(O.R.: si--d citis,q id d amnastis ? si--comperistis,q id creditis ? ) 3. Tit ri s clamitabat,s am sententiam in tramq e partem esse t tam;si nih il esset(O.R.: si nihil erit) d ri s,n llo peric lo ad proximam legionem pervent ros(O.R,: pervenietis);si Gallia omnis c m Germanis consentiret(O.R.: si consen tit) nam esse(O.R.: est) in celeritate positam sal tem,CAES.,B.G.,v.29,6; Tit r i s kept crying o t that his resol tion was safe in either case : if there were( sho ld be) no especial press re,they wo ld get to the next legion witho t danger ;if all Ga l was in leag e with the Germans,their only safety lay in speed. 4. E m omni m labor m finem fore existimabant si hostem Hibero intercl dere pot issent,CAES.,B.C.,1.68,3; they tho ght that wo ld be the end of all(their) toils,if they co ld c t off the enemy from the Ebro.(O.R.: is labor m finis erit (or f erit) si hostem intercl dere pot erim s. 5. [Hi] I g rthae non mediocrem anim m pollicitando accendebant si Micipsa rex occidisset,fore ti sol s imperi N midiae potiret r,S.,I g.,8,1;these person s kindled no little co rage in J g rtha('s heart) by promising over and over tha t if King Micipsa fell,he alone sho ld possess the r le over N midia.(O.R.: si M icipsa occiderit,t sol s imperi potieris.) [420 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.] 6. [Fides data est] si I g rtham vivom a t necat m sibi tradidisset fore t illi senat s inp nitatem et s a omnia concederet,S.,I g.,61,5; his word was ple dged that if he delivered to him J g rtha,alive or dead,the senate wo ld grant h im imp nity,and all that was his.(O.R.: si mihi tradideris,tibi senat s t a omni a concedet.) 7. Non m lto ante rbem captam exa dita vox est ...f t r m esse,nisi provis m esset, t Roma caperet r,C.,Div.,1.45,101;not long before the taking of the ci ty,a voice was heard(saying),that nless preca tions were adopted,Rome wo ld be

3.No.III.,like No.II.,is h

sed chiefly of the f t re.B t in 3 the periphrases wit

taken.(O.R.: nisi provis m erit,Roma capiet r.) 8. Ariovist s respondit si q id ille se velit ill m ad se venire oportere, CAES.,B.G.,1.34,2(656,3,N.2). 9. Ariovist s respondit nisi decedat [Caesar] sese ill m pro hoste habit r m;q od si e m interfecerit,m ltis sese nobilib s principib sq e pop li Romani gr at m esse fact r m,CAES.,B.G.,1.44,12; Ariovist s replied,that nless Caesar wit hdrew,he sho ld regard him as an enemy,and in case he killed him,he wo ld do a f avo r to many men of the highest position among the Roman people.(O.R.: nisi dec edes te pro hoste habebo ...si te interfecero grat m fecero: 244,R.4.) REMARK.Posse is sed as has been stated(656,2,R.). Negar nt dirimi bell m posse nisi Messeniis Achaei Pyl m redderent, L., xxvii.30,13;they said that the war co ld not be stopped nless the Achaeans rest ored Pylos to the Messenians.(O.R.: bell m dirimi non potest(potent) nisi Pyl m reddent.) Docent,si t rris concidisset,non posse milites contineri q in spe praeda e in rbem irr mperent,CAES.,B.C.,11.12,4; they show that if the tower fell,the soldiers co ld not be kept from b rsting into the city in the hope of booty.(O.R .: si conciderit,non poss nt(poter nt) contineri.) 658.Ideal Conditions in Oratio Obliq a. 1. Ait se si rat r "Q am hoc s ave" dict r m,C.,Fin.,ii.27,88; he declares that if he were to be b rnt he wo ld say,"How sweet this is." (O.R.: si rar,di cam,same form as Logical.) 2. Vol ptatem si ipsa pro se loq at r concess ram arbitror Dignitati, C.,Fi n.,iii.i,1;I think that if Pleas re were to speak for herself,she wo ld yield(th e palm) to Virt e. The context shows that the condition is Ideal,not Logical. Si loq at r,concedat.Compare 596,R.1. 659.Unreal Conditions in Oratio Obliq a. 1. Tit ri s clamitabat Eb rones,si [Caesar] adesset,ad castra vent ros [non ] esse,CAES.,B.G.,v.29,2;Tit ri s kept crying o t that if Caesar were there,the Eb rones wo ld not be coming to the camp.'.O.R.; si Caesar adesset,Eb ro es non venirent.) On the rareness of this form,see 599,R.4;and even this passage has been emended into vent ros sese(for esse). [THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.421] 2. [Apparebat] si di ti s vixisset,Hamilcare d ce Poenos arma Italiae inlat ros f isse,L.,xxi.2,2; it was evident that if he had lived longer,the P nics wo ld have carried their arms into Italy nder Hamilcar's cond ct.

3. Nisi eo ipso tempore n ntii de Caesaris victoria essent allati existimab ant pleriq e f t r m f isse t (oppid m) amitteret r,CAES.,B.C.,iii.101,3;had no t news of Caesar's victory been bro ght at that very time,most persons tho ght t he city wo ld have been lost.(O.R.: nisi n ntii allati essent,oppid m amiss m es

set.) NOTE.As the Pl pf.Indic.is sometimes sed(rhetorically) for the S bjv.(254,R.3), so the ordinary Pf .Inf.is sometimes employed instead of the Periphrastic : Nemo mihi pers adebit m ltos praestantes viros tanta esse conatos (=cona t ros f isse) nisi animo cernerent(597,R,1) posteritatem ad se pertinere,C.,Cat. M.,23,82; no one will pers ade me that(so) many eminent men had made s ch mighty endeavo rs,had they not seen with their minds'"(eye) that posterity belonged to them. Agricola solebat narrare s prima in i venta st di m philosophiae acri s ha sisse(O.R.: ha serat),nl pr dentia matris coerc isset,Cf.TAC.,Agr.,4,5;Agrico la sed to relate that in his earliest yo th he wo ld have dr nk in more eagerly the st dy of philosophy,had not his mother's pr dence restrained him. So with pot isse : (Pompei m) pleriq e existimant si acri s inseq i vol isset bell m eo die pot isse finire,CAES.,B.C.,iii.51,3;most people think that if Pompey had(b t) d etermined to follow p more energetically,he co ld have finished the war on that day.(O.R.: si vol isset,pot it,597,R.3.) Namq e illa m ltit dine si sana mens esset(597,B.i) Graeciae,s pplici m Persas dare pot isse,NEP.,xvii.5,2;for with that n mber,if Greece had had(had be en in her) so nd mind,the Persians might have paid the penalty(d e).(O.R.: si sa na mens esset Graeciae,s pplici m Persae dare pot er nt.) Prono ns in Oratio Obliq a. 660.1.The Reflexive is sed according to the principles laid down in 520 ff. 2.The person addressed is s ally ille;less often is.

Of co rse,this does not excl de the ordinary demonstrative se. 3. Hic and iste are commonly changed into ille or is, n nc is changed into t m and t nc, except when already contrasted with t nc,when it is retained(S.,I g.,109,3;iii,1 ). Diodor s [respondit] ill d argent m se pa cis illis dieb s misisse Lilyb ae m, C.,Verr.,iv.18,39(398,R.4).

Ariovist s respondit nisi decedat [Caesar] sese ill m pro hoste habit r m : q od si e m interfecerit,m ltis sese nobilib s principib sq e pop li Romani grat m esse fact r m,CAES.,B.G.,1.44,12(657,9).

[422 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.]

5.Ipse seems to be sed sometimes in O.O.with reference to the principal s bject ,as contrasted with the person addressed.Us ally,however,ipse wo ld have occ rre d in the O.R.as well. Ariovist s respondit : Si ipse pop lo Romano non praescriberet,q emadmod m s o lore teret r,non oportere sese a pop lo Romano in s o i re impediri,CAES .,B.G.,1.36,2(657). 661.Specimens of the conversion of Oratio Obliq a into Oratio Recta. Oratio Obliq a.

Oratio Recta.

1.Ariovist s respondit : Transisse Rhen m sese non s o Transii Rhen m non mea sponte sponte sed rogat m et arcessit m sed rogat s et arcessit s a Gall is; a Gallis;non sine magna spe manon sine magna spe magnisq e gnisq e praemiis dom m propinpraemiis dom m propinq osq e q osq e reliq isse; sedes habere reliq i; sedes habeo in Gallia ab in Gallia ab ipsis concessas,obsides ipsis concessas,obsides ipsor m ipsor m vol ntate dates;stipenvol ntate datos; stipendi m capio di m capere i re belli,q od vici re belli,q od victores victis imtores victis imponere cons erint. ponere cons er nt. Non ego GalNon sese Gallis sed Gallos sibi bellis sed Galli mihi bell m int lel m i t lisse;omnes Galliae civir nt;omnes Galliae civitates ad tates ad se opp gnand m venisse me opp gnand m vener nt et conet contra se castra hab isse;eos tra me castra hab er nt;eae omomnes copias a se no proelio p lnes copiae a me no proelio p lsae sas ac s peratas esse.Si iter m ac s peratae s nt.Si iter m exexperiri velint,se iter m parat m periri vol nt,iter m parat s s m esse decertare;si pace ti velint, decertare,si pace ti vol nt,iniiniq m esse de stipendio rec sare, q m est de stipendio rec sare, q od s a vol ntate ad id temp s q od s a vol ntate ad hoc temp s pependerint.Amicitiam pop li pepender nt.Amicitiam pop li Romani sibi ornamento et praeRomani mihi ornamento et praesidio,non detrimento esse oportere sidio,non detrimento esse oportet idq e se ea spe petisse.Si per idq e ea spe petii.Si per pop l m pop l m Roman m stipendi m Roman m stipendi m remittet r remittat r et dediticii s btrahanet dediticii s btrahent r,non mit r,non min s libenter sese rec san s libenter rec sabo pop li Rot r m pop li Romani amicitiam mani amicitiam q am appetii. q am appetierit.Q od m ltit Q od m ltit dinem Germanor m dinem Germanor m in Galliam in Galliam trad cam,*id mei m trad cat,id se s i m niendi,non niendi,non Galliae imp gnandae Galliae imp gnandae ca sa facere; ca sa facio; ei s rei testimonio est ei s rei testimonio esse q od nisi q od nisi rogat s non veni et q od rogat s non venerit et q od bell m bell m non int li sed defendi. non int lerit sed defenderit. ---------------------------------CAES.,B.G.,1.44. * All sion to the precedi ng speech, otherwise trad co. [THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.423] Oratio Obliq a. Oratio Recta.

4.Nos is below.

sed when the narrator's party is referred to; compare CAES.,B.G,,1.44,

2.His Caesar ita respondit : Eo sibi,min s d bitationis dari Hoc mihi min s d bitationis q od eas res q as legati Helvetii dat r q od eas res q as vos,legati commemorassent memoria teneret Helvetii,commemorastis,memoria atq e eo gravi s ferre q o min s teneo atq e hoc gravi s fero q o merito pop li Romani accidissent; min s merito pop li Romani acciq i si alic i s ini riae sibi consci s der nt;q i si alic i s ini riae f isset non f isse difficile cavere; sibi consci s f isset,non f it diffised eo decept m q od neq e comcile cavere;sed eo decept s q od miss m a se intellegeret q are tineq e commiss m a se intellegebat meret neq e sine ca sa timend m q are timeret neq e sine ca sa tip taret.Q od si veteris cont memend m p tabat.Q od si veteris liae oblivisci vellet,n m etiam recont meliae oblivisci volo,n m centi m ini riar m,q od eo invito etiam recenti m ini riar m,q od iter per provinciam per vim tempme invito iter per provinciam per tassent,q od Aed os,q od Amvim temptastis,q od Aed os,q od barros,q od Allobrogas vexassent Ambarros,q od Allobrogas vexamemoriam deponere posse? Q od stis,memoriam deponere poss m? s a victoria tam insolenter gloriaQ od vestra victoria tam insolenter rent r,q odq e tam di se imp ne gloriamini,q odq e tam di vos t lisse ini rias admirarent r eoimp ne t lisse ini rias admirdmini dem pertinere.Cons esse enim eodem pertinet.Cons evenmt deos immortales q o gravi s hoenim di immortales q o gravi s mines ex comm tatione rer m homines ex comm tatione rer m doleant,q os pro scelere eor m doleant,q os pro scelere eor m lcisci vetint,his sec ndiores inlcisci vol nt,his sec ndiores interd m res et di t rniorem imp terd m res et di t rniorem imp nitatem concedere.C m ea ita nitatem concedere.C m haec ita sint,tamen si obsides ab iis sibi sint,tamen si obsides a vobis mihi dent r, ti ea q ae polliceant r dab nt r, ti ea,q ae pollicemini, fact ros intellegat,et si Aed is de fact ros intellegam et si Aed is de ini riis q as ipsis sociisq e eor m ini riis q as ipsis sociisq e eor m int lerint,item si Allobrogib s int listis,item si Allobrogib s satisfaciant,sese c m iis pacem satisfacietis,ego vobisc m pacem esse fact r m. faciam. CAES.,B.G.,1.14. 3.S lla regi patefecit : Q od polliceat r,senat m et Q od polliceris,senat s et pop pop l m Roman m,q oniam aml s Roman s q oniam ampli s pli s armis val issent,non in graarmis val er nt,non in gratiam tiam habit ros; faci nd m alihabeb nt faci nd m aliq id,q od q id,q od illor m magis q am illor m magis q am t a ret lisse s a ret lisse videret r; id ideo in videat r; id ideo in prompt est, prompt esse,q oniam I g rthae q oniam I g rthae copiam habes, copiam haberet,q em si Romanis q em si Romanis tradideris tibi tradidisset,fore t illi pl rim m pl rim m debebit r; amicitia,foedeberet r;amicitiam,foed s,N d s,N midiae pars,q am n nc midiae partem,q am n nc peteret, petis,t ne ltro adveniet. t nc ltro advent ram. S.,I g.,iii. [424 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.] Oratio Obliq a. 4.Athenienses deploraver nt Oratio Recta.

vastationem pop lationemq e miNon id q erim r q od hostilia serabilem agror m.Neq e se id ab hoste passi s m s.S nt enim q eri q od hostilia ab hoste passi q aedam belli i ra q ae t facere forent; esse enim q aedam belli ita pati est fas.Sata ex ri,dir i i ra q ae t facere ita pati sit fas. tecta,praedas homin m pecor mSata ex ri,dir i tecta,praedas q e agi misera magis q am indigna homin m pecor mq e agi misera patienti s nt;ver m enim verO id magis q am indigna patienti esse; q erim r q od is,q i Romanos ver m enim vero id se q eri,q od alienigenas et barbaros vocat,adeo is,q i Romanos alienigenas et baromnia sim l divina h manaq e baros vocet,adeo omnia sim l dii ra poll it t priore pop latione vina h manaq e i ra poll erit t c m infernis diis,sec nda c m s priore pop latione c m infernis peris bell m nefari m gesserit. diis,sec nda c m s peris bell m Omnia sep lcra mon mentaq e dinefari m gesserit.Omnia sep lr ta s nt in finib s nostris,omnicra mon mentaq e dir ta esse in m n dati manes,n lli s ossa terra finib s s is,omni m n datos teg nt r.Q alem terram Atticam manes,n lli s ossa terra tegi. fecit,exornatam q ondam op lenQ alem terram Atticam fecerit, tamq e,talem is,si licebit(or : exornatam q ondam op lentamliceat) Aetoliam Graeciamq e omq e,talem e m si liceat Aetoliam nem faciet(or : faciat).Urbis Graeciamq e omnem fact r m. q oq e nostrae similis deformitas Urbis q oq e s ae similem defOrf isset,nisi Romani s bvenissent. mitatem f t ram f isse,nisi Romani s bvenissent. L.,xxxi.30. INVOLVED ORATIO OBLIQUA.ATTRACTION OF MOOD. 662.Oratio Obliq a proper depends on some verb of Thinking or Saying,expressed o r nderstood.In a more general sense the term O.Obliq a is sed of all complemen tary cla ses that belong to ideal relations.The principle is the same in both se ts of sentences,for in the one,as in the other,the Infinitive takes its dependen cies in the S bj nctive,on acco nt of the close relation between the Ideal mood and the S bstantive Idea of the verb.Hence the favo rite combination of the Infi nitive and the Ideal Second person : Difficile est amicitiam manere si a virt te defeceris,C.,Lael.,ii,87; it is hard for friendship to abide if yo (one) have fallen away from virt e. Propri m h manl ingenil est odisse q em laeseris,TAC.,Agr.,42,4;it is(pec liar t o) h man nat re to hate whom yo have inj red.(B t odisti q em laesisti.) The so-called attraction of mood,by which cla ses originally Indicative become S bj nctive in dependence on S bj nctives,is another phase of the same general pr inciple. [THE ABEIDGED SENTENCE.425] 663.1.All cla ses which depend on Infinitives and S bj nctives,and form an integ ral part of the tho ght,are p t in the S bj nctive(S bj nctive by Attraction). Recordatione nostrae amicitiae sic fr or t beate vixisse videar q ia co m Scipione vixerim,C.,Lael,,4,15 : I enjoy the remembrance of o r friendship so m ch that I seem to have lived happily beca se I lived with Scipio. Vereor ne d m min ere velim laborem a geam,C.,Leg.,i,4,12; I fear lest w hile I am wishing to lessen the toil I may increase it(d m min ere volo,a geo). isto bono tare d m adsit,c m absit,ne req iras,C.,Cat.M.,10,33(263,2,a)

. Q are fiebat t omni m oc los q otiesc mq e in p blic m prodisset ad se converteret,NEP.,vii.3,5(567) (q otiesc mq e prodierat convertebat). Nescire q id anteq am nat s sis accident,id est semper esse p er m, C.,O r.,34,120;not to know what happened before yo were born,(that) is to be always a boy. Fra s fidem in parvis sibi praestr it t c m operae preti m sit,c m merc ede magna fallat,L.,xxviii.42,7;fra d lays itself a fo ndation of credit in smal l things in order that when it is worth while it may make a great profit by chea ting. [Araneolae] rete tex nt t si q id inhaeserit conficiant, C.,N.D.,ii.48, 123(567;si q id inhaesit confici nt). Abe nti si q id poposcerit concedere moris,TAC.,G.,21,4;to the departing (g est) it is c stomary to grant anything that he asks(si q id poposcit conced n t). NOTES.1.D m not nfreq ently resists the Attraction both in prose and poetry : Tant m ne noceas d m vis prodesse videto,Ov.,Tr..1.1,101(548). 2.On the retention of the Indic.in Relative cla ses,see 628,B. 2.PARTIAL OBLIQUITY.(a) From this it is easy to see how the S bj nctive came to be sed in a Generic or Iterative sense after Tenses of Contin ance.Present,Impe rfect,and F t re Indicative may all involve the Notion of Habit,Will,Inclination ,Endeavo r,and the complementary cla ses wo ld follow the sense rather than the form.For examples,see 567,N. (6) So also is explained the se of the S bj nctive in Ca sal Sentences,and espe cially in Conditional Sentences,where the Apodosis is embodied in the leading ve rb. (I g rtha) timebat iram senat s(= ne irasceret r senat s) ni par isset l egatis, S.,I g.,25,7(601). [Ubiis] a xili m s m(= se a xiliat r m) pollicit s est,si ab S ebis pre merent r, CAES.,B.G.,iv.19,1. Praetor aedem(= se aedificat r m) Diovi vovit si eo die hostis f disset, L.,xxxi. 21,12. The idea of O.O.is shown in the tense : Si per Metell m licit m esset matres veniebant(vent rae erant), C.,Verr. ,v.49,129. [Dictator] ad hostem d cit,n llo loco,nisi necessitas cogeret fort nae s e commiss r s, L.,xxii.12,2(438,N.). [426 PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES.] PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES.

664.Participles are sed in Latin even more extensively than in English,to expre ss a great variety of s bordinate relations,s ch as Time and Circ mstance,Ca se and Occasion,Condition and Concession.The classification cannot always be exact, as one kind blends with another. REMARKS.I.It is sometimes convenient to translate a Participial Sentence by a co ordinate cla se,b t the Participle itself is never coordinate,and s ch cla ses a re never eq ivalents.(410,R.2.) Manli s Gall m caes ra torq e spoliavit,L.,vi.42,5; Manli s slew the Ga l and st ripped him of his neckchain(after slaying the Ga l stripped him of his neckchain ,having slain,etc.). (Miltiades) capitis absol t s,pec nia m ltat s est,NEP.,1.7,6; Miltiades (tho gh) acq itted of a capital charge,was m lcted() in(a s m of) money(was acq itt ed,b t m lcted). 2.A common translation of the Participle is an abstract s bstantive; see 325,R.3 ; 437,N.2. Nec terra m tata m tavit mores,L.,xxxvii.54,18;nor hath the change of la nd changed the character. Te cer Ulixen re m facit Aiacis occisi,QUINT.,iv.2,13;Te cer indicts Uly sses for the m rder of Ajax. Inter haec parata atq e decreta,S..C.,43,3. 3.On the Participle after verbs of Perception and Representation,see 536. 665.Participles may represent Time When. Alexander moriens an l m s m dederat Perdiccae,NEP.,xviii.2,1; Alexande r(when he was) dying,had given his ring to Perdiccas. Dionysi s tyrann s Syrac sis exp ls s Corinthi p eros docebat, C.,T sc., iii.12,27; Dionysi s the tyrant,(after he had been) exiled from Syrac se(after h is exile from Syrac se),ta ght(a) boys'(school) at Corinth. Ablative Absol te. (Solon et Pisistrat s) Servio T llio regnante vig er nt,C.,Br.,10,39; So lon and Pisistrat s flo rished when Servi s T lli s was king(in the reign of Ser vi s T lli s). Sole orto Volsci se circ mvallatos vider nt,Cf.L.,iv.9,13; when the s n was risen(after s nrise),the Volscians saw that they were s rro nded by lines of intrenchment. NOTES.1.On the Abl.Abe.of the simple Participle,see 410,N.4. 2.SUETONIUS ses the Abl.Abe.as well as the simple Participle with ante(pri s) q am : (Tiberi s) excess m A g sti non pri s palam fecit q am Agrippa i vene in terempto,Tib.,22;see also I l.,58. [PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES.427] 666.Participles may represent Ca se Why.

Areopagitae damnaver nt p er m cot rnic m oc los er entem,Cf.QUINT.,v.9, 13; the co rt of Mars'Hill condemned a boy for pl cking o t(beca se he pl cked o t) the eyes of q ails(). Athenienses Alcibiadem corr pt m a rege Persar m capere nol isse Cymen a rg ebant,Cf.NEP.,vii.7,2; the Athenians charged Alcibiades with having been nwi lling to take Cyme(beca se he had been) bribed by the King of Persia. Ablative Absol te. (Romani veteres) regnari omnes volebant libertatis d lcedine nond m expe rta, L.,1.17,3;the old Romans all wished to have a king over them (beca se they had) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty. NOTE.An apparent ca se is given by t,as,vel t,as,for instance,tamq am,(so) as,q asi,as if,see 602,N.3.

In this sage CICERO and CAESAR are very caref l,employing only q asi, t,LIVY in trod ces tamq am, tpote,vel t,and the tendency grows ntil it reaches its c lmin ation in TACITUS. 667: Participles may represent Condition and Concession. Si latet ars predest,affert deprensa p dorem,Ov.,A.A.,ii.313(593,2). [Ris s] interd m ita repente er mpit t e m c pientes tenere neq eam s,C f.C.,Or.,ii.58,235(609). (Miltiades) capitis absol t s,pec nia m ltat s est,NEP.,1.7,6(664,R.1). Ablative Absol te. Maximas virt tes iacere omnes necesse est vol ptate dominante, C.,Fin.,i i.35,117(593,2). NOTE.On the combination of q amq am,q amvis,and etsi with the Participle,see 609,N.1; nisi also is not ncommon; tamen is sometimes added in the principal cla se. 668.Participles may represent Relative Cla ses(637). Omnes ali d agentes,ali d sim lantes,perfidi(s nt),C.,Off.,iii.14,60 (63 7).

REMARK.So-called,q i dicit r,vocat r,q em vocant;above-mentioned,q em antea,s pr a dixim s. 669.F t re Participle(Active).The F t re Participle is a verbal adjective,denoti ng Capability and Tendency,chiefly employed in the older lang age with s m,I am, as a periphrastic tense.In later Latin it is sed freely,j st as the Present and Perfect Participles,to express s bordinate relations. Pec liar is the free se of it in Sentences of Design,and especially noticeable the compactness gained by the employment of it in Conditional Relations.

[Pisistrat s] Homeri libros conf ses antea sic dispos isse dicit r t n nc habem s,C.,Or.,iii.34,137(637).

[428 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.] 670.In later Latin,the F t re Participle(active) is sed to represent s bordinat e relations(438,N.) : 1.Time When. (Tiberi s) traiect r s(= com traiect r s esset) Rhen m commeat m non tra nsmisit, SUET.,Tib,,18; when Tiberi s was abo t to cross the Rhine,he did not se nd over the provisions. 2.Ca se Why. Deridic lo f it senex foedissimae ad lationis tant m infamia s r s, TAC .,Ann.,iii.57,3; a b tt() of ridic le was the old man,as infamy was the only gain he wo ld make by his fo l fawning. Antioch s sgc r s de bello Romano erat tamq am non transit ris in Asiam Romania, L.,xxxvi.41,1(602,N.3). 3.P rpose( s ally after a verb of Motion). (Marobod s) misit legates ad Tiberi m orat ros a xilia, TAC.,Ann.ii.46( 438,N.). Cons l Larisam est profect s,ibi de s mma belli cons ltat r s,L.,xxxvi.1 4,5. NOTE.The Pr.Participle is sometimes sed in a similar sense,b t the P rpose is o nly an inference : Legati vener nt n ntiantes Asiae q oq e civitates sollicitari, L.,xxxi.2 ,1;envoys came with the anno ncement that the states of Asia also were tampered with( ). 4.Condition and Concession. (1) Protasis. Dedit ris se Hannibali f isse accersend m Romanor m praesidi m ? L.,xxni .44,2;if they had been ready to s rrender to Hannibal,wo ld they have had to sen d for a Roman garrison ?(= si dedit ri f issent,O.R.: si dedit ri f er nt.) (2) Apodosis. Q ati nt arma,r pt ri imperi m ni d cant r,TAC.,H.,iii.19,3; they clash their arms,ready to break orders,if they be not led forward. Libr m misi exigenti tibi,miss r s etsi non exegisses,PLIN.,Ep..iii.13,1 ;I have sent yo the book,as yo exacted it,altho gh I sho ld have sent it even if yo had not exacted it. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 671.The Latin lang age allows greater freedom in the arrangement of words than t he English.This freedom is,of co rse,d e to its greater wealth of inflections. [ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.429]

Two elements enter into the composition of a Latin Sentence,governing to some ex tent its arrangement : Grammar and Rhetoric. 672.1.Grammatical arrangement has for its object clearness.It shows the ideas in the order of development in the mind of the speaker.By Grammatical arrangement the sentence grows nder the view. 2.Rhetorical arrangement has for its objects Emphasis and Ehythm.It presents a s entence already developed in s ch a way that the attention is directed to certai n parts of it especially. (a) Emphasis is prod ced : 1.By reversing the ordinary position. 2.By approximation of similars or opposites. 3.By separation. In all sentences Beginning and End are emphatic points.In long sentences the Mea ns as well as the Extremes are the points of emphasis. (b) Rhythm.M ch depends on the rhythmical order of words,for which the treatises of the ancients are to be cons lted.Especially avoided are poetic rhythms.So,fo r example,the Dactyl and Spondee,or close of an Hexameter at the end of a period . 673.Two f rther principles seem to nderlie the arrangement of Latin sentences : (a) that of the ascending constr ction;(b) that of the descending constr ction.I n the ascending constr ction,which is more common,the principal word is placed l ast,and the s bordinate ones,in the order of their importance,precede.In the des cending constr ction the reverse is the process.The descending constr ction is r eg lar in definitions. 674.RULE I.The most simple arrangement of a sentence is as follows : 1.The S bject and its Modifiers. 2.The Predicate and its Modifiers. 1. Dionysi s tyrann s,Syrac sis exp ls s,2.Corinthi p eros docebat, C.,T sc .,iii.12,27(665). Rhetorical positions : Potentes seq it r invidia,QUINT.,iv.1,14(477,N.4). Nobis non satisfacit ipse DSmosthenes,Cf.C.,Or.,29,104(552,R.i). [430 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.] Discript s(erat) pop l s cens ,ordinib s,aetatib s,C.,Leg.,iii.ig,44(397 ). Intra moenia s nt hostes,S.,C.,52,35(477). REMARK.The modifiers of the predicate stand in the order of their importance.The following arrangement is common :

1.Place,Time,Ca se,or Means.2.Indirect Object.3.Direct Object.4.Adverb.5.Verb. NOTE.The postponement of the s bject is rare and always for definite reasons in the classical period;later it becomes a mannerism,especially in the elder PLINY; to a lees degree in NEPOS and LIVY. 675.RULE II.Interrogative Sentences begin with the interrogative,s bordinate cla ses with the leading particle or relative. Q is e m diligat q em met at ? C.,Lael.,15,53(629). Postq am Caesar pervenit obsides poposcit,CAES.,B.G.,1.27,3(561). Si spirit m d cit vivit,C.,Inv.,1.46,86(595). Q i timere desierint odisse incipient,TAC.,Agr.,32(567). Rhetorical position : [Nat ram] si seq em r d cem,n mq am aberrabim s,C.,Off.,1.28,100(595). De f t ris reb s etsi semper difficile est dicere,tamen interd m coniect ra possis accedere,C.,Fam.,vi.4,1(604).

[Cato] mirari se aiebat q od non rideret har spex,har spicem c m vidisse t, C.,Div.,ii.24,51 (567). 676.RULE III.An Adjective s ally precedes,b t often follows,the word to which i t belongs;a dependent Genitive s ally follows the governing word;so too does a word in Apposition. Saepe magna indoles virt tis pri sq am rei p blicae prodesse pot isset e xstincta est, C.,Ph.,v.17,47(577). Sens m oc lor m praecipit anim s,QUINT.,vi.2,6(540). Rhetorical position : [Isocrates] q erit r pl s honoris corpor m q am animor m virt tib s dari , QUINT.,iii.8,9(542,R.). [Ager],c m m ltos annos q ievit, beriores efferre fr ges solet, C.,Br.,4 ,16(567). Verem r ne par m hic liber mellis et absinthii m lt m habere videat r, Q UINT.,iii.i,5(550). REMARKS.1.The demonstrative prono ns reg larly precede; the possessives reg larl y follow. Verem r ne hic liber absinthii m lt m habere videat r, QUINT.,iii.i,5(55 0), Torq at s fili m s m necari i ssit,S.,C.,52,30(540). [ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.431] Rhetorical position: Recordare temp s ill d,c m pater C rio maerens iacebat in lecto, C.,Ph.,

ii.18,45(580). Osc lat r tigrim s s c stos,SEN.,E.M.,85,41 (309,2). 2.Ordinals reg larly follow,Cardinals reg larly precede the s bstantive. 3.Many expressions have become fixed form lae : so titles,proper names,and the l ike;see 288. Facin s est vincire civem Roman m,C.,Verr.,v.66,170(535). 4.The titles rex,imperator,etc.,freq ently precede the proper name with which th ey are in apposition. 5.New modifiers of either element may be inserted,prefixed,or added : Catonem vidi in bibliotheca sedentem m ltis circ mf s m Stoicor m libris ,C.,Fin.,Hi.2,7(536). Saepe magna indoles virt tis pri sq am rei p blicae prodesse pot isset e xstincta est,C.,Ph.,v.17,47(577). At videte hominis intolerabilem a daciam,C.,Dom.,44,115(488) . (Aristides) interf it p gnae navali ap d Salamina,NEP.,III.2,1(

NOTES.1.The tendency in Latin was to reverse the Indo-Germanic r le by which an attrib tive adjective and a dependent Genitive preceded the governing word.B t i n early Latin the adjective still holds its place more often before its s bstant ive,while the Genitive has already s cc mbed for the most part to the tendency.I n the classical period the adjective is more often sed after its s bstantive.B t neither position can be strictly called rhetorical.The same is tr e of the pos sessive prono n. 2.The original force of a following adjective or Genitive was restrictive or app ositional,while,when it preceded,it formed a close compo nd with its s bstantive ;th s, bon s homo,a good man(one idea); homo bon s,a man(one idea) who is good (another idea). In classical Latin this distinction is no longer inevitable,tho gh it is often e ssential. 677.RULE IV.Adverbs are commonly p t next to their verb(before it when it ends a sentence),and immediately before their adjective or adverb. Zenonem c m Athenis essem a diebam freq enter ,C.,N.D.,1.21,59 (585). Caedi discip los minime velim,QUINT.,1.3,13(257). Vix c iq am pers adebat r Graecia omni cess res(Romanes), L.,xxxiii.32,3 (546,R.i). [Ris s] interd m ita repente er mpit t e m c pientes tenere neq eam s,C .,Or.,ii.58,235(609).. Rhetorical positions : [iram] bene Enni s initi m dixit Insaniae,C.,T sc.,iv.23,52(440).

Saepe magna indoles virt tis pri sq am rei p blicae prodesse pot isset e xstincta est,C.,Ph.,v.17,47(577). REMARKS.1.Fere,paene,prope, s ally follow: Neine fere saltat sobri s nisi forte Insanit,C.,M r.,6,13(591,R.4). 2.Negatives always precede,see 448. [432 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.] NOTE.The separation of adverbs from their adjectives is rare,except in the case of tam and q am,which PLAUTUS,TERENCE,CICERO,and later a thors often separate,e. g.,by a preposition : tam ab ten i exitio. Hyperbaton with other adverbs is rare. 678.RULE V.Prepositions reg larly precede their case (413). A recta conscientia travers m ng em non oportet discedere, C.,Att.,xiii .20,4(328,1). REMARKS.1.On vers s,ten s,and the postposition of c m in combination with the pe rsonal prono ns and the relative,see 418,R.1. 2.Monosyllabic prepositions are not nfreq ently p t between the adjective and s bstantive : magna c m c ra.See 413,R.2.

Less freq ently they are placed between the Gen.and s bstantive; except when the relative is employed. 3.Dissyllabic prepositions are sometimes p t after their case(Anastrophe),especi ally after a relative or demonstrative : most freq ently contra,inter,propter.So also adverbs.See 413,R.1. 4.The preposition may be separated from its case by a Gen.or an adverb(413,R.3) : Ad Appi Cla di senect tem accedebat etiam t caec s esset, C.,Cat.M.,6,1 6(553,4). 5.Monosyllabic prepositions,s ch as c m,ex,de,post, sometimes append the enclitics -q e,-ve,-ne, as, exq e iis,and from them. Us ally,however,the enclitics join the dependent s bstantive : in patriamq e rediit,and ret rned to his co ntry.See 413,N.3. On the position of per,see 413,N.2. 679.RULE VI.Particles vary.

Enim commonly takes the second,seldom the third place; nam and namq e are reg larly prepositive.See 498,N.1.

Ergo in the syllogism precedes,elsewhere follows; igit r is commonly second or third; itaq e reg larly first.See 502,N.2;500,R,

Tamen is first,b t may follow an emphatic word.See 490. Etiam s ally precedes, q oq e always follows.See 478,479. Q idem and dem m(at length) follow the word to which they belong. 680.RULE VII.A word that belongs to more than one word reg larly stands before t hem all,or after them all,sometimes after the first(291). Ariovist s respondit m ltis sese nobilib s principib sq e pop li Romani grat m esse fact r m,CAES.,B.G.,1.44,12(657,9). [Isocrates] q erit r pl s honoris corpor m q am animor m virt tib s dari , QUINT.,iii.8,9(542,R.). 4,R.i).

[ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES.433] 681.RULE VIII.Words of kindred or opposite meaning are often p t side by side fo r the sake of complement or contrast. Man s man m lavat,one hand washes the other. [Cato] mirari se aiebat q od non rideret har spex,har spicem c m vidisse t, C.,Div.,ii.24,51(567). Emit morte immortalitatem,QUINT.,ix.3,71(404).

Long m est m lor m perseq i

tilitates et asinor m, C.,N.D.,ii.64,159(25

682.RULE IX.- Contrasted Pairs -. When pairs are contrasted,the second is p t in the same order as the first,b t often in inverse order.The employment of the same order is called Anaphora(repet ition).The inverse order is called Chiasm s,or crosswise position,and gives alte rnate stress.The principle is of wide application,not merely in the simple sente nce b t also in the period. Same order(Anaphora). Fort na(i) vestra(2) facit t irae(1) meae(2) temperem, L.,xxxvi.35,3(55 3,i). Malo te sapiens(1) hostis(2) met at q am st lti(1) cives (2) la dent, L. ,xxii.39,20(546,R.2). Inverse order(Chiasm s). Ante videm s(1) f lgorem(2) q am son m(2) a diam s(1), SEN.,N.Q.,ii.12,6 (577). Parvi s nt foris(1) arma(2) nisi est consili m(2) domi (1), C.,Off.,1.22 ,76(411,R.2). REMARK.Chiasm s is from the Greek letter X(chi): 1.Foris 2.consili m

-2.arma -1.domi.

683.Poetical Pec liarities. In the poets we find many varieties of arrangement of s bstantive and adjective ,designed to draw especial attention to the idea or to colo r the verse.These oc c r chiefly in the Hexameter and Pentameter,b t to a lesser degree also in other meas res.Th s the s bstantive and adjective are p t either at the end of each h emistich,or at the beginning of each hemistich,or one is at the end of the first and the other at the beginning of the second. Cerber s et n llas hodie petat improb s mbras | et iaceat tacita lapsa catena sera,PROP.,iv.(v.) n,25. P niceo stabis s ras evincta coth rno,V.,EC.,7,32. Me similem vestris morib s esse p tas ? PROP.,ii.(iii.) 29(27),32. ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. 684.A period is a compo nd sentence with one or more s bordinate cla ses,in whic h sentence the meaning is kept s spended to the close. [434 ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES.] 685.Latin periods may be divided into two classes : 1.Responsive or Apodotic,in which a Protasis has an Apodosis. 2.Intercalary or Enthetic,in which the vario s items are inserted in their prope r place between S bject and Predicate. Ut saepe homines aegri morbo gravi,c m aest febriq e iactant r,si aq am gelidam biber nt,primo relevari vident r,deinde m lto gravi s vehementi sq e af

flictant r : sic hic morb s,q i est in re p blica,relevat s isti s poena,vehemen ti s,reliq is vivis,ingravescet,C.,Cat.,I.13,31(Apodotic). Cat volc s,rex dimidiae partis Eb ron m,q i na c m Ambiorige consili m inierat,aetate iam confect s,c m laborem a t belli a t f gae ferre non posset,om nib s precib s detestat s Ambiorigem,q i ei s consilii a ctor f isset,taxo,c i s magna in Gallia Germaniaq e copia est,se exanimavit,CAES.,B.G.,vi.31,5(Enthetic ). 686.NAGELSBACH'S caref l st dy of the s bject has led to the following res lts.T he simplest period is composed of one s bordinate(a) and one principal(A) cla se ;the principal varieties are :(1) a : A,where the principal cla se follows the s bordinate;(2) A(a) A,where the s bordinate cla se is inserted within the princi pal cla se;(3) A | a,where the principal cla se precedes the s bordinate cla se; (4) a(A) a,where the principal cla se is inserted within the s bordinate cla se. When two s bordinate cla ses(a,b),independent of each other,are sed,the forms a re:(5) a : A | b;(6)a:A(b)a;(7)A(a)A | b;(8) A(a) A(b) A;(9) a :(b : A).If the d ependent cla ses are of different degree(a,a,A),that is,one depending pon the o ther,some fifteen additional forms are allowable. Some examples are : a(A) a : illor m vides q am niteat oratio,C.,Fin.,iv.3,5.a :(b : A) : c r nolint,etiamsi taceant,satis dic nt,C.,Div.in Caec.,6,21. : : A : qu d g tur,cum peruero,f c e er t t tuere,C.,Ph.,v.2,6. : A | : ud qu d t, c re cup o,quod c ob cure,C.,Att., .7,4. | (A) : o ut ex pect remu e,re qu t qu rog ret,VARRO,R.R.,I.2,32.A | ( ) : m do t b p e,totum ut v de cu u mod t,C.,Att.,I.12,2.

[FIGURE .435]

H tor ,h v g much occ o for de cr pt o , re o pro e to u e the de ce d g per od, .e.,the form wh ch the pr c p c u e precede . o e pec y N EPO .LIVY ke o to u e two depe de t ubord te c u e y det c y. The Or tor c per od re much more d ver e d comp c ted,ow g to the gre te r v r ety of effect t wh ch they m.We f d,however,the ce d g tructure,w here the emph co t u y ce d g u t t cu m te t the e d,more c ommo .

FIGURE OF YNTAX AND RHETORIC.

Vo eum regem u tum e e p t em qu eg tum popu Rom m VINCULI AC VERBERIBU ATQUE OMNI UPPLICIO EXCRUCIATUM NECAVIT ?

ee

exce e t ex mp e

C.,Imp.,5,11 : co u re

       

   

    

 

 

dete tu ub

... ccep t p ebem proturb t.

 

A other commo per od,deve oped d much ked by LIVY, d : : A,co t g of( ) p rt c p c u e;(2) c u e u ct o ;(3) the pr c p c u e.Cf.TAC.,A ., .69,3,

     

Id ub

d x

et h t m

ho t um f e

em tteb t,L.,I.42,13. ter by TACITU ,w troduced by co j

687.Per od re o d v ded to H tor c d Or tor c .The former re, ru e, mp e.The mo t commo form : A, .e.,where ubord te c u e owed by e d g c u e :

fo

  

  

  

  

688.E p the om o of ome tegr p rt of the thought, uch the u b t t ve of the dject ve(204,N.1),the copu of the pred c te(209),the verb of the dverb.

690.Zeugm or y ep ju ct o of two word u der the me reg me ,or w t h the me mod f er, though the commo f ctor tr ct y pp e but to o e.

[436 FIGURE .]

cum t ce t c m t,C.,C t.,1.8,21 (582).



V lg s et m lt t ,the c mm her . V et r t (C.,Verr.,1.16,47),sc e t f c meth VI et rm s,by f rce f rms.

698.He d dy ( ) c s sts g v g lys s . ste f c mplex, bst t ves c ecte by c p l t ve c j ct , ste f e s bst t ve ject ve r ttr b t ve ge t ve.

                

 

 

697.A co utho ,or w t of eque ce,occur whe ged t cour e.

 

         

   

Lyd

d c per om e

te deo oro,H.,O.,1.8,1(413,N.2). the cheme of e te ce ch

 

696.Hyperb to ,Tr ject o ,

v o e t d p ceme t of word .

tectum for domum,pupp

for

v ,mucro for g d u ,etc.

695. y ecdoche

the u e of the p rt for the who e,or the rever e :

694.Oxymoro

the u e of word

pp re t y co tr d ctory of e ch other :

d re c

bu

u tro ,V.,A.,

.61.

 

 

Hyp

ge

terch ge

the re t o

vo O C

ope precor,V.,A., x.525.

693.E

ge

h ft from o e form to

692.P eo

Quo

ego the u e of uperf uou word . other :

of word :

 

691.Apo dpe rhetor c the f mou Verg

bre k g off before the c o e of the e te ce,



 

  

M u g out h d

c upp ce voce d(utter g) upp

d T ber um te de ,TAC.,A ., .29,2; t cr e to T ber u .

tretch

 

T m fe x e e qu m formo

m (=e ) ve em,Ov.,Am.,I.8,27(302).

689.Br chy ogy(brev oque t ) to be upp ed more or e

f ure to repe t mod f ed form.

e eme t wh ch

ofte

  

 

 

REMARK.Whe the e p def t much bu ed by comme t tor

 

U de domo? V.,A.,v

.114(391,R.2). te,do ot ttempt to upp y t.The f gure the exp t o of gr mm t c phe ome .

   

p tt g

699.C str ct Pr eg s. S -c lle c str ct pr eg s s th g b t ext e e ppl c t f the cc s t ve f the I er Object(Object Effecte ).The res lt s v lve , t st ctly st te .

[PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.437] PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.

q m pr ,q m t,q m q (298). 9.I c mp r g tw q l t es, se e ther m g s q m

12.The Reflex ve s se reg l rly whe refere ce s m e t the gr mm t c l s b ject;freq e tly whe refere ce s m e t the ct l s bject(309).

 

13.The Reflex ve s se

f the pr c p l s bject,whe

refere ce

s m e t the

 

11.The Ge t ve f rms me ,t ,s , str ,vestr , re t ves; str m vestr m s p rt t ve(304,2).

se m

ly

s bject ve ge



10.S perl t ve's e t g r er seq e ce re fte s lly prece e the r s bst t ve(291,R.2).





      

 

w th the p s t ve, r

ble c mp r t ve(299). se p rt t vely the

    

8.D spr p rt

c te by the c mp r t ve w th







  

 

7.The Rel t ve

grees w th

ts

tece e t

ge er, mber,

pers (614).



  

6.The App s t ve grees w th pers (321).

ts s bject

c se; f p ss ble, ls

5.The Pre c te s bst t ve grees w th

ts s bject

c se(211). mber

 

  

4.The c mm Attr b te y w th the m st mp rt

f tw r m re s bst t ves t(290).

grees w th the

e rest,r rel

3.The c mm Pre c te f tw r m re s bjects s p t the Pl r l(285);whe th e ge ers re ffere t, t t kes the str gest ge er r the e rest(286);whe t he pers s re ffere t, t t kes the f rst prefere ce t the sec ,the sec prefere ce t the th r (287).





     



                

2.The A ject ve grees w th

ts s bject

ge er, mber,





 

 

 

1.The Verb

grees w th

ts s bject

mber

 

   

ec r p lvere s r

,H.,O., . ,22(449,R.2).

pers (211). c se (211).



   

700.L t tes, r U erst teme t, s the se f th meets the e r.Th s s espec lly c mm

express by wh ch m re s me w th the Neg t ve.

 

 



Ex t m r t t).

r t t,Cf.TAC.,A .,x

. ,1;he pr v kes estr ct

ex t m t

  

 

                 



 

f ger q e,t

be tterly r te .



 

S tw verbs m y be tr sl te by

verb

verb :

 



[438 PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.] 18.The P te t l f the Prese t r F t re s the Prese t r Perfect S bj ct ve( 257);the P te t l f the P st s the Imperfect S bj ct ve(258).



   



 

31.The Abl t ve f the Ger rely M er(431).

Ger

ve

s se t

e te Me s

C se,r



    

30.The Acc s t ve f the Ger T k g,Se g Le v g,etc.,t

Ger ve s se fter verbs c te Des g (430).

   

29.The D t ve f the Ger Ger ve s se m ly p st-cl ss c l L t fter w r s f F t ess F ct ; ls fter w r s f C p c ty A pt t , t express Des g (429).

f G v g

      

      

 

  

28.The Ge t ve f the Ger ject ves th t req re

Ger ve s se ch efly c mpleme t(428).

fter s bst t ves

  

27.After verbs f S y g,Sh w g,Bel ev g, Perce v g,the Prese t I f t ve expresses ct c temp r ry w th th t f the g ver g verb,the Perfect, ct pr r t t,the F t re, ct f t re t t(530).

  





 

      

  

26.The Acc s t ve

I f

t ve s se

Excl m t

(534).

 

  

25.The Acc s t ve

I f

t ve s se

s the bject f verbs f Em t

(533).



  

24.The Acc s t ve re(532).

I f

t ve s se

s the bject f verbs f W ll

 

23.The I f t ve s se s the bject f verbs f W ll,P wer,D ty,H b t,I cl t ,Res lve,C t ce,E ,etc.(423).

 

22.The I f t ve,w th r w th t s bject,m y be tre te 22), bject(423), r pre c te(424).

   

      

 

    

 



   

 

21.The Neg t l e w c ve

ve f the Imper t ve s reg l rly w th the I f t ve;s met mes th the Perfect S bj ct ve(270,R.2), r w th the S bj ct ve(271) s ls se . s e ter s bject(4

Des

   



 



20.The F rst Imper t ve l lme t(268).

ks f rw r t

mme

te,the Sec

t c

t ge t,f lf



g.The Opt t ve S bj ct ve m y be se t express 62), C mm (263), r C cess (264).

W sh(260),

Assever t



 

 

17.The I c t ve, t the S bj ct ve, s se r,Obl g t , Necess ty(254,R. ).

express

s f P ss b l ty,P we

 

    

                

16.W th w r s f I cl t P s t ,T me Se s ,the R.6).

D s cl t ,K wle ge Ig r ce,Or er ject ve s s lly empl ye f r the verb(325,

 

 



  

 

15.The App s t ve t

p ssess ve pr

the Ge t ve(321,R.2).


(2

 

                

14.The P ssess ve Pr ve the F rst Sec

s se ste f the P ssess ve r S bject ve Ge t Pers s(362,364).



    

th ght r w ll f th t s bject; he ce, I f s, Se te ces f Des g , Or t Obl q

t ve cl ses, r I (521).

rect Q est

  

 

  

 

 

  



 

 

       

[PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.439]

39.Verbs f Seem g,Bec m g,w th the p ss ve f verbs f M k g,Ch s g,Sh w g,Th k g, C ll g,t ke tw N m t ves, e f the s bject, e f the pre c te(206). 40.W th p ss ve verbs f S y g,Sh w g,Bel ev g, Perce v g,the Acc s t ve s bject f the I f t ve bec mes the N m t ve s bject f the le g verb(528 ).

49.Verbs f Rem g,Remember g, F rgett g t ke s lly the Ge t ve(376); b t s met mes the Acc s t ve,espec lly f th gs(376,R.).



 

 

51.Verbs

f Acc s g,C v ct g,C

em

g,

Acq tt g,t ke the Ge t ve





50.Impers l verbs f Em t t ke the Acc s t ve he Ge t ve f the Exc t g C se(371).

f the Pers

Wh

Feels,

 

48.A ject ves f F l ess W t, f K wle ge Ig r ce, f Des re D sg st, f P rt c p t P wer,m y t ke the Ge t ve(374).Als s me prese t p rt c ples se s ject ves, l ter L t s me verb ls - x(375).



 

                   

 

 

 



47.The P rt t ve Ge t ve st

s f r the wh le t wh ch

p rt bel gs(367).



 

46.The Ge t ves f Q l ty

P ssess

m y be se

s pre c tes(366).

   

   

45.Esse t l r perm e t q l t es re p t t ve(365); exter l tr s e t q l t es t ve(400).See N .82.

the Ge t ve, lw ys w th the Abl t ve, lw ys w th

    

44.The S bject ve Ge t ve s se f the s bject f the ct s bst t ve(363, );the Object ve Ge t ve f the bject f th t

c te by the ct (363,2). jec jec



  



 

  

 

43.The P ssess ve Ge t ve .

s se

f the Th r Pers

e te p ssess

(362)

f t

 

42.The Epexeget c l Ge t ve( r Ge t ve m,c lp ,etc.(361,2).

f Expl

) s se

fter ge s,v t

  

   

      



 

41.The App s t

l Ge t ve

s se

fter v x, me ,verb m,res,etc.(361, ).

  

  





     

 



  

 

 

 

38.The s bject f

te verb s

the N m

t ve(203).

 

37.The Perfect P rt c ple p ss ve s se fter verbs f C s t e te mp t e ce f yth g except e t re f lf lme t (587).

Des re,t

 

 

36.The P rt c ple s se fter verbs f Percept s the ct l c t f the bject(536).

Represe t t

t expres



 

 

35.The F t re P rt c ple s se N.).

p st-C cer

L t

t express Des g (438,



 

34.The Prese t P rt c ple e tes c t f the le g verb(282).

ce,the Perfect,c mplet

 

 

   

  

  

        

33.The S p e

s se ch efly w th

ject ves t

c te Respect(436). , t the t me

 

 

32.The S p e ).

- m s se ch efly

fter verbs f M t

t express Des g (435

     

  

 

he Ch rge(378).

[440 PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.]

tr s t ve verbs c mp e w th , te,c , , ter, b,p st,pr e,s b, s per m y t ke D t ve; tr s t ve verbs ls Acc s t ve bes es(347).

65.Act ve tr s t ve verbs t ke the Acc s t ve c se(330). tr s t ve verbs,m stly th se f M t ,c mp e w th , te,c rc m,c , , ter, b,per,pr eter,s b,s bter,s per, tr s, t ke the Acc s t ve;tr s t ve verbs th s c mp e m y h ve tw Acc s t ves (3 31).

 



71.Verbs f N m g,M k g,T k g,Ch s g, e s me Pers r Th g(34(5).

Sh w g,t ke tw Acc s t ves f th







70.Verbs me g t I q re,Req re,Te ch, f the Pers , e f the Th g(339).

C ce l,t ke tw

Acc s t ves, e

69.N mes f T w s Sm ll sl s re p t s ls m s r s(337).See N .74 92.

the Acc s t ve



 

 

68.The Acc s t ve m y express Exte t

Degree,Sp ce, r T me (334-6). f Pl ce Wh ther;





67.I tr s t ve verbs m y t ke

Acc s t ve

f s m l r f rm

r me

g(333,2).



           

         

66.M y

 



64.A ject ves f Fr e e the D t ve(359).

ess,F l ess,L ke ess,Ne r ess,w th the r pp s tes,t k



  

63.The D t ve m y e te the Object F r Wh ch Wh m(355).

c mb

w th the Pers

 

62.The D t ve f Age t s se w th the Perfect p ss ve,the Ger ve(354).

the Ger



 

61.The D t ve f Refere ce (352).

s se

f the Pers

t wh m







 

60.The Eth c l D t ve

s se

f the pers

l pr



 

 

 

     

 

59.The D t ve s se

f the Pers

I tereste



  

58.The D t ve s se

w th esse t

e te p ssess

(349). (350).

the ct

ly(351). st teme t s referre





 

57.Verbs f G v g Abl t ve(348).

P tt

g t ke

D t ve

Acc s t ve, r



               

56.M y

Acc s t ve



  

55.Verbs f A v t ge D s v t ge,B g F rb e s re,Y el g Res st g,t ke the D t ve(346).



   

 





    

 

  





54.The I

rect Object s p t

the D t ve(345). g,Ple s re D spl







53.I terest r e (381).

Refert t ke the Ge t ve f the Pers

,r rely f the Th

g c ce

52.Verbs f R t g B y g t ke the Ge t ve he P rt c l r V l e(379,404).See N .87.

 

    

 

f the Ge er l,the Abl t ve

f t

    

ex, e, r b(390).

[PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.441]

78.M ter l s e te by the Abl t ve w th ex(396).

80.C mp r t ves w th t q m re f ll we by the Abl t ve(398).



   



94.A q est

f r

f rm t

merely s

tr

 

93.A verbs q l fy verbs, ject ves,

ther

verbs(439). by - e(454).

ce

 



 

92.N mes f T w s Sm ll sl s f the F rst the L c t ve f the Pl ce Where(411).See N .69

Sec 74.

Decle s

s re p t

 

91.The Abl t ve,c mb e w th p rt c ple,serves t m f se te ce: Abl t ve Abs l te(409).

   

 

  

90.Ut r,fr r,f g r,p t r,

vesc r t ke the Abl t ve(407). fy the verb l pre c te



89.The Abl t ve s se

w th p s

s s(406).

 

 



 

 

 

 

88.Verbs

f Depr v g

P ll g, f Ple ty

W t,t ke the Abl t ve(405).

87.Def te Pr ce .See N .52.

s p t

the Abl t ve(404);Ge er l Pr ce

86.Me s re

f D ffere ce

s p t

the Abl t ve(403). the Ge t ve(379)

  

  

85.The St

f Me s reme t s e te by the Abl t ve(402),

84.The Age t s e te by the Abl t ve w th

( b)(401).

  

  

 

83.C se,Me s,

I str me t, re

e te by the Abl t ve (401,408).

 

82.Exter l tr s e t q l t es re e te by the Abl t ve, lw ys w th ject ve(400);esse t l perm e t q l t es by the Ge t ve, lw ys w th ject ve(365).See N .45.

 

         

  

 

 



81.M

er

s e te by the Abl t ve reg l rly w th

  

  



79.The P

t f V ew

r Respect s e te by the Abl t ve(397).

ject ve

r c m(399).

 

  

  

 

77.Or g

r Desce t s e te

by the Abl t ve w th

  

 

76.T me Whe

r W th

Wh ch

s e te by the Abl t ve(393). r w th t ex e(395).

 



75.Atte

ce

s e te by the Abl t ve w th c m(392).



 

 



N mes f T w s

Sm ll sl

s m t the prep s t

s(386,391).See N .9

74.Pl ce Where s e te by the Abl t ve, s lly w th he Abl t ve, s lly w th



 

73.The Acc s t ve m y be

se

Excl m t

s(343). (385);Pl ce Whe ce by t

 

72.The s bject f the I f

t ve

s reg l rly

the Acc s t ve(420).

  

 

 

 

92.

 

[442 PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.]

100.After F t re r F t re Perfect,the F t re rel t s expresse by the Pre se t,the F t re Perfect by the Perfect S bj ct ve(514).After ther te ses the F t re rel t s expresse by the Act ve Per phr st c Prese t Imperfect S b j ct ve(515).

103.Q ,q ,q m, q t ke the I c t ve D rect D sc rse,the S b j ct ve I rect D sc rse,t express C se (540,541).

114.Ut, t pr m m, c m,c m pr m m, b , b pr m m, s m l c,s m l tq e,

113.A C sec t ve Cl se w th t s fte se t g ve the c te ts f prece g s bst t ve, ject ve, r pr (557).

r ch r cter

 

 

 

  

112.Neg t ve r Q est e verbs f Preve t g,H rt ty,m y be f ll we by the S bj ct ve w th q

er g,etc., f D bt (555).See N .108.

 

 

       

.Verbs f Effect g h ve the S bj ct ve w th

 

.C sec t ve Se te ces h ve the S bj ct ve w th t

(552). (553). U ce

e, r t



  

109.Verbs f Fe r re f ll we by e r t( e t ve(550).

ll te ses f the S bj c

 

 

 

  



108.Verbs f Preve t g .See N .112.

Ref s g m y t ke q m

s w th the S bj ct ve(549)



 

107.P s t ve verbs f Preve t g,Ref s g,F rb th the S bj ct ve(548).

g,

Bew r g,m y t ke e w



 

      

106.C mpleme t ry F

l Cl ses re

se

fter verbs

f W ll

Des re(546).

 



 

 



 



105.F ).

l Se te ces h ve the Prese t

Imperfect S bj ct ve w th t r e(545





 

 

  

104.Q ct ve

s se fter verbs f Em t w th the I c t ve I rect D sc rse,t g ve the Gr (542).

D rect,the S bj

         



    

        

 

102.Q ,the f ct th t, ry cl ses fter Verbs t ves(525).

th t, s f A g

se w th the I c t ve t Dr pp g,D g H ppe

tr g,

ce expl t em str

 

 

101.I Or t 516).

Obl q

ll s b r

te te ses f ll w the ge er l l w f seq e ce(



  



 

99.Seq e ce f Te ses.Pr c p l te ses re es,H st r c l by H st r c l(509).

 

 



  



98.The I

rect Q est

the S bj ct ve(467).

 

97.The Del ber t ve Q est

the S bj ct ve(265).

r ly f ll we



  



96.A q est

th t expects the

swer

tr

ce by







95.A q est

th t expects the

swer yes s

tr

ce by

e (455).



m (456).

by Pr c p l te s

 

      

[PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.443] 116.Whe e ct s repe te bef re ther,the tece e t ct s p t t he Perfect,Pl perfect, r F t re Perfect,the s bseq e t the Prese t,Imperfect, r F t re, cc r g t the rel t (567).

119.D m, ec,q , t l,t ke the Prese t,H st r c l Prese t,H st r c l Perfect , F t re Perfect I c t ve(571).

122.A teq m pr sq m t ke the I c t ve Prese t,Perfect, F t re Perfec t whe the l m t s st te s f ct; the S bj ct ve whe the ct s expecte ,c t ge t, es g e , r s b r te (574,577).

127.The I e l C t h s s lly the Prese t r Perfect S bj ct ve,less fte the Imperfect r Pl perfect, b th cl ses (596).





 

131.I ef

te

ge er c rel t ves s lly h ve the I

c t ve (625);s expl



130.C cess ve cl ses m y be tr ce by ets ,et ms ,t mets ,w th the I c t ve r S bj ct ve(604); by q mq m,w th the I c t ve(605);by q mv s,w th t he S bj ct ve(606).



 

129.Ut s , c s ,q s ,q m s ,t mq m,t mq m s ,vel t, c mp r s the S bj ct ve.The te se f ll ws the r le

vel t s , tr ce f seq e ce(602).

   

128.The U re l C t h s the Imperfect S bj ct ve f pp s t the Pl perfect f pp s t t p st f ct(597).

t prese t,





 

 

     

   

 

126.The L g c l C t s Ap s s(595).

h s s lly s me f rm

f the I

c t ve

b th Pr t s

125.C s l C cess ve c m,whe ,where s, lth gh, re the S bj ct ve(586,587).

se w th

ll te ses f

   

124.H st r c l c m,whe , s se w th the Imperfect g ve the temp r l c rc mst ces er wh ch ct

Pl perfect S bj ct ve t t k pl ce(585).

  



123.Temp r l c m,whe , s se w th ll te ses f the I ely temp r l rel t s(580).

c t ve t

 

 

   

             

es g te mer



   



      

121.D m,m bj ct ve

mm

, f ly,pr v e l W shes(573).

ly,t ke the Prese t

  

 

 

  

  

 

   

 

 



120.D m, e (572).

ec,q

, t l,t ke the S bj

ct ve whe S spe se r Des g



118.D m,wh le,wh le yet,t kes the Prese t I

c t ve

fter ll te ses(570).

Imperfect S



 

  

 



117.D m, 69).

ec,q

,q

,s

l g s,wh le,t ke the I

c t ve f ll te ses(5



 

 

115.Whe tw ct s re repe te c temp r e sly,b th ve te ses f c t ce(566).

re p t

the I

             

 

 

    

t ke the Perfect I verl pp g Act , 63).

    

    

 

 



   

p stq m c t ve, the se se f " s s the Pl perfect whe ef te s"; b t the Imperfect f O terv l s g ve (561,562,5 c t

v lv

[444.PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.]

135.Rel t ve se te ces re p t the S bj ct ve f Te e cy whe q = t(c s ec t ve) s;s fter g s, g s, e s, pt s,etc.; fter ef te t ece e t; fter c mp r t ves w th q m(631).

tq e r c(643).

[445] PROSODY.

(b) The sh rte g f l g pe lt(8).Th s w s st ll g g the t me f PL AUTUS, cc rs here there the p ets : ch r , ch r,fr m k r ;s pg er ,I swe r f lsely,f r per rO;ch re , ce,fr m ch re ,etc.

QUANTITY.



 

702.RULE I.A syll ble s s t be l g by r phth g : 6,v e,leges,s ev e.

t re whe

t c t

          

(c) The we ke g(8) f the tepe lt,s met mes ls f the pe lt,b th Gree k w r s L t : M ss l fr m M ss l ;be m l-f r be e m le c mp s t ;-h be f r h be c mp s t ; few thers, s -c f r c e c mp s t ,etc.

l g v wel

   

( ) The s ppe r ce f the v wel(8,2) the tepe lt r pr - tepe lt;th s cc rs espec lly Greek w r s,b t ls s me c mm L t w r s : P l e c es,F l e ces,P ll ces,P ll x;b l e ,b l e m,b l e m,b th;m x m s,gre test,f r m g s m s; pt m s,best,f r p t m s,etc.

            



                                 

2.I the e rl est L t the Acce t w s t reg l te by Q t l syll ble(15,N.).Th s fte res lte

t ty,b t w s

the

 

  

                           

                  

REMARKS.1.Pr s y r g lly me t Acce t.L t s cl ss c l L t vers f c t s ls q f b th q t ty vers f c t .

   



    





  

 

   

701.PROSODY tre ts f Q

t ty

Vers f c t

. Acce t s reg l te by Q t ty, t t t ve,Pr s y s l sely se

138.I Or t Obl q ,Pr c p l Cl ses re p t the I f t ve,except I terr g t ves Imper t ves,wh ch re p t the S bj ct ve;S b r te cl ses re p t the S bj ct ve(650,651,652).

     



137.C mp r t ve se te ces fter c mp r t ves re

tr

ce by q m(644).



  

  

136.C mp r t ve se te ces fter w r s e by

f L ke ess

U l ke ess m y be

tr

 

   

 

          

134.Rel t ve se te ces re p t s(630).

the S bj

ct ve f Des g

whe q

t(f

 

  

   

  

133.Rel t ve se te ces th t epe tegr l p rt f the th ght, re p t

I f t ves r S bj ct ves, f rm the S bj ct ve by Attr ct (629).

132.The S bj ct ve s se Rel t ve Cl ses th t f rm e f ther;s Or t Obl q F l Cl ses (628).

                                

 

t ry q ,whe eq v le t t

(626). p rt f the tter c

    

 

 

 

 

l)

EXCEPTIONS :

(b) C t (f r c ve t ), ssembly; e t c l m, e t t ,bre kf st; t s,messe ger; q t s,f fth; Greek s bst t ves - s,- t s,- ,- t s; Ch r s,Ep m s; ls e( ve - -),m rket y; m, t yet; pre ,I se ze; q ec m,f ftee ; re ,I sell; ec m,eleve ; v em ,v t ge.

3.N tew rthy re the f ll w g : q rt s,f rth; q q e,f ve, ts er v t ves; v g t ,twe ty; m lle,th s , ts er v t ves. [446 QUANTITY.]

g ,I r ve,eg , ct m; em ,I b y,em ,empt m; fr g ,I bre k,freg ,fr ct m; f g r,I perf rm,f ct s; be ,I r er, ss , ss m; g ,I j , x , ct m; leg ,I re ,leg ,lect m; p g ,I f x,p ct m; reg ,I g ver ,rex ,rect m; s c ,I s ct ,s x ,s ct m,s c t m; str ,I p le p,str x ,str ct m; t g ,I t ch,t ct m; teg ,I c ver,tex ,tect m; tr h ,I r w,tr x ,tr ct m; g ,I t, x , ct m; v c ,I c q er,v x ,v ct m.

6.I verbs, v wel res lt g fr m sy c pe s l g bef re ss,st(131).Als ,perh ps ,I bef re s t sy c p te Pf .f rms f re petere.





  

                                             

    

  

 

5.N tew rthy

re the f ll w g :

 



    

   

Except

c ,I s y;S p e, ct m; c ,I le ;S p e, ct m;

the r er v t ves,l ke

ct

,etc.

 

4.I verbs the q t ty f the Prese t Stem s ge er lly ret re tw c s ts(except - s).

e thr gh t bef

 

2.I ch t ve verbs h ve v wel bef re -s

l g by

t re; sc ,I le r .



  

                                  

  

 

( ) Eg t s,The g s,

s me Greek w r s

-egm , s phlegm ,phlegm;b t pegm .

REMARKS.1.( ) A v wel bef re -gm,-g ,- f,- s s l g by e - t,s sh rt by t re.

t re;(b)

v wel bef r



 

       

   

   

 

 



  

703.RULE II A syll ble s s t be l g ly p s t (12,2) whe sh rt v wel s f ll we by tw r m re c s ts, r ble c s t : s,c ll m,c str . REMARKS.1.The c s ts m y be v e betwee tw w r s : per m re, terr s;b t whe ll the c s ts re the sec w r ,the prece g sh rt syll ble c mm ly rem s sh rt,except the Thes s(729) f verse,whe t s le gthe e : pr em scr b e.

704.RULE III.A syll ble e g sh rt v wel bef re m te,f ll we by l r r , s c mm (13) : te e-br e, rk ess.I e rly L t t s reg l rly sh rt,s ,t , whe the m te l q beg w r .

[QUANTITY.447]

EXCEPTION.Der v t ve s bst t ves br m, cr m, tr m fr m verbs; s fl br ,bl s ts.Zm r g s,MART.,V. ,1,c t be p r llele . 705.RULE IV.Every phth g, every v wel er ve fr m phth g, r c tr ct e fr m ther v wels, s l g(14) : s ev s,cr el;c cl e,I sh t p(fr m cl ); mq s, f r(fr m eq s);c g ,I r ve t gether(fr m c g = c + g ).

EXCEPTIONS :



3.

e bef re

pr per

mes

s : G ,P mpe .

 

 

2.e ).

-e

f the F fth Decle s

,whe

v wel prece es '. e ,b t f e (63,N.1

 

 

 

1.

the l

Ge . f the F rst Decle s

r l.

 

706.RULE V.O e s mple v wel bef re ther v wels e : e s,G ; p er,b y; h l, th g.

, r h,m kes

sh rt syll bl

EXCEPTION.Pr e c mp s t s sh rte e bef re IUS;pr e- st s,b r t t the p t(V.,A.,v .524).

v wel

t l the t me

f STAT

 

  



             

 

   

   

 

     

 



     

 

2.I Greek w r s m

re

cl e

er th s r le : TS-cm ss ,Cy-c s.

 

 

  

REMARKS.1.The syll ble m st e l -fl s,fl w g w th h ey;b t

sh rt v wel : v -fr g s,sh p-wreck g;mel b-r mpe the s l g by p s t .

  

 

                  



NOTE.I c m c p etry, sh rt f l syll ble s ble th es : p st(= p s est);s m l 's(-s m l s es).

 



 

 

 

    

 



 

 

s m s v

t pr (s) q m s m(= e m)

scere c ep t.ENNIUS. s w th est, s met mes w

 

  

3.F l s,prece e by sh rt v wel, s r ppe bef re etry; fte t LUCRETIUS.

c s

the

l er p

 

NOTE.I c mp s f cere,t thr w,the s fte m tte , the prece g v wel le gthe e by c mpe s t ;s c cere; sh rt v wel w th the m tte s t f t l OVID'S t me.

2.Every v wel s f ll we by c s t(j) s l g(except the c mp s f g m,y ke).Th s s e s met mes t t r l le gth f the v wel,s met mes t c mpe s t : G s fr m G v s,pe er f r per r ;b t b g s,tw -h rse.

 

    

 

    

  

                   

 



                  

 

         



               

             

NOTE.O the meth

st g sh g l g v wels

scr pt

s,see 12, ,N.

        

   

    

  

  

4. the Ge .f rm - s(76,R.2).Alterms s fte sh rte e ,perh ps eve pr s e : l s, ll s, ll s,t t s, re f p etry.I l s the s ever sh r te e ( l s f r ll s).

7.M y Greek w r s : er,Me el s,m se m,Me e .

A.POLYSYLLABLES.

terr ,e rth; ,g fts; c p t ,he s.

EXCEPTIONS :

[448 QUANTITY.]

p ta,for instance, compare cave below. 2.e is short. EXCEPTIONS : 1.Abl.of the Fifth Declension : di. 2.Impv.of Second Conj gation : mon(b t see Note). 3.Most adverbs of Second Declension : rect;b t bene,male,inferne (LUCR.),max me(P LAUT.),probe(PLAUT.),s perne(LUCR.,HOR.),temere(PLAUT.,TER.). 4.Greek words in e(he) : Temp,mel. 5.Q e is tho ght to be not nfreq ently long in the Thesis of early Sat rnians;s o in the hexameter of the classical period if a second q e follows in the Arsis. NOTE.Observe that in PLAUTUS and TERENCE any dissyllabic Iambic impv.may have th

  



4.M st

flecte w r s : tr g t,i xt,b t ita,q ia,eia.With

 

3.Impv. f F rst C j g t

m .

 

 

  

2.V c. f w r s

s(Ae e ),

Greek N

 

1.Abl. f the F rst Decle s

 

 

1.

s sh rt :

: terr . , (Electr ).

 



 

  

707.RULE VI.I re l g.

w r s f m re th



t ty f F

l Syll bles.

e syll ble,f

,e,

re sh rt; , ,

  

8.I e rly L t m y w r s ret the r g l le gth f the v wel : s,re ; l l f rms f f ;cl ;f ts f rms;pl t,l t, ,etc.M st f the sh rte e f rms ls cc r, re m re c mm .

 

 

 

   

              

 

 

6.ehe ,D

, he,

s(=

v s).





 

5.

s l g,except bef re er: f

,b t f eret

f er .

 

 

   

 

         

e last e shortened;principally cave,habe,i be,mane,mone,move,tace,tene,vale,vide .See 716.Later poets also shorten sometimes when the pen lt is long;salve(MART.) . 3.y is always short,except in contracted forms : misy (Dative misy = misyi). 4.i is long : domin,vigint,a d. EXCEPTIONS : 1.Greek Dat.si : Troasi. 2.Greek Nona.,as sinapi; Voc.,as Pari; Dat.Sing,(rarely),as Minoidi. 3.q asi,nisi,c i(when a dissyllable). 4.i is common in mihi,tibi,sibi,ibi, bi. Observe the compo nds : ibidem,ibiq e, biq e, binam, bivis, bic nq e,nec bi, tin am, tiq e,sic ti;(b t ti). 5.o is long : bono,t to. EXCEPTIONS : 1.Common in homo; in the A g stan times in leo and many proper names;as Scipio;i n the post-A g stan times in many common s bstantives : virgo.Nemo is fo nd firs t in OVID,mentio in HORACE. 2.Freq ently short in Iambic words in early Latin,especially in verbs,many of wh ich remained common in the A g stan times,as volo,veto,scio,peto,p to,etc.; so less often nescio,desino,obsecro dixero,odero. From SENECA on,the Ger nd may be shortened : amando. 3.o is s ally short in modo,cito,octo,ego,ilico,immo,d o,ambo (post-classical); and in many other words in later poetry. 6. is always long : corn ,fr ct ,a dit . [QUANTITY.449] 708.RULE VII.All final syllables that end in a simple consonant other than s are short. EXCEPTIONS : 1. allec,lien,and many Greek s bstantives. 2.The adverbs and obliq e cases of illic,ill c,istic,ist c,can hardly be considered exceptions,as -c is for -ce,and is merely enclitic. 3.Compo nds of par : dispar,impar. 4.iit,petiit,and their compo nds. 5.Final -at,-et,-it,were originally long,and as s ch often occ r in early Latin, and occasionally before a pa se in the classical poets. 709.RULE VIII.Of final syllables in a: as,es,os,are long;is, s,ys,short.

1.as is long : Aeneas,servas,amas. EXCEPTIONS : 1.Greek s bstantives in as,adis : Arcas,Arcadis. 2.Greek Acc.Pl.,Third Declension : heroas,Arcadas. 3.anas,anatis. 2.es is long : reges,dies,mones. EXCEPTIONS : 1.Nom.and Voc.Sing.,Third Declension,when the Gen.has etis,itis,idis : seges,mil es,obses;b t abies,aries,paries. 2.Compo nds of es,be(long syllable in PLAUTUS) : ades,potes. 3.penes(Preposition). 4.Greek words in es(es) : Nom.PL,as Arcades; Voc.,as Demosthenes;Ne ter,as cacoe thes, 5.Iambic verbal forms in Second Person Sing,in early Latin. 3.os is long : deos,nepos. EXCEPTIONS : 1.Compos,impos,exos;and as the Nom.ending in the Second Declension. 2.Greek words in os(os) : melos. 4.is is short : canis,legis. EXCEPTIONS : 1.Dat.and Abl.Pl ral : terris,bonis. 2.Acc.Pl.of the Third Declension : omnis = omnes. 3.In the Nom.of s ndry Proper Names,increasing long in the Genitive : Q iris,Q i ritis. 4.Second Person Sing.Pr.Indic.active,Fo rth Conj gation : a dis. [450 QUANTITY.] 5.In the verbal forms from vis,sis,fis,and velis:no-lis,ma-lis,ad-sis,cale-fis. 6.In the Second Person Sing.F t.Pf.Indic.and Pf.S bjv.,is is common : videris. 7.P lvis,cinis,sang is,occasionally in early Latin. 5. s is short : serv s,c rr s. EXCEPTIONS : 1.Gen.Sing.,Nom.and Acc.Pl.,Fo rth Declension : c rr s. 2.Nom.Third Declension,when the Gen.has a long : virt s,virt tis; inc s,inc di s; tell s,tell ris. 3.In Greek words with (o s) : trip s,Sapph s;b t Oedip s and polyp s. 4.Occasionally the Dat.and Abl.Pl.of the Third Declension,the First Person Pl.ac tive of verbs,seem to be long in early Latin. 6.ys is short : chlamys. B.MONOSYLLABLES. 710.RULE IX.All monosyllables that end in a vowel are long : a,da,me,de,hi,si,o, do,t . Except the enclitics : -q e,-ve,-ne,-ce,-te,-pse,pte. 711.RULE X.Declined or conj gated monosyllables that end in a consonant follow t

he r les given : das,fles,scis,dat,net,is,id,q is,his,q is,q os. hic,this one,is sometimes short;dic and d c have the q antity of their verbs;es, be,is short in classical Latin,long in early Latin. 712.RULE XI.Monosyllabic Nominatives of s bstantives and adjectives are long whe n they end in a consonant,even if the stem-syllable be short : os,mos,ver,sol,f r,pl s; lar(laris),pes(pedis),bos(b6vis),par(paris). EXCEPTIONS : vir and lac,os(ossis),mel; Also cor,vas(vadis),fel.Also q ot,tot. 713.RULE XII.Monosyllabic particles that end in a consonant are short : an,cis,i n,nec,per,ter. Excepting en and non and q in; And also eras and c r and sin; Also the Adverbs in c : hic,h c,hac,sic;and ac(atq e), [QUANTITY.451] Q antity of Stem-Syllables. 714.RULE XIII.The q antity of stem-syllables,when not determined by the general r les,is fixed by the sage of the poets(long or short by a thority). REMARKS.1.The changes of q antity in the formation of tensestems have been set f orth in the conj gation of the verb(153,2). 2.The occasional differences in the q antity of the stem-syllables which spring from the same radical can only be explained by reference to the 'history of each word,and cannot be given here.Some examples are : paciscor, macer, do). lego, cS). rego, tego, ceo). acer, . moles, = movbilis). pax,pacis. macero. lex,legis. rex,regis. teg la. acerb s. molest s.

sedeo, fides, d x,d cis, voco, l cerna, s spicor, moveo,

sedes. fido(fei

vox. l ceo(lo s spicio mobilis(

Q antity in Compo nds. 715.RULE XIV.Compo nds generally keep the q antity of their constit ent parts :( cedo) ante-cedo,de-cedo,pro-cedo;(caedo),occido;(cado),occido. REMARKS.1.Of the inseparable prefixes,di,se,and ve are long,re short : did co,se diico,vecors,red ce;di,in disert s,is shortened for dis,and in dirimo,dir stands for dis. 2.Ne is short,except in ned m,nemo(ne-hemo),neq am,neq iq am,neq aq am,neq itia,

d co(do

neve. 3.Re comes from red,which in the forms redd,recc,repp,rell,rett,occ rs principal ly in poetry before many consonantal verb forms;b t this do bling varies at diff erent periods,and is fo nd thro gho t only in reddo.Re by compensation for the l oss of the d is fo nd,occasionally,principally in Perfect stems and in dactylic poetry,especially in reicere,religio(also relligio and religio),red co(once in P LAUT.). 4.Pro is shortened before vowels,and in many words before consonants,especially before f : proavos,prohibeo,proinde,prof gio,prof g s,prof nd s,profiteor,profar i,profan s,proficiscor,procella,proc l,pronepos.The older lang age shortens less freq ently than the later.In Greek words pro(pro) is generally short : propheta ;b t prolog s. 5.The second part of the compo nd is sometimes shortened : deiero, [452 FIGURES OF PROSODY.] (from i ro),cognit s,agnit s(from not s).Notice the q antity in the compo nds of -dic s : fatidic s,veridic s(dico),and inn ba,pron ba (n bo). 6.Mechanical r les,more min te than those given above,might be m ltiplied indefi nitely,b t they are all open to so many exceptions as to be of little practical val e.A correct pron nciation of Latin cannot be acq ired except by constant pra ctice, nder the direction of a competent teacher,or by a diligent st dy of the L atin poets,and conseq ently of Latin versification. Pec liarities of Q antity in Early Latin. 716.The Iambic(734) Law.Any combination of short and long,having an accent on th e short,or immediately preceding or following an accented syllable,may be scanne d as a Pyrrhic.This applies to (a) Iambic words,especially imperatives,as : rogo,vide,mane; (b) Words beginning with an Iamb s,when the second syllable is long by position, and the third syllable is accented,as : senect tem,vol ntatis; (c) Two monosyllables closely connected,or a monosyllable closely connected with a following long initial syllable,as : q is Me est, t dccepl.The monosyllable m ay have become so by elision. (d) Trochaic words following a short accented syllable,as : q id ist c. (e) Cretic words,b t more often in anapaestic meas re,or at the beginning of a h emistich,as venerant. NOTES.1.Before q idem a monosyllable is shortened : t q idem. 2.A combination like vol ptas mea is looked pon as a single word. 3.A thorities are not agreed as to the shortening : in polysyllabic words,when t he second syllable is long by nat re and the third syllable accented;in trisylla bles which have become Iambic by elision;in Cretics at Trochaic and Iambic close ;in polysyllables like simill mae. 717.Personal prono ns and similar words of common occ rrence forming Trochees(73 4) may shorten the initial syllable when followed by a long syllable or its eq i valent,even in the obliq e cases : ille me,dmni m me, nde tibi . NOTES.1.The words involved are

ille,illic,iste,istic,ipse,ecq is,omnis,nempe,inde, nde,q ippe,immo, and a few others that are disp ted,s ch as some dissyllabic imperatives like mitte,redde, and monosyllables followed by -q e,-ne,-ve,and the like. 2.Nempe,inde, nde,q ippe,ille,iste,may perhaps s ffer syncope and be scanned as monosyllables. 3.Nempe never forms a whole foot.Proin,dein,exin are sed only before consonants : proinde only before vowels;deinde s ally before vowels,rarely before consona nts. 4.Trochees also come nder the operation of the Iambic Law when they follow a sh ort accented syllable. [FIGURES OF PEOSODY.453] FIGURES OF PROSODY. 718.Poetry often preserves the older forms of lang age,and perpet ates pec liari ties of pron nciation,both of which are too freq ently set down to poetic licens e. 719.1.Elision.When one word ends with a vowel and another begins with a vowel,or h,the first vowel is elided.Elision is not a total omission,b t rather a h rrie d halfpron nciation,similar to Grace notes in m sic.

2.Ecthlipsis.--In like manner m final(a faint nasal so nd) is elided with its sh ort vowel before a vowel or h. Monstr( m),horrend( m),Inform(e) ingens c i l men adempt m.--VERG. EXCEPTION.After a vowel or m final,the word est,is,drops its e and joins the pre ceding syllable(Aphaeresis). Si rixast bi t p lsas ego vap lo tant m.--J v. Aeternas q oniam poenas in morte timend mst.--LUCR. 720.Hiat s.--Hiat s is the meeting of two vowels in separate syllables,which mee ting prod ces an almost contin o s opening(yawning) of the vocal t be.In the bod y of a word this hiat s,or yawning,is avoided sometimes by contraction,often by shortening the first vowel(13). REMARKS.1.The Hiat s is sometimes allowed : a,in the Thesis (729),chiefly when t he first vowel is long; b,in an Arsis(729),or resolved Thesis,when a long vowel is shortened(Semi-hiat s);c,before a pa se,chiefly in the principal Caes ra(750) ;d,in early Latin,in the principal Caes ra,before a change of speakers,and occas ionally elsewhere.

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Stant et i niperi(h) et castaneae(h) hirs tae.-VERG. Credim s ? an q i(h) amant ipsi sibi somnia fing nt ? -VERG. Promissam erip i genero.(h) Arma impia s mpsi.-VERG. A.Abi.B.Q id abeam ? A.St! abi(h).B.Abeam(h)? A.Abi.PLAUT.

o felix

n(a) ant(e) alias Priamela virgo.--VERG.

2.Monosyllabic interjections are not elided. 3.On the elision of e in -ne ? see 456,R.2. 721.Diastole.Many final syllables,which were originally long,are restored to the ir rights by the weight of the Thesis. [454 FIGURES OF PROSODY.] Uxor,he s xor,q amq am t irata's mihi.-PLAUT. D mmodo morata recte veniat dotatast satis.-PLAUT. Perr pit Acheronta Herc le s labor.-HOR. Sometimes,however,Diastole arises from the necessities of the verse(as in proper names),or is owing to a pa se(P nct ation). Nec q as Priamides in aq osis vallib s Idae.-Ov. Desine pl ra p er--et q od n nc instat agam s.-VERG. Pectorib s inhians spirantia cons lit exta.-VERG. NOTE.The extent to which diastole is allowable is a matter of disp te,especially in early Latin. On q e,see 707,2,Ex.5. 722.Systole.Long syllables which had beg n to shorten in prose,are shortened(Sys tole). Obst p i steter ntq e comae vox fa cib s haesit.-VERG. E terra magn( m) alteri s spectare laborem.--LUCR. Uni s ad certain formam primordia rer m.--LUCR. N lli s addict s i rare in verba magistri.--HOR. NOTE.The short pen lt of the Pf.instetfer nt,deder nt,was probably original (DED RO in inscriptions).See 131,4,b,5 and 6. 723.Hardening.The vowels i and assert their halfconsonant nat re(Hardening) : abiete(abiete),genva(gen a),tenttfa(ten ia). Fl vior m rgx Eridan s camposq e per omnes.--VERG. Nam q ae tenvia s nt hiscendist n lla potestas.--LUCR. 724.Dialysis.The consonants i and v assert their halfvowel nat re: dissolvo(diss olve),Gai s(Gai s,from Gavi s). Ad lteret r et col mba mil o.--HOR. Stamina non lli dissol enda deo.--TIB. 725.Syncope.Short vowels are dropped between consonants,as often in prose : calf acio for calefacio. Templor m positor templor m sancte repostor.-OV. Q iddam magn m addens n m me s rpite(= s rripite) morti.-HOR. 726.Tmesis.Compo nd words are separated into their parts. Q o me c nq e(= q oc mq e me) rapit tempestas deferor hospes.HOR. NOTE.The earlier poets carry Tmesis m ch f rther,in nwise em lation of the Gree k.Celebrated is : Saxo cere commin it br m.ENNIUS.

[VERSIFICATION.455] 727.Syni esis.Vowels are connected by a sl r,as often in the living lang age : d einde,deinceps. Q id faciam roger anne rogem ? q id deinde rogabo ! -Ov. So even when h intervenes,as dehinc : E r m ad se Zephyr mq e vocat,dehinc talia fat r.-VERG. REMARK.Syni esis(settling together) is also called Synaeresis(taking together'), as opposed to Diaeresis(5);b t Synaeresis properly means contraction,as in cogo( for coago),and nemo(for nehemo).Synaloepha is a general term embracing all metho ds of avoiding Hiat s. NOTE.1.Syni esis is very common in early Latin,especially in pronominal forms: m i(mihi),me s,and its forms,dissyllabic forms like eo,e m,etc. 728.Synaplieia.A line ends in a short vowel,which is elided before the initial v owel of a following line,or a word is divided between two lines,i.e.,the two lin es are joined together. Sors exit ra et nos in aeter ( m) Exili m imposit ra c mbae.--HOR.,O.,ii.3,27. Gallic m Rhen( m),horribile aeq or, ltimosq e Britannos.--CAT.,ii.ii. VERSIFICATION. 729.Rhythm.Rhythm means harmonio s movement.In lang age,Rhythm is marked by the stress of voice(Accent).The accented part is called the Thesis;* the naccented, the Arsis.The Rhythmical Accent is called the Ict s(blow,beat). REMARK.Besides the dominant Ict s,there is a s bordinate or secondary Ict s,j st as there is a dominant and a secondary Accent in words. 730.Metre.Rhythm,when represented in lang age,is embodied in Metre(Meas re).A Me tre is a system of syllables standing in a determined order. * Thesis and Arsis are Greek terms,meaning the p tting down and the raising of t he foot in marching.The Roman Grammarians,mis nderstanding the Greek,applied the terms to the lowering and raising of the voice,and th s reversed the significat ions.Modern scholars p to recent times followed the Roman habit,b t at present the tendency is to se the terms in their original signification,as above. [456 VERSIFICATION.] 731.Unit of Meas re.The Unit of Meas re is the short syllable,(),and is called Mo ra,Temp s(Time). The val e in m sic is = 1/8 The long(_) is the do ble of the short. The val e in m sic is = 1/4 REMARK.An irrational syllable is one which is not an exact m ltiple of the stand ard nit.Feet containing s ch q antities are called irrational. 732.Resol tion and Contraction.In some verses,two short syllables may be sed in

stead of a long(Resol tion),or a long instead of two short(Contraction). Resol tion Contraction,

733.Feet.As elements of m sical strains,Metres are called Bars.As elements of ve rses,they are called Feet. As m sical strains are composed of eq al bars,so verses are composed of eq al fe et,marked as in m sic,th s | . REMARK.Theoretically,the n mber of metres is nrestricted; practically,only thos e metres are important that serve to embody the principal rhythms. 734.Names of the Feet.The feet in se are the following : Feet of Three Times.

Feet of Fo r Times. Dactyl, legim s. Anapaest, legerent. Spondee, legi. Procele smatic s,relegit r. [VERSIFICATION.457] Cretic, First Paeon, Fo rth Paeon, Bacchl s, Antibacchi s, Feet of Five Times. legerint. legeritis.. legimini. legebant. legistis. Feet of Six Times.

REMARKS.1.Other feet are p t down in Latin Grammars,b t they do not occ r in Latin verse,if in any,s ch as : Pyrrhic, legebaris. First Epitrite, releger Second Epitrite Third Epitrite, Fo rth Epitrite, legit. nt eligebant. selegerint. collegistis.

2.For Irrational Feet see 743 and 744. 735.Ascending and Descending Rhythms.Rhythms are divided into ascending and desc

Dispondee, Second Paeon, Third Paeon, Moloss s,

Ionic s a maiore, Ionic s a minore, Choriamb s, Ditrochee, Diiamb s,

collegim s. relegebant. colligerant. collig nt r. legamini.

Trochee, Iamb s, Tribrach,

_ _ leg nt.

legit. legite.

Antispast, seleger nt. legentib s. legitoto. leger nt.

ending.If the Thesis follows,the Rhythm is called ascending;if it precedes,desce nding.So the Trochee has a descending,the Iamb s an ascending,rhythm. 736.Names of Rhythms.Rhythms are commonly called after their principal metrical representative.So the Trochaic Rhythm,the Anapaestic Rhythm,the Iambic Rhythm,th e Dactylic Rhythm,the Ionic Rhythm. 737.Classes of Rhythms.In Latin,the m sical element [458 VERSIFICATION.] of versification is s bordinate,and the principles of Greek rhythm have b t a li mited application. The Greek classes are based on the relation of Thesis to Arsis. 1.Eq al Class,in which the Thesis is eq al to the Arsis(genos ison).This may be called the Dactylico-Anapaestic class. II.Uneq al Class,in which the Thesis is do ble of the Arsis(genos diplasion).Thi s may be called the Trochaico-iambic class. III.Q inq epartite or Paeonian Class(Five-eighths class),of which the Cretic and Bacchl s are the chief representatives(genos hemiolion). 738.Rhythmical Series.A Rhythmical Series is an ninterr pted s ccession of rhyt hmical feet,and takes its name from the n mber of feet that compose it., Dipody = two feet.Pentapody = five feet. Tripody = three feet.Hexapody = six feet. Tetrapody = fo r feet. REMARKS.1.The Dipody is the ordinary nit of meas re(-meter) in Trochaic,Iambic, and Anapaestic verse.In these rhythms a monometer contains two feet,a dimeter fo r,a trimeter six,a tetrameter eight.

2.The single foot is the ordinary nit of meas re(-meter) in Dactylic verse.Th s ,a verse of one Dactyl is called a Monometer;of two,a Dimeter;of three,a Trimete r;of fo r,a Tetrameter;of five,a Pentameter;of six,a Hexameter. 3.There are limits to the extension of series.Fo r feet(in Greek,five) is the li mit of the Dactylic and Anapaestic,six of the Trochaic and Iambic series.All bey ond these are compo nds. 739.The Anacr stic Scheme.Ancient Metric disc ssed the colon,whether in Ascendin g or Descending Rhythm,according to the feet of which it was composed.Most moder n critics,since the time of BENTLEY,regard the first Arsis in an ascending rhyth m as taking the place of an pward beat in m sic(called by HERMANN Anacr sis;i.e ., pward stroke,signal-beat),whereby all rhythms become descending. In this way the Iamb s is regarded as an Anacr stic Trochee,the Anapaest as an A nacr stic Dactyl,the lonic s a minore as an Anacr stic Ionic s a maiore.The sign of the Anacr sis is : 740.Eq ality of the Feet.Every rhythmical series is composed of eq al parts.To r estore this eq ality,when it is violated by lang age,there are fo r methods : 1.Syllaba Anceps.3.Protraction.

2.Catalexis.4.Correption. [VERSIFICATION.459] 741.Syllaba Anceps.The final syllable of an independent series or verse may be s hort or long indifferently.It may be short when the metre demands a long;long wh en the metre demands a short.S ch a syllable is called a Syllaba Anceps. 742.Catalexis and Pa se.A complete series is called Acatalectic;an incomplete se ries is called Catalectic.A series or verse is said to be Catalectic in syllabam ,in dissyllab m,in trisyllab m,according to the n mber of syllables in the catal ectic foot.Trimeter dactylic s catalectic s in sylldbam.Trimeter dactylic s cata lectic s in dissyllab m.The time is made p by Pa se. The omission of one raora is marked .; of two ~~~ 743.Protraction and Syncope.Protraction(rovrj) consists in drawing o t a long sy llable beyond its normal q antity.It occ rs in the body of a verse,and serves to make p for the omission of one or more Arses,which omission is called Syncope. i_ = 3 = J.(triseme long);i_i = 4 = J(tetraseme long). 744.Correption.Correption is the shortening of a syllable to s it the meas re. 1.So a long syllable sometimes takes the place of a short,and is marked >;simila rly,two short syllables often seem to take the place of one,and may be marked . 2.When a Dactyl is sed as a s bstit te for a Trochee,the approximate val e is often 1 1/2 + 1/2 + 1 = 3 = ;which may be indicated by (cyclic D actyl). The following line ill strates all the points mentioned : a c | b || | N llam bo | -rem.--HOR.

b d | Vare sa| | era

(a) Irrational trochee(irrational long).(6) Cyclic dactyl,(c) Syncope and Protra ction(triseme long),(d) Syllaba anceps.(e) CatalSxia. [460 VERSIFICATION.] REMARK.Under this head,notice the freq ent se of the irrational long in Anacr s is. 745.Verse.A Simple Rhythm is one that consists of a simple series;a Compo nd Rhy thm is one that consists of two or more series. A Verse is a simple or compo nd rhythmical series,which forms a distinct and sep arate nit.The end of a verse is marked 1.By closing with a f ll word.Two verses cannot divide a word between them,excep t very rarely by Synapheia(728). 2.By the Syllaba Anceps,which can stand nconditionally.

c e -> || || vite pri-|

b | | s || severis | ar

3.By the Hiat s,i.e.,the verse may end with a vowel,tho gh the next verse begin with one.Occasionally s ch verses are joined by Synapheia(V.,A.,1.332-3,448-9 5 " 745-6)746.Methods of Combining Verses.The same verse may be repeated thro gho t witho t rec rring gro ps(Stichic Composition);s ch as the Septenari s and Octonari s,t he Trochaic Septenari s,the Heroic Hexameter,the Iambic Senari s(Trimeter).Or th e same verse or different verses may be gro ped in pairs(distichs),triplets(tris tichs),fo rs (tetrastichs).Beyond these simple stan as Latin versification seldo m vent red. Larger gro ps of series are called Systems.Larger gro ps of verses are called St rophes,a name sometimes attached to the Horatian stan as. 747.Cantica and Diverbia.In the Drama there is a broad division between that par t of the play which was simply spoken,and is called Diverbi m,comprising the sce nes in the Iambic Senari s,and that part which was either s ng or recited to a m sical accompaniment called Cantic m.The Cantic m is s bdivided into :(1) Those scenes which were merely recited to the accompaniment of the fl te,and were writ ten in Trochaic and Iambic Septenarii and Iambic Octonarii;and(2) those parts wh ich were written in varying meas res (m tatis modis cantica) and s ng.The latter division is also called " Cantica in the narrow sense," and may be divided into monolog es,dialog es,etc.The greatest variety of meas res is fo nd in the monol og es.

748.Union of Lang age with Rhythm.When embodied [VERSIFICATION.461] in lang age,rhythm has to deal with rhythmical gro ps already in existence.Every f ll word is a rhythmical gro p with its accent,is a metrical gro p with its lo ng or short syllables,is a word-foot.Ict s sometimes conflicts with accent;the nity of the verse-foot breaks p the nity of the word-foot. 749.Conflict of Ict s and Accent.In ordinary Latin verse,at least according to m odern pron nciation,the Ict s overrides the Accent;this conflict seems,however,t o have been avoided in the second half of the Dactylic Hexameter,and the Ict s m ade to coincide with the Accent. NOTE.The extent to which this conflict was felt by the Homane themselves is a ma tter of ncertainty,b t it seems likely that the dominant accent of a word was n ot so sharp as in modern pron nciation,and conseq ently the conflict wo ld not b e serio s. 750.Conflict of Word-foot and Verse-foot.The conflict of word-foot and verse-foo t gives rise to Caes ra.Caes ra means an incision prod ced by the end of a word in the middle of a verse-foot,and is marked +. This incision serves as a pa se,partly to rest the voice for a more vigo ro s effort,partly to prevent monotony by distrib ting the masses of the verse. REMARKS.1.So in the Heroic Hexameter the great Caes ra falls before the middle of the verse,to give the voice strength for the first Arsis of the second half. Una sal s victis + n llam sperare sal tem.--VERG.

It does not occ r at the middle,as in that case the verse wo ld become monotono s.

2.In many treatises any incision in a verse is called a Caes ra. 751.Varieties of Caes ra.Caes rae have different names to show their position in the foot,as follows : Semiternaria,after the third half foot,i.e.,in the second foot.Semiq inaria,afte r the fifth half foot,i.e.,in the third foot.Semiseptenaria,after the seventh ha lf foot,i.e.,in the fo rth foot.Seminovenaria,after the ninth half foot,i.e.,in the fifth foot. REMARK.These Caes rae are freq ently called after their Greek names,th s : trihe mimeral,genlhemimeral,hepthemimeral,etc. [462 VERSIFICATION.] 752.Masc line and Feminine Caes rae.In trisyllabic metres,when the end of the wo rd within the verse-foot falls on a Thesis,it is called a Masc line Caes ra;when on an Arsis,a Feminine Caes ra. a b c d Una sa | l s + vi | ctis + n l | lam + spe | rare + sa | l tem. a,b,c,are Masc line Caes rae;d,a Feminine Caes ra. Especially noteworthy is the Feminine Caes ra of the third foot in the Hexameter ,called the Third Trochee(783,R.2). 753.Diaeresis.When verse-foot and word-foot coincide,Diaeresis arises,marked | Ite dom m sat rae + venit | Hesper s Q ite capellae.VERG. REMARKS.1.Diaeresis,like Caes ra,serves to distrib te the masses of the verse an d prevent monotony.What is Caes ra in an ascending rhythm becomes Diaeresis as s oon as the rhythm is treated anacr stically. S is | et i | psa + Ro | ma vi | rib s || r it. Iambic Trimeter. S : is et || ipsa || Roma || viri | b s + r | it.Troch.Trimeter Catal.,with An acr sis.

754.Recitation.When the word-foot r ns over into the next verse-foot,a more ener getic recitation is req ired,in order to preserve the sense,and hence the m ltip lication of Caes rae lends vigo r to the verse. REMARK.The ordinary mode of scanning,or singing o t the elements of a verse,with o t reference to signification,cannot be too strongly condemned,as, Unasa,l svic,tisn i,lamspe,raresa,l tem ! N mer s Italic s. 755.The oldest remains of Italian poetry are fo nd in some fragments of rit alis tic and sacred songs,and seem to have had no regard to q antity.No definite theo ry can be formed of this so-called N mer s Italic s in which they were composed, b t they seem to have been in series of fo r Theses, s ally nited in pairs or t riplets,b t sometimes separate.An example is the prayer to Mars,from CATO,Agr.,1 41.

2.Diaeresis at the end of the fo rth foot of a Hexameter is called B colic Caes ra,and has a special effect(783,R.3).

Mars pater te precor | q aesoq e ti sies | volens propiti a Mini domo | familia eq e nostrae,tic. [VERSIFICATION.463] Sat rnian Verse. 756.The Sat rnian verse is an old Italian rhythm which occ rs in the earlier mon ments of Latin literat re.It divides itself into two parts,with three Theses in each;b t the exact metrical composition has been a matter of m ch disp te,the r emains not being s fficient to admit of any dogmatism.The two principal theories are :

1.The Q antitative Theory.The Sat rnian is a six-foot verse with Anacr sis,and a Caes ra after the third Arsis,or more rarely after the third Thesis. Dab nt mal m Metelli | Naevio poetae.Corneli s L ci s | Scipio Barbat s. Q oi s forma virt tei | paris ma f it.Eor m sectam seq ont r | m lti mor tales. NOTES.1.The Thesis is formed by a long or two shorts;the Arsis by a short,a long ,or two shorts(not immediately before the Caes ra).The Arsis may be wholly s ppr essed,most often the second Arsis of the second hemistich.Short syllables nder the Ict s may be scanned long.Hiat s occ rs everywhere,b t s ally in Caes ra. 2.This theory is held by many scholars,b t with vario s modifications.Th s,some do not accept the lengthening of the short syllables,others wo ld sca by protra ction fo r feet in each half verse,etc. Dab nt mal m Metelli | Naevio poetae,etc. 2.The Accent al TJieory.The Sat rnian verse falls into two halves,the first of w hich has three Theses,the second s ally three,sometimes two,in which case there is s ally Anacr sis in the second hemistich.Q antity is not considered. Dab nt mal m Metelli | Naevio poetae. Q oi s forma virt tei | paris ma f it. NOTES.1.Two accented syllables are reg larly divided by a single naccented syll able,except that between the second and third there are always two.Hiat s allowe d only at Caes ra. 2.A modification of this theory wo ld scan Dab nt mal m Metelli ! Naevio poetae. 3.Very recently a modification of the Accent al Theory has been proposed,which h as m ch in its favor : (a) The accent m st fall on the beginning of each line,tho gh it may be a second ary accent;the first hemistich has three,the second has b t two Theses. (6) The first hemistich has normally seven syllables,the second six;b t an extra short syllable may be admitted where it wo ld be wholly or partially s ppressed in c rrent pron nciation. (c) After the first two feet there is an alternation between words accented on t he first and those accented on the second syllable.

(co A final short vowel is elided,otherwise semi-hiat s is the rale;b t there ma y be fall Hiat s at the Caes ra. Dab nt mal m Metelli | Naevio poetae.Prim(a) ineedit Ccreris I Proserpina p er. [464 VERSIFICATION.] Iambic Rhythms. 757.The Iambic Ehythm is an ascending rhythm,in which the Thesis is do ble of th e Arsis.It is represented By the Iamb s : ; By the Tribrach : ; By the Spondee : ; By the Dactyl: ; ; By t he Anapaest : ; and By the Procele smatic s : . REMARK.The Spondee,Dactyl,Anapaest,and Procele smatidis are all irrational,and a re conseq ently marked on the schemes th s : > ,> vv ;see 744. 758.Iambic Octondri s(Tetrameter Acatalectic). I ss(I) adparari prandi m || amic(a) exspectat me,scio,PL., Men.,599. Hic finis est iambe salve + vindicis doctor mali,SERVIUS. Anacr stic Scheme : > ^ v->-> j.^^ | ^ ^ > -> j.v>^.^ \JJ.^J >JL w >^w

NOTE.This verse is predominantly a comic verse,occ rring most freq ently in TERE NCE,who shows five h ndred lines,while PLAUTUS shows b t three h ndred.The s bst it tions are the same as in the Senarins(761,N.1).There are two varieties : (a) That which is divided into two eq al halves by Diaeresis at the end of the f o rth foot.In this case the fo rth foot as well as the eighth has all the privil eges of the final foot of the Senarins(Hiat s,Syllaba Anceps),and conforms also to its r les,so that the line is practically a distich of two Q aternarii;b t Hi at s after the fo rth foot is denied for TERENCE. (b) That which is divided into two neq al halves by a Caes ra after the fifth A rsis.Here the r les of the final foot apply only to the eighth,and the fo rth ma y be a Spondee.The principle which governs the choice of words after the semiq i naria in the Senarins applies here after the dividing Caes ra.The Hiat s comes nder the general r les.Prom the earliest period there is a tendency to keep the even feet p re.This variety is preferred by TERENCE to the former.Examples of th e two forms are : O Troia,O patria,O Pergam m,|| O Priame,periisti senex,PLAUT. is porro m(e) a tem verberat || inc rsat p gnis calcib s,PLAUT. Facil(e) omnes q om valem s recta || consilia aegrotis dam s,TER. 759.Iambic Septenari s(Tetrameter Catalectic). Bemitte palli m mihi || me m q od involasti,CAT.

w^w <->-.w || w^^ w^.A

[VERSIFICATION.465] Anacr stic Scheme : NOTES.1.This verse is confined principally to PLATITUS and TERENCE;it is to be r egarded as a compo nd of Dimeter + Dimeter Catalectic : hence reg lar Diaeresis after the fo rth foot,which is treated as a final foot.The same r les,in regard to the vario s word-feet allowable,apply here as in the case of the Senari s(761 ,N.6).S bstit tions are allowable in every foot except in the fo rth,when follow ed by a Diaeresis. With Syllaba Anceps : Si abd xeris celabit r " itidem t celata adh c est,PLAUT. With Hiat s : Sed si tibi viginti minae || argenti profer nt r,PLAUT. 2.Exceptionally in PLAUTUS,more of ten in TERENCE,the line is c t by Caes ra aft er the fifth Arsis.In this case the fo rth foot has no exceptional laws except t hat if the seventh foot is not p re the fo rth sho ld be,tho gh this is not abso l tely necessary. 760.The Iambic Senari s(a Stichic meas re).This is an imitation of the Iambic Tr imeter of the Greeks,b t differs from it in that it is a line of six separate fe et and not of three dipodies.In the early Latin there is no distinction between the odd and even feet,s ch as prevails in the Greek Trimeter,b t the same s bsti t tions were allowable in the one as in the other.This distinction is regained i n HORACE and SENECA,who follow the Greek treatment closely,and with whom the lin e may be with some degree of j stice called the Iambic Trimeter,b t it is very d o btf l whether the Roman felt the Iambic Trimeter as did the Greek.In both Sena ri s and Trimeter the last foot is always p re. 761.The Early Use(Senari s). Any s bstit tion is allowed in any foot except the last. Q amvis sermones | poss nt longi texier,PL.,Trin.,797. Q i scire possis + a t ingeni m noscere,TER.,And.,53. S(i) xoris + propter amorem + nolit d cere,TER.,And.,155. Di fort nab nt + vostra consili(a), ita volo,PL.,Trin.,576. Ei r(ei) operam dare te + f erat aliq ant(o) aeq i s,PL.,Trin., 119. | > Ow | www | > ..| w

>^|> | >^|>_ |>^|^_ > ^ | w | > ^ | >ww | > ^ | w > ^ | > | ww ^ | > | > ^ | w >^|> |>^_|w |^,v^v_/|w

> <i"-i | > ^i\j

NOTES.1.In the Iambic meas re two shorts at the end of a polysyllabic word canno t stand in either Thesis or Arsis;hence s ch feet as genera,ma I teria,wo ld not be allowable.B t a Dactyl is sometimes fo nd in the first foot(TER.,E n.,348).T he two shorts of a Thesis cannot be divided between two words,when the second wo

rd la a polysyllable with the accent on the second syllable;hence fingit amorem is [466 VERSIFICATION.] fanity.The two shorts of an Arsis sho ld not be divided between two words if the first short ends a word;b t there are s ndry exceptions;especially the case whe re two words are closely connected,as,for instance,a preposition and ite case;pr opter amarem. 2.The most freq ent Caes ra is the semiq itiaria.Next comes the semisejitendna,w hich is s ally accompanied by the simiternana or by Diaeresis after second foot .Examples above. 3.Elision is more freq ent in the Iambic Senari s than in the Dactylic Hexameter ,and occ rs especially before the first and fifth Theses;also not nfreq ently i n the fo rth foot.The proportion of elision varies between TERENCE(fo r elisions in every three verses) and HORACE(one in five stichic verses,and one in seven i n distichs). 4.Semi-hiat s(720),also called Graecanic s or LSgitim s,is very common both in T hesis and Arsis;Hiat s is also admitted at a change of speaker;whether it is adm issible before proper names,foreign words,and in the principal Caes ra,is still a matter of disp te. 5.If the line is divided by the semiq inaria Caes ra,and the fifth foot is forme d by a single word,the second half of the third foot,together with the fo rth,ma y be formed by a single word only when that is a Cretic or a Fo rth Paeon;as, fili s bonan fide (PL.,Most.,670). Th s depinxti verbis probe wo ld not he allowable for verbis depinxti probe(PL.,Poen.,1114). 6.To close the line with two Iambic feet was not allowable,except as follows :(1 ) When the line ends with a word of fo r syllables or more.(2) When the line end s with a Cretic.(3) When the line ends with an Iambic word preceded by an anapae st or Fo rth Paeon.(4) When a change of person precedes the sixth foot.(5) When elision occ rs in the fifth or sixth foot. 762.The Later Use(Trimeter). S is et ipsa + Roma viribiis r it w -^ ^ | -^.-| <-i .*.<_/ He me per rbem + n am p det tanti mali > ^ w |>^.w | > ^w Deripere l nam + vocib s possim meis >v^/ww | > jc.w | >_d.\_< Infamis Helenas + Castor offens s vicem >-2.wv_/v_<|> -<-< | > -t-<^> Optat q ietem + Pelopis infidi pater > -^ w |>v^ww | > ^ w Alitib s atq e + canib s homicid(am) Hectorem ><^ww | w vi ^ ^ w ^ | > ^.w Vectabor h meris + t nc eg(o) inimicis eq es > ^-v-'v-'v-'|>^.v_'wvy| >^.<_/ Pavid mq e lepor(em) et + advenam laq eo gr em,HOR. *~*-> j-^->^-> ^ | <-^-w | <-^ ^ ^> Anacr stic Scheme : ^ : ^ \ | *-| | ^ I A

NOTES.1.The Iambic Trimeter,when kept p re,has a rapid aggressive movement.Hence ,it is th s sed in lampoons and invectives.It admits the Spondee in the odd pla ces(first,third,fifth foot); the Tribrach in any b t the last,tho gh in HORACE i t is excl ded from the fifth foot;the Dactyl in the first and third.The Anapaest is rare.The Procele smatic s occ rs only in SENECA and TERENTIANUS.When caref l ly handied,the closing part of the verse is kept light,so as to preserve the cha racter.The [VERSIFICATION.467] fifth foot is p re in CATULLUS,b t is almost always a Spondee in SENECA and PETR ONIUS. 2.Diaeresis at the middle of the verse is avoided.Short particles,which adhere c losely to the following word,do not constit te exceptions. Laboriosa nec cohors Ulixei,HOR. Ad lteret r et col mba mil o,HOR. In like manner explain Refertq e tanta grex amic s bera,HOR. 3.The Caes ra is s ally the semiq indria,b t the stmisepttnaria is fo nd also,b t either with the semiq inaria or with Diaeresis after the second foot. 4.The Senari s p r s,composed wholly of Iambi,is fo nd first in CATULLUS(iv.and xxix.);also in HORACE(Epod.,xvi.),VERGIL(Cat.,3,4,8),and the Priapea. 5.Of co rse,in the Anacr stic Scheme,the Caes ra of the ordinary scheme becomes Diaeresis. Le : vis ere I pante II lympha II desi I lit pe I de. 763.Iambic Trimeter Catalectic., Meo renidet in domo lac nar <^^.w \j JL\J ^> ^^> Reg mq e p eris nec satelles Or ci,HOR.> J -LW^^>^.W w^.^7 Anacr stic Scheme,: ^ : ^ w | >|^w| w|^_| I\(with Syncope). NOTES.This occ rs in HORACE(0.,1.4; ii.18).No resol tions are fo nd except in th e second line q oted,where p eris may be dissyllabic(27),and the Spondee alone i s sed for the Iamb s,mainly in the third foot.The Caes ra is always sZmiq infir ia. 764.Trimeter lambic s Cla d s(Choliamb s);Sca on ( Hobbler) Hipponacte s. Miser Cat lle desinas ineptire,CAT. F lsere q ondam candid! tibi soles,CAT. Dominis parant r ista; servi nt vobis,MART. w ^ ^ w^w w^^w > JL\J >^w w^.^ wo-^w w^w ^> JL j.

Anacr stic Scheme : :^w| |^.^| wli-i-l^^.\J \J 'W Trochaic Trimeter with Anacr sis,Syncope,and Protraction. NOTES.1.In the Choliamb s the rhythm is reversed at the close,by p tting a Troch ee or Spondee in the sixth foot.The lighter the first part of the verse,the grea

ter the s rprise.It is intended to express comic anger,resentment,disappointment . 2.This metre,introd ced into Rome by MATTIUS,was sed freq ently by CATULLUS and MABTIAL.PERSIUS also has it in his Prolog e. 3.The Dactyl is occasional in the first and third feet,the Tribrach occ rs very rarely in the first,more often in the third and fo rth,freq ently in the second. The Spondee is fo nd in the first and third feet;the Anapaest only in the first. 4.The Caes ra is s ally semiq inaria,sometimes semiseptenaria,which is reg lar ly s pported by Diaeresis after the second foot. 765.Iambic Q aterndri s(Dimeter). Inarsit aest osi s Imbres nivesq e comparat Videre properantes dom m Ast ego vicissim risero,HOR. [468 VERSIFICATION.] Anacr stic Scheme : NOTE.This verse is constr cted according to the principles which govern the Sena ritis and Octonari s.It is rare in systems ntil the t ne of SENECA,and is s al ly employed as a Cla s la in connection with Octonarii and Septenarii(PLADTUS,TE RENCE),Senarii(HORACE),or Dactylic Hexameter(HORACE). 766.Iambic Ternari s(Dimeter Catalectie}, ^ .w w _s_ ^ > -=-w w^w w ^ ww^>^.w > ^w w > x.^

NOTE.This verse is fo nd mainly in PLAUTUS and TERENCE,and sed as a Cla s la to Bacchic Tetrameters(PLAUTUS),Iambic Septenarii(PLAUTUS);b t twice in TERENCE(An d.,485;Hec.,731).It is fo nd in systems first in PETRONTUS. 767.The Iambic Tripody Catalectie and the Dipody Acatalectic are fo nd here and there. Inops amator,Trin,,256. Bon (s) sit bonis,B.,660.

Trochaic Rhythms. 768.The Trochaic Rhythm is a descending rhythm,in which the Thesis is do ble of the Arsis.It is represented, By the Trochee : j.w; By the Tribrach : o w -i; By the Spondee : ^; By the Anapa est : -^ *->; By the Dactyl : ^ w w .By the Procele smatic s : ^ w w . REMARK.The Spondee,Anapaest,Dactyl,and Procele smatic s are all irrational and a re accordingly meas red > ,ww > ,-^ w or w^.<~> \j ^ ;see 744. 769.Trochaic Octonari s(Tetrameter Acatalectic}.Scheme: >> >-> > > > -> Parce iam camoena vati || parce iam sacro f rori.- SERVIUS. Date viam q a f gere liceat ,|| facite,totae plateae pateant,PL.,A l.,40 7. NOTE.This verse belongs to the cantica of early Comedy.It is properly a compo nd

Id repperi i(am) exempl m

>^w > ^ or> : ^^^> i I\

of two Q aternarii.Hence Hiat s and Syllaba Anceps are admitted in the Diaeresi s.A fo rth or sixth Thesis,formed by the last syllable of a word forming or endi ng in a Spondee or Anapaest,was avoided,as was also a monosyllabicclose.The S bs tit tions were allowed in all feet except the eighth,where the Tribrach is rare. 770.Trochaic Septenari s(Tetrameter Catalectie).Scheme : -c-^ ^ ^ > ^ ^ > ^v^ [VERSIFICATION.469] Cras amet q i n mq (am) amavit || q iq (e) amavit cras amet.- PERVIG.VEN . T m(e) amoris magi'q (am) honoris || servavisti gratia.- ENNIUS. Vap lar(e) ego te vehementer || i beo : ne me territes.- PLAUT. NOTES.1.This is s ally divided by a Diaeresis after the fo rth Arsis into two h alves,with the license of a closing verse before the Diaeresis;this is often s p ported by Diaeresis after the second foot.Not nfreq ently the line is divided b y Caes ra after the fo rth Thesis,which may in this case be Anceps or have Hiat s,tho gh not in TERENCE;b t other critics ref se to admit s ch a division,and pr efer Diaeresis after the fifth foot.The s bstit tions are allowable in any foot except the seventh,which is reg larly kept p re,tho gh occasionally in early Lat in a Tribrach or a Dactyl occ rs even here.B t the Dactyl is rare ha the fo rth foot. 2.The r le for the words allowable after the semiq inaria Caes ra in the Senari s (761,N.5) apply here after the Diaeresis,with the necessary modifications;that is,the second hemistich cannot be formed by a word occ pying the fifth and the Thesis of the sixth foot,followed by a word occ pying the two s cceeding half fe et, nless the first word is a Cretic or a Fo rth Paeon. 3.In regard to the close the same r les apply as in the case of the Iambic Senar i s (761,N.6);in regard to the fo rth and sixth Theses the r les are the same as for the Octonari s(769,N.). 4.The strict Septenari s of the later poets keeps the odd feet p re,and rigidly observes tho Diaeresis. 771.Trochaic Tetrameter Cla d s. H nc Ceres,cibi ministra,fr gib s s is porcet,VARRO.

^.^ w^w ^> JL \j >_/^^w

NOTE.This verse is fo nd only in the Menippean Satires of VARKO,and is formed,li ke the Iambic Senari s Cla d s,by reversing the last two q antities. 772.Trochaic Q aternari s with Anacr sis. Si fract s illabat r orbis,HOR.: ^ w | --| ^ w | U NOTE.This occ rs only in the Alcaic Strophe of HORACE. 773.Trochaic Ternari s(Dimeter Catalectic). Respice vero Thesprio,PL.,Ep.,3 Non eb r neq (e) a re m,HOR.

NOTE.An ncommon meas re,confined mainly to early poetry and to HORACE;it is

se

d as a Cla s la between Tetrameters(PLAUTDS) and Iambic Senarii Catalectic (HORA CE),or in series.The third foot was kept p re;also the others in the strict,meas re.

774.The Trochaic Tripody Acatalectic(Ithyphallic). Q (om) s s est t p deat,PLAUT.,-f-w > & ^ <~> NOTE.This is rare,and appears only in early Latin and as a Cla s la, s ally with Cretics.S bstit tions were allowable in every foot. [470 VERSIFICATION.] 775.Trochaic Tripody Catalectic. Ehe ,q (am) ego malis || perdidi modis, PL.,Ps.,259.JL> \i> \j \j .*.|| j.^> . .^ jc. NOTE.This is fo nd occasionally in early Latin; s ally two at a time,otherwise a s a Cla s la.When the first word is a Cretic the line may end in two Iambi. 776.Trochaic Dipody(Monometer). Nimis inepta's,PL.,H d.,68 1.vi/ ^ w ^.^ NOTE.This is fo nd occasionally as a Cla s la with Cretic Tetrameters.

Anapaestic Rhythms. 777.The Anapaestic Rhythm is an ascending rhythm,in which the Thesis is to the A rsis as 2 to 2.It is represented, By the Anapaest : w w ^.; By the Spondee :--; By the Dactyl : >i,w; By the Proce le smatic s : *-w \I/ ^>. NOTES.1.The Anapaestic meas re is not ncommon in the Cantica of PLAUTUS; b t it is the metre most s bject to license of all the early metres.Notice especially the operation of the Iambic Law(716,717);the common occ rrence of Syni esis,of D iastole,and less often of Syncope',etc. 2.Strict Anapaestic lines after the model of the Greek are fo nd only in VARRO,S ENECA,and later a thors. 778.Anapaestic Octonari s(Tetrameter Acatalectic),and Anapaestic Septenari s(Tet rameter Catalectic}. Hostibiis victis,civib s salvis || re placida,pacib s perfectis,Pers.,753. vi-w \L>^> || <i"^ ww ^.

Sept mas ess(e) aedis a porta + | b(i) <^^> *.| ill(e) habitat leno q oi i ssit,Ps.,597. w ^ vi/w Ait illam miseram,cr ciar(i) et lacr mantem s(e) adflictare,PL.,M.G.,1032. Erit et tib(i) exoptat( m) obtinget || bon( m) hab(e) anim m ne formida,PL., M.G.,1011.

w ^ ^ ^^ o w | w^^ ^~A w ^ ^ w <->

NOTES.1.These have reg larly the Diaeresis after the fo rth foot,dividing the li

ne into Q aternarii.Before the Diaeresis,the licenses of a closing foot(Hiat s a nd Syllaba Anceps) are occasionally fo nd. 2.In the Septenari s the seventh Thesis may be resolved,b t the resol tion of th e eighth in the Octonari s is avoided. 779.Anapaestic Trimeter Catalectic. Perspicio nihili meam vos gratiam facere,PL.,C rc.,155.v&w ww j.\o^i A NOTE.This verse is very rare,and is denied by some critics;it has the same treat ment as the Septenari s. [VERSIFICATION.471] 780.Anapaestic Q aternari s(Dimeter Acatalcctic).

NOTE.This verse avoids resol tion of the fo rth Thesis : Syllaba A ccps and Hiat s are rare. 781.Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic(Paroemiac).

Vol cer pede corpore p lcher Ling a cat s ore canor s Ver m memorare magis q am F nct m la dare decebit. - AUSON.

w^^ww ^w^.v -.ww w w _.> ^.\j \j ww^.w ^-ww^.v^

NOTES.1.This verse is not common except as the close of a system of Anapaestic A catalectic Dimeters.It allows in early Latin resol tion of the third Thesis. 2.Latin Anapaests,as fo nd in later writers,are mere metrical imitations of the Greek Anapaests,and do not correspond to their original in contents.The Greek An apaest was an anacr stic dactylic meas re or march(in 4/4 time).Hence the se of Pa se to bring o t the fo r bars. Paroemiac s : Anacr stic Scheme. Vol cer pede corpore p lcher A Dimeter Acatalectic : Anacr stic Scheme. Q ib s Ocean s vinc la rer m \j \j : w w | --| \j \j | > The Arses of the last feet are s pplied by the Anacr sis of the followin g verse. 782.Anapaestic Dipody(Manometer Acatalectic). Omne parat mst,PL.,Min.,365 ^^> j-

<-^ : w \_ | \j\j | --|

NOTE.This verse is fo nd in anapaestic systems between Anapaestic Dimeters.

Dactylic Rhythms.

Venient annis || saec la sgris Q ib s Ocean s || vinc la rer m Laxet et ingens || pateat tell s Tethysq e novos || detegat orbes Nec sit terris || ltima Th lS. - SEN.TRAG.

^ w ^ -v /w w w ^.w w ow -v^> w \-> -c--c-<~>v_/ --&^ --M/W --

783.The Dactylic Rhythm is a descending rhythm,in which the Thesis is eq al to t he Arsis(2 = 2). The Dactylic Rhythm is represented by the Dactyl :-*-<-"-'.Often,also,by the Spo ndee : ^ 784.Dactylic(Heroic) Hexameter.The Heroic Hexameter is composed of two Dactylic tripodies,the second of which ends in a Spondee.Spondees may be s bstit ted for the Dactyl in the first fo r feet;in the fifth foot,only when a special effect i s to be prod ced.S ch verses are called Spondaic.The longest Hexameter contains five Dactyls and one Spondee(or Trochee) in all,seventeen syllables;the shortest in se,five Spondees and one Dactyl in all,thirteen syllables. This variety in the length of the verse,combined with the great n mber of caes r al pa ses,gives the Hexameter pec liar advantages for contin o s composition. [472 VERSIFICATION.] Scheme : w \ ^w \ *.w \ *-w \ +w \ +1.Ut f gi nt aq ilas + timidissima || t rba col mbae.Ov. 2.At t ba terribili + sonit + proc l || aere canoro.VERG. | Five Dactyls 3.Q adr pedante p trem + sonit | q atit || ng la camp m. VERG. 4.C m medio celeres + revolant | ex aeq ore mergi.VERG. 5.Vasti s ins rgens + decimae | r it impet s ndae.Ov. | Fo r Dactyls. 6.Et reboat ra c m + regio + cita |: barbara | bomb m.LUCR. 7.M ta met terram + genib s + s mmissa petebat.LUCR. 8.Inter c nctantes + cecidit + morib nda ministros.VERG. | Three Dactyls. 9.Ne t rbata volent + rapidis + l dibria ventis.VERG. 10.Versaq (e) in obnixos + rgent r Il corn a vasto.VERQ. | TWO Dactyls 11.Processit longe + flammantia || moenia m ndi.LUCR. 12.Portam vi m lta + converse j cardine torq et.VERG. 13.Tect m a g st( m) ingens + cent m s blime col mnis.! One Dactyl. VERG. 14.Olli respondit + Rex Albai Longai.ENNIUS.} No Dactyl. 15.A t leves ocreas + lento + d c nt argento.VERG.} 16.S nt ap d infernos + tot milia formosamm.PROP.} 17.Aeriaeq e Alpes + et n bifer || Appennin s.Ov. 18.Proc b it viridi-i q (e) in litore || conspicit r s s.VERG.} Monosyllabic 19.Part ri nt inontes + nascet r || ridic l s iii s.HOR.}ending. 10 +6 = 16 8 } Semiq in.and 20.Nascere,praeq e diem+veniens age,||L cifer,alm m.VERG.{ B colic. { Third Trochee 21.Insignem pietate + vir m + tot adire labores.VERG. {

and

{ Semisept. 22.Et nigrae violae + s nt || et vaccinia | nigra.VERG.} Split in half. 23.Sparsis || hastis || longis || camp s || splendet et horret.EN.} Shivered. 24 Q amvis sint s b aq a s b aq a maledicere tentant.Ov.} a,-so nd. 25.Me m(e) ads m q i fec(i) in me convertite fermm.VERG.}-e -so nd. 26.Discissos n dos laniabant dentib s art s.VERG.}-e-so nd. NOTES.1.The two reigning ict ses are the first and fo rth,and the pa ses are so arranged as to give special prominence to them the first by the pa se at the end of the preceding verse,the fo rth by pa ses within the verse,both before and af

ter the Thesis. 2.The principal Caes ra is the simiq inaria or penlhemimeral,i.e.,after the Thes is of the third foot,or Masc line Caes ra of the third foot;the next is the semi septenoria or hepthemimeral,after the Thesis of the fo rth foot;b t s ally s pp lemented by the semiternaria in the Thesis of the second or by one after the sec ond Trochee;then the Feminine Caes ra of the third foot,the so-called Third Troc hee,which is less sed among the Romans than among the Greeks.As Latin poetry is largely rhetorical,and the Caes ra is of more importance for recitation than fo r singing,the Roman poets are very exact in the observance of these pa ses. [VERSIFICATION.473] In verses with several Caes ras,the semiseptenaria o tranks the semiq inaria,if it precedes a period,and the latter does not,or if it is perfect and the latter is imperfect (i.e.,formed by tmesis or by elision);it also as a masc line Caes r a o tranks the Third Trochee as a feminine.In other cases there may be do bt as to the principal Caes ra. 3.The Diaeresis which is most caref lly avoided is the one after the third foot, especially if that foot ends in a Spondee,and the verse is thereby split in half . Examples are fo nd occasionally,and if the reg lar Caas ra precedes,the verse is not positively fa lty. His lacrimis vitam + dam s || et misereseim s ltro.-VERG.It is abominable when no other Caes ra proper is combined with it.Poeni || pervortentes || omnia || ci rc mc rsant.-ENNIUS. On the other hand the Diaeresis at the end of the fo rth foot divides the verse into proportionate parts(sixteen and eight morae,or two to one),and gives a grac ef l trochaic movement to the hexameter.This is called the B colic Caes ra,and w hile common in Greek,is not so in Latin even in b colic poetry.JUVENAL,however,i a fond of it,showing one in every fifteen verses. Ite dom m sat rae | venit Hesper s || Ite capellae.-VERG. 4.Verses witho t Caes ra are very rare;a few are fo nd in ENNIUS(see No.23) and LUCILIUS.HORACE ses one designedly in A.P.,263. 5.Elision is fo nd most often in VERGIL(one case in every two verses) and least often in LUCAN(leaving o t ENNIUS and CLAUDIAN).CATULLUS,JUVENAL,HORACE,OVID sta nd abo t midway between these two extremes.It is very rare in the Thesis of the first foot,and is fo nd oftenest in the following order : the Thesis of the seco nd foot,the Arsis of the fo rth,the Arsis of the first,the Thesis of the third. 6.Simple Hiat s is very rare in lines composed wholly of Latin words,except at t he principal Caes ra;it is fo nd after a final short syllable(excl ding -m) b t twice(V.,EC.,ii.53;A.,1.405);after a long monosyllable(omitting Interjections o and a) b t once(V.,A.,iv.235).B t before the principal Caes ra,or if the line co ntains a Greek word,examples are not very ncommon.VERGIL has altogether abo t f orty cases; HORACE shows two cases(S.,1.1,108;Epod.,13,3);CATULLUS two in the He xameter of the Elegiac Distich(66,11;107,1); PROFERTIUS one(m.7,49). 7.Of Semi-hiat s VERGIL shows some ten examples at the close of the Dactyl,b t a ll of Greek words except A.,iii.an;EC.,3,79;there are occasional examples elsewh ere,as in PROPERTIUS,HORACE,etc.There are also several examples of Semi-hiat s a fter a monosyllable in the first short of the Dactyl,as : CAT.,xcvii.i;V.,A.,vi. 507;HOR.,S.,1.g,38.Hiat s after n m occ rs in HOR.,S.,ii.2,28.

8.VERGIL is fond of Diastole,showing fifty-seven cases,all except three(A.,iii.4 64,702;xii.648) of syllables ending in a consonant;HORACE,in Satires and Epistle s,has eleven,once only of a vowel(S.,ii.3,22);CATULLUS,three;PROPBRTIUS,three; T IBULLUS,fo r;MARTIAL(in the Distich),two;VERGIL also lengthens q e sixteen times ,b t only when q e is repeated in the verse,and before two consonants or a do bl e consonant(except A.,iii.91);OVID exercises no s ch care. 9.A short syllable formed by a final short vowel remains short before two conson ants,of which the second is not a liq id(mainly sc,sp,st),especially in the fift h foot,less often in the first.LUCILIUS,LUCRETIUS,and ENNIUS have n mero s examp les of this;VBRGIL b t one case(A.,xi.309),except before ;HORACE has eight case s in the Satires;PROPERTIUS six;TIBULLUS two cases,one before smaragdos. 10.A Hexameter sho ld close(a) with a dissyllable preceded by a polysyllable of at least three syllables,or(6) with a trisyllable preceded by a word of at least two syllables.The preposition is proclitic to its case.Exceptions to this r le are common in early Latin,b t decrease later.Th s ENNIUS shows fo rteen per cent ,of exceptional lines.In later times artistic reasons sometimes ca sed the emplo yment even of a monosyllable at the end(see exs.18,19). 11.Spondaic lines are exceptional in ENNIUS and LUCRETIUS,more common in [474 VERSIFICATION.] CATULLUS,rare in VERGIL,OVID,HORACE,never in TIBULLUS.The stricter poets req ire d that in this case the fo rth foot sho ld be a Dactyl,and then the two last fee t were s ally a single word.Entirely Spondaic lines are fo nd in ENNIUS(three c ases,as Ann.,1.66,M.) and CAT.(ne,3). 12.Ema s shows three pec liar cases of the resol tion of the Thesis in the Dacty l,Ann.,267;Sat.,53 and 59. 13.Hypermetrical verses r nning into the next by Synapheia are rare;e.g.,LUCR.,v .846;CAT.,64,298;115,5.VERGIL has twenty cases, s ally involving q e or ve,b t t wice -m(A.,vii.160;G.,1.,295);three other cases are do btf l.HORACE has two case s(in the Satires),OVID three,VALERIUS FLACCUS one.HORACE has also fo r cases of two verses nited by tmesis of a compo nd word. 14.P re dactylic lines are rare;the most s al forms of the first fo r feet of t he Btichic meas re are these : DSSS,15 per cent.; DSDS,11.8 per cent.; DDSS,11 p er cent.; SDSS,10 per cent.The most ncommon are SSDD,1.9 per cent.; SDDD,2 per cent.The proportion of Spondee to Dactyl in the first fo r feet varies from 65.8 per cent.of Spondee in CATULLUS to 45.2 per cent,in OVID.The following statemen ts are from Drobisch :(a) Excepting ENNIUS,CICERO,and Sm s ITALICUS,Latin poets have more Dactyls than Spondees in the first foot.(6) Excepting LUCRETIUS,more S pondees in the second,(c) Excepting VALERIUS FLACCUS,more Spondees in the third. (d) Witho t exception,more Spondees in the fo rth. 15.M ch of the bea ty of the Hexameter depends on the selection and arrangement of the words,considered as metrical elements.The examples given above have been chosen with especial reference to the pict resq e effect of the verse.Monosyllab les at the end of the Hexameter denote s rprise;anapaestic words,rapid movement, and the like. Again,the Hexameter may be lowered to a conversational tone by large masses of S pondees,and free handiing of the Caes ra.Compare the Hexameters of HORACE in the Odes with those in the Satires. 785.Elegiac Pentameter(Catalectic Trimeter repeated).

The Elegiac Pentameter consists of two Catalectic Trimeters or Penthemimers,the first of which admits Spondees,the second does not.There is a fixed Diaeresis in the middle of the verse,as marked above,which is commonly s pplemented by the s emiternaria Caes ra.The Pentameter derives its name from the old meas rement : w w ,w w ,,ww ,^w;and the name is a convenient one,beca se the verse consists of 2 1/2 + 2 1/2 Dactyls.The Elegiac Distich is sed in sentimental,amatory,epigram matic poetry. The m sical meas rement of the Pentameter is as follows : W v-> I W >-> I '1 I WW I WV-> I A This shows why neither Syllaba Anceps nor Hiat s is allowed at the Diaeresis,and explains the preference for length by nat re at that point. At dolor in lacrimas || verterat omne mer m,TIB.^.w w ^.w w Me legat et lecto || carmine doct s amet,Ov.^.^ w ^-* At n nc barbaries || grandis habere nihil,Ov.-j.\j \j *.Concess m n lla || lege redibit iter, PBOP.J.J.J. [VERSIFICATION.475] The Elegiac Pentameter occ rs only as a Cla s la to the Heroic Hexameter,with wh ich it forms the Elegiac Distich.Conseq ently the sense sho ld not r n into the following Hexameter(exceptions rare) : Saep(e) ego tentavi c ras depellere vino At dolor in lacrimas || verterat omne mer m,TIB.Ingeniom q ondam f erat pretiosi s a ro At n nc barbaries || grandis Labere nihil,Ov.Par erat Inferior vers s : risisse C pido Dicit r atq e n m || s rrip isse pedem,Ov.Saep(e) ego c m dominae d kes a limin e d ro Agnosco voces | haec negat esse domi,TIB. NOTES.1.In the first two feet of the Pentameter,which alone can s ffer variation ,the forms are as follows : DS,46 per cent.; DD,24.5 per cent.; ss,16 per cent.; SD,13.5 per cent.CATULLUS,however,has BS,34.5 per cent. 2.Elision is rare,especially in the second hemistich.When it occ rs it is genera lly in the first Arsis or second Thesis,and s ally affects a short vowel or -m. CATULLUS shows the greatest proportion of examples,OVID the smallest.Except in C ATULLUS and LYGDAMUS there are fewer cases of Elision in the Pentameter than in the Hexameter. 3.Elision and Diastole in the Diaeresis are rare.CATULLUS especially,and PROPERT IUS occasionally,have Elision.PROPERTIUS and MARTIAL show each two cases of Dias tole(PROP.,ii.8,8;ii.24,4;MART.,ix.101,4;xiv.77,2). 4.A final short vowel before two consonants,one of which is a liq id or s,is len gthened twice in TIBULLUS,and remains short once in PROPERTIUS(TiB.,1.5,38; 1.6, 34;PROP.,iv.4,48). 5.Dialysis occ rs in compo nds of solvo and volvo;as,CAT.,66,74;TIB.,1.7,2,etc. 6.In the strict handiing of the Pentameter by OVID,the r le was that it sho ld c lose with a dissyllable.So in his Amores,OVID shows no example of any other endi ng;and in his Tristia the proportion is one in one h ndred and forty lines.In ea

rlier times,however,there was no especial avoidance of polysyllabic endings,tho gh more are fo nd in CATULLUS than in any other a thor.Pec liar is PROPERTIUS,wh o,while almost eq alling CATULLUS in his disregard of the law of the dissyllabic ending in the first book,eq als the Tristia of OVID in the observance of it in his fo rth.With dissyllabic ending the prevailing forms of the second Hemistich are <-* ^ ,^ > *-* and <-> ^ <-,\-> ,b t TIBULLUS and OVID,and in less degree CA TULLUS,employ q ite often <-v_> w ,w and ,'-'-',<-* ,v> . 786.Dactylic Tetrameter Acat.(metr m Alcmani m). N nc decet a t viridi nitid m cap t ^.ww^.ww-c.^w^.ww Pallida mors aeq o p lsat pede j-w^-.*_ . .^ ^ Vitae s mma brevis spem nos vetat ^ ^^w^ ij^ This verse occ rs mainly in combination with an Ithyphattlc to form the Greater Archttochian verse;occasionally in stichic composition in SENECA;also in TER.,An d.,625. 787.Dactylic Tetrameter Cat.in Dissyllab m(Archilochi m). A t Epheson bimarisve Corinthi fortes peioraq e passi Mensorem cohibent Archyta,HOR [476 VERSIFICATION.] NOTE.This line,which only occ rs in the Alcmanian System,may also be looked pon as an Acatalectic Tetrameter with a spondaic close. 788.Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic in Syllabam(Lesser Archilochiari). P lvis et mbra s m s,HOR.^ w w -=-w w ^ NOTE.This line occ rs mainly in the first three ArchUochian Strophes.

NOTE.Tho gh generally meas red th s,this verse is properly logaoedic,and will re c r nder that head(792).It occ rs mainly in the Sapphic stan a,and at the close of series of Sapphic He decasyllabics in SENECA. Logaoedic Rhythms. 790.The Logacedic Khythm is a pec liar form of the Trochaic rhythm,in which the Arsis has a stronger secondary ict s than the ordinary Trochee. Instead of the Trochee,the cyclic Dactyl or the irrational Trochee may be employ ed.This cyclic Dactyl is represented in morae by 1,,1;in m sic,by J.J j = ^,T V, i When Dactyls are employed,the Trochee preceding is called a Basis,or Tread,commo nly marked x .If the basis is do ble,the second is almost always irrational in L atin poetry.Instead of the Trochee,an Iamb s is sometimes prefixed.Anacr sis and Syncope are also fo nd. REMARKS.1.Logaoedic comes from Xoyos,prose,and doter/,song,perhaps beca se the r hythms seem to vary as in prose.2.Dactyls are s ally,b t not necessarily,employ ed.

789.Dactylic Dimeter Catalectic in Dissyllab m(Adonic).Terr it -^ w

rbem,HOR.-*-^ ^

No Dactyl. 791.Alcaic Enneasyllabic. Si fract s illabat r orbis,HOR.^ : *-v*.>*.\jj.\j NOTE.The Anacr sis sho ld be long.HORACE shows no exceptions in the fo rth book and very few in the first three.The reg lar Caes ra is the semiq inaria. One Dactyl. 792.Adonic.

NOTE.Elision is not allowed in this verse.As far as its formation is concerned,i t sho ld consist either of a dissyllable + a trisyllable,or the reverse.Procliti cs and enclitics go with their principals. [VERSIFICATION.477] 793.Aristophanic(Choriambic).

NOTE.This verse occ rs mainly in the lesser Sapphic Strophe of HORACE. One Dactyl,with Basis. 794.Pherecratean. x Nigris aeq ora ventis,HOR. ^ > | A/ <~-| L^ | NOTE.This verse occ rs in the fo rth Asclepiadean Strophe of HORACE;also in CATU LLUS(xvii.) and the Priapea.No Elision is allowed by HORACE,and there is no reg lar Caes ra. 795.Glyconic. emirabit r insolens,HOR. -+-> | -^ <~ | ^.w | .

NOTE.This occ rs in the second,third,and fo rth Asclepiadian strophes of HORACE; also in CATULLUS(xvii.) and the Priapea.There is generally the semiternaria Caes ra;occasionally instead of it a Second Trochee.Elision of long syllables is ver y rare in HORACE;Elision of a short before the long of the Dactyl more often.HOR ACE also shows occasional liberties,s ch as Diastole(0.,iii.24,5),Dialysis(<?.,i ,23,4),and lines ending with monosyllables(0.,1.3,19;1.19,13;iv.i,33). 796.Phalaecean(Hendecasyllabic). x Passer mort s est meae p ellae. Arida modo p mic(e) expolit m T ae Lesbia sint satis s perq e.CAT. ^-^ --> ' w : _

NOTES.1.This verse,introd ced into Latin by LAEVTUS,was sed very often by CATUL LUS,MARTIAL,FLINT MINOR,PETRONIUS,and STATIUS,as well as in the Priapea and else where. 2.In Greek the Basis was not nfreq ently an Iamb s.So,too,in CATULLUS,b t the t endency in Latin was to make it a Spondee;th s,in the PriapSa,PETRONIUS,and MART

Lydia die per omnfe,HOR.A/w | jc.v \

Terr it

rbem,HOR.

-<I w | ^ ^ |

t.| A

IAL it is always so,while STATIUS has b t one case of a Trochee,and AUSONIUS b t one of an Iamb s. 3.The principal Caes ra is the semiq inaria; b t CATULLUS ses also almost as fr eq ently Diaeresis after the second foot.Occasionally there is a Diaeresis after the third foot,s pplemented by a Second Trochee Caes ra. 4.Elision is very common in CATULLUS;in the Priapea,MARTIAL,and later it is very rare,if we excl de Aphaeresis from consideration.Hardening(723) is occasional,a nd CATULLUS shows a few cases of Semi-hiat s.A monosyllabic ending is very rare, with the exception of es and est. 5.CATULLUS,in 55,apparently shows a mixt re of reg lar Phalaeceans and sp rio s Phalaeceans in which the Dactyl is s pplanted by a Spondee.The poem is still nd er disc ssion. One Dactyl,with Do ble Basis. 797.Sapphic(Hendecasyllabic). x x A diet cives + ac isse ferr m,HOR.w| >| fv^w| w| w NOTES.1.In the Greek meas re,often retained in CATULLUS,the Dactyl is meas red w w;in HORACE,owing to a strong Caes ra after the long it is reg larly v^I [478 VERSIFICATION.] F rther,CATULLUS,like the Greeks,employed occasionally a Trochee in the second f oot;HORACE made it a r le to employ only a Spondee there. 2.The reg lar Cfes ra in Latin is the gSmig lnaria;b t the Third Trochee(784,N.2 ) is fo nd not nfreq ently in CATULLUS and HORACE,b t not later.The sage of HO RACE is pec liar in this respect : In the first and second books there are seven cases in two h ndred and eighty-five verses;in the third none at all;in the fo rth twenty-two in one h ndred and five verses;in the Carmen Saec lare nineteen i n fifty-seven verses. 3.Elision is very common in CATULLUS,b t occ rs in HORACE only in abo t one vers e in ten.Later sage tends to restrict Elision.Licenses are extremely rare in th e classical period.So HORACE shows one example of Diastole(0.,ii.6,14).Monosylla bic endings are not common,b t the word is s ally attached closely with what pr ecedes.The last syllable is reg larly long. 4.SENECA shows some pec liarities : occasionally a Dactyl in the second foot,or a Spondee in the third;occasionally also Dialysis.One Dactyl with Do ble Basis a nd Anacr sis. 798.-Alcaic(Greater) Hendecasyllabic. <-> x x Vides t alta || stet nive candid m >:-^w | - .> |A/w | j.\j | ^.^ Soracte nec iam || s stineant on s,HOR. NOTES.1.The second Basis is always a Spondee;the few exceptions having been emen ded.The Anacr sis is reg larly long;I Ion ACE shows no exception in the fo rth b ook and very few in the first three.The last syllable may be long or short. 2.The reg lar Caes ra is a Diaeresis after the second foot;HORACE shows b t two exceptions in six h ndred and thirty-fo r verses(0.,1.37,14;iv.14,17).A few othe rs show imperfect Caes rae,as O.,1.16,21;1.37,5;ii.17,21.

3.In regard to Elision,the facts are the eaine as in the case of the Sapphic. 4.Licenses are not common : Diastole occ rs in H.,O.,iii.5,17;Hardening (723) oc c rs in H.,O.,iii.4,41;iii.6,6.Tmesis is not nfreq ent in forms of q ic mq e(H. ,O.,1.9,14;1.16,2;1.27,14). Two Dactyls. 799.Alcaic(Lesser) or Decasyllabic. Vertere f nerib s tri mphos,HOR. <_/ | A,^ | j.^> \ j.^

NOTE.The Caes ra is reg larly the semiternaria,occasionally the Second Trochee.E lision occ rs a little less often in this meas re than in the Hendecasyllabic.Th e last syllable is s ally long.Diastole'occ rs in H.,O.,ii.13,16. In all these,the Dactyl has a diminished val e.More q estionable is the logaoedi c character of the Greater Archilochian : 800.Archilochian(Greater) = Dactylic Tetrameter and Trochaic Tripody. Solvit r acris hiems grata vice || veris et Favo'ni,HOR. [VERSIFICATION.479] If meas red logaoedically,the two shorts of the Dactyl m st be red ced in val e to one(^^ = <--),and the logacedic scheme is ^f^> I ^J^l '\^^r 'v^A_; " ''A Logaoedic tetrapody + Logaocdic tetrapody with Syncope. NOTE.Diaeresis is always fo nd after the fo rth foot,which is always Dactylic.Th e principal Caes ra is the semiq inaria.In the third foot a Spondee is preferred ,whereas the Greek model has more often the Dactyl. 801.Choriambic Rhythms.When a logacedic series is syncopated,apparent choriambi arise.What is | - ^ | t_ | seems to be ww .Gen ine choriambi do not exist in La tin,except,perhaps,in the single line PL.,Men,,no. 802.Asclepiadean(Lesser). This verse is formed by a Catalectic Pherecratean followed by a Catalectic Arist ophanic. Maecenas atavis || eclite rigibfis,x HOR.> | A,w | c_ || A,w | j-v | j.^ NOTES.1.There sho ld be Diasresis,complete or incomplete(i.e.,weakened by Elisio n),between the two halves.Only two exceptions are cited(H.,O.,ii.12,25;iv.8,17). The Caes ra is reg larly the semiternarla in HORACE,less often the Second Troche e. 2.Elision occ rs abo t as often as in the Elegiac Pentameter.It occ rs most ofte n in the first Dactyl and in the stichic meas re.The final syllable may be short or long;b t a monosyllable is rare.Licenses are likewise rare,as Diastole(H.,O. ,1.3,36). 803'Asclepiadean(Greater).

N llam Vare sacra || vite pri s || seVeris arborem,HOR.NOTE.This verse differs f rom the preceding by having a Catalectic Adonic(792) inserted between the two ha lves.Diasresis always separates the parts in HORACE.The r les of Elision are the same as in the preceding verse. 804.Sapphic(Greater). Te dees oro Sybarin || c r properas amando,HOR. x x J-w | ^-> |-T-^ li-c-llAyv^ | ^.w | "-^ | A NOTE.This verse differs from the lesser Sapphic by the insertion of a catalectic Adonic.It is fo nd only in HORACE(0.,1.8).Diaeresis always occ rs after the fo rth foot,and there is also a semiq inaria.Caes ra. [480 VERSIFICATION.] 805.Priapean(Glyconic + Pherecrateari). H nc l c m tibi dedicQ || cdnsecroq e Priape,CAT. X X ^ > I A,w I ^ W I t.|| ^ > | A,w |^| ^ ^ NOTE.Diaeresis always follows the Glyconic,b t neither Hiat s nor Syllaba Ancepa is allowable.The verse occ rs in CAT.17 and Priap.85. Cretic and Bacchic Rhythms. 806.These passionate rhythms are fo nd not nf req ently in PLAUTUS and occasion ally elsewhere.They both belong to the Q inq epartite or Five-Eighths class. The distrib tion of the Cretic s is 3 + 2 morae.The metrical val e of the Cretic s is ^(Amphimacer).For it may be s bstit ted the First Paeon,w ^ w,or the Fo rt h Paeon,w ^ w .

NOTE.Do ble resol tion in the same foot is not allowable,and there is rarely mor e than one resol tion in a verse.Instead of the middle short an irrational long is sometimes fo nd. 807.Tetrameter Acataleetic.-f.^ ^-\ ^.w^.| ^ w ^ | ^.w^.Ex bonis pess ra(l) et f rand lentisst ni,PL.,Capt.,235. NOTE.Resol tion is not allowed at the end nor in the second foot immediately bef ore a Cses ra.The Arsis immediately preceding(i.e.,of the second and fo rth foot ) is reg larly p re. 808.Tetrameter Catalectic.-*-^ ^ | ^w^.| ^w^.| *.Da mi(hi) h6c mei metim sf m(e) amis s(i)andes,PL.,Trin.,244. NOTE.The existence of s ch lines is disp ted,b t the balance of a thority seems to be in favor of recognising them. 809.Dimeter Acataleetic. Nosce salt(em) h nc q is est,PL.,Ps.,262.j-w ^ | ^ ^ *.

NOTE.This verse is fo nd s ally at the close of a Cretic system,or with Trochai c Septenarii.It follows the same r les as the Tetrameter,that is,the last long i s not resolved and the second Arsis is kept p re. 810.Acataleetic Cretic,Trimeters are rare and not always certain. Compare PL.,Trin.,267,269,271;Ps.,1119;Most.,338; Catalectic Trimeters and Dimeters are even more ncertain.Compare PL.,Trin.,275; Tr e.,121. 811.The Bacchl shas the following meas re : ^ -* -^,= 1 + 2 + 2 morae(J"J J),or if the descending form -^ ^-w be regarded as the normal one 2+2 + 1 morae(Jj J") . [VERSIFICATION.481] For the long two shorts are sometimes s bstit ted.On the other hand,an irrationa l long may be sed for the short,and occasionally two shorts are also th s sed. 812.Bacchic Tetrameter. Q ib s nec loc st ll 'nec spes parata w JL ^ \ w^^.| w^.^ | w ^ 6 Misericordior n llan mest feminaram wOw^.| w^.^ | -^^.^ | w ^ 6 NOTE.In this verse there is s ally a Caes ra after either the second or third I amb s;rarely Diaeresis after the second Bacchi s.The Arsis is kept p re in the s econd and fo rth feet if the following long closes a word.Not more than one diss yllabic Arsis is allowable.Us ally there is only one resolved Thesis,very rarely two,never more than three. 813.Dimeter Acatalectic. Ad aetat(em) ag ndam,PL.,Trin.,232.^ ^.^ | ^ *.JL NOTE.This is rare except at the close of a Bacchic series,to form the transition to another rhythm. 814.Bacchic Hexameter occ rs in nine lines in a monolog e in PL.,Am.,633-642.Hyp ermetric combination into systems is fo nd in PL.,Men.,571 ff,and VARRO,Sat.,p.1 95(R.). Ionic Rhythm. 815.The Ionic Khythm is represented by lonic s a maiore w w J J jj For the lonic s a maiore may be s bstit ted the Ditrochae s -^ ^-.This is called Anaclasis(breaking p). The verse is commonly anacr stic,so that it begins with the thesis ^ ^ : .S ch v erses are called Ionic! a minore.The second long has a strong secondary ict s. In the early Latin,beginning with ENNIUS,the verse was sed with m ch license.Re sol tion of the long syllables was common as well as the se of irrational long, and the contraction of two short syllables into a long.HORACE alone shows the p re Ionic. The lonic s is an excited meas re,and serves to express the fren y of distress a s well as the madness of tri mph.

816.Tetrameter Catalectic Ionic a maiore(Sotadeari). This meas re,introd ced by ENNIUS,was sed with great freedom by the earlier poe ts;b t a stricter handiing is fo nd in later Latin poets,as PETRONIUS,MARTIAL,et c. [482 VERSIFICATION.] Nam q am varia sint genera poenator m,Baebi, > | ^-A Q amq e longe discinct(a) ali(a) ab aliis,sic nesce.-Acci s.

Later Latin : The most common scheme is the p re Ionic with Anaclasis,especially in the third foot.Irrational longs are not sed,and there is rarely more than o ne resol tion,as : ^>^> w w or ww>^ w. Molles veteres Deliacl man recisi p i terribilem man bipennem. -PROP. ^ w^^ ww^w-.w^ ter corri ^ ww^.v^w-c-v^^w^

817.A combination of the Ionic a mdidre into systems is fo nd in LAEVIUS,who has a system of ten followed by a system of nine.Some traces of similar arrangement have been observed in the Satires of VARRO. 818.Tetrameter Catalectic Ionic a minore(Galliambic). This verse was introd ced by VARRO in his Menippean Satires,and appears also in CATULLUS,63,and in some fragments of MAECENAS. In CATULLUS the two short syllables may be contracted(ten times in the first foo t,six times in the third),and the long may be resolved,b t not twice in the same Dimeter(except 63),and very rarely in the first foot of the second Dimeter(once in 91),b t almost reg larly in the pen ltimate long.Diaeresis between the two D imeters is reg lar.Anaclasis is fo nd in the majority of the lines;reg larly in the first Dimeter(except 18,54,75). The freq ent resol tions and conversions give this verse a pec liarly wild chara cter. Ordinary Scheme : Witho t Anaclasis : ^>^^-^^>^.^^^.^>^>^.With Anaclasis : v^^.^ j ^>^-wj-v ^j-.Anacr stic Scheme : Witho t Anaclasis : w w : *.*~> w | ^ + <~<w | ^.w ^ | LZJ | A With Anaclasis : ^ v: -+ v> w | -+-fv/ J .e.w -v> | we* |

^.w v-i^ ^J^^\J\J^J\JJL.

[VERSIFICATION.483] S per alta vect s Attis celeri rate maria Iam iam dolet q od egl iam iamq e paenitet.--CAT.

-e-^> ^ ^ -+.w w^.

A Et ear( m) omni(a) adirem f rib nda latib la decet citatis celerare trip dils Itaq (e) t dom m Cybebes tetigere lass lae

wv_/_ .ww.^.\-w^.ww_<-js Q o nos

^ w ww | *.wv <^ <-| *.v

^.^> > \ ^ w w | ^ ^ > | ^_/\

819.Dimeter Catalectic Ionic a minors(Anacreontic). This verse is fo nd first in LAEVIUS,then in SENECA,PETRONIUS,and later.Anaclasi s is reg lar in the first foot.The long syllable may be resolved,or the two shor ts at the beginning may be contracted.The verse may end in a Syllaba Anceps. Vener(em) igit r alm( m) adorans o-we/ww^w^.Sen femin(a) isve mas est ^_ w ^ w ^ It(a) t alba Noctil cast.^ ^ -f-^ *.^> *. NOTE.Owing to the similarity of the verse to the Iambic Q aternari s Catalectic it is also called the HemiamMc. Compo nd Verses. 820.lambeleg s(Iambic Dimeter and Dactylic Trimeter Cat.).This verse occ rs only in the second ArchilocMan Strophe of HORACE,and is often scanned as two verses : T vina Torq ato move || cons le pressa meo.--Hor. > :^w|^ > |^^|^ A I * I I H A " 821.Elegiamb s(Dactylic Trimeter Cat.and Iambic Dimeter).This verse occ rs only in the third ArchilocMan Strophe of HORACE,and is often scanned as two verses : Desinet imparib s || certare s bmot s p dor.HOR. :^w | ^ | ^w | ^ A \ ^i \j i I\ 822.Vers s Rei ian s(Iambic Dimeter and Anapaestic Tripody Catalectic). Redi,q o f gis n nc ? tene tene.|| Q id stolide clamas ? Q i(a) ad tris viros i( am) ego deferam || Nomen t om.Q (am) obrem ? PL.,A l.,415. NOTE.From the time of REIZ,after whom this verse has been named,it has been the s bject of a great deal of disc ssion.In regard to the first part of the verse t here is considerable nanimity,in regard to the second opinions differ. [484 VERSIFICATION.] Some regard it as an Iambic Dimeter Catalectic Syncopated(w .w i_c_ JL \j); othe rs as an Iambic Tripody Catalectic(w^.^^ I\).SPENGEL regards it as a Hypercatale ctic Anapaestic Monometer,and he has been followed with a variation in the nomen clat re in the above scheme.LEO regards it as Logacedic.The most recent view(KLO TZ) regards it as sometimes Logaoedic,and sometimes Anapaestic. 823.1.PLAUTUS shows several verses compo nded of a Cretic Dimeter and a Catalect ic Trochaic Tripody.These verses are s ally,b t not always,separated by Diaeres is.Examples : Ps.,1285,1287. 2.Some a thorities consider verses like PL.,Most.,693,R d.,209,compo nded of a C retic Dimeter and a Cla s la.Others regard them as Catalectic Cretic Tetrameters .The Cantica of Early Latin. 824.The constr ction of the Cantica(in the narrow sense) of PLAUTUS and TERENCE is still a matter of disp te.Three opinions have been advanced.One looks at them

as antistrophic,following the scheme A.B.B.; others hold that the scheme is A.B .A.The third view is that with some exceptions the Cantica are irreg lar composi tions,witho t a fixed principle ef responsion. In TERENCE,Trochaic Octonarii are always followed by Trochaic Septenarii,and ver y freq ently the Trochaic Septenarii are followed by Iambic Octonarii.In PLAUTUS there are long series of Cretic and Bacchic verses,and sometimes these alternat e,witho t,however,any reg lar scheme,with other verses. A Bacchic Trochaic Cantic m is fo nd in PL.,Merc.,335-363,as follows : I.2 Bacc. Tetram.; II.4 Anap.Dim.; III.i Troch.Octon.; IV.13 Bacc.Tetram.; V.i Troch.Octon .; VI.2 Bacc.Tetram.; VII.1 Troch.Octon.; VIII.2 Bacc.Tetram.; IX.2 Troch.Octon. A Trochaic Iambic Cantic m is TER.,PA.,153-i63.A.153-i57 : 2 Troch.Octon.; i Tro ch.Sept.; i Iamb.Octon.B.158-163; 1 Troch.Octon.; 2 Troch.Sept.; 3 Iamb.Octon.; i Iamb.Q ater.(Cla s la). The Cantica of Later Latin. 825.i-The Cantica of SEXECA are composed mostly in Anapaestic Dimeters,closed fr eq ently,tho gh not necessarily,by a Monometer.A Dactyl is common in the first a nd third feet.The Spondee is likewise very common,a favo rite close being vJ/ ^ -f-.The Diaeresis between the Dimeters is reg lar.Examples : Here.F t.,125-203.I n Ag.,310-407,Dimeters and Monometers alternate. 2.Iambic Dimeters,occasionally alternating with Trimeters,b t s ally stichic,ar e fo nd occasionally;as Med.,771-786. [VERSIFICATION.485] 3.Pec liar to SENECA is the se of a large variety of Logacedic meas res in his Cantica.So we find not nf req ently the following in stichic repetition: Lesser Asclepiadeans,Glyconics,Sapphic Hendecasyllabics,Adonics,and other imitations o f Horatian meas res; b t there are few traces of antistrophic arrangement. Lyric Metres of Horace. 826.In the schemes that follow,the Roman n merals refer to periods,the Arabic to the n mber of feet or bars,the dots indicate the end of a line. I.Asclepiadean Strophe No.1.Lesser Asclepiadean Verse(802) repeated in tetrastic hs. -> I--i^-i--i -^ I -A I I\ o O.,1.i; iii.30; iv.8. II.Asclepiadean Strophe No.2.Glyconics(795) and Lesser Asclepiadean(802) alterna ting,and so forming tetrastichs. 0.,1.3,13,19,36; iii.9,15,19,24,25,28; iv.i,3. III.Asclepiadean Strophe No.3.Three Lesser Asclepiadean Verses (802) followed by a Glyconic(795).A -> I -vv,I _w I -4 0.,1.6,15,24,33; ii.12; iii.10,16; iv.5,12 . [486 VERSIFICATION.] IV.Asclepiadean Strophe No.4.Two Lesser Asclepiadean Verses (802),a Pherecratean (794),and a Glyconic(795).

-> I -V II.-> I * -> I O.,I.5,14,21,23; iii.7,13; iv.13. V.Asclepiadean Strophe No.5.Greater Asclepiadean(803),repeated in fo rs. ->|- or|i-|*vw|,_|-v+|-.v|-.| 5 A 2 3 II 3 2 I -> O.i.ii,18; iv.10. VI.Sapphic Strophe.Three Lesser Sapphics(797),and an Adonic (792),which is merel y a Cla s la.In the Sapphic HORACE reg larly breaks the Dactyl. x x -| -> | f-^ | w | -w || 5 x x -w | > | -f^ | -w | -w I 5 -5 O.,1.2,10,12,20,22,25,30,32,38; ii.2,4,6,8,10,16; iii.8,ii,14,18,20,22,27; iv.2 ,6,ii;Carmen Saec lare. NOTE.In Greek the third and fo rth verses ran together to form a single verse.In Latin this is rare;one case is fo nd in CATULLUS,ii,11,and three in HORACE,O.,1 .2,19;25,11;ii.16,7;b t the occ rrence of Hiat s between the two lines in HORACE (0.,1.2,47;12,7;12,31;22,15,etc.) may be considered as indicating that the vers es were conceived as separate.Elision and Hiat s are also occasionally fo nd in the lines.Elision,second and third: CAT.,ii,22; H.,O.,ii.2,18;16,34; iv.2,22; th ird and fo rth : CAT.,ii,19;H.,O.,iv.2,23;C.S.,47.Hiat s,first and second : H.,O .,1.2,41;12,25;ii.16,5;iii.i2.29;27,33;second and third : H.,O.,1.2,6; 12,6;25,1 8;30,6;ii.2,6;4,6;iii.ii,50;27,10. [VERSIFICATION.487] VII.Lesser Sapphic,Strophe.Aristophanic '(TC)3),and Greater Sapphic(804).Two pa irs are combined into a tetrastich.A A VIII.Alcaic Strophe.Two Alcaic verses of eleven syllables(798),a Trochaic Q aternari s with Anacr sis(772),and one Alcaic verse of ten(799). > I.w > \J II.> I.5 n.4 4 O.,1.9,16,17,26,27,29,31,34,35,37;ii.i,3,5,7,9,11,13,14,15,17,19,20; iii.i,2,3,4 ,5,6,17,21,23,26,29; IV.4,9,15,17. NOTE.Elision between the verses is m ch more rare than in the Sapphic strophe; i t occ rs b t twice : 0.,ii.3,27;iii.29,35.Hiat s,on the other hand,is very commo n. IX.Archilochian Strophe No.1.A Dactylic Hexameter(784),and a Lesser Archilochian (788),two pairs to a tetrastich. w v-i I w w V^l v^I a,iv.7 . X.Archilochian Strophe No.2.A Dactylic Hexameter(784),and an lambeleg s(820). v-> >_/ I ^

Epod.,13. [488 VERSIFICATION.] XI.Archilochian Strophe No.3.An Iambic Trimeter(762),followed by an Elegiamb s(8 21). Epod.,ii. XII.Archilochian Strophe No.4.A Greater Archilochian(800),and a Trimeter Iambic Catalectic(763).Two pairs combined to form a tetrastich. O.,1.4. This verse may be considered as Logaoedic,th s(800) : A^|_vJ V/|l 1 ^ I -i -A I ^ I -^ I II I II II 4 ~v^,I "v^,I "^ 1 ~ W I ~^ I -I ~ A II I XIII.Alcmanian Strophe.A Dactylic Hexameter(784),followed by a Catalectic Dactyl ic Tetrameter(787).0.,1.7,28; Epod.,12. NOTE.The Tetrameter may be considered acatalectic with a Spondee in the fo rth p lace(787,N.). XIV.Iambic Trimeter repeated(762). Epod.,17. XV.Iambic Strophe.Iambic Trimeter(762),and Dimeter(765). Epod.,1-i0. [VERSIFICATION.489] XVI.Pythiambic Strophe No.1.A Dactylic Hexameter(784),or Vers s Pythi s,and an I ambic Dimeter(765). Epod.,14,15. XVII.Pythiambic Strophe No.2.A Dactylic Hexameter(784),and an Iambic Trimeter(76 0). Epod.,16, XVIII.Trochaic Strophe.A Catalectic Trochaic Dimeter(772),and a Catalectic Iambi c Trimeter(763).Two pairs make a tetrastich. O.,ii.18. XIX.The Ionic System is fo nd once in HORACE;it consists of ten Ionici a minore feet,vario sly arranged by metrists.Some regard the system as composed of ten Te trameters followed by a Dimeter.Others,with more probability,divide into two Dim eters followed by two Trimeters.The scheme may be made a" maiore by Anacr sis. Ionic s a minore scheme : Miserar m(e)st neq e amori dare l d m neq e d lci mala vino laver(e) a t exanimari

^ ^ ^.ww^ | w^-^.-^^.| ww^ ^w^ WW^-L ||

met entes patr ae vertera ling ae Ionic s a maiore scheme : A 0.,III.12. [490 VERSIFICATION] 827.INDEX OF HORATIAN ODES AND METRES.

w<->^.<^^^.w<^^.|

BOOK.ODE.METRE.|BOOK.ODE.METRE.BOOK.ODE. METRE. I.1 II.1 III.18 vi. 2 .... vi. 2 vi. 19 ii. 3.......ii. 3 ... viii. 20 vi. 4 .... X. 4 ... vi 21 viii. 5 .... iv. 5 ... viii. 22 .. vi. 6.... iii 6.. vi. 23 viii. 7 .... xiii. 7 ... viii. 24 ii. 8 vii. 8 ... vi. 25 ii. 9 .... viii. 9 ... viii. 26 viii. 10 ... vi. 10 ... vi. 27 vi. 11 ... V. 11 ... viii 28 ii. 12 .... vi. 12 iii. 29 .. viii. 13 .... ii. 13 ... viii. 30 i. 14 .... iv. 14 ... viii 15 .... iii. 15 .., viii.IV 1 ii. 16 .... viii. 16 ... vi. 2 vi. 17 .... viii. 17 ... viii. 3 ii. 18 .... V. 18 ... xviii. 4 viii. 19 .... ii. 19 ... viii. 5 iii. 20 .....vi. 20 ... viii. 6 vi. 21 .... iv 7 ix. 22 .... vi III.1 ... viii....8 i. 23 .... iv. 2 viii 9 viii. 24 .... iii. 3 ... viii. 10 V. 25 . vi 4 .... viii. 11 vi. 26 .. viii. 5 ......viii. 12 iii. 27 .. viii 6 ... viii. 13 iv. 28 .... xiii 7 iv. 14 viii. 29 .....viii. 8 vi. 15 viii. 30 .... vi. 9 ......ii. Carmen Saec lare vi. 31 .... viii. 10 iii..Epod.1-10 XV. 32 ... vi. 11 vi. 11 xi. 33 ... iii. 12 ... xix. 12 xiii. 34......viii. 13 .... iv. 13 X. 35 .... viii. 14 ... vi. 14 xvi. 36 .... ii. 15 ... ii. 15 xvi. 37 . viii. 16 ... iii. 16 xvii. 88... vi. 17... viii. 17.. xiv. [491] APPENDIX. ROMAN CALENDAR. The names of the Roman months were originally adjectives.The s bstantive mensis, month,may or may not be expressed :(mensis) lan ari s,Febr ari s,and so on.Befor e A g st s,the months J ly and A g st were called,not l li s and A g st s,b t Q

intllis and Sextilis. The Romans co nted backward from three points in the month,Calends(Kalendae),Non es(Nonae),and Ides(Id s),to which the names of the months are added as adjective s : Kalendae lan ariae,Nonae Febr ariae,Id s Martiae.The Calends are the first d ay,the Nones the fifth,the Ides the thirteenth.In March,May,J ly,and October the Nones and Ides are two days later.Or th s : In March,J ly,October,May,The Ides are on the fifteenth day,The Nones the sevent h;b t all besides Have two days less for Nones and Ides. In co nting backward(" come next Calends,next Nones,next Ides ") the Romans sed for "the day before" pridig with the Acc.: pridie Kalendas lan arias,Dec.31;pri die Nonas Ian.-Jan.4;pridie Id s Ian.= Jan.12. The longer intervals are expressed by ante diem terti m,q art m,etc.,before the Acc sative,so that ante diem terti m Kal.Ian.means "two days before the Calends of Jan ary; " ante diem q art m,or a.d.iv.,or iv.Kal.Ian.,"three days before," a nd so on.This remarkable combination is treated as one word,so that it can be s ed with the prepositions ex and in : ex ante diem iii.Nonas l nias sq e ad prid ie Kal.Septembres,from J ne 3 to A g st 31;differre aliq id in ante diem xv.Kal. Nov.,to postpone a matter to the 18th of October. LEAP YEAR.In leap year the intercalary day was co nted between a.d.vi.Kal.Mart,a nd a.d.vii.Kal.Mart.It was called a.d.bis sext rn Kal.Mart.,so that a.d.vii.Kal. Mart,corresponded to o r Febr ary 23,j st as in the ordinary year. To t rn Roman Dates into English. For Nones and Ides.I.Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides,and s btract the given n mber. [492 ROMAN SYSTEMS OF MEASURE AND WEIGHT.] For Calends.II.Add two to the days of the preceding month,and s btract the given n mber. EXAMPLES : a.d.viii.Id.Ian.(13 + 1-8) = Jan.6;a.d.iv.Non.Apr.(5 + 1 -4) = Apr.2; a.d.xiv.Kal.Oct.(30 + 2 -14) = Sept.18. Year.--To obtain the year B.C.,s btract the given date from 754 (753 B.C.being t he ass med date of the fo nding of Rome,anno rbis conditae).To obtain the year A.D.,s btract 753. Th s : Cicero was born 648,a. .c.= 106 B.C. A g st s died 767,a. .c.= 14 A.D. NOTE.Before the reform of the Calendar by J li s Caesar in B.C.46,the year consi sted of 355 days,divided into twelve months,of which March,May,Q intllis (J ly), and October had 31 days,Febr ary 28,the remainder 29.To rectify the Calendar,eve ry second year,at the discretion of the Pontifices,a month of varying length,cal led mensis intercalaris,was inserted after the 23d of Febr ary. ROMAN SYSTEMS OF MEASUREMENT. LONG MEASURE. 4 digiti = 1 palm s. 4 palmi = 1 pes(11.65 in.). } SQUARE MEASURE. 100 pedes, } = 1 scrip l m

q adrati

The i ger m contains 28, sq.ft.Rom.; Eng.acre = 43,560 sq.ft. (mile). LIQUID MEASURE. 1 1/2 cyathi = 1 acetab l m. 2 acetab la = 1 q artari s. 2 q artarii = 1 hemina. 2 heminae = 1 sextari s(pint). 6 sextarii = 1 congi s. 4 congil = 1 rna. 2 rnae = 1 amphora 20 amphorae = 1 c lle s

. .

[ROMAN MONEY AND NAMES.493] NOTES.1.The m ltiples of the ncia were sesc ncia(1 1/2), sextans(2), q adrans(3), triens(4), q inc nx(5), semis(6), sept nx(7), bes(8), dodrans(9), dextans(10), de nx(11). 2.The libra was also called as(see below),which latter is taken as the nit in a ll meas res,and the foregoing divisions applied to it.Hence,by s bstit ting as f or i ger m.we have de nx as 1/2 1/2 of a i ger m,dextans as 1/1 2/2 etc. ROMAN MONEY. The nit was originally the as(which was abo t a po nd of copper), with its fractional divisions.This grad ally depreciated, ntil,after the second P nic war,the nit had become a sesterti s,which was nominally 2 1/2 asses. 2 1/2 asses = 1 sesterti s(abo t 25 denarii = 1 a re s(n mm s). 4 cts.). 1000 sestertii= 1 sesterti m

3 2 2 2

siliq ae oboli scrip la drachmae

= = = =

1 1 1 1

obol s. scrip l m. drachma. sicilic s.

ROMAN WEIGHTS. 2 sicilici = 1 sem ncia. 2 sem nciae = 1 ncia. 12 nciae = 1 libra(po nd).

1 2 2 2 8 2

1/2,cyathi acetab la q artarii heminae sextarii semodil

= = = = = =

DRY MEASURE. 1 acetab l m. 1 q artari s. 1 hemina. 1 sextari s. 1 semodi s. 1 modi s(peck).

6 palmi, } = 1 c bit s. 1 1/2 pedes} s. 2 1/2 pedes = 1 grad s. er m(acre). 2 grad s, } 5 pedes } = 1 pass s. 800 125 pass s = 1 stadi m. 8 stadia = 1 mille pass m

36 scrip la = 1 clima. 4 climata = 1 act 2 act s = 1 i g

NOTE.Sesterti m(which may be a fossilised Gen.Pl.= sestertior m) was modified by distrib tives(rarely by cardinals),th s : bina sestertia,2000 sester ces. B t in m ltiples of a million(deciens centena milia sesterti m,i.e.,sestertior m),centena milia was reg larly omitted,and sesterti m declined as a ne ter sing lar.HS stands as well for sesterti s as sesterti m;and the meaning is reg lated by the form of the n meral;th s HS viginti(XX) 20 sestertii;HS vicena (XX) = 20 sestertia,i.e.,20,000 sestertii. ROMAN NAMES. The Roman s ally had three names;a nomen,indicating the gens,a cognomen,indicat ing the familia in the gens,and the praenomen,indicating the individ al in the f amilia. The nomina all end in i s.The cognomina have vario s forms,in accordance with th eir derivation.For example : Q.M ci s Scaevola (from scaevos,left hand). The praenomina are as follows,with their abbreviations: A l s, A. L ci s, L. Q int s, Q. Appi s, App. Marc s, M. Servi s, Ser. Gai s, C. Mani s, M. Sext s, Sex. Gnae s, cn. Mamerc s, Mam. Sp ri s, Sp. Decim s,D. N meri s, N m. Tit s, T. Kaeso, K. P bli s. P. Tiberi s, Ti.,Tib. NOTES.1.Adoption from one gens into another was indicated by the termination -ia n s.From the fo rth cent ry A.D.a second cSgnomen was also called an agnomen. 2.Da ghters had no pec liar praenomina,b t were called by the name of the gens i n which they were born.If there were two,they wore disting ished as maior and mi nor;if more than two,by the n merals tertia,q arta,etc. [494 INDEX OF VERBS.] INDEX OF VERBS. [The References are to the Sections.] Abdo,ere,didi,dit m,151,1. abigo(AGO),ere,egl,ect m, 160,1. abicio(IACIO),ere,ieci,iect m, 160,3. abl o,ere,l i,l t m,162. abn o,ere,n l(n it r s),162. aboleo,ere,evi,it m,137,b. abolesco,ere,olevi,olit m,140. abripio(RAPIO),ere,rip i,rep t m,146. abscondo(DO),ere,di(didi), dit m,151,1. absisto,ere,stiti,154,1. abs m,esse,abf i,af i,117. accendo,ere,cendi,cens m, 160,2. accido(CADO),ere,cidi,165,a.

2 sestertii = 1 q inari s. 2 q inarii = 1 denari s.

($42.94 to A g st s's time).

accipio(CAPIO),ere,cepi,cep t m,160,3. accolo(COLO),ere,col i,c lt m, 152,3 acc mbo,ere,c b i,c bit m, 144. acc rro,ere,acc rri,c rs m, 155,134,iii. aceo,ere,ac i,to be so r. acesco,ere,ac i,to get so r. acq iro(QUAERO),ere,q isivi, q isit m,137,c. ac o,ere,ac i,aciit m,162. addo,ere,didi,dit m,151,1. adimo(EMO),ere,emi,ompt m, 160,1. adipiscor,i,adept s s m,165. adi vo,are,i vi,i t m,158. adoleseo,ere,olevi, lt m,140. adorior,oriri,ort s s m,166. adselsco,ere,scivi,scit m,140. adsisto,ere,stiti,154,1. adspicio,ere,spexi,spect m, 150,1. adsto,stare,stiti,151,2. ads m,adesse,adf i(aff i), 117. advesperasco,ere,avi,140. aegresco,ere,to fall sick. affero,ferre,att li,allat in, 171. affligo,ere,flixi,flict m,147,2. aggredior,gredi,gress s,165. agnosco,ere,agnovi,agnit m (agnot r s),140. ago,ere,egl,act m,160,1. aio,175,1. albeo,ere,to be tchite. algeo,ere,alsi,147,1. lexi allicio,ere,i ,lexi.lect m,150,1. (lic i) all o,ere,l i,l t m,162. alo,ere,al i,al(i)t m,142,3. ambigo(AGO),ere,172,1. ambio(EO),ire,ivi(ii),it m,169, 2,R.i. amicio,ire,'amict m 142,4,161. amplector,i,amplex s,165. ango,ere,anxi,149,b. ann o,ere,ann i(ann t m),162. antecello,ere,154. antesto,stare,steti,151,2. aperio,ire,aper i,apert m, 142,4. apiscor,i,apt s s m,165. appeto,ere,ivi,it m,147,c. an nlico are 'P lic 1 'plicit m, applico,are,(.p i ic avi,p licat m),

152,2. appono,ere,pos i,posit m, 139,A. arcesso(accerso),ere,arcessivi, it m,137,e. ardeo,ere,arsi,ars m,147,1. aresco,ere,ar i,to become dry. arripio(RAPIO),ere, i,rept m, 146. ascendo(SCANDO),ere,i,scens m, 160,2. aspicio,ere,aspexi,aspect m, 150,1. assentior,iri,assens s s m,166. assideo(SEDEO),ere,sedi,ses s m,159. ass esco,ere,s evi s et m,140. attendo,ere,tendi,tent in,155. [INDEX OF VERBS.495] attexo,ere,tex i,text m,152,3. attineo(TENEO),ere, i,tent m, 135,i.a. attingo(TANGO),ere,attigi,attac t ra,155. attollo,ere,to raise p. a deo,ere,a s s s m,167. a dio,ire,ivi,it m.See 127. a fero,ferre,abst li,ablat m, 171. a geo,ere,a xi,a ct m,147,1. ave,175,4. Balb tio,ire,to st tter. bat o,ere, i,162. bibo,ere,bibi,(bibit m),154,2. Cado,ere,cecidi,cas m,153. caec tio,ire,to be blind. caedo,ere,cecidi,caes m,153. calefacio,ere,feel,fact m,160, 3; 173,N.2. calesco,ere,cal i,to get warm. calleo,ere, i,to be skilled. calveo,ere,to be bald. candeo,ere, i,to shine. caneo,ere,to be gray. cano,ere,cecini,eant m,153. capesso,ere,ivi,it m,137,c. capio,ere,cepi,capt m,126; 160,3 carpo,ere,carpsi,carpt m,147,2. caveo,ere,cavi,ca t m,159. cedo,175,6. cedo,ere,cessi,cess m,147,2. cenat s,167,N.1. cens m censeo,ere,m,(censit s) 135,1.a. cerno,ere,crevi,(cret m),139.

cingo,ere.cinxi,cinct m,149,b. eirc mdo,dare,dedi,dat m, 151,1. circ msisto,ere,steti,154,1. circ msto,stare,steti,151,2. cla do,ere,claxisi,cla s m,147,2. clepsi clepo,ere,(clepi).clept m,147,2. coalesco,ere,aim,(alit m),140, 145. coarg o,ere, i,162. coemo,ere,emi,em(p)t m, 160,1. coepi,coepisse,175,5,a. cognosco,ere,gnovi,gnit m, 140. cogo(AGO),ere,coegi,coact m, 160,1. collido(LAEDO),ere,lisi,lis m, 147,2. colligo(LEGO),ere,legi,lect ni, 160,1. coll ceo,Ere,l xi,157,1. colo,ere,col i,c lt m,142,3. comb ro,ere, ssi, st m,147,2. comedo,ere,edi,es m(est m), 172. comitat s,167,N.1. comminiscor,i,comment s s m, 165. commoveo,ere,movi,mot m, 159. como(EMO),ere,compsi,comp t m,147,2. comparco,ere,parsi,pars m,153. compello,ere,comp ll,p ls m, 155. comperio(PARIO),ire,cornperi, compert m,161,166. compBsco,ere, i,145. compingo,ere,pegi,pact m, 160,2. complector,i,cornplex s,165. compleo,ere,evi,6t m,147. comprimo(PBEMO),ere,pressi, press m,147,2. comp ngo,ere,p nxi,p nct m, 155. concido(CADO),ere,cidi,153,a. concido(CAEDO),ere,cidi,cis m, 153,a. concino(CANO),ere,cin i,142,3. concit s(CIEO),137,b. concl do(CLAUDO),ere,cl si, cl s m,147,2. conc mbo,ere,c b i,c bit m, 144. conc pisco,ere,c pivi,c plt m, 140. conc tio(QUATIO),ere,c ssi,c s

s m,147,2. condo,ere,didi,dit m,151,1. condormisco,ere,ivi,it m,140. confercio(FARCIO),ire(fersi),fer t m,150,2. confero,ferre,t li,collat m, 171. conficio(FACio),ere,fec!,fect m, 160,3. [496 INDEX OF VERBS.] confiteor(FATEOR),eri,fess s, 164. confligo,ere,flixi,flict ra, 147,2. confringo(FRANGO),ere,fregi, fract m,160,2. congr o,ere,congr i,162. conicio(IACIO),ere,ieci,iect m, 160.3. coni rat s,167,N.1. coniveo,ere,connixi 147,i, connivi conq iro(QUAERO),ere,q isivi, q isit m,137,c. consero,ere,ser i,sert m, 152,3. consero,ere,sevi,sit m,138. considerat s,167,N.1. consido,ere,consfidi,sess m, 160,1. consisto,ere,stiti,stit m,154,1. conspergo,ere,spersi,spers m, 147,2. conspicio,ere,spexi,spect m, 150,1. constit o(STATUO),ere, i,stit t m,162. consto,stare,stiti,(constat r s),151,2. cons esco,ere,s evi,s et m, 140; 175,5. cons lO,ere,cons l i,s lt m, 142,3. contemno,ere,tem(p)si,tem(p) t m,149,c. contendo,ere,tendi,tent m, 155. contexo,ere,tex i,text m,152,3. contineo(TENEO),ere,in,tent m, 135,1.a. contingo(TANGO),ere,contigi, contact m,155. convalesco,ere,val i,valit m, 145. coq o,ere,coxi,coct m,147,2, 168,1. corripio(RAPIO),ere,rip i,rep

t m,146. corr o,ere,corr i,162. crebresco,ere,crebr i,to get fre q ent. credo,ere,didi,dit m,151,1. crepo,are,ere p i.crepi t m,142,2. cresco,ere,crevi,cret m,140. c bo,are,c b i,c bit m,142,2. c do,ere,c di,c s m,160,1. c pio,ere,c plvi,c plt m,141. c rro,ere,c c rri,c rs m,155. deeerno,ere,crevi,cret m,139. decerpo(CARPO),ere,si,t m,147, 2. dedo,dedere,dedidi,dedit m, 151,1. defendo,ere,fendi,fens m,160, 2. defetiscor,i,to be worn o t. dego(AGO),ere,160,i. deleo.See Paradigm,123,124. delib o, ere, i,tit m,162. deligo,ere,legl,iect m,160,1. demo(EMO),ere,dempsi,demp t m,147,2. depello,ere,dep li,dep ls m,155. deprimo(PREMO),ere,pressi, press m,147,2. depso ere,deps i,depst m,142,3. descendo(SCANDO),ere,scendi, scens m,160,2. desero,ere,ser i,sert m,142,3. (ii)(des lt m) desilio(SALIO),ire i 142,4 desivi desino,ere,desii,desit m,139. desipio(SAPIO),ere,141. desisto,ere,stiti,stit m,154,1. despicio,ere,spexi,spect m, 150,1. des esco,ere,evi,et m,140. des m,esse,f i,117. detendo,ere,tendi,tent m,155. detineo(TENEO),ere, i,tent m, 135,1.a. devertor,i,167. dico,ere,dixi,dict m,147,2. differo,ferre,dist li,dilat m, 171. dignosco(NOSCO),ere,gnovi,140. diligo,ere,lexi,iect m,147,2. dimico,are,avi,at m,142,2. dirigo,ere,rexi,rect m,147,2. dirimo(EMO),ere,emi,empt m, 160,1. disco,ere,didici,156. discrepo,are,crep i(avi),142,2. disc mbo.ere,c b i,c bit m, 144. dispesco,ere,pesc i,to divide,

145. dissideo(SEDEO),ere,sedi,159. [INDEX OF VERBS.497] disting o,ere,stinxi,stinct m, 149,b. disto,stare,151,2. ditesco,ere,to grow rich. divido,ere,divisi,divis m,147,2. do,dare,dedi,dat m,151,1. doceo,ere,doc i,doct m,135,i,a. dorno,are, i,it m,143,2. diico,ere,d xi,d ct m,147,2 d lcEsco,ere,to grow sweet. d resco,ere,d r i,to grow hard. Edo,ere,edi,es m,160,i,172. edo(DO),edere,edidi,edit m, 151,1. edormisco,ere,ivi,it m,140. effero,ferre,ext li,elat m,171. egeo,ere,eg i,to want. elicio,ere,lic i,licit m,150,1. eligO(LEGO),ere,legi,lect m, 160,1. emico,are, i(atiir s),142,2. emineo,ere, i,to stand o t. emo,ere,emi,empt m,160,1. em ngo,ere,em nxi,em nct rn, 149,b. enec i eneco,are.,,. enect m, (enecavi), 142,2. eo,ire,ivi,it m,169,2. evado,ere,evasi,evas m,147,2. eveneseo,ere,even i,145. exardesco,ere,exarsi,exars m, 147,1. excello,ere, i(excels s),144. excit s,137. excl do(CLAUDO),ere,si,s m, 147,2. exc rero,ere,ex(c )c rri,c r s m,155. eximo,ere,emi,empt m,160,1. exolesco,ere,olevi,olet m,140. expello,ere,p ll,p ls m,155. expergiscor,i,experrect s s m, 165. experior,in,pert s s m,166. expleo,ere,evi,et m,124,137, b. explico,are, i(avi),it m(at m), 142. explodo(PLAUDO),ere,si,s m, 147,2. exsecrat s,167,N.2. exsting o,ere,stinxi,stinct m, 149,b.

exsisto,ere,stiti,stit m,154,i, exsto,are(exstat r s),151,2. extendo,ere,di,s m(t m),155. extollo,ere,155. ex o,ere, i, t m,162. Facesso,ere,ivi(i),it m,137,c facio,ere,feci,fact m,160,3. fallo,ere,fefelli,fals m,155. farcio,ire,farsi,fart m,150,2. fari,175,3. fateor,eri,fass s s m,164. fatisco,ere,to fall apart. fatiscor,i(fess s,adj.). faveo,ere,favi,fa t m,159. ferio,ire,to strike. fero,ferre,t li,lat m,171. ferveo,ere,fervi(ferb i),159. fido,ere,fis s s m,167! figo,ere,fixi,fix m,147,2. findo,ere,fidi,fiss m,160,3. fingo,ere,finxi,fict m,149,a. fio,fieri,fact s s m,173. flecto,ere,flexi,flex m,148. fleo,ere,evi,et m,137,b. fligo,ere,filxi,flict m,147,2. floreo,ere, i,to bloom. fl O,ere,fl xi(fl x s,adj.),147,2. fodio,ere,fodi,foss m,160,3. forem,116. foveo,ere,fovi,fot m,159. frango,ere,fregl,fract m,160,2. fremo,ere, i,142,3. frendo(eo),ere( i),fres m,fres s m,144. frico,are, i,frict m(at m),142 2. frigeo,Ere(frixi),147,1. frigo,ere,frixi,frict m,147,2. frondeo,ere, i,to be leafy. fr or,i,f r ct s(fr it s) s m,165. f gio,ere,f gl,f git m,160,3. f lcio,ire,f lsi,f lt m,150,2. f lgeo,ere,f lsi,147,1. f ndo,ere,f di,f s m,160,2. f ngor,i,f nct s s m,165. (f ro,def.),f rere,to rave. Gannio,ire,to yelp. ga deo,ere,gavis s s m,167. gemo,ere, i,142,3. gero,ere,gessi,gest m,147,2. gigno,ere,gen i,genit m,143. glisco,ere,to sicell. gradior,i,gress s s m,165, [498 INDEX OF VERBS.] Haereo,ere,haesi,(haes ra),147, 1. ha rio,ire,ha si,ha st m(ha s r s,ha st r s),150,2.

have,175,4. hisco,ere,to yawn. horreo,ere, i,to stand on end hortor,ari,at s s m,128. laceo,ere,iac i,to lie. iacio,ere,i6ei,iact m,160,3. ico,ere,ici,ict m,160,1. ignosco,ere,gnovi,gnot m, 140. illicio,ere,lexi,lect m,150,1. illido(LAEDO),ere,lisi,Hs m, 147,2. irab o,ere, i, t m,162. imitat s,167,N.2. immineo,ere,to overhang. impingo(PANGO),ere,pegi,pac t m,160,2. incalesco,ere,cal i,145. incendo,ere,cendi,cens m, 160,2. incesso,ere,ivi(i),137,c. incido(CADO),ere,cidi,cas m, 152. incido(CAEDO),ere,cidi,cis m, 153. incipio(CAPIO),ere,cepi,cep t m,160,3. increpo,are, i,it m,142,2. inc mbo,ere,c b i,c bit m, 144. inc tiO(QUATIO),ere,c ssi,c s s m,147,2. indigeo(EGEO),ere, i,to want. indipiscor,i,indept s s m,165. indo,ere,didi, it m,151,1. ind lgeo,ere,ind lsi(ind lt m), 147,1. ind o,ere,dm,d t m,162. ineptio,ire,to be silly. infligo,ere,filxi,flict m,147,2. ingemisco,ere,ingem i,145. ingr o,ere, i.See congr o,162. innotesco,ere,not i,145. inolesco,ere,olevi,140. inq am,175,2. insideo(SEDEO),ere,sedi,ses s m,159. insisto,ere,stiti,154,1. inspicio,ere,spexi,spect m. 150,1. interficio,ere,feci,fect m,160, 3; 173,N.2. insto,are,stiti(instat r s),151,2. ins m,esse,f i,117. intellego,ere,lexi,lect m,147,2. interimo(EMO),ere,emi,einp t m,160,1. interp ngo,ere,p nxi,p nc t m,155. intersto,are,steti,151,2.

inters m,esse,f i,117. inveterasco,ere,ovi,140. invado,ere,invasi,vas m,147,2. irascor,i,irat s s m,to get angry. i beo,ere,i ssi,i ss m,147,1. i ngo,ere,i nxi,i nct m,149,b. i rat s,167,R..1. i vo,are,i vi,i t m(i vatar s), 158. Labor,i,laps s s m,165. lacesso,ere,lacessivi,it m,137,c . lacio,150. laedo,ere,laesi,laes m,147,2. lambo,ere,i,160,2. lang eo,ere,i,to be lang id. largior,iri,it s s m,166. lateo,ere, i,to lie hid. lavo,are(ere),lavi,la t m,10 t m,lavat m,158. lego,ere,legi,lect m,160,1. libet,libere,lib it(libit m est),it pleases. liceor,eri,it s s m,164. licet,licere,lic it(licit m est),ii is permitted. lingo,ere,linxi,linct m,149,b. lino,ere,levi(livi),lit m,139. linq o,ere,liq i,160,2. liq eo,ere,lic i,to be clear. liveo,ere,to be livid. loq or,i,loc t s s m,128,2; 165. l ceo,ere,l xi,147,1. l do,ere,l si,l s m,147,2. l geo,ere,l xi,147,1. l t m,to wash, l o.ere,l i,l it m,to atone for, 162. Maereo,ere,to grieve. malo,malle,mal i,142,3; 174. mando,ere,mandi,mans m, 160,2. maneo,ere,mansi,mans m,147,1. mans esco,ere,evi,et m,140, [INDEX OF VERBS.499] medeor,eri,to heal. memini,175,5,b. mentior,iri,it s,128,2; 1G6. mereor,eri,merit s s m,164. mergo,ere,mersi,raers m,147,2. metier,iri,mens s s m,166. meto,ere,mess i(rare),mess in, 142,3 met o,ere, i,162. mico,are, i,142,2. mingo,ere,miiixi,mictiim,149,a. min o,ere,min i,min t m,162. misceo,ere, i,mixt m(mist m). misereor,eri,miserit s(misert s)

s m,164. mitto,ere,misi,miss m,147,2. molo,ere,mol i,molit m,142,3. moneo,ere, i,it m,131. mordeo,ere,momordi,mors m, 152. morior,mori,mort s s m(mori t r s),165. moveo,ere,movi,mot m,159. m lceo,ere,m lsi,m ls m,147, 1. m lgeo,ere,m lsi,m ls m (ct m),157,1. m ngo,ere,m nxi,m nct m, 160. Nanciscor,i,nact s(nanct s),165. nascor,i,nat s s m(nascit r s), 165. neco,are,avi,at m,142,2. necto,ere,nexi(nex l),nex m, 148. neglego,ere,lexi,lect m,147,2. necopinat s,167,N.2. neo,nere,nevi,net m,137,b. neq eo,ire,170. ningo,ere,ninxi,149,b. niteo,ere, i,to shine. nitor,i,mx s(nis s) s m,165. nolo,nolle,nol i,142,3;174. noceo,ere, l(nocit r s),to be h rtf l. nosco,ere,novi,not m,140; 175, 5,d. notesco,ere,not i,145. n bo,ere,n psi,n pt m,147,2. Obdo,ere,didi,dit m,151,1. obdormisco,ere,dormivi,dor mit m,140. obliviscor,i,oblit s s m,165. obsideo(SEDEO),ere,sedi,ses s m,159. obsisto,ere,stiti,stit m,154,1. obsolesco,ere,olevi,olet m, 140. obsto,stare,stiti(obstat r s), 151,2. obtineo(TENEO),ere,tin i,ten t m,135,i,a. occido(CADO),ere,cidi,cas m, 153. occido(CAEDO),ere,eidi,cis m, 153. occino(CANO),ere,cin i,142,3; 153. occipio(CAPIO),ere,cepl,cept m, 160,3. occ lo,ere,occ l i,oce lt m, 142,3. odi,def.,175,5,a. offendo,ere,fendi,f ens m,160,2.

offero,ferre,obt li,oblat m, 171. oleo,ere, i,to smell. operio,ire,oper i,opert m,142,4. opinat s,167,N.2. opperior,in,oppert s(or it s), 166. ordior,iri,ors s s m,166. orior,iri,ort s s m(orit r s),166. ostendo,ere,tendi,tens m (tent s),155. Paciscor,i,pact s s m,165,167, N.2. palleo,ere, i,to be pale. pando,ere,pandi,pass m(pan s m),160,2. pango ere pepigi 155 ' panxi 149,b pact m parco,ere,peperci(parsi),par s r s,153. pario,ere,peperi,part m(pari t r s),157. partior,iri,it s,166. pasco,ere,pavi,past m,140. patefacio,ere,fed,fact m,173, N.2. pateo,ere, i,to be open. patior,i,pass s s m,165. paveo,ere,pavi,159. pecto,ere,pexi,pex m,148. pellicio,licere,,",.i lect m, 150,1. [500 INDEX OF VERBS.] pello,ere,pep ll,p ls ra,155. pendeo,ere,pependi,152. pendd,ere,pependi,pens m,155. percello,ere,perc li,perc ls m, 144. percenceo(CENSEO),ere,cens i, cens m,135,i,a. percit s(CIEO),137. perdo,ere,didi,dit m,169,2, R.i; 151,1. pereo,ire,perii,it m,169,2,R.1. perficio,ere,feci,fect m,160,3. perfringo,ere,fregl,fract m, 160,2. pergo(REGO),ere,perrexi,perrec t m,147,2. perpetior(PATIOR),i,perpess s s m,165. perspicio,ere,spexi,spect m, 150,1. persto,stare,stiti,151,2. pertineo(TENEO),ere, i,135,i,a. pess mdo,dare,dedi,dat m, 151,1. peto,ere,ivi(il),it m,137,c.

piget,pigere,pig it,pigit m est, it irks. pingo,ere,pinxi,pict m,149,a. pinso,ere, i(i),pinsit m(pist m, pins m),142,3. plango,ere,planxi,planct m, 149,b. pla do.ere,pla si,pla s m,147,2. plecto,ere,(plexi),plex m,148. plector,i,to be p nished. pleo,137,b. plico,are, i(avi),it m(at m), 142,2. polleo,ere,to be.potent. polliceor.eri,it s s m,164. pono,ere,pos i,posit m,139. posco,ere,poposci,156. possideo(SEDEO),ere,sedi,ses s m,159. poss m,posse,pot i,119. potior,iri,it s s m,166. poto,are,avi,pot m,potat m, 136,4,c. pot s,167,N.1. praecello,ere,cell i,144. praecino.ere,cin i,142,3. praec rro,ere,c c rri,c rs rn, 155. praesideo(SEDEO).ere,sedi,159 praes m,esse,f i,117. praesto,stare,stiti(stat r s), 151,2. prandeo,ere,prandi,prons m, 159. prehendo,ere,prehendi,prehen s m,160,2. premo,ere,pressi,press m,147,2. prodigo(AGO),ere,egl,160,1. prodo,ere,didi,dit m,151,1. proficiscor,i,profeet s s m,165. profiteor(FATEOR),eri,fess s s m,164. promo(EMO),ere,prompsi,promp t m,147,2. pros m,prodesse,prof i,118. protendo(TENDO),ere,tendi, tent m,tens m,155. psallo,ere,i,160,2. p det,ere,p d it,p dit m est, it shames. p erasco,ere,to become a boy. p ngo,ere,p p gi,p nct m,155. p nior,iri,it s s m,166. Q aero,ere,q aesivi,q aesit m, 137,c. q aeso,175,6. q atio,ere,(q assi),q ass m, 147,2. q eo,q ire,170. q eror,q eri,q est s s m,167.

q iesco,ere,q ievi,q iet m,140. Rado,ere,rasi,ras m,147,2. rapio,ere,rap i,rapt m,146. ra cio,ire,ra si,ra s m,150,2. recenseo(CENSEO),ere,cens i, cens m(recensit m),135,i,a. recido,ere,reccidi,recas ra,153. recr desco,ere,cr d i,to get raw again. rec mbo,ere,c b i,144. redarg o,ere,arg i,162. reddo,ere,didi,dit m,151,1. redigo(AGO),ere,egi,act m, 160,1. redimo,ere,160,1. refello(FALLO),ere,refelli,155. refero,ferre,t li,lat m,171. rego,ere,rexi,rect m,147,2. relinq o,ere,liq i,lict m, 160,2. reminiscor,i,to recollect. [INDEX OF VERBS.501] renideo,ere,to glitter. reor,reri,rat s s m,164. repello,ere,repp ll,p ls m,155. reperio,ire,repperi,repert m, 157,161. repo,ere,repsi,rept m,147,2. resipisco,ere,sipivi(sip i),140. resisto,ere,stiti,stit m,154,1. respondeo,ere,spondi,spons m, 152. resto,stare,stiti,151,2. resting o,ere,stinxi,stinct m, 149,b. retineo(TENEO),ere, i,tent m, 135,i,a. revertor,i,reverti,revers m, 160,i;167. revivisco,ere,vixi,vict m,to revive. rideo,ere,risi,ris m,147,1. rigeo,ere, i,to be stiff. rodo,ere,rosi,ros m,147,2. r beo,ere, i,to be red. r do,ere,r divi,it m,137,c. r mpo,ere,r pi,r pt m,160,2. r o,ere,r i,r t m(r it r s),162. Saepio,ire,saepsi,saept m,150,2. salio,ire(sali) salt m,142,4. sal i sallo,ere,(salii),sals m,160,2. salve,def.,175,4. sapio,ere(saplvi),sap i,141. sarcio,ire,sarsi,sart m,150,2. satisdo,dare,dedi,dat m ,151 ,i . scabo,ere,scabi,to scratch,160,1. scalpo,ere,scalpsi,scalpt m,

147,2. scando,ere,scandi,scens m, 160,2. scateo,ere,to g sh forth. scindo,ere,scidi,sciss m,160,3. scisco,ere,scivi,scit m,140. scribo,ere,scripsi,script m,147, 2. sc lpo,ere,sc lpsi,sc lpt m, 147,2. sepelio,ire,ivi,sep lt m,137,a. seq or,i,sec t s s m,165. sero,ere,142,3. sero,ere,sevi,sat m,138. serpo,ere,serpsi,serpt m,147,2. sido,ere,sidi,160,1. sileo.ere, i,to be silent. sine,ere,sivi,sit m,139. sisto,ere,(stiti),stat m,154,1. sitio,ire,ivi,to thirst. soleo,ere,solit s s m,167. solve,ere,solvi,sol t m,160,1. seco,are,sec i,(sect m),142,2 secat r s sedeo,ere,sedi,sess m,159. seligo(LEGO),ere,legi,lect m. 160,1. sentio,ire,sensi,sens m,150,2. sorbeo,ere(sorpsl),sorb i,142,1. sordeo,ere, i,to be dirty. sortior,iri,sortit s s m,166. spargo,ere,sparsi,spars m,147, 2. sperno,ere,sprevi,spret m,139. spicio,150,1. splendeo,ere, i,to shine. spondeo,ere,spopondi,spons m,152. sp o,ere,sp i,sp t m,162. sq aleo,ere,to be ro gh,fo l. stat o,ere,stat i,stat t m,162. sterno,ere,stravi,strat m,139. stern o,ere,stern i,162. sterto,ere,stert i,142,3. sting o,ere,149,b. sto,stare,steti,stat m,151,2. strepo,ere,strep i,strepit m, 142,3 strideo,ere(ere),stridi,159. stringo,ere,strinxi,strict m, 149,a. str o,ere,str xi,str ct m,147,2. st deo,ere, i,to be ealo s. st peo,ere, i,to be asto nded. s adeo,ere,s asi,s as m,147,1. s bdo,ere,didi,dit m,151,1. s bigo(AGO),ere,egl,act m, 160,1. s ccedo(CEDO),ere,cessi,ces s m,147. s ccendo,ere,cendi,cens m,

160,2. s ccenseo,ere, i,cens m,135, 1,a. s cc rro,ere,c rri,c rs m,155. s esco,ere,s evi,s et m,140. s ffero,ferre,s stin i,171,N.2. s fficis(FACIO),ere,feel,fect m, 160,3. [502 INDEX OF VERBS.] s ffodio,ere,fodi,foss m, 160,3. s ggero,ere,gessi,gest m,147, 2. s go,ere,s xi,s ct m,147,2. s m,esse,f i,116. s mo(EMO),ere,s mpsi,s mp t m,147,2. s o,ere,s i,s t m,162. s perbio,ire,to be ha ghty. s persto,stare,steti,151,2. s pers m,esse,f i,117. s ppono,ere,pos i,posit m, 139,A. s rgo(REGO),ere,s rrexi,s rrec t m,147,2. s rripio,ere, i(s rp i),rept m, 146. Taedet,pertaes m est,it tires. tango,ere,tetigi,tact m,155. tego,ere,texi,tect m,147,2. temno,ere,149,c. tendo,ere,tetendi,tens m(t m), 155. teneo,ere,ten i,(tent m),135,i,a. tergeo,ere,tersi,ters m,147,1. tero,ere,trivi,trit m,137,c. texo,ere,tex i,text m,143,3. timeo,ere, i,to fear. ting( )o,ere,tinxi,tinct m,149,b. tollo,ere(s st li,s blat m),155. tondeo,ere,totondi,tons m,152. tono,are, i,142,2. torpeo,ere, i,to be torpid. torq eo,ere,torsi,tort m,147,1. torreo,ere,torr i,tost m,135,i,a. trado,ere,didi,dit m,151,1. traho,ere,traxi,tract m,147,2. tremo,ere, i,to tremble. trib o,ere, i,trib t m,162. tr do,ere,tr si,tr s m,147,2. t eor,eri t it s t tat s s m,164. t t s t meo,ere, i,to swell. t ndo,ere,t t di,t ns m,t s m,155. t rgeo,ere,t rsi,147,1. lciscor,i, lt s s m,165.

ngo,ere, nxi, nct m 149,b. rgeo,ere, rsi,147,1. ro,ere,tissi,tist m,147,2. tor,i,tis s s m,165. vado,ere,147,2. vale,175,4. veho,ere,vexi,vect m,147,2;165. vello,ere,velli(v lsi),v ls m, 160,2. vendo,ere,didi,dit m,151,1; 169,2,R.1. veneo,ire,ivi(ii),169,2,.R.1 . venio,ire,veni,vent m,161. ven mdo,dare,dedi,dat m, 151,1. vereor,eri,verit s s m,164. verro,ere,verri,vers m,160,1. verto,ere,verti,vers m,160,1. vescor,i,165. vesperasco,ere,avi,140. veto,are,vet i,vetit m,142,2. video,ere,vidi,vis m,159. vieo,ere,et m,to plait.See 137,b. vigeo,ere, i,to flo rish. vincio,ire,vinxi,vinct m,150,2. vinco,ere,vici,vict m,160,2. viso,ere,visi,160,1. vivo,ere,vixi,vict m,147,2. volo,velle,vol i,142,3; 174. volvo,ere,volvi,vol t m,160,1. vomo,ere,vom i,vomit m,142,3. voveo,ere,vovi,vot m,159. [503] GENERAL INDEX. ABBREVIATIONS.Abl.,ablative; Abs.,absol te; Acc.,acc sative: act.,active; adj., adjective; adv.,adverb; attrib.,attrib tive,attrib tion;app.,appositive,appositi on; Comp.,comparison,comparative; co str.,constr ction; cop.,cop la,cop lative; cpd.,compo nd,compo nded; Dat.,dative; decl.,declension; def.,definite; dem., demonstrative; fem.,feminine; F t.,f t re; F t.Pf.,f t re perfect; Gen.,genitive; Ger.,ger nd,ger ndive; Impf.,imperfect; Imp v.,imperative; indef.,indefinite; Indic.,indicative; Inf.,infinitive; interrog.,interrogative; Loc.,locative ; masc.,masc line; neg.,negative; ne t.,ne ter; Nona.,nominative; obj.,object; Part.,partitive; part.,participle; pass.,passive; PL,pl ral; poss.,possessive,po ssession; pred.,predicate; prep.,preposition; pron.,prono n;rel.,relative; SG., sing lar; s bj,,s bject;S bjv.,s bj nctive;s bst.,s bstantive;S p.,s pine;vb., verb;Voc.,vocative. A So nd of,3; weakening of,8,1; length of final,707,1.See ab. ab(a) In composition,9,4; varies witb a as prep.,9,4; syntax of as prep.,417,1; position of,413,R.1 : Dat.after vbs.cpd. with,347.R.5; gives Point of Reference,

335,N.; with Abl.takes place of second Acc.,339.N.2: with Abl.of Separation, 390: with Abl.of Point of View,i6.2,N.6; with Towns,391.R.1; with Abl.of Origin, 395; with Abl.of Respect,397,N.1; with Abl.of Agent,401; to express Ca se, 408.N.3; with Abl.Ger.,433. abdicate with se and Abl.,390,N.3. abesse with Acc.of Extent,or a and Abl.,335,11.2: with Dat.,349.R.4; with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1; of Place,390, N.3; tant m abest t- t,552.R.1. abhinc with Acc.,336.R.3. abhorrere with Abl.of Place,390,N.3. ability adjs.of,with Inf.,423,N.1,c. abire with Abl.of Place,390.N.3. ABLATIVE defined,23,6; 1st decl.SG.in ad.Pl.in eis,29,N.4;Pl.in ab s,29,R.4; 2d decl.SG.in od,33.N.3; Pl.in eis,33, N.5; 3d decl.SG.in ei,i,e,37,4; m te stems with i,54; sporadic cases in i,54, N.2;vowel stems in i,57.R.2;adjs. sed as s bsts.in i,57,R.2,N.; 4th decl.in b s,61,R.1; adjs.in d,75.N.3; Pl.in is(for iis) and ab s,75.N.6; adjs. of three endings in e,79.R.1: adjs.and parts,in i and e,82; adjs.in e and i, 83; Comp.of part.,89,R.1; forms advs., 91,2.

With act.vb.cannot be s bj.of pass., 217,R.1; with vbs.involving comparison, 296,N.1; prepositional ses instead,ib. N.3; with pro of Disproportion,298; for inner obj.,333,2,N.4; with abesse and distare,335.R.2; of Point of Reference, ib.N.; with Acc.after vbs.of Giving and P tting,348; with preps,instead of Part.Gen.,372.R.2.Scheme of Syntax, 384; of Place where,385: of Towns,386; of Place whence,390; with vbs.of Abstaining,390,2; with Adjs.,390,3; of Towns,391; preps,with Towns,ib.R.1; of Attendance,392; of Time,393; preps., 394; of Origin,395; preps.,ib.N.2; of Material,396; of Respect,397; with words of Eminence,ib.N.2; with Comp., 398,296,and RR.1,2; of Manner,399; of Q ality,400,and R.1; with c m of nnat ral prod ctions,ib.N.2;of Instr ment,401; of Agent,314,and R.2, 401 and RR.1,2; with special vbs.,401, NN.1-7; of Standard,402; of Difference, 403; of Price,404; with vbs.of Plenty and Want,405; with op s and s s, 406; with tor,fr or,etc.,407; of Ca se, 408 and NN.2-6; of Ger.,431; of Ger. with preps.,433; of S p.,436-

ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE concord with two s bjs.,285,N.3; syntax of,409,10; with Interrog.,469.N.; of part.,665.N.2. [504 GENERAL INDEX] abr mpere with Abl.of Place,390,N.3. absiste with Iiif.for Impv.,271,2,N.2. absolvere with Abl.of Place,390.N.3. abson s with Abl.,359,N.2. Absorption of Correlative 619. absq e 417,2; withe bjv.,597,N. abstaining vbs.of,with Abl.,390,2. abstinere with Abl.of Place,390.N.3. abstract relations expressed by Indic., 254,R.1: s bsts.become concrete in Pl., 204.N.5; formation of,181,2,6. ab ndantia 84. ab ndare with Gen.,383.1.N.2. ab n.de ''fry,439.N.3. ab ti with Abl.,407 and N.2,a. gC see atq e;ac Si with S bjv.of Comparison,608; SCS1= q asi,16.N.5. accedere with Dat.,etc.,347,R.2; with q od,625; with t,553,4. accent in early Latin,701,R.2;in m sic,729; conflict with Ict s,749. accent ation 15; effect of enclitics,te. R.1; in cpds.,ib.-R.2; in Voc.,ib.R.3; early,ib.N. accidit with Dat.,346.R.2;seq ence after,513,R.2; with t,553,3. accipere with Inf.,627,R.1. accommodat s with Dat.Ger.,429,N.1. acc mbere with Dat.,etc.,347R.2. ACCUSATIVE-definition,23,4.3d decl.36; in im,37,3; 54,N.1; in eis,38,3; of vowel stems,57.R.1 and 5; Pl.in is and es,57, R.5; in Greek s bsts.,66,NN.3 and 4; of adjs.of three endings in is,eis,79.N.2; in is,83,N.1; of Comp.in is,eis,89,R.2; forms advs.,91,1. Becomes s bj .of pass.,216;syntax of, 328-343: general view,328,329; direct obj.,330; with vbs.of Emotion,ib.R.and R.2; 333,1,N.1; with verbal s bsts.,330, N.3; with adjs.in nd s,ib.N.4;with cpd.vbs.,331.Inner obj.,332,333; ne t. pron and adj.,333,1; Cognate,te.2; Abl. instead,te.2,N.4; with vbs.of Taste and Smell,ib.2,N.5; extension of Cognate idea,te.2,NN.2 and 6..Do ble Acc.,333, 1; of Extent,334-336; in Degree,334,in Space,335,in Time.336; with abesse and distare,335.R.2; with abhinc,336, R.3; with not S,ib.R.4; with adjs.,ib. N.1; of Extent as s bj.of pass.,te.N.3; of Local Object,337; prep,with Large Towns,ib.RR.1 and 2; dom m and in

dom m,ib.R.3; force of ad,16.R.4; with sq e,ib.N.4; with verbal s bsts., ib.N.5; of Respect,338: with vbs.of Clothing,etc.,and passives,ib.N.2; Greek Acc.or Abl.instead,ib.N.1. Do ble Acc.,339-342: with vbs.of Inq iring,etc.,339; special vbs.,ib.RR., xx.; pass,form,ib.N.4; with vbs.of Naming,Making,etc.,340: pass,form, ib.R.1; End by ad or Dat.,ib.R.2; one Acc.is cognate,341 and N.2; one Acc. forms a phrase,342; as a general objective case,343; with Interjections,ib.1; Acc.and Inf.,ib.2; and Dat.with vbs. of Giving and P tting,348; with prepa. for Part.Gen.,372,R.2: for Abl.of Standard,403.N.2; s bj.of Inf.,203.R.1; 420: after impersonal Ger.,427,N.2; of Ger.,430; of Ger.with preps.,432; of S p.,435; with Inf.as object cla se, 526-o35; with Inf.as s bj.,535; with Inf.after vbs.of Emotion,542,R.; with Inf.in rel.cla se,635; with Inf.in dependent comparative cla se,641. acc sing -vbs.of,with Gen.,378; with other constr.,ib.RR.2 and 5. acq iescere with Abl.,401.N.6. acq itting vbs.of,with Gen.,378; with other constr.,ib.RR.2 and 3. action,activity s ffixes for,181,2; 182,1. active voice 112,2;213;Inf.as pass., 532,x.2; of something ca sed to be done,219; periphrastic,247. ad in composition,9,4; vbs.cpd.with, take Acc.,331; with Towns and Co ntries,337,RR.1 and 4; with Acc.of End after vbs.of Taking,etc.,340,R.2: with Acc.for Dat.,345,R.2; vbs.cpd.with, take Dat.,347; in the neighbo rhood of,386, R.2; ftence,403,N.4,e; position of,413.R.1; as adv.,415; as prep.,416,1; with Acc. Ger.,429,2; 428,R.2; 432 and R.; after vbs.of Hindering,432,R.; with Ger.for Abl.S p.,436.N.3: ad id q od,525,2, N.2. adaeq e with Abl.,296.N.1; 398.N.2. adaptation words of,with Dat.Ger., 429,2. addere with operam and Dat.Ger.,429, 1; with q od,525,1,N.1; with t,553,4. adding vbs.of,with q od,525,1;list of,ib.N.1: with t,ib N.5; 553,4. add ct s with Abl.of Ca se,408.N.2. adeo with t,552. adesse with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. [GENERAL INDEX.505] adfatim very,439,N.3. adferre with t,553,1.

adhaerescere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. adhortari with t,546.N.1. adh c strengthens Comp.,301; as yet, still,478,N.1. adicere with q od,525,i,N.1. adigere with t,553,1. adipisci with t,553,1. adire with Acc.or ad,331.R.3. adi vare with t,553,1. ADJECTIVE 16,2; and s bst.,ib.R.1,N.1; decl.of,17; defined,72; 1st and 2d decl., 73; Gen.and Voc.,73; stems in ro,74; with Nom,wanting,74.R.2; Pronominal, 76; 3d decl.,77; two endings,78; stems in ri,78,2; in gli and gri,78,R.; one ending,80: case pec liarities,83; ab nda tia,84; varying decl.,84,2; defective and indeclinable,85; comparison of,86; correlative,109: formation of,182. As s bst.,204.NN.1-4;agreement of pred.,211; exceptions,ib.RR.; attrib. agrees in Gender,286; ne t.with fem., ib.3; concord of,289; with two s bjs., 290; position,290.N.2,291; meaning varies with position,ib.R.1;676; s perlatives of Order and Seq ence, 291,1,R.2; n merals,292-295: comparatives,296-301; s perlatives,302,303; of Inclination,Knowledge,etc.,in pred., 325.R.6; verbal with Acc.,330,N.3; ne t. in Cognate Acc.,333,1;of Extent in Degree,334 and R.1; or Time,336.N.1; with Gen.of Q ality,365.R.2; of 3d decl.as pred.,366,R.2;with Abl.of Separation,390,3; with Abl.of Attendance,392.R.1; with Abl.of Q ality,400; in Abl.Abs.,410.NN.4.5; with Inf.,421, N.1.c; with Inf.for Gen.of Ger.,428,N.3; with Abl.Ger.,431,N.1; with Abl.S p., 436.N.2; ne t.with t,553,4,and R.2. adligare with se and Gen.,378,R.1. admirari with Inf.,533.R.1. admod m very,439.N.3-,with q am and Indic.,467,N.; yef,471,1. admonere with two Accs.,341.N.2;with t,546,N.1. Adonic meas re,789,792. adoriri with Inf.,423.2.N.2. adorning vbs.of,with Abl.,401,N.1. adstringere with se and Gen.,378.R.1. ad lescens 437,N.1. advantage vbs.of,with Dat.,346. ADVERB defined,16,5,and n.3; disc ssion of,91,92: from Acc.,91,1; from Abl.,ib. 2; from Loc.,ib.3; ncertain,ib.4; by terminations,92,1-o; syntactical and miscellaneo s,92,6;comparison of,93; n meral,98; pron.,110; with Dat.,359, N.7; with Part.Gen.,372.N.3;genera] se of,439; position of,440; for rel.

with prep.,611,R.1: position of,677. adversari with Dat.,346.R.2. adversative sentences,483-491;particles,483;c m,580.NN.1 and 2,587; q i,634. ad vers s gives obj.toward which,359, R.2; as adv.,415; as prep.,416,2. advertere anim m,with Acc.,342. ae pron nciation of,1 and N.; weakening of,8,1. aedes omitted,with Gen.,362.R.3. aeq alis with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1. aeq are with Dat.,346,N.3. aeq m with est instead of sit,254.R.1; aeq e with Abl.,296,N.1; aeq o after Comp.,398.N.1; with atq e,643.N.3; aeq e-aeq e,482,3. aes decl.of,47,6. aestimare with Gen.,379; with Abl., 380.N.1; with Abl.and ex,402.R.2. aetas in Abl.of Time,393,R.5;idaetatis,336.N.2. aetern m as adv.,336.N.1. afficere with Abl.of Means,401.N.3. affinis with Dat.or Acc.,359.R.1; with Gen.,374.N.2. affitrmare with inf.,527,8.2. age with PL,211.N.2; with Impv.,269; age vero,487.N.3;id ago,with t, 546.N.1. agency s ffixes for,181,1. agent in Abl.with ab,214,401; in Abl., 214,R.2; in Dat.,215,354,355; and Instr ment,401,R.1. aggredi with Inf.,423.2.N.2. aio 175,1; s pplied from nego,447,R.; introd ces O.R.,648.R.2;with Inf.,527, R.2. alaris and alarms,84,2. Alcaic meas re,791,799. Alcmanian meas re,786. all forms indef.prons.,111,1. alien s poss.of ali s,108; with Gen. or Dat.,359,it.1 and N.2. aliq ando aliq ando,482.N.1. aliq ant m with ante,403.N.4. [506 GENERAL INDEX.] aliq is and aliq i 107; with Pl.vrb., 211.N.2; syntax of,314; with n merals, 314,R.2,i; for q is and q i,107.N.1,and 315,N.1;with two negs.,315.N.1;per aliq em stare,with ne,q omin s, 648,N.1. ali s decl.of,76,108; reciprocal ali s ali m,221.R.1; with Abl.,319; for alter,ceteri,ib.N.1;besides,ib.N.2; alia as Acc.of Respect,338,2; aliter with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.3; ali s

atq e ali s,477,N.O; alias-alias,482, l;t m-alias,alias-pler mq e, interd m-alias,ib.N.2;alio alio, alibi-alibi,ib.2;aliter-aliter,ib. 3; aliter strengthens sin,592; followed by q am,nisi,praetor,643.N.4;with atq e,643.N.3. allec decl.of,68,12. alphabet 1.So nds of letters,ib.RR. 1-3; names of letters,ib.N. alter decl.of,76,108; for sec nd s, 96,5;alter alter m,reciprocal,221.R. 1; and ali s,319. alter ter decl.of,76,108. altit de with Acc.of Extent,335,R.1. alt s with Acc.of Extent,335.R.1. amare 122;amabO,with Impv.,269; amans,437.N.1;with Gen.,375,N.2. amb in composition,9,4. ambire conj.of,169.2.R.1. ambo decl.of.,73.R.,95,108; and terq e,292. amic s with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1. ampli s with q am omitted,296,R.1. an in disj nctive q estions,457,1;in phrases,ib.2;strengthened by ne,ib. 1,N.2; as a simple interrog.particle,ib. 1,N.3; in second part of a disj nctive q estion,458;anne,ib.: and a t,ib. s.4; annon and necne,459; forn m or ne in indirect q estion,460.1.N.1; or 497. anacol thon 697. Anacreontic meas re,819-' anacr sis and anacr stic scheme,739 anapaestic foot,734; rhythm,736; varieties of,777-782; s bstit tes for,777. anaphora 485,N.2; 636,N.4: 682. angl with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1. angiport s decl.of,68,5. animadvertere with inf.,527.R.1. animals as instr ments or agents,214, R.2. anim s with t,646.N.2;anim m advertere,with ACC..342: animi as Loc., 374,N.7; in animo esse,with inf.,422, N.5. Anio decl.of,41,4. ann ere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. ante in composition,9,4;vba.cpd.will take Acc.or Dat.,331,347; with Abl.of Standard or Acc.of Extent,403.N.4; position of,413.R.1 and N.3; as adv., 415;as prep.,416,3;with Acc.Ger., 432 and N.1; with part.,437.N.2. anteoq am see anteq am. antecedent action,561-o67;definite, 613;repetition of,615;incorporation of,616;indefinite,621;def.or indef. with Indic.or S bjv.,631,1,and 2.

antecedere with Dat.,etc.,347,R.2. antecellere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2; with Abl.of Respect,397.N.2. anteire with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. antepen lt 11. anteq am with Indic.,574-o76;with Pr.,575;with Pf.and F t.Pf.,676; with S bjv.,577. anterior 87,8. aorist forms on so,sim,131,4,6.; definition,224;P re Pf.as Aor.,236,N.; Hist.Pf.,239;Pl pf.,241.N.1;Pf.as Potential of Past,258.N.2. apodosis 589; omission of,601; in comparative sentences,602;in Indic.in Unreal Conditions,597,R.3;after vrb. req iring S bjv.,ift.R.5. aposiopesis 691. apparere as cop.vb.,206,N.1;with Nom,and Inf.,528.N.2;with t,553,4, appellare with two Accs.,340; with two Noms.,206. appointing vbs.of,with Dat.of Ger., 429,2. apposition 320; concord in,321; excep tions,ib.RR.,NN.; Partitive,322,323; Restrictive,322;Distrib tive,323; whole and part,ib.N.2;to sentence, 324;predicate,325;Gen.of,361;to names of Towns,386.R.1;to Loc.,411, R.3; pron.incorporated,614,R.4; s bst. incorporated,616,2. appropinq are with Dat.,346.R.2. app rtenance s ffix of,182,6. apt s constr.,552,R.2;with q i and S bjv.,631,1. ap d 416,4. [GENERAL INDEX.507] arbitrari with Inf.,527.R.2. arbitrat as Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1. arbor -decl.of,45,N. arcere with Abl.of Separation,390,2,N.2. Archilochian meas re,788,800. arc s decl.of,68,5. ardere with inf.,423.2.N.2;ardens,to express ca se,408.N.2. ardor with t,646.N.2. arg ere with Gen.,378.R.1; with Inf., 528.N.1. Aristophanic meas re,793. arrangement of words,671-683;of cla ses,684-687;grammatical or rhetorical,672;ascending and descending, 673;of simple sentences,674;of interrog.sentences,675;of adj.and Gen., 676; of ad vs.,677; of preps.,678; of particles,679;of attrib tes,680;of opposites,681; of pairs,682;anaphoric and

chiastic,682;poetical,683;periods, 685; historical and oratorical,687. arridere with Cat.,etc.,347.R.2. artisan s ffixes for,181,3. as decl.of,48,R. Asclepiadean meas re,802,803. asking vbs.of,with two Accs.,339 and R.1.N.1; with Inf.or t,546 and R.3. aspergere with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc. and Abl.,348,R.1. aspicere with inf.,527.R.1; aspect , 436.N.1. aspirates 6,2,R. assentiri-with Dat.,346.R.2; 347.R.2. asseq i with t,553,1. -assere as Inf.ending,131,4,6.4. asseverations in S bjv.,262; in F t. Indic.,ib.N.; with nisi,591,6,2. assidere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. assimilations of vowels,8,4;of consonants,9,1,2,3;of preps.,9,4;of Voc., 211.R.3. ass giacere with Abl.or Dat.,401.N.2; with Inf.,423.2.N.2. ass escere with Abl.or Dat.,401.N.2; with Inf.,423.2.N.2. ast in Abl.of Manner,399.N.1. asyndeton after demonstrative,307, R.4; in coordination,473,N.,474,N.,483, N.,492.N. at se of,488 and NN.: ast,488.N.1. atq e for q am,296.N.4;syntax of, 477 and notes : adds a third member, 481,N.: with adjs.of Likeness,etc.,643; for q am after neg.Comp.,644,N. 2. atq i 489; atq in,ib.N.1. attendance Abl.of,392;with c m,ib. R.1; instr mental,ib.R.2. attinet with Inf.,422.N.4; restrictions with,627.R.2. attraction in Gender,211.R.5;in mood, 508,4,629; of vb.of Saying into S bjv., 541.N.3,585.N.3,630.N.3;of Rel.,617; inverse,617.N.2;of mood in general, 662,663. attrib tive 288;concord of adj.,289; with two or more s bsts.,290; position of,291;s perlatives of Order and Seq ence,291,1,8.2;pred.,325;vario s pec liarities of,ib.RR.; omitted with cognate Acc.,333,2,N.1;with Abl.of Time,393,R.5;omitted with Abl.of Manner,399.N.1; with Inf.,421.N.2; with part.,437.R. ail pron nciation of,4;weakening of, 8,1. a ctorem esse,with Dat.,346.N.5;with Inf.,527.R.2;with t,546.N.1. a ctoritas with t,546.N.1;a ctori-

tate as Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1. a dere with Inf.,423,2,N.2. a dire like Gr.ako ein,206.N.2; a diens,with Dat.,346,N.5;with c m and S bjv.,580.R.2; with Inf.and part., 527.R.1,and N.1;with rel.and Indic., 467,N.; a dits,436.N.1. a sc ltare with Dat.,346.R.2. a t disting ished from an,438.N.4; se of,493 and notes; a t a t with PL, 285.N.1: s bdivides a eg.,445. a tem position of,413.N.3,484.R.; syntax of,484; in lively q estions,ib.N.1; strengthens sed,485.N.3,592. a xiliari with Dat.,346.R.2. a xiliaris and a xiliari s,84,2. a xiliary vbs.with Inf.,280,1,6. avere with Inf.,423.2.N.2. avers s with Dat.,359.R.5. Baccar 68,12. Bacchic loot,734; meas res,811-814. balne m 68,3. becoming vbs.of,with two Noms.,206. beginning vbs.of,with Inf.,423,and N.2. believing vbs.of,with Acc.and Inf.,526 and 527; with Nom.,528. bellare with Dat.,346.N.6. [508.GENERAL INDEX.] bell m in Abl.of Time,394.R;belli as Loc.,411,R.2. belonging s ffixes for,182,5. benevol s compared,87,4. beseeching vba.of,with t,546. bewaring vbs.of,with ne,648. bibere with dare,421.N.1.6. bidding vbs.of,with Cat.,346. bii g s and bii gis,844bimatris 85,1bini for d o,346.R.2. blandiri with Dat.,346.R.2. boards with Dat.Ger..429,1. bon s comparison,90;c i bono,356, E.I;bene,as adv.of Degree,439,N.2, and 3. books omit in with Abl.,387. bos-decl.of,62,7. brachylogy 689. breathings 6,2,A . b ying .vbs.of,with Gen.or Abl.,379, C so nd of,L.R.1; name of,I,N. cadere with Abl.of Separation,390,2,N. 2. caes ra -defined,760;varieties,751; masc.and fem.,752;b colic,753,R.2; in Iamb.Sen.,759,N.2; in Iam.Trim. Cat.,761.N.; in Iam.Trim.Cla d.,762, N.4;in Iam.Oct.,763.N.b.; in Iam. Sept.,764.N.2;in Troch.Sept.,770,N.2:

in Dac.Hex.,784.N.2 : in alcaic,791, 798,799,N.1;in Glyconic,795; in Phalaecean,796.N.3;in Sapphic,797.N.2,804 : in Archilochian,800,N.; in Asclepiadean,802.N.1. calling vbs.of,with two Accs.,340; with two Noms.,206. Calx decl.of,70.D. campi as Loc.,411.R.2. can tica defined,747; in early Latin, 824; in later Latin,826. capability djs.of,with Inf.,421.N.1.C. capacity adjs.of,with Dat.Ger.,429,2; s ffixes for,182,2. capi with Gen.of Charge,878.R.1. capital decl.of,78,R. cap t decl.of,63,8; est with Inf.,422, N.2. cardinal n mbers 94;Gen.Pl.of,96, R.2;collective SG.of,16.; d o and ambo,292 : with sing li,296: for Distrib tive,295.N.; poeition of,676.R.2. carere with Abl.,405; with Gen.,383,1, N.2. caro decl.of,41,4; gender of,43,1. Carthagini as Loc.,411.R.1. earns with Abl.of Price,404,N.2. cases defined,23;strong and weak, recti and obliq i,24;case-forms,26; endings,26,2. cassis decl.of,68,12. cas -as Abl.of Mariner,399,N.1. catalexis 742. ca sa with Gen.,373; with poss.pron., ib.R.2; with Gen.Ger.,428.R.2; ca sa, in phrases with t,646.N.2;ca sam vincere,333,2,8. CAUSAL SENTENCES coordinate,498;particles,498;syntax of s bordinate,538642;general division,638,539;with q od,etc.,and Indic.,640;with a od, etc,,and S bjv.,841; with q ia,ib. N.1;rejected reason,ib.N.2;with q anddq e,ib.N.5;with vbs.of Emotion,642;si for q od,ib.N.1;with C m,680.RR.1 and 2,686;with tamq am,etc.,641.N.4,602,N.4;relative, 634;cla ses in O.O.,665. ca sation vbs.of,with part.,637;with t,553,1; pass,with t,ib.3. ca sative verbs formation of,191,4. ca se Abl.of,408;vario s expressions for,ib.NN.; preventing,ib.N.4;external,te.N.6; represented by part.,666, 670,2. cavere with S bjv.for Impv.,271,2; with Dat.,346,N.2; constr ctions with, 548,NN.1 and 3. Ce appended to iste,104.3.N.2;to ille, ib.N.3.

cedere with Dat.,346,R.2;with Abl.of Separation,390,2,N.2. cedo defective,175,6. celare with two Accs.,or de,339 and R. 1 and 3,N.1. celer comparison of,87,1,and N. censere with Inf.,627.R.2;with t,646, N.1;censeo,yes,471,2. centiman s defective,86,2. cernere with inf.,527,R.1. certare with Dat.,346.N.6; rem certare,333,2,s. cert s strengthens q idam,313.R.3; with Gen.,374.N.O;certe,certo,yes, 471,1; certe,strengthens at,488.N.2-, certi s(q am),with inf.,422.N.3-, [GENERAL INDEX.509] cert m eat,with inf.,423.2.N.2; certiorem facere,with inf.,527.R.2. cessare with Inf.,423,2,N.2. (ceter s) Nom.masc.wanting,74,R.2, 86,1; se of ceter m,491; cetera sed partitively,291.R.2; ali s instead,319, N.1: as Acc.of Respect,338,2. charge in Gen.with J dicial verbs, 378;with nomine,ib.R.2;in Abl.,ib. R.3. chiasm s 682 and R. choosing -vbs.of,with two Noms.,206; with two Accs.,340;End with Dat.or ad,ib.R.2;vbs.of,with Final Dat., 356.N.2. choriambic feet,734;rhythms,801. cingl with Acc.,338.N.2. circa position of,413.R.1 : as adv.,415; as prep.,416,5;with Acc.Ger.,432 and N.1. circiter as prep.,416,6. circ m in composition,9,4;vbs.cpd. with,take Acc.,331; never repeated,ib. R.2; as adv.,415: as prep.,416,5. circt ndare with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc. and Abl.,348.R.1. circ mf ndere with Acc.and Dat.,or Acc.and Abl.,348,R.1. with direct q estion,467, circ mstantial c m 585-588. cis as prep.,416,7. citerior 87,2 and 7. citi s q am constr.after,644,R.3. citra as adv.,415; as prep.,416,7. civitas concord of,in pred.,211,R.6. clam as adv.,415; as prep.,416,8. clanc l m as prep.,416,8. cliv s decl.of,67,2. clothing vbs.of,with Acc.of Respect, 338.N.8; with Abl.of Means,401.N.1. cl ere with Nom.and Inf.,528.N.1.

coepi 175,5,a,and N.; with Inf.,423, N.3. cogere with Inf.,423,2,N.2; with t,553, 2; concl de,with Inf.,546.R.1,553,2,N. cogitare with Inf.,423.2.N.2. cogitatio in phrases with t,557.R. cognate Acc sative 333,2;similar phrases,ib.R.; with second Acc.,341; with prohibere,inhere,ib.N.2. cognat s with Gen.or Dat.,359,it.1. cognitio in phrases with t,557,R. cognomen esse with Dat..349.R.5. cognoscere with inf.,527,R.1;cognit as S p.,436,N.1. coincidence constr.with,513.N.3. cOire with Dat.,346.N.6. cOlligere with Inf.,627.R.2. collocare with in and Abl.,385,R.1; with in and Acc.,ib.N.2. coins decl.of,61.N.5. comitari with Dat.,346.N.2. COmitilS as Abl.of Time,393.R.5. commiserari with ACC.,377,^.2. committere with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1; with t,548.N.1. commovere with t,563,2; commot s, to express ca se,408.N.2. Comm ne as s bst.,211.R.4; in phrases with t,557.R.; comm nis,with Gen. or Dat.,359.R.1. comparative in ior,86; in entior,87,4,5; lacking,87,9; with q am or Abl.,296 and RR.; omission of q am,ib.R.4; age with nat s,ib.R.5; with opinione,ib. R.6; of Disproportion,298; omission of t after q am,ib.R.2; restriction of, 300; strengthened,301; do bled,ib.; with Part.Gen.,372 and R.2; with Abl. of Respect,398 and R.; with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1; with Abl.Ger.,431.N. 2; with q am q i,631,3. COMPARATIVE SENTENCES 638-644; division of,638: moods in,639; vb.omitted in,640;in dependent cla ses,641; correlatives in,642; the more the more,ib. R.2; with atq e,643; with q am,644. comparison of adjectives,86;pec liarities,87; by magis and maxima,ib.6; by pl s and pl rim m,ib 6.N.2; defective,87,2,7,9; of participles,88,89; of advs.,93; irreg lar,90; standard of, omitted,297; of q alities,299; conditional sentences of,602. compelling vbs.of,with t,553,2. compensatory lengthening 9,6,a. comperce with Inf.for Impv.,271,2,N.2. comperire with Gen.,378.R.1; with Inf., 527.R.1. C0mpesce with Inf.for Impv.,271,2, N.2.

complere with Gen.,383,1. COmplex s as a Present,282,N. compos with Gen.,374,N.3. composition of words,193-200;divisions,193; of s bsts.,194-198; of vbs., 199,200. [510.GENERAL INDEX.] compo nds attrib.,197,1;dependent, ib.2;poss.,198;q antity in,716. con see c m. conari with Inf.,423.2.N.2. conat s defective,68,5. concedere sed personally in pass.,217, N.2; with Cat.,346,R.2; with Inf.,423,2, N.2; 532.N.1; with Acc.Get.,430.N.1; with lit,548.N.1. conceinng vbs.of,with obj.cla se,523. concessive S bjv.,264 : com,580.NN.1 and 2,587; q i,634; part.,609,667,670,4. CONCESSIVE SENTENCES 603-609;with etsi,etc.,604; with q amq am,605; with q amvis,etc.,606; with licet, 607; with t,608; representatives of. 609. concl dere with inf.,527.R.2. concord 210; pred.with s bj.,211; violations of,ib.RR.1-o,NN.1-3; of anbj.and pred.m ltiplied,285-287; of app.,321; ne t.for persons,323,N.3; of rel.,614. conc piens with Gen.,375.N.2. conc rrere with Dat.,346,N.6. condecet with Inf.,422.N.4. condemning vbs.of,with Gen.,378; with other constrs.,ib.R.2; with Abl.,ib.R. 3; enforced destination,ib.R.4. condicio in phrases with t,546,N.2. condition s ffixes for,181,8; indicated by a q estion,453,M.3; represented by part.,667,670,4. conditional c m 683CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 589-602;division of,589; sign,590;negatives,591: two excl ding,592: eq ivalents of Protasis,593: classification of,594.LOGICAL, 595; in O.O.,ib.R.1; with S bjv.,ib.RR. 2,3; sive-sive,ib.R.4; siq idem,ib.R. 5; simoao,ib.R.6; phrases,ib.N.1; range of tenses,ib.N.2.IDEAL,596; for nreal,ib.R.1;shift to nreal,ib.R.2; after non poss m,ib R.3; in O.O.,ib.R.5. UNREAL,597; Impf.of Past,ib.R.1; Indic.in Apodosis,ib.RR.2,3; in O.O.,ib. R.4; after a vb.req iring S bjv.,ib.R. 5; absq e,ib.N.1.INCOMPLETE,598-601: omission of sign,598; of vb.of Prot., 599: of Prot.,600 ;of Apod.,601: of COMPARISON,602; in O.O.general consider-

ation,656: Logical,657; Ideal,658; Unreal.659; Pf.Inf.and pot isse,ib.NCond cit with Dat.,346,R.2; with Gen., 379; with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1. confid with Inf.,533.R.1; with t , 553,3. Confidere with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.2; with Abl.,40L.N.6; with Inf.,527.R.2. confirmare with inf.,527.R.2. congr ere with Dat.,etc.,347,s.2. conj gation defined,17; systems of,120: first,122; second,123; irreg lar second, 124; third,125; third in io,126: fo rth. 127; deponents,128: periphrastic,129; notes on; 130,131: change in,136. conj nction defined,16.7.and R.3. coni ngere with Dat.or c m,359.N.3. CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES exceptional seq ence in,513; syntax of,551-o58; general division,551 : P re,552: tant m abest t,ib.R.1; with dign s,etc.,ib. R.2;with idea of Design,16.R.3: t non,witho t,ib.R.4;Complementary, 553: vbs.of Effecting,553; vbs.of Ca sation,ib.1; of Compelling,etc.,ib.2: Happening,etc.,ib.3; impersonals,ib.t; vbs.of Hindering,554-o56; q in with vbs.of Preventing,555,1; with vbs.of Do bt,ib.2; q in = t non,556; non d bito q in,ib.RR.1,2;Explanatory t,557; Exclamatory q estion,558; rel. sentences,631; with def.antecedent,ib. 1; with indef.antecedent,ib.2: with Comp.,ib.3: with adj.,ib.4: with q in, 632; Indic.for S bjv.,16.2.RR.1.2. consentane m with inf.,422.N.3. Consentire with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. conseq i and conseq ens,with t,553, 1 and 4. considere with in and Abl.,385,R.1. consili m in Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1;in phrases,with Inf.,422.N.2,and 428.N.2; with dare and t,546.NN.1 and 2. consistere with Abl.of Material,396, N.1. consonants 6; do ble,ib.3; so nds of,7; phonetic variations in,9; combinations of,10.R.1. censors with Gen.,374.N.2. conspicari with Inf.,527,R.1. conspicere with inf.,527.R.1. constare with Dat.,etc.,347,s.2; with Gen.,379; with Abl.of Material,396,N. 1; with Nom.and Inf.,528.N.2. constit ere with in and Abl.,385,R.1; with Inf.,423,2,N.2; with t,546.N.1. constr etiO ad stns m,211.R.1,N.3; praegnans,699. [GENERAL INDEX.511.]

cons escere with l f.,423.2.N.2; conS et s,with Inf.,421,N.1,c. Cons et do in Abl.of Manner,399.N.1; in phrases,with Inf.,422.N.2,or t,557, R. cons lere with two Accs.,339 and N.1; with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.2; boni cons lere,380,N.2. contemporaneo s action 538-o73; in Extent,569,570: in Limit,571-o73. contendere with Dat.,346.N.6; with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with t,546.N.1. contineri with Abl.of Material,396.N.1; content s,with Abl.,401.N.6. contingit with t,553,3; contigit, with Dat.,346,R.2; seq ence after,513, N.2; attraction of pred.after,535.R.3. contin ance vbs.of,with Inf.,423,and N.2. contra position of,413.R.1; as adv.,415; as prep.,416,9; with atq e,643,N.3. contracting vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430. contraction of shorts,732. Contrari s with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1: with atq e,643.N.3. contrasts with hiC - ille,307,RR.1,2; with ipse,311.R.1; with aliq is,314; alter-alter,etc.,323. convenire indic.for S bjv.,254,R.1; with Dat.,346,N.2,347,R.2. convicting vbs.of,with Gen.,378; other constr.,ib.R.2. coordination defined,472; witho t conj nction,472.R.; syntax of,473-o03; cop lative,474-482; adversative,483491;disj nctive,492-497;ca sal and illative,498-o03. Copia with Inf.,428.N.2. cop la with pred.,205; itself a pred.,ib. N.; omitted,209; agrees with pred., 211,R.1,EX.C. cop lative vbs.,206; with Nom.and Inf., ib.R.3.Particles,474;omitted,ib.N., 481.Sentences,474-482; se of neg.to connect,480. cor decl.of,63,8;cordi est,with Inf., 422.N.5. coram as adv.,415; as prep.,417,3. corn s decl.of,68,5. corp s decl.of,48correlatives 109-111;pronominal adjs., 109; advs.,110; cpds.,Ill; coordinating particles,as t m-t m,alias-alias, etc.,482; of Rel.,618; absorption of,619, 621; position of,820; in comparative sentences,642; omitted,642,3. correptio 744. cos defective,70,D. co ntries in Acc.,with prep.,337.R.1;

witho t,ib.N.1; in Abl.,391,N. crassit de with Acc.of Extent,335.R.1. crass s with Acc.of Extent,335,R..1. crastim as Loc.,411.N.1. creare with two Accs.,340;with two Noms.,206. creation vbs.of,with Inf.,280,1,b. Credere personal in pass.,217.N.1; with Dat.,346.R.2;with Inf.,527.R.2;credit r,with Inf.,528.R.2. cretic foot,734;s bstit tions for,806; rhythms,808-810. cr ciari-with Inf.,533.R.1. c i s -as poss.pron.,106.N.4. C lpa with Epexegetical Gen.,361,2. c m -and q om,7;in composition,9,4; with s bst.to form cpd.s bj.,285.N.2; vbs.cpd.with take Acc.,or Dat.,331, 347;with Abl.of Attendance,392,and R.1; to indicate Time,394.N.2; with Abl. of Manner,399; with nnat ral prod ctions,400,ii.2; position of,413,R.1; with Abl.Ger.,433;as prep.,417,4;with eo and q od,525,2,N.2;(prim m),as soon as,561-563;Ca sal,,564,N.2;with Iterative action,566,567;with S bjv., ib.N.; derivation of,578;general view of,579;Temporal,580; f it c m,ib. R.1; memini c m,ib.R.2; with Lapses of Time,ib.R.3; in early Latin,ib.N.1; Inverse,581;Explicative,582;Conditional,583,590,N.3; Iterative,584; with S bjv.,ib.R.; Circ mstantial,585-o88; Historical,585; Ca sal,586; Concessive and Adversative,687: c m non = witho t,ib.R.2; c m t m,688; mood,ib. 2; c m interim,with Inf.,635.N.2; with Indic.retained in O.O.,655,R,3. -c mq e makes general relatives,111,2. c ncta Acc.of Respect,338,2; may omit in with Abl.of Place,388. c nctari with Inf.,423,2,N.2. c pere with Pf.Inf.,280,2,e,N.; with Dat.,346,R.2; c pienti est,353.N.2; with Inf.,423.2,N.2; 538.N i; with Gen.,376.N.2. c piditas with t,546.N.2. c pid s with Gen.,374.N.5. c press s decl.of,68,5. [512 GENERAL INDEX.] c ra with t,546.N.2;c rae est,with inf.,422,N.5. C rare with Inf.,423,2,N.2;with Acc. Ger.,430.N.1;with part.,537.N.2; with t,546.N.1; c ra t for Impv.,271,1, and 2.N.2. c rric lo as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1. Dactylic foot,734;s bstit tions.783;

rhythm,736;rhythms,783-789. damnas indeclinable,85,C. daps defective,70,D. dare Pf.dedrot,131,6;Pr.dan nt, 133,iv.,N.2;with ad or Dat.,345.R.2; with Final Dat.,356.it.2; operam,with Dat.Ger.,429.N.1,or t,546.N.1;with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1;n pt m,etc.,435, N.1;with Pf.part.,537.N.2; permit,with t,553,2. DATIVE--defined,23,3;1st decl.in ai,a, ab s,as,eis,29,NN.3,4; 3d decl.in ei e,37,2; 4th decl.in b s, el, ,61.R., and N.2;5th decl., ncommon,63,R.1; in 8,1,ib.N.2; in Greek s bsts.,66.N.2; in adjs.in ai,a,ab s,is(for iis),75, NN.2,6;in i of pron.adjs.,76,2;with act.vb. nchanged in pass.,217,346, R.1; gives End with vbs.of Taking,etc., 340.R.2; with ei and vae,343,1,N.2; of Indirect Obj.,344;with trans,vbs., 345;with vbs.of Taking Away,ib.R.1; and pro,ib.R.2;with intrans,vbs., 346; with cpd.vbs.,347; with vbs.cpd. with de,ex,ab,ib.R.5;and Acc.with vbs.of Giving and P tting,348: of Possessor,349; of Personal Interest,350; Ethical,351;of Reference,352,353; with participles,353;of Agent,215, 354; Do ble,356; with s bsts.,357: Local,358;with adjs.,359;with cpds.of di,dis,390,2,N.5; of Ger.,429. de_with Abl.for second Acc.,339,NN.2,3; vbs.cpd.with take Dat.,347,R.5;with Abl.of Separation,390,1,and 2;to indicate Time,394.N.2; with Abl.of Origin, 395,and N.2;with Abl.of Respect,397, N.1; with Abl.of Ca se,408.N.3: position of,413.R.1;as prep.,416,5;with Abl. Ger.,433;with part.,437.N.2;de eo q od,525,2,N.2. death deponent vb.of as act.in Abl.Abs., 410.N.1. debere Indic.for S bjv.,254,R.1: Impf. as tense of Disappointment,ib.R.2; with Pf.Inf..280,2,6,and N.3: with Inf., 423.2.N.2. decere with Pf.Inf.,280,2,b.R.1;with Dat.,346.N.3;with Abl.of Respect, 397 N.2. decernere with Inf.,423.2.N.2,and 546, R.1;with t,546.N.1. declension defined,17;varieties of,27 : r les for,28: 1st,29.30: 2d,31-33; stems in -ro and -ero,32: 3d,35-60: stems of, 35;formation of Nom.SG.,36;liq id stems,39-46; sibilant,47-49; m te,5055; vowel,56-o9; 4th,61,62; 5th,63,64; vary between 5th and 3d,63,R.2;of Greek s bsts.,65;adjs.of 1st and 3d,

73;of pron.adjs.,76; parts.,80. decor s with Abl.,397.N.2. decreeing vbs.of,with Dat.Ger.,429,2. dedecet with inf.,422,x.1. deesse with Dat.,349.R.4. deferre with Gen.of Charge,378.R.1. defess s-with Inf.,421,N.1,c. deficere with Acc.,346,N.3. defigere with in and Abl.,385,R.1. degree advs.of,modify other advs.,459, N.2. deicere with Abl.,390.2.N.3. delectari with Acc.,346.N.3. deliberative q estions 265;S bjv.in O.O.,651.R.2. deliberat m est with inf.,423.2.N.2. delici m decl.of,68,3. deligere with two Accs.,340;with two Noms.,206. demanding vbs.of,with t,546. demergere with in and Abl.,385,R.1. demirari with inf.,533.R.1. demonstrare with Inf.,627.R.2. demonstratives 104;attracted in Gender,211,R.5,and N.3;syntax of,305307 : hic,305 : iste,306; ille,307;hic ille,ib.RR.1,2;advs.similarly sed, ib.R.3;strengthened by q idem,ib. R.4;reflexive of,521,R.5;followed by q od,525,2;contin e a rel.cla se, 636.N.1; position of,676,R.1. demovere with Abl.,390.2.N.3. denominative 179,2,and N.; Pf.of vbs., 134,v.; formation of vbs.,192. dense growths s ffixes for,181,11. dentals 6,1: s ffixes with,186. depellere with Abl.,390.2.N.3. deponent 113;conj gation,128; list of, 163-166; semi-,167; how sed,220. [GENERAL INDEX.513] deprecari with n g,548.N.1. deprehendi with Gen.of Charge,378, R.1. depriving vbs.of,with Abl.,405.Nderivative words 179,2. descent s ffixes for,182,11. desiderare-with inf.,423.2.N.2. desiderative verbs formation of,191,3. desinere with Inf.,423,2,XN.2,3. desire adjs.of,with Gen.,374;vbs.of, with Inf.,281,c.; 423,2,NN.2,4; seq ence after,515.it.3;with Acc.and Inf.,532; with t.ib N.1-4;with part.,537.N.1; with complementary Final cla se,646. desistere with Abl.,390,2,N.3. desperare with Dat.,346.R.2;with Inf., 527,R.2. determinative prono ns 103;syntax of,

308. deterrere-with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with ne, 548.N.1;with q omin s,549.N.1. det rbare with Abl.,390,2,N,3. de s decl.of,33.R.6. dexter decl.of,74.R.1;Comp.of,87,1, R.1;ib.2 and 7, diaeresis 6,753. dialysis 724. diastole 721. dica defective,70.D. dicere with two Noms.in pass.,206; omission of,209.N.5;dixerat as Aor., 241.N.1;dicat,dixerit aliq is,257,?; with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.1;with Nom. and Inf.,628,and N.1;dicit r and dict m est,ib.-2;not confined to 3d person,ib.N.4;with t,546.N.1;dic, with Indic.q estion,467.N.; dict ,in S p.,436.N. [dicio] defective,70.D. die -as Loc.,91,3;as Abl.of Time,393, R.5;di ,by day,91,2f. difference meas re of,403;vbs.of,with Abl.,ib.N.1. differre with Dat.,346.N.6. difficile comparison of,87,3;with est for S bjv.,254.R.1; with Inf.,421,N.1,c. diffic lty adjs.of,with Abl.S p.,436.N.2. diffidere with Dat.,346.R.2,and N.2; not Abl.,401.N.6. dignari with Abl.of Respect,397.N.2. dign s with Gen.,374.N.10;with Abl. of Respect,397.N.2;constr.after,652, R.2;q i or t,with S bjv.,631,1,and R.2. 33 dil vi m heteroclite,68,6. dimin tive s ffixes for,181,12,182,12; vbs.,192,2. diphthongs 4 and N.; length of,14; q antity of,706. dis in composition,9,4. disagreement vbs.of,with Dat.,346.N.6. discere pass,of docere,339.N.4;with Inf.,527.R.1. discrepare with Dat.,346.N.G. discr ciari with Inf.,533,R.1. disg st adjs.of,with Gen.,374. disinclination adj.of,for advs.,325,R.O. disj nctive -particles,492;sentences, 492-497; particles omitted,492,N.; q estions,462; forms of,468; indirect,460,2. displeas re vbs.of,with Dat.,346;adjs. of,with Abl.S p.,436.N.2. displicere with Dat.,346.R.2;displicet,with Inf.,422.N.4. disproportion by q am pro,q i, t, etc.,298;by positive,with preps.,ib. R.; omission of t after q am,ib.N.2.

disp det with Gen.,377.N.1;with Inf., 422.N.4. dissentire with Dat.,346.N.6. dissimilation of Consonants,9,5. dissimilis Comp.of,87,3. dissim lare with inf.,627.R.2. distaedet with Gen.,377.N.1. distare with Acc.,or a and Abl.,335,R. 2;with Dat.,346,N.6;with Abl.of Meas re,403,N.1. distrib tives 97;with pl ralia tant m,ib.R.3;for cardinals,ib.N.1,295, N.; syntax of,296; in apposition,323. diverbi m 747. dives Comp.of,87,10. divinam rem facere with Abl.of Means,401,N.4. docere with two Accs.,or de,339,and R. 1; with ab,ib.R.2; doct s,ib.R.2,and N.4; discere as pass.,ib.N.4;constr. after,423.N.6. doing vbs.of,take obj.cla se,623,and 526,1,and N.4. dolere with Inf.,633.R.1;dolet,with Dat.,346.N.1;with Dat.and Inf.,633, R.1. dolo as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1. dom s decl.,61.R.2,68,5; Acc.as Limit of Motion,337; Abl.of Separation,390, 2; domi,411.R.2; with Gen.of poss. pron., [514.GENERAL INDEX.] donare with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and Abl.,348.R.1. donec derivation,568 and R.: of complete coextension,with Indic.,569; ntil,with Indic.,571; inverse,id.N.6; with S bjv.,572; to express s bordination,ib.R. denic m 568; range of,571.N.4. doniq e range of,571.N.4. do bt vbs.of,with q in,555,2. dropping vbs.of,with q od cla se,525, 1; with t,ib.N -4d bitare-an,457,2; with Inf.,423,2,N. 2;non d bito,with q in,555,2,R.1; with Interrog.,ib.R.2;with Inf.,ib. R.3,and N. d bi m with an and S bjv.,457,2. d cere with pred.Nom.or phrase,206, R.1; with Final Dat.,356.R.2; with Gen. of Price,379: pensl d cere,380,1,N.2; deem,with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2; lead, with t,553,2. d m enclitic,with Impv.,269; with Pr. Indic.,229,R.; force of,568,R.; of complete coextension,569; of partial coextension,570: ntil,with Indic.,571; with

E -so nd of,3; weakening of,8,1; length of final,707,2; ga d exin cornp.,9,4. ease adjs.of,with Abl.S p.,436.N.2. eb r decl.of,44,5. ecastor strengthens atq e,477.N.2. ecce with Acc.and Nom.,343,1,N.2. ecq is 106 and N.5. ecthlipsis 719,2. edereconj gation of,172,N. edicere with Inf.,527.R.2; with t,646, N.1. ed cere with Abl.,390.2.N.3. effecting vbs.of,have Final Seq ence, 543.R.1,and N.2: constr.of,553. efferre with Abl.,390.2.N.3. efficere with S bjv.and t,563,1 and 3; with Inf.,527,R.2,553,2,N. egen s Comp.of,87,5;with Gen.or Abl.,405.N.3. egere with Gen.or Acc.,383,1,405.N.2. ego decl.of,100; Gen.Pl.,nostr m, nostri,100.R.2,304,2 and 3; poss.pron. instead,ib.2,N.2; nos in O.O.,660,4. geredi with Abl.,390.2.N.3. egregie adv.of Degree,439.N.2. ei with Dat.in exclamations,343,1,^.2. eicere with Abl.,390,2,N.3. elabi with Abl.,390.2.N.3. Elegiamb s 821. elision 719,1;in Iam.Sen.,759,N.3; in Dac.Hex.,784.N.5; in Pent.,786.N.2; in Sapphic,797,N.3; in Asclepiadean,802, N.2. ellipsis 688; see Omission, em with Acc.of Exclamation,343,1, N.2. emere with Gen.,379; bene emere,380, 2.R. eminence words of,with Abl.,397.N.2. emittere with Abl.,390,2,N.3. emotion vbs.of,with Acc.,330,R.and N. 2,333,1,N.1; vbs.of,with Abl.of Ca se, 408; with Acc.and Inf.,533; in Nom.of Part.,536,x.2; Ca sal sentences after, 542 and a.; perplexing,with indirect q estion or si,542.N.1. emphasis in arrangement,672,2,a. 6n in exclamations,343,1,N.2. enallage 693.

d d

d d

S bjv.,572; to express s bordination, ib.R..; provided that,573; with modo, ib.; with Pr.for participle,570,NN.1 and 2 -,ca sal,ib.; retained,with Indic. in O.O.,655.R.3,663.1.N.1. mmodo provided that,573. o decl.of,73.R.,95,and ambo, terq e,292. ritia heteroclite,68,2. ty vbs.of,with Inf.,423 and N.2.

enclitics effect of,on pron nciation,15, R.1. endeavo r vbs.of,with t,546,1. ending vbs.of,with Inf.,423,2 and N.2. endings of cases,26,2,27. endowing vbs.of,with Abl.of Means, 401.N.1. enim position of.413.N.3,484,R.,498.N.1; yes for,471.R.; strengthens sed,485.N. 3,498;asseverative,498,N.2;combinations of,ib.N.6;after q ia,ib.N.7. enimvero strengthens sed,485.N.3. eniti with Inf.,423,2,N.2. en merations in Abl.witho t in,387. epanorthosis 484,R.1. epenthesis of vowels,8,3; of consonants, 9,7. epicene s bstantives 21,3. ep lnm heteroclite,68,3. erga se of,416,10; with Acc.Ger.,432 N.1. [GENERAL INDEX.515] ergo with Gen.,373; as adv.,399.N.1; with Gen.Ger.,428.R.2; sage of,502 and N.1;position of.ib.N.2;combinations of,ib.R.3. eripere with Abl.,390,2,N.3. er dire with Abl.or de,339,R.2 and N. 3; with in or Abl.,401.N.1. esse-conj gation of,116; early forms,ib. NN.; cpds.,117; ascop la,205; esse pro, in n mero,efc.,206, -l; omitted,209 and NN.,280,2,6,R.2 and c;with F t. part,to form periphrastic,247;cpd. tenses with f i,etc.,ib.R.1;forem for essem,ib.N.1,250.N.2,251.N.2; with Pr.part.,247.N.2;f t r m esse lit,248; other forms,ib.KN.; in eo est t,249; with Pf.part.,250; variations,ib.RR..NN.; with Ger.,251,1; with Final Dat.,356,R.2; with Do ble Dat.,ib.R.3;with Gen.,379;with in and Acc.,385,N.3;with Abl.,401.N.7; with Gen.Ger.,428.R.2; with Dat.Ger., 429,1;f t r s as adj.,437,N.; esse q od,525.1.N.2; est,it is the case,with t,553,3;f it c m,with S bjv.,580, R.1;restrictions with,627,a.2;s nt' q i,with S bjv.,631,2. esseda heteroclite,68,1. et-in n merals,96,4,97,4; et et,with PL,285.N.; sage of,475; =et tamen, ib.N.1; for etiam,ib.N.2,482.5.N.2; omitted,481,2,N.and 3;with adjs.of Likeness and Unlikeness,643,N.2. etenim se of,498 and NN. Ethical Dative 351.

etiam strengthens comparative,301; syntax of,478 and NN.; yes,471,1; and q oq e,479 R.and N.1; with t m,478, N.1; after sed,Ver m,482,5,and N.1. etiamsi 603 and N.; syntax of,604 and RR. etsi 603; with Indic.or S bjv.,604; and yet,ib.R.2; with part.,609.N.1,667,N.; with adj.or adv.,ib.N.2; with Inf.,635, N.2. evadere with two Noms.,206. evenit with Dat.,346,R.2;with t, 553,3. event s ffixes for,181,2. evertere with Abl.,390,2,N.3. ex in comp.,9,4; vbs.cpd.with,take Dat.,347.R.5; with Abl.of Separation, 390,1 and 2; with Towns,391,R.1; with Abl.of Origin,395 and N.2; with Abl.of Material,396; with Abl.of Respect,397, N.1; with Abl.of Meas re,402,R.2; with Abl.of Ca se,408.N.3,413.R.1; se as prep.,417,6; with Abl.Ger.,433; ex 65 q od,525,2,N.2. exadvers s se of,416,2. excedere with Abl.,390,2,N.3. CXCellere with Dat.,347.R.4; with Abl. of Respect,397.N.2: with Abl.of Measre,403.N.1. excepto with q od,625,2,N.2. exclamations in Acc.,343,1; in Gen., 383,3; in Acc.and Inf.,634; exclamatory q estions,558. excl dere with Abl.,390,2,N.3. excl ding vbs.of,with Abl.,390,2. exempl m in phrases with t,548,N.2. exigere with ordinal,294;with two Accs.,339 and N.1. exire with Abl.,390,2,N.3. existimare with Gen.,379; with ex and Abl.,402,R.2; with Nom.and Inf.,528, N.1; with Acc.and Inf.,527,R.2. exlex defective,85,2. exorare with t,553,2. exordiri with inf.,23,2,N.2. expedit with Dat.,346,R.2. expellere with Abl.,390.2.N.3. expers with Gen.,374.N.2;with Abl., 390.3.N.1. expetere with Pf.Inf.pass.,280,2,C,N. explere with Gen.,383.1.N.2;explgn nt,133.IV.N.2. explicative c m 580,NN.1,2,582. exponere with in and Acc.,385.N.2. exposcere with two Accs.,339 and N.1. exprimere with t,553,1. exp gnare with t,553,1. exseq ias with ire,333,2,R. exsistere with Abl.,390,2,N.3. exsolvere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.

exspectare constr.of,572. exspectatione as Abl.of Respect,398, N.1. exspes defective,85,2. extent in Degree,334; in Space,335; in Time,336; Acc.of,as s bj.of pass., 336,N.3. exterior Comp.of,87,2 and 7. extorq ere with t,553,1. extra as adv.,415; as prep.,416,11. extrem m Comp.of,87,2;with masc. s bj.,211.R.-1;with t,553,4. ext rbare with Abl.,390,2,N.3. [516 GENERAL INDEX.] ex i with Acc.of Respect,338.N.2; with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and Abl.,348,R.1. facere early Pf.,feced,131,6;omission of,209.N.5; mir m fact m,209.N.2; fac( t) for Impv.,271,1;l dos and second Acc.,342;with pred.Gen.,366, E!;nihil reliq i,369.R.2;q od facere poss m,372,N.3;with re m and Gen.,378.R.1;with Gen.of Price,379; boni,ib.1.N.2;(sacr m) facere,with Abl.,401,NN.4,7;finem facere,with Dat.Ger.,429.N.1;represent,with Acc. and Inf.,527,R.2; with Pf.part.,537.N.2; with consec tive cla se,553,1;with Inf.,553.2.N.; facere(fax5) t as periphrasis,ib.1;no"n poss m(facere) q in,556;S p.of,436.N. facilis comparison of,87,3; with Inf., 421,N,1,c. facin s with est and Inf.,422.N.2. faex decl.of,52,7,70,C. fag s heteroclite,68,5. fal s witho t Comp.,87,9;with t, 553,4. fama with est and Inf.,627.R.2. fames heteroclite,68,8. fari conj.of,175,3,and N. fas 70.R.; with Inf.,422.N.2,428.N.2; with Abl.S p.,436,N.2. fattening vbs.of,with ex,ab,de,385, R.2. fastidies s with Gen.,374.N.5. fatBrl with Acc.and Inf.,627.R.2. fat m with est a ( l I i '-,422.N.2,and 428.N.2.[fa x] decl.of,62,7. favere with Dat.,346,R.2. fear seq ence after vbs.of,515,R.3; cla ses of,and Final Cla ses,543,R.3; syntax of cla se of,650; Inf.or Indirect q estion after,ib.NN.4,5. fem r decl.of,44,5,68,12. fere position of,677.R..1. ferire -with foed s,333,2,R.

ferox with est and Inf.,533.R.1. ferre conj.of,171; legem with t, 646.N.1;in phrases with t,553.1 and 2. festinare with Inf.,423.2.N.2. fic s heteroclite,68,5. fidem habere with Dat.,346,R.5. fidere with Dat.,348.R.2 and N.2;with Abl.,401.N.6. fieri conj gation of,173 and NN.; with two Noms.,206,304,R.1;with Gen.of Price,379;with ex or de,396,N.2;= to be sacrificed,with Abl.,401,NN.5,7; with t,553,3; fieri potis est t,ib.. fig re Whole and Part,323.N.2; Fig res of Syntax and Rhetoric,688-700;of Prosody,718-728. filia decl.of,29.R.4. filling vbs.of,with Abl.,405. fil m heterogeneo s,67,2,6. FINAL SENTENCES with Interrogative particle,470;general view,643,544; P re,645; t ne,or t non,ib.RR.1,2; Complementary,546-o49;with vbs.of Will and Desire,646;Inf.instead,ib. R.1;with vbs.of Hindering,547-o49; S bjv.witho t t,t'k R.2; t n,ib. R,3;with S bstantives,ib.N.2;Inf. instead,ib.N.3;ne with vbs.of Preventing,648; q omin s,649; with vbs. of Fear,550; eight circ mioc tions for, 644.R.2;seq ence in,512. final syllablesq antity of,711-713fine in Gen.or Abl.,378.R.3. fined) as prep.,417,7. fitness adjs.of,with Dat.,359; with Dat. Ger.,429. flagitare with Abl.or g,339,i:l,and N.1;with t,546,NN.1,3. flagiti m hominis 369.N.1,361.N.3. flamen defective,70,D. flocci as Gen.of Price,380,1. fl ere with Abl.of Means,401,N,5. fl men with Gen.of App.,361,N.1. foed s with ferire,333,2,R.; in phrases with t,646.N.2. following vbs.of,with t,553,3. foot in Metre,733;names of,734;eq ality of,740;conflict of Word and Verse, 750. foras-91,1,d. forbidding vbs.of,with Dat.,346;with 116,548. forgetting vbs.of,with Gen.or Acc.,376 and R.2. FORMATION OF WORDS 176-200;simple words,179-192; primitives and derivatives,179;s ffixes,180;formation of s bsts.,181;of adjs.,182;with s f-

fixes,183.s ffixes in detail vowels, 184;g tt rals,185;dentals,186;labials,187;s,188;liq ids,189;forma tion of vbs.,190;verbalia,191; [GENERAL INDEX.517] freq entativea or intensives,ib.1;inchoatives,ib.2;desideratives,ib.3; ca sativcs,ib.4;meditatives,ib.6; denominativa,192;cpd.words,193200; s bsts.,191-198;vbs.,199,200; seo compo nds. formidare with Iiif.,423,2,N.2,and 533, R..1. forsitan 457.2.N. forte nisi 591.R.4,and N.3. fortiter very,439.N.3. for m detective,70,D. fra de as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1. fremere with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1. freq ens in pred.attrib tion,325.R.6; with Abl.,405.N.3. freq entative verbs formation of,191,1. fret m heteroclite,68,5. fret s with Abl.,401.N.6. friendiiness adjs.of,with Dat.,369. fr gl 85,C.; Comp.of,90fr i with Abl.,407,and N.2,6;personal Ger.,427.N.5. fr nisci with Abl.,407.N.2.b. [fr x] defective,70,D. f gere with Inf.for Impv.,271.2.N.2; f git me,with Pr.Inf.,281.2.N. f gitans with Gen.,375,N.2. f lment m heteroclite,68,3. f lness s ffixes for,182,10. f lness adjs.of,with Gen.,374;vbs.of, with Gen.,383,1. f nction s ffixes for,181,9; in Dat.Ger., 429. f ngi with Abl.,406 and N.2,c; personal Ger.,427.N.5. f stis heteroclite,68,5. FUTURE 112,3; formation of,114,115; early forms,130,3;part,in r m for fem.,211,N.1; definition of,223; sage of,243; of volo and poss m,ib R.2; as gnomic,ib.N.1;in Impv.sense,243; periphrasticact.,247; Indic.for Deliberative S bjv.,254.N.2; part,act.,283; part,as s bst.,437.N.1;part,as an adj.,438.N.; representation of in O.O., 514,515; periphrastic in Unreal Cond., ib.R.1; Inf.,530; in rel.sentences,622; syntax of part.,669,670. FUTURE PERFECT 112,3;formation of, 114,115; in so,131,4,6,1; defined,223;

syntax of,244; as F t.,ib.R.1; with nolo,Volo,poss m,etc.,ib.R.3; in both cla ses,ib.R.4;independent se of,ib.N.1;periphrastic,with habeo, ib.N.2;as Impv.,245;Representation of,in O.O.,514,515; Pf.and Pl pf.periphrastic in Unreal Condition,515.R.1; in rel.sentences,622. Galliambic Verse 818. ga dere with si,542.N.1;gavis s as Pr.,282,N. gender 19; common,21,1; epicene,ib.3; s bstantiva mobilia,ib.2;of 1st Decl.,30; of 2d Decl.,34; of 3d Decl.,39, 43,46,49,55,58;of 4th Decl.,62; of 5th Decl.,64; concord in,286; ne t.Pl.with feminines,ib.3. GENITIVE defined,23,2;of 1st Decl.in as,ai, m,29.RR..NN.; of 2d Decl.in i (from stems in io),in m,in ei,33,RR., NN.; of 3d Decl.in s,es,37,1;in m, i m,38,2,54,67.R.3; of 4th Decl.in os, is,i, m,61.N.1; of 5th Decl.in es, ei,e,63.N.1;of Greek s bsts.in on, eon,65,R.1; oes,66.N.1; of adjs.,73;in i,ai,aes,es, m,75.NN.; of pron.adjs. in i s,76,1: of adjs.of three endings in m,i m,79.R.2,82,83.N.2; of Comp.of part.,89.R.3;of Cardinals,95.R.2; of Distrib tives,97,R.1. not s bj.of pass.,217.R.1;with mille, 293 and N.; with Comp.for Abl.,296.N.2; mei,etc.,as objective,304,2; nostr m as Part.,ib.3; poss.pron.for Gen.,304,2,N. 2: in app.to poss.pron.,321,R.2; Part. Gen.for Part.App.,323,R.; with nemen est,349.R.6; general view,360; translated by abstract s bst.,ib.R.2; Adnominal, Appositive,361; Epexegetical,361; Possessive,362; flagiti m hominis,361, N.1; Family,362,N.1; Chorographic,ib. N.2; S bjective and Objective,363; two with one s bst.,ib.R.2;1st and 3d persons as possessive,364; of Q ality,365; as Pred.,366;with facere,ib.R.1; a ctoris,ib.; generis,368,R.; with prepositional s bst.,373; with adjs., 374 and NN.; with participles and verbals,375; with vbs.of Memory,376; with vbs.of Emotion,377; with J dicial vbs.,378; with vbs.of Eating and B ying,379,380;with interest and rfert, 381; with vbs.of F lness,383,1; with vbs.of Separation,ib.2; in Exclamations,ib.3; pred.with Inf.,422.N.5; Ger.,428;with esse,ca sa,etc.,ib.R. [518 GENERAL INDEX.]

2; Ger.with Pl.s bst.,ib.R.1;Ger. with vb.,ib.N.4; position of,676 and NN.1,2. gen s-decl.of,48; id gen s,336,N.2; with Epexegetical Gen..361,2. gerens with Gen.,375.N.2. GERUND and GERUNDIVE 112,5;formation of,115,3;early forms,130,8;Agent of,in Dat.,215,2; with ease to form periphrasis,251; force of Ger ndive, ib.N.1; syntax of,425-433; and Inf., 425; and vb.,426; Ger ndive for Ger nd,427; impersonal Ger ndive, ib.N.2; from intrans.vbs.,ib.N.4; Gen. of,428; Inf.instead,ib.N.2; depending on vb.,ib.N.4; Dat.instead,ib.N.5; Dat.of,429; Acc.of,430;Abl.of,431; paralleled by part.,ib.N.3; Acc.of, with preps.,432;with ad after vbs.of Hindering,ib.R.1;Abl.of,with preps., 433. gestire with Inf.,423.2.N.2,533,R.1 . gignere(genit s),with Abl.of origin, 395.N.1. giving vbs.of,with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and Abl.,348;with Inf.,423.N.1.6.; with Acc.Ger.,430. gloriari with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2. glorios m with est and inf.,422,N.3. Glyconic verse 795. gracilis Comp.of,87,3. gratia with Gen.,373; with poss.pron., ib.R.2; with Gen.Ger.,428.R.2; gratiis,as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1. gratificari-with Dat.,346.R.2. grat lari with Dat.,346.R.2. gravari with Inf.,423,2,N.2. Greek s bstantives decl.of,65; Greek Acc.,338. growth vbs.of,in Abl.Abe.,410.N.1. g tt ral vowels,2,1;consonants,6,1; s ffixes with,185. habere with,two Noms.in pass.,206; withPf.part,to denote Maintenance of the Res lt,238,241,N.2,244.N.2;first Impv.wanting,267.R.; with two Accs., 340.R.1; with pro,loco,n mero,and a second Acc.,ib.; with Final-Dat.,356, E.2; with Gen.of Price,379; pensi habere,ib.1.N.2; with in and Acc., 385,N.3; with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1; habeo dicend m,ib N.2; be able,with Inf., 423.2.N.2. habit vbs.of,with Inf.,423 and N.2. haerere with Dat.,346,N.6. hanging vbs.of,with ex,ab,de,385.R.2. happening -seq ence after vbs.of,513, R.2; vbs.of,with q od cla se,525,1; t instead,ib.N.5; vbs.of,with con-

sec tive cla se,553,3. hardening in a verse,723. ha d 441 and 443,with NN.; scio an, 457,2. (h)avere 175,4. hell ari with Abl.,407,N.2,e. hendiadys 698. heteroclites 68heterogeneo s s bstantives 67. heterologa 69,c. hiat s -defined,720;in Iam.Oct.,763, N.; in Anap.Oct.,778.N.1;in Dact. Hex.,784.NN.6.7;in Sapphic,726.N. hic 104,landNN.; syntax of,305; con. tempt o s character of,306.N.; and ille,307,RR.1,2; strengthened by q idem,ib.R.4;two forms of,refer to different s bsts.,ib.N.3;hic illic, hinc hinc,hinc inde,hinc illinc, illinc hinc,inde nine,482,2;hOc with t,557,R.; h ms,in Gen.of Price, 380,1;with Abl.of Time,393.R.4;in O.O.,660,3;bine as coordinating conj nction,603. hiems decl.of,40;in Abl.of Time,393, R.6. hindering-seq ence after vbs.of,643, R.2 and N.2;vbs.of,with ne,648;with q in,554-556;and vbs.of Preventing, 555; and vbs.of Do bt,ib.2. Historical c m 585 and NN. HISTORICAL INFINITIVE parallel with Impt.,254,R.; syntax of,647;conj nctions with,ib,N.2. HISTORICAL PERFECT 224;force of,239; and P re Pf.,235;and Impf.,231,240; for Pl pf.,239.N.; as Potential of Past, 258.N.2. HISTORICAL PRESENT 224 and 229; with d m,229.N..570. historical tenses 225. hodiern s in pred.Attrib.,325.R.6. homo in early Latin,42,N. honor and honos,45,N. hope constr.of,vbs.of,423,N.5; seq ence after,vbs.of,615.R.3; vbs.of,withAcc. and Inf.,527.R.4. HORACE Lyric Metres of,826. [GENERAL INDEX.519] horrere with Inf.,423.2.N.2. horrescere with inf.,423.2.N.2. hortari with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with t, 646.N.1;hortat s,as Pr.,282.N.; nortat ,as Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1. h milis Comp.of,87,3. h m s in Abl.of Separation,390,2,N.4; h mi,as Loc.,411,R.2. hypallage 693.

hyperbaton 696. hypotaxis 472. I and J.,1.R.2;so nd of,3;weakening of,8,1; effect of,on preceding vowel, 12.R.2;I-class of vb.stems,133,vi.; length of final,707,4. iam with Pr.indie.,230; iam di ,iam pridem,ib.; with Impf.Indic.,234; iam iam,482,1,and N.1;iam vero, 487.N.3;iam d cl m,with Impv.,269. lambeleg s verse 820. Iambic law,716,717;foot,734;rhythm, 736; rhythms,767-767, ict s conflict of,with Accent,749. IDEAL CONDITION from present point of view,596,1; from past point of view,ib. 2; = Unreal,ib.R.1; Bhift to Unreal, ib.R.2; after non poss m,ib.R.3; in O.O.,ib.R.5,658. idem decl.of,103,2,and NN.; syntax of, 310;with q e,et,atq e,ib.R.1 ;the same as,with q i, t,atq e,c m, or Dat.,310.R.3,359.N.6,642.R.1;not sed with is,310.R.3;in pred.attrib., 325.R.2. idone s constrs.with,552.R.2;with q i and S bjv.,631,1. iec r-decl.of,44,5,68,12. igi n s with Gen.,374.N.1. igit r position of,484.R.; sage of,501; with ergo,502.N.3; correl.of si,590.N.1. ignorance adjs.of,in pred.app.,325, 6;with Gen.,374. Ignorare with Inf.,627.R.1. ignoscere with Dat.,346.R.2. ILLATIVE SENTENCES 499,500. ille -decl.of,104,3,and NN.; forms from olio,ib.N.1;Syntax of,307;and hic, ib.BE.1,2;et ille,ib.R.2;strengthened by q idem,ib.n.4;repeats a s bst.,ib.N.2: two forms with different antecedents,ib.N.3;refers to obliq e case of is,ib.N.4;with Abl.of Time, 393.R.4;illinc hinc,bine illinc, hic-illic,482,2; ill d with t,657.R.; in O.O,660,2. ill dere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. ill stris with Abl.of Respect,397.N.2. imbecill s and imbecillis,84,1. imber decl.of,44,2,45.R.1. imberbis-and imberb s,84,2. immane with q ant m and indie., 467.N. immens m with q ant m and indie., 467.N. Immo se of,471,c; scansion of,717,N.1. immolare with Abl.of Means,401.N.4. imm nis with Abl.of Sep.,390.3.N.1. impedimento with esse and ne,548, N.1.

impedire with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with ne, 548.N.1;with q omin s,649.N.1. impellere with t,553,2; imp ls s, imp ls ,of Ca se,408,NN.1 and 2. impendio very,439,N.3. impendere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. impense very,439.N.3. imperare with Dat.,346.R.2;with Inf., 423,2,N.2,532,N.1; with t,546.N.1. IMPERATIVE 112,4;early forms,130,5; S bjv.for,263;answers deliberative q estion,265.N.; sage,266-275;First and Second,267;strengthening words, 269; negative of,270; prono ns with, 267.N.; concord with,211.N.2;periphrases of,271; representatives of,272: of Past,272,3;tenses of,278;for Protasis,593,4;in S bjv.with O.O.,652 and R.1. IMPERFECT 112,3 : early forms,130,2; force of,223,231; and Hist.Pf.,232; of Endeavor,Disappointment,and Resistance to Press re,233;a tense of Evol tion,ib.N.1;overlapping,ib.N.2 : 562; of Awakening,ib.N.3; with iam,etc., 234; of opposition to Present,254,R.2; in Apodosis of Action beg n,ib.R.3, 597.R.2;as Potential of Past,858;in Wish,260; with vellem,ib.R.; S bjv. as Concessive,264;S bjv.as Impv.oi' Past,272,3;tense relations of S bjv., 277; in Seq ence,510.R.; in Coincidence, 613,N.3;S bjv.as Principal Tense,517, R.2. impersonal verbs 208,1 and 2;divine Agt.expressed,ib.i,N.; vbs.of Saying, tic.,208,2,N.2,628; in Ger.constr.,427. N.4;with t,553,4. [520 GENERAL INDEX.] impertire with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc. and Abl.,348.R.1;laborem,with Dat. Ger.,429,1. impetrare with t,553,1. implere with Gen.,383.1. implorare with t only,546.N.3. imponere with in and Acc.,385.N.2. impos with Gen.,374.N.3. iinprimere with in and Abl.,385,R.1. impr dens in pred.attrib.,325,R.6. imp ls as Abl.of Ca se,408,N.1. in-in composition,9,4; vbs.cpd.with take Acc.or Dat.,331,347; with Co ntries and Towns,337,R.1;with Acc.for Dat., 345,r..2;with app.to Towns,386,R.1; with books,387; thro gho t,388,it.; with recipere,389;with Abl.of Time,394, R.and R.2; with Abl.of Ca se,408.N.3; position of,413.R.1;as prep.,418,1;

with Acc.Ger.,432,and N.1;with Abl. Ger.,433 and N.1;with part.,437.N.2; in eo q od,525,2,N.2. inanis with Gen.,374.N.1. incedere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. incendi with ira and inf.,533.R.1;incens s ,of Moving Ca se,408.N.2. incert m with an and S bjv.,457,2. inchoative verbs 133,v.,191,2. incidere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. inddere with in and Abl.,385.R.1. incipere with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with Ordinal,294,N. incitat s of Moving Ca se,408.x.2. inclination s ffixes for,182,2. inclination adjs.of,in pred.attr.,325,R. 6;vbs.of,with Inf.,423 and N.2. incl dere with in and Abl.,385,R.1. incon nodare with Dat.,346.N.1. incorporation of antecedent,616;q a pr dentia es,616,1,N.2; of correlative, 619. incredibile with Inf.,422.N.3; with q ant m and Indic.,467.N. increpare charge,with Gen.,378,R..1. increpitare charge,with Gen.,378.R..1. inc bare with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. inc mbere with Dat.,etc.,347,R.2. [indago] defective,70,D. inde as coordinating conj.,603;in contrast with bine,482,2. indecor s and indecoris,84,1. indefinite prono ns 107;syntax of,313319;q idam,313;aliq is,314;q is, 315;q ispiam,316;q isq am and ll s,317;q isq e,318 : alter and ali s,319;rel.with Indic.,254,R.4, 625. INDICATIVE 112,4;early forms of,130,1-4; meaning of,254; in Apodosis,254.R.3; with i def.rel.,ib.R.4;Pr.for Deliberative S bjv.,ib.N.2; tense relations of,276;neg.of,257;in q estions,463, 464; after nescio q is,etc.,467.R-1; in Relative Sentences,ib.R.2;in Temporal Sentences,560,1;to express Design,630.N.2. indigere with Gen.,383,1,405.N.2. indignari with Inf.,533.R.1;with si, 542.N.1. indign s with Gen.,374.N.10;with q i, t,or Inf.,552.R.2;with q i and S bjv.,631,1 and R.1. indig s with Abl.or Gen.,405.N.3. ind ere with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and Abl.,348.R.1;ind i,with Acc.of Respect,338,N.2. ind lgere with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.2. inermis and inerm s,84,2. inesse with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.

Inferior 87,2; with Dat.,296.N.3. INFINITIVE 112,5; formation of,115,3; early forms,130,6;aor.in -xe,etc., 131,4,6,4;F t.in assere,ib.;act.for pass.,213,R.,c.; sage of,279; as s bst., 280; after debeo,ib.2.b.N.3; after dec it,oport it,ib.2,b,R.1 and 2; as representative of Indic.,281; after memini,etc.,ib.2,N.; syntax of,419424; with Acc.as s bj.,420; as s bst., 421;traces of Locative nat re,ib.N.1; as s bj.,422; as obj.,423; t instead, ib.N.4; as pred.with esse,425; with preps.,ib.N.; F t.pass.,435,N.4; seq ence after,518;Acc.and Inf.after vbs.of Saying and Thinking,527;part, instead,ib.N.1;tenses after these vbs., 529-531; after posse,velle,ib.N.3; after sperare,ib.N.4; with vbs.of Will and Desire,532;with vbs.of Emotion,533; t instead,532,NN.3,4;in Exclamations,534;and q od,ift.R.1; Acc.and Inf.as s bj.,535; Acc.and Inf.after vbs.of Emotion,542; with vbs.of Will and Desire,646.N.3;with vbs.of Fear,550.N.5;with dign s,etc., 552,R.2;Acc.and Inf.in Relative Sentences,635;after poti s,etc.,644.R.3, 646;in O.O.,650.See Hist.Inf. [GENERAL INDEX.521] Infinit m with est instead of sit,254, R.1;with q ant m and Indic.,467.N. infitias-vo.A.; ire,333,2,R. inflection 17. infra with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1;as adv.,415;as prep.,416,12. infrgn s and infrgnis,84,1. ingratiis as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1. ingenii as Loc.,with adjs.,374.N.7. ingredi with inf.,423.2.N.2. inhaerere with Dat.,etc.,347,11.2. inhiare with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2. inicere man m with Acc.,342. ini ria as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1. innat s with Dat.,347.R.2. Inner Object Acc.of,328,330,332; Abl. instead,333.2.N.4;after vbs.of Taste and Smell,ib.2.N.5. inops with Gen.,374,N.1; with Abl., 405.N.3. inq am 175,2;inq it,impersonal,208, 2.N.2; inciting 6.R.,648.R.2; lacking forms s pplied by dicere,ib.R.3. inq iring vbs.of,with two Accs.,339, and R.1.NN.1 and 2. Inscribere with in and Abl.,385.R.1. insc lpere with in and Abl.,385,R.1. inservire with Dat.,347.R.2.

fnsignis with Abl.of Respect,397.N.2; Insigniter as adv.of Degree,439.N.2. Insidiari with Dat.,346,R.2. Insin ate with Dat.,347.R.2. Insistere with Dat.,347.R.2. Instar 70.R.; with Gen.,373. Instare with Dat.,347.R.2; with Inf., 423,2,N.2. Instr ere with de,339.N.3. instr ment s ffixes for,181,6;in Abl., 214,401; with ab,214,R.2;Abl.of contrasted with Abl.of Attendance,392.R.2. INSTRUMENTAL Case,23,N. ins et s with Gen.,374.N.4. integr m with Inf.,422,N.3. intellegere with inf.,527,R.1; intellect as S p.,436.N. intendere with Inf.,423,2,N.2; intent s,with Abl.,etc.,359,N.5. intensive verbs formation of,191,1. inter with reflexive to express reciprocal action,221;vbs.cpd.with,take Acc.or Dat.,331,347;to designate Time, 394.N.2; position of,413.R.1;as prep., 416,13; with Acc.Ger.,432 and N.1; with part.,437,N.2. intercalaris and intercalari s,84,2. intercedere with Dat.,347,R.2; with ne,548.N.1; with q in,555,1. intercl dere with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and Abl.,348.R.1; with Abl.,390,2, N.3;with ne,548.N.1; with q in,555,1. interc rrere with Dat.,347.R.2. interdicere with Abl.,390.2.N.3;with ne,548.N.1; with q in,555,1. interd m coordinates with alias,482, l.N.1. interesse with Dat.,347.R.2;interest, with Gen.and Abl.,381; with Nom., ib.N.3;constr.of Object of Concern. 382.1 and 2;constr.of Thing Involved, ib.3;with t,553,4. Interest Dat.of Personal,350. interior 87,2 and 8. interjection 16.R.2; no syntax,201.R.1. intermittere with inf.,423,2,N.2. internecio defective,70,R. interpellate with ne,548.N.1. interponere with ne,548.N.1. interrogare with two ACCS.,or de,339, R.1 and N.1; with Indic.,467.N. interrogative prono ns 106;disting ished from rel.,467.R.2; with part.. 469; in Final Sentence,470; do bling of,ib.R. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES 450 -470; simple and cpd.,452;particles in,454457; moods in,462-467; Indic.,463,464; S bjv.,465,466;after vb.of Wonder, 542.N.1; after vb.of Fear,650,N.4; for

Protasis,593,4; in 5.O.,651 and RR. intervenire with Dat.,347.R.2. intra to designate Time,394.N.2; position of,413.R.1; as adv.,415; as prep., 416,14. intransitive verbs sed impersonally, 208.2; sed transitively,213.R.b;constr ed as pass.,214,R.1;with ne t. s bj.in pass.,217; with personal Ger., 217.R.2; with Pf.part.pass, sed actively,220,N.1; Ger nd of, sed impersonally,251,2. in sitat m with t,553,4. invaderewith Dat.,347.R.2. inveniriwith Nom.and Inf.,6E8.N.1; invent in S p.,436.N. inversedonec,571.N.C;c m,631;attraction of rel.,617,N.2. invicemto indicate reciprocality,221. R.2. [522 GENERAL INDEX.] inviderewith personal pass.,217.N.1; with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.2; with Inf., 533.R..1. invid sconstr.of,359.N.5. invit sin pred.app.,325.R.6;invito est,353.N.2. ioc loas Abl.of Manner,399.N.1. loc sheterogeneo s,67,2. ionicfoot,734;rhythm,736; rhythms, 815-819;s bstit tions for,815. ipse decl.of,103,3 and N.; ips s,ibi.N.2; syntax of,311; et ipse,ib.1.R.2; emphasises reflexive,ib.2; sed indeclinably,16.2,R.; in O.O.,660,5. iraof Moving Ca se,408.N-2; incendor ira with Inf.,633.R.1. irasciwith Dat.,346.R.2. ire-169,2; omission of,209.N.5; with Dat.,358.N.2; with S p.,435.N.1; with Infitias,etc.,333,2,R. is-decl.of,103,1 and N.; strengthened by q idam,307,R.4;taken p by ille,ib. N.4; two forms with different antecedent,ib.N.3; syntax of,308; = talis, ib.R.1;with et,atq e,q e,ib.R.2;for reflexive,309.N.1; id temporis,aetatis,336.N.2; eo as coordinating conj., 503; ideo,idcirco,ib.; with q i and S bjv.,631,1; with t,R.1,557.R.; in O.O.,660,2. islands in Local Acc.,337;with in,ib. R.1 and N.3; prep,omitted with Large islands,id.N.1. iste decl.of,104,11.and NN.; syntax of, 306;contempt o s character of,ib.N.; strengthened by q idem,307.R.4; in O.O.,660,3.

ita with t,482,4; correlative of si, _ 590.N.1;yes,471,a,1. Italic s N mer s756. itaq e sage of,500;position of,ib.R.; with ergo,502.N.3. iter decl.of,44,5. iterative action 566,567;S bjv.in,ib. N.; with c m,584;in Relative Sentences,623. Ithyphallic verse,774. i bere with two Accs.,341,N.2;with Acc.and Dat.,346.N.3; constr.after, 423,N.6;with Acc.and Inf.,528 and N.1; with Inf.,423.2.N.2,632,NN.1,2; with S bjv.,546,8.2;i ssii,defective,68,5; i ss as Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1. i dicare with inf.,423,2,N.2. [i ger] decl.of,68,7. i nct s with Dat.,etc.,359.N.3. i s-with Inf.,422.N.2,428.N.2;with respondere,333,2,R.; in phrases with t,546.N.2; i re,399.N.1; i re in Abl. of Respect,397. i sto as Abl.of Respect,398.N.1. i vare with Acc.,346.N.3. i venis Comp.of,87,9i xta as adv.,415;as prep.,416,15. J dgment vbs.of,with Abl.of Standard, 402. K so nds of,1,R.1;name of,ib.N. knowledge adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,325, R.6;adjs.of,with Gen.,374. Labials 6,1;s ffixes with,187. laborem with impertireand Dat.Ger., 429,1. laborare with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with t, 546,^.1. lac decl.of,53,8; 68,12. laedere with ACC.,346.N.3. laetari with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1. lamentari with Acc.and Inf.,533.R.1. largiri with t,553,2. later defective,70,D. latit dine with Acc.of Extent,335,R..1. lat s with Acc.of Extent,335.R.1. la r s heteroclite,68,5. leaving vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430. lect s heteroclite,68,5. length by nat re,12,1,and R.; by position,ib.2;representation of long vowels,ib.N. lengthening compensatory,9,6,a. letters tenses in,252; advs.in,ib.; dated from a place,391,R.3. letting vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430levare with Abl.,390,2,N.2. lex in .phrases with t,546.NN.1 and 2; lege,397 and N.1,399.N.1.

liberalis with Gen.,374.N.1. liberare with Abl.,390,2,N.2. -libet added to reis.,111,3;exact se of lib erit,244.R.3;libens,in pred. attrib.,325.R.6; with Dat.,346.R.2. licere -exact se of F t.Pf.,24i,R.3; with Dat.,346.R.2;with Gen.,379; licet, altho gh,603-607; with q amvis,ib.N. 2; with Indic.,ib.N.3. likeness s ffixes for,182,4. [GENERAL INDEX.523] likeness adjs.of,with Dat.,349;with atq e(ac),643. ling als 6,1,N. linter decl.of,44,2,45,R.1. liq ids 6,2,A;3d Decl.stems in,39-46; s ffixes with,189. litare with Abl.of Means,401.N.4. litotes 644.N.1,700. litterae in phrases with t,646.N.2. living vbs.of,with Abl.,401,N.1. Local Dative 358. locality s ffixes for,181,5,182,9. locare with Gen.,379; within and Abl., 386.R.1;with Acc.Gen.,430. LOCATIVE 23,N.; of 1st Decl.,29,fi.2; of 2d Decl.,33,RR.3,5;3d Decl.,37,6;forms advs.,91,3; syntax of,411; in 3d Decl., ib.R.1;other Locs.,ib.R.2;app.to,in Abl.,ib.R.3;domi,with poss.pron., ib.R.4. loc s-67,2;in loco habere,340.R.1; Abl.witho t in,385,N.1. logacadic rhythms 790-805. LOGICAL CONDITION 595;with S bjv.by Attraction,ib.R,2; with Ideal 2d Person, ib.a.3; sive sive,ib.s.4; si q idem, ib.R.5;si modo,vero,tamen,6.a.6; tenses in,ib.N.2;in O.O.,657,595, R.1. longinq s Comp.of,87,9. longit dine with Acc.of Extent,335, R.1. long m with est for S bjv.,254.R.1; longe strengthens Comp.or S perlalative,301,303;with Acc.,335.R.1. loq i with Acc.and Inf.,527,R.2;with Indic.q estion,467.N. l bldo in phrases with Inf.,422.N.2. l dos facere with ACC.,342. l gere with Inf.,533,R.1. l x 70,D;in Abl.of Time,393,R.5. M final omitted,27.N. macte 85,c,325.R.1. maerere with Inf.,533.R.1. magnific s Comp.of,87,4. magnit dine with Acc.of Extent,335, R.1.

magn s comparison of,90;constr. with maior,296.R.5;magis,in comparison of Q alities,299;magni,as Gen.of Price,380,1;mai s,with Inf., 422.N.3;maximi,as Gen.of Price,380, 1;non magis q am,644,N.1. making vbs.of,with two Noms.,206; with two Accs.,340. maledicere with Dat.,346.R.2. maledic s Comp.of,87,4. malle conj.of,174 and N.3; mal eram, co ld have preferred,254.N.1;malim, mallem,as Potential,257,2,258.N.1; in Unreal Wish,261.R.; with Abl.,296, N.1;with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1; with Inf.or t,423.2.N.2,638 and N.3, 546,N.1. mal s comparison of,90; male as neg., 439.N.2. manare with Abl.of Means,401.N.5. mandate with t,546.N.1. manere as cop lative vb.,206.N.1;with Abl.,401.N.6. mani as Loc.,411,N.1. manifest s with Gen.,374.N.2;with Inf.,421,N.1,c. Manner Abl.of,399 and NN. man s inicere with ACC.,342. mare in Abl.witho t in,385.N.1. margarita heteroclite,68,1. materia heteroclite,68,2. Material Abl.of,396; indicated by adj., ib.; s ffixes for,182,4. mat rate with Inf.,423.2.N.2. mat r s Comp.of,87,1,R.2. mat tin s in pred.Attr.,325,R.6. Means Abl.of,401,and RR..NN.; s ffixes for,181,6. meas re vbs.of,take Abl.,402. Meas re Abl.of,402; of Difference,403; Abl.of,with vbs.involving Difference, ib.N.1; with ante and post,ib.N.4. mederi with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.4. medioxim s 87,9,N. meditari with inf.,423.2.N.2. meditative verbs formation,191,5. medi m s ffixes for,182,6. medi s in pred.attrib.,325.R.6; sed partitively,291.R.2;Abl. sed witho t in,388. memini 175,5,6; First Impv.wanting, 267,R.; with Pr.Inf.,281.2.N.; with Acc., 376.R.2;with Inf.,423.2.N.2,627.R.2; with c m and Indic.,580,R.2. memoratii as Abl.S p.,436,N. memoria teneo with Pr.inf.,281,2,N. mend m heteroclite,68,3. mans in phrases with t,557,R.; in mentem venire,with Gen.,376,R.3; in mentem venire,with inf.,422.N.5.

[524 GENERAL INDEX.] merit s Comp.of,87,9;merito as Abl. of Manner,399,N.1. -met added to personal pron.,102.N.2; to ipse,103.3.N.5. metaplasts 68. metathesis of consonants,9,8. metre 730; nit of,731. met ere with Dat.,346,N.2;with t, ne,or Inf.,550 and N.1;with Inf.,423, 2.N.2. met s with Inf.,550.N.5. me s 73.R.,76;Voc.of,100.R.1: early forms of,ifc.N.2; syni esis in,ib.x.3,727, N.; mea mihi,309,N.2; mei with Gen. Ger.,428,R.1; with t,657.R. middle voice 218,R.,218; with Acc.of Respect,338.N.2. militia in Abl.of Time,393,R.5; inLoc., 411.R.2. mille a s bst.in Pl.,95.R.3;inscriptio a) forma of,te.R.4;milia,with masc.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.6; se of,in SG. and PL,293;as e bst.with Part.Gen., 293,N.; milia for distrib tive,295.N. minari,mmitari with Dat.,346,R.2; with Inf.,527,R.2. minor -q am omitted with,296,R.1; with vbs.of Rating and B ying,380,1; minoris,minimi,as Gen.of Price,ib.; min s,no 471,b,1; minime,no ,ib.; sin min s,592;si min s,ib.R.; non min s q am,644.N.1. mirari with Inf.,423,2,N.2,533,R.1; with q od,642;with si,ib.N.1. mir m with fact m and ni,q ant m, q in,209.N.2,467.N.; with q od,642; with si,542.N.1; with ni,ib.N.2;with Inf..422.N.3;with q am and Indic., 467.N.; with t,553,4. miscere -se,with Dat.,346.N.6; with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and Abl.,348,R.1. miserari -with Acc.,377.N.2. miserere with Gen.,377.N.1;miseret, with Gen.,377: misereor,with Gen., ib.; miseresco,with Gen.,ib.N.1. mittere -mitte,with inf.for impv., 271,2,N.2; with inf.,422.N.3; with q od, 525,1,N.1;followed by Impf.Indic.to give Design,630.N.2;miss ,of Moving Ca se,408.N.1. mixed class of Verbs 133,vii. moderari with Dat.,346,R.2 and N.2. modo-strengthens Impv.,269;modo mode,482,1;contrasted with t m, vicissim,482,1,N.2; non modo sed etiam,482,5 : non modo non,sed ne q idem,ib R.1 : provided only,

573;modo ne,ib.N.2. moliri with Inf.,423.2.N.2. monere with Gen.or Acc.,376 and R.1: with Inf.,423,2,N.2;with t,546.N.1. mood 112,4,253; Indic.,254: S bjv.. 255-265; Impv.,266-275;Inf.,279-281; attraction of ,508,4;in Temporal Cla ses, 560 : in Relative Sentences,624-635; in Comparative Sentences,639;in O.O., 650-652. morari with ne,548.N.1. morigerari with Dat.,346,8.2. mos(moris) with Inf.,422.NN.2 and 5; with t,557.R.; morib s,399.N.1. motion vb.of,with Inf.,421,N.1,a; vb.of, with S p.,435;vb.of,with F t.part., 438.N-; vb.of,with q od,525,1,N.G; end of,conceived as Rest,412,R.1. movere syncope in Pf.,131,3; with Abl.of Separation,390,N.1;with t, 553,2: mot s,of Moving Ca se,408.N.2. M lciber heteroelite,68,4. m ltare with Abl.,378.R.3. m ltit do s bsts.of,with PL,211,R.1, Ex.o. m ltit do with PL vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a. m lt m for Abl.of Meas re,403,N.2; very,439,N.3;m lto with Comp.,301; with S perl.,303. m n s with Inf.,422.N.2;with t,546, N.2. m tare with Abl.,404.N.1. m tes 6,2,R. m t o of reciprocal action,221.R.2. myrt s heteroelite,68,5. Nam- sage of,498 and NN.; position of, ib.,N.1;asseverative,ib.N.2;yes for, 471.R. naming vbs.of,with two Accs.,340. namq e 498; position of,ib.N.1. narrare with inf.,527,8.2. nasals 6,2.A.: nasal class of vbs.,133,iv. nasci with two Noms.,206;nat s, constr.of,296.R.5; with Acc.,336.R.4: with Abl.of Origin,395.NN.1.3;natti in Abl.S p.,436.N. nat ra in phrases with t,657.R. na c m defective,70,R.; na ci,as Gen.of Price,380,1ne-neg.of Opt.S bjv.,260; of Impv., [GENERAL INDEX.525] 270; contin ed by sq e,260; by neve,270,444,2;with Pf.S bjv.,270, R.2; syntax of,441,444; = non,444,1, N.2; ne q idem,ib.1,N.2,445,448,N.2, 482,5 and R.1;in Final Sentences,543, 4; t ne,545.R.1; q o ne,ib.; paren-

thetical,ib.R.3;after vbs.of Hindering,548;after vbs.of Fear,550;ne non,ib.N.1;with d m,573;as Concessive.608. ne-added to hic,104,1.N.3;to iste,ib. 2,N.3; to ille,103,3,N.4; as interrogative,454; asseverative,ib.N.2; added to interrogatives,ib.N.3;= nonne,ib. N.5; added to n m,456,N.; strengthens an,457,1,N.2;to introd ce do ble q estions,458; necne or annon,459: to introd ce second member of an indirect q estion,460,2. nearness adjs.of,with Dat.,359. nec = non,442.N.3;see neq e. necessari m with t,553,4. necesse-85,C.; with est instead of S bjv., 254.R.1; with Inf.,538; with t omitted,638.R.2,553,4,R.1;with pred.attracted,538.R.3; with t,563,4; with habeo and Inf.,423.2.N.2, necessity adjs.of,with Inf.,421,N.1,c; expressed by Indic.,254.R.1,255,R. ned m 482,5,R.2. nefas 70,R.; with Inf.,428.N.2; with Abl.S p.,436.N.2; with Inf.,422.N.2. negare se of,444,1,N.2; contin ed by neq e-neq e,445,N.; = dico non, 447; with Inf.,527,R.2. negative-of Potential,257; of Opt.,260; of Impv.,270; non with Opt.,260; non with Impv.,270.R.1;noli with Inf.,270.R.2;advs.,441-449;non,442; ha d,443; nec = non,442.N.3; ne, 444;s bdivision of,445;combinations, 446;resol tion of,ib.N.2;positive s pplied from,447.R.; position of,448, 449;two,449;nec non for et,ib.R.3; in Cop lative Sentences,480;in Final and Consec tive Sentences,543,4. negoti m in phrases with t,546.N-2; with Inf.,422.N.5. nemo decl.of,70,D.; and ntill s,108; with Pl.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a; with Impv. S bjv.,270,N.; and q isq am,317,2; as adj.,ib.; et neino,ib.2.N.1; strengthened by n s;-neq is,446, R.3. neq am 85,C.; comparison of,90. neq e-with Opt.S bjv.for ne,260; adds Impv.,270.N.; neq e neq e with PL, 285,N.1; s bdivides a general neg.,or nego,445 and N.1;nec non,449.R 3; for et non,480 and R.1; for nec tamen, ib.R.3;for ne-q idem,ib.N.1;compared with nec,ib.N.2;for non,ib.N. 4; for ngve,543.N.3. neq ire conj.of,170,6;neq inont, 133,iv.N.2: with Inf.,423.2.N.2. Nerio-decl of,41,4.

nescio-an,457,2;q is,467.R.1;q omodo,ib.N.; with Inf.,423,2,N.2,527,R.1. ne ,neve-444,2;adds Final Cla se, 543,4; neq e instead,ib.N.3. ne ter decl.of,76,108;ne tiq am, 442.N.2. ne ter adj.with masc.s bj.,211.R.4; demonstrative when s bst.is expected, ib.N.3; SG.s ms p PL,ib.; PL pred. to two ferns.,286,3;in app.to persons, 321,N.2;pron.and adj.in Cognate Acc., 333,1,341.N.2;proii.and adj.with Part. Gen.,369;pron.and adj.not attracted to Ger.,427,N.3, neve --see ne . ni with mir m,209.N.2;range of,591, N.2. nihil for n ll s,108;with Impv. S bjv.,270.N.; neg.of q isq am,317, 2; no,471,6,1;nihili as Gen.of Price, 380,1; for non,442.N.2. nihilomin s 490,R. nimis with q am and Indic.,467.N. nimi m with q ant m,209.N.2,467.N.; very,439.N.3; nimio as Abl.of Standard,403,N.3. nisi with q od,525,2,N.2,591,6,R.3; with t,557,N.2,591,5,R.4; and si non,591,6; b t,except,ib.R.2;si,ib.; nisi forte, vero,ib.R.4;nisi tamen,ib.N.1;in asseverations,591,6,2;with Inf.,635, N.2; with participle,667.N. nitl-with Abl.,401.N.6;with Inf.,423,2, N.2; with t,546.N.1. nix-decl.of,52,7. no how translated,470,6 and c. nocere with Dat.,346. nolle conj.of,174; exact se of nol erit,244,R.3; nolim,nollem,as Potential,257,2,258; not in Unreal Wish,261, R-; noli,with Inf.for Impv.,270,N.2, 271,2;nolim,with S bjv.for Impv., [526 GENERAL INDEX.] 271.2.N.2 : with Pf.Inf.pass.,280,2,c.N.; nolens,in pred.app.,325.R.6 : with Inf.,423,2,N.2 : with t,546.N.1;with Inf.or t,538 and N.3. nomen with esse and Cat.,349,R.5; with Appositional Gen.,361,1;with Gen.of Charge,378.R.2. nominari with two Noms.,206. NOMINATIVE defined,23,1; of 1st Decl., 29 and N.1; of 2d Decl.,31,33,N.4; of 3d Decl.,36,1 and 2,38,1,57.R.4; of Greek s bstantives,68.N.4; of adjs.,75.N.4,79, N.1; of Participles,89.R.2; for Voc.,201, R.2;syntax of,203; two Noms.,206; with Inf.after cop lative vb.,ib.R.3;

for Voc.in app.,321.N.1;with 5 and gn,or ecce,343.1,N.1;with Inf.by attraction,527,N.2; after pass.vbs.of Saying and Thinking,628;nominativ s pendens,627.N.2. non neg.of Potential,257; neg.of Wish, 260; with Impv.,270.R.1; syntax of,441, 442;with ll s for n ll s,446.N.2; non poss m non,449.R.1;nec non = et,ib.R-3; no,471,6,1;non modo sed etiam,482,5 and N.1;non modo sed ne q idem,ib.R.1;for ne,573.N.2. nonne syntax of,455;with indirect q estion,460,1,N.2;with rhetorical q estion,464,R. nonn ll s 108. noscere syncope in Pf.,131,3; novi, nostri with Gen.Ger.,428.R.1. no n defined,16;inflection of,17;and prono n,16.N.2. no rishing vbs.of,with Abl.,401,N.1. novas Comp.of,87,9; with Inf.,422,N. 3;with t,553,4. noX decl.of,53,8;with Abl.of Time, 393.R.5. n bere with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.4. n d s with Gen.,374.N.8. n ll s -decl.of,76,90; and nemo,108; with Impv.S bjv.,270,N.; and ll s, 317,2; for non,ib.N.2. n m 456: with ne and nam,ib N.; in indirect q estions,460,1 ,o; in rhetorical q estions,464,R. n mber SG.and PL,22; D al,ib.R.and 112,1; concord of,285 and NN.; violation of Concord in app.,321.R.1;s bsts.of, with Gen.,368;definite n mbers in Abl.of Time,393.R.2. n merals cardinals,94: ordinals,95 and 294: cpd.,96: omission of centena milia,ib.6;insertion of et,ib.5; fractions,ib.7; signs,96,ii.; distrib tives, 97 and 295; m ltiplicatives,97;proportionals,97; advs.,98;d o,ambo, terq e,292; mille,293: sing li,295: distrib tives for cardinals,ib.N.; aliq is with,314.R.2;q isq e with,318, 2;with Part.Gen.,370. n mero as adv.,399.N.1;(in) n mero habere,340.R.1. n nc strengthens etiam,478.N.1;n nc n nc,482,1 and N.1. n ntiare with Inf.,527.R.2; with Nom, and Inf.,528.N.1. n per m defective,85,1. O-so nd of,3; weakening of,8,1; as interjection,201.R.2,343.N.1; O si in Wishes,261; length of final,707,5. ob in composition,9,4; vbs.cpd.with,

take Acc.or Dat.,331,347;to give the Ca se,408.N.3; as prep.,416,16; with Acc.Ger.,428.R.2,432 a d N.1. Obesse with Dat.,346.R.2,347.R.2; with Inf.,422.N.4. obicere with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1. object direct,becomes s bj.of pass., 216; indirect retained in pass.,217; direct,330; inner,330,332,333; o ter, 338;indirect,344;of Ger.,427,2; after Dat.Ger.,429.N.2;after Acc.S p.,435, N.3; after Abl.S p.,436. OBJECT SENTENCES 523-537;with q od, 524,525;with Acc.and Inf.,526,527; with Nom.and Inf.,528; alter vbs.of Will and Desire,532; after vbs.of Emotion,533;in exclamations,534; as s bj., 535; in part.,536,537; in O.O.,655. Objective Genitive 363; of pers.pron., 364.N.2. obligate with se and Gen.of Charge, 378,R.1. obligation expressed by Indic.,254.R.1, 255.R. oboedire with Dat.,346.R.2. obrepere with Dat.,347.R.2. obsat rare with Gen.,383,1,N.2. obsecro strengthens Impv.,269;witho t Inf.,546.N.3; with t,546.N.1. obseq i with Dat.,346.R.2. obsistere with Dat.,347.R-2;with ne, 548.N.1;with q in,555,1. [GENERAL INDEX.527] obstare with Dat.,347.R.2;with ne, 548.N.1 : with q in,555,1. obstrepere with Dat.,347.R.2. obtemperare with Dat.,346.R.2. obtestor with Inf.,546.N.3. obtingere with Dat.,347.R.2. obtrectare with Dat.,346.R.2 andN.2. obvenire with Dat.,347.R.2. obversari with Dat.,347.R.2. occ rrere with Dat.,347,R.2. occ rsare with Dat.,347.n-2. Ocior 87,7. 5di conj gation of,175,5,c;odio 6886 as pass,of,if).N. office s ffixes for,181,10. officere with Dat.,346.R.2. offici m in phrases with Inf.,422.N.2; with t,546.N.2. Olle-for ille,104.3.N.1. omission of vowels,8,2,701,R.2,a;of consonants,9,6; of s bj.,207; of cop la, 209; of other vbs.,ib.Tf.5; of ease i" Pf.Inf.pass.,280,2,a,R.2 and c;of conj nction,474,N.,481.483.N.,492,N.; of non,482,5,R.1;of vb.of Saying,545.R.3;

of vb.with sin,592,R.; of si,598; of vb. of Protasis,599; of Protasis,600; of Apodosis,601;of vb.after q asi and tamq am,602.N.1;of vb.of comparative cla se,640. omittere with q od,525,1,N.1;with Inf.,423,2,N.2; omitte,with Inf.for Impv.,271,2,N.2. omitting vbs.of,with q od,555,1; vbs. of,with Inf.,423,2. omnino yes,471,a,1. omnis in Abl.,witho t in,388;omnia, as Acc.of Respect,338,2. on s with Inf.,422.N.2. on st s with Gen.,374.N.1;with Abl., 405.N.3. operam in phrases with Dat.Ger.,429, 1 and N.1;with Inf.,422.N.5;with t, 546,NN.1 and 2. Opinio in phrases with Inf.,527,R.2; with t,557,is.; opinione as Abl.of Respect,398,N.1. opit lari with Dat.,346.R.2. oportet Indic.for S bjv.,254,R.1;with Pf.part,pass.,280.2,b,R.2; with Inf.or S bjv.,635,R.2; with t,553,4,R.1. Oppido very,439.N.3; with q ant m, Oppid m has pred.adj.in agreement, 211.R.6; req ires prep.,337.R.1.; with Epexegetical Gen.,336.N.1; in app.tp Town in Abl.,356,R.1,391.R.1;in app. to Loc.,411.R.3. [ops] defective,70.D. optare with Inf.,423,2,N.2;with t,ib. N.4,546,N.1;optato,as Abl.of Manner, 399,N.1. OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 260-265;in Wishes,260;particles with,261;in Asseverations,262;as Impv.,263;as concessive,264; in Deliberative Q estions,265. Optim m with Inf.,422.N.3. op s with Abl.,406;with Gen.,ib.N.3; with Nom.,ib.N.4;with part.,437.N.2; with Inf.,422.N.2;with t,557,R.; With Nom.and Inf.,628.N.2. orare with two Accs.,339 and N.1; with Inf.,546.N.3;with t,ib.N.1. ORATIO OBLIQUA 608,2; partial,ib.3,ibA; seq ence in,516; in Relative Sentences, 625,R.,628,R.,629.R.,648,649;comes in witho t notice,649.N.2; shift to,ib.N.3; moods in,650-652;interrogative in, 651;Impv.in,652;tenses in,653-655; in Ca sal Sentences,655;Conditional Sentences in,656-659; Logical,595,R.1, 657;Ideal,596,R.5,658;Unreal,597.R.4, 659; prono ns in,660;by Attraction, 508,4,662; partial,508,3,663; Representation,654 and N.

Orb s with Abl.,405.N.3. order adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,326.R.6. ordinals 94; early forms,95.N.5; alter lor sec nd s,96,5; in dates,294; for cardinals,ib.and 336,R.1; with q isq e,ib.N.,318,2; position of,676.R.2. ordine as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1. Origin Abl.of,395;preps,with Abl.of, ib.NN.2 and 3;s ffixes of,182,7. oriri -166,169,1;ort s,with Abl.of Origin,395.N.1. ori nd s with Abl.of Origin,395.N.1. os bone,decl.of,48.R.; mo th,defective, 70,D. ostendere with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2. ostrea heteroclite,68,1. overlapping action 662,571,N.1. oxymoron 694. Paene with Indic.in Apod,of Unreal Condition,597.R.3;position of,677.R.1. paenitet with Gen.,377;with ne t. [528 GENERAL INDEX.] s bj.,ib.R.2;with Inf.,422,N.4;with .q od,542. palam as prep.,417,8. palatals vowels,2; consonants,6,1,N. pal mbes heteroclite,68,7. panis heteroclite,68,12. par with est instead of S bjv.,254.R.1; with Gen.or Dat,359.R.1; with Dat. Ger.,429.N.1. parare with Inf.,423.2.N.2; parat s, with Inf.,421,N.1,c. parataxis 472. parcere with Dat.,346.R.2; parce,with Inf.for Impv.,271,2,N.2. parenthetical t and H8 645.R.3. parere with Dat.,346.R.2. pariter pariter,482,3. pars with Pl.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a;in Abl. witho t in,385.N.1; t am partem, 334,R.2. Part Affected in Acc.,338,1. partial obliq ity 508,3,663. particeps with Gen.,374.N.2. participation adjs.of,with Gen.,374. PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES 664-670 to eXpress Time,665; Ca se,666; Condition and Concession,667;relative cla ses. 668;F t re similarly sed,669,670. PARTICIPLE decl.of,80,82; Abl.of,83; Nom,and Acc.Pl.of,ib.N.1;comparison of,88,89;Abl.of Cpmp.,ib.R.1; Nom.Pl.of,ifc.R.2;Gen.Pl.of,ib.R.3; defined,112,5; formation of,115,3; early forms of,130,7; Pf.pass.,135,1.; F t.Act.,ib.II.; Pf.pass,of Deponents as act.,167.N.1; Pf.pass,of intrans.

vbs. sed as act.,220,N.1; Pf.with habeo and teneo,238; F t.periphrastic,247; Pr.periphrastic with esse,ib. N.2; Pf.with f i,250; as adj.,ib.N.2; as pred.,261,R.1; sage of Pr.and Pf., 282; sage of F t.act.,283 : concord with two s bjs.in Abl.Abs.,285.N.3; Pr.with Gen.,375; contrasted with adj., ib.N.1; Comp.of,with Gen.,ib.N.2;of Birth with Abl.,396; Pf.pass,with Op s and s s,406; in Abl.Abs.,409, 410,and NN.; Pf.pass,parallel with Ger.,426.N.2,427.N.1;as s bst.,437; F t.as s bst.,ib.N.1;as adj.,438; F t.as adj.,ib.N.1; parallel with rel. and S bjv.,ib.R.; with interrog.,469; seq ence after,518; after vbs.of Perception,etc.,527,N.1,636; after vbs.of Ca sation,etc..537; eq iv.to c m,686, R.; for Prot.,593,2;for Prot.in Comparative Sentence,602,N.3; Concessive, 609;for rel.,637. particles cop lative,474;adversative, 483;disj nctive,492: ca sal,498;illative,499; position of,679. partitive apposition 322. Partitive Genitive 367-372; with s bsts. of Q antity,etc.,368; with ne t.SG., 369: witli n merals,370; with prono ns, 371;with comparatives and s perlatives,372;preps,instead,ib.R.2;with terq e,371.R.1;extensions of,372, NN.: contrasted with Gen.of Characteristic,369.N.1. parts of speech 16. parv s Comp.of,90;in Gen.of Price, 380,1. passive voice,112,2;vbs.with two Noms.,206; vb.agrees with pred.,211, R.1,Ex.6;defined,214;Pf.with Dat. of Agent,215,1;as reflexive,218;of something end red,219;periphrastic forms of,248-251; with Acc.of Respect, 338.N.2;impersonal,346.R.1. pati with t,553,2;with Inf.,ib.N. patronymics 182,11. pa lo,pa l m with ante and post, 403.N.4.b. pa se in Verse,742. pavere constr.of,550 and N.1. pax decl.of,70.D;in Abl.of Time,393, R.5,394.R.1. pec liaris with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1. pec s heteroclite,68,12. pellere with Abl.of Separation,390, N.1. pendere with Gen.,379. penes position of,413.R.1; se of,as prep.,416,17. pentameter elegiac,785; Pf.Inf.in,280,

2,6,N.2; position of words in,683. pen lt 11. pen s heteroclite,68,11. per vbs.cpd.with take Acc.,331 : with Acc.of Extent,335,336;to express Time Within Which,ib.R.2,393.R.1; here and there in,386.R.3; for Abl.of Manner,399.N.1; with Person Thro gh Whom,401;position of,413.R.1,and N. 2; se as prep.,416,18, perceiving vbs.of,with Object Cla se, 523;with Acc.and Inf.,526,527;with [GENERAL INDEX.529] Nom.,528; with part.,627,N.1,536; Nom.after,536.N.2. percontari with two Accs.,339 and N.1. perdi s defective,85,2. PERFECT defined,112,3;System,114,2 and 3,b;formation of,114,115,121,2; syncopated forms of,131,1-3;early forms of,131,4;Stem,134;part,pass., 135.1.; part,as s bst,167.N.1;pass, with Dat.of Agent,215,1; part, sed as act.,220,N.1;defined,223;Historical, 225;P re and Historical,235;force of, 236;trans,by Eng.Pr.,ib.R.; with Aor.force,ib.; Gnomic,ib.N.; for F t. Pf.,237; part,with habeo and teneo, 238;pass,with f i,250;S bjv.as Potential,257,2 and N.1;in wishes, 260; S bjv.as Impv.,263,2,6,270.R.2; tense relations in S bjv.,277;Inf. as s bj.or obj.,280,2;after dec it, ib.a,R.1;Emotional,ib.; after oport it,ib.R.2; after velle,280, 2,6 and N.1; after posse,ib.; after debeo,ib.N.3;after vbs.of Will and Desire,280,2,c; se of part.,282 and N.; part,as s bj.,437,N.1;Seq ence after,611,RR.3,4;S bjv.in Final Sentences,512.N.1;in Consec tive Sentences,513 and NN.; Inf.,630; Inf.in O.O.,659.N. perficere with t,553,1. pergere with Inf.,423,2,N.2. perhibere as cop lative vb.,206, N.1;with Nom.and Inf.,628 and N.1. period -Responsive and Apodotic,685; forms disting ished by Naegelsbach, 686;Historical and Oratorical,687. periphrasis for Impv.,271;for F t. periphrastic,515.R.2;for F t.,531 and R.1;for Apod,in Unreal Condition, 897,R.5. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION 129;act., 247;pass.,251;with fin,247.R.1; with

forem,ib N.1;Pr.part,with esse,ib. N.2; with f t r m esse t,248;with in eo est,249;with posse,velle,248, R.; Pf.part,with s m and f i,250 and R.1;with forem for essem,ib.N.2; with Ger.,251;F t.act.,283. perire pass,of perdere,169,2,R..1. peritUS with Gen.,374,N.4. permanere with two Noms.,206.N.1. permittere sed personally in pass., 34 217,N.2;with Inf.,423.2.N.2,632.N.1 553,2,N.; with t,553,2. permitting vbs.of,with Consec tive Cla se,553,2. pernox defective,85,2. perper m defective,85,1. perpet s and perpes,84,1;perpet m,as adv.Acc.,336.N.1. perq am with indie.,467.N. perseq ens with Gen.,375.N.2. perseverare with inf.,423.2.N.2. persons in conj gation of vb.,112,1; concord of,287;order of,ib.R. personal endings 114. personal prono ns 304;omitted,ib.1; Gen.of,as objective,ib.2,364,N.2; poss. for,ib.2.N.2; Gen.of,as Partitive,ib.3; for poss.,ib.3.N.1;circ mioc tion for third personal prono n,ib.3,N.2. perspicere with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.1. perstare with Inf.,423,2,N.2. pers adere sed personally in pass.. 217.N.1; with Dat.,346.R.2,and NN.2,4; with Inf.,423,2,N.2,527.R.2,646,R.1; with t,646,N.1. pertaes m est with Gen.,377pess m defective,70,A;with ire,435, N.1. petere with aand Abl.,339.R.1 and N.1; with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1; with Inf.,423, 2,N.2; with t,546.N.1. Phalaecean verse,796. Pherecratean verse,794. phonetic variations in vowels,8; in consonants,9;in consonant stem-characteristic,121.R. piget with Gen.,377; with s bj.,ib.R.2. pili as Gen.of Price,380,1. pin s heteroclite,68,5. pl s Comp.of,87.6.N. place where,in Abl.,385;with vbs.of Placing,ib.R.1;with Towns,386;as Ca se,Means,etc.,389;with Books, etc.,387;with tot s,etc.,388;in Loc., 411: whence,in Abl.,390,391;with Towns,391; of origin,395.N.2;whither, in Acc.,337. piacere with Dat.,346,R.2; se of F t. Pf.,244.R.3.

pleas re vbs.of,with Dat.,346; adjs.of, with Abl.S p.,436.N.2. plebs decl.of,63.N.1,68,8. plenty vbs.of,with Abl.,405;adjs.of. with Gen.or Abl.,ib.N.3. [530 GENERAL INDEX.] plen s with Gen.,374.N.1;with Abl., 405.N.3. pleonasm 692. pleraq e as Acc.of Respect,338,2. pl ere with Abl.of Means,401.N.5. PLUPERFECT 112,3;formation of,114, 115;Aor.forms of,131,4,6,3;defined, 223;force of,241; translated by Impf., ib.R.; sed as Aor.,ib.N.1; periphrastic,with habeo,ib.N.2;S bjv.as Potential of Past,258.N.2;in Wish,260; with vellem,261,R.; S bjv.as Concessive,ib.N.; S bjv.as Impv.of Past, 273,3;tense force in S bjv.,277;in Final Sentences,512,N.1;to express Res lting Condition,563,1;Indic.in Apod,of Unreal Condition,597.R.2. pl ral of abstracts,204.N.5; sed for SG.,ib.NN.6,7;pred.with two s bjs., 285; ne t.pred.to two ferns.,286,3. pl s-q am omitted with,296,R.4;pl ris,with vbs.of Bating and B ying, 380,1;pl rim m,with q ant m,467, N.; pl rimi,as Gen.of Price,380,1. poema heteroclite,68,7. pollere with Inf.,423,2,N.2. pollicerl with inf.,627.R.2,531.N.4. pollis decl.of,41,4. pondo defective,70.A. pone sage of,416,19. ponere with in and Abl.,386,R.1 and N. 2; s ppose,with Inf.,527.R.2. poscere with two Accs.,339 and N.1; with g and Abl.,ib.R.1;with Inf.or t,546, NN.1,3. position adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,325,R. 6; of advs.,440;of neg.,448 and NN.; of rel.,612;of correlative cla se,620; poetical pec liarities in,683. positive degree lacking,87,2,7,8,and 9; with prep,to express disproportion, 298,R.; in comparing q alities,299; with q am after Comp.,299.N.2;with Part. Gen.,372.N.2; s pplied from neg.,447, R. posse conj.of,119; potisfor posse,209, N.2; se of F t.and F t.Pf.of,242,R.2, 244.R.3; needs no periphrasis,248,R.; Indic.for S bjv.,254,R.1;Impf.Indic. of Disappointment,ib.R.2;with Pf. Inf.act.,280,2,b,and N.1;with q am, etc.,to strengthen s perlative,303;

omitted,with q am,ib.R.1; with Inf., 423,2,N.2;non poss m non,449.R.1; in simple q estions,453,N.1 : for" periphrastic,513,R.3,531.N.3 and 4; in Apod, of Unreal Condition,597,R.5,c;restrictions with,627.R.2;in Logical Condition,657,R.; in Unreal Condition in O.O.,659,N. Possession Dat.of,349;compared with Gen.,ib.R.2;of q alities,ib.R.3; Gen. of,362; in 1st and 2d person,ib.R.1; omission of governing word,ib.R.3. possessive prono ns 100-102,106.N.4; sage of s s,309,4 and NN.; syntax of, 312; intense se of,ib.R.1;for Gen.of personal pron.,304,2,N.2;with Gen.in app.,321,R.2;for 1st and 2d persons in S bjective Gen.,364;as pred.,366,R.3 : with interest a d refert,381;with domi,411.R.4; position of,676.R.1. possibility in Indic.rather than S bjv., 254.R.1,255.R. post vbs.cpd.with,take Dat.,347; with Abl.or Acc.of Meas re,403.N.4; position of,403,N.4,6,413.R.1;omission of, with rel.,403,N.4; as adv.,415; as prep.,416,20; with Pf.part.pass.,437, N.2. posteaq am see postq am. poster m defective,74.R.2; Comp.of, 87,2 and 7. postq am with Hist.Pf.or Pr.,561; with Impf.,562;with Pl pf.,563;range of tenses with,ib.NN.1-3; with S bjv., ib.N.4; Ca sal with Pr.and Pf.,564 and N.1;in Iterative action,566,567. postridie q am 577.N.5. post lare with ga d Abl.,339,R.1 and N.1;with Inf.,423.2.N.2,546.N.3;with t,ib.N.3. potens with Gen.,374.N.3. POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE 257-259; for Pr. and F t.,267; for Past,258; in q estions,259; for Indic.,257.N.3;not conditional,257.N.2,600,2; of Past coincides with Unreal of Present,258.N.2. potiri with Abl.,407 and N.2,d;with personal Ger.,427.N.5. potis,e 85,C; potior,87,7; poti s strengthens comparative,301;poti s q am,with S bjv.or Inf.,577.N.6,631, 3.R.2,644.R.3;see posse. power adjs.of,with Gen.,374;vbs.of, with Inf.,423 and N.2; seq ence after vb.of,515,R.3; in Indic.rather than S bjv.,254,R.1,255.R. [GENERAL INDEX.531] prae to express disproportion,296.N.3;

vbs.cpd.with take Dat.,347; gives Preventing Ca se,408.N.4; as adv.,415; as prep.,417,9;prae q od,525,2,N.2. praecellere with Abl of Respect,397,N.2. praecipere with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with t,646,N.1; sed personally in pass., 217.N.2;praecept m,with t,546,N.2. praecipitare with Abl.,390.2.N.3. praecip m with t,557.R. praeesse with Dat.Ger.,429,1. praeficere with Dat.Ger.,429,1. praegestire with inf.,423.2.N.2. (in) praesentia -for the present,394,R. praesidere with Dat.,347.R.2. praestare with Dat.,347.R.2;with Abl. of Respect,397,N.2; with Abl.of Measre,403.N.1; with t,553,1. praestolari with Dat.,346.N.2. praeter to express disproportion,296, R.3; vbs.cpd.with,take Acc.,331; posi tion of,413.N.3; se as prep.,416,21; with Pf.part,pass.,437.N.2;id q od, q am q od,q od,625,2,N.2. praeterire with q od,525,1,N.1. precari with t,646.N.1. predicate and cop la,205;with cop lative vbs.,206;concord of,211;violation of concord of,ib.RR.1-6,NN.1-3;in Pl.with two s bjs.,285;in Pl.with neq e-neq e,ib N.1;concord of,in Gender,286;in Person,287;Attrib tion,326; Apposition,ib.and R.6; with Abl.Abs.,410.N.6; after Inf.,638. prepositions assimilation of in composition,9,4;defined,16,6;repeated with cpd.vbs.,331.RR.2,3;with Co ntries and Towns,337,KR.1-4; with dom m,ib R.3; omitted with Co ntries and Towns, 337,NN.1-3; instead of Dat.,347.R.1; omitted with vbs.and adjs.of Separation,390,2 and 3; with Abl.of Origin, 395,NN.2,3;syntax of,412-416;origin of, 412; position of,413,678; repetition and omission of,414; as advs.,415; with Acc.,416;with Abl.,417; with Acc.and Abl.,418;two with same case,414,R.4; improper,412,N.; with participles for abstract s bstantives,437.N.2. PRESENT 112,3;System,114,3,a;r les for formation of,121,1;notes on System,130;formation of Stem,133;defined,223;Historical,224,229;Specific or Universal,227;Progressive,ib. N.1;of Endeavor,ib.N.2;of Resistance to Press re,ib.N.3;anticipates F t.,228;with iam,etc.,230;contrasted with Pf.to give Effect in VERGIL,ib.N.3;part,with esse,247.N.2; Indic.for Deliberative S bjv.,254.N.2; S bjv.as Potential,287,2;S bjv.in

Wishes,260; S bjv.as Impv.,263,270, R.2;S bjv.as Concessive,264;tense relations in S bjv.,277;Inf.as s bj.or obj.,280,1;Inf.after memini,281,2, N.; part.,282;part,as s bst.,437,N.1; Hist,seq ence alter,511.R.1;Inf.after vbs.of Saying and Thinking,530;Inf. for F t.,631,NN.3and 4. preventing vbs.of,with ne,q omin s, or q in,548,549,555,1. previo s condition given by ex r ab, and Abl.,206.R.2,396.N.2. Priapean verse,805. Price Gen.of,379; Abl.of,404. pridieq am sage of,577.N.5. primitive words 179,1. primoris defective,85,1. prim s with q isq e,318.N.3;primo, prim m,325.R.7;in pred.attrib.,326, R.6; sed partitively,291;prior, 87,8. principal parts 120. principal tenses 225. pri sq am with Indic.,574,576;with Pr.,675; with p re Pf.,ib.N.1; with Pf.or F t,576; non pri sq am.d m,ib.R.; with S bjv.,677;with t or Inf.,644.R.3. pro to express disproportion,298;with habere,340.R.1;with Nom.or Acc.in Exclamations,343,1,N.1;for,compared with Dat.,345.R.2 : position of,413,R.1 : as prep.,417,10; with Abl.Ger.,433 : pro eo q od,525,2,N.2;pro eo t,642, R.4. probare with inf.,527.R.2. procreat s with Abl.of Origin,395,N.1. proc l with Abl.of Separation,390.3.N. 2;as prep.,417,11. prodesse conj.of,118;with Dat.,346, R.2; with Inf.,422.N.4. prodig s with Gen.,374.N.1. profecto strengthens atq e,477.N.2. proficere with t,553,1. prof nd s never with Acc.,335.R.1. [532 GENERAL INDEX.] prof s s with Gen.,374.N.1. prognat s with Abl.of Origin,395.N.1. prohibere with two ACCS.,341.N.2;with Abl.,390.2.N.3; with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with ne,548.and N.1;with q omin s, 549,and N.1;with Inf.,532.N.1,549.N.1. prohibiting vbs.of,with Dat.,345,R..1. proinde strengthens Impv.,269;as coordinating conj.,503;and proin,ib. prolepsis of s bj.of leading cla se,468. promising vbs.of,with Inf.,423,N.5, 527,R.4; 531.N.4.

promittere-with Pr.Inf.,527.R.2,531, N.4. PRONOUNS defined,16,3;compared with no ns,ib.N.2;decl.of,17;Personal, 100-102;Determinative,103;Demonstrative,104;Relative,105;Interrogative,106;Indefinite,107;Pronominal Adjectives,108;Possessive,100-102; omitted,207;with Impv.,267.N.; syntax of,304-319;Personal,304;Demonstrative,305-307;hic,305;iste,306; ille,307;Determinative is,308;Keflexive,309;idem,310;ipse,311;Possessive,312;Indefinite,313-319;q idam,313;aliq is,314;q is,315; q ispiam,316;q isq am and ll s, 317; q isq e,318; alter and ali s, 319;with Part.Gen.,371;in O.O.,660. pron ntiare sed personally in pass., 217.N.2. pren s constr.of,359,N.5. prope as adv.,415;as prep.,416,22; position of,678.R.1;propior and proxim s,87,8;with Acc.or ab,369.R..1. properare with inf.,423.2.N.2. prSpinare with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1. propinq s Comp.of,87,9. proponere with ACC.Ger.,430.N.1. proposit m est,with Inf.,423,2,N.2; with t,646.N.2. propri s with Gen.or Dat.,359.R.1; with t,557.R. propter compared with Abl.of Ca se, 408,N.3;position of,413.R.1;as adv., 415; as prep.,416,23; with Acc.Ger., 432 and N.1. propterea 503. prosody 701-823. prospicere with Dat.,346,R.2;with Inf.,627,R.1;with t,546.N.1. prostare with Gen.of Price,379. protasis defined,589;eq ivalents of, 593;omission of vb.of,599;total omission of,600. protraction 743. providere with t,546.N.1. providing vbs.of,with Abl.,401.N.1. provid s Comp.of,87,5. proxim m i phrases with t,557.R. pr dens in pred.attrib.,325,R.6;with Gen.,374.N.4. -pte added to personal prono ns,102.N. 3. p det with Gen.,377 and R.1;with s bj.,ib.R.2. p er Voc.of,33.N.2. p gnare with Dat.,346.N.6;with t, 546.N.1. p rpose in Inf.,423.N.1;in Dat.Ger., 429,2; in S p.,435; in F t.part,438.N.;

seq ence in cla ses of,512;reflexive in cla ses of,521; rel.cla ses of,630; sea Final Sentences. p r s with Abl.of Sep.,390.3.N. p tare with Gen.of Price,379; with two Noms.in pass.,206;(non) p taveram, 254.N.1;p ta, t p ta,for example, 274; with Inf.,627.R.2. p tting vbs.of,with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and Abl.,348. Q a q a,482,3.. q aerere with a,de,ex,339.R.1;with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with Direct Q estion, 467.N. q aeso 175,6;with Impv.,269; witho t Inf.,546.N.3. q ails in phrases instead of Comparative,296,N.3. Q ality -possession of,349,R.3;Gen.of, 365 and R.1;Gen.and Abl.of,ib.R.2. 400.R.1;Gen.of,as pred.,366; Abl.of, 400;personified q ality as person,ib. R.2;Comparison of q alities,299. q am after comparatives,296 and R.1; omission of,ib.R.4;preps,instead,ib. N.3;atq e instead,ib.N.4;with pro, Ut,q i,to express disproportion,298; with positive for comparative,299.N.2; in comparison of q alities,299; with pot it and s perlative,303; with q i and s perlative,ib.R.2; magis,non aliter, q am t,557.N.2;q am si,with S bjv.of Comparison,602 : with q i or t after comparatives,631,3 : with q am q i and s perlative,642.R.5; [GENERAL INDEX.533] after ali s or sec s,643,N.4,with Comparative Sentences,644;with poti s, pri s,etc.,R.3. q amdi 568; with Indic.,569; range of,ib.N.1. q amlibet 606. q amq am 603 and N.; with Indic., 605; with S bjv.,ib.RR.1,2,and N; and yet,ib.a.3;with part.,609.N.1,667.N.; with Inf.,635.N.2. q amvlS 603 and N.; with S bjv.,606; with Indic.,ib.N.1; inflection of vb.of, ib.N.2;with licet,607.N.2; with part., 609.N.1,667.N.; with adj.or adv.,609, N.2. q ando with Ca sal Indic.,640; with S bjv.,641;early se,538.N.3,680.N.3; conditional se,690.N.3. q andoq e with ca sal cla se,641.N.5; q andoq e q andoq e,482.1.N.1. q antity r les for,702-706;of final syllables,707-713; of polysyllables,707-

709; of monosyllables,710-713;of stem syllables,714;of cpds.,715;in early Latin,716,717. q antity 12; s bsts.of,with Gen.,368. q ant m - with minim,mini m,etc., 209.N.2,467.N.; with maxim s and pot it t strengthen s perlative,303; q ant m q i,with s perlative,ib.R. 2; q anti,with vbs.of Rating and B ying,380;with ad vs.and Indic., 467,N. q ant mvis 603 and N.,606. q asi with s bst.,439,N.4; with S bjv. of Comparison,602; with Indic.,ib.N.1; to apologi e,eft.N.2; to give an Ass med Reason,id.N.4,666.N. q aten s as a Ca sal particle,638.N.5. q att or early forma of,95.N.3. q e added to reis.,111,2;syntax of, 476 and NN.; for q oq e,479.N.2;adds third member,481,N. q emadmod m sic,482,3,N. q erl with Acc.and Inf.,633.R.1. q estions with Potential S bjv.,259; deliberative,265,465 rpassionate eq iv. to command,273,453.N.2;predicate and nominal,451;rhetorical,265,451, R.2,464,466;direct simple,453-457; eq iv.to Condition,463.N.3; with ne, 454;with nonne,455;with n m,456; with an,457;direct disj nctive,458; neg.of,459;particles in indirect,460; moods in,482-467;Indic.in,463,464; S bjv.in,465,466;indirect,467;genine,463; disconnected,467.N.; exclamatory,658. q i interrogative 106 and R. q i relative 105 and NN.; with q am and S bjv.to express disproportion, 298;after dign s,etc.,552.R.2; eq iv. to si q is,625,2; explicative,626; strengthened by t, tpote,q ippe, ib.N.1;q od sciam,627.R.1;eq iv.to c m is,626.R.,633,634;eq iv.to t is, 630,631; after comparatives with q am,631,3;eq iv.to adj.,ib.4;sed q i,q i tamen,636.N.2-,q o q isq e,with comparative,642,R.2; see q o and q a. q ia after vbs.of Doing and Happening, 525,1,N.4; origin of and,correlatives with,638,NN.1,2;with Ca sal Indic., 540; with S bjv.,641; after vbs.of Emotion,542,R.; with Inf.,635.N.2. q ic mq e 106 and N.5; with Indic., 254,4,625. q idam 107,2;syntax of,313;with q asi,319,R.2; strengthened by cert s, n s,313.R.3. q idem with demonstrative pron.,307,

[534 GENERAL INDEX.] q isq am 107,3,and N.2; syntax of,317; strengthened by n s,ib.1.N.1; negative of,ib.2; as adj.,ib.1,N.3. q isq e 107,5,and N.; q isq is instead, 105.N.4; with Pl.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a; with ordinal,294.N.,318,2; syntax of,318; with s perlatives,ib.2;with reflexives, ib.3; attraction of,ib.N.2;s m q isq e,ib.N.4; with q o and comparative,642,R.2; t q isq e,with s perlative,ib. q isq is 105;as adj.,ib.N.4; with Indic.,254,4,625. q ivis 107,4 and N. q o as Ca sal conj nction,541,N.2;non q o in Final Cla ses,545,2;q one,ib. R.1; q o seti s,549.N.4. q oad force of,568;of complete coextension,569; ntil,with Indic.,571; with S bjv.,572; ntil,with S bjv.,ib.N.5. q od in Inner Obj.,333 l.N.1;introd ces Object Sentences,524; after vbs.of Adding and Dropping,525,1 : after demonstratives,ib.2; and t,ib.1.N.5;q id est q od,ib.1.N.2; after verba sentiendi,ib.N.T; after demonstratives, with preps.,ib.2.N.2; as to the fact that, with S bjv.,ib.2.N.3; with S bjv.in O.O.,ib.3; after vbs.of Motion,ib.1, N.6; gives Gro nd in Exclamations,534, R.1;with Ca sal Sentence in Indic.,

q q

q q q

q q

R.4;position of,413.N.3,679;yes,with sane,471,a.,1. ilibet 107 and N. in with mir m,209.N.2; strengthens Impv.,269;non q in as Ca sal, 541.N.2; force of,547; in Consec tive Sentences,552,3;with vbs.of Preventing,555,1;with vbs.of Do bt and Uncertainty,ib.2; after non d bito,ib.2, R.1;eq iv.to t non,556;after vbs. of Saying,etc.,555,2;in Relative Sentences of Character,632 and R.; facere non poss m q in,556. ippe 498.N.8; with q i,628.N.1. iq i 105 and N.4. ire conj gation of,170,a; with Inf., 433,2,N.2. is indefinite and q i,107,1; for aliq is,ib.R.and N.1;syntax of,315; aliq is instead,ib.N.1;familiar sage of,317.2.N.2. is interrogative 106;and q i,ib.R.; old forms of,ib.NN.1,2;q i in Wishes, 261; for ter,300.N. isnam 106 and N.5. ispiam 107,3,and N.1;syntax of,316.

540; with Ca sal Sentence in S bjv., 541;after vbs.of Emotion,542;with diceret,ib.N.3;non q od,ib.N.2; magis q od,641.N.2;correlatives of, 638.N.1;and q ia,ib.N.2; nisi q od, 591.R.3;q od si,610.R.2. q om see c m. q omin s force of,547; with vbs.of Preventing,etc.,549; for ne,548.N.2; and q in,549.N.3. q omodo with Direct Q estion,467.N. q oniam with Ca sal Indic.,540;with S bjv.,641; original force of,538.N.3; early tisage of,580.N.3. q oq e syntax of,479;and etiam,479, R.and N.1;q e instead,ib.N.2;with sed and ver m,482,5 and N.1. Bating vbs.of,with Gen.and Abl.,379, 380. ratio in Abl.of Manner,399,N.1;with t,546.N.2. recens with Abl.,390,3,N.1. recipere with Abl.or in,389. reciprocal relations given by inter se, 221; by alter alter m,etc.,ib.R.1;by invicem,m t o,etc.,ib.a.2. recitation of verses 754. recordari with Pr.Inf.,281,2,N.; with Acc.,376.R.2. rect m with Inf.,422,N.3. rec sare with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with ne, 648.N.1; with q omin s,549 and N.1; constr.with,549,N.1. red in composition,9,4,715.R.3. reddere with Pf.part.,537.N.2; reddi and fieri,206.N.1,340.R.1. red plication in Pr.stem,133,11.; in Pf.stem,134,iii.; omitted in Pf.of cpd.vbs.,ib. Reference Dat.of,352. refert with Gen.and Abl.,381,382; Nom.with,381.N.3;origin of,ib.N.5; expression of Degree of Concern,382,1 and 2;expression of Thing Involved, ib.3. refert s with Gen.,374.N.1. reflexive 218;passive sed for,218; approaches deponent,218,R-; prono ns, 309;is retained instead of reflexive,ib. N.1;strengthened,ib.N.2;s m q isq e,318.N.3;with ipse,311,2;with Acc.of Respect,338,N.2; in s bordinate cla ses,520-522;not in Consec tive Sentences,521,R.1;refers to real s bj., 309,2,521.R.2; free se of,ib.R.3; Indic. Relative Sentences,ib.a.4;ambig ity in,ib.N.3;demonstrative instead of, ib.R.1.N.3. reformidare with inf.,423.2.N.2.

refragari with Dat,346.R.2. refraining vbs.of,with q in,555,1. ref sing vbs.of,with ne,548;with q omin s,549; with Inf.,548.R.2; with q in,555,1. Rei ian s Vers s 822. regio in Abl.witho t in,385.N.1. relation s ffixes for,181,8. relationship s ffixes for,181,7,182,11. relative prono ns 105;made indefinite, 111,1;or niversal,ib.2; in Inner Obj., 333.1.N.2;instead of app.with refert, 381.N.2; contrasted with interrogative, 467.R.2,611,R.2; indefinite with Indic., 354,R.4; with S bjv.,667.N.; advs.instead,611,R.1; contin ed bydemonstrative,636.N.1; repetition of,615[GENERAL INDEX.535] RELATIVE SENTENCES 610-637;for Protasis,593,1: general consideration of, 610; how introd ced,611; position of, 612; antecedent in,613;concord in,614 and RR.; id q od,etc.,in app.to a sentence,ib.R.2;incorporation of app.,ib. R.4;repetition of antecedent,615; incorporation of antecedent,616; attraction of,617;correlative of,618;absorption of correlative,619; position of correlative,620; indefinite antecedent, 621; tenses in,622,623; in Iterative action,623;moods in,624-635;indefinite and generic relatives with Indic., 254.R.4,625,1; or S bjv.,ib.R.; conditional,625,2;explanatory,626;S bjv. in explanatory,627;q od sciam,etc., ib.R.1; restrictions with esse,posse, attinet,ib.R.2; with S bjv.by Partial Obliq ity,628;with S bjv.by Attraction,629;Final,630;attraction of diceret,ib.N.3;Consec tive,631;after definite antecedent,ib.1;after indefinite antecedent,ib.2;after comparative,ib.3; parallel to adj.,ib.4;with q in,632; Ca sal,633; Concessive and Adversative,634; in Inf.,635;combina tion of,636; participle instead,637,668; in O.O.,655 and RR. relat as S p.,436.N. relieving vbs.of,with Abl.,390,2. relinq ere with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1. reliq m est with t,553,4. reliq s sed partitively with S bst., 291.R.2;ali s for,319.N.1;reliq a, as Acc.of Respect,338,2. remembering vbs.of,with Gen.,376; with Acc.,ib.R.2. remex defective,70,D. reminding vbs.of,with Gen.,376; with

Abl.or Acc.,ib.ER.1,2. removing vbs.of,with Abl.,390,2. rendering vbs.of,with Inf.,421,N.1,6. reperiri with Nom.and Inf.,528.N.1. repetition of relative,615replet s with Gen.,374.N.1. reponere with in and Acc.,385,N.2. reposcere with two Accs.,339 and N.1, representatio 654 and N.,656.N.1. representation vbs.of,with Acc.and Inf., 526,527;with part.,527.N.1,536. reprimere with n e,548,N.1. rep gnare with Dat.,346,R.2;with ne, 548,N.1T req ies heteroclite,68,8. req iring vbs.of,with two Accs.,339 and R.1.N.1;with ab,ib.N.2. reri -part,of,with Pr.force,282,N. res for ne t,204.N.4; constr ed like ne t.,211.N.2;with AppositionalGgn., 361,1;in phrases with Inf.,422,N.2.: divinam rem facere,with Abl.,401,N. 4;rem certare,333,2,R. resistere with Dat.,346.R.2 -,with ne, 548.N.1;with q in,555,1. resisting vbs.of,with Dat.,346. resol tion of long syllable,732. resolving vbs.of,with Inf.,423 and N.2; with t,646. Respect Acc.of,338; with vbs.of Clothing,etc.,ib.N.2;Abl.of,397;Abl.of, with comparatives,398;Abl.of,with words of Eminence or S periority,397, N.2;preps,instead,ib.N.1. respice with Direct Q estion,467.N. responde with Direct Q estion,467.N.; i s respondere,333,2,R. rest conceived as end of Motion,412, R.2. restat with t,553,4. restrictions in Relative Sentences,627, RR.1,2. res lt for Sentences of,see Consec tive Sentences. ret heteroclite,68,12. retinere with n,548.N.1. re s with Gen.,374.N.2;378.R.1. ridere with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1. rhotacism 47. rhythm in arrangement,627,2,6;denned,739;ascending or descending, 735;names of,736;classes of,737; rhythmical series,738; nion of Ian, g age with,748. reb r decl.of,44,5,45,R-2. rogare with two Accs.,339,and N.1;with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1;with t,546.N.1; with Direct Q estion,467.N.; rogat , of Moving Ca se,408.N.1.; with Inf.or t,546,N.3.

root defined,25,1,N.,177. r dis with Gen.,374.N.4. r s --as limit of Motion,337;in Abl. of Separation,390,2; r rl in Loc.,411, R.2. S -final omitted,27,N.,703.R.3; s ffixes with,188. [536 GENERAL INDEX.] sacer with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1;sacr m facere,with Abl.,401.N.4. Sacramento as Abl.of Manner,399, N.1. sacrificare with Abl.,401.N.4. sacrificing vbs.of,with Abl.,401,N.4. saepe as attrib.to s bst.,439.N.4. saltem strengthens at,488.N.2. sal taris has no s perlative,87,9. salvere conj gation of,176,4. sane strengthens Impv.,269;very,439, N.3;with concessive ne,608;with q am and Indic.,467.N.; yes,471,a. sang is decl.of,41,4. sapiens as s bst.,437.N.1. Sapientia in phrases with Inf.,422,N. 2;with t,657.R. Sapphic verse,797,804. satias heteroclite,68,8 and 12. satis -very,439.N.3;attraction of pred. after sati s est,535.R.3. sat rate with Gen.,383,1,N.2. Sat rnian -verse,758. sat s with Abl.of Origin,395,N.1. saying vbs.of,with Object Cla se,523; vbs.of,with q od,625,1,N.7;vbs.of, with Acc.and Inf.,626,527;vbs.of, with Nona,in pass.,528;vbs.of,attracted into S bjv.after q od,541.N. 3;vbs.of,omitted,645.R.3;vbs.of, with q in,555,2. scat6re with Gen.,383.1.N.2. sca on verse,762. scientia in phrases with t,657.R. scilicet yes,471,a,2. scire first Impv.wanting,267.R.;sciens inpred.attrib.,325,R.6;q od sciam, q ant m scio,627,R.1;with Inf., 423,2,N.2,527.R.1;followed by direct q estion,467,N.; sciens,with Gen., 375.N.2; scit as S p.,436.N. scribere with Acc.and Inf.,627,R.2; with t,546,N,1. season adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,325,R.6. secondary words see Derivatives. sec nd m as prep.,416,24; alter for sec nd s. sec s 70,B;seq i s,87,8;strengthens sin,694; with q am,643.N.4.

sed in composition,9,4,715.R.1. sed introd ces contrast to demonstrative,307.R.4;with etiam,q oq e, after non modo,482,5 and N.1; with ne q idem,ib.R.1;omitted,ib.N.2; with et,ib.N.2; syntax of,485;repeated,ib.N.2;strengthened,ib.N.3. seeking vbs.of,with Final Dat.,356,N.2. seeming vbs.of,with two Noms.,206. semi-deponents 167semi-hiat s 720,R.1. semi-vowels 6,2,A. sempitern m as adv.Acc.,336.N.1. senat s decl.of,61,68.5. sending -vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430. senex -decl.of,56,5;Comp.of,87,9. sentence -simple or cpd.,201;syntax of simple,202,ff.; simplest form of,202; simple expanded,284,ff.; incomplete, 450-470;coordination of,473;Cop lative,474-482; Adversative,483-491; Disj nctive,492-497;Ca sal and Illative, 498-503;Object,523-537;Ca sal,538542;Final,543-550;Consec tive,551558;Temporal,559-588;Conditional, 589-602; Concessive,603-609;Relative, 610-637; Abridged,645-663; Participial,664-670. sententia in phrases with t,646.N.2, 557.R. sentire with Acc.and Inf.,627.R.2. Separation Gen.of,374.N.8,383,2;Abl. of,390. SEQUENCE OF TENSES 509-519;r le and modifications,509; general considerations,610;shift from primary to secondary seq ence,511.R.2;in sentences of Design,512;in sentences of lies lt, 613;in coincident sentences,ib.N.3; representation of S bjv.in,614,515; in O.O.,516;after other moods,517; after Inf.or part.,518;original S bjvs. in,619;derangement of,ib.R.; in Comparative Sentences,602,R.1;after Hist. Pr.,611.R.1; after P re Pf.,ib.R.3, 613.R.1;after Hist.Pf.,511.R.4;after accidit,etc.,ib.R.2;after vb.with f t re character,615,R.3. seq ester heteroclite,68,4. seq it r with t,553,3. sert m heteroclite,68,3. servire with Dat.,346.R 2. serv s omitted,362.N.1. shortening of pen lt,701,R-2,ft; of vowels,716,717. showing vbs.of,with two Noms.,206; with two Accs.,340; with Acc.and Inf., 526,527;with Nom.and Inf.,528. si with O in Wishes,261 and N.1;with-

[GENERAL INDEX.537] o t o in Wishes,ib.N.1;sis,sodes, s ltis.with Impv.,269;in Indirect Q estion after vbs.of Trial,460,1,6;in Iterative action,666,667;sign of Condition,690 and N.1;slq idem,ib.N.2, 596.R.5; si non and nisi,691; sin,692; si iodo,tamen,vero,695,R.O; si forte,ib.N.1; Concessive,604,R.1;with Inf.,635.N.2. sibilants 6,2,A; s ffixes with,188. sic coordinate with other particles,482, 4,N.; correlative of si,690.N.1. sic t gives Ass med Eeason,602,N.4. significare with inf.,527.R.2. sign m in phrases with t,646.N.2. silentio as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1. Bimilis--compared,87,3;with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1 and N.4. sim l as prep.,417,12; sim l-sim i, 482,1 and N.1;Temporal,with atq e (ac),as soon as,561-563;Ca sal with Pr.and Pf.,564 and N.; with F t.and F t.Pf.,565 and N. sim lare with Inf.,527.R.2. sin se of,592; strengthened by min s, etc.,ib.R. sine position of,413.R.1;as prep.,417, 13;with Abl.Ger.,433.N.2. sinere with Inf.,423.N.C,553,2,N.; with t,532,N.1,553,2. sing lar in collective sense for PL,204, N.8;Voc.with Pl.vb.,211.N.2;ne t. s ms p preceding PL,ib.N.3;as a s bj..combined with c m and another word,285,N.2. sing lare in phrases with Inf.,422.N.3; in phrases with t,553,4. sing l s with n merals,295. siq idem 590,N.2,595,R.5. sinister Comp.of,87,1,R.1. sis strengthens Impv.,269. sisti as cop lative vb.,206.N.1. sive se of,496;sive sive,ib.2,595, R.4; or ib.N.1;and se ,ib.N.3. smell vbs.of,with Inner Object,333,2, N.5. socer and socer s,32,1,N. sodes strengthens Impv.,269solere with Inf.,423.2.N.2; sOlito,as Abl.of Respect,398.N.1. sollicitari with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1. sol s decl.of.,76;in pred.attrib.,325, R.6;non sOl m sed,etc.,482,5,and R.1; with q i and S bjv.,631,1. solvere with Abl.,390.2.N.2. somniare with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.1. sonants 6,2,R. sortito as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1.

Sotadean -verse,816. so nd vbs.of,with ne t.Acc.of Inner Object,333.2.N.6. Specification Gen.of,361. spectare with ex and Abl.,402,R.2. spec s heteroclite,68,9. sperare with Inf.,527.R.2; with Pr. Inf.,531.N.4. spes with est and Pr.Inf.,631.N.4; in phrases with Inf.,527.R.2; with t, 646.N.2;in Abl.of Respect,398.N.1. spinter defective,70.R. sponte defective,70,A. Standard Abl.of,402,403;ex and Abl. instead of Abl.,402.R.2;Abl.of,with ante or post,403.N.4;Acc.of Extent for Abl.,ib.N.3;of comparison omitted,297Stare with Gen.of Price,379; to abide by,with Abl.,401,N.6;to persist in,with Inf.,423,2,N.2. Stat ere with in and Abl.,385.R.1;with Inf.,423,2,N.2;with t,546.N.1. Stat s in phrases with t,557.R. stem 25,1,132; Present,114,3,a,133; Perfect,114,3,6,134; S pine,114,3,c, 135;Formation of Verb stem,132-135; varies between Conj gations,136; q antity of stem syllables,714. stem-characteristic 26,120; e phonic changes in,121.R. stillare with AbL,401.N.5. st dere with Dat.,346,s.2;with Dat. Ger.,429,1 and N.1;with Inf.,423.2.N. 2;with t,546.N.1. st dios s with Gen.,374.N.5. st ltitia in phrases with Inf.,422,N.2. s adere with Dat.,346.R.2,and N.2; with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with t,646.N.1. s b in composition,9,4; vbs.cpd. with,take Acc.or Dat.,331,347; with condicione,etc.,399,N.3; sage of,as prep.,418,2. s besse with Dat,347.R.2;timorem, with Acc.and Inf.,533.R.1. s bject 201;in Nom.,203;in Acc.with Inf.,ib.R.1;forms of,204;omitted, 207; of impersonal vbs.,208,1,N.and 2.N.1; M ltiplication of,285,ff.; Q alification of,288,ff.; prolepsis of s bj.of [538 GENERAL INDEX.] dependent cla se,468;of Inf.omitted, 527.R.3,532,R.2 and N.2; Acc.and Inf. as,535;attraction of pred.after Acc. and Inf.,ib.R.3. S bjective Genitive,363,364; poss.pron. instead,364.

SUBJUNCTIVE 112,4;early forms of,130,4; Aorist forms of Pf.and Pl pf.,131,4,6, 2,3; Indic.for Deliberative,254.N.2; with generic relatives,ib.R.6,625,R.; force of,255;Indic.with vbs.of Possibility,etc.,ib.R.; Ideal and Unreal,256,1; Potential and Opt.,ib.2 Potential of Pr.and F t.,257-259;Potential for Indic.,ib.N.3;Potential of Past,258; Potential of Past with vellem,etc.,ib. N.1; Opt.,260; negs.of Opt.,^..particles with Opt.,261;Impf.for Unreal wish,ib.N.2; in Asseverations,262; as Impv.,263,267,270,R.,272; as concessive,264 and N.; tense relations of, 277;with q am t or q am q i to express disproportion,298; in Deliberative or Rhetorical q estions,265, 465,466;in Indirect q estions,467; after vb.with F t.character,615, R.3;Original in dependence,519; with q od,as to the fact that,525,2,N.3; in Final and Consec tive Sentences,543, 4;with t for Inf.,557.N.1;in Temporal Cla ses,560,2,563,NN.4,6;initerativo action,567.N.; in Contemporaneo s action,572,573;in S bseq ent action,577;with c m,585,588;in Belative Sentences,627,628;by Attraction,509,4,629;after poti s,644.R.3; in O.O.,650-652. s blimis in pred.attrib.,325.R.6. s bolet with Inf.,422.N.4. s bordination-defined,472; syntax of S bordinate Cla ses,504,ff.; division of,505-507;moods in,508;Seq ence of Tenses in,509-519. s bseq ent action syntax of Sentences of,574-577;with Indic.,574-576; with S bjv.,577. s bstantives defined,16,1,and R.1.N.1; inflection of,17; division of,18; gender of,19,20;mobilia,21,2;epicene,ib. 3;irreg lar,67-71;heterogeneo s, 67;heteroclites,68;metaplasts,ib,; defective,69;sing laria tant m,ib. A;pl ralia tant m,ib.B;heterologa,ib.C;formation of,180,181; witho t s ffixes,183;adjs.and parts, sed as,204.XN.; Pl.of abstracts,ib. NN.5,6; agreement of pred.,211 and RR..NN.; with several adjs.in SG.,290, R.2;common s rname in PL,290, N.1;verbal with Acc.,330.N.3,337.N.5; verbal with Dat.,356.N.3,357,358.N.2; in Abl.Abs.,410.N.5;with Dat.Ger., 428.N.5;with Inf.for Gen.Ger.,ib.N. 4;in phrases with Final Sentence,546, R.2;in phrases with Consec tive Sentence,557 and R.

s bter vbs.cpd.with take Acc.,331; as adv.,415;as prep.,418,2. s bvenire with Dat.,347.R.2. s ecedere with Dat.,347.R.2. s ccrescere with Dat.,347.R.2. s cc mbere with Dat.,347.R.2. s cc rrere with Dat.,347,8.2. s dare with Abl.of Means,401.N.5. s fferre-Pf.of,171.N.2. s ffixes 180;primary and secondary,ib. N.1; of s bstantives,181; of adjs.,182; forming dimin tives,181,12,182,12; in detail,184-189;with vowels,184;with g tt rals,185;with dentals,186;with labials,187;with s,188;with liq ids, 189. s ffragari with Dat.,346,s.2. s i decl.of,102 and N.1;with -met, ib.N.2; with -pte,ib.N.3;circ mloc tion for Part.Gen.,304,3,N.2; sage of, 309,520-522;complement of Inf.,309,3; is instead,ib.N.1; with s s,ib.N.2. s ltis strengthens Impv.,269. s m see esse. s mm s comparison of,87,2; sed parti tively,291,R.2. s pellex decl.of,44,5. s per vbs.cpd.with,take Acc.or Dat., 331,347; as adv.,415; as prep.,418,4; with Acc.Ger.,432,N.1;with Abl.Ger., 433;id q od,q am q od,525,2,N.2. s perare with Acc.of Respect,397.N.2. s peresse with Dat.,347.R.2. s perior 87,2 and 7. s periority vbs.of,with Acc.of Respect,397.N.2. s perlative in issim s,86; in rim s, 87,1; in lim s,ib.3; in entissim s, ib.4 and 5; lacking,ib.9; of parts.,89; of advs.,93; meaning of,varies with position,291,R.2,302; strengthened,303; with q am,q ant m,q i,ib.R.2,642, [GENERAL INDEX.539] R.5; with q isq e,318,2; with Part. Gen.,372; with preps.,ib.R.2; with lit,642.R.2. s persedere with Abl.,390.2.N.3. s perstes with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1. SUPINE 112,5; system,114,3,e; formation of,116,3,121,3; stem,135; in Abl.of Sep.,390.3.N.3,436.N.4 : in Abl.of Respect,397,1; with op s,406.N.5; defined,434; Acc.of,435; Abl.of,436. s ppetiae-defective,70,R. s pplex with Dat.,346.N.5. s pplicare with Dat.,346,it.2 and N-.4. s pra with q am after a comparative, 296,N.3; with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1;

as adv.,415; as prep.,416,25. s rds 6,2,R. s rname common,in Pl.,290.N.1. s s -decl.of,59. s scensere with Dat.,346,11.2. s scipere with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1. s spicari with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2. s spicere with Acc.and Inf.,627.R.1. s spirare with Acc.and Inf.,533.R.1. sUstinere with Inf.,423.2.N.2. SUUS(OS) 102;syntax of,309; emphatic, ib.2;with prep,phrases,ib.4;is instead,ib.N.1;s m q isq e,ib.N.3; s o tempore,ib.4; with Gen.Ger., 428.R.1;in dependent cla ses,521 j s om with tit,657.R. syllaba anceps 741. syllables division of,10;names for,11; open,11.R.; close,ib.; length of,12; common,13; q antity of final,707-713; of polysyllables,707-709;of monosyllables,710-713. syllepsis 690. sy apheia 728. syncope 725-743;in Pf.forms,131,ff. synecdoche 695. syni eais 727syntax defined,201. systole 722. T so nd of,7;t-clasa of vbs.,133,iii. tabes heteroclite,68,8. tabo defective,70,A. taedet with Gen.,377; with prono n as s bj.,377,R.2. taking vbs.of,with two Accs.,340; End For Which given by Dat.or ad,ib.R.2; vbs.of Taking Away,with Dat.,347,R.5; with Acc.Ger.,430talaris ana talari s,84,2. talis with q i or t and S bjv.,631,1 and R.1. tam with q am,q ant m,q i,and s perlative,303.R.2; with q i or t and S bjv.,631,1 and R.1. tamen introd ces contrast,307.R.4; position of,413.N.3; with sed,485.N.3; syntax of,490;with at,488.N.2;emphasises adversative relation,587.R.1; with tametsi,604,8.3. tametsi form,603 and n.; sage,604 and RR. tamq am with s bst.,439,N.1;with S bjv.of Comparison,602; with Indic., ib.N.1; to give an Ass med Reason,ib. N.4;with part.,666.N.; tamq am 81, 602,N.4; coordinate with sic,482,3,N. tanti as Gen.of Price,380,1. tantidem as Gen.of Price 380,1. tant s with q i or t and S bjv.,631,1

and R.1; tanti,with vbs.of Eating and B ying,380;tanti est,It is worth while, ib.R.1; tant m,with q am,q ant m,q i,and s perlative,303,R-2; tant m,for Abl.of Meas re,413.N.2; non tant m sed,etc.,482,5;tant m q od,625,2,N.2; tant m abest t, 552,R.1. taste vbs.of,-with Inner Obj.,333,2,N.5. teaching vbs.of,with two Accs.,339 and NN.2,3. temperare with Dat.,346,R.2 and N.2; with ne,548.N.1;temper ans,with -Gen.,375.N.2. templ m omitted,362.R.3. TEMPORAL SENTENCES 559-588;division of,559;moods in,560; Antecedent Action,561-567; Iterative Action,566,567; Contemporaneo s Action,568-573; S bseq ent Action,574-577; with c m, 678-688;general view of,579;Temporal c m,580; c m invers m,581; Explicative c m,582;Conditional c m,583; Iterative c m,584;Circ mstantial o m,585-588;Historical c m,585; Cansal c m,586;Concessive c m,587; c m-t m,588;in O.O.,655. temptare with inf.,423,2,N.2. temp s with Inf.orGer.,428,N.2; tempore or in tempore,394,R.; id temporis,336.N.2;with Inf.,422.N.2; temperi,411.N.1. tendency s ffixes for,182,3. [540 GENERAL INDEX.] tendere man s with Dat.,358.N.3. tenere with Pf.part,to denote Maintenance of Res lt,238;memoria teneo,with Pr.Inf.,281,2,N.;(se) with ne,548.N.1;with q omin s,549; with q in,555,1; with t,553,1;teneri, with Gen.of Charge,378.R.1. tenses 112,3; signs of,114,2; formation .of,114,115,121;syntax of,222-252; definitions,223; of contin ance,attainment,or completion,224; Pr.,227-230; Impf.,231-234;P raPf.,235-238;Hist. Pf.,239,240; Pl pf.,241; F t.,242, 243; F t.Pf.,244,245; periphrastic, 246-251; in Letters,252; of Indic.,276; of Impv.,278; Seq ence of,509; in Final and Consec tive Sentences,643, 3;in Relative Sentences,622,623;in O.O.,653-655; in Inf.,279,653; of S bjv.,277,654,655;fiepresentatio, 654,N. ten s position of,413.R.1; sage of,as prep.,417,14.Q terminatio st of cases 27.

terra in Abl.witho t in,386.N.1;terraeas Loc.,411.R.2. tertii m-est with t,553,4. testis est with Acc.and Inf.,527,R.2. thematic class of verbs 133,1. thickness how expressed,335.R.1. thinking vbs.of,with two Noms.,206; with Object Sentence and q od,523, 625,1,N.7; with Inf.,627; vbs.of,attracted into S bjv.after q od,641.N.3; vbs.of,with q in,555,2. threat vbs.of,with Inf.,423.N.5. Tib ri as Loc.,411,R..1. time adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,325.R.6; s ffixes for,182,8; when,in Abl.,393; how long,in Acc.,336; within which,in Abl.,393; with per,336,393.R.1;with tot s,ib.R.2; when = for which,ib.R.3; with hic,ille,ib.R.4; preps,for Abl., 394;lapses of,with c m,580,R.3; given by part.,665,670,1. timere constr.of,650 and N.1: with Inf.,423.2.N.2. timor est,with inf.,550,N.5 : timorem s besse,with Inf.,533.R.1. titles position of,676,R.4. tmesis 726. tot s decl.of,76; in pred.attrib.,325, R.6; with Abl.of Place Where,388; with Time How Long,393.R.2. towns with Acc.,337; in Abl.of Place Where,386; in Abl.of Place Whence,391; in Loc.,411;with preps.,337.N.3.391, R.1;with appositives,337.R.2,386.R.1, 391.R.1,411.R.3. tractat ase p.,436.N. trade s ffixes for,181,4. tradere with Acc.Ger.,430,N.1;with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2. tradesman s ffixes for,181,3. training vbs.of,with Abl v 401,N.1. trajection 696. trans in composition,9,4;vbs.cpd. with take Acc.,331;as prep.,416,26. transitive verb defined,213; sed intrans.ib.R.a. transposition of consonants,9,8. tres decl.of,95. trial vbs.of,with si,460,1,6; with implied protasis,601. tribes in Abl.of Origin,395,N.2. trib ere with t,553,2. trib t m heteroclite,68,5. tricorporis defective,85,1. trinl-97,R.3. trit m with Inf.,422.N.3. trochee shortened by Iambic Law,717; trochaic foot,734; rhythm,736; rhythms,768-776. t decl.of,101 and N.1; syni esis in,ib.

N.4; with met and -pte,102.NN.2.3; vestri and vestr m,304,2 and 3,364,R.; poss.pron.for,304,2,N.2; t i,vestri, with Ger.,428.R.1. t eri with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.1. t m with s bst.,439.N.4;with etiam, 478.N.1;as coordinating particle,482,1 and N.1; f m t m,482,1 and N.1; Ct n t m,588; correlative of si,590, N.1. t s(OS) 101 and N.3;t m with t, 657.R; t i with Gen.Ger.,428.R.1. U-length of Final 707,6. bi -as soon as,with Indic.,561-563; Ca sal,with Indic.,564,s.1.565 and N.1; with Iterative action,566,567;with S bjv.,567.N.; Conditional,590,N.3. ll s decl.of,76;and q isq am,107, 3.N.2,108; syntax of,317. ls 416,27. lterior 87,8; ltim s in pred.attrib., 325.R.6. ltimate defined,11. [GENERAL INDEX.541] Ultra with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1; position of,413.R.1; as adv.,415; as prep.,416,27. ncertainty vbs.of,with q in,555,2. nderstatement definition of,700. ndertaking vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430. niman s defective,85,2. nlikeness adjs.of,with atq e(ac),643. UNREAL CONDITION 597; with Impf.of opposition to Past,ib.R.1;with Indic. in Apod.,ib.ER.2,3;in O.O.,ib.R.4, 659;Apod,in,after vb.req iring S bjv.,697,R.5; with absq e,ib.N. n s decl.of,76,95.N.1;Pl.with pl ralia tant m,95,R.1;as distrib tive, 97,R.3; with s perlative,303;with q idam,313,R.3; with q isq am,317, 1,N.1;with nemo,n ll s,317.2.N.3;in pred.attrib.,325,R.6;with prep,for Part.Gen.,372.R.2; with q i and S bjv.,631,1. n sq isq e 107,5. rbs with name of Town,req ires prep.,337.R.2,386.R.1,391.R.1,411.R.3; with Appositional Gen.,361,N.1. rgerl with Gen.of Charge,378.R.1. rging vbs.of,with t,646. sq e with Acc.of Motion Whither,337, N.4; sage of,as prep.,416,28. s s with Abl.,406;with other constr., ib.N.5; as pred.,ib.; with Pf.part.,406, 437.N.2;in phrases with t,557,R.; s venit,with t,563,3.

t in wishes,261; with q am,to express disproportion,298,631,3,R.1; omitted,298.R.2;with pot it,to strengthen s perlative,303; t ita, 482,4;after vbs.of Adding and Happening,525,1,N.5;in Final and Consec tive Sentences,543; t non,ib.4, 545.R.2,552;parenthetical,ib.R.3; t ne,545.R.1,546.R.3;after vbs.of Fear,550 and N.1;to add restriction, 552.R.3;after vb.of Ca sation,553,1; after vbs.of Compelling and Permitting,ib.2;after vbs.of Happening,ib. 3;after impersonals,ib.4;Explanatory,557;Exclamatory,558;with magis q am,557.N.2; t prim m,as soon as,with Indic.,561-563;Ca sal, 564,N.; with Iterative sentences,566, 567;nisi t,567.N.2,591.R.3;with si and S bjv.,602; with S bjv.,to give an Ass med Reason,ib.N.4;Concessive,608 and R.1; with q i,626,R.1; after comparatives,631,3,R.1;with q isq e and s perlative,642.R.2; pro eo t,as Ca sal,ib.R.4; t q i,with s perlative,ib.a.5;introd ces O.O. after vbs.of Will and Desire,652.R.1; with part,to give Ass med Reason, 666.N. ter,bag -decl.of,44,2,45.R.1. ter,which -decl.of,76,106; q is for, 300.N.; tr m as interrogative particle,468;in Indirect Q estion,460,2,N. 3; tr m,whether or no,459,N.2. terlibet 108. terq e decl.of,108;with Pl.vb.,211, R.1.Ex.a,292,R.; to express reciprocal action,221,R.1 and 2;force of,292; with Part.Gen.,371.R.1. ter m heterogeneo s,32,1,N. tervis 108. ti with Abl.,407 and N.2,a;other constrs.of,ib.N.3;with personal Ger., 427,N.5.9 tinam in wishes,261 aiidN.1. tpote with q i,626.N.1. V and ,1.R.2;pron nciation of,7. vacare with Dat.,346.N.2;attraction of pred.after,635.R.3. vac s with Gen.,374.N.8. vae with Dat.,343,1,N.1. valde very,439.N.3;with q am and Indic.,467.N. valere with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with t, 553,1. valid s with Abl.or Gen.,405.N.3. vas heteroclite,68,7. Ve sage of,495;ve-ve ib N.2. vehementer very,439.N.3. vel with s perlative,303; sage of,494;

vel vel,ib.2;for example,ib.N.1;at well as,ib.N.3. velle conj gation of,174;exact se of F t.or F t.Pf.,242,N.2 and R.3;has no periphrasis,248,R.,531,N.3;velim, 257,2;vellem,as Potential,268,N.1 : vellem,as Unreal,261.R-;with S bjv. for Impv.,270.N.2;with Pf.Inf.act., 280,2,b,and N.1;with Pf.Inf.pass., 280,2,c,N.; volens in pred.attrib., 325.R.6; sibi velle,351,N.2; volenti est,353.N.2; with l f.or t,532,and N.3,646,R.1;with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with t,646,N.1. [542 GENERAL INDEX.]

vel t with S bjv.,602 : with part,to give Ass med Reason,666,s. vel tsi with S bjv.,602. venalis with Abl.,404.N.4. vendere with Gen.of Price,379;bene vendere,380,2,R. venire omitted,209.N.5; venit mihi in mentem,with Gen.,376.R.3; with S p.,435,N.1;vent r s as adj.,438, N.; in s spicionem,with Nom.and Inf.,528.N.2;with Inf.,422.N.5; s venit,with t,553,3. venire pass,of vendere,169,2,R.i;with Gen.of Price,379. venter decl.of,44,2,45.R.1. verbals defined,179,1; pred.agreement of,211; e bst.with Acc.,330.N.3,337, R.5; adj.with Acc.,ib.N.4; in bilis, with Dat.,355.N.; in ax,with Gen., 375;formation of verbalia.191. VERBS defined,16,4;conj gation of,17; inflection of,114;deponents,113;personal endings,114; reg lar,120,ff.; classes of,133;Stem or Thematic class, 133,1.; Red plicated Class,ib.II.; T-class,ib.iii.; Nasal class,ib.IV.; Inchoative class,ib.V.; i-class,ib.VI.; mixed class,ib.VII.; listof,137-162; Deponents,163-166;Semi-deponents,167; Irreg lar,168-174; Defective,175;formation of,190 200; division of,190;Verbalia,191;Denominative,192;composition of,199,200;Impersonal,208; intrans. sed personally,ib.2; Concord of,210,211,285-287;trans,and intra s.,213;trans, sed as intrans., ib.R.a;intrans. sed as trans.,ib. R.6. verb m with Appositional Gen.,361,1; in phrases with t,546.N.2. vereri co str.with,550 and N.1;verit sasPr.,282.N.; with Inf.,423,2,s.2, 533.R.1.

verisimile in phrases with Inf.,422.N. 3;in phrases with t,553,4. vero position of,413.N.3;yes,471,a,l; with atq e,477.N.2;with sed,485,N.3; syntax of,487;with nisi,591.R.4;with Bin,592. verse 745;methods of combining,746; Italic,755;Sat rnian,756;compo nd, 820,823. versification 729-823; anacr stic scheme of,738. vers s position of,413.R.1; sas prep.,416,29;vers s Italic s-755. vertere with Final Dat.,356.R.2. ver m introd ces contrast to demon strative,307.R.4;yes,471.a,l: > etiam,482,5 and N.1; syntax of, with Inf.,422.N.3;with t,553,4. very -translations of,439.N.3. vesci with Abl.,407 and N.2,e;with personal Ger,427.N.5. vesper -decl.of,68,10;in Abl.of Time 393.R.5; vesperi 37,5,411.N.1. vester 101 and n.3. vetare with Acc.,346.N.3;with Inf 423,2,NN.3 and 6,532.N.1 and 2. vet s decl.of,82,2; comp.of,87,1,R.2 via as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1. vicissim gives reciprocal relation,221 R.2;as coordinating particle,482,1, N.2. videre with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2;with t,546.N.1; with ne,548.N.1;with Direct Q estion,467.N.; with td Noms.in pass.,206;videri,and vi det r,628.R.2;vide,with S bjv.for Impv.,271.N.2,548,N.3; videris, Impv.,245,N. vilis with Abl.of Price,404.N.2. vincere with Abl.of Respect,397,N.2; ca sam,333.2.it. violent s and violens,84,1. vir s defective,70,C. Vis 70,D; with Pl.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a; vi, as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1. -vis with relatives,111,3. viti m with Epexegetical Gen.,361,2 ; with Inf.,422,N.2;vitio as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1. vivere with Abl.,407,N.2,e. [vix] 70,D;t am vicem,334.R.2. VOCATIVE defined,23,5;in I ? 33,R.2; adjs.of 1st and 2d Decl.,73; no synta: of,201,R.1;Nom.instead,ib.R.2;ii app.,ib.R.3;in pred.,211,R.3;Sg with Pl.vb.,ib.N.2; Nom.instead,321 N.1; in pred.app.,325,R.1;with O or pro,343,1,N.1. voice-112,2,212; act.,213; pass.,214 ;

middle,212.N. Vol ntas in phrases with t,546,N.2; vol ntateas Abl.of Manner,399.N.1. vol p indeclinable,85,C. vomer decl.of,45,s.2. vowels 2;so nds of,3;phonetic varia[GENERAL INDEX.543] ions in,8;weakening of,ib.1;omission of,ib.2;epenthesis of,ib.3; issimilation of,ib.4;q antity of final, 707;s ffixes with,184. vox -with Appositio al Gen.,361,1. v lgo as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1. v lt s -heteroclite,68,5. Want-vbs.of,with Abl.,405;adjs.of, with Gen.and Abl.,ifc.N.3. warning vbs.of,with t,546. weakening of vowels 8,1,701.R.2. weight s bsts.of,with Gen.,369. willvbs.of,with Inf.,280,2,c,423,2,532; seq ence after vbs.of,516,R.3; t instead of Inf.after,632.N.1-4; with Final sentence,546;with Inf.instead,ib.R.1; with simple S bjv.,ib.R.2. wishes in S bjv.,260,261;apodosis omitted with,601. witho t translated by t non,552,R.4; q in,556;c m non,587.R.2. wonder constr.with vbs.of,542.N.1. words Formation of,176-200. Y -1.R.3; length of final,707,3. yes -trans,of,471,a and c. yielding vbs.of,with Dat.,346. Z -when introd ced,1.R.3;so nd of, ib.N. e gma 690.

SYNTAX OF INDIVIDUAL AUTHORS. The syntactical sage of individ al a thors is treated as follows: ACCIUS 358.N.1; 625,1,N.1. AFRANIUS 498,N.1. APULEIUS 336,N.1;365,N.; 406.N.3; 498, N.1;691.N.3; 607.N.3;626.N.1. CAELIUS 574.N. CAESAR 208.2.N.2;209,N.5;228.N.1;239, N.; 250,N.1 and 2; 260; 280,2,c,N.; 285, N.2; 286,3,N.; 311.1.R.2;323,N.1;324; 335.N.; 336,N.2;337,N.1; 341.N.2; 349.R.5; 354.N.2; 356.N.2 and 3; 358.N.3; 359.N.1; 369.N.2; 372.N.2 and 3; 374.N.1 and 9;

375.N.2; 381.N.4; 386.N.; 391,N.;395,N.2; 401.N.7; 407,N.2,d; 410.N.4; 413.R.1; 415; 416,2,3,8,15,16,19,22,and 24;418,2; 422, N.2; 423.N.2 and 3; 427.N.2; 429.N.1; 432, N.1; 435.N.2; 436.N.1;443.N.3; 458.N.1; 460,2,N.1 and 2; 467.N.; 475.N.3; 476.N.5; 478.N.2;480.N.2 and 3; 482,3; 482,5,R.2 and N.1; 496.N.1; 503; 512,N.1;513.N.1 and 2; 525,2,N.3; 527.R.3; 528,N.1;538, N.4;541,N.1 and3;642,N.1; 545,R.1; 549.N. 1 and 2;563.N.2 and 3;667.N.; 569.N.1; 671.N.3; 691,8.2 and N.2; 602.N.5; 615.N.; 616,1,N.1;626.N.1; 627,8.2; 636.N.1; 644, R.3; 647.N.2; 650.N.; 666.N. R.Hisp.407,N.2,d; 416,8. R.Afr.407,N.2,d;417,7. CATO 285.N.2; 394,3,N.1; 401.N.7; 407.N.2; 417,7; 418,4;437.N.2; 477.N.5; 548,N.3; 574.N. CATULLUS-207.N.; 236.N.; 380:417,3; 454, N.2; 455.N.; 458,N.1;477.N.5; 480.N.3; 546,N.3;567,N;644,N.2. CELSUS 602.N.4. CICERO 204.N.7;206.N.1; 809.N.3 and 5; 211.R.4 and N.3; 214.R.2;828.N.1;239, N.; 242.R.3; 245,N.; 250.N.1 and 2;252, N.; 264.R.6 and NN.1,2;257.N.1;261; 269; 271.2.N.2; 280,2,c,N.; 285,N.2; 293.N.; 298.N.1;299.N.1;301;311, 1.R.2;318.N.1;319.N.2;323.N.1;324; 336.N.2;337.N.1.2,and 4;341.N.2; 343.N.1;346.N.1 and 2;347.R.2;349, [544 GENERAL INDEX.] R.5; 361.N.1;352.N.; 354.N.2; 356.R.3 and N.3;357; 358.N.3 and 5;361.N.1; 362.N.1;364.N.1; 369,N.2;372.N.2 and 3; 374,N.1,2,4,and 5;375.N.2 and 3;376.R. 1,2,and 3; 380.1.N.1 and 4; 383.N.1; 385, N.1; 386.N.; 390,2,N.2 and 3; 391.N.; 395, N.1 and 2; 396.N.1; 398.N.1; 403.N.4; 406, N.6;407,N.2,d;410.N.4;411.R.1 and 2, and N.1; 413.R.1;416,1,2,3,5,7,13,14,15, 16,19,24,25,28,and 29;417.1.N.3 and 14; 418,4; 422.N.2.3,and 5;423,N.2and3; 427.N.2 and 5;428,R.2 and N.1; 429.N.1; 432.N.1;435.N.1;436.N.1; 438.N.; 439.N. 2,3 and 4;443.N.3;453,N.1;457,1,N.1 and 2,2 and N.; 458.N.1;459.N.1;460,1, N.2;467.N.; 476.N.5;477.N.4 and 5; 478, N.2;480.R.1 and N.3;481.N.; 482.1.N.1 and 2,2,3,and 5,R.2 and N.1;484.N.1 and 2; 485,N.1 and 2; 486,N.; 488,N.1 and 2; 489.N.1; 491,N.; 493.N.1;494.N.1; 495; 496.N.1; 497; 498,N.3,4,G and 8; 501;

603;511,R.4;513.R.1 and NN.1,2;525,1, N.1 and 4,2.N.2 and 3;527.R.1 and 3, and N.2;628.N.1 and 2;532.N.1 and 3; 633.R.1; 536.N.1; 538.N.4; 541,N.1,2,3 and 5; 542,R.and N.1;543.N.3;548.N.3;549, N.1,2 and 4; 550,N.1,2 and 5; 553,1; 555, R.1;563,N.2,3,4 and 5;567.N.; 569.N.1; 671,N.2and3; 573.N.2;574.N.; 576.N.1; 677.N.4 and 5;580,N.3;590.N.1; 691.R.4 and N.2; 602,N.5;604,R.2; 605.N.; 606,N. 1; 608; 615.N.; 616,1,N.2,and 2,N.; 617, N.1; 626.N.1; 627,R.1 and 2; 635,N.1 and 2;636.N.1;643.N.4;644.R.3;647.N.2; 666,N.; 677.N. COLUMELLA 592,N. CORNIFICIUS 439,N.3;500,R.; 549,N.4. CURTIUS 416,16;532.N.1. DICTYS 545.R..1. ENNIUS 411.R.2;478.N.5. FLORUS 467.N;525.2.N.2. FBONTO 525,2,N.3. GAIUS 625,2,N.3. GELLIUS 580,N.3. HIRTIUS 423.N.2 : 532.N.1. HORACE 211,R.1,Ex.a.N.; 271.2.N.2;301; 346.N.2; 361.N.1; 416,5.17,19,and 21; 417,8;418,4;421,N.1,c;422.N.4;427.N. 2; 439.N.3; 454.N.2;457.N.2; 458.N.1 and 2;460.2.N.3;477.N.8;480.N.1;482, V 3; 498.N.1;500.R.; 525,1,N.1,2.N.2;533, R.1;536.N.1;538.N.5;641.N.5;563.N.3; 569.N.1;591.R.2;592.N.; 616.1.N.2;644, N.2. JUVENAL 602.N.4;605.N. LIVY 204.N.8;209.N.3; 211,R.1,Ex.a,N.; 247.N.1;249.N.; 250,N.1 and 2; 285,Ex. 3 and N.2;293.N.; 3U,1,R.2,2,N.: 317.N. 1; 319.N.1; 323,N.1;335.N.; 337.N.4; 338.N.1; 346.N.2; 347.R.2; 350,1,N.; 351, N.1;353.N.2;356.N.2;359.N.1 and 4; 363.R.1;366.R.1; 371.N.; 372,N.1a d4; 373.R.1;374,N.2and 3; 383.N.1;385.N. 1;390.2.N.3;391.R.1 and N.; 395.N.1; 399.N.1 and 3;401.N.2 and 6;403.N.3; 406.N.3; 410.N.2.3,and 4; 411.R.1 and N.1;413.N.1;415;416,2,7,15,16,22,23, 24,and 28;417,1,8,10,11,and 14;418,2,

and 4;423,N.2;427.N.2;429,2 and N.1; 430.N.1;435,N.2;436,N.1;437.N.2;438, N.; 439.x.3 and 4;442.N.3;443.N.4; 457,1,N.3;458,N.1;460,2,N.3;467.N.; 477,N.4,5 and 9;478,N.1 and 2;480.N.3; 482,1,N.1,2 and 5,R.2 and N.1; 497;498, N.1,3,and 8;502.N.3;503;513,N.1 and 2;525,1,N.1 and 7 and 2.N.2;632,N.1; 636.N.1;641,N.2 and 5;642,R.and N.2; 643,N.3;545.R.1;549.N.1;550,N.5;655, 2,N.; 657.R.and N.2;563,N.2,3,and 5; 667,N.; 569,N.1; 570.N.4;671,N.6;676, N.2;577,N.3,4,and 5;597,R.5;602.N.5; 615,N.; 616,1,N.1 and 2,and 2,N.; 626,N. 1;635.N.2;636.N.1;644.R.3;651.R.1; 666.N.; 687. LUCAN 254,N.1;468,N.1. LUCILIUS 383.1.N.2; 486,N.1. LUCRETIUS 372,N.2;383,1,N.2;405,N.3; 406,N.6;422,N.4;459.N.1;480.N.2;482, 1,N.1;496.N.1;500.R.; 525,1,N.1;533, R.1;564,N.1;571.N.4;606.N.1;636.N.1. MARTIAL 280,2,6,N.1. NAEVIUS 633,N.1. NEPOS 249,N.; 250,N.2;356.R.3;408,N.2, c;416,10;513.N.1;536.N.1;655,2,N.; 571,N.4;605,N.; 606,N.1;687. OVID 270.N.; 280,2,6,N.1;349.R.5; 364, N.1;401,N.7; 411.R.2; 416,7; 417,7; 427, N.2; 494,N.3; 625,I,N; 545,R.1; 616.N.2. [GENERAL INDEX.545] PETRONIUS 207,N.; 625,1,N.1. PLAUTUS 206.N.1;211,R.1,Ex.a.N.; 270, N.1;330.N.3;336,N.1;347,R.2;357,N; 358,N.1;361,N.1;374,N.1,2,3,and 5; 375,N.3;383,1,N.2,and 3;398 : N.2;406, N.6;407.N.2;411,R.1;415;416,6,7,16, 19,21,and 24; 417,7; 418,4; 422,N.2; 439,N.3; 454.N.2; 455,N.; 467,N.; 476.N. 3 and 5;477,N.1 and 6;478.N.2;487, N.1;494,N.1 and 6;496,N.1;498.N.3; 602,N.3;525,1,N.4 and 2.N.2;533,R.1; 638,N.1 and 3;541,N.1;645,R.1;646, N.3;648,N.3;649,N.2;563,N.3;569,N. 1;571,N.5; 576,N.1;577.N.5;580,N.1 and 3;597,N.; 602,N.5;610,N.1;615,N.; 626,N.1;643.N.3;677,s. PLINY MAJOR 381.N.3;398.N.2; 460,2,N.3; 467.N.; 482,2; 49R.1.N.1; 592.N.

PUNY MINOR 209.N.5;262.N.; 418,4; 460, 2.N.3; 638.N.5; 548.N.3; 602.N.4; 605.N.; 616.1.N.2. POLLIO 410,N.3. PROPERTIUS 406.N.3; 421,N.1,c;457.1.N.2; 458.N.1; 480,N.2a d3; 498.N.1. QUADRIGARIUS 407,N.2,b. QUINTILIAN 359.N.5;406.N.3; 612.N.1; 525,2,N.2; 538.N.5; 602.N.4; 604.R.2; 627.R.1. SALLUST 207,N.; 208,2,N.2;247.N.1; 260, N.1; 280,2,c,N.; 285.N.2; 286,3,N.; 311,1, R.2; 323.N.1; 338,N.1; 347.R.2;349.R.4; 353.N.2;356.N.3;359.N.1 and 6;369.N. 2;372.N.2 and 3;374,N.1,3,and 8;390, 3.N.1; 391.N.; 407,N.2,d; 410,N.1,2and 4; 416,2,4,7,16,20 and 24;417,7; 418,4; 423, N.2; 428,R.2; 436.N.2;436.N.1;437.N.2; 439.N.3; 460.2.N.1; 467.N.; 476.N.3; 476, N.5; 478.N.2; 480.N.3; 482,3 and 5.R.2 and N.1;488,N.2; 491.N.; 496.N.1;601; 503; 612.N.1; 513.N.1; 625,2,N.2; 532.N.1;536, N.1;638,N.1; 541,N.2and3; 542.N.1; 545, R.1; 548.N.3;563.N.2;569.N.1;591.R.2; 604.R.2; 616,1,N.1 and 2;626.N.1;636, N.1. SENECA 374.N.3;616.1.N.2;635,N.2. SENECA RHETOR 44.5,N. SUETONIUS 349.R.5; 407,N.2.c;416,22; 513.N.1; 642.R.; 646.N.3; 677.N.5; 602, N.4; 665,N.2. TACITUS 208.2.N.2;209.N.3; 211,R.1,Ex. a,N.; 254.N.1; 285,Ex.3 and N.2; 346.N. 3; 353,N.2; 354.N.2; 356,N.2; 359,N.5; 364, N.1;372.N.2;376.R.1;390.3.N.1;401.N.6 and 7;407,N.2,a;410,N.2and 4;411,N. 1; 416,10.16,23 and 24; 417,3 and 12; 423.N.3; 428.R.2 and N.4;432,N.1; 437, N.2 442,N.3; 443.N.4;460.2.N.3; 476, N.1;476.N.5;477,N.4;480.N.3;482,2,3 and 5.N.1;484.N.2;493.N.2;496.N.1; 497;513.N.1;525,1,N.7,and 2,N.2and3; 532.N.1;538.N.5;542.R.and N.1;546, N.3; 563,N.2,3 and 5; 567,N.; 569,.N.1; 571,N.1 and 3; 673,N.1; 675.N.2;676.N. 1;602,N.4;604.R.2;605,N.; 616,1,N.2; 635.N.2; 647,N.2; 666,N.; 687. TERENCE 211,R.1,Ex.o,N.; 271,N.2;286, N.2;337.N.4;358.N.1;361.N.1;383,1,

N.2; 399,N.1;407,N.2;411.R.2;415; 416, 1,8,and 28; 423,N.2;428,R.2; 439,R.3; 454,N.2;455,N.; 482,5,R.2;487,N.1;489, N.; 494,N.1;496,N.1 and 2;498 N.3;602, N.3;525,1,N.1;533,R.1;641,N.1;645, R.1;649.N.2;669.N.1;571,N.4;674.N.; 676.N.1;578,N.; 680,N.1 and 3;597, N.; 610,N.1;615.N.; 626.N.1;644,N.2; 677,N. TIBULLUS 455,N.: 457,1,N.2;468.N.1 : 498.N.1. VALERIUS MAXIMUS 285,N.2;432,N.1; 460,2,N.3;538.N.5;577,N.5. VARRO 416,7,15,and 23;422,N.4;427.N. 2;437,N.2;449,R.3;574,N.; 606,N.1. VATINIUS 606,N.1 . VELLEIUS 209,N.5;285,N.2;349,R.5;391, N.; 460,2,N.3; 513,N.2. VERGIL 211.R.1,Ex.a,N.; 230,N.2;269; 276,2,N.2;301;336,N.1;346.N.2;374, N.3;383,1,N.2 and 3;390,2,N.4;411.R. 2;417,3;421,N.1,c;422,N.4;442,N.3; 443,N.1;458,N.3;477,N.5;480,N.2;482, 1,N.1 and 2;486,N,3;526,1,N.1;542,N. 1; 546,N.3; 563,N.2;591,R.2; 644,N.2. VITRUVIUS 353,N.1;386,N.; 416,5 and 25; 418,3;439.N.3;636,N.1;649.N.2;671, N.4. THE HISTORIANS 209,N.5;211,R.1,Ex.b; 214,R.2; 363,R.1;391,N.; 484,N.2;485, N.1; 487,N.1; 491; 501.N.; 567,N.; 628,R. THE POETS 211,R.1,Ex.a,N.and R.4; 217, N.1 and 2; 230,N.2;241,N.1;261;269; 270; 271,2,N.2;280,2,6 and N.2; 290,N. 2;295,N.; 296,N.1,3,and 4;321.N.1; 332, 2.N.2 and 3;333,2,N.6;336.N.3;337,N. [546 GENERAL INDEX.] 1 and 2;338,N.1 and 2;346.N.6;350,1, N.; 351,N.1;352,N.; 354,N.2;358; 361, N.1;362,N.1;373,R.1;374,N.1,3,6,8,and 10;375;383,1,N.1;385.N.1;386,N.; 390, 3.N.1 and 2; 391,N.; 394,3,N.1;396.N.1 and 3; 397.N.2;401,N.4and 6 : 404,N.1; 407,N.2,e;413,R.1 and 3,and N.1;416, 14,and 20;417,5,12,and 24;418,3 and 4; 421,N.1; 427.N.5;428,N.2 and 3; 435,N.1;436,N.1 and 3;437,N.1;439,N. 2; 440.R.; 446,N.2;449,R.3;454,N.3; 457,1,N.3; 460,2,N.2;467,N.; 476.N.2.3, and 5;477.N.4;482,3;488,N.1 and 2; 495,N.2;496.N.1;498,N.1 and 5;502.N.

1; 626,1,N.7; 527,N.2; 532.N.1 and 6; 535,R.3;536.X.2;538,x.5;546,R.2 and N.3;552.R.2;591,N.2;604,R.2;617.N. 2;631,2,N.1;683. THE COMIC POETS 211,R.1,Ex.a,N.; 228, N.1; 242.N.2; 243; 244.N.1;247.N.2; 263,2,N.; 267,N.; 269; 280,2,c.N.; 346.N.1; 351.N.1; 406.N.2; 416,4; 443.N.4;453, N.1 and 2; 467.N.; 468.N.; 477.N.3;553,1; 617.N.2. LATER PROSE 211,R.1,Ex.a,N.; 217.N.1 and 2; 221,8.2; 269; 361.N.1; 372.N.3; 374.N.1 and 3; 375; 386.N.; 390,2,N.3; 404.N.1; 413.N.1; 415; 416,20,23,25,and 27: 417,5; 427.N.5; 428.N.1,2,and 3; 449.R.3; 460,1,a; 467,N.; 476.N.5; 477.N. 4; 528.R.2 and N.4; 535,R.3; 538.N.5; 546,8.2; 555,2,N.; 589.N.1. ANTECLASSICAL LATIN 211.N.1 and 2; 220, N.2; 221.R.2; 241,N.1; 248.N.1; 254.N.2; 257.N.1; 260; 261.N.2; 271.1.N.1 and 2, and 2.N.1 and 2; 272,3,N.; 280,2,a.R.2; 293.N.; 296.N.1: 301; 303; 309,N.2; 319, N.1; 330.N.2; 339.N.1; 341.N.2 346.N.2; 347.R.1; 350.1.N.; 373,R.1; 374,N.4;375, N.2;3834.N.2; 385.N.2; 390,2,N.1; 390, N.3; 391,8.2 and N.; 395.N.2; 397.N.2; 399.N.1; 403.N.3; 407.N.2; 408.N.6; 410, N.1,4,and 5; 413,R.1; 416,10,12,16,23, 24,and 27; 417,2,9,and 10; 421.N.1; 422.N.2 and 4; 423,N.2 and 3; 427.N.2; 428.N.1; 429.N.1; 430.N.1: 432.N.1; 433, N.2; 436,N.1 and 4; 437.N.2; 439,N.3; 442, N.3; 443.N.1 and 4; 444,1,N.2; 454,N.1 and 5;456,N.;457,1,N.1,2,and 3,and 2,N.; 459.N.2; 475.N.1; 476,N.1,2,and 5; 479, N.1; 480.N.1; 482,1,N.1,and 5.N.1; 487, N.2; 488,N.1; 495,N.1; 498,N.5,6,and 7; 500; 503; 513.N.1; 525,1,N.2,6,and7,and 2.N.2,and 3; 627,8.3; 528,N.1; 636,N.1; 537,N.2; 541.N.5; 542,R.and N.2; 546, N.3; 549,N.4; 550,N.1 and 2; 553,3,N.; 557,R.; 563,N,1,2,and 5; 564,N.1; 571, N.2,3,and 5; 574,N.; 576.N.1; 677,N.1; 680,N.3; 591,8.2 and N.2; 602,N.5; 614, N.; 617,N.1 and 2; 626.N1.and 2; 627, R.1;634,N.;636,N.1; 651,R.1. CLASSICAL LATIN 220,N,1;241.N.1 : 260; 263.2.N.; 269;270,N.; 282.N.; 285,Ex.3 : 301:303; 309.N.2; 318,N.2;830,N.2; 339, N.1 and 4; 342;343.N.1; 346,N.2; 347.R.1; 348.R.2; 356,8.2; 359.N.4; 363.N.; 374, N.1,2,3,4,5,and 9;381.N.1;383,1;385, R.1 and N.1,2,and 3;390,2,N.1,and 2; 391.R.1;393,8.5;394.N.1;398 ;399,N.1: 401.N.2 and 6;403.N.3 and 4;407.N.2;

408.N.6;410.N.1.2.5 and 6; 413,8.3; 416, 9,12,16,23,and 29;417,9 and 11;421.N. 1 and 2;422.N.4;423.N.4;429,1 and 2; 430.N.1; 432.N.1; 437,1; 438.N.; 439.N.3; 442.N.3;444.1.N.2;449.R.3;460,1,N.1, and 2,N.3; 467.N.; 475.N.2: 477.N.8; 479, N.1; 482,4,N.; 494.N.2 ande; 498.N.3 and 4; 500,R.; 501.N.; 502.N.1; 503;511,R.1; . 525,1,N.1;528.R.2,and N.1;632.N.1.3, and 4; 535,R.3; 537.N.2; 538.N.2 and 3; 541,N.1 and 2; 545,R.1; 546,N.3; 549.N.1; 556; 571.N.2; 602,N.1; 610.N.1;631,3.R. 1; 643.N.3: 644,R.3; 651,R.1. POST-CLASSICAL LATIN 211,R.2;239,R.; 241.N.2; 247.N.1; 251.N.2; 254,R.6,and N.2; 257.N.1; 271.2.N.2; 292,N.; 296.N. land 2; 298.N.1; 299.N.2;301; 309, N.2;319.N.1;330.N.4;333,2,N.6;337, N.1 and 2;338.N.2;339,N.1 and 3; 346,N.2; 349,R.5; 355,N.; 356,R.3; 362.N.1 and 2; 366,R.2;374,N.2and 3; 378,R.4;380,1,N.2;390,3,N.1;391,x.; 393,R.5; 397.N.2; 398.N.1: 399,N.2: 403, N.4; 405.N.3; 407.N.2; 408.N.6;410.N.1, 2,3,and 5;411,R.1; 415;416,7,10,12,14, 16,17,18,and 22; 417,7; 418,4; 422.N.2.4, and 5;423,N.2 and 3;431.N.1 and 3; 432.N.1;433; 435.N.1; 436.N.1: 437.N.1; 438,N.; 439,N.2 and 3;479,N.1 and 2; 480,N.1;482,1,N.1 and 2,3,4,N.,and.6, N.1 and 2;494,N.2;498,N.1,3,6,and 8; 503;513,N.2;525,1,N.7,and 2.N.2; 528, R.2; 532,N.1; 541.N.1; 543,N.3; 545,R.1; 546,N.3; 549,N.2; 553,2,N.and 4,R.2; 557,N.2;563,N.4and 5; 573.N.2;576,N. 2; 590,N.1;595,R.6; 602.N.5; 605,N.; 606,N.1;616,2,N.; 625,1.R.and 2,R.; 626, N.1;669;677,N.